Premium Catalogue en - Ed 2012-05 (Web)

Modicon Premium
automation platform
Catalogue
May 2012
All technical information about products listed in
this catalogue are now available on:
www.schneider-electric.com
Browse the product data sheet to check out :
p characteristics,
p dimensions,
p curves, ...
p and also the links to the user guides and
the CAD files.
1 From the home page, type the model number* into the
Search box.
* type the model

number without any
blank, replace p
*
by
2 Under All tab, click the model number that interests you.
3 The product data sheet displays.
Example : Zelio Time

data sheet
Discover this product

p Characteritics
p Functions
p Connection
p Dimensions
p Download &
Documents
Other products
p Help me to choose
Accessories
p Plug
p Sockets

data sheet
80
78
89,5 22,5
82

data sheet
U U
C C
G G
R R
t1 t2 t'1 t'2 t1 t2 t'1 t'2
You can get this information in one single pdf file.

1
10
2
General contents Modicon Premium automation
platform
1 - Modicon Premium processors
2 - Power supplies and racks 1

3 - Discrete, analog, distributed and special I/O
4 - Application-specific modules and solutions

2
5 - Communication
6 - Software
7 - Human/Machine Interfaces 3
8 - Connection interfaces and regulated switch mode
power supplies
9 - Appendices and services

Treatment for severe environments, Conformal Coating modules 4
Power consumption table
Technical appendices
A dedicated services offer for your installed base
Product reference index
5
10
3
1
10
1/0
Contents 1 - Modicon Premium processors
Premium processors - Unity

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2
Premium processors - Unity 1
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/4
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/5
Memory structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/8
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/10
PCMCIA memory extension cards - Unity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/12 2
Premium processors - PL7
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/14
Premium processors - PL7
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 1/16
page 1/17 3
Memory structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/18
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/19
PCMCIA memory extension cards - PL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/20
10
1/1
Selection Guide Modicon Premium automation
platform
Premium processors
Unity
Premium platforms for Unity Pro software offer TSX 57 1p processors
2
g
Number of racks (according to rack type) 4 with 4, 6 or 8 slots or 2 with 12 slots
In-rack I/O (1) Discrete I/O 512 channels (8-, 16-, 32- or 64-channel module)
3 Analog I/O 24 channels (4-, 8- or 16- channel module)
In-rack application- Max. number of channels 8
specific channels Counter Module with 2/4 counter channels 1 MHz max., single-channel electronic cam module
Motion (2) Modules with 1/2 axes for stepper motors, 2/3/4 axes for analog control servo motors, with 8/16
axes with SERCOS digital link
Weighing Modules for 8 load cells (1 application-specific channel)
4 Serial links TSX SCY in-rack communication modules (1 application-specific channel)
Serial link connections Modbus RS 232, RS 485 or current loop (3)(4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and RS 485 in-rack
master/slave communication modules
Uni-Telway 1 integrated RS 485 master/slave channel (5), RS 232, RS 485 or current loop (3)(4) master/
slave PCMCIA modules and RS 485 in-rack master/slave communication modules
Character mode 1 integrated RS 485 channel (5), RS 232, RS 485 or current loop (3)(4) PCMCIA modules and
RS 485 master/slave in-rack communication modules
5 Bus connections Actuator/sensor bus
AS-Interface master V2
2 in rack modules
CANopen machine bus 1 PCMCIA module (3)

master V4.02
INTERBUS field bus master V2 (6) or
Profibus DP field bus master V0
Class1 and 2 (6)
6 Network connections Max. no. of networks

Ethernet
1
In-rack modules: Ethernet Modbus/TCP (Web server, FactoryCast server or FactoryCast HMI
server) and EtherNet/IP
Fipway/Ethway/Modbus Plus Modbus Plus (3), Fipway (3)(4) modules, Ethway in-rack modules
modules
Integrated process Configurable loops
control Programmable loops Process control EFB library
7 Hot Standby availability

Memory capacity Without PCMCIA extension 96 Kb program and data
With PCMCIA extension 224 Kb program

96 Kb data
Data storage 256 Kb (PCMCIA extension in upper slot (0) on processor)
8 USB programming port

Power supply

100240 V a, 24 V c non-isolated and 2448 V c isolated power supply. A power supply is
required for each rack.
Consumption See page 9/6
Standards and certifications See pages 9/8 and 9/18
Premium processor Standard TSX P57 104M
type (12)
9 Integrated Ethernet (9) TSX P57 1634M
Integrated CANopen
Integrated Fipio TSX P57 154M (11)
g
Pages 1/10
(1) The maximum values for the numbers of discrete and analog I/O are cumulative (with the exception of TSX H57 24M/44M Hot Standby processors).
10 (2) 1 axis = 1 application-specific channel, except for SERCOS modules where, depending on the configuration, the module = 232 channels.
(3) Module to be inserted into the lower PCMCIA slot (no. 1) on a Premium processor.
(4) Module to be inserted into the TSX SCY 21 601 in-rack communication module slot.
(5) Non-isolated serial link. For distances > 10 m, use connection accessory TSX P ACC 01, see pages 5/131 and 5/133.
(6) The INTERBUS and Profibus DP limits are not cumulative.
1/2
TSX 57 2p processors TSX 57 3p processors TSX 57 4p processors TSX 57 5p TSX 57 6p
processors processors
2
gg ggg gggg gggg
8 with 4, 6, 8 or 16 with 4, 6 or 8 slots or 8 with 12 slots 8 with 4, 6, 8 or 16 with 4, 6 or 8 slots or 8 with 12 slots
12 slots 12 slots
1024 channels (8-, 16-, 32- or 64-channel module) 2048 channels (8-, 16-, 32- or 64-channel module)
80 channels (4-, 8- or 16- channel module) 128 channels (4-, 8- or 16-channel module) 256 channels (4-, 8- or 16- channel module) 512 channels (4-, 8- or 16- channel module) 3
18 24 32 18 64
Modules with 2/4 counter channels, single-channel electronic cam module Modules with 2/4 counter channels, single-channel electronic cam module
Modules with 1/2 axes for stepper motors, 2/3/4 axes for analog Modules with 1/2 axes for stepper motors, 2/3/4 axes for analog
control servo motors, 8/16 axes with SERCOS digital link control servo motors, 8/16 axes with SERCOS digital link
Modules for 8 load cells (1 application-specific channel) Modules for 8 load cells (1 application-specific channel)
TSX SCY in-rack communication modules (1 application-specific channel) 4
RS 232, RS 485 or current loop (3)(4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and RS 485 in-rack master/slave communication modules
1 integrated RS 485 master/slave channel (5), RS 232, RS 485 or current loop (3)(4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and RS 485 in-rack master/slave
communication modules
1 integrated RS 485 channel (5), RS 232, RS 485 or current loop (3)(4) PCMCIA modules and RS 485 in-rack communication modules
4 in rack modules 8 in rack modules 8 in rack modules 5

1 PCMCIA module (3) 1 PCMCIA module (3)
1 in-rack module 3 in rack modules 4 in rack modules 5 in rack modules
2 2 3 4
In-rack modules: Ethernet Modbus/TCP (Web server, FactoryCast server or FactoryCast HMI server) and EtherNet/IP
6
Modbus Plus (3), Fipway (3)(4) modules, Modbus Plus (3), Fipway (3)(4)(7) modules,
Ethway in-rack modules Ethway in-rack modules
10 channels with 3 loops max. 15 channels with 3 loops max. 20 channels with 3 loops max. 30 channels with 3 loops max.
Process control EFB library
Yes Yes
7
160/192 Kb program and data (8) 192/208 Kb program and data (8) 440 Kb program and data 1 Mb program 2 Mb program
and data and data
768 Kb program 1.75 Mb program 2 Mb program 7 Mb program 7 Mb program
160/192 Kb data (8) 192/208 Kb data (8) 440 Kb data 1 Mb data 2 Mb data
8 Mb (PCMCIA extension in upper or lower slot (0 or 1) on processor
1
100240 V a, 24 V c non-isolated and 2448 V c isolated power supply. A power supply is required for each rack.
8
See page 9/6
See pages 9/8 and 9/18
TSX P57 204M TSX P57 304M
TSX H57 24M
(10)
TSX P57 2634M TSX P57 3634M
ggg
TSX H57 44M
(10)
TSX P57 4634M TSX P57 5634M TSX P57 6634M
9
TSX P57 254M TSX P57 354M TSX P57 454M TSX P57 554M
gg gggg gggg
4/60 1/10 4/60 1/11
(7) TSX P57 4634M/5634M/6634M processors with integrated Ethernet port do not support the PCMCIA Fipway card.
(8) The second value corresponds to TSX P57 254M/354M processors with integrated Fipio link and to the TSX H57 24M Hot Standby processor.
(9) The integrated Ethernet port requires 1 of the available network connections. 10
(10) The integrated Ethernet port is dedicated to Hot Standby communication (CPU Sync link between the Primary and Standby CPUs).
(11) The TSX P57 154M processor does not support the CANopen bus PCMCIA module.
(12) All processors in the Premium Unity range are equipped with 32-bit architecture microprocessors.
1/3
Presentation Modicon Premium automation
platform 0
Unity processors
Presentation
Modicon Premium TSX P57 pp4M, TSX P57 pp34M and TSX Hp4M automation
1 platform processors manage the entire PLC station comprising:
b Discrete I/O modules
b Preventa safety modules
b Analog I/O modules
b Application-specific modules (counter, motion, weighing, communication)
Three new references have been added to the Premium processor offer:
2 b TSX P57 6634M, high-end processor with 1 integrated Ethernet Modbus/TCP port
and an internal 2 Mb RAM
b TSX H57 24M/44M, which support the Hot Standby system (with Primary and
Secondary PLCs), see pages 4/52 to 4/61.
The processors offered have different memory capacities, processing speeds,

number of I/O and number and type of communication ports.
3 Also, depending on the model, the processors offer:
b 1 to 16 racks interconnected by means of Bus X (max. distance: 700 m)
b 192 to 2040 discrete I/O
b 12 to 512 analog I/O
b 4 to 64 application-specific channels. Each application-specific module (counter,
motion control, serial link or weighing) accounts for 1 or more application-specific
channels.
4 b 1 to 4 networks (Ethernet Modbus/TCP, EtherNet/IP, Fipway, Modbus Plus,
Ethway), 1 to 8 AS-Interface buses
b 0 or 1 Fipio bus, 0 or 1 CANopen or Modbus Plus bus and 0 to 5 INTERBUS or
Profibus DP (1) fieldbuses
b 0 to 30 process control channels, with each channel capable of supporting up to
3 loops
5 Depending on the model, Premium processors include:

b A 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet TCP/IP port (RJ45 connector)
b A 1Mbit/s Fipio bus link (bus manager)
b Communication via 2 terminal ports (TER and AUX) using Uni-Telway or character
mode protocol (typically a 19 or 115 Kbit/s programming terminal and an operator
dialogue terminal)
b A USB type TER port (for connecting a programming terminal)
6 Each processor has two PCMCIA card slots:

b An upper slot (no. 0) to take battery-backed memory extension cards (program,
symbols, constants and/or data files)
b A lower slot (no. 1) to take (1) a network card (Fipway, Modbus Plus) or a bus card
(CANopen, Fipio Agent, Modbus, Uni-Telway and serial links).
Memory extension cards intended specifically for storing data can also be inserted
7 into this slot.
Treatment for harsh environments

If the Modicon Quantum automation platform needs to be used in a very harsh
environment, the Conformal Coating offer provides processors and power supply
modules, I/O modules on Bus X and racks with a protective coating applied to their
electronic cards. See page 9/2.
8 Premium application design and installation
The installation of these Premium processors requires:
b Unity Pro Medium, Large or Extra Large programming software. This is the same
as the software used for installing the Modicon M340 and Modicon Quantum
platforms.
b Optionally, as required:
9 v Unity Application Generator (UAG) specialist software for modelling and
generating process applications
v Unity EFB toolkit software for developing EF and EFB libraries in C language
v Unity SFC View software for viewing and diagnostics of applications written in
Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or Grafcet language
(1) TSX H57 24M/44M Hot Standby processors do not support the following buses or networks:
10 Fipio, CANopen, Modbus Plus, INTERBUS and Profi bus DP.
Description: Memory structure: References: PCMCIA references:

pages 1/5 ... pages 1/8 pages 1/10 pages 1/12
1/4
Description Modicon Premium automation
platform 0
Unity processors
8 Processors without integrated Ethernet Modbus/TCP port

1 TSX P57 1p4M single-format processors and TSX P57 2p4M/3p4M double-format
2
3 processors feature the following on the front panel: 1
4
5 1 A display block with 5 LEDs:
v RUN LED (green): Processor in operation (program execution)
6 v ERR LED (red): Fault on the processor or its on-board devices (PCMCIA memory
7 card and PCMCIA communication card)
v I/O LED (red): Faults occurring on another PLC station module or configuration
fault
v TER LED (yellow): Activity on the TER or AUX terminal port
2
v FIP LED (red): Activity on the integrated Fipio bus (depending on model)
2 A RESET button causing a cold start of the PLC when pressed.

1
2 3 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked TER for connecting a programming
3 or adjustment terminal (RS 485) 3
4
4 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting a programming,
5
adjustment or operator dialogue terminal (RS 485)
6
5 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory card.
7
TSX P57 204M/304M TSX P57 254M/354M

6 A PCMCIA slot (no. 1) for a communication card or memory extension card for
storing additional data
4
7 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P57 154M/254M/354M models) for Fipio bus
communication (Fipio manager port)
8 An air recirculating heatsink (on TSX P57 1p4M models)

5
10
Presentation: Memory structure: References: PCMCIA references:

page 1/4 pages 1/8 pages 1/10 pages 1/12
1/5
Description (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 0
Unity processors
Processors with integrated Ethernet Modbus/TCP port

1 3 2 TSX P57 1634M/2634M/3634M double-format processors with integrated Ethernet
1 Modbus/TCP port feature the following on the front panel:
1 A display block with 5 LEDs:

v RUN LED (green): Processor in operation (program execution)
6 v I/O LED (red): Faults occurring on another PLC station module or configuration
2 7 fault
v TER LED (yellow): Activity on the TER or AUX terminal port
8
2 A display block relating to the integrated Ethernet port featuring 5 LEDs:

v RUN LED (green): Ethernet port ready
v ERR LED (red): Ethernet port fault
TSX P57 1634M/2634M/3634M
v COL LED (red): Collision detection
3 v
v
STS LED (yellow): Ethernet link diagnostics
Two TX and RX LEDs (yellow): Transmission/reception activity

4 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked TER for connecting a programming
or adjustment terminal (RS 485)
4 adjustment or operator dialogue terminal (RS 485)
6 An RJ45 connector for connection to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet
Modbus/TCP network
7 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory card
10

1/6
Description (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 0
Unity processors
TSX P57 454M/554M/p634M and TSX H57 p4M high-

performance processors (1)
1 2 1 2
Premium double-format high-performance processors 1
TSX P57 454M/554M/4634M/5634M/6634M and TSX H57 24M/44M (1) feature the
following on the front panel:
3
5 v RUN LED (green): Processor in operation (program execution)
7
8 9
card and PCMCIA communication card) 2
v I/O LED (red): Faults occurring on another PLC station module or configuration fault
v TER LED (yellow): Activity on the AUX terminal port
v FIP LED (red): Activity on integrated Fipio bus (TSX P57 454/554M model).
TSX P57 454M/554M TSX P57 4634M/5634M
TSX P57 6634M In the case of models with an integrated Ethernet port
(TSX P57 4634M/5634M/6634M), this display block features 6 additional LEDs:
v RUN LED (green): Ethernet Modbus/TCP port ready 3
v STS LED (yellow): Ethernet link diagnostics
v Two TX and RX LEDs (yellow): Transmission/reception activity
2 A Memory extract button for extracting the PCMCIA memory extension card.
The associated Memory extract ready LED indicates that this card can be
extracted safely.
4
adjustment or operator dialogue terminal
5 A USB type connector marked TER for connecting a programming terminal
(requires the PC-compatible 3 m connection cable, reference UNY XCA USB 033,
to be ordered separately)
6 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory extension card
5
8 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P57 454M/554M models) for Fipio bus
communication (Fipio manager port)
9 An RJ45 connector (on TSX P57 4634M/5634M/6634M models) for connection to
the Ethernet Modbus/TCP 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX network 6
USB terminal port
The USB port 5 offers a faster useful data rate (12 Mbit/s) than the Uni-Telway
terminal port available on Premium processors. The USB port is compatible with
Unity Pro programming software and the OPC Factory Server (OFS).
7
454M/554M/p634M processors can be connected to a USB bus comprising several
peripheral devices, however:
b Only one processor must be connected to the USB bus
b No device on the USB bus (modem, printer) can be controlled by the PLC.
(1) TSX H57 24M/44M Hot Standby processor, see description on page 4/53. 8
10

1/7
Memory structure Modicon Premium automation
platform 0
Unity processors
Memory structure
The application memory is divided into memory areas, which are physically
1 Located data 1
distributed across the internal RAM and 0, 1 or 2 PCMCIA memory extension cards:
Global unlocated 1 The application data area, which is always found in the internal RAM, is divided
1
data and DFBs into two possible types:
96 to 2048 Kb
Internal RAM v Located data, corresponding to data defined by an address (e.g. %MW237),
Program, symbols and 2
area for program
which can have a symbol linked to it (e.g. Counter_rejects).
2 modification in online
mode
v Unlocated data, corresponding to data defined only by a symbol. This type of
addressing eliminates the problems of memory mapping management, because
addresses are assigned automatically.
Constants 3 v DFB unlocated data corresponding to DFB user function block data. The size of
this area (which is determined by the physical size of the available internal RAM)
Processor without PCMCIA memory card depends on the processor model, see pages 1/10 and 1/11.
2 Area in internal RAM or PCMCIA memory card for the program and symbols.
3 Located data 1 If this area is inside the internal RAM, it also supports the area for program
modification in online mode (1).
This area contains the program's executable binary code and IEC source code.
96 to 2048 Kb
Internal RAM Global unlocated data 1 The user selects the type of information to be stored in the PLC memory.
3 Constants area in the internal RAM or the PCMCIA memory card (slot no. 0)
DFB unlocated data 1
4 4 Area for storing additional data (slot no. 0 or no. 1), e.g. for production data and
manufacturing recipes
Program and symbols 2
Memory organization
128 to 7168 Kb
PCMCIA card
(slot no. 0) The memory will be organized in one of two ways, depending on whether the
Constants 3 Premium processor is fitted with 0, 1 or 2 memory extension cards:
5 Additional data storage 4

b Application in internal RAM: The application is completely loaded into the
processor's internal battery-backed RAM (2), the capacity of which depends on the
processor model (96 Kb to 2 Mb).
Processor with PCMCIA memory card in slot no. 0
b Application in PCMCIA card: In this case, the internal RAM is reserved for
application data. The PCMCIA memory card (slot no. 0) contains the program space
(program, symbols and constants areas) (128 Kb to 2 Mb). Certain types of PCMCIA
Located data memory card also host the data storage area (max. 6976 Kb).
1
6
96 to 2048 Kb
Unlocated data 1 Symbols areas

Internal RAM Program, symbols and Having the symbols area in the same place as the program area is optional.
area for program 2 However, if the application symbols database is available on the PLC, it means that,
modification in online mode when an empty programming terminal is connected to the PLC, all the elements
needed to debug or upgrade this PLC can be transferred to the terminal.
Constants 3
7 (1) If a PCMCIA card has been inserted, it is the memory on this memory card that will be used
Data storage for modification of the program in online mode (outside areas 2, 3 and 4 opposite).
4096 or 8192 KB
Additional data storage

PCMCIA card (2) The internal RAM is backed up by an optional battery (with a life of 3 years), which is located
(slot no. 0) in the power supply module (see page 2/2).
4
8
Processor with data storage memory card in slot no. 0
10
Presentation: Description: References: PCMCIA references:

1/8
Memory structure (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 0
Unity processors
Memory structure (continued)

Extension of the data storage area
96 to 2048 Kb Located data 1 Memory cards reserved for data storage (4096 or 8192 Kb) are used to:
b Access the data storage area when the application is fully loaded into the internal
1
Internal RAM Global unlocated data
and DFBs 1 RAM. In this case, the data storage memory card is inserted into PCMCIA slot no. 0.
b Free up memory to serve as additional program space when the application is on
the PCMCIA card (slot no. 0). In this case, the data storage memory card is inserted
Program and
into PCMCIA slot no. 1 (although the memory card in slot no. 0 can still be used for
2 some of the data).
2
symbols
128 to 7168 KB
PCMCIA card Unity Pro programming software helps the application designer to manage the
(slot no. 0) Constants 3 structure and organize how the memory space on the Premium PLC is occupied.
Additional data
storage (area A) 4 Protecting the application
Regardless of the PLC memory structure (whether the application is located in the
internal RAM or on the PCMCIA card), it is possible to prevent the application from 3
being accessed (for reading or modifying the program) by only loading the
Additional data executable code into the PLC.
storage (area B)
4096 or 8192 KB
Data storage A memory protection bit, set in configuration mode, is also available to prevent any
PCMCIA card 4 program modification (via the programming terminal or downloads).
(slot no. 1)
Program modification in online mode 4

This function is different from previous versions of Premium PLCs (with PL7
software) in that it now allows program code and data from different parts of the
Processor with mixed type memory card in slot no. 0 and data application to be added or modified in a single modification session (thus making
storage type memory card in slot no. 1 (1) modification unified and consistent with regard to the controlled process).
This increased flexibility comes at a cost in terms of the amount of program memory
required. In order for the program to be modified in online mode, the amount of 5
program memory space available must be at least equal to the combined size of all
sections of the Unity Pro program affected by the single modification session
concerned.
Depending on circumstances:
b In the case of a processor with a memory extension card, there will be sufficient
memory left on the card for online modification, provided that the recommendations 6
on page 1/12 are observed.
b In the case of a processor without a memory extension card, if the user wants to
be able to make modifications in online mode, he or she must select a processor on
the basis of the following:
v The anticipated size of the application
v The number and size of the program sections to be modified in online mode
7
Note: A memory extension card based exclusively on Flash EPROM technology (without
additional SRAM) is clearly incapable of supporting program modifications in online mode.
(1) As from TSX P57 20 processors.

8
10
Presentation: Description: References: PCMCIA references:

1/9
References Modicon Premium automation
platform
Unity processors
TSX 57 processors
I/O capacity (1) Capacity Maximum number Integrated Reference Weight
1 Memory Control
channels
of bus/network
modules
port kg
TSX 57 1p 4 racks (2)

512 discrete I/O 96 Kb 0 1 network TSX P57 104M 0.570
24 analog I/O integrated 2 AS-Interface buses
8 application-specific 224 Kb max. on 1 CANopen bus
channels PCMCIA card
2 TSX P57 154M

2 AS-Interface buses Ethernet
1 CANopen bus Modbus/TCP
TSX P57 1634M 0.740
1 Ethernet network Fipio TSX P57 154M 0.592

2 AS-Interface buses

1024 discrete I/O 160 Kb 10 1 network Ethernet TSX P57 2634M 0.734
80 analog I/O integrated 4 AS-Interface buses Modbus/TCP
3 24 application-specific
channels
768 Kb max. on
PCMCIA card
1 CANopen bus (3)
1 fieldbus (3)
192 Kb 10 2 Ethernet networks Ethernet TSX H57 24M 1.021

integrated dedicated to
768 Kb max. on Hot Standby
PCMCIA card
2 Ethernet networks Fipio TSX P57 254M 0.628
4 1 CANopen bus (3)
1 fieldbus (3)

1024 discrete I/O 192 Kb 15 3 networks TSX P57 304M 0.618
TSX P57 254M/354M 128 analog I/O integrated 8 AS-Interface buses
32 application-specific 1792 Kb max. on 1 CANopen bus (3)
channels PCMCIA card 3 fieldbuses (3)
5 2 networks
Ethernet
Modbus/TCP
TSX P57 3634M 0.744
1 CANopen bus (3)

3 fieldbuses (3)
208 Kb 15 3 networks Fipio TSX P57 354M 0.634
integrated 8 AS-Interface buses
1792 Kb max. on 1 CANopen bus (3)
PCMCIA card 3 terrain fieldbuses (3)
6 TSX 57 4p 16 racks (2)
2040 discrete I/O 440 Kb 20 3 networks Ethernet TSX P57 4634M 1.033
256 analog I/O integrated 8 AS-Interface buses Modbus/TCP
64 application-specific 2048 Kb max. on 1 CANopen bus (3)
channels PCMCIA card 4 fieldbuses (3)
4 Ethernet Ethernet TSX H57 44M 1.021
networks dedicated to
7 TSX P57 1634M/2634M/3634M Hot Standby
4 networks Fipio TSX P57 454M 1.008
1 CANopen bus
4 fieldbuses (3)
8 2040 discrete I/O

512 analog I/O
64 application-specific
1 Kb integrated 30
7168 Kb max. on
PCMCIA card
3 networks
1 CANopen bus
Ethernet
Modbus/TCP
TSX P57 5634M 1.033
channels 5 fieldbuses (3)

4 networks Fipio TSX P57 554M 1.012
1 CANopen bus
5 fieldbuses (3)
9 TSX 57 6p 16 racks (2)

2040 discrete I/O 2 Kb integrated 30 3 networks Ethernet TSX P57 6634M 1.019
512 analog I/O 7168 Kb max. on 8 AS-Interface buses Modbus/TCP
64 application-specific PCMCIA card 1 CANopen bus
TSX P57 4634M/5634M/6634M channels 5 fieldbuses (3)
TSX H57 24M/44M
(1) Cumulative maximum values. The number of remote I/O on the various buses is not taken into account.
10
(2) Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX (racks (4, 6 or 8 slots). Using the TSX RKY 12 EX rack (12 slots) is the same
as using 2 racks with 4, 6 or 8 slots.
(3) Fieldbus: INTERBUS or Profibus DP.
Presentation: Description: Memory structure: PCMCIA references:

1/10
References (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 0
Unity processors
PCMCIA memory extension cards

Premium processors can support up to 2 memory extension cards. However, usable memory capacity is limited to the
maximum size defined for the processor model.
See pages 2/2 and 1/13.
1
Accessories for connection to the PC programming terminal
Description Use Reference Weight
kg
2
Universal Bluetooth Provides Bluetooth connectivity for products such as the TCS WAAC 13FB 0.320
interface (UBI) Modicon M340/Premium platforms and Altivar/Lexium servo
for terminal port (TER) drives, via their serial port (RS 485).
Used for setting-up and maintenance of products.
Designed for permanent installation and can be safely fitted on
the inside or outside of electrical enclosures.
b Protocols supported: Modbus and Uni-Telway.

b Powered via the products RS 485 serial port
b Max. range in direct line of sight: 20 m
3
The kit comprises:
b 1: a universal Bluetooth interface(UBI)
1 b 2: a fixing clamp for installation inside the electrical enclosure
b 3: an RJ45/mini-DIN cable (length 1 m)
2 b an RJ45/RJ45 cable (length 1 m)
b a CD with configuration software and user manual.
4
3
Cables for connection to the PC programming terminal 5

Description Use Length Reference Weight
from terminal port to PC kg
Universal cable for Mini-DIN (TER or AUX) on: RS 232D port 2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 0.170
terminal port/RS 232 port TSX Micro (9-way SUB-D)
Premium TSX P57 1p
Premium TSX P57 2p/3p
Tap junction TSX P ACC 01
6
TSX PCX 1031 Cable for terminal Mini-DIN (TER or AUX) on: USB port 0.4 m TSX CUSB 485 0.144
port/USB port TSX Micro (USB/RS 485 (1)
Premium TSX P57 1p/ 2p/3p converter)
Tap junction TSX P ACC 01
USB port 2.5 m TSX CRJMD 25 0.150
(mini-DIN/RJ45 (1)
USB (TER) on:

cable)
USB port on a PC 3.3 m UNY XCA USB 033
7
Premium TSX 57 4p/5p terminal
Quantum 140 CPU 6p1
TSX CUSB 485
(1) The TSX CUSB 485 converter requires the use of cable TSX CRJMD 25 (length 2.5 m, equipped with 1 mini-DIN connector
8
and 1 RJ45 connector).
10
Presentation: Description: Memory structure: PCMCIA references:

1/11
platform
Unity
Presentation
PCMCIA memory extension cards are used to extend the internal RAM capacity of
1 Premium processors.
Some of the cards can also be used on Modicon Micro and Modicon Quantum
processors. Depending on the model, these cards are designed to hold:
b The application program, symbols and constants
b Additional application data
b Or both
2 PCMCIA memory extension cards

All the cards are inserted into PCMCIA slot no. 0, which is the upper slot on Premium
processors.
Two of these SRAM data storage memory cards can also be inserted into slot no. 1,
which is the lower slot on Premium processors.
3 These cards support three types of storage:

PCMCIA SRAM memory cards b Application storage: program, symbols and constants in a common area of
(128 Kb to 7168 Kb, depending on the card model):
v TSX MRP PpppK for SRAM memories
v TSX MFP PpppK/M for Flash EPROM memories
b Storage of the application and additional data, comprising an application area
4 configurable from 192 Kb to 7 Mb and an additional data storage area which

therefore varies from 7 Mb to 0 Kb. The configurable cards are:
v TSX MRP CpppK/M for SRAM memories
v TSX MCP CpppK/M for Flash EPROM and SRAM memories
b Storage of additional data, provided by SRAM TSX MRP F00pM 4 or 8 Mb
memory cards.
5 PCMCIA Flash EPROM memory cards These cards use two technologies:
b Battery-backed SRAM
Used in particular in the application program design and debugging phases. These
cards allow:
v all of the application's transfer and modification services in online mode
v Additional data storage
The memory is protected by a removable battery built into the PCMCIA card. A
second, auxiliary battery, provides backup so that the main battery can be replaced
6 without data being lost.
b Flash EPROM.
Used when debugging of the application program is complete. It enables:
v Backup battery life restrictions to be overcome
v A global application transfer to be performed
If it is used, the application cannot be modified in online mode.
7 Program modification in online mode
Only extension cards on which the program is stored in SRAM memory (TSX MRP
PpppK/M and TSX MRP CpppK/M) support online program modification
Users of processors fitted with memory extension cards who wish to modify or add
8 program data in online mode must follow the two recommendations below:
b Structure the application program in in several, reasonably-sized sections
b Where possible, select one of the two extension cards recommended in the table
below:
Premium processors TSX P57 1p TSX P57 2p TSX P57 3p TSX P57 4p TSX P57 5p TSX P57 6p
Cards recommended for program modification in TSX MRP P224K/ All TSX MRP CpppK/M/7 TSX MRP C002M,
9 online mode P384K,
All TSX MRP
TSX MRP C003M,
TSX MRP C007M
CpppK/M/7
10
1/12
platform 0

Unity
Reminder of processor memory capacities

Memory capacities without PCMCIA extension card (data, program, symbols, and constants in internal RAM memory)
Premium processors TSX P57 104M/154M/ TSX 57 204M/2634M TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 354M
1634M 254M 304M/
TSX P57
454M/
TSX P57
554M/
TSX P57
6634M 1
3634M 4634M 5634M
In internal RAM 96 Kb 160 Kb 192 Kb 208 Kb 440 Kb 1024 KB 2048 Kb
Memory capacities with PCMCIA extension card(s) (data in internal RAM memory; program, symbols, constants, and data storage on PCMCIA card)
Premium processors TSX P57 104M/154M/ TSX 57 204M/2634M TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 354M TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57
1634M 254M 304M/ 454M/ 554M/ 6634M
3634M 4634M 5634M
Data in internal RAM 96 Kb
PCMCIA extension (progr., 128 Kb 224 Kb
160 Kb
768 Kb
192 Kb
768 Kb 1792 Kb
208 Kb
1792 Kb
440 Kb
2048 Kb
1024 KB
7168 Kb
2048 Kb
7168 Kb
2
symbols and constants)
Data storage 256 Kb 16384 Kb, limited to 8192 Kb if the TSX MRP F008M PCMCIA card is used
on PCMCIA (1)

Premium processors support the memory extension cards listed below. There are two types of memory limit: The lower of these two
limits defines the memory capacity that is available to the user for the application.
b One associated with the type of processor (see above)
3
b One associated with the model of PCMCIA memory card selected
Use on processor Slot Memory size Reference Weight
Application Additional data Kg
SRAM application memory extensions
TSX P57 1p57 4p No. 0 128 Kb TSX MRP P128K 0.076
224 Kb
384 Kb

TSX MRP P224K
TSX MRP P384K
0.076
0.076
4
Configurable SRAM application/additional data memory extensions
TSX P57 1p57 4p No. 0 96448 Kb 3520 Kb TSX MRP C448K 0.076
TSX P57 1p57 6p No. 0 192 768 Kb 576 0 Kb TSX MRP C768K 0.076
192 1024 Kb 832 0 Kb TSX MRP C001M 0.076
5
192 1792 Kb 1600 0 Kb TSX MRP C01M7 0.076
192 2048 Kb 1856 0 Kb TSX MRP C002M 0.076
192 3072 Kb 2880 0 Kb TSX MRP C003M 0.076
192 7168 Kb 6976 0 Kb TSX MRP C007M 0.076
Flash EPROM application memory extensions
TSX P57 1p57 4p No. 0 128 Kb TSX MFP P128K 0.044
224 Kb TSX MFP P224K 0.044
TSX P57 1p57 6p No. 0

384 Kb
512 Kb

TSX MFP P384K
TSX MFP P512K
0.044
0.044 6
1024 Kb TSX MFP P001M 0.044
TSX P57 2p57 6p No. 0 2048 Kb TSX MFP P002M 0.044
4096 Kb TSX MFP P004M 0.044
Flash EPROM and SRAM application/additional data memory extensions
TSX P57 1p57 6p No. 0 512 Kb 512 Kb TSX MCP C512K 0.076
SRAM additional data memory extensions

2048 Kb 1024 Kb TSX MCP C002M 0.076
7
TSX P57 2p57 6p No. 0 or 1 4096 Kb TSX MRP F004M 0.076
(2) 8192 Kb TSX MRP F008M 0.076
Flash EPROM backup card (3)
TSX P57 1p No. 0 96 Kb TSX MFP B096K 0.044
Handle for extracting memory cards
Description Use Processor slot Reference Weight
kg
8
Handles Extraction of PCMCIA memory No. 0 (slot upper) TSX P CAPUP 0.012
(not provided with the memory card) card from processors No. 1 (slot lower) TSX P CAPL 0.012
TSX P57 4p... 57 6p
Replacement parts
Description Use Type Reference Weight
Backup batteries SRAM PCMCIA memory card Main battery TSX BAT M02 (4)
kg
0.010
9
Auxiliary battery TSX BAT M03 0.005
(1) Intended for the storage of manufacturing recipes and production data. Capacity depending on PCMCIA card model.
(2) Memory extension card for data file storage to be inserted into slot no. 0 if free, otherwise into slot no. 1. In the latter case, an
application memory type card or an application and data file storage type card is inserted into slot no. 0
(3) This card is pre-loaded and can be used to update the application program on a Premium PLC without having to use a programming
terminal (the entire program must be located in the internal RAM).
(4) TSX BAT M02 with PCMCIA card PV u 04 (blue); for PCMCIA card PV < 04, please order reference TSX BAT M01. 10
1/13
Selection Guide Modicon Premium automation
platform
Premium processors
PL7
Premium platforms for PL7 software offer TSX 57 1p processors TSX 57 2p processors
g gg
Number of racks (according to rack type) 4 with 4, 6, 8 slots or 2 with 12 slots 16 with 4, 6, 8 slots or 8 with 12 slots
3
In-rack I/O (1) Discrete I/O 512 channels (8-, 16-, 32- or 64-channel module) 1024 channels (8-, 16-, 32- or 64-channel module)
Analog I/O 24 channels (4-, 8- or 16-channel module) 80 channels (4-, 8- or 16-channel module)
Integrated process control Configurable loops (10 channels with 3 loops
max.)
In-rack application- Max. no. of channels 8 24
4 specific channels Counter

Motion (2)
Modules with 2/4 counter channels 1 MHz max., single-channel electronic cam module
Modules with 1/2 axes for stepper motors, 2/3/4 axes for analog control servo motors, 8/16 axes
with SERCOS digital link
Weighing Module for 8 load cells (2 application-specific channels)
Serial links In-rack communication modules (1 application-specific channel)
Serial link connections Modbus RS 232, RS 485 or current loop (3) (4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and RS 485 master/ slave
in-rack communication modules
5 Uni-Telway 1 integrated RS 485 master/slave channel (5), RS 232, RS 485 or current loop (3) (4) master/slave
PCMCIA modules and RS 485 master/slave in-rack communication modules
Character mode 1 integrated RS 485 channel (5), RS 232, RS 485 or current loop (3) (4) PCMCIA modules and
RS 485 in-rack communication modules
Bus connections Actuator/sensor bus 2 in rack modules 4 in rack modules
AS-Interface master V2
CANopen machine bus 1 PCMCIA module (3)
6 master V4.02 (6)

NTERBUS field bus master V2 (6) 1 in-rack module
or Profibus DP master V0
Class 1 and 2 (6)
Network connections Max. no. of networks 1 1
Ethernet Modbus/TCP Multiprotocol in-rack modules (Modbus, Uni-TE, Global Data, I/O Scanning, TCP Open), Web
server, FactoryCast service and Factory Cast HMI services
7 Communication modules Fipway (3) (4) and Modbus Plus (3) PCMCIA modules, in-rack Ethway modules
Memory capacity Without PCMCIA extension 32 Kwords program and data 48/64 Kwords program and data (7)
With PCMCIA extension 32 Kwords data 48/64 Kwords data (7)
64 Kwords program 160 Kwords program
Data storage 128 Kwords 640 K words + 2048 K words
Symbol storage 128 Kwords
8 Power supply 100240 V a, 24 V c non-isolated and 2448 V c isolated power supply modules. A power
supply is required for each rack.
Standards and certifications See pages 9/8 and 9/18
Premium processor Standard TSX P57 103M TSX P57 203M Q g
9 type (8) Integrated Ethernet

Integrated Fipio TSX P57 153M (9)
TSX P57 2623M Q (10)
TSX P57 253M Q
gg
Integrated Ethernet and Fipio TSX P57 2823M (10)

Pages 1/19
(1) The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O and process control channels are cumulative.
(2) 1 axis = 1 application-specific channel, except for SERCOS modules where, depending on the configuration, the module = 232 channels.
(3) Module to be inserted into the lower PCMCIA slot (no. 1) on the Premium processor.
10 (4) Module to be inserted into the PCMCIA slot on the TSX SCY 21 601 in-rack communication module.
(5) Non-isolated serial link. For distances > 10 m, use connection accessory TSX P ACC 01, see pages 5/131 and 5/133.
(6) Reduce the number of modules permitted (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) by 1 when CANopen is used.
(7) The second value corresponds to the processor with integrated Fipio bus manager link.
1/14
TSX 57 3p processors TSX 57 4p processors
gg ggg
16 with 4, 6, 8 slots or 8 with 12 slots
3
1024 channels (8-, 16-, 32- or 64-channel module)
128 channels (4-, 8- or 16-channel module)
Configurable loops (15 channels with 3 loops max.)
32 64
Modules with 2/4 counter channels 1 MHz max., single-channel electronic cam module
Modules with 1/2 axes for stepper motors, 2/3/4 axes for analog control servo motors, 8/16 axes with SERCOS digital link
4
Module for 8 load cells (2 application-specific channels)
In-rack communication modules (1 application-specific channel)
RS 232, RS 485 or current loop (3) (4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and RS 485 master/ slave in-rack communication modules
1 integrated RS 485 master/slave channel (5), RS 232, RS 485 or current loop (3) (4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and RS 485 master/slave in-rack
5
1 integrated RS 485 channel (5), RS 232, RS 485 or current loop (3)(4) PCMCIA modules and RS 485 in-rack communication modules
8 in rack modules
1 PCMCIA module (3)
2 in rack modules 6
3 4
Multiprotocol in-rack modules (Modbus, Uni-TE, Global Data, I/O Scanning, TCP Open), Web server, FactoryCast service and Factory Cast HMI services
Fipway (3) (4) and Modbus Plus (3) PCMCIA modules, in-rack Ethway modules 7
64/80 Kwords program and data (8) 96 Kwords program and data
80/96 Kwords data (8) 176 Kwords data
384 Kwords program 512 Kwords program (992 Kwords with PL7 V4.4 or higher)
640 K words + 2048 K words 2048 K words (640 K words + 2048 K words with PL7 V4.4 or higher)
128 Kwords 256 Kwords (384 Kwords with PL7 V4.4 or higher)
100240 V a, 24 V c non-isolated and 2448 V c isolated power supply modules. A power supply is required for each rack. 8
See page 9/6
See pages 9/8 and 9/18
TSX P57 303AM Q
TSX P57 353LAM (11)

TSX P57 3623AM Q (10)
TSX P57 353AM Q
gg
ggg TSX P57 453AM
9
TSX P57 4823AM (10)
1/19
(8) Premium PL7 range processors are equipped with 32-bit architecture microprocessors, except for TSX P57 1p3 processors which have 16-bit architecture
processors.
(9) The TSX P57 153M processor does not support the CANopen bus PCMCIA module.
(10) The integrated Ethernet port requires 1 of the available network connections.
(11) Processor reserved for updating configurations with TSX P57 352M PL7 (old version) processors. 10
Q Processor can be migrated from PL7 to Unity Pro by means of a simple update of the processor's operating system (included on the Unity Pro software CD-ROM).
1/15
platform
PL7 processors
Presentation
Premium TSX P57 pp3M/3AM and TSX P57 pp23M/23AM automation platform
1 processors manage the entire PLC station comprising discrete I/O modules,
Preventa safety modules, analog I/O modules, and application-specific modules,
which can be distributed over one or more racks connected via Bus X or a fieldbus
TSX P57 processors

The types of processor available are divided into different capacities according to
memory, in-rack I/O, communication, and processing speed. Depending on the model:
2 b 4 to 16 racks
b 512 to 2040 discrete I/O
b 24 to 256 analog I/O
b 8 to 64 application-specific channels. Each application-specific module (counter,
motion control, serial link or weighing) accounts for 1 or more application-specific
channels.
b 1 to 4 networks (Ethernet Modbus/TCP, Fipway, Ethway, Modbus Plus), 2 to
3 8 AS-Interface sensor/actuator buses, 1 to 2 fieldbuses (CANopen, INTERBUS,
Profibus DP), 0 or 1 Fipio fieldbus, serial links (Modbus, Uni-Telway)
b 10 to 20 process control channels
Integrated communication
Depending on the model, Premium processors include:
b A 10 or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet Modbus/TCP port (RJ45 connection)
4 b A 1 Mbit/s Fipio bus link (bus manager)
b Communication via 2 terminal ports (TER and AUX) using Uni-Telway or character
mode protocol (typically a 19 or 115 Kbit/s programming terminal and an operator
dialogue terminal)
Each processor has a slot for a type III PCMCIA card, which can accommodate a
network card (Fipway, Modbus Plus), bus (CANopen (1), Fipio Agent) or serial links
(Modbus, Uni-Telway, character mode).
5 Application design and installation
Different software licences are available for PL7 Junior/Pro version V4.5 depending
on requirements:
b Single-station
b Multistation in the form of independent local stations (Junior/Pro), remote stations
6 connected to a server via a network (Pro OpenTeam for 3 to 10 stations or

Pro OpenSite for more than 10 stations).
These licences are compatible with PC terminals running Windows 2000 Professional
or Windows XP operating systems.
Configurations with old generation processors

The TSX P57 353LAM processor can be used as a replacement for old version
7 TSX P57 pp0M/pp1M/pp2M single-format processors and for T PCX 57 203M/353M

Atrium slot PLCs. Replacement of these processors or slot-PLCs requires
reconfiguration of the PLC with the TSX P57 353LAM, but no modification of the
application program is required. It may be necessary to update the PL7 Pro software
(TLX RCD PL7P P45M).
Migration of Premium processors
8 Some Premium TSX P57 pp3M/3AM processors that are compatible with
PL7 software can be migrated for compatibility with Unity Pro software without any
need for hardware modifications. This migration from PL7 to Unity Pro is achieved by
means of the following software updates:
b Processor operating system
b Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port operating system
This update is carried out using the OS-Loader tool, included in the Unity Pro
9 software (see page 6/13). Once migrated, PL7 processors are equivalent to
corresponding Unity processors.
The following PL7 processors can be migrated to Unity Pro (software migration):
b TSX 57 2p: TSX P57 203M/253M/2623M become TSX P57 204M/254M/2634M
respectively.
b TSX 57 3p: TSX P57 303M/353M/3623AM become TSX P7 304M/354M/3634M
respectively (migration supported by Unity Pro version u 3.0).
10 Note: Processor migration requires use of the new PCMCIA memory references TSX MRP P/C
and TSX MFP P/C. See the equivalence table on page 1/20.
(1) Except with processor TSX P57 153M.
1/16
Presentation (continued), Modicon Premium automation
description platform
PL7 processors
Presentation (continued)
Migration of Premium processors (continued)
Migration offers involving the replacement of the processor are available for other 1
product references. Please contact your Customer Care Centre for more information
about these offers, which are only available for a limited period of time. They concern
the following PL7 processors:
b TSX P57 2823M for migration to TSX P57 254M with TSX ETY 4103 (1).
b TSX P57 453AM for migration to TSX P57 454M
b TSX P57 4823AM for migration to TSX P57 4634M 2
b TSX P57 4823AM for migration to TSX P57 454M with TSX ETY 4103 (1).
b TSX P57 4823AM for migration to TSX P57 554M with TSX ETY 4103 (1).
Description
3
1 Processors without integrated Ethernet port
2
3 Single-format TSX P57 1p3M/353LAM processors and double-format
4 TSX P57 2p3M/3p3AM/453AM processors feature the following on the front panel:
v RUN LED (green): processor in operation (program running)
v I/O LED (red): Faults occurring on another station module or configuration fault
v TER LED (yellow): Activity on the terminal port
4
TSX P57 353LAM
TSX P57 1p3M v FIP LED (red): Activity on the integrated Fipio bus
3 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked TER for connecting a programming
1 or adjustment terminal.
2 4 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting a peripheral
3
4
device
5
5 6 A PCMCIA slot (no. 1) for a communication card or 4 Mb SRAM memory
extension card for storing additional data
6
7 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P57 153M/253M, TSX P57 353 LAM and
7 TSX P57 353M/453AM models) for Fipio bus manager communication
TSX P57 2p3M/3p3AM/453AM

Processors with integrated Ethernet port
Double-format TSX P57 2623M/2823M and TSX P57 3623AM/4823AM processors
6
with integrated Ethernet port feature the following on the front panel:
1 2 1 2 1 A display block with 5 LEDs:
v RUN LED (green): processor in operation (program running)
v ERR LED (red): Fault on the processor or its on-board devices (PCMCIA memory
card and PCMCIA communication card)
3
4
v I/O LED (red): Faults occurring on another station module or configuration fault
v TER LED (yellow): Activity on the terminal port
7
5 v FIP LED (red): Activity on the integrated Fipio bus
6 2 A display block relating to the integrated Ethernet port featuring 5 LEDs:
7 v RUN LED (green): Ethernet port ready
8
9
v STS LED (yellow): Ethernet link diagnostics
v Two TX and RX LEDs (yellow): Transmission/reception activity
8
TSX P57 2623M TSX P57 2823M 4 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked TER for connecting a programming
TSX P57 3623AM TSX P57 4823AM or adjustment terminal.
5 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting a peripheral
device
6 An RJ45 connector for connection to the Ethernet network
9
8 A PCMCIA slot (no. 1) for a communication card or 4 Mb SRAM memory
9 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P57 2823M/4823AM models) for Fipio bus
manager communication
10
(1) The TSX ETY 4103 Ethernet Modbus/TCP module offered features the same functions as the integrated Ethernet port on TSX P57 2823M/ 4823AM processors.
However, the combined processor and Ethernet module use one slot more than the PL7 processor to be migrated. Therefore, this type of migration requires a
free slot in the Premium rack and modification of the converted Unity Pro application.
1/17
Functions, Modicon Premium automation
references platform
PL7 processors
Memory structure
The application memory is divided into memory areas, which are physically
1
Data 1
32 to 96 Kwords
distributed across the internal RAM memory and the PCMCIA memory extension
Internal RAM
card(s):
b The application data area is always in the internal RAM.
Program 2 b The application program area is in the internal RAM or the PCMCIA memory card
b The constants area is in the internal RAM or the PCMCIA memory card.
There are two ways of organizing the application memory for
Constants 3 TSX P57 1p3M/2p3M/2p23M and TSX P57 3p3M/3623M/453M/4823AM
2 1 Application data (30.5 Kwords max.)
processors with or without a memory extension installed in the form of a PCMCIA
format card.
2 Task descriptor and executable code
3 Constant words, initial values and configuration
Application in internal RAM
Processors without PCMCIA card
The application is completely loaded into the processor's battery-backed internal RAM (1),
the capacity of which depends on the processor model (32 to 96 Kwords).
For example, the TSX P57 1p3M processor has 7.5 Kwords of application data and
3 24.5 Kwords of program, constants and system data (2).
The memory space (32 Kwords) is shared between the application data, the
program, the constants and the system data (2).
32 to 176 Kwords
30.5 Kwords
Data 1
Internal RAM Application in the PCMCIA card (slot no. 0)
The internal RAM is then reserved for the application data.
The PCMCIA card contains the program and constants (64 to 512 Kwords).
4 The file storage area of 128 K or 640 Kwords (depending on the model of PCMCIA
card) can be used in remote applications, for storing information such as production
64 to 512 Kwords
Program 2 data, production recipes, etc.

PCMCIA card The symbols storage area of 128 K or 256 Kwords (depending on the model of
(slot no. 0) PCMCIA card) enables the application symbols database to be stored on the PLC.
32 Kwords
Constants 3 Extension of the additional data storage area (slot no. 1)

5 This area, containing 128 or 640 Kwords, can be extended up to 2688 Kwords by using
an SRAM TSX MRP DS 2048P / MFP 004M PCMCIA memory card. This card is inserted
Additional data into the lower slot on TSX P57 2p3M/2p23M, TSX P57 3p3M/3623M/453M/4823AM
128/640
Kwords
storage 4 processors and can be used in conjunction with memory extension cards (type 1 in the
upper slot).
Symbol storage
128/256
Kwords
4 Data in internal RAM

6 The data area can be extended to up to 30.5 Kwords. It is only supported by the
PLC's internal RAM.
1 Application data (30.5 Kwords max.)
2 Task descriptor and executable code
PL7 Junior/Pro software helps the application designer to manage the structure and
3 Constant words, initial values and configuration organize how the memory space on the Premium PLC is occupied.
4 Depending on the PCMCIA card model.
Processor with PCMCIA card Protecting the application
Regardless of the PLC memory structure (whether the application is located in the
7 internal RAM or on the PCMCIA card), it is possible to protect the application so that
it cannot be accessed (for the purpose of reading or modifying the program) in online
mode under PL7 Junior/Pro.
A memory protection bit, set in configuration mode, is also available to prevent any
program modification (via the programming terminal or downloading).
Premium processor references

8 TSX 57 10/20/30/40 processors are equipped with:
b A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) that can accommodate a memory extension or SRAM
memory card for storing additional data
b A PCMCIA slot (no. 1) that can accommodate a communication or memory
b Two terminal ports (8-way female mini-DIN type), Uni-Telway or character mode.
9 TSX 57 processors are double-format modules (except TSX P57 1p3M and
TSX P57 353LAM processors, which are single-format).
TSX 57 30/40 processors support the loading of programs, via the terminal port, at a
maximum speed of 115 Kbit/s (limited to 19.2 Kbit/s for TSX 57 10/20 processors).
The integrated Fipio link (bus manager) on TSX 57 20/30/40 processors supports a
maximum of 127 connection points. The link on the TSX P57 153M processor is
limited to 63 connection points.
10 (1) The internal RAM is protected by an optional battery with a life of 3 years, which is located in
the power supply module.
(2) The system has a minimum reserve RAM memory area of around 5 Kwords. Please refer to
the PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro reference manual.
1/18
platform
PL7 processors
TSX 57 processors
I/O capacity (1) Capacity Maximum number Integrated Reference Weight
Memory Control
channels
of bus/network
modules
Ethernet
Modbus/TCP
kg
1
TSX 57 10 4 racks (2)
512 discrete I/O 32 Kwords 0 1 network TSX P57 103M 0.380
8 application-specific 64 Kwords max. 1 CANopen bus
channels on PCMCIA 1 integrated Fipio TSX P57 153M 0.420

1 network
2 AS-Interface buses 2
TSX 57 20 16 racks (2)
1024 discrete I/O 48 Kwords 10 1 network TSX P57 203M 0.520
24 application-specific 160 Kwords 1 CANopen bus (3)
channels max. on 1 fieldbus (3)
PCMCIA
3
4 AS-Interface buses 1 Ethernet TSX P57 2623M
1 CANopen bus (3)
1 fieldbus (3)
64 Kwords 10 1 integrated Fipio TSX P57 253M 0.560
integrated 1 network
160 Kwords 4 AS-Interface buses
max. on 1 CANopen bus (3)
PCMCIA 1 fieldbus (3)
4
TSX P57 203M TSX P57 1 integrated Fipio 1 Ethernet TSX P57 2823M
353LAM 4 AS-Interface buses
1 CANopen bus (3)
1 fieldbus (3)
TSX 57 30 16 racks (2)
1024 discrete I/O 64 Kwords 15 3 networks TSX P57 303AM 0.520
128 analog I/O integrated (4) 8 AS-Interface buses
32 application-specific 384 Kwords 1 CANopen bus (3)
channels max. on
PCMCIA
2 fieldbuses (3)
2 networks 1 Ethernet TSX P57 3623AM
5
1 CANopen bus (3)
2 fieldbuses (3)
80/96 Kwords 15 1 integrated Fipio TSX P57 353LAM 0.420
TSX P57 253M integrated (4) 3 networks (5)
TSX P57 353AM 384 Kwords 8 AS-Interface buses
TSX P57 453AM max. on
PCMCIA
1 CANopen bus (3)
2 fieldbuses (3)
TSX P57 353AM
(5)
0.560
6
TSX 57 40 16 racks (2)
2040 discrete I/O 96/176 Kwords 20 1 integrated Fipio TSX P57 453AM 0.560
256 analog I/O integrated (4) 4 networks (7)
64 application-specific 512/99 Kwords 8 AS-Interface buses
channels (6) max. on 1 CANopen bus (3) 1 Ethernet TSX P57 4823AM
PCMCIA 2 fieldbuses (3)
7
Accessories for connecting to the PC programming terminal
Description Application Reference Weight
kg
Universal Bluetooth Application: see page 1/11. TCS WAAC 13FB 0.320
TSX P57 2623M interface (UBI) The kit comprises:
TSXP57 3623AM for terminal port (TER) b a Universal Bluetooth interface (UBI),
b an RJ45/mini-DIN cable (length 1 m),
8
b an RJ45/RJ45 cable (length 1 m),
b a fixing clamp for installation inside the enclosure,
b a CD with configuration software and user manual.

Premium processors can support up to 2 memory extension cards. However, usable memory capacity is limited to the
maximum size defined for the processor model.
9
References, see pages 1/20 and1/21.
(1) Cumulative maximum values. The number of remote I/O on the bus is not included.
(2) Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks (4, 6 or 8 slots). Using the TSX RKY 12EX rack (12 slots) is the same
TSX P57 2823M as using 2 racks with 4, 6 or 8 slots.
10
TSX P57 4823AM (3) Using the CANopen bus reduces the number of possible fieldbuses (INTERBus/Profibus DP) by 1.
(4) The second value corresponds to the integrated memory capacity when the processor is equipped with a PCMCIA
memory card.
(5) Single-format processor for TSX P57 353LAM, double-format processor for TSX P57 353AM.
(6) 992 Kwords with PL7 Junior/Pro software V4.4 or higher.
(7) 3 networks with TSX P57 4823AM processor.
1/19
platform 0

PL7
Presentation
PCMCIA memory extension cards are used to extend the internal RAM capacity of
1 Premium processors. Depending on the model, these cards are designed to:
b Receive the application program and constants
b Store additional application data and/or various application object symbols
Offer for Premium platform under PL7

In November 2004, the old range of TSX MRP/MFP pppP memory extension cards,
PCMCIA Flash EPROM memory
which was specifically for Premium processors under PL7, was replaced by a new
2 offer. This offer is common (1) to:
b TSX Micro PLCs under PL7
b Premium processors under Unity Pro and PL7
b Quantum processors under Unity Pro
The table below indicates equivalences between the old and new versions.
There may be one or more new references corresponding to each old reference,
depending on whether migration from PL7 to Unity Pro is envisaged.
3 PCMCIA SRAM memory
SRAM memory extension (slot no. 0)

Use Max. memory size Old reference Do you envisage migration from PL7 Recommended
PL7 Additional Symbol to Unity Pro? reference
application data storage (P indicates PL7 program)
4 All TSX 57 types 32 Kwords

128 Kwords
TSX MRP 032P
TSX MRP 232P
No
No
Yes
Yes
TSX MRP P128K
TSX MRP P384K
64 Kwords TSX MRP 064P No Yes, P < 52 Kwords TSX MRP P224K
Yes, P > 52 Kwords TSX MRP P384K
128 Kwords TSX MRP 264P No Yes (2) TSX MRP P384K
Yes (2) TSX MRP C768K
TSX 57 20 128 Kwords TSX MRP 0128P Yes, P < 64 Kwords TSX MRP P384K
5 TSX 57 30
TSX 57 40
No

Yes 64 Kwords< P < 104 Kwords
Yes, P > 104 Kwords
TSX MRP C448K
TSX MRP C768K
128 Kwords 128 Kwords TSX MRP 2128P No Yes (2) TSX MRP C768K
Yes (2) TSX MRP C01M7
256 Kwords TSX MRP 0256P Yes, P < 104 Kwords TSX MRP C768K
No Yes, 128 Kwords< P < 208 Kwords TSX MRP C001M
Yes, P > 208 Kwords TSX MRP C01M7
6 640 Kwords 128 Kwords TSX MRP 3256P No Yes TSX MRP C01M7
Yes (3) TSX MRP C002M
Yes (4) TSX MRP C003M
384 Kwords 640 Kwords TSX MRP 3384P Yes (2) TSX MRP C01M7
No Yes (2) TSX MRP C002M
TSX 57 40 512 Kwords 256 Kwords TSX MRP 0512P Yes, P < 256 Kwords TSX MRP C01M7
7
No
Yes 256 Kwords< P < 384 Kwords
Yes, P > 384 Kwords
TSX MRP C002M
TSX MRP C003M
992 K words 640 Kwords 384 Kwords TSX MRP C007M
Flash EPROM memory extension (slot n 0)

All TSX 57 types 32 Kwords TSX MFP 032P No Yes TSX MFP P128K (5)
64 Kwords TSX MFP 064P No No TSX MFP 064P2 (1)
8 No

Yes, P < 52 Kwords
Yes, P > 52 Kwords
TSX MFP P224K (5)
TSX MFP P384K (5)
128 Kwords TSX MFP 264P No Yes TSX MCP C224K (5)
TSX 57 20 128 Kwords TSX MFP 0128P No No TSX MFP 0128P2 (1)
TSX 57 30 No Yes TSX MFP P384K (5)
TSX 57 40
256 Kwords No Yes TSX MFP P001M (5)
9 SRAM memory extension (slot no. 1)

TSX 57 20 2048 TSX MRP DS 2048P No Yes TSX MRP F004M
TSX 57 30 Kwords
TSX 57 40
Flash EPROM backup card (slot no. 0)
TSX 57 10 32 Kwords TSX MFP BAK 032P No Yes TSX MFP B096K (4)
10 (1) Except for TSX MFP 064P2/0128P2 Flash EPROM memory cards dedicated to PL7 processors.
(2) Choice depends on the amount of PL7 program memory in relation to the amount of data storage.
(3) If storage of symbols on the PCMCIA card is not necessary.
(4) If storage of additional data on the PCMCIA card is not necessary.
(5) Memory card compatible with processors version u 5.5.
1/20
references platform 0

PL7
PCMCIA memory expansion cards
All memory cards (with the exception of TSX MRP P004M and TSX MRP DS 2048P for additional SRAM data storage) are inserted into
PCMCIA slot no. 0 on Premium processors (upper slot). The TSX MRP F004M/TSX MRP DS 2048P additional data storage card is inserted into
1
slot no. 1 only, on Premium processors (lower slot).
With PL7, these cards support four different types of storage:
b Application storage: Program and constants in a common area of between 64 and 512 Kwords, in the SRAM or Flash EPROM memory.
b Application and additional data storage, comprising an application area of between 64 and 384 Kwords and a storage area of 128 or
640 Kwords for additional data, in the SRAM or Flash EPROM and SRAM.
b Application, additional data and symbol storage, comprising an application area of between 32 and 512 Kwords, a storage area of 128 or
640 Kwords for additional data and a symbol storage area of 128 or 256 Kwords, in the SRAM or Flash EPROM and SRAM.
2
b Additional data storage provided by an SRAM memory card with a capacity of 2 Mwords.
These cards use 2 technologies:
b Battery-backed SRAM. Used in particular in the application program design and debugging phases. These cards support all application
transfer and modification services in online mode and the storage of additional data.
The memory is protected by a removable battery built into the PCMCIA card. A second, auxiliary battery, provides backup so that the main
battery can be replaced without data being lost.
b Flash EPROM Used when debugging of the application program is complete. It enables restrictions in terms of the service life of backup
3
batteries to be avoided and supports global application transfer. If a Flash EPROM is used, the application cannot be modified in online mode.
References
If future migration from PL7 to Unity Pro is envisaged, see the equivalence table opposite to find the new equivalent reference.
4
Use Max. memory size Old reference Reference Weight
PL7 application Additional data Symbol storage kg
5
TSX 57 1040 32 Kwords TSX MRP 032P TSX MRP P128K 0.076
64 Kwords TSX MRP 064P TSX MRP P224K 0.076
128 Kwords TSX MRP 232P/264P TSX MRP P384K 0.076
TSX 57 2040 128 Kwords TSX MRP 0128P TSX MRP C448K 0.076
128 Kwords 128 Kwords TSX MRP 2128P TSX MRP C768K 0.076
256 Kwords TSX MRP 0256P TSX MRP C001M 0.076
640 Kwords 128 Kwords TSX MRP 3256P TSX MRP C01M7 0.076
TSX 57 40
384 Kwords
512 Kwords
640 Kwords

256 Kwords
TSX MRP 3384P
TSX MRP 0512P
TSX MRP C002M
TSX MRP C003M
0.076
0.076
6
992 Kwords 640 Kwords 384 Kwords TSX MRP C007M 0.076
Flash EPROM memory extension (slot n 0)

TSX 57 1040 32 Kwords TSX MFP 032P TSX MFP P128K (1) 0.044
64 Kwords TSX MFP 064P TSX MFP P224K (1) 0.044

128 Kwords

TSX MFP 064P
TSX MFP 232P/264P
TSX MFP 064P2 (2)
TSX MCP C224K (1)
0.044
0.044
7
TSX 57 2040 128 Kwords TSX MFP 0128P TSX MFP P384K (1) 0.044
TSX MFP 0128P TSX MFP 0128P2 (2) 0.044
256 Kwords TSX MFP P001M (1) 0.044

TSX 57 2040 2048 Kwords TSX MRP DS 2048P TSX MRP F004M 0.076
8
Flash EPROM backup card (slot no. 0)
TSX 57 10 32 Kwords TSX MFP BAK 032P TSX MFP B096K (1) 0.044
Replacement parts
Description Use Type Reference Weight
Backup batteries PCMCIA SRAM memory cards Main battery TSX BAT M02 (3)
kg
0.010
9
Auxiliary battery TSX BAT M03 (4) 0.050
Handle Removal of PCMCIA memory card TSX P CAPUP 0.010
(provided with the memory card)
(1) Memory card (blue) compatible with processor version u 5.5.

(2) Memory card (orange) only compatible in run mode (no backup facility) with processor version y 5.0 and < 6.1 compatible with processor version u 6.1.
Memory card designed for PL7 processors.
(3) For the SRAM memory card with the old reference TSX MRP pppP or with the new reference PV < 04 (green), quote order reference number TSX BAT M01.
10
(4) Only for SRAM memory cards with a new reference.
1/21
1
10
2/0
Contents 2 - Power supplies and racks
Power supply and fan modules

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/2
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/3 1
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/4
Single-rack configuration (non extendable rack)

Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/6
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/6 2
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/7
Multirack configuration without remote module

Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/8
Rack addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/9 3
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/10
Multirack configuration with remote module

Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/12
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/13 4
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/13
10
2/1
platform
Description of power supply modules

1
TSX PSY ppp0M power supply modules provide the power supply for each rack and
1 2
the modules installed on it.
3 The power supply module is selected according to:

b The line supply: 24 V c, 24...48 V c, 100...120 V a, 200...240 Va.
4 b The required power: standard format or double-format model, see power
consumption table on page 9/6.
5
2 Power supply modules TSX PSY ppp0M comprise:
1 A display block comprising:
7 6 v OK LED (green), lit if rack voltages are present and correct
v BAT lamp (red), on if the battery is faulty or missing
TSX PSY 2600M
v 24 V lamp (green), on when the sensor voltage is present (depending on model)
2 RESET pencil-point pushbutton causing a warm restart of the application
3 Slot for a battery which protects the processor's internal RAM memory
3 4 Cover to protect the front panel of the module
5 Screw terminal block for connection to:
v The line supply
8 v The alarm relay contact
v The sensor power supply for a.c. supplies (depending on model).
6 Opening for cable clamp
1 7 Fuse located beneath the module and protecting:
4 2
v 24 VR voltage on the non-isolated d.c. supply with TSX PSY 3610
v Primary voltage on the other power supplies
8 110/220 voltage selector (depending on model).
3
Description of fan modules

5
5
TSX FAN ppP fan modules installed above the racks of Premium PLCs provide
forced air convection, in order to maintain an even ambient temperature inside the
7 6 enclosure and to eliminate any hot spots that may exist.
TSX PSY 5500M Fan modules are required when the ambient temperature is between 60 C and
70 C (forced ventilation enables the ambient temperature in the enclosure to be
6 lowered by 10 C) (1)
Three types of fan module are available: 24 V c, 110 V a and 220 Va
According to the modularity of the racks used:

b One fan module for a 4 or 6 position rack
b Two fan modules for an 8 position rack
b Three fan modules for a 12 position rack
7 TSX FAN ppP fan modules comprise:

3 3 1 A connection terminal block for power supply to the fan module, the internal
4
temperature probe and the associated LED or preactuator
1
2 An earth terminal
2 3 Two mounting holes for the fan module
4 Shuttered air outlets
8 (1) For an ambient temperature between 25 C and 60 C, the use of fan modules increases the
MTBF.
10
Functions: References:
page 2/3 pages 2/4 ...
2/2
Functions Modicon Premium automation
platform
Functions
Alarm relay
The alarm relay located in each power supply module has a volt-free contact which 1
can be accessed on the module's screw connection block.
The operating principle is as follows:

b Module alarm relay located on the processor rack (rack 0): In normal operation,
with the PLC in RUN, the alarm relay is activated and its contact is closed (state 1).
Whenever the application stops, even partially:
v occurrence of a blocking fault 2
v Incorrect output voltages
v loss of mains power the relay de-energizes and the associated contact opens
(state 0).
b Alarm relay of power supply modules located on the other racks (racks 1 to 7):
when the module is powered up and if the output voltages are correct, the relay is
activated and its contact is closed (state 1). When the mains power is lost or if the
output voltages are incorrect, the relay de-energizes (state 0). 3
Backup battery
Each power supply module has a slot reserved for a battery which provides the
power supply to the internal RAM memory located in the processors, in order to
ensure that data is saved when the PLC is switched off.
The duration of data back-up is one year. The battery must be changed as soon as
4
the BAT lamp (red) on the front panel lights up.
RESET pushbutton
Pressing this pushbutton, which is located on the front panel of the power supply
module, triggers a sequence of service signals which is the same as that for:
b A power switch-off when the pushbutton is pressed
5
b A power-up when the pushbutton is released
For the application, these actions represent a warm restart.
Sensor power supply 24 V c 6

TSX PSY 2600M/5500M/8500M a.c. power supply modules have an integrated
power supply which provides a voltage of 24 V c to supply the input sensors. The
sensor power supply connection can be accessed via the screw terminal block on
the module.
The power available on this 24 V c voltage depends on the model (0.5/0.8/1.6 A),
see characteristics page 2/4.
7
10
Description: References:
page 2/2 pages 2/4 ...
2/3
platform
Power supply modules
References
Each TSX RKY p and TSX RKY pEX rack must be equipped with a single or
1 double-format power supply module (slot marked PS).
The power required to supply each TSX RKY rack depends on the type and number
of modules installed in the rack. It is therefore necessary to draw up a power
consumption table rack by rack in order to determine which TSX PSY power supply
module is the most suitable for each rack (see page 9/6).

2 TSX PSY 2600M
Power
supply
Available power (1)
5Vc 24 VR c 24 VC c Total
Format Reference
(2)
Weight
kg
24 V c 15 W 15 W 30 W Standard TSX PSY 1610M 0.540
non-isolated 35 W 19 W 50 W Double TSX PSY 3610M 0.780
(3)
24...48 V c 35 W 19 W 50 W Double TSX PSY 5520M 0.890
3 isolated
100...240 V a 25 W 15 W 12 W 26 W Standard TSX PSY 2600M 0.510
TSX PSY 5500M 00...120 V a 35 W 19 W 19 W 50 W Double TSX PSY 5500M 0.620

200...240 V a 75 W 38 W 77 W Double TSX PSY 8500M 0.740
(SELV)
4
Accessories
Description Use Sold in Reference Weight
lots of kg
Batteries Internal RAM memory backup 1 TSX PLP 01 0.010
on TSX P57 processors 10 TSX PLP 101 0.100
5 (to be fitted in the power supply module)
(1) Voltages 5 V c and 24 VR c for power supply to Premium PLC modules, voltage 24 VC c
for power supply to input sensors. The sum of power consumed on each voltage (5 V c,
24 VR c and 24 VC c) must not exceed the total power of the module. See power
consumption table on page 9/6.
(2) Product supplied with a processor RAM memory backup battery.
6 (3) The internal 0 V of the module is connected to the PLC earth.
10
Description: Functions:
page 2/2 page 2/3
2/4
platform
Fan modules
References (continued)
Fan modules
Description Use Power supply Reference Weight
kg
1
TSX FAN ppP Fan modules For racks 24 V c TSX FAN D2P 0.500
(1) TSX RKY p or 100120 V a TSX FAN A4P 0.500
TSX RKY pEX
200240 V a TSX FAN A5P 0.500
(1) One fan module for rack with 4 or 6 positions, two fan modules for rack with 8 positions and
three fan modules for rack with 12 positions.
2
10
Description: Functions:
page 2/2 page 2/3
2/5
Presentation, Modicon Premium automation
description platform 0
Single-rack configuration
Presentation
The TSX RKY ppp pp rack is the basic element of a Premium control system
1 platform with a single rack (6, 8 or 12 positions).
These racks are non extendable. They provide the following functions:
b Mechanical function: they enable all the modules of a PLC station (power supply,
processor, discrete I/O, analogue I/O, application-specific modules) to be installed.
b Electrical function: they provide distribution of:
v Power supplies required for each module in the same rack
2 v Data and service signals for the entire PLC station when the station has several
racks.
enclosure and to eliminate any hot spots that may exist (see page 2/2).
4 1 5
Description
9 TSX RKY pp racks comprise:
1 A metal frame
8 3 2 Slots for anchoring the module pins
3 48-way female 1/2 DIN connectors for module/rack connections (the first
5 7
connector is reserved for the power supply module)
4 A locating slot for the power supply module
6 5 Tapped holes for mounting the module
6 Four holes for mounting the rack
4 2
7 Slot for the rack address label
8 A slot for the station network address label.
9 Two earth terminals for earthing the rack
10
References:
page 2/7
2/6
platform 0
Single-rack configuration
References
Non-extendable racks
Description Type of module
to be installed
Capacity Reference Weight
kg
1
Non-extendable TSX PSY power supply, 6 positions TSX RKY 6 (1) 1.470
racks TSX P57 processor, 8 positions TSX RKY 8 (1) 1.750
for single-rack TSX H57 processor,
12 positions TSX RKY 12 2.310
configuration I/O modules,
TSX RKY 6 application-specific
modules and
2
Connection accessories
Description Use Composition Reference Weight
kg
Protective covers Unoccupied position on 5 screw-on covers TSX RKA 02 0.050

racks TSX RKY p or
TSX RKY pEX
Sold in lots of 5
3
Fixing screws Mounting of racks Screw with captive TSX ACC VA625 0.350
M6 x 25 TSX RKY p or washer and
TSX RKY pEX hexagonal slotted
head
Sold in lots of 50
(1) In cases where the limits of electromagnetic emissions between 30 MHz and 1 GHz need to
be monitored, it is recommended that TSX RKY 6EX/8EX extendable racks be used instead 4
of TSX RKY 6/8 non-extendable racks, see page 2/10.
10
Presentation:
page 2/6
2/7
platform
1 2 Composition of a multirack configuration

Multirack configurations are made up using extendable racks 1
1 3
TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX/12EX (1). They comprise:
b 4 racks maximum for a station with Premium TSX 57 10 processor
b 16 racks maximum for a station with Premium TSX 57 20, 57 30, 57 40, 57 50,
5
100 m maxi (sans dport bus X)
57 60 processor.
The racks are connected to each other by bus X extension cables 2.
4
Bus X
2 The racks, distributed on bus X, are connected to each other by bus X extension
cables whose total length is 100 m max. Using TSX REY 200 bus X remote modules
enables the length of bus X to be increased to a maximum of 2 x 350 m (see page
2/12).
The racks are connected to each other by means of bus X extension cables TSX
CBY ppp0Kp which are connected to the 9-way SUB-D side connectors on each
extendable rack. The incoming cable from the previous rack can be connected to
3 either the left-hand 3 or right-hand 4 connector on the rack. For lengths greater than
28 m, TSX CBY ppp0KT bus X extension cables are supplied with 2 adaptors to be
fitted at each end and which provide greater protection against any strong electrical
transients that may occur between the racks (according to standard IEC 61131-2).
Line terminators
The two extendable racks located at the ends of the line must have a line terminator
4 5 TSX TLY EX fitted on the unused 9-way SUB-D type connector.
Presentation of extendable racks

TSX RKY ppp EX racks are the basic elements of Premium multirack configurations.
They provide the following functions:
5 b Mechanical function: they enable all the modules of a PLC station (power supply,
processor, discrete I/O, analogue I/O, application-specific modules) to be fitted
b Electrical function: they allow connection and continuity of the the bus X and
provide distribution of:
v power supplies required for each module in the same rack
v data and service signals for the entire PLC station where this station has several
racks.
6 To meet user requirements, several types of rack are available (4, 6, 8 or 12
positions) in order to make up PLC configurations comprising up to 16 racks max.
distributed on bus X.
7 enclosure and to eliminate any hot spots that may exist (see page 2/2).
(1) Using the TSX RKY 12EX 12-slots rack is the same as occupying 2 racks with 4, 6 or 8 slots.
10
page 2/9 pages 2/10 ...
2/8
Description, Modicon Premium automation
functions platform
1 5 Description
10 TSX RKY pppEX racks comprise:
9 1 A metal frame
2 Slots for anchoring the module pins
1
8 3 3 48-way female 1/2 DIN connectors for module/rack connections (the first
11 11 connector is reserved for the power supply module)
4 A locating slot for the power supply module
7 5 Tapped holes for mounting the module
6
6 Four holes for mounting the rack
4 2 7 Slot for the rack address label
8 Slot for the station network address label
2
9 Two earth terminals for earthing the rack
10 Microswitches for coding the rack address (on extendable racks)
11 Two 9-way female SUB-D connectors for the remote connection of bus X, each
one to another rack
3
less-significant most significant
Rack addresses
PS 00 01 02 03 04 PS 08 09 10 11 12
Address 0: this address is always assigned to the rack which holds the processor.
This rack can be located in any position on the line.
Addresses 1 to 7: these can be assigned in any order to all the other extendable
racks of the station.
As the two racks with 4, 6, or 8 slots which make up each pair have the same 4
Address rack n, example with two 6-slot racks, standard format address on the bus X, position numbers are defined as follows:
power supply and standard format processor b Rack n less-significant: position 00 to xx (02, 04 or 06); rack n most-significant:
position 08 to yy (10, 12 or 14).
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 8 9 10 b Racks with 12 slots each occupy an address (with position 00 to 10).
5
Address rack n, example with one 12-slot rack, standard format
power supply and standard format processor
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Primary rack address 0
Installing the various modules on the standard or extendable rack with address 0
The rack with address 0 must contain a power supply module and the processor
6
with standard-format
power supply and module. For Premium PLCs which have two types of power supply (standard or
processor double-format), the position of the processor (standard or double-format) will depend
on the type of power supply used:
b Using a standard format power supply module:
v The power supply module systematically occupies position PS.
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Primary rack address 0
with double-format
v The processor module must be installed in positions 00/01 (00 with standard
format processor).
7
power supply and v The other modules are installed from position 02 (01 with standard format
standard-format processor).
processor
b Using a double-format power supply module:
v The power supply module systematically occupies positions PS and 00.
v The processor module must be installed in positions 01/02 (01 with standard
format processor).
v The other modules are installed from position 03 (02 with standard format
8
processor).
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Extension rack Installing the various modules on extendable racks with addresses 1 to 7
address n with
standard-format Each rack must have either a standard format or double-format power supply
power supply module:
b Using a standard format power supply module: 9
v The power supply module systematically occupies position PS.
v The other modules are installed from position 00 onwards.
Extension rack b Using a double-format power supply module:
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 address n with v The power supply module systematically occupies positions PS and 00.
double-format v The other modules are installed from position 01 onwards.
power supply
10
Presentation: References:
page 2/8 pages 2/10 ...
2/9
platform
Extendable racks and connection cables
Extendable racks
Description Type of module to be installed Capacity Reference Weight
1 Extendable racks TSX PSY power supply, 4 positions TSX RKY 4EX
kg
1.160
for multirack TSX P57 or TSX H57 processor 6 positions TSX RKY 6EX 1.500
configuration (main rack 0),
8 positions TSX RKY 8EX 1.780
(16 racks max.) I/O modules
(1) application-specific modules and 12 positions TSX RKY 12EX 2.340
TSX RKY 6EX communication modules
2
Connection cables
Description Use Composition Length Reference Weight
kg
Bus X Between 2 x 9-way SUB-D 1m TSX CBY 010K 0.160
daisy chain cables TSX RKY pEX connectors 3m TSX CBY 030K 0.260
(total length 100 m racks
3 max.) (2)
5m
12 m
TSX CBY 050K
TSX CBY 120K
0.360
1.260
18 m TSX CBY 180K 1.860
28 m TSX CBY 280KT (3) 2.860
38 m TSX CBY 380KT (3) 3.860
50 m TSX CBY 500KT (3) 5.060
72 m TSX CBY 720KT (3) 7.260
4 Cable on reel Length to be Cable with free ends,

100 m
100 m
TSX CBY 1000KT (3) 10.060
TSX CBY 1000 12.320
fitted with 2 line testers
TSX CBY K9
connectors.
(1) 16 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks max. (4, 6 or 8 slots) or 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks max. (12 slots).
5 Using the 12 -slot rack is the same as occupying two racks with 4, 6 or 8-slots.
(2) Up to 2 x 350 m when using bus X remote module TSX REY 200 (see page 2/12).
(3) Cable supplied with a set of 2 TSX TVSY 100 electrical transient suppressors.
10
Presentation: Description:
page 2/8 page 2/9
2/10
platform
Accessories
Accessories
Bus X For TSX CBY 1000 2 x 9-way SUB-D connectors TSX CBY K9
kg
0.080
1
connectors cable ends
Bus X electrical For bus X daisy 2 transient suppressors TSX TVSY 100 0.200
transient chain cable with 9-way SUB-D connectors
TSX TVSY 100
suppressors lengths > 28 m
Line terminators Compulsory on the 2 x 9-way SUB-D connectors TSX TLY EX 0.050
2
2 TSX RKY pEX marked A and B
end racks
Protective covers Unoccupied 5 screw-on covers TSX RKA 02 0.050

position on racks
TSX TLY EX TSX RKY p or
Connector
TSX RKY pEX
Fitting TSX CBY 2 crimping pliers, 1 pen (1) TSX CBY ACC 10
3
installation kit K9 connectors
Fixing screws Mounting of racks 50 screws with captive washer TSX ACC VA625 0.350
M6 x 25 TSX RKY p or and hexagonal slotted head
TSX RKY pEX
(1) Installation of connectors on the cable also requires a wire stripper, a pair of scissors and a digital ohmmeter.
4
10
page 2/8 page 2/9
2/11
platform
Presentation
Bus X for Premium PLCs can be used to connect eight 12 position racks or sixteen 4,
1 6 or 8 position racks, distributed over a maximum length of 100 metres
(see page 2/9).
For applications requiring longer distances between racks, the bus X remote
rackmaster module: TSX REY 200 can be used to increase this distance up to
a maximum of 350 metres without reducing performance.
The Bus X remote rackmaster module is electrical. Using the bus X remote rackmaster
module will not result in any loss of performance in reading or controlling I/O.
2 The bus X remote system comprises:
b One TSX REY 200 module called the master 1 located on the rack at address 0
(rack supporting the processor 2 and the main bus X 3). The master module has two
channels for the remote location of two Bus X segments 5 up to a maximum distance
of 250 meters.
b One or two TSX REY 200 modules 4 called slaves located on each extendable
3 rack.
b Each slave module is connected to the master module by a cable 5
TSX CBRY 2500 which must be cut to length by the user and fitted with TSX CBRY
K5 connectors as required (no special equipment is required for this cabling).
Each end of the bus must be fitted with a TSX TLY EX line terminator 6.
4 3
4
Bus X
6 6
100 m
5
5 3
2
Remote location of bus X at 250 m max.
1
Bus X
6 100 m 6
6 Remote location of bus X at 250 m max.
5
Bus X
6 6
100 m
7 3
4
Installation rules
The rules for installing the bus X remote rackmaster module, TSX REY 200, are as
follows:
8 b Bus X remote rackmaster module acting as a master. It is installed on the rack at
address 0 supporting the processor with:
v The power supply module systematically occupying position(s) PS (and 00).
The processor module must be installed in position 01 (and 02 if a double-format
processor).
v The bus X remote rackmaster module, TSX REY 200, can be installed in any
position after 02 (or 03 if a double-format processor).
9 b Bus X remote rackmaster module acting as a slave. It is installed in an extendable
rack (located on an extendable bus X segment) in any position, apart from the
positions dedicated to the power supply module.
10
page 2/13 page 2/13
2/12
references platform
Maximum distances for remote location
The maximum permitted distances from the processor in any one remote system are
shown in the table below:
1
Type of I/O modules Reference Length of bus X
remote system 5
Discrete inputs (1) TSX DEY ppp 250 m
Discrete Outputs TSX DSY ppp
2
Preventa safety module TSX PAY 262
Analog I/O (2) TSX AEY ppp/ASY ppp 175 m less than the
Counter/motion control TSX CTY pA/CAY21/CAY41/CFY p1 length 3 of bus X
modules (3)
Weighing modules TSX ISP Y101/Y121
AS-Interface Bus modules TSX SAY 1000 Remote location of
SERCOS motion module TSX CSY 84/85/164 bus X not permitted
3
Communication modules TSX SCY 21601/11601
Ethernet Modbus/TCP modules TSX ETY 110WS/4103/5103/WMY 100
Fieldbus modules TSX IBY 100/PBY100
Discrete I/O TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK 225 m less than the
(1) Discrete inputs TSX DEY 16FK (version 06) length 3 of bus X
(2) Analog I/O TSX AEY 810/1614
TSX ASY 410 (version 11)
(3) Counter/motion control
modules
TSX CTY 2C/CCY 1128
TSX CAY 22/42/33 4
Description
The front panel of the bus X remote rackmaster module TSX REY 200 comprises:
1
1 A display block with 6 indicator lamps:
v RUN indicator: module running
v ERR indicator: module has an internal fault
2
v I/O indicator (red): module has an external fault 5
v MST indicator module acting as master or slave
v CH0 indicator: channel 0 operating
3 v CH1 indicator: channel 1 operating
2 A 5-way SUB-D 9 connector for the connection of channel 0
3 A 5-way SUB-D 9 connector for the connection of channel 1
References 6
Description Operation Description Reference Weight
Item no. kg
Extendable racks 4/6/8/12 positions See page 2/10
Bus X remote Master/slave 2 channels TSX REY 200

rackmaster module
1 or 4
Connection cables and accessories (see also page 2/10)

7
Item no. kg
Bus X cables Connection of two TSX 250 m TSX CBRY 2500
supplied on a drum REY 200 modules
5 Class C1 flame
8
resistance
TSX REY 200 Cable for daisy chain 250 m TSX CBRY 2500F
mounting (1)
5-ways SUB-D 9 For ends of cables TSX Sold in lots of 5 TSX CBRY K5
connectors CBRY 2500p
Description
Item no.
Use Composition Reference Weight
kg
9
Line terminators Must be fitted on each 2 x 9-way SUB-D TSX TLY EX 0.050
6 TSX RKY pEX end rack connectors
Sold in lots of 2
TSX TLY EX
(1) Mobile installations: cables as per VDE 472, part 603/H: (60 000 operations max.):
- For use on cable drag chain: minimum bend radius of 75 mm
- For use on gantry crane, subject to compliance with certain installation conditions
(acceleration, speed, length etc.): please consult our Customer Care Centre.
10
- Not authorized for use on robots, or multi-axis applications.
Presentation:
page 2/12
2/13
1
10
3/0
Contents 3 - Discrete, analog, distributed and
special I/O
Discrete I/O modules

Selection guide: input modules and mixed modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/2
Selection guide: output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/4 1
Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/6
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/8
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/9
Analog I/O modules

2
Selection guide: I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/12
Presentation, description, functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/14
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/16
Distributed I/O 3
Selection guide: Modicon distributed I/O solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/18
Special I/O
TeSys Quickfit installation system for motor starter components
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/20 4
Compatibility with Modicon automation platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/22
10
3/1
Selection guide Modicon Premium automation
platform 0

Input modules and mixed modules
Applications Connecting inputs to screw terminal blocks for bare wires, or wires fitted with either
cable ends or open/closed cable tags
4 Type c c or a a a
Voltage 24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V 100120 V
Modularity 8 isolated 16 isolated channels
(Number of channels) channels
5 Connection Via 20-way screw terminal blocks: TSX BLY 01
Isolated inputs IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity Type 2 Type 2

Logic Positive Negative
Sensor compatibility 2-wire c/a, 3-wire c PNP all types 2-wire c/a, 2-wire c/a
according to 3-wire c
IEC/EN 60947-5-2 NPN all types
6 Sensor power supply (ripple included) 19...30 V c 38...60 V c 19...30 V c

20...26 V a
40...52 V a 85...132 V a
Isolated outputs Fallback

IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity
Protection
Logic
Output limit values Voltage
7 Current/channel
Current/module
Type of module TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY
08D2 16D2 16D3 16A2 16A3 16A4
8 Pages
Compatibility with TeSys Quickfit installation system
3/9

Compatibility with Connection sub-bases

Modicon Telefast ABE 7
pre-wired system Input adaptor sub-bases
Type of Modicon Telefast Miniature (55 or 72 mm)

9 ABE 7 passive sub-base
Standard (106 or 113 mm)
Wide (194 mm)
10 Type of Modicon Telefast

ABE 7 adaptor sub-base
Fixed relays
(with relays) Plug-in relays
Type of cable with HE 10 connectors
3/2
Connecting inputs Connecting inputs to HE 10 connectors with preformed cables with flying leads, Connecting I/O to HE 10 connectors with
to screw terminal rolled ribbon cables or multicore cables preformed cables with flying leads,
blocks rolled ribbon cables or multicore cables
1
a c 4
200240 V 24 V 48 V 24 V
16 isolated 16 high-speed 32 isolated 64 isolated 32 isolated 16 isolated inputs and 12 x 0.5 A isolated
channels isolated channels channels channels channels outputs
Event-triggered fast Programmable
inputs reflex I/O
Via screw terminal

blocks: TSX BLY 01
Via 20-way HE 10 connectors 5
Type 2 Type 1 Type 1
Positive
2-wire c/a 2-wire c/a, 3-wire c PNP all types
170...264 V a 19...30 V c 38...60 V c 19...30 V c (possible up to 30 V c limited

to 1 hour in every 24 hours)
6
Configurable output fallback
Yes
Protected
Positive
19...30 V c (possible up to 34 V c limited
to 1 hour in every 24 hours)

0.5 A
7
4A
See page 9/6
TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DMY TSX DMY
16A5 16FK 32D2K 64D2K 32D3K 28FK 28RFK
3/10
LU9 G02 splitter box (see page 3/22)
8
8 or 16-channel passive sub-bases, with or without LED, with common or 2 terminals per channel
16-channel active sub-bases 5 V c TTL, 24 V c, 48 V c, 115 V or 230 V a, 2 terminals per channel
ABE 7H08Rpp, ABE 7H08S21,

ABE 7H08Rpp, ABE 7H08S21, ABE 7H16R50, ABE 7H20Eppp
ABE 7H16R50, ABE 7H20Eppp,
ABE 7H12R50
9
ABE 7H16S21, ABE 7H16R23, ABE 7H16R1p, ABE 7H16R2p, ABE 7H16R20 ABE 7H16R1p, ABE 7H16R2p,
ABE 7H16R3p, ABE 7H16Cpp ABE 7H16R3p, ABE 7HCpp,
ABE 7H16S21, ABE 7H16R23,
ABE 7H12Rpp
ABE 7H16S43 ABE 7H16S43
ABE 7S16E2pp
10
ABE 7P16F3pp
TSX CDP pp3 or ABF H20pp0
3/3
Selection guide (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 0

Output modules
Applications Connecting outputs to screw terminal blocks for bare wires, or wires fitted with either
cable ends or open/closed cable tags
4 Type c transistor c or a relay
Voltage 24 V 48 V 12...24 V c
24240 V a
Current 0.5 A 2A 0.5 A 1A 0.25 A 3 A (lth)
5 Modularity
(number of channels)
8 protected channels 16
protected
8
protected
16
protected
8 non-
protected
16 non-
protected
channels channels channels channels channels
Connection Via 20-way screw terminal blocks: TSX BLY 01
Isolated outputs Fallback Configurable output fallback, continuous monitoring of output Configurable output
control and output reset in case of internal fault fallback
6 IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity

Protection
Yes
Protected
Yes
Not protected
Logic Positive
Output limit values Voltage 19...30 V c 38...60 V c 10...34 V c
20...264 V a
Current/channel 0.625 A 2.5 A 0.625 A 1.25 A 0.31 A
7 Consumption
Current/module 4A
See page 9/6
14 A 7A 4A
Types of discrete output module TSX TSX TSX TSX TSX TSX TSX
DSY DSY DSY DSY DSY DSY DSY
08T2 08T22 16T2 08T31 16T3 08R5 16R5
Pages 3/10
8 Compatibility with TeSys Quickfit installation system
Compatibility with Connection sub-bases

pre-wired system
Input adaptor sub-bases
Type of passive sub-base Narrow

9 Modicon Telefast ABE 7 (miniature 55 or 72 mm)
Standard width
(106 or 113 mm)
Wide (194 mm)
Type of adaptor sub-base Fixed relays

(with relays)
10 Modicon Telefast ABE 7 Plug-in relays
Type of cable with HE 10 connectors
3/4
Connecting outputs to screw terminal blocks for bare wires, wires fitted Connecting outputs to HE 10 connectors with preformed cables with
with either cable ends or open/closed cable tags flying leads, rolled ribbon cables or multicore cables
c or a relay c relay a triac c transistor

4
2448 V c 24120 V 48240 V 24120 V 24 V c
24240 V a
5 A (lth) 5 A (lth) 2 A per 1 A per 1 A per 0.1 A per channel
channel channel channel
8 protected channels 16 protected
channels
16 non-
protected
32 protected channels 64 protected channels
5
channels
Via 20-way screw terminal blocks: TSX BLY 01 Via 20-way HE 10 connector
Configurable output fallback Configurable output fallback, continuous monitoring of output control and
output reset in case of internal fault
Yes
Protected
Yes
Not
Yes
Protected
6
protected
Positive
19...60 V c 19...143 V c 41...264 V a 24...132 V a 19...30 V c, possible up to 34 V c limited to 1 hour in every 24 hours
20...264 V a
2A 1A 0.1 A
See page 9/6

12 A 3.2 A 5A
7
TSX DSY TSX DSY TSX DSY TSX DSY TSX DSY TSX DSY 32T2K TSX DSY 64T2K
08R5A 08R4D 08S5 16S5 16S4
3/10
LU9 G02 splitter box (see page 3/22) 8
8 or 16-channel passive sub-bases, with or without LED, with common or
2 terminals per channel
16-channel active sub-bases with relays (1 NO, 1 or 2 C/O) or transistor
(548 V c, 24 V c, 24240 V a), 2 terminals per channel
ABE 7H08Rpp, ABE 7H08S21

9
ABE 7H16S21
ABE 7H16F43
ABE 7S08S2pp, ABE 7R08Sppp, ABE 7S16Sppp, ABE 7R16Sppp
ABE 7P08T330, ABE 7R16Tppp, ABE 7P16Tppp 10

TSX CDP pp3 or ABF H20pp0
3/5
Principle Modicon Premium automation
platform 0
Connecting modules with screw terminal blocks

The discrete I/O module terminal blocks have a device for automatically transferring
1 the coding when first used. This prevents handling errors when a module is replaced.
This coding ensures electrical compatibility for each type of module.
Each terminal can take bare wires or wires with either cable ends or open tags.
The capacity of each terminal is:
b Minimum: One 0.2 mm2 (AWG 24) wire without cable end
b Maximum: One 2 mm2 (AWG 14) wire without cable end or one 1.5 mm2 (AWG 15)
wire with cable end
2 The screw terminal blocks are equipped with captive screws.
The maximum capacity of the terminal block is 16 x 1 mm2 (AWG 17) wires + 4 x
1.5 mm2 (AWG 15) wires.
Connecting modules with HE 10 connectors

20-wire preformed cables, AWG 22 (0.324 mm2)
3 1 Preformed cables are used for easy direct wire-to-wire connection between the I/O
of modules with connectors 1 and the sensors, preactuators or terminals.
This preformed cable 3 comprises:
2 b At one end, an HE10 moulded connector 2 with 20 x 0.34 mm2 cross-section
sheathed wires.
b At the other end 4, flying leads color-coded according to standard DIN 47100.
3
4 TSX CDP 301: length 3 m

TSX CDP 501: length 5 m
5 4
Preformed cable
Sheathed rolled ribbon cables, AWG 28 (0.08 mm2)

6 The rolled ribbon cables are used to connect the I/O of modules with HE 10 connectors
1 to Modicon Telefast ABE 7 fast wiring connection and adaptor interfaces 2. This cable
1 3 consists of 2 HE 10 connectors 4 and a sheathed rolled ribbon cable with 0.08 mm2
cross-section wires.
Given the small cross-section of the wires, it is recommended for use on low current
3 I/O only (100 mA max. per output).
1
7 6 TSX CDP 102: length 1 m
Connecting cable, AWG 22 (0.324 mm2)

5 Used to connect the I/O of modules with HE 10 connectors 1 to Modicon Telefast
2
8 6
4
ABE 7 fast wiring connection and adaptor interfaces 2. This cable 5 consists of
2 moulded HE 10 connectors 6 and a cable that will take higher currents (500 mA
max.).
TSX CDP 053: length 0.5 m

9
Rolled ribbon and connection cable
10
Description: Functions: References:

page 3/7 pages 3/8 pages 3/9
3/6
platform 0
Description
The discrete I/O modules are standard format (1 slot). They have a plastic case
which provides IP 20 protection of the electronics. 1
I/O modules connected via 20-way removable terminal block
1 A display block showing the channels and for module diagnostics
1
2 A removable screw terminal block for connecting the I/O directly to the sensors
and preactuators TSX BLY 01 (connectors to be ordered separately)
2 3 A pivoting cover for accessing the terminal block screws and holding the
2
identification label
3
4 A rotating support containing the module locating device
4
I/O modules connected via HE 10 connector

1 A display block showing the channels and for module diagnostics
1 2 HE 10 connectors, protected by a cover. These are used to connect the I/O to the
4
sensors and preactuators either directly or via Modicon Telefast ABE 7 connection
sub-bases.
2
10
Principle: Functions: References:

page 3/6 pages 3/8 pages 3/9
3/7
platform 0
Functions
I/O assignment
1 Each module is functionally organized into groups of 8 channels. Each group of
channels can be assigned to a specific application task.
Reactivation of outputs
If a fault has caused an output to trip, the output can be reactivated if there is no
other fault on its terminals. The reactivation command, defined during configuration,
2 can be automatic (reactivation every 10 s) or controlled via the program.
Reactivation is carried out in groups of 8 channels. This function is accessible on
modules with DC transistor outputs. For modules with relay and triac outputs
protected by fuses, the same type of reactivation (automatic or via program) is
necessary after replacement of one or more fuses.
RUN/STOP command
3 An input can be configured to control the RUN/STOP changeover for the PLC.
This is taken into account on a rising edge. A STOP command via an input takes
priority over a RUN command via a terminal or a network command.
Output fallback
If the application switches to STOP, the outputs must be set to a state which is safe
4 for the application. This state, called the fallback position, is defined for each module
when its outputs are configured.
This configuration is used to select:
b Fallback: the channels are set to 0 or 1 according to the defined fallback value
b Maintain: the outputs maintain the state in which they were before the stop
occurred
5 Diagnostic functions
b Module diagnostics: any exchange fault, preventing normal operation of an output
module or fast input module is indicated. Similarly, any internal module fault is
indicated.
b Process diagnostics: sensor/preactuator voltage check, terminal block presence
check, short-circuit and overload check, sensor voltage check, preactuator voltage
check.
6 Specific functions of TSX DEY 16FK/DMY 28FK module inputs
b Latching: enables particularly short pulses, with a duration shorter than the PLC
scan time, to be taken into account.
b Event-triggered inputs: enables events to be taken into account and ensures they
are processed immediately (interrupt processing). These inputs are associated with
the event processing (EVTi) defined in configuration mode where: i = 031, 063
7 or 0128 according to the type of Premium CPU.
b Event processing can be triggered on a rising edge (01) or a falling edge (10) of
the associated input. A masking/unmasking function for TSX DEY 16FK/DMY 28FK
inputs is available in online mode.
b Programmable input filtering: the inputs are equipped with filtering which can be
configured for each channel. Inputs are filtered by a fixed analog filter which provides
a maximum immunity of 0.1 ms for filtering line interference and by a digital filter
8 which can be configured from 0.1 to 7.5 ms in increments of 0.5 ms.
Reflex and timer functions for the TSX DMY 28RFK module
These control system functions are used to create applications which require a faster
response time than the fast task or event processing (< 500 s). They are executed
in the module and are independent of the PLC task. They are programmed using
Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software in configuration mode.
9
Hot swap
Due to their integrated devices, the I/O modules (including application-specific
modules) are hot-swappable.
10
Principle: Description: References:

page 3/6 page 3/7 pages 3/9
3/8
Functions (continued), Modicon Premium automation
Functions (continued)
Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire sensors
Type of input 24 V c
type 1
24/48 V c
type 2
24 V a
type 2
48 V a
100120 V a
200240 V a
type 2
1
logic positive logic positive type 2
(sink) (sink)
Any 3-wire c PNP sensor
Any 3-wire c NPN sensor (1)
Schneider Electric 2-wire c sensor
or other brands with the following characteristics:
- Residual voltage, closed state 7 V
- Minimum switched current 2.5 mA
2
- Residual current, open state 1.5 mA
2-wire c/a sensor (2)
2-wire a sensor (2)
Compatible Compatible Not compatible

subject to certain
conditions 3
References
Discrete input modules
Type of Input Connection IEC/EN Modularity Reference (4) Weight
current voltage (3) 61131-2
conformity
(no. of
channels)
kg
4
c 24 V Screw Type 2 8 isolated TSX DEY 08D2 0.300
(pos. logic) terminal block inputs
16 isolated TSX DEY 16D2 0.300
inputs
48 V Screw Type 2 16 isolated TSX DEY 16D3 0.300

(pos. logic) terminal block inputs
5
24 V HE 10 Type 1 16 isolated TSX DEY 16FK 0.300
(pos. logic) connector fast
inputs (2)
32 isolated TSX DEY 32D2K 0.300
inputs
64 isolated TSX DEY 64D2K 0.370
inputs 6
24 V Screw 16 isolated TSX DEY 16A2 0.310
TSX DEY 16FK
(neg. logic) terminal block inputs
48 V HE 10 Type 2 32 isolated TSX DEY 32D3K 0.310

(pos. logic) connector inputs
a 50/60 Hz 24 V Screw Type 2 16 isolated TSX DEY 16A2 0.310

7
terminal block inputs
48 V Screw Type 2 16 isolated TSX DEY 16A3 0.320

100...120 V Screw
terminal block
Type 2 16 isolated
inputs
TSX DEY 16A4 0.320
8
200...240 V Screw Type 2 16 isolated TSX DEY 16A5 0.360
TSX DEY 32D3K (1) The 24 V a inputs can be used as 24 V c negative logic (source) inputs compatible with
3-wire c NPN sensors, but they are then not IEC-compliant.
(2) Within the 220240 V a nominal voltage range.
(3) By connector: module supplied with cover. By screw terminal block: terminal block
9
TSX BLY 01 to be ordered separately.
(4) Module with fast isolated inputs (filtering from 0.1 to 7.5 ms) which can activate the
event-triggered task.
10
Principle: Description: Functions:

3/9
platform 0
Discrete output modules
1 Type of
current
Output
voltage
Connection
(1)
IEC/EN
61131-2
Modularity Reference
(no. of
Weight
kg
conformity channels)
c 24 V/0.5 A Screw Yes 8 protected TSX DSY 08T2 0.320
transistor (pos. logic) terminal block outputs
24 V/2 A Screw Yes 8 protected TSX DSY 08T22 0.410

(pos. logic) terminal block outputs
2 24 V/0.5 A Screw Yes 16 protected TSX DSY 16T2 0.340
48 V/1 A Screw Yes 8 protected TSX DSY 08T31 0.320

48 V/0.25 A Screw Yes 16 protected TSX DSY 16T3 0.340
3 (pos. logic) terminal block
24 V 0.1A HE 10 Yes
outputs
32 protected TSX DSY 32T2K 0.300

per channel connector outputs
(pos. logic) 64 protected TSX DSY 64T2K 0.360
outputs
TSX DSY 64T2K
4 c or a
relay
24 V/3 A c, Screw
24 to 240 V/ terminal block
3Aa
Yes 8 non-
protected
outputs
TSX DSY 08R5 0.330
16 non- TSX DSY 16R5 0.380

protected
outputs
24 to 48 V/ Screw Yes 8 protected TSX DSY 08R5A 0.420

5 A c, 24 to terminal block outputs
5 240 V/5 A a
c 24...120 V Screw Yes 8 protected TSX DSY 08R4D 0.370

relay 5A terminal block outputs
a 24...120 V Screw Yes 16 non- TSX DSY 16S4 0.380
6 triac 1 A per
channel
terminal block protected
outputs
48...240 V Screw Yes 16 protected TSX DSY 16S5 0.310
1 A per terminal block outputs
channel
48...240 V Screw Yes 8 protected TSX DSY 08S5 0.340
2 A per terminal block outputs
channel
7
Number Connection No. and type No. and IEC/EN Reference Weight
of I/O (1) of inputs type of 611312 kg
outputs conformity
28 HE 10 16 fast 12, transistor Input, type 1 TSX DMY 28FK 0.320
connector (pos. logic) 24 V/0,5 A c Output, yes
8 (2) protected
12, reflex Inputs, TSX DMY 28RFK 0.350

or time- type 1
delayed
24 V/0.5 A c
protected
TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK
9 (1) By connector: module supplied with cover. By screw terminal block: terminal block TSX BLY 01
to be ordered separately.
(2) Module with fast isolated inputs (filtering from 0.1 to 7.5 ms) which can activate the
event-triggered task.
10

3/10
platform 0
Terminal block
kg
1
Screw terminal block To be ordered separately TSX BLY 01 0.100
20-way with each I/O module with
screw terminal block
TSX BLY 01 connection
2
Connecting cables for I/O modules with HE 10 connectors
Description Composition Cross- Length Reference Weight
Use section kg
20-wire preformed 1 HE 10 0.324 mm2 3m TSX CDP 301 0.400
cable connector and (AWG 22)
one end with
color coded
5m
10 m
TSX CDP 501
TSX CDP 1001
0.660
1.210
3
flying leads
Rolled ribbon 2 HE 10 0.08 mm2 1m TSX CDP 102 0.090

connecting cable connectors for (AWG 28) 2m 0.170
TSX CDP 202
Modicon
TSX CDP p01 TSX CDP p02

Telefast ABE 7
system
3m TSX CDP 302 0.250
4
Connecting cables 2 HE 10 0.324 mm2 0.5 m TSX CDP 053 0.085
connectors for (AWG 28) 1m 0.150
TSX CDP 103
Modicon
Telefast ABE 7 2m TSX CDP 203 0.280
5
system 3m TSX CDP 303 0.410
5m TSX CDP 503 0.670
10 m TSX CDP 1003 1.180
TSX CDP p03 6

Simulation sub-base
kg
8
2 01
9 16-channel Modicon Has 2 HE 10 connectors enabling it to be ABE 7TES160 0.350
7
0
2 01 1
10 Telefast ABE 7 inserted between the PLC I/O module and
2
11
12
simulation sub-base the Modicon Telefast ABE 7H/P/R/S I/O
3
4
13 for discrete I/O sub-base. Used for displaying, forcing,
5
14 inhibiting or continuity of discrete I/O
6 15
7
ABE 7TES160
8
10

3/11
platform 0
Analog I/O modules
Applications Analogue inputs
Type of I/O Inputs isolated between low Thermocouple inputs High level inputs with
3 level channels, thermocouple,

temperature probe
common point
Type Multirange Multirange Voltage/current
Range Voltage 10 V, 5 V, 010 V, - 80+ 80 mV 10 V, 010 V, 05 V,

05 V, 15 V 15 V
4 Current 420 mA, 020 mA

external shunt supplied
020 mA, 420 mA
Thermocouple, B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U
Temperature probe thermocouples 2 or 4-wire thermocouples
Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 1000
temperature probes
Modularity 4 channels 16 channels 8 channels

5 Isolation Between channels: Between channels: Between channels:
2830 V a rms 100 V c common point
Between bus and channels: Between bus and channels: Between bus and channels:
1780 V a rms 1000 V a rms 1000 V a rms
Between channels and earth: Between channels and earth: Between channels and earth:
1780 V a rms 1000 V a rms 1000 V a rms
6 Read time 550 ms 1120 ms (normal scan)

70 ms/channel used
(fast scan)
27 ms (normal scan)
3 ms/channel used
(fast scan)
Response time Configurable filtering User-definable filtering User-definable filtering

0 to 68.5 s 0.04 Te0.012 Te 0 to 3.44 s
(Te: module scan time)
7 Resolution 16 bits 16 bits 12 bits
Connection 20-way screw terminal block: Two 25-way SUB-D One 25-way SUB-D
TSX BLY 01 connectors connector
or two Modicon Telefast or one Modicon Telefast
8
ABE 7CPA12 sub-bases ABE 7CPA02/03 sub-base
Standards Compatible with sensors acc. to standards IEC/EN 60584-1/2/3 PLC: IEC/EN 61131-2
(Thermocouples) and IEC/EN 60751 (Pt 100 temp. probes)
PLC: IEC/EN 61131-2
9 Type of module TSX AEY 414 TSX AEY 1614 TSX AEY 800
Pages 3/16
10
3/12
Analog inputs (continued) Analog outputs
High level inputs with High level inputs isolated High level input with Outputs isolated between Outputs with common point
common point between channels common point channels
3
Voltage/current Voltage/current
10 V, 010 V, 05 V, 15 V 10 V
020 mA, 420 mA 020 mA, 420 mA

4
16 channels 8 channels 4 channels 8 channels
Between channels: Between channels: Between channels: Between channels: Between channels:
5
common point 200 V c common point 1500 V a rms common point
Between bus and channels: Between bus and channels: Between bus and channels: Between bus and channels: Between bus and channels:
1000 V a rms 1000 V a rms 1000 V a rms 1500 V a rms 1000 V a rms
Between channels and earth: Between channels and earth: Between channels and earth: Between channels and earth: Between channels and earth:
1000 V a rms 1000 V a rms. 1000 V a rms 1500 V a rms 1000 V a rms
51 ms (normal scan)
3 ms/channel used
(fast scan)
126.4 ms (normal scan)
3.3 ms/channel used
(fast scan)
1 ms
6
User-definable filtering User-definable filtering 2.5 ms 5 ms
06.50 s 03.82 s
12 bits 16 bits 11 bits + sign 13 bits + sign for voltage

13 bits for current
7
Two 25-way SUB-D One 25-way SUB-D One 25-way SUB-D 20-way screw terminal One 25-way SUB-D
connectors connector connector blocks: TSX BLY 01 connector
or two Modicon Telefast or one Modicon Telefast or one Modicon Telefast or one Modicon Telefast
8
ABE 7CPA02/03 sub-bases ABE 7CPA02/31 sub-base ABE 7CPA03/21 sub-base ABE 7CPA02/03 sub-base
PLC: IEC/EN 61131-2
See page 9/6
TSX AEY 1600 TSX AEY 810 TSX AEY 420 TSX ASY 410 TSX ASY 800
9
3/16
10
3/13
description, platform 0
functions Analog I/O modules
Presentation
Analog I/O modules for Modicon Premium PLCs are equipped with:
1 b Either a 25-way SUB-D connector (TSX AEY 420/800/810 and TSX ASY 800)
b Or two 25-way SUB-D connectors (TSX AEY 1600/1614)
b Or a screw terminal block (TSX AEY 414, TSX ASY 410)
They can be installed in any position in TSX RKY ppp racks, except for the positions
reserved for power supply modules. The analog I/O modules are hot-swappable.
2 In a Premium PLC configuration, the maximum number of analog channels

(12512 channels) depends on the CPU used (see pages 1/10 and 1/19).
Description
TSX AEY/ASY analog I/O modules feature the following on the front panel:
1 A display and module diagnostics block
2 A connector which takes the removable screw terminal block
3 Connection by screw
terminal block
Connection by
SUB-D connector 3 A rotating support containing the module locating device
4 A removable screw terminal block for connecting the I/O directly to the sensors
and preactuators TSX BLY 01 (to be ordered separately)
5 A pivoting cover for accessing the terminal block screws and holding the
1 1 identification label
6 A rotating support containing the module locating device
7 25-way SUB-D connector(s) for connecting the sensors
4 Note: TSX ASY 800 module. This module also has a screw terminal block for connecting the
2 external 24 VR on the front panel (see page 3/16).
Connecting TSX AEY/ASY modules with SUB-D connectors

3 Using the Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system makes it easier to install the
7
5 4 modules by providing access to the inputs (or outputs) via screw terminals.
Connection is via a TSX CAP 030/100 3/10 long shielded cable equipped with
5 SUB-D connectors at either end.
The ABE 7CPA02 Telefast sub-base enables the connection of 8 channels
6
The ABE 7CPA03/31 Telefast sub-base enables:
b Connection of 8 channels and the channel by channel supply of 2 and 4-wire
6 sensors with 24 V c (for the ABE 7CPA03 sub-base)
b Connection of 8 channels and the channel by channel isolated supply of 2 and
Premium 4-wire sensors with 24 V c (for the ABE 7CPA31 sub-base)
(expansion rack)
b Ensures continuity of the current loops when the SUB-D connector is removed
b Protects the current shunts in the modules against overvoltages
The ABE 7CPA12 Telefast sub-base enables 16 thermocouples to be connected,

7 TSX CAP 030
+ +
with 2 TSX CAP 030/100 cables. The terminal block is equipped with a temperature
probe for cold junction compensation.
GND
GND
N1
N1
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
1
3
5
7
9
ABE 7CPA02
Functions
TSX CAP 030
+ +
TSX AEY 420/800/810/1600 analog input modules

GND
GND
N1
N1
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
TSX AEY ppp modules are high level analog input modules with 4 inputs for the
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
1
3
5
7
9
8 ABE 7CPA03/31 TSX AEY 420 module, 8 inputs for the TSX AEY 800/810 modules and 16 inputs for
the TSX AEY 1600 module.
Used with sensors or transmitters, they perform monitoring, measurement and
process control functions for continuous processes.
Depending on the choice made during configuration, the following ranges are
available for each of the inputs on the TSX AEY 420/800/810/1600 modules: 10 V,
010 V, 05 V, 15 V, 020 mA, 420 mA.
9
10
pages 3/14 ... pages 3/16 ...
3/14
Functions (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 0
Analog I/O modules
TSX AEY 420/800/810/1600 analog input modules (continued)
These modules perform the following functions: 1
b Scanning of input channels, protection against overvoltages, adaptation of signals
by analog filtering, scanning by solid state multiplexing
b Adaptation to input signals: gain selection, drift compensation
b Digitization of signals: 12-bit analog/digital converter for TSX AEY 800/1600 and
16-bit analog/digital converter for TSX AEY 420/810
b Conversion of input measurements to user format: recalibration coefficient,
filtering, scaling
2
b Module monitoring: conversion circuit test, range overshoot test, terminal block
presence test, watchdog test
b Isolation of the input channels on TSX AEY 810
b Fast processing of the inputs (1 ms) on TSX AEY 420
TSX AEY 414/1614 analog input modules 3

The TSX AEY 414 is a multirange input module with 4 channels which are isolated
from one another. Depending on the choice made during configuration, the following
ranges are available for each of the inputs:
b B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, U thermocouple or - 13+ 63 mV electrical range
b 2 or 4-wire Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 1000 temperature probe, or ohmic range:
0400 , 03850 .
b High level 10 V, 010 V, 5 V, 05 V (020 mA with external shunt) or 15 V,
4
420 mA (420 mA with external shunt)
The TSX AEY 1614 is an analog input module with 16 thermocouple inputs Depending
on the choice made during configuration, the following range is available for each of
the input channels (supporting a 250 V c or 280 V a common mode between them):
B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U thermocouple range or 80 mV electrical range. 5
These modules perform the following functions:
b Scanning of the input channels, selection of the gain according to the input
signals, multiplexing
b Digitization of the input signals
b Conversion of input measurements to user format: recalibration coefficient,
linearization, cold junction compensation, filtering, scaling 6
b Module monitoring: conversion circuit test, range overshoot test, terminal block
presence test, sensor link test, watchdog test
TSX ASY 410/800 analog output modules

The TSX ASY 410 module has 4 analog outputs which are isolated from one
another, and the TSX ASY 800 module has 8 outputs with common point.
Depending on the choice made during configuration, the following ranges are available
7
for each of the outputs: 10 V, 020 mA and 420 mA without external supply.
These modules perform the following functions:

b Protection of the module against overvoltages
b Adaptation to the different actuators: voltage or current output
b Conversion of digital signals to analog signals: 11 bits + sign for TSX ASY 410 and
8
13 bits + sign for TSX ASY 800
b Conversion of application data into data that can be used by the digital/analog
converter
b Module monitoring and indication of faults to the application: converter test, range
overshoot test, terminal block presence test, watchdog test
Setup
9
The Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software provides configuration and debugging
functions:
b Selection of the modules used
b Configuration of the channels according to the type of module: scanning (normal
or fast), cold junction compensation (internal or external), range, filtering, display
format, task (MAST or FAST), detection of terminal block presence, wiring check 10
b Debugging, access to certain parameter settings, module/channel diagnostics,
forcing, calibration
page 3/14 pages 3/16 ...
3/15
platform 0
Analog I/O modules
Analog input modules

Type of input Input signal Resolution Connection No. of Reference Weight
1 High level analog with
range
10 V, 16 bits 1 x 25-way
channels
4 high-speed TSX AEY 420
kg
0.330
common point 0...10 V, SUB-D channels
0...5 V, connector
1...5 V,
0...20 mA,
4...20 mA
2 Low level analog isolated 10 V,

0...10 V,
16 bits Screw terminal
block (1)
4 channels TSX AEY 414 0.320
0...5 V,
1...5 V,
5 V,
0...20 mA,
4...20 mA,
- 13...+ 63 mV,
0...400
3 0...3850 ,
temp. probe,
thermocouple
High level analog with 10 V, 12 bits 1 x 25-way 8 channels TSX AEY 800 0.310
common point 0...10 V, SUB-D
0...5 V, connector
1...5 V,
4
2 x 25-way 16 channels TSX AEY 1600 0.340
0...20 mA, SUB-D
4...20 mA connectors
High level analog isolated 10 V, 16 bits 1 x 25-way 8 channels TSX AEY 810 0.330
0...10 V, SUB-D
0...5 V, connector
1...5 V
0...20 mA
5 TSX AEY 1600/1614
4...20 mA
Thermocouple 63 mV, 16 bits 2 x 25-way 16 channels TSX AEY 1614 0.350

(B, E, J, K, L, N, SUB-D
R, S, T, U) connectors
6
Analog output modules
Type of output Output signal Resolution Connection No. of Reference Weight
range channels (1) kg
Analog isolated 10 V, 11 bits Screw terminal 4 channels TSX ASY 410 0.350
7 0...20 mA,
4...20 mA
+ sign block (2)
Analog with 10 V, 13 bits 1 x 25-way 8 channels TSX ASY 800

common point 0...20 mA, + sign SUB-D (2)
4...20 mA connector
8 (1) TSX BLY 01 removable screw terminal block not supplied. To be ordered separately.
(2) The number of TSX ASY 800 modules is limited to 1 per rack with single format power supply, and 2 per rack with double
format power supply (when this supplies the 24 c VR voltage required by the outputs).
10
Presentation: Functions:
page 3/14 pages 3/14 ...
3/16
platform 0
Analog I/O modules
Description Compatible Use Type of Reference Weight

with module
TSX AEY 800 Distribution of 8 channels on
terminal block
Screw ABE 7CPA02
kg
0.290
1
sub-bases TSX AEY 810 screw terminals
ABE7CPA0p TSX AEY 1600
TSX ASY 800
(1)
TSX AEY 420 Distribution of 8 channels with Screw ABE 7CPA03 0.330
TSX AEY 800 common point on screw
TSX AEY 1600 terminals, protected sensor
power supply, continuity of 2
current loops during
disconnection, protection
against overvoltages
TSX AEY 810 Distribution of 8 isolated Screw ABE 7CPA31 0.410

channels on screw terminals,
channel by channel sensor
power supply (without common
point), protection against
3
overvoltages
TSX AEY 1614 Distribution of 16 channels on Screw ABE 7CPA12 0.360

screw terminals, integrated
temperature probe for external
cold junction compensation
TSX AEY 420 Distribution of 4 channels on Screw ABE 7CPA21 0.200 4

TSX ASY 410 screw terminals
(2)
Description Compatible Use Length Reference Weight

with module kg
Connecting cables TSX AEY 420
TSX AEY 800
Link between 25-way SUB-D
connectors on analog I/O
3m
10 m
TSX CAP 030
TSX CAP 100
0.670
1.120
5
TSX AEY 810 modules and ABE 7CPApp
TSX AEY 1600 sub-bases
TSX AEY 1614
(3)
TSX ASY 800
TSX BLY 01
TSX ASY 410 Link between module and 1.5 m ABF Y25S150 0.500
ABE 7CPA21 sub-bases
(4)
2m ABF Y25S200 0.560 6
3m ABF Y25S300 0.740
5m ABF Y25S500 0.920
20-way removable screw TSX AEY 414 To be ordered separately with Screw TSX BLY 01 0.100
terminal block TSX ASY 410 each I/O module with screw
terminal block connection
7
Replacement part
Set of 4 resistors TSX AEY 414 Adaptation for current range TSX AAK2 0.020
250 (resistors supplied with
TSX AEY 414 module)
(1) Can be used with TSX AEY 420 module.

8
(2) Can be used with TSX ASY 410 module by using ABF Y25Spp0p cables.
(3) Requires the use of two TSX CAP 030 cables for connection to the ABE 7CPA12 sub-base.
(4) Includes the TSX BLY 01 20-way removable screw terminal block.
10
Presentation: Functions:
page 3/14 pages 3/14 ...
3/17
Selection guide Modicon distributed I/O solutions
Type of splitter box and module Monobloc IP 67 I/O splitter boxes
1 Modicon ETB
Available buses and Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP

networks EtherNet/IP
Max. number per connection point
5 Discrete I/O Modularity Splitter box with 16 configurable I/O, 16 I, 12 I + 4 O, or 8 I +8 O
Input voltage 24 V c
Output voltage 24 V c
6 Analog I/O
Application-specific I/O
I/O connection M12 connectors
8
Type of housing Plastic
Type of module ETB 1Eppp

Pages Please consult the catalogue pages on our website www.schneider-electric.com
9
10
3/18
Monobloc IP 20 distributed I/O Optimum IP 20 distributed I/O Modular IP 20 distributed I/O
Modicon Momentum Modicon OTB Modicon STB

1
Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP

Modbus Plus CANopen EtherNet/IP
Fipio Modbus (RS 485) CANopen
INTERBUS
Profibus DP
Modbus Plus
Fipio
4
DeviceNet INTERBUS
Profibus DP
DeviceNet
1 sub-base with 1 CPU or 1 communication module 1 interface module + 7 Twido expansion modules 1 NIM (Network Interface Module) + 32 I/O modules
Sub-base with 16 I, 32 I, 8 O, 16 O, 32 O, 10 I/8 O,

16 I/8 O, 16 I/12 O and 16 I/16 O
12 I/8 O (interface module)
8 I, 16 I, 32 I, 8 O, 16 O, 32 O, 4 I/4 O and 16 I/8 O
Module with 2 I, 4 I, 6 I, 16 I, 2 O, 4 O, 6 O or 16 O 5
(expansion modules)
24 V c, 120 V a and 230 V a 24 V c 24 V c, 115 V a and 230 V a
24 V c V, 120 V a and 230 V a and relay 24 V c and relay 24 V c, 115/230 V a and relay
8 I, 16 I or 4 O voltage/current sub-bases 2 I, 4 I, 8 I, 1 O, 2 O, 2 I/1 O and 4 I/2 O Modules with 2, 4 or 8 inputs and 1 or 2 outputs 6
Sub-base with 4 thermocouple or probe inputs (expansion modules) (voltage/current)
voltage/current, thermocouple or Sub-base with 2 thermocouple or probe inputs
temperature probe
10 kHz/200 kHz 2-channel counter sub-base Integrated in interface module: Counter module with one 40 kHz channel
- Two 5 kHz/20 kHz channels
6 I/3 O 120 V a sub-base with 1 Modbus port

- 2 PWM function channels
Parallel interface modules for TeSys Quickfit and

7
TeSys U motor starters, integrated connection for
third-party CANopen products
Screw or spring-type removable terminal blocks Removable screw terminal block (interface module) Removable screw or spring-type connectors,
Removable screw terminal block, non-removable Telefast connectors
8
spring-type terminal block and HE 10 connector
(expansion modules)
Plastic
170 ADp OTB 1p0 DM9LP STB ppp

Please consult the catalogue pages on our website www.schneider-electric.com
9
10
3/19
Presentation Installation system
TeSys Quickfit for motor starter
components
Components with spring terminals
TeSys Quickfit is a modular system which standardizes and simplifies the setting up
of motor starters with its pre-wired control and power circuits.
1 The installation of a motor starter is therefore a quick, easy, reliable and open-ended
process.
In addition, this system:
b Enables the motor starter to be customized at a later date
b Reduces maintenance time
b Saves space inside the equipment by reducing the number of terminals,
cable ducts and intermediate interfaces
2 System for motor starters with spring terminals

Motor starters with TeSys GV2 ME circuit-breakers
b From 0 to 18 A maximum
b TeSys GV2 ME circuit-breakers combined with TeSys D contactors from 9 to 25 A
(spring terminal version)
b Quickfit pre-wired power and control connections
3 Motor starters with TeSys GV3 P circuit-breakers
b From 9 to 65 A maximum
b TeSys GV3 P circuit-breakers combined with TeSys D contactors from 40 to 65 A
(spring terminal version)
b Quickfit pre-wired control connections only
b For pre-wired power connections, use the busbars from the TeSys D 40 to 65 A
4 contactor range (see the Protection and power control catalogue)
Motor starter with GV2 ME circuit-breakers
This range comprises pre-wiring components for
b The power circuits
b The control circuits
5
Power circuit pre-wiring components
(motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers only)
b A power circuit connection kit comprising, for each starter, a plate for mounting
the contactor and the circuit-breaker, and two power connection modules
b A power splitter box for 2 or 4 starters
b Fixed terminals for connecting a power supply up to 60 A (16 mm2)
b Removable terminals for connecting the motor power supply cables and the
earth cables (6 mm2)
6
Note: With GV3 circuit-breakers, no accessories are required for pre-wiring the
power circuit. The terminals on the GV3 Ppp are removable.
This circuit-breaker is also sold with a single terminal block (reference: GV3 Ppp1).
Control circuit pre-wiring components

(motor starters with TeSys GV2 and GV3 circuit-breakers)
7 b A control circuit connection module which is mounted directly on the contactor
and the circuit-breaker on each starter. This module incorporates the status and
Motor starter with GV3 P circuit-breakers
control data for this motor starter.
b A parallel wiring module which concentrates data from each motor starter:
v HE 10 connector, for centralized applications. Data is transmitted to the PLC via
the Modicon Telefast pre-wired system.
v STB, designed for decentralized automation architectures. This module is suitable
8 for use in a Modicon STB configuration for connection to the PLC via a fieldbus.
10
3/20
Presentation (continued) Installation system
components
Components with spring terminals
Control/command
HE 10 connection
1
1 3
1 Automation platform
2 Connection cable
TSXCDPpp or ABFH20pp
3 Splitter box LU9 G02 2 2
2
Connection on bus using Modicon STB (1)

Configuration example (for motor starter applications only):
3
Power supply module
Module STB PDT 3100
Connection base STB XBA 2200
Terminal block STB XTB 1130
Parallel interface module (2)
Module STB EPI 2145
4
Connection base STB XBA 3000
Network interface module (3)
CANopen STB NCO 1010 (4)
Fipio STB NFP 2210
Ethernet TCP/IP STB NIP 2210
InterBus
Profibus DP
STB NIB 1010 (4)
STB NDP 1010 (4)
5
4 Network interface module DeviceNet STB NDN 1010 (4)
5 Power supply module Modbus Plus STB NMP 2210
6 Parallel interface module Terminal block STB WTS 2120
4 5 6
TeSys Quickfit LAD 9AP3 pp used with APP1 Cpp modules 6
7 TeSys Quickfit module 9

8 Adaptor plate APP 2CX
9 Splitter box LU9 G02 for 8
10
8
direct motor starters with channel
connections on the APP 1C module side via
2 HE 10 connectors (20-way), and on the
TeSys Quickfit side via 8 RJ45 connectors
10 Connection cable APP 2AH40H060 7 8
The motor starter is connected to an APP 1Cp 7 module using an adaptor plate
9
APP 2CX 8 and a cable APP 2AH40H060 10.
Information is available on the module for each motor starter:
b 1 output: motor control
b 2 inputs: circuit-breaker status and contactor status
(1) Please consult the IP 20 distributed inputs/outputs Modicon catalogue.

(2) For 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters.
10
(3) Reference to be selected according to the network used.
(4) Optimized version.
3/21
Compatibility Installation system 3

components
TeSys Quickfit, compatibility with PLC I/O and distributed I/O

Automation platforms Parallel wiring module Modicon STB
1 parallel interface module
Type Modularity of Compatible I/O Splitter box Module

connection to modules - For 8 TeSys model U motor starters (16 PLC - For 4 TeSys model U motor starters
4 the PLC inputs and 8 PLC outputs)
- 8 RJ45 connectors, motor starter side
- 4 RJ45 connectors, motor starter side
- 2 HE 10 connectors, PLC side
LU9 G02 STB EPI 2145
Modicon TSX Micro platform
5 16 inputs
+ 12 outputs
TSX DMZ 28DTK 8 motor starters max.: 1 splitter box
2 x 16 inputs TSX DMZ 64DTK 16 motor starters max.: 2 splitter boxes

+ 2 x 16 outputs
Modicon Premium platform
16 inputs TSX DMY 28FK 8 motor starters max.: 1 splitter box
6 + 12 outputs
2 x 16 inputs TSX DEY 32D2K 16 motor starters max.: 2 splitter boxes
+ 2 x 16 outputs TSX DSY32T2K
4 x 16 inputs TSX DEY 64D2K 32 motor starters max.: 4 splitter boxes
+ 2 x 16 outputs TSX DSY32T2K
Modicon Quantum platform
7 2 x 16 inputs 140 DDI 353 00,

+ 2 x 16 outputs 140 DDI 853 00
16 motor starters max.: 2 splitter boxes
140 DD0 353 10

6 x 16 inputs 140 DDI 364 00 48 motor starters max.: 6 splitter boxes
+ 6 x 16 outputs 140 DD0 364 00
Modicon STB distributed I/O
8
16 inputs STB EPI 1145 4 motor starters max.: 1 parallel interface
+ 8 outputs module
10
Presentation:
page 3/20
3/22
TeSys Quickfit, compatibility with PLC I/O and distributed I/O (continued)
1
Splitter box 16 channels to Connection cables Connection cables Cabled connectors Connection cables
2 x 8 channels - With 2 HE 10 connectors - With 2 HE 10 connectors - Terminal block with - With 2 RJ45 connectors
- 3 HE 10 connectors - AWG 22, 0.324 mm2
- 5 lengths: 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5 or
- AWG 28, 0.080 mm2
- 3 lengths: 1, 2 or 3 m
2 cables fitted with HE
10 connectors
- 3 lengths: 0.3, 1 or 3 m
4
10 m - AWG 22, 0.324 mm2
- 2 lengths: 1.5 or 3 m
ABE 7ACC 02 TSX CDP pp3 (1) ABF H20 Hpp0 (2) ABF M32 Hpp0 (3) LU9 Rpp (4)
Modicon TSX Micro platform
2 cables 5
1 splitter box 5 cables
(16 PLC outputs remain)
Modicon Premium platform
2 cables
1 splitter box 5 cables 6

2 splitter boxes 10 cables
Modicon Quantum platform
3 splitter boxes
2 cabled connectors
7
3 splitter boxes 15 cables
Modicon STB distributed I/O
8
4 cables
(1) Replace pp by 05: length 0.5 m, 10: length 1 m, 20: length 2 m, 30: length 3 m, 50: length 5 m, 100: length 10 m.
9
(2) Replace pp by 10: length 1 m, 20: length 2 m, 30: length 3 m.
(3) Replace pp by 15: length 1.5 m, 30: length 3 m.
(4) Replace pp by 03: length 0.3 m, 10: length 1 m, 30: length 3 m.
10
3/23
Contents 4 - Application-specific modules and
solutions
Preventa safety modules and solutions

Use of Preventa safety modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/2
1 Preventa safety modules - type TSX PAY 262
Presentation, functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/4
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/6
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/7
Preventa configurable safety controllers - type XPS MC
2 Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/8
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/11
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/12
Counter and electronic cam modules

3 Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/14
Counter modules
Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/16
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/18
Measurement and counter module
4 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/22
Electronic cam module
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/26
Motion control modules

Modules for stepper motors
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/32
Modules for servo motors
6 Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/34
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/38
SERCOS modules for servo motors
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/40
7 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 4/42
page 4/45
MFB motion control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/46
ISP Plus integrated weighing system

8 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/49
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/50
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/51
Redundancy systems
9 Hot Standby system - Unity Pro software
Architectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/54
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/58
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
page 4/60
4/0
Warm Standby system - PL7 Pro software
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 4/64
page 4/66
1
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/67
10
4/1
platform
Use of Preventa safety modules
Safety
1 Production workshops and technical building installations are subject to increasing requirements in terms of
machine safety.
3
A good machine is a safe machine, combining:
b Safety of personnel (machine is not dangerous).
b Availability of the production tool (machine operational at any time).
b Safety is achieved by:
v simultaneously optimising safety and availability,
4 v using basic principles: redundancy, self-monitoring, etc,
v considering reliability (failure determining the behavior of the machine in a specified position, positive safety
features),
v ease of maintenance.
The machinery directive and the work equipment directive

The machinery directive
5 A machine manufacturer is required to conform to the machinery directive
The machinery directive (89/392/EEC, 91/36/EEC, 93/44/EEC and 93/68/EEC) is designed to ensure the free
circulation of machinery and safety components in European Union countries and to improve the level of safety
for personnel.
Harmonised European standards establish technical specifications which comply with the minimum safety
requirements defined in the corresponding directive.
6 Manufacturers must produce machinery which conforms to safety requirements.
The work equipment directive

The user is required to ensure that his range of machines conforms to the use of work equipment by
workers at work directive
Directive 89/655/EEC lays down the minimum objectives for protection in the working environment and in particular
concerns the use of products. The directive specifies the general framework of preventative measures which should
7 be taken in the workplace.
Safety and automated systems

All dangerous areas must be identified and have restricted access, controlled in a secure manner, ie. any
breakdown or careless operation must leave the automated system in a safe position.
It should be noted that the use of safety products does not necessarily mean that the machine conforms to the
8 machinery directive.
It is the operation, wiring, compatibility and scheme used, which make the entire machine safe. It is more
important to think in terms of safety solutions rather than safety products.
Groupe Schneider, safety specialists

Groupe Schneider, specialists in safety, has a range of several thousand products, all concerned directly or
indirectly with safety. Some of these products are exclusively designed for safety.
9
Preventa safety module Mushroom head Two-handel control

10 emergency stop button Safety module integrated in PLC
For further details on components for safety applications, please consult our catalogue:
Safety solutions using Preventa.
4/2
Presentation (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform
Use of Preventa safety modules
Non-controlled safety systems

The control signal from the protection device (emergency stop pushbutton illustrated
to the left) acts directly on the power contactor of the machine. 1
In this type of scheme, the risks of simple faults are:
Emergency b Emergency stop button being shorted.
stop
b KM1 contactor sticking.
When the operator presses an emergency stop button, the instruction is not
processed, and another sequence can begin following the emergency stop, despite
the presence of the fault. 2
KM1
KM1
In the case of failure, the safety function (1) is compromised.
Therefore, a reliable intermediate relay system must be used.
KM1
(1) A safety function is a function whose non-execution or untimely execution results in the
immediate placement of the equipment into a non-hazardous position. 3
M
4
Safety system controlled by a Preventa safety module
5
Feedback loop
KM6 KM5 KM5 KM5
Emergency
stop Run
KM6 KM6
6
Preventa safety module Redundancy
7
KM6
M
KM5
KM5 and KM6 contactors Independent safety circuits

with mechnically linked contacts
Preventa safety modules provide a reliable interposing relay function by 8

eliminating the risks of:
b A control circuit fault (inputs).
b A power circuit fault (outputs).
b A fault on an internal safety module component.
The safety function remains operative whenever any one of these faults
occur. 9
Note: For the use of mechanically linked contacts CA2-KN22/KN31, LC1-D09/D18/D25 with
contacts which can be used in the feedback loop, please consult our Customer Care Centre.
10
4/3
functions platform
Preventa safety module type TSX PAY 262
Presentation
TSX PAY 262 safety module integrated in the Modicon Premium PLC combines :
1 v the simplicity of use of Preventa safety module
v the high performance of PLC diagnostics
in addition to the advantages of a standard PLC (extended choice of I/O, simplicity
of setup, flexibility for hardware and software developments, etc).
TSX PAY 262 safety module incorporate in a single module, a Preventa (XPS)
hard-wired safety block and an electronic data acquisition unit for complete
2 diagnostics of input contacts and the state of outputs in the safety system.
TSX PAY 262 safety module is used to safely interrupt one or more Emergency stop or
safety stop control circuits according to the standards IEC/EN 60204-1 and
EN/ISO 13850.
The proven safety of hard-wired technology and the performance of Premium PLCs
3 make the TSX PAY 262 module the optimum solution for creating machines which
are more available, safer, more compact and lower in cost.
Solution for applications requiring safety systems and high-performance

diagnostics
The solution integrated safety module enables complete diagnostics on the entire
safety system. This diagnostics quickly locates the faulty contact, pushbutton cables,
4 Premium + TSX PAY 262
Limit
switch or limit switch, without additional contacts on the inputs and without any additional
Emergency wiring.
stop
TSX PAY 262 safety module has its own power supplies and operate independently
of the PLC processor.
TSX PAY 262 module is suitable for Emergency stop and limit switch monitoring
5 applications, demanding a level of safety up to category 4 according to standard
EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1 (parts of control systems relating to safety).
K4
K3 M
Functions
6 TSX PAY 262 module offers the following functions:
b Monitoring of 1 to 12 double or single pushbutton contacts, Emergency stop and
limit switches for safety guards for an Emergency stop or immediate stop safety
system (Emergency stop category 0 according to standard EN/ISO 13850).
b Hard-wired safety block identical to Preventa XPS safety modules:
v 2 N/O (normally open) safety outputs,
7 v 12 double contact inputs.
b Safety block independent of the Premium PLC processor: the PLC does not
operate on the safety module.
b 28 LEDs on the module display block: for complete diagnostics of the safety
system.
b Electronic data acquisition units for complete diagnostics of the safety system:
v read the status of the 24 inputs (image of the status of the 12 pushbuttons or limit
8 switches)
v read the enable input,
v read the feedback loop,
v read the safety outputs control,
v monitor the external power supply of the module.
This electronic data acquisition is designed so that the safety function is not
9 compromised by any failure. If the safety system uses more sensors, it is possible to
connect several TSX PAY 262 modules.
10
4/4
Function (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform
TSX PAY 262 module schematic

To ensure the safety function irrespective of the first failure, it is compulsory to use:
b For the inputs: Emergency stop pushbuttons or safety limit switches with double
contacts
1
b For the outputs: if relaying is necessary, use a guided contact relay
b On the module power supply : an F1 protection fuse.
13-14 and 23-24 Safety outputs, volt-free

Y1-Y2/S33: Feedback loop B1 TSX PAY 262
F1
Y2/S33-S34: Run enable
2
24 V A1
Y3-Y4: Choice of reactivation mode 0V A2
S121 to S232: 12 contacts on (+) input channel S121
S01 to S112: 12 contacts on (+) input channel S12 S131/S122 Ix,12
A1-A2: c 24 V external power supply S13 Ix,13
S141/S132
B1: Selection of double or single contact wiring
S231/S222
S23 Ix,23
3
S232 I
Y1 s
K3 K4 Y2/S33 o
Safety logic
S34 l
K2 K1 a
Y3
Bus interface
t
Y4 Bus
i
S112
o
S11 S111/S102 Ix,11
n
S21/S12
4
S1 S11/S02 Ix,1
S0 S01 Ix,0
F2 K2 K1
L1(+) 23
13
K3 K4
14
24 5
N(-)
Functional diagrams
Emergency stop function
Power supply On Emergency stop
6
voltage activated
1 Emergency stop not activated
Input channel (+) S121 to S232 0
Input channel (-) S01 to S112
Feedback loop Y1-Y2/S33
Start-up button Y2/S33-S34 N/O

7
Output 13-14 N/O
Output 23-24 N/O
Protective function with automatic start-up

8
Power 1st switch Guard open
supply 2nd switch
voltage Guard closed
Input channel (+) S121 to S232
Input channel (-) S01 to S112
Feedback loop Y1-Y2/S33

9
1
Shunt to Y2/S33-S34 N/O 0
Output 13-14 N/O
Output 23-24 N/O

200 ms
max. 10
4/5
connection principle platform
Description
1
TSX PAY 262 safety module comprises on the front panel :
1 2 1 A rigid IP 20 casing to hold and protect the electronic card.
2 A display block (32 LEDs) showing operating modes, faults and the status of the
6 safety system.
3 A high density 44-way SUB-D connector for connecting the safety system.
3 4 A 6-way removable screw terminal block for connecting the safety outputs.
5 Marking for labelling the safety outputs.
6 Marking for the external power supply of the module.
2 4
Connection principle
Two types of connection for TSX PAY 262 safety module are available:
4
Standard wiring
A TSX CPP 301 3 m cordset is fitted with a 44-way SUB-D moulded, elbow
connector at one end, and flying leads differentiated by a colour code at the other
end.
5 This wiring system conforms to the standard EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1.
6
Fast wiring
Using the Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system facilitates the installation of
TSX PAY 262 safety module by giving access to inputs on the safety system via screw
terminals.
7 Connection is carried out using TSX CPP p02 cordsets fitted with 44-way SUB-D
moulded, elbow connectors at both ends.
The Modicon Telefast ABE 7CPA13 sub-base enables the connection of 12 double or
single contact inputs, the power supply, reset inputs and the feedback loop.
This wiring system conforms to the standard EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1.

8
10
4/6
platform
Safety module
Type of input c 24 V Safety outputs Connections Reference Weight
12 Emergency stops or limit 2 N/O Inputs: 44-way SUB-D connector TSX PAY 262
kg
0.430
1
switches (double or single (volt-free) Outputs: screw terminal
contacts), 2.5 A (Ithe) (supplied)
1 reset button,
1 feedback loop,
1 reset monitor
Connection accessory 2
Description For Type of connector on Reference Weight
connection on TSX PAY 262 kg
screw terminal
TSX PAY 262 Modicon Telefast ABE 7 Safety system, SUB-D, 44-way ABE 7CPA13 0.290
sub-base reset, monitoring
for TSX PAY 262 module and loop inputs
Power supply
c 24 V 3
Connecting cordsets
Use From To Length Reference Weight
TSX PAY 262 kg
For fast wiring

module
44-way SUB-D ABE-7CPA13 1m TSX CPP 102 0.160 4
ABE 7CPA13 connector sub-base
2m TSX CPP 202 0.260
3m TSX CPP 302 0.360
For standard wiring 44-way SUB-D Flying leads

connector with colour-
3m TSX CPP 301 0.330
5
coded wires
TSX CPP p02 TSX CPP301
10
4/7
Presentation Safety automation solutions
Preventa configurable safety controllers
Type XPS MC
Presentation
Configurable safety controllers XPS MCppZp are designed to provide a solution
1 for safety applications requiring conformity to Performance Level PL e/Category
4 in accordance to standard EN/ISO 13849-1 and SIL 3 requirements of standard
EN/IEC 61508.
The range of configurable safety controllers comprises 6 products, each with different
technical characteristics.
2
Configurable Safety Safety Communication via
controllers inputs outputs (1) CANopen bus Profibus bus Modbus serial
link
XPS MC16Z 16 6+2x2 Yes, slave
3 XPS MC16ZC 16 6+2x2 Yes, slave Yes, slave
XPS MC16ZP 16 6+2x2 Yes, slave Yes, slave
XPS MC32Z 32 6+2x2 Yes, slave

XPS MC16ZC XPS MC32ZC
4 XPS MC32ZC 32 6+2x2 Yes, slave Yes, slave
XPS MC32ZP 32 6+2x2 Yes, slave Yes, slave
Line control
5 The safety inputs are supplied by the various control outputs (2), in such a manner
so as to monitor for short-circuits between the inputs, short-circuits between each
input and earth or the presence of residual voltages.
The controller, assisted by the control outputs, continuously tests all the connected
inputs. As soon as an error is detected on an input, all the outputs associated with this
input are disconnected. Safety outputs associated with other inputs remain active.
6 Configuration
Safety controllers XPS MCppZp are configurable and addressable using software
XPS MCWIN running on a PC. Connection accessories required: see page 4/13.
Connections
7 For connection of safety inputs and outputs, safety controllers XPS MCppZp can be
fitted with a choice of:
v screw connectors type XPS MCTSpp, or
v spring clip connectors type XPS MCTCpp.
These connectors are to be ordered separately, see page 4/13.
(1) 8 independent safety outputs = 6 solid-state safety outputs + 2 x 2 relay outputs (4 relay
8 outputs with guided contacts).

(2) 8 control outputs are available but they are not safety outputs.
10
4/8
Presentation (continued) Safety automation solutions
Type XPS MC
Safety functions
Configuration of the safety functions is carried out using software XPS MCWIN
which is available on the Safety Suite V2 CD-ROM.
30 certified safety functions are available with this software and they are easily
1
assignable to the safety outputs. The safety functions have multiple combination
possibilities and various starting conditions.
The safety functions are:
v certified in accordance with EN/ISO 13849-1 and IEC 61508,
v configurable in controller XPS MC using software XPS MCWIN which is available
on the Safety Suite V2 software pack.
All 8 safety outputs are suitable for use in safety related parts of control systems
2
conforming to Performance Level PL e/Category 4 in accordance to EN/ISO 13849-1.
Main safety functions

b Emergency stop monitoring, with or without time delay, 1 or 2-channel wiring
b Two-hand control (type III-C conforming to EN 574/ISO 13851)
b Guard monitoring with 1 or 2 limit switches
3
b Guard monitoring for injection presses and blowing machines
b Magnetic switch monitoring
b Sensing mat monitoring
b Light curtain (type 4 conforming to EN/IEC 61496, relay or solid-state output)
monitoring
b Zero speed detection
b Dynamic monitoring of hydraulic valves on linear presses
4
b Monitoring safety stop at top dead centre on eccentric press
b Safety time delays
b Muting function of light curtains
b Enabling switch monitoring, 2 or 3 contact
b Hydraulic press
b Eccentric press
b Foot switch monitoring
5
b Chain shaft breakage monitoring
b Position selector
Application schemes and functional diagrams

See instruction sheet on www.schneider-electric.com 6
10
4/9
Presentation Safety automation solutions
Type XPS MC
Communication
CANopen fieldbus
1 Micro automation platform
Premium automation Configurable safety controllers XPS MCppZC incorporate
platform Modicon STB a SUB-D 9-pin male connector for direct connection on
Configurable
controllers CANopen bus.
XPS MC16ZC,
MC32ZC
CANopen bus is a open bus that ensures deterministic and
reliable access to the real-time data of automation equipment.
2
CANopen bus
The bus uses a shielded dual twisted pair on which a maximum
of 127 devices can be connected by chaining.
The baud rate varies between 10 Kbps and 1Mbps depending
on the length of the bus (5000 m to 20 m).
3
ATV 71 FTB 1CN
TeSys U TeSys Quickfit
4 Premium automation platform

Profibus bus
Configurable safety controllers XPS MCppZP incorporate

a SUB-D 9-pin male connector for connection on Profibus bus.
Configurable safety controllers XPS MCppZP are slaves
on the Profibus bus.
Profibus bus
5 Repeater
Profibus bus is a fieldbus that meets industrial communication
requirements. The topology of the Profibus bus is of the linear
Third-party
(3 max.) type with a centralised master/slave type access procedure.
products
The physical link is a single shielded twisted pair.
Configurable controller
XPS MC16ZP, MC32ZP
Modbus serial link

Premium automation platform Magelis graphic terminal
Configurable safety controllers XPS MCppZp incorporate
7 a Modbus communication interface (RJ45 connector) for
configuration and diagnostics.
This interface enables connection of the controllers to:
Modbus serial link v a PC (configuration),
v a PLC (diagnostics), or
v an operator dialogue terminal (diagnostics).
8 The Modbus serial link comprises a master station (Premium

automation platform) and slave stations (configurable
Configurable controllers XPS MC16Zp/MC32Zp, controllers XPS MC16/32Zp).
slaves of the Modbus serial link Two exchange mechanisms are possible:
b Question/response: the questions from the master are
addressed to a given slave. The response is expected by
return from the interrogated slave.
9 b Distribution: the master distributes a message to all the
stations of the Modbus serial link. The latter execute the order
without transmitting a reply.
10
4/10
Description Safety automation solutions
Type XPS MC
Description
Configurable safety controllers XPS MCppZp
1 9
Front face of controllers: 1
2 8 1 LED display and system diagnostics.
2 Two LEDs for CANopen or Profibus (1) connection status.
3 7 3 SUB-D 9-pin male connector for connection on CANopen bus (XPS MC16ZC/
MC32ZC) or SUB-D 9-pin female connector for connection on Profibus bus
(XPS MC16ZP/MC32ZP).
4 Solid-state safety output and "muting" indicator light terminals.
5 Power supply (24 V c) and relay safety output terminals.
2
4 6 Control output terminals for power supply to safety inputs and safety input terminals.
7 RJ45 connector for connection on Modbus serial link.
8 RESET button (resetting of controller).
6
Rear face of controllers:
9 Fixing plate for mounting on rail.
5
3
Configurable safety controller XPS MCppZp,

with screw connectors
4
LED details
LED Colour Status Meaning
11 10 9 1 PWR Green On Supply voltage present.
2 CNF Yellow On In configuration mode.
1
3 E In Red
Flashing
On
Not configured, initial power-up.
Internal error: all safety outputs deactivated.
5
2
4 E Ex Red On External error: all safety outputs associated
3 with the defective circuit are deactivated.
4 5 COM Green On Controller communicating via the TER (RJ45)
5 connection.
6
7
6 R1, R2 Green On Relay outputs 13/14, 23/24, 33/34 and
43/44 activated. 6
8 Flashing Fault on these outputs.
7 RUN Green Off Hardware OK for the Profibus bus or the
Illuminated display CANopen bus.
On Communicating on Profibus bus or on
CANopen bus. Normal status.
8 ERR Red On Communication impossible, configuration
error, damaged cabling or absence.
7
Bus deactivated
Off Communicating on CANopen or Profibus bus.
Normal status.
Flashing Warning limit reached.
(x 1)
Flashing Control event error on CANopen bus. 8
(x 2)
Flashing Synchronisation error on CANopen bus.
(x 3)
9 116 Green On Input circuit closed.
132 Flashing Error detected on input relating to LED.
10 o1o6 Green On Solid-state output activated. 9
Flashing Short-circuit, fault on output.
11 RUN Green On Run mode.
Flashing Changing from run mode to stop mode.
(1) Depending on controller model.
10
4/11
References Safety automation solutions
Type XPS MC
References
Configurable safety controllers (connector not included)
1 Number of inputs Number of outputs Communication
(Link and bus)
Reference Weight
kg
Relay Solid-state
16 4 (2 x 2) 6 Modbus XPS MC16Z 0.820
Modbus, CANopen XPS MC16ZC 0.820
2 Modbus, Profibus XPS MC16ZP 0.820
XPS MC16Z XPS MC32Z
3 32 4 (2 x 2) 6 Modbus XPS MC32Z 0.840
Modbus, CANopen XPS MC32ZC 0.840
Modbus, Profibus XPS MC32ZP 0.840
Plug-in connectors for configurable safety controllers (1)

Description For use with Reference Weight
5 XPS MC16ZC XPS MC32ZC
Screw connectors XPS MC16Z, MC16ZC, MC16ZP XPS MCTS16
kg
0.080
XPS MC32Z, MC32ZC, MC32ZP XPS MCTS32 0.110
Spring clip XPS MC16Z, MC16ZC, MC16ZP XPS MCTC16 0.080

6 connectors
XPS MC32Z, MC32ZC, MC32ZP XPS MCTC32 0.110
7 XPS MC16ZP XPS MC32ZP

Configuration software
b Reference XPS MCWIN is the full version of configuration software XPS MCWIN
version 2.10 and must be installed if no previous version of this software has been
installed.
b Reference SSVXPSMCWINUP is an update for configuration software XPS MCWIN
and can be used if XPS MCWIN has been installed using Safety Suite V1. An update
from version 2.0 to 2.10 for the software XPS MCWIN will then be performed.
8 Description Operating
system
Characteristics Languages Reference
(2)
Weight
kg
Configuration Windows Software FR, XPS MCWIN 0.520
software for 2000, available on EN,
controllers Windows XP Safety Suite V2 DE,
XPS MCppZp software pack IT,
CD-ROM + user ES,
manual PT
9 XPS MCWIN Windows Software update FR, SSVXPSMCWINUP 0.520
software update 2000, available on EN,
CD-ROM + user Windows XP Safety Suite V2 DE,
manual software pack IT,
ES,
PT
10 (1) To be ordered separately to the controllers.

(2) EDS and GSD files are available on the XPS MCWIN configuration software CD-ROM.
4/12
References (continued) Safety automation solutions
Type XPS MC
References
Connecting cables (1)
Function Length
m
Reference Weight
kg
1
Diagnostics using Magelis operator dialogue terminal type XBT GT 3 VW3 A8 306 R30 1.130
XPS MCCPC
Configuration software 1 Adaptor: RJ45 socket/PC connection cables XPS MCCPC 0.011
2 Cable to PC serial port (type SUB-D9) 2.5 TSX PCX 1031 0.170
3 Straight shielded twisted pair cables, 2 490 NTW 000 02

2
EIA/TIA 568 standard
TSX PCX 1031
(RJ45 connector at each end)
5 490 NTW 000 05
12 490 NTW 000 12
Straight shielded twisted pair cables,

UL and CSA 22.1 approved
2 490 NTW 000 02U 3
(RJ45 connector at each end)
490 NTp 000 pp 5 490 NTW 000 05U
12 490 NTW 000 12U
with RJ45/PC USB port converter (2) 0.4 TSX CUSB485

4
Function Medium Length Reference Weight
m kg
Modbus serial link access Premium automation platform TSX SCY 21601 XPS MCSCY
TSX CUSB485
CANopen bus access 1 CANopen connection cables 0.3 TSX CANCADD03
(fitted with: 1 SUB-D 9-pin female connector
at each end)
1 TSX CANCADD1 5
3 TSX CANCADD3
5 TSX CANCADD5
TSX CAN TDM4 2 CANopen tap-off box TSC CANTDM4

6
3 Standard CANopen cables 50 TSX CANCA50
100 TSX CANCA100
300 TSX CANCA300
Profibus bus access 100 TSX PBS CA100

7
400 TSX PBS CA400
Accessories (1)
Regulated switch mode Output voltage: 2428.8 V c ABL 8RPS24100 1.000
power supply, single-phase Nominal current: 10 A
Nominal power: 240 W
8
ABL 8RPS24100
(1) To be ordered separately.

(2) The converter TSX CUSB485 is installed using Driver Pack V2.3. This "driver" is available on the Safety Suite V2 software
9
or downloadable from our site: www.schneider-electric.com.
10
4/13
platform 1
Counter and electronic cam modules
Applications Counter modules
Number of channels 2 channels 4 channels

Frequency per channel 40 kHz 40 kHz
3 Module cycle time 5 ms 10 ms
Counter/measurement Counting pulses 24 V c Up to 40 kHz:

inputs Type 2 sensors
Mechanical contacts
Incremental encoder Up to 40 kHz:
4
1030 V c
5 V c RS 422 with zero marker
Absolute encoder
Reflex I/O Per channel:

3 x 24 V c inputs: enable, preset and capture
5 1 x 24 V c input: line check, incremental encoder power supply
2 x 24 V c reflex outputs
Counting capacity 24 bits + sign (0 to + 16,777,215 points or 16,777,215 points)
6 Functions Downcounting with preset input, upcounting with reset input

Up/down counting with preset input, configurable upcounter input:
1 upcounter input/1 downcounter input
1 up/down counter input and 1 direction input
Incremental encoder with phase-shifted signals
7 Processing Inputs: counter enable, counter preset, capture current value

Comparison:
Down counting: to value 0
Upcounting: 2 thresholds and 1 setpoint
Up/down counting: 2 thresholds and 2 setpoints
Reflex outputs:
8 Downcounting function: 1 passage through zero output

Upcounting function: 1 passage through setpoint value output
Up/down counting function: 2 user-definable outputs
Events User-definable activation of the event-triggered task (threshold crossing, setpoint crossing,
preset or reset, enable, capture)
9 Connection Via 15-way SUB-D connectors (1 per counter channel, direct or TSX TAP S15pp accessory)
Via HE 10 connector for auxiliary I/O and power supply
Using Modicon Telefast pre-wired system (ABE 7CPA01, ABE 7H08R10/16R20)
10 Type of module TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 4A
Pages 4/18
4/14
Fast counter and measurement module Electronic cam module
2 channels 1 channel
500 kHz
1 ms 3
Up to 1 MHz:
Type 2 sensors
Mechanical contacts
500 kHz with multiplication by 1,250 kHz with multiplication by 4:
4
1030 V c
5 V c RS 422 with zero marker
Power supply 5 V c or 1030 V c:
SSI absolute encoder up to 25 bits
Parallel absolute encoder up to 24 bits (Modicon Telefast ABE 7CPA11 sub-base)
Per channel:
2 x 24 V c inputs: preset and capture 3 x 24 V type 1 sensor compatibles inputs
1 x 24 V c enable input or output (configurable)
2 x 24 V c reflex outputs
24 x 24 V/0.5 A c protected track outputs 5
1 x 24 V programmable frequency output
1 x 5 V/24 V c encoder power supply
24 bits + sign (0 to + 16,777,215, upcounting) or 24 bits + sign (- 16,777,215 256 to 32,768 points per cycle with 1 to 32,768 cycles (absorbs play on
to + 16,777,215, downcounting, up/down counting). Up to 25 bits for SSI reverse)
absolute encoder
Up/down counting with preset input, configurable upcounter input: Processing of 128 cams/32 tracks (including 24 with direct output) 6
1 upcounter input/1 downcounter input Output refresh cycle:
1 up/down counter input and 1 direction input 50 s for 16 cams
Incremental encoder with phase-shifted signals 100 s for 64 cams
Measurement with 2 thresholds 200 s for 128 cams
SSI absolute encoder Two capture registers
Parallel output absolute encoder with ABE 7CPA11 sub-base Control/recalibration of axis slip
Inputs: counter enable, counter preset, capture current value Cam profiles: 3 basic types (position, monostable, brake) 7
Comparison: Associated functions:
2 thresholds Elimination of axis backlash, position recalibration
Measurement capture
Switching feedforward
Parts counter
Reflex outputs:
2 user-definable outputs
Speed monitoring
Special functions
8
User-definable activation of the event-triggered task (crossing of thresholds or User-definable activation of the event-triggered task (cams, track,
modulo value, preset, enable, capture) recalibration, capture, etc.)
Via 15-way SUB-D connectors (1 per counter channel, direct or via TSX TAP S15pp accessory)
Via HE 10 connector for reflex I/O and power supply
9
Using Modicon Telefast pre-wired system (ABE 7CPA01, ABE 7H16R20, ABE 7CPA11)
See page 9/6
TSX CTY 2C TSX CCY 1128

10
4/22 4/26
4/15
TSX CTY 2A/4A counter modules
Presentation
Counting functions are required for counting parts or events, grouping objects,
1 incoming or outgoing flow control, and measuring the lengths or positions of items.
Premium PLCs perform these functions using TSX CTY 2A/4A counter modules
which have a counting frequency of 40 kHz maximum. In a Premium PLC
configuration, the number of TSX CTY counter modules must be added to that of the
other application-specific modules (communication, motion control and weighing).
(See pages 1/10 and 1/19). They are hot-swappable. Counter modules are
2 characterized by their number of channels:
b 2 channels with downcounting, upcounting and up/down counting for the
TSX CTY 2A module
b 4 channels with downcounting, upcounting and up/down counting for the
TSX CTY 4A module
The parameters of these functions are set by software configuration. The modules
take 5 V c or 10 to 30 V c sensors with solid state outputs (incremental encoders,
3 proximity sensors, photoelectric detectors) and with mechanical contact outputs (in
this case the counting frequency is limited to 100 Hz).
Description
4 3
The front panel of TSX CTY 2A (2-channel) and TSX CTY 4A (4-channel) counter
modules comprises:
4
1 One 15-way SUB-D connector per channel for connecting:
1 v Counter sensors or incremental encoder
v Sensor power supply
v Encoder power supply feedback for checking that it is supplied correctly
5 2 One 20-way HE10 connector for 2 channels for connecting the following for each
channel:
2
v Auxiliary inputs: preset, enable
v Reflex outputs
TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 4A v Power supplies for auxiliary I/O and incremental encoders
6 3 Rigid casing, which:

v Holds the electronic card
CH2 CH0 RUN ERR v Locates and locks the module in its slot
4
CH3 CH1 I/O
4 Module diagnostic LEDs:
v Module diagnostics:
- Green RUN LED: module operating
- Red ERR LED: internal fault, module failure
7 - Red I/O LED: external fault
v Channel diagnostics: Green CHp LED: channel diagnostics available
10
Operation: References:
page 4/17 pages 4/18 ...
4/16
Operation, Modicon Premium automation
architectures platform
Operation block diagram

Block diagram of a channel
Configuration
1
and adjustment Configuration Discrete sensor Incremental encoder input
%KW, %MW parameters or incremental Sensor inputs
encoder signals
2
Auxiliary I/O Counter enable input
Upcounting and/or processing Capture input
%Q, %QW downcounting function Preset input
with processing:
%I, %IW - Measurement
comparison with 2
thresholds and 2 setpoints
- Event management
Reflex output 0
Reflex output 1
3
Counter modules are set up using Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software.
4
Architectures
Example of an architecture with counter inputs
1 2 + +
Modicon Telefast
5
TSX CTY 4A
GND
3 3
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
Channel 2 Channel 0
1
3
5
7
9
ABE 7CPA01
Channel 3 Channel 1 Sensor inputs
4 Channel 0
6
Channels Channels
2 and 3 0 and 1
6 ++
Modicon Telefast
5
8
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
1 Incremental encoder
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
2 TSX TAP S15 05/24 connector

300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
3 TSX CCP S15 cable with connectors ABE 7H16R20

+ ABE 7BV20
Auxiliary inputs
4 TSX CAP S15 connector Reflex outputs
5 TSX CDP pp1 preformed cable with connectors Channels 0 and 1
6 TSX CDP pp2 or TSX CDP pp3 rolled ribbon cable or cable with connectors
10
page 4/16 pages 4/18 ...
4/17
platform
References
Counter modules
1 Type of input Characteristics No. of
channels
Reference Weight
kg
24 V c 2/3 wire PNP/NPN sensors, 40 kHz counting 2 TSX CTY 2A 0.320
5 V c RS 422 or 1030 V c Totem Cycle time 5 ms
Pole incremental encoders 40 kHz counting 4 TSX CTY 4A 0.430
Cycle time 10 ms
2 TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 4A
3 Description For connecting Connector type on
TSX CTY pp
No.
(1)
Unit reference Weight
kg
SUB-D connectors Counter sensors or 15-way SUB-D 4 TSX CAP S15 0.050
Sold in lots of 2 incremental encoder
ABE 7CPA01
Modicon Telefast Counter sensors 15-way SUB-D ABE 7CPA01 0.300
ABE 7 and 24 V c power
4
connection supply
sub-bases
Auxiliary inputs, 20-way HE 10 ABE 7H16R20 0.300
24 V c power (for 2 channels)
supply and
5 V/1030 V c
encoder power
supply
ABE 7H16R20
5 Additional terminal
block
20 linked terminals
for ABE 7H16R20
ABE 7BV20 0.030
Order in multiples of 5 sub-base
Connection 5 V c RS 422 15-way SUB-D 2 TSX TAP S15 05 0.260

interfaces for encoder
incremental encoder
10...30 V c Totem 15-way SUB-D 2 TSX TAP S15 24 0.260
6 TSX TAP S15 pp Pole encoder
(1) For numbers, see page 4/17.
10
Presentation: Operation:
page 4/16 page 4/17
4/18
platform
Connecting cables
Description From TSX CTY pp
module
To No.
(1)
Length Reference Weight
kg
1
Cordsets 15-way ABE 7CPA01/CPA11 3 0.5 m TSX CCP S15 050 0.110
AWG 12 (0.205 mm2) SUB-D sub-bases or 1m TSX CCP S15 100 0.160
connector TSX TAP S15p accessory
2.5 m TSX CCP S15 0.300
(15-way SUB-D connector)
2
TSX CCP S15 ppp TSX CDP p01 20-wire preformed 24 V c power Free end with colour-coded 5 3m TSX CDP 301 0.400
cable supply and wires 5m TSX CDP 501 0.660
AWG 22 (0.324 mm2) 5 V/1030 V c
10 m TSX CDP 1001 1.210
500 mA max. encoder power
supply auxiliary
inputs
(moulded 20-way
HE 10 connector)
3
Rolled ribbon cable 24 V c power ABE 7H16R20 sub-base 6 1m TSX CDP 102 0.090
AWG 28 (0.08 mm2) supply and (20-way HE 10 connector) 2m TSX CDP 202 0.170
100 mA max. 5 V/1030 V c
3m TSX CDP 302 0.250
encoder power
supply auxiliary
inputs 4
TSX CDP p02 (20-way HE 10
connector)
Connecting cables 24 V c power ABE 7H16R20 sub-base 6 0.5 m TSX CDP 053 0.085
AWG 22 (0.324 mm2) supply and (20-way HE 10 connector) 1m TSX CDP 103 0.150
500 mA max. 5 V/1030 V c
encoder power
supply auxiliary
2m
3m
TSX CDP 203
TSX CDP 303
0.280
0.410 5
inputs 5m TSX CDP 503 0.670
(moulded 20-way 10 m TSX CDP 1003 1.180
HE 10 connector)

6
TSX CDP p03
10
Presentation: Operation:
page 4/16 page 4/17
4/19
description, platform
operation TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module
Presentation
The TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module is used with fast machines requiring
1 precise measurements with short cycle times and high input frequencies (woodworking
machines, packing machines, etc.).
The TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module provides the standard functions
(speed monitoring, reflex outputs, etc.) for performing a simple position control
function, by the application program.
The TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module also enables special functions
2 to be managed.
3 Description
4 The front panel of the TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module comprises:
1 One 15-way SUB-D connector per channel for connecting:
3 1 v Counter sensors or incremental encoder
v SSI absolute encoder or parallel output encoder with Modicon Telefast ABE 7CPA11
sub-base
v Sensor power supply
v Encoder power supply feedback for checking that it is supplied correctly
2 One 20-way HE10 connector for connecting the following for each channel:
4 v Auxiliary inputs: preset, enable and capture
4 TSX CTY 2C
v Reflex outputs
v Programmable frequency output
v Power supplies for auxiliary I/O and encoders
3 Rigid casing, which:
v Holds the electronic card
v Locates and locks the module in its slot
5 v Module diagnostics:
- Green RUN LED, module operating
- Red ERR LED, internal fault, module failure
- Red I/O LED, external fault
CH0 RUN ERR v Channel diagnostics:
CH1 I/O 4 - Green CHp LED: channel diagnostics available
6 Operation block diagram

Block diagram of a channel
Configuration
and adjustment Configuration Discrete sensor or Incremental encoder input
%KW, %MW parameters incremental Sensor inputs
7 encoder or SSI
absolute encoder
signals
SSI absolute encoder inputs
ABE 7CPA11 inputs
Up/down counting function Auxiliary I/O Enable input (1)

and measurement with processing Capture input
8 %Q, %QW processing:
- Measurement
Preset input
%I, %IW comparison with 2 Reflex output 0

thresholds Reflex output 1
- Event management Output 2 (1)
- Speed monitoring Programmable frequency output 3
9 Counter modules are set up using Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software
(1) The enable input and output 2 cannot be used simultaneously.
10
Architectures: References:
page 4/21 pages 4/22 ...
4/20
Architectures Modicon Premium automation
platform
TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module
Architectures
Example of an architecture with counter inputs
1 4 + +
1
Modicon Telefast
TSX CTY 2C
GND
5 5
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
Channel 0 Channel 0
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
11
1
3
5
7
9
ABE-7CPA01
2
6
Channel 1 Channel 1 Sensor inputs
Channel 0
2
5 + +
Modicon Telefast
GND
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
11
1
3
5
7
9
ABE-7CPA11
4
++
Modicon Telefast
8 100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
112
113
114
115
111
1
2
3
4
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
212
213
214
215
211
7
5
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
312
313
314
315
311
C
C
C
C
ABE-7H16R20 Auxiliary inputs

1 Incremental encoder + ABE-7BV20 Reflex outputs
2 SSI serial absolute encoder equipped with its cable Frequency output
3 Parallel output absolute encoder Channels 0 and 1
4 TSX TAP S15 05/24 connector
5 TSX CCP S15ppp cable with connectors
6 TSX CAP S15 connector
7
8
TSX CDPpp1 preformed cable with connectors
TSX CDPpp2 or TSX CDP pp3 rolled ribbon cable or cable with connectors 6
10
page 4/21 pages 4/22 ...
4/21
platform
References
Measurement and counter module
1 Type of input Characteristics No. of channels Reference Weight
kg
24 V c 2/3 PNP/NPN wire sensors, Counting 2 TSX CTY 2C 0.340
5 V c RS 422 or 1030 V c Totem Pole Cycle time 1 ms
incremental encoders
SSI serial or parallel output absolute
encoders with ABE 7CPA11 sub-base
2
TSX CTY 2C
Description For connecting Connector type on No. Unit reference Weight
TSX CTY 2C (1) kg
SUB-D connector Counter sensors or 15-way SUB-D 6 TSX CAP S15 0.050
3 Sold in lots of 2 incremental encoder
Modicon Telefast Counter sensors and 15-way SUB-D ABE 7CPA01 0.300
ABE 7 connection 24 V c power supply
sub-bases
4 24 V c power supply (for 2 channels)
and 5 V/1030 V c
ABE 7CPA01 encoder power supply
Additional terminal 20 linked terminals for ABE 7BV20 0.060

block ABE 7H16R20
5
ABE 7H16R20 Adaptor sub-base for 5 V c, 1030 V c 15-way SUB-D ABE 7CPA11 0.300
TSX CTY 2C parallel output absolute
module (2) encoders
6 Connection
interfaces for
5 V c RS 422 encoder 15-way SUB-D 4 TSX TAP S15 05 0.260
10...30 V c Totem Pole 15-way SUB-D 4 TSX TAP S15 24 0.260
incremental encoder encoder
TSX TAP S15 pp

(2) Enables multiplexing of 2 absolute encoders on the same channel (up to 4 absolute encoders when using 2
7 ABE 7CPA11 adaptor sub-bases).
10
Presentation: Architectures:
page 4/20 page 4/21
4/22
platform
Connecting cables
Description From TSX CTY 2C
module
To No.
(1)
kg
1
Cordsets 15-way ABE 7CPA01/CPA11 5 0.5 m TSX CCP S15 050 0.110
AWG 12 (0.205 mm2) SUB-D sub-bases or 1m TSX CCP S15 100 0.160
connector TSX TAP S15pp
2.5 m TSX CCP S15 0.300
accessory (15-way SUB-D
connector)
2
20-wire preformed 24 V c power supply Free end with 7 3m TSX CDP 301 0.400
TSX CCP S15 ppp TSX CDP p01 cables and 5 V/1030 V c colour-coded wires 5m TSX CDP 501 0.660
AWG 22 (0.324 mm2) encoder power supply
10 m TSX CDP 1001 1.210
500 mA max. auxiliary inputs
(moulded 20-way
HE 10 connector)
3
Rolled ribbon cables 24 V c power supply ABE 7H16R20 sub-base 8 1m TSX CDP 102 0.090
AWG 28 (0.08 mm2) and 5 V/1030 V c (HE 10 20-way 2m TSX CDP 202 0.170
100 mA max. encoder power supply connector)
3m TSX CDP 302 0.250
auxiliary inputs
TSX CDP p02

(20-way HE 10
connector) 4
Connecting cables 24 V c power supply ABE 7H16R20 sub-base 8 0.5 m TSX CDP 053 0.085
AWG 22 (0.324 mm2) and 5 V/1030 V c (HE 10 20-way 1m TSX CDP 103 0.150
500 mA max. encoder power supply connector)
2m TSX CDP 203 0.280
auxiliary inputs
(moulded 20-way
HE 10 connector)
3m
5m
TSX CDP 303
TSX CDP 503
0.410
0.670
5
10 m TSX CDP 1003 1.180
TSX CDP p03 6
10
page 4/20 page 4/21
4/23
operation TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module
Presentation
The TSX CCY 1128 module performs the electronic cam function for a rotary axis
1 rotating in a single, alternating or cyclical direction (with periodic arrival of parts to be
processed) or endlessly (with random arrival of parts to be processed). The axis is
Modicon Premium managed by an incremental or absolute encoder.
The TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module independently manages up to 128 cams
Motor which can be spread over a maximum of 32 tracks to which 24 discrete physical
Encoder
outputs and 8 logic outputs can be assigned.
Processing is organized into 4 groups of 8 tracks, with groups 0 and 1 associated
2 Track outputs with connector 0 on the module and groups 2 and 3 with connector 1.
The TSX CCY 1128 module can be used for the following functions: elimination of
Preactuators axis backlash, position recalibration, capturing measurements (part length, number
of points per revolution, angle of arrival of parts, slip, etc.), anticipation of switching,
parts counter, event generation.
Like all application-specific modules, the TSX CCY 1128 module can be installed in
any slot of a Premium PLC, except for those specifically for the power supply and the
3 processor.
5
Description
6 The front panel of the TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module comprises:
1 A 15-way SUB-D connector for connecting the incremental or absolute encoder
4 2 2 A 20-way HE 10 connector for connecting the track outputs of groups 0 and 1

(connector 0)
3 A 20-way HE 10 connector for connecting the track outputs of groups 2 and 3
1
(connector 1)
4 A 20-way HE connector for connecting the auxiliary inputs and the encoder power
supply
1
v Holds the electronic cards
5 4 v Locates and locks the module in its slot
TSX CCY 1128
- Green RUN LED, module operating
- Red I/O LED, external fault or application fault
v Channel diagnostics:
6 CH0 RUN ERR
I/O
6 - Green CH0 LED: channel diagnostics available
Operation
Block diagram of channel
7 Configuration
+ adjustment
Configuration Feedback loop Encoder inputs
%KW.%MW parameters
Track outputs
8
Processing Auxiliary input Recalibration input
processing Capture input 1
%O, %QW
Capture input 2
%I, %IW
9
The electronic cam module is set up using Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software.
10
Architectures : References:
page 4/25 pages 4/26 ...
4/24
platform
TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module
Example of an architecture
1 4 1
1a 4 ++
Modicon Telefast
2
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
2 6 5
1
2
3
4
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
ABE-7H16R20
3
Auxiliary
5 inputs
4
+ +
Modicon Telefast 7
TSX CCY 1128
GND
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
8
5
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
1
3
5
7
9
ABE-7CPA11
8
++
3
9 Modicon Telefast
6
1 Incremental or absolute encoder
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
1a Incremental or absolute encoder with 12-way DIN connector output

200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
2 5 V RS 422/485 Totem Pole incremental encoder

300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
3 Parallel output absolute encoder

ABE-7H16R20
5 TSX CCP S15ppp cable with connectors
6 TSX TAP S15 05/24 connector Track output
7
7 TSX CDPpp3 cable with connectors preactuators
8 TSX CDPp01 preformed cable with connectors
9 TSX CDPp03 cable with connectors
10
page 4/24 pages 4/26 ...
4/25
platform
References
Electronic cam module
1 Type of input Characteristics No. of
axes
Reference Weight
kg
Incremental encoder 500 kHz counting with 1 TSX CCY 1128 0.480
Supplied with 5 V or 1030 V, incremental encoder
with RS 422/485 or 5 V Totem Pole outputs (1)
Absolute encoder RS 485 serial or parallel (2) 200 kHz sampling with
serial absolute encoder
2 TSX CCY 1128

Description For connection of Connector type on No. Unit reference Weight
TSX CCY 1128 (3) kg
SUB-D connector SSI absolute/ 15-way SUB-D 4 TSX CAP S15 0.050
Sold in lots of 2 incremental encoder
3
Modicon Absolute encoder with 15-way SUB-D ABE 7CPA11 0.300
Telefast ABE 7 parallel outputs
adaptor sub-base (16 to 24 bits) 5 V,
1030 V c
4 ABE 7CPA11
Modicon
Telefast ABE 7
Auxiliary inputs,
524 V c encoder
20-way HE 10
(1 per module)
ABE 7H16R20 0.300
connection sub-base power supply

Track outputs 20-way HE 10
(1 for 2 groups)
Additional terminal 20 linked terminals for ABE 7BV20 0.060

block ABE 7H16R20
5 ABE 7H16R20
Connection 5 V c RS 422/RS 485 15-way SUB-D 6 TSX TAP S15 05 0.260

interfaces for encoder
incremental encoder 1030 V c Totem 15-way SUB-D 6 TSX TAP S15 24 0.260
TSX TAP S15 pp Pole encoder
6 (1) Totem Pole encoder with additional Push/Pull outputs.

(2) Absolute encoders with parallel outputs require the ABE 7CPA11 adaptor interface.
(3) Numbers (see page 4/25).
10
page 4/24 page 4/25
4/26
platform 0
Connecting cables
Description From TSX CCY 1128 To
module
No.
(1)
kg 1
Cables 15-way SUB-D ABE 7CPA11 adaptor 5 0.5 m TSX CCP S15 050 0.110
AWG 12 (0.205 mm2) connector sub-base or 1m TSX CCP S15 100 0.160
TSX TAP S15 pp
2.5 m TSX CCP S15 0.220
interface (15-way
SUB-D connector)
2
TSX CCP S15 ppp
20-wire preformed Auxiliary inputs, Free end with 8 3m TSX CDP 301 0.400
cables power supply signals colour-coded wires 5m TSX CDP 501 0.660
AWG 22 (0.324 mm2)
500 mA max.
(moulded 20-way
HE 10 connector)
10 m TSX CDP 1001 1.210 3
4
TSX CDP p01
Connecting cables Moulded 20-way ABE 7H16R20 7, 9 0.5 TSX CDP 053 0.085
AWG 22 (0.324 mm2) HE 10 connector sub-base 1m TSX CDP 103 0.150
500 mA max. (20-way HE 10
connector)
2m
3m
TSX CDP 203
TSX CDP 303
0.280
0.410
5
5m TSX CDP 503 0.670
10 m TSX CDP 1003 1.180
(1) Numbers (see page 4/25).

6
TSX CDP p03
10
page 4/24 page 4/25
4/27
platform 1
Applications Motion control modules for stepper motor. Motion control modules for servo motors.
Compatible with the Lexium 32C/M servo Compatible with the Lexium 32C/M servo
drive drive
1
Number of axes 1 axis 2 axes 2 axes 4 axes
3 Frequency per axis 187 kHz Counter: 500 kHz with incremental encoder
Acquisition: 200 kHz with SSI serial absolute
encoder or parallel output absolute encoder
Counter inputs Per axis: Per axis:
5 V c negative logic translator inputs - 5 V c RS 422, RS 485 or Totem Pole
(translator loss of step checks) incremental encoder
- 1030 V c 16 to 25 bit SSI serial absolute
4 encoder
- 5/10/30 V c 16 to 24 bit parallel output
absolute encoder with Modicon Telefast
conversion sub-base (ABE 7CPA11)
Control outputs Per axis: Per axis:

5 V TTL compatible RS 422 translator outputs, 1 10 V analog output, 13 bits + sign, drive
(+/- pulses, boost, enable, reset loss of step setpoint
check)
5 Auxiliary I/O Per axis:

6 x 24 V c discrete inputs,
Per axis:
4 x 24 V c discrete inputs (homing cam,
1 x 24 V c output (brake control) event, recalibration, emergency stop)
1 input/1 output for drive control,
1 x 24 V c reflex output
Counter capacity 24 bits + sign ( 16,777,215 points)
6 Functions Servo control on independent linear axis
Processing Open loop control of the position of a moving Positioning of a moving part on an axis
7 part on a limited linear axis according to

motion control functions supplied by the PLC
processor
according to motion control functions
supplied by the Premium PLC processor
Axis parameter setting, adjustment and debugging using Unity Pro and PL7 Junior/Pro
software
Events User-definable activation of the event-triggered task
8 Connection - Via 15-way SUB-D connectors for

translator (amplifier)
- Via 20-way HE 10 connector for auxiliary
- Via 9 and 15-way SUB-D connectors for
encoder input (direct or via TSX TAP S15pp
accessories), speed reference
I/O - Via HE 10 connector for auxiliary inputs
- Using Modicon Telefast prewired system - Using Modicon Telefast system (ABE
(ABE 7H16R20) 7CPA01, ABE 7H16R20, ABE 7CPA11)
- Using specific accessories (TSX TAP MAS)

9 Type of module TSX CFY 11 TSX CFY 21 TSX CAY 21 TSX CAY 41
Pages 4/32 4/38
10
4/28
Motion control modules for servo motors. Motion control modules for servo motors.
Compatible with the Lexium 32C/M servo drive Compatible with Lexium drives (equipped with the SERCOS
digital link option) (1)
1
2 axes 4 axes 3 axes 8 axes 16 axes
Counter: 500 kHz with incremental encoder

Acquisition: 200 kHz with SSI serial absolute encoder or parallel output absolute encoder
SERCOS ring network: 4 M baud 3
Per axis: Per SERCOS digital link
- 5 V c RS 422, RS 485 or Totem Pole incremental encoder
- 1030 V c 16 to 25 bit SSI serial absolute encoder
- 5/10/30 V c 16 to 24 bit parallel output absolute encoder with Modicon Telefast conversion
sub-base (ABE 7CPA11)
4
Per axis: Per SERCOS digital link
1 10 V analog output, 13 bits + sign, drive setpoint
Per axis:
4 x 24 V c discrete inputs (homing cam, event, recalibration, emergency stop)
Per SERCOS digital link 5
1 input/1 output for drive control,
1 x 24 V c reflex output
Servo control on independent linear or infinite axis

Follower axes (dynamic ratio)
Servo control on independent
linear or infinite axis
Independent linear or infinite axis
Linear interpolation of 2 to 8 axes
6
Realtime correction of drive offset Linear interpolation on 2 or 3 Follower axes (6 slaves) by gearing or camming
Flying shear on position or axes Manual mode (JOG and INC) (3)
event (2) Realtime correction of drive Special functions (4) (see pages 4/44 ...)
offset
Positioning of a moving part on an axis according to motion control functions supplied by the Premium PLC processor
7
Axis parameter setting, adjustment and debugging using Unity Pro and PL7 Junior/Pro Axis parameter setting, adjustment and debugging using Unity
software Pro and PL7 Junior/Pro software (3)
User-definable activation of the event-triggered task
- Via 9 and 15-way SUB-D connectors for encoder input (direct or via TSX TAP S15pp
accessories), speed reference
- Via HE 10 connector for auxiliary inputs
Via 2 SMA connectors for plastic (or glass) fiber optic cable
8
- Using Modicon Telefast system (ABE 7CPA01, ABE 7H16R20, ABE 7CPA11)
Using specific accessories (TSX TAP MAS)
See page 9/6
TSX CAY 22 TSX CAY 42 TSX CAY 33 TSX CSY 84/85 TSX CSY 164
9
4/38 4/45
(1) Please consult our Customer Care Centre.
(2) Function not available with Premium platform using Unity Pro software.
(3) Unity Pro software version y V 2.0 is not compatible with the TSX CSY 164 module.
(4) TSX CSY 85 with path functions: 2 sets of 3 axes or 3 sets of 2 axes. Linear or circular interpolation with polynomial interpolation connection.
10
4/29
operation TSX CFY 11/21 motion control modules for
stepper motors
Presentation
The TSX CFY 11/21 stepper motor axis control range is designed for machines
1 Modicon
Premium
Lexium
requiring simultaneous motion control by stepper motor and sequential control by
PLC.
32C/M
servo
drive
The TSX CFY 11 module controls 1 axis (channel 0) via a translator (amplifier for
stepper motor) or Lexium 32C/M servo drive. The TSX CFY 21 module controls 2
axes (channels 0 and 1).
2 Motor These modules are compatible with the Lexium 32C/M servo drive or translators
with:
b 5 V RS 422 or TTL inputs (negative logic)
b 5 V c NPN open collector or RS 422 outputs.
In a Premium PLC configuration, the number of TSX CFY motion control modules
must be added to that of the other application-specific modules (communication,
3 counting, axis control and weighing).
3
4 Description
The front panels of TSX CFY 11/21 stepper control modules comprise:
1 1 One 15-way SUB-D connector per channel for connecting:
4 v Translator or Lexium 32C/M servo drive inputs
v Translator or Lexium 32C/M servo drive outputs
v Translator or Lexium 32C/M servo drive input power supply
2 One 20-way HE 10 connector for connecting:
v Auxiliary inputs: per axis, homing cam, emergency stop, limit switches (+ and -),
2 event, external stop
v Brake outputs (1 per axis)
5 TSX CFY 11 TSX CFY 21
v Sensor and preactuator external power supply
v Holds electronic cards
6 CH2 CH0 RUN ERR
CH3 CH1 I/O 4
- Red I/O LED, external fault
v Axis diagnostics:
- 2 green CHp LEDs: axis diagnostics available
7 Operation block diagram

Block diagram of an axis
Configuration
+ adjustment Configuration Pulse generator Translator enable output
%KW.%MW parameters A/B pulse outputs
Loss of step reset output
8 Boost output
Translator fault input

Loss of step check input
Cam input (homing)

Auxiliary I/O + and limit switch input
Processing processing
Emergency stop input
9
SMOVE function
Event input
%O, %QW External stop input
%I, %IW Brake output
10 Stepper motor control modules are set up using Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software.
page 4/31 pages 4/32 ...
4/30
platform
TSX CFY 11/21 motion control modules for
stepper motors
Architectures
Example of an architecture with Lexium 32C/M servo drive
1
Pulse/direction control Axis 0
1 2
2
3 ++ Lexium 32C/M
Modicon servo drive
or Telefast ABE 7
SinCos
TSX CFY 11/21 4 encoder
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
Motor Encoder
1
2
3
4
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
To terminal block
in back of cabinet ABE-7H16R20
Auxiliary I/O
Axes 0 and 1
PC/- 4
U / T1
V / T2
W / T3
BSH
servo motor
5
1 VW3 M8 223 R30 preassembled cordset with flying leads at one end (L = 3 m)
3 TSX CDP053/103/203/303/503/1003 preassembled cordset (L = 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 m)
4 TSX CDP 301/501/1001 preformed cable with flying leads at one end (L = 3, 5 or 10 m)
10
page 4/30 pages 4/32 ...
4/31
platform
stepper motors
References
Motion control modules for stepper motors
1 Description For control of Connections
on connectors
No. of Reference
axes
Weight
kg
15-way SUB-D 20-way HE10
Motion control Lexium 32C/M servo Lexium 32C/M Auxiliary I/O, 1 TSX CFY 11 0.440
modules for stepper drive or translator servo drive or 24 V c power 2 TSX CFY 21 0.480
motors with RS 422 I/O, translator I/O supply
5 V c TTL inputs
and 5 V c TTL open
2 TSX CFY 11 TSX CFY 21
collector outputs
3 Description Connect on TSX
CFY p1 connector
Type of connector on
TSX CFY p1 module
No.
(1)
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
SUB-D connectors Lexium 32C/M 15-way SUB-D 2 TSX CAP S15 0.050
Sold in lots of 2 servo drive or (1 per axis)
translator I/O
4 Modicon Telefast
ABE7 connection
Auxiliary I/O for axes 20-way HE10
0/1, 24 V c power (1 for 2 axes)
ABE 7H16R20 0.300
sub-base supply
Additional terminal 20 linked terminals ABE 7BV20 0.060

ABE 7H16R20 block for ABE 7H16R20
5
10
page 4/30 page 4/31
4/32
platform 1

stepper motors
Connecting cables
Description From TSX CFY p1
module
To No.
(1)
kg
1
Connecting cables 20-way HE 10 ABE 7H16R20 3 0.5 m TSX CDP 053 0.085
AWG 22 (0.324 mm2) connector sub-base (20-way 1m TSX CDP 103 0.150
500 mA max. HE 10 connector)
2m TSX CDP 203 0.280
3m TSX CDP 303 0.410
5m TSX CDP 503 0.670
10 m TSX CDP 1003 1.180 2
TSX CDP p03 20-wire preformed 20-way HE 10 Auxiliary I/O for axes 4 3m TSX CDP 301 0.400
cables connector 0/1, 24 V c power 5m TSX CDP 501 0.660
AWG 22 (0.324 mm2) supply (flying leads at
10 m TSX CDP 1001 1.310
500 mA max. I/O end)
3
Preassembled Flying leads Lexium 32C/M drive 1 3m VW3 M8 223 R30 -
cordset for (RJ45 connector)
Lexium 32C/M drive
4
TSX CDP p01
10
page 4/30 page 4/31
4/33
TSX CAY motion control modules for servo
motors
Presentation
The TSX CAY pp servo-controlled positioning axis control range is designed for
1 Premium
PLC
machines requiring simultaneous high performance motion control and sequential
control by PLC.
+
TSX CAY Lexium
module 32C/M Depending on the model, the TSX CAY pp modules can be use to control:
servo drive
b 2 independent axes, TSX CAY 21/22
b Up to 4 independent axes, TSX CAY 41/42
b 3 linearly interpolated axes, TSX CAY 33
2 These modules are compatible with Lexium 32C/M servo drives with 10 V analog
inputs.
Servo motor
TSX CAY pp modules can be installed, like all application-specific modules, in any
slot in a Premium PLC.
5 Description
6
The front panel of TSX CAY pp axis control modules comprises:
4 1 1 One 15-way SUB-D connector per axis for connecting the incremental or absolute
encoder
2 One 9-way SUB-D connector for all axes for connecting a speed reference
2 analog output for each axis
3 One 20-way HE 10 connector for all axes for connecting:
3 v Servo drive auxiliary control inputs
v Servo drive I/O external power supply
4
5 TSX CAY 21/22
4 One 20-way HE 10 connector for 2 axes (0/1 or 2/3) for connecting:
v Auxiliary inputs: homing cam, emergency stop, event, recalibration
v Reflex outputs
v Sensor and preactuator external power supplies
5 v Locates and locks the module in its slot
6 6
1
- Red ERR LED: internal fault, module failure
2 - Red I/O LED: external fault
v Axis diagnostics:
3 - Green CHp LEDs: axis diagnostics available
4
7
TSX CAY 41/42
10
pages 4/36 ... pages 4/38 ...
4/34
Operation Modicon Premium automation
platform
motors
Operation block diagram

Block diagram of an axis
1
Configuration Encoder input
+ adjustment Configuration Feedback loop
%KW.%MW parameters
Servo drive speed reference output
2
SMOVE function
Cam input (homing)
Auxiliary I/O
processing Event input
Processing
%O, %QW Recalibration input
Emergency stop input
Servo drive fault input
%I, %IW
Servo drive enable output 3

Reflex output
Axis control modules are set up using Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software.
TSX CAY 22/42/33 modules require the use of Premium TSX P57 pp3M/4M
processors.
4
10
pages 4/36 ... pages 4/38 ...
4/35
platform
motors
Example of a general architecture with TSX CAY module
1 1 4 7
+ +
1 4 8 Modicon Telefast
GND
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
1
3
5
7
9
ABE 7CPA01
Speed reference outputs
2 6 5 Axes 0, 1, 2 and 3
3 5
Axis 2 Axis 0
4 Axis 3 Axis 1
10
++
Modicon Telefast
TSX CAY 41
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
ABE 7H16R20 Auxiliary I/O

+ ABE 7BV20 Axes 0 and 1:
5
+ +
v Drive monitoring inputs

Modicon Telefast v Drive enable outputs
GND
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
1
3
5
7
9
ABE-7CPA11 11
6 3 10 ++
Modicon Telefast
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
1 Incremental or absolute encoder Auxiliary I/O

300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
2 5 V RS 422 incremental encoder ABE 7H16R20 Axes 1 and 3 and Axes 0 and 2:
+ ABE 7BV20 v Reflex outputs
7
3 Parallel output absolute encoder
v Recalibration inputs
4 TSX CAP S15 connector v Event inputs
5 TSX CCP S15ppp cable with connectors v Emergency stop inputs
6 TSX TAP S15 05 connector v Cam inputs (homing)
8 TSX CXP 213/613 cable with connectors
9 TSX CDP 611 preformed cable with connectors
10 TSX CDPpp3 cable with connectors
8
10
Presentation : References:
page 4/34 pages 4/38 ...
4/36
Architectures (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform
motors
Example of an architecture with Lexium 32M servo drive and BMH/BSH servo motor
Simulated
encoder feedback
1
SSI absolute/incremental encoder 12 Axis 0
Speed
1 6 5
9
9
reference
Axis 0 2
8
TSX TAP MAS To other
3
TSX CAY 42 Lexium
servo drives
Lexium 32M
++ servo drive
10 Modicon Telefast
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
Servo drive 4
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
ABE 7H16R20 auxiliary I/O

+ ABE 7BV20 Axis 0
11
10 ++
Modicon Telefast
5
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
ABE 7H16R20 Auxiliary I/O

+ ABE 7BV20
1 Incremental or absolute encoder 6

5 TSX CCP S15ppp preassembled cordset (encoder feedback)
6 TSX TAP S15 05 connector
8 TSX CXP 213/613 preassembled cordset
9 TSX CDP 611 preformed cable with connectors
10 TSX CDPpp3 preassembled cordset
7
12 Simulated SSI absolute/incremental encoder feedback cable (1)
10
Presentation : References:
page 4/34 pages 4/38 ...
4/37
platform
motors
References
Motion control modules for servo motors
1 Type of input Characteristics Function No. of
axes (1)
Reference Weight
kg
Incremental encoders 500 kHz counting Servo control on independent 2 TSX CAY 21 0.480
5 V c RS 422 with incremental linear axis
1030 V c encoder 200 kHz
Totem Pole (2) acquisition with 4 TSX CAY 41 0.610
Absolute encoders serial absolute
RS 485 serial or encoder
2 TSX CAY 2p
TSX CAY 33
parallel (3) Servo control on independent
linear or infinite axis
2 TSX CAY 22 0.480
Follower axes
Realtime correction of servo drive 4 TSX CAY 42 0.610
offset
Flying shear (4)
Servo control on linear or infinite 3 TSX CAY 33 0.610
axis
3 Linear interpolation on 2 or 3 axes
Realtime correction of servo drive
offset
TSX CAY 4p Description Connection Type of connector on No. Unit Weight
4 SUB-D connectors SSI absolute/

TSX CAY pp module
15-way SUB-D (1 per axis)
(5)
4
reference
TSX CAP S15
kg
0.050
Sold in lots of 2 incremental
encoder
Speed reference 9-way SUB-D 7 TSX CAP S9 0.050

(1 per TSX CAY module)
5 Connection interface 5 V c RS 422/

for incremental
15-way SUB-D
RS 485 incremental (1 per axis)
6 TSX TAP S15 05 0.260
encoder encoder
TSX TAP S15 05
Splitter box Speed reference 9-way SUB-D TSX TAP MAS 0.590
TSX TAP MAS towards servo (1 per TSX CAY module)
drives
6 Advantys Telefast
ABE 7 connection
Speed reference 9-way SUB-D
(1 per TSX CAY module)
ABE 7CPA01 0.300
sub-bases
reflex outputs, (1 for 2 axes)
24 V c I/O
power supply
5/24 V c encoder
7
power supplies
Servo drive control 20-way HE 10
ABE 7CPA01 signals, 24 V c (1 per TSX CAY module)
I/O power supply
Additional terminal 20 linked terminals ABE 7BV20 0.060

block for ABE 7H16R20
8 Adaptor sub-base Absolute encoders 15-way SUB-D ABE 7CPA11 0.300

with parallel outputs
(16 to 24 bits) 5 V c,
1030 V c
ABE 7H16R20
9 (1) Double format TSX CAY 41/42/33 modules.

(2) Totem Pole encoder with additional Push/Pull outputs.
(3) Parallel output absolute encoders with ABE 7CPA11 adaptor interface.
(4) Flying shear function available with TSX CAY 22 module. Requires Unity Pro software version u 2.2 or PL7 Junior/Pro
software version u 4.1
(5) For numbers, see pages 4/36 and 4/37.
10
page 4/34 pages 4/36 ...
4/38
platform
motors
Connecting cables
Description Use
From To
No.
(1)
kg
1
Cordsets TSX CAY pp module, TSX TAP S15 05 5 0.5 m TSX CCP S15 050 0.110
AWG 12 (0.205 mm2) 15-way SUB-D interface, or ABE 1m TSX CCP S15 100 0.160
connector 7CPA11 adaptor
2.5 m TSX CCP S15 0.220
sub-base
(15-way SUB-D
connector)
TSX CAY pp module, ABE 7CPA01 8 2.5 m TSX CXP 213 0.270 2
9-way SUB-D sub-base or TSX TAP 6m TSX CXP 613 0.580
TSX CCP S15 ppp connector (speed MAS splitter box
reference) (15-way SUB-D
connector)
Preformed cable TSX CAY pp module, Lexium 05/17D/32M 9 6m TSX CDP 611 0.790
AWG 14 (0.205 mm2) or TSX TAP MAS servo drive or other
splitter box
(9-way SUB-D
drive speed reference
(free end) 3
connector)
Connecting cables TSX CAY pp module, ABE 7H16R20 10 0.5 m TSX CDP 053 0.085
AWG 22 (0.324 mm2) moulded 20-way sub-base 1m TSX CDP 103 0.150
500 mA max. HE 10 connector (20-way HE 10
2m TSX CDP 203 0.280
connector)
3m TSX CDP 303 0.410
5m
10 m
TSX CDP 503
TSX CDP 1003
0.670
1.180
4
TSX CDP pp3 20-wire preformed TSX CAY pp module, Auxiliary inputs, reflex 11 3m TSX CDP 301 0.400
cable moulded 20-way output, control signals, 5m TSX CDP 501 0.660
AWG 22 (0.324 mm2) HE 10 connector power supplies (free
100 m TSX CDP 1001 1.210
500 mA max. end)
(1) For numbers, see pages 4/36 and 4/37.

5
6
TSX CDP p01
10
page 4/34 pages 4/36 ...
4/39
platform
SERCOS TSX CSY 84/85/164
motion control modules
Presentation
1 Fibre optic cables
SERCOS ring network
Premium PLC +
TSX CSY84/85/164
module
2
Lexium servo drives (1)
+ SERCOS option
BDH/BSH
servo motors
SERCOS (SERiaI COmmunication System) is a communication standard which

3 defines the digital link (medium and exchange protocol) between the motion control
module and servo drives. This standard is defined in European standard
IEC/EN 61491.
Using the SERCOS distributed architecture enables the application I/O (position
encoder, emergency stop, etc.) to be connected directly to the servo drives, thus
reducing connection costs. The fibre optic digital link permits high speed exchanges
(2 or 4 Mbps) while ensuring total immunity in industrial environments subject to
4 interference.
The SERCOS range for the Premium automation platform consists of:
b TSX CSY 84/85/164 (2) axis control modules that can control up to 8 servo drives
(TSX CSY 84/85) and 16 servo drives (TSX CSY 164), via a SERCOS ring bus. The
module calculates the path and the interpolation for several axes (position mode).
The other modes (speed and torque) can be accessed using Schneider Electric
5 application services.
b 1.5 A to 70 A permanent Lexium servo drives (1) (with the SERCOS option).
The servo drives manage the position, speed and torque loops and ensure power
conversion to control the servo motor. The sensor feedback is sent to the servo drive
(current position, current speed).
6 b BDH and BSH servo motors. These have permanent magnets delivering a high
power-to-weight ratio and excellent dynamic speed response in a compact unit.
The Lexium range (1) offers all the necessary options (line chokes, braking resistors,
etc.) as well as all connection components.
Block diagram
The block diagram presents the various functions performed by the different
7 components which make up the multi-axis control system.
Unity Pro, PL7 UniLink
Junior/Pro
8 Premium
PLC
SERCOS module
TSX CSY 84/85/164
Lexium
servo drive (1) (with
SERCOS option)
Application Linear or infinite Interpretation of

program independent axes commands BDH/BSH
2 to 8 axis linear Position loop servo
Bus X
interpolation Speed loop motors
Follower axes Current loop
9 (6 slaves) by ratio or
profiled cams
Power conversion
SERCOS Position
Speed
ring bus
(to Lexium servo drive network (1))

10 (2) The TSX CSY 85 module also supports the path functions with the TjE path editor software.

page 4/41 pages 4/42 ... page 4/45
4/40
platform
Block diagram (continued)

The PL7 Junior/Pro or Unity/Pro software is used, via the Premium platform terminal
port, to:
b Declare SERCOS TSX CSY 84/85/164 modules in the PLC configuration
1
b Configure the functions and set the parameters for the axes used
b Program the movements in the PLC application
b Adjust the parameters via operating codes (parameters, TSX CSY module and
Lexium servo drive(1) with SERCOS option)
b Test and debug the application
The UniLink software is used, via the RS 232 terminal port on the Lexium servo drive
2
(1) (with SERCOS option), to:
b Define the types of Lexium servo drive (with SERCOS option) and BDH/BSH
servo motors
b Adjust the parameters of the Lexium servo drives (with SERCOS option), back
them up in the drives' EEprom memories and archive them on a compatible PC
3
Description
SERCOS TSX CSY 84/85/164 axis control modules comprise:
1 An SMA connector, marked TX, for connecting the servo drives via the fibre optic
3 cable (SERCOS ring transmission)
4 2 An SMA connector, marked RX, for connecting the servo drives via the fibre optic 4
cable (SERCOS ring reception)
3 Double format rigid casing, which:
6
5
v RUN LED (green): on, the module is operating correctly
7
1
v SER LED (yellow): flashing, transmission and reception of data on the SERCOS
network
5
2 v ERR LED (red):
- On, internal module fault
TSX CSY 84/164 - Flashing, module start-up, communication fault, incompatible configuration or
application missing
v I/O LED (red): on, external fault or application fault
3 v INI LED (yellow): flashing, module initializing
5 Channel diagnostic LEDs (green): on, axis in normal operation; off, configuration
6
4
fault; flashing, serious error on axis:
6 v 1 to 8: display of 8 real axes (2)
v 9 to 12: display of 4 imaginary axes (2)
5 v 13 to 16: display of 4 remote axes (2)
v 17 to 20: display of 4 sets of coordinated axes
7 v 21 to 24: display of 4 sets of follower axes
6 A pencil point button for reinitializing the module
7
1
7 Two 8-way mini-DIN connectors reserved for Schneider Electric use
2
TSX CSY 85 (1) Please consult our Customer Care Centre.

(2) 1 to 16: display of 16 axes (can be real, imaginary or remote) with the TSX CSY 164 module.
10
Presentation: Functions: References:

page 4/40 pages 4/42 ... page 4/45
4/41
platform
Functions specific to the TSX CSY 85 module

Creation of paths using TjE editor
1 All paths, whether simple or complex, are divided into linear or circular segments
linked together by interpolation laws (6 possible types). Each segment is
characterized by:
b X and Y coordinates of the point to be reached (in the example to the left, P6) or
tangented (P1, P2, P5)
b Its movement speed, maximum or limited according to setpoint (parameter
ParF0, see screens below):
2 v The type of interpolation (parameter ParW0, see screens below)
v The number of points in the linear segment (min. 1 point)
v The number of points in the cubic interpolation part of the segment
v Various other parameters, depending on the type of interpolation
Linear interpolation
3 This type of interpolation is used to generate a rectilinear path between the
preceding point Pi-1 and point Pi defining the segment. The various parameters below
are used as follows:
b ParW1 indicates the number of points in the linear segment. This number of
points represents the number of intermediate points that the TSX CSY 85 motion
control module must calculate to define the path on the segment (minimum 1).
b ParW4 is used to indicate that the movement of a third axis will follow the path
4 (here, the linear segment) using tangential mode: positioning according to a constant
angle with the path (1).
Linear interpolation with 3 polynomial interpolation connection

This type of interpolation is used to create a curve between 2 linear segments in
accordance with a 3 interpolation in order to smooth the transitions. The path no
longer passes through the defined point Pi (in the example on the left, P1) but follows
5 a curve defined by the following parameters:
b ParW2 indicates the number of points in the cubic interpolation part (curve)
b ParW3 defines the shape coefficient of the cubic interpolation enabling the curve
to move closer to or further away from the defined point Pi
b Iracc1 and Iracc2 correspond to the initial and final connection lengths. If these
lengths are too great, maximum lengths are calculated by the TSX CSY 85 motion
control module as a function of the previous section for Iracc1 and of the following
6 section for Iracc2.
Linear interpolation with 5 polynomial interpolation connection

5 polynomial interpolation is used to define a path in exactly the same way as with
3 polynomial interpolation.
7 However 5 interpolation provides more flexible movement than 3 interpolation.

If the acceleration limit in the segment in question is reached, the speed on this
segment can be reduced for this type of connection.
Linear interpolation with circular interpolation connection

8 This type of interpolation is used to link segments via a circular path (arcs or full
circles). The specific parameters defining this type of path are:
b ParW2 indicates the number of points in the circular interpolation part
b ParW4 defines whether the arc is greater or less than 180 (defining the direction
of the arc)
b ParF1 corresponds to the length of the circular interpolation segment
9 Circular interpolation is only possible for a movement in a single plane (2 axes only).
(1) Available in a later version of the TjE software.
10
Presentation: Description: References:

page 4/40 page 4/41 page 4/45
4/42
platform
Functions specific to the TSX CSY 85 module (continued)

Circular interpolation according to radius
This type of interpolation is used to connect segments via a circular path (arcs) by
specifying start and end points, the radius of the circle and the direction of the path
1
(clockwise or counter-clockwise). The specific parameters defining this type of path
are:
b ParW1 indicates the number of points in the arc
b ParW4 defines the direction of the path (clockwise or counter-clockwise)
b ParF1 corresponds to the radius of the arc.
Circular interpolation according to radius:
b Is only possible for a movement in a single plane (2 axes only)
2
b Cannot be used to create paths in a full circle (to do this, use linear interpolation
with circular interpolation connection)
Circular interpolation according to centre

This type of interpolation is also used to connect segments via a circular path (arcs
or full circles) by specifying start and end points, the coordinates of the centre of the 3
circle and the direction of the path (clockwise or counter-clockwise). The specific
parameters defining this type of path are:
b ParW1 indicates the number of points in the arc
b ParW4 defines the direction of the path (clockwise or counter-clockwise)
b ParF1 indicates the abscissa of the centre of the circle (X)
4
b ParF2 indicates the ordinate of the centre of the circle (Y)
Full circular movement is defined by an end point which is the same as the start point.
Circular interpolation is only possible for a movement in a single plane (2 axes only).
TjE path editor software

TjE path editor software, supplied with the SERCOS TSX CSY 85 motion control
module, is used in offline mode to:
b Create master/slave axes and sets of axes for use in paths, with a maximum of 3
sets of 2 real axes or 2 sets of 3 axes
5
b Each slave axis requires a cam profile selected from the 7 profiles available in the
TSX CSY 85 module (with a limit of 10,000 cam points for all the profiles)
b Define paths by setting parameters for each segment, which are linked to the
various possible interpolations described above and on page 4/42
b The TjE software validates all the parameters and calculates the paths for each
set of axes
6
Path display
The TjE software integrates various graphic tools for displaying paths that were
previously created and the data relating to the axes (making up these paths) with
their positions, speeds or accelerations. The paths can be displayed with:
b A choice of curves, colours and scaling
b A choice of scales and offsets
b Display of segment reference points
7
b Display of points of the master, and calculated points of the cam profiles
This display enables the user to validate the paths before transferring all the data
that has been generated to the PL7 Junior/Pro application managing the SERCOS
TSX CSY 85 motion control modules.
8
(1) Maximum, 8 real axes per TSX CSY 85 module.
10

4/43
platform
Software setup of TSX CSY 84/85/164 modules

When setting up application-specific functions, screens specific to the SERCOS
1 motion control function can be accessed via the Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software
for configuration, adjustment, debugging and documentation of applications. These
services are performed by editors which can be accessed directly from the basic
screen using icons in the toolbar. The windows of the editors can be displayed
simultaneously on one screen (example: it is possible to program using the program
editor and simultaneously define the symbols in the variables editor).
2 Declaring the SERCOS motion control module

Parameter entry for application-specific functions is easy to access from the
configuration screen by clicking on the slot occupied by the module.
Configuring the module

Module configuration The configuration editor provides assistance with entering and modifying the values
of the various axis configuration parameters. These parameters enable the operation
3 of the axis control module to be adapted to the machine to be controlled.
The axis configuration parameters are:
b Units of measurement
b Resolution
b Maximum and minimum limit positions
b Maximum speed
b Acceleration/deceleration
4 Declaring the axes of the TSX CSY 164 module
This data relates to the machine and cannot be modified by the program.
The configuration screen shown here can be used to declare the 16 channels as real
axes, imaginary axes or remote axes for the TSX CSY 164 module.
Adjusting the modules

These parameters relate to the operation of the axes. They generally require
5 operations on and movements of the moving part to be known. These parameters are
adjusted in online mode (they are initialized during configuration, in offline mode).
They concern:
b Maximum speed
b Resolution
b Servo control parameters
b Acceleration/deceleration
6
Debugging the modules
In online mode,the debugging tool provides the user with a control panel screen,
giving a quick display that can be used to control and observe the behaviour of the
axis.
Setting the axis parameters
The TSX CSY 84/85/164 modules combined with Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro
7 software provide manual mode for initiating (JOG) or incremental (INC) motion
commands, with no prior programming.
10
Debugging in PL7 Pro software
4/44
References, Modicon Premium automation
connections platform
References
TSX CSY 84/85/164 multi-axis control modules have 32 application-specific
channels which are only counted when they are configured in the Premium PLC
application (using PL7 Junior/Pro or Unity Pro software). The maximum permitted
1
number of application-specific channels depends on the type of processor:
Type of processor TSX 57 1p TSX 57 2p TSX 57 3p TSX 57 4p TSX 57 5p

PCX 57 20 PCX 57 35
Max. no. of 8 24 32 64 64
application-specific
channels
2
Description Function Number of axes Reference Weight
kg
Multi-axis control Control of 8 real axes TSX CSY 84 0.520
modules SERCOS digital 4 imaginary axes
servo drives 4 remote axes
8 real axes TSX CSY 85 0.520
3
4 imaginary axes
4 remote axes
TjE path creation
function
16 axes TSX CSY 164 0.520
(real axes, imaginary
TSX CSY 84/164

axes and remote
axes) 4
Fibre optic connection cables
Description Connection Length Reference Weight
kg
Plastic fibre optic Lexium servo drive 0.3 m 990 MCO 000 01 0.050
cables fitted with
SMA connectors
(1) (with SERCOS
option)
0.9 m
1.5 m
990 MCO 000 03
990 MCO 000 05
0.180
0.260
5
(bend radius: 25 mm
min.) 4.5 m 990 MCO 000 15 0.770
16.5 m 990 MCO 000 55 2.830
22.5 m 990 MCO 000 75 4.070
TSX CSY 85
37.5 m 990 MCO 001 25 5.940
Connections 6
Example of a SERCOS ring with 5 Lexium servo drives (1)
TX
3 7
RX
3
SERCOS ring network
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
8
2 2 2 2 2
Servo drive 1 Servo drive 2 Servo drive 3 Servo drive 4 Servo drive 5
1
2
3
TSX CSY 84/85/164: multi-axis control module for Premium PLC
Lexium servo drives (1) with SERCOS option
990 MCO 000 pp: plastic fibre optic cables fitted with SMA connectors
9
TX Transmission
RX Reception
10
Presentation: Description: Functions:

page 4/40 page 4/41 pages 4/42 ...
4/45
functions platform 0
MFB motion control
Presentation
Modicon Premium MFB (Motion Function Blocks) is a library of function blocks integrated in Unity Pro
1 used to set up motion control in the architectures of drives and servo drives on
CANopen buses:
Modicon M340 b Altivar 312: For asynchronous motors from 0.18 to 15 kW
b Altivar 71: For synchronous or asynchronous motors from 0.37 to 500 kW
b Lexium 32: For servo motors from 0.15 to 7 kW
b Lexium integrated drives ILA/ILE/ILS: For integrated motor drives from 0.10 to
0.35 kW
2 b Lexium SD328A: For 3-phase stepper motors from 0,35 to 0,75 kW.
In compliance with PLCopen specifications, the MFB library allows both easy and
Altivar 312
Altivar 71 flexible motion programming with Unity Pro, as well as axis diagnosis.
CANopen
In maintenance operations, drives can be replaced quickly and safely thanks to drive
parameter download blocks.-
Setting up drives on the CANopen network is facilitated through Motion Tree
3 Manager organization in the Unity Pro browser, making it easy for users to access
the application drives.
Lexium SD328A
Applications
Lexium 32 The features of the Motion Function Blocks library are particularly suitable for
machines with independent axes. In the case of these modular/special machines,
MFB function blocks are the perfect solution for controlling single axes. The following
4 Lexium ILA/ILE/ILS
are typical applications for this type of architecture:
b Automatic storage/removal
MFB: Motion control distributed over CANopen
b Material handling
b Palletizers/depalletizers
b Conveyors
b Packaging, simple label application
b Grouping/ungrouping
5 b Adjustment axes in flexible machines, etc.
Functions
The table below lists the function blocks of the MFB library and the drives compatible
with them. The prefix indicates the block family:
b MC: Function block defined by the Motion Function Blocks PLC Open standard
6 b TE: Function block specific to Schneider Electric products
b Lxm: Function block specific to Lexium servo drives
Type Function Function block Altivar 312 Altivar 71 Lexium 32 Lexium ILA/ Lexium
ILE/ILS SD328A
Management Read an internal parameter MC_ReadParameter
and motion Write an internal parameter MC_WriteParameter
7 Read the current position

Read the instantaneous speed
MC_ReadActualPosition
MC_ReadActualVelocity
Acknowledge error messages MC_Reset
Stop all active movement MC_Stop
Axis coming to standstill MC_Power
Movement to absolute position MC_MoveAbsolute
Relative movement MC_MoveRelative
8 Additional movement
Homing
MC_MoveAdditive
MC_Home
Movement at given speed MC_MoveVelocity
Read diagnostic data MC_ReadAxisError
Read servo drive status MC_ReadStatus
Torque control MC_TorqueControl
Read actual torque value MC_ReadActualTorque
9 Manual control MC_Jog
Save and Read all parameters and store TE_UploadDriveParam
restore in PLC memory
parameters Write all parameters TE_DownloadDriveParam
(FDR) from PLC memory
Advanced Read a motion task Lxm_UploadMTask
Lexium Write a motion task Lxm_DownloadMTask
10 functions
Start a motion task
Set the reduction ratio, signed
Lxm_StartMTask
Lxm_GearPosS
(1)
(1)
System Communication with the servo drive TE_CAN_Handler
Compatible (1) The Lxm_StartMTask and Lxm_GearPosS function blocks are only compatible with the
M type Lexium 32 (LXM 32M) servo drives.
4/46
Setup Modicon Premium automation
platform 0
MFB motion control
Motion Tree Manager

Motion Tree Manager is associated with Unity Pros MFB library and integrated in its
browser. It provides specific assistance for:
b Axis object management
1
b Axis variable definition
b Drive parameter management
Motion Tree Manager automatically creates links between the CANopen bus
configuration and the MFB function block data using a limited amount of
configuration data. 2
General axis parameters
In this tab, the designer is prompted to define:
b The name of the axis that will identify it in the browser for the entire application
b The address of the drive on the CANopen bus
Axis parameters
3
The drop-down lists in this tab are used to determine the exact type of drive: Family,
version.
Variable names
This last tab is used to identify data structures: 4
b Axis_Reference: Used by all the instances of function blocks for the axis in
question
Motion Tree Manager integrated in the Unity Pro browser b CAN_Handler: Used to manage communication with the drive via the CANopen
network
Recipe definition 5
The recipes attached to the axis are the data structures containing all the
adjustment parameters of a given drive. This data is used when:
b Changing the drive with restoration of the context during Faulty Device
Replacement (FDR) maintenance
b Changing the manufacturing program of the machine and calling up an
appropriate set of parameters: servo control gains, limitations, etc. adapted to the
weight and size of the moving parts 6
b Saving parameters in the initial values of the PLC application
7
Programming, diagnostics and maintenance
Communication between the PLC and drive is automatically set up by the system as
General parameters: Axis name and address
soon as a TE_CAN_Handler instance is declared in the Unity Pro task with which the
axis is associated. Movements are then programmed by sequencing function blocks
from the library in the user's chosen Unity Pro editor (LD, ST, FBD).
The two function blocks, MC_ReadStatus, and in some cases MC_ReadAxisError,

8
are useful for determining the overall status of the axis, as well as the code of active
warnings or errors.
The function blocks TE_UploadDriveParam and TE_DownloadDriveParam allow the

application to save all the parameters of a drive (recipe) and to then quickly reload
MFB: Programming a movement in absolute mode them into another drive if the first one fails.
9
10
4/47
platform
The ISP Plus

1 weighing range,
when used with the
Premium PLC,
2
enables the
automation of
1
machines combined
2 with weighers or
installations
3
The TSX ISP Y101 standard format weighing module is the central part of the weighing system.
1 TSX ISP Y101 weighing module
4 It has:
b A measurement input that can take up to 8 load cells:
v Resolution: 1,048,576 points (20 bits)
v Measurement rate: 50 measurements per second
v Type of load cell: 8 x 350 Ohm load cells maximum, mounted in parallel
v Load cell supply voltage: 10 V c
v Load cell wiring distance: 350 m (with no loss of precision with 4 load cells)
b Two discrete reflex outputs for weighing/dosing applications:
v Type of outputs: 2 positive logic transistor outputs
5 v Nominal voltage: 24 V c
v Response time: 1 ms discrimination
b A sealable link for the display unit:
v Physical interface: non-isolated RS 485
v Distance of display unit: 30 m maximum
Module consumption: (see page 9/7)
6 The TSX XBT N410 remote display unit displays the measured weight with no prior
2 TSX XBT N410 weight indicator
configuration. When the link to the weighing module is sealed, the display unit then becomes
the main display unit for commercial transactions:
b Screen type: green backlit LCD
b Number of lines: used in weighing applications with 2 lines of 10 characters (8.37 x 5.9 mm)
b Power supply: 24 V c nominal (limit values: 18...30 V c)
b Operating temperature: 0...55C
7 b Degree of protection (front panel): IP65 according to IEC/EN 60529, Nema 4X outdoor use
Junction boxes, cables (see page 4/51)

3 Accessories
8 The TSX ISP Y121 weighing module/display unit assembly comprises:

4 Weighing module/display unit assembly b 1 TSX ISP Y101 weighing module
TSX ISP Y101 b 1 TSX XBT N410 display unit
b 1 module/display unit connecting cable (length 3 m)
The TSX ISP Y121 weighing module/display unit assembly conforms to the OIML
recommendations and is approved for class III weighers (6000 scale divisions) and class IIII
9 weighers (1000 scale divisions).
10

4/48
When a TSX ISP Y101 weighing module is integrated in a Premium PLC it is
possible to go beyond the scope of a simple weighing application. The PLC 1
manages not only the whole of the weighing environment but also the whole of the
machine or the industrial process associated with the weighing system.
In a Premium configuration, the number of TSX ISP Y101 weighing modules must be
added to the other application-specific modules (TSX SCY 21601 communication,
TSX CTY counting, TSX CAY/CSY axis control and TSX CFY motion control).
The maximum number of TSX ISP Y101 weighing modules is:

2
b Premium Unity configurations (one application-specific channel per weighing
module):
v 8 weighing modules with TSX 57 1p processors
v 64 weighing modules with TSX 57 4p /5p /6p processors
b Premium PL7 configurations (two application-specific channels per weighing
3
module):
v 32 weighing modules with TSX 57 4p/5p/6p processors
4
Description
Weighing module
4
The front panel of the TSX ISP Y101 weighing module comprises:
1
1 A 9-way female SUB-D connector for the RS 485 serial link to the display unit
2 Screw terminals for connecting 2 discrete reflex outputs (outputs used with 5
threshold detection)
3 A 15-way female SUB-D connector for the measurement input channel (50
2 measurements per second, from 1 to 8 load cells)
4 Optional module sealing device
6
3
Remote indicator
Weight values are displayed on a TSX XBT N410 display unit (supplied with the
TSX ISP Y121 unit). The display unit is preconfigured.
It has the following on the front panel:

1 A back-lit LCD display with 4 lines of 20 characters (height 4.34 mm)
2 Two non-customizable command or contextual link keys
7
1
3 6 service keys
The rear panel comprises:

v A removable screw terminal block for the 24 V c external power supply
2
v A 25-way female SUB-D connector for connection to the TSX ISP Y101 weighing
3
module (30 metres maximum)
8
Strain gauge load cells and connection accessories
Please consult our Customer Care Centre.
10
page 4/50 page 4/51
4/49
Functions, Modicon Premium automation
setup platform
Functions
The weighing module combined with its display unit constitutes a weight indicator.
1 The module incorporates numerous functions specific to weighing:
b Continuous weight measurement (in g, kg, t, lb, oz, etc.) and flow calculation
(weight variation)
b Filtering of measurements using several methods (19 filtering options)
b Device for tare and predefined tare
b Automatic reset
b Measurement stability control
2 b Threshold control with extrapolation of cut-off point: positioning of local discrete
outputs to the nearest millisecond
b Assisted calibration: the module calculates the zero point and the gradient
b Calibration parameters saved in the module (EEPROM) and in the Premium
processor
b Forced calibration: fast replacement of a faulty module and restart with the
previous calibration parameters
3 b Locking of the configuration, sealing of the module and its connections to the load
cells and display unit
b Continuous formatting and transmission of measurements to the PLC
b Transmission of measurement validity data (validity, stability, net/gross, etc.)
b Transmission of diagnostic data from the module and its connections
b Configuration, calibration and debugging via Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro screens
b Most of the operating parameters can be modified, and most of the functions can
4 be executed by the PLC program
Setting up the weighing module

Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro enables the complete setup of the weighing system
(configuration, calibration and debugging).
5 Configuration
Configuration
This covers:
b The measuring information on the weigher
b Filtering of measurements
b The flow calculation method
b The tare
b The data format
6 b Stability criteria and zero point management method
b Threshold monitoring for positioning the discrete outputs
Calibrating the weigher

The module itself calculates the gain and the offset to be applied to the electronic
measurement system.
7 Calibration is carried out in two stages:
b Measurement of the dead load
b Measurement of a standard weight
Calibrating the weigher Forced calibration enables the system to be restarted immediately in the event of a
module failure. The new module is configured automatically.
8 Debugging
The screen specifically for weighing provides a dynamic display of:
b The measurement in progress
b The operating state of the module
It also enables fast modification of the adjustment parameters (filter, flow, threshold
values, etc.)
9 Commands and parameters that can be modified by the program, transmitted
implicitly to the weighing module, are used to operate the module in language
specific to weighing.
These parameters and commands can be controlled from an operator dialogue
device and/or a supervisory device connected to the Premium PLC.
Debugging
10

pages 4/48 ... page 4/49 page 4/51
4/50
platform
References
ISP Plus weighing modules
Description Composition Reference Weight
kg
1
ISP Plus weighing Standard format module (sealable) TSX ISP Y101 0.420
modules - Load cell input 50 measurement/s
(1 weigher per module) (for 1 to 8 load cells)
(1) - 2 discrete reflex outputs (for
Supplied non threshold detection)
calibrated - RS 485 output (for display unit)
TSX ISP Y101 - TSX ISP Y101 module
- TSX XBT N410 display unit (back-lit
TSX ISP Y101 1.020 2
LCD, preconfigured display)
- Module/display unit connecting cable
(length 3 m)
3
Intrinsically safe junction box (2)
This box is inserted in the weighing system between the weight indicator and the junction box in
which the load cells are grouped. Its function is to limit any overvoltages and limit the current to
100 mA in the event of a short circuit.
The load cells and the metal junction box are the only devices in the explosive atmosphere. The
TSX ISP Y101 weight indicator is in a safe area.
Description For use with Marking Reference Weight
kg
4
Zener barrier box All types of load cells EEx ib II B SM1 PY52 2.800
and indicators EEx ib II C
Remote indicator
Description Length Reference Weight
SM1 PY52 Magelis display unit for ISP Plus weighing TSX XBT N410
kg
0.380
5
module
24 V c external power supply
Module/display unit connecting cables 10 m SF3 CPY010 1.100

30 m SF3 CPY030 3.400
6
TSX XBT N410 Measurement cables
Description For connection to Length Reference Weight
kg
Measurement cables Junction box for load 3m SF3 PY32003 0.300
7
6 conductors with cells 10 m SF3 PY32010 1.100
1 x 15-way SUB-D
20 m SF3 PY32020 2.200
connector for ISP Plus
weighing module 30 m SF3 PY32030 3.400
40 m SF3 PY32040 4.500
50 m SF3 PY32050 5.600
80 m SF3 PY32080 9.000
(1) Setting up weighing modules requires Unity Pro u V2.0 or PL7 Junior/Pro u V4.1 software.
(2) Equipment approved by the Laboratoire Central des Industries Electriques (LCIE) (Central 8
Laboratory for the Electrical Industries).
SF3 PY32ppp
10
Presentation: Description: Functions:

pages 4/48 ... page 4/49 page 4/50
4/51
platform 0
Hot Standby system

Unity Pro software
Presentation
Primary Modicon Premium Standby Modicon Premium The Premium Hot Standby offer, compatible with Unity Pro software, ensures
1 continuity of operation of a Modicon Premium automation platform control system in
the event of failure of:
b The central processing and communication functions
b All or part of the I/O system
It is based on the principle of Primary/Standby redundancy with complete redundancy

of the main processing and communication functions, use of shared I/O on the
2 CPU Sync link Ethernet TCP/IP network, the Modbus link and/or redundancy of in-rack I/O
(single-rack or multi-rack configuration).
Premium Hot Standby redundant architectures offer an optimum solution for

responding to requirements for availability where changeover times are not critical.
They are suitable for processes which can tolerate a lack of control, on the part of the
Premium control unit, lasting a maximum of around one second (typical duration
3 corresponding to the changeover time from the Primary unit to the Standby unit and
the time it takes the shared I/O on Ethernet to refresh).
It covers all the requirements for availability when the PLC's mission is to monitor
and control an installation in continuous duty, indicate problems to a control station,
and send the supervision manager's control instructions to various locations on an
extensive site.
4 Examples of areas of application:
b Building management system for a public site (tunnel, airport, signalling, etc.)
b Control and monitoring of water treatment or desalination plant
b Electrical management system
b Production of hydro-electric power, etc.
5 Principle
At the heart of the system there are 2 single-rack or multi-rack (1) Modicon Premium
SCADA
configurations, known as the Primary PLC and the Standby PLC. They have
identical hardware and software configurations (identical modules in each rack). The
offer comprises two processor models, TSX H57 24M and TSX H57 44M, dedicated
to Hot Standby architectures with Unity Pro software (version u 3.1 in single-rack
configuration and u 5.0 in multi-rack configuration).
6 Primary
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
Standby
These double format processors combine the central processing unit and redundant
coprocessor functions in the same housing.
Premium Premium
The Primary PLC:

Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
b Executes the application program and controls the I/O which may be:
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
v Field products on the Ethernet network managed by the I/O Scanning service
(see page 5/32)
7 CPU Sync link
v Field products on the Modbus master link
v Sensors and actuators connected to the Premium I/O modules on Bus X in a
single-rack or multi-rack configuration
b Transfers all its data to the Standby PLC via the CPU Sync link at the start of each
scan
2 to 1
In the event of failure of the Primary PLC, the standby system switches over
8 Sensors/actuators
automatically, taking 1.5 PLC scan cycles, changing over execution of the application
program and control of the I/O to the Standby PLC with an up-to-date data context.
The Ethernet network modules of both Premium configurations managing the field
products exchange their addresses by means of an automatic IP and IP + 1
address assignment mechanism. This mechanism applies to Modbus link modules
Field products on Ethernet Modbus/ with assignment of the slave addresses n and n + 1.
9 TCP network (I/O Scanning) Once they have changed over, the Standby PLC becomes the Primary PLC.
Once the faulty PLC has been repaired and reconnected to the standby system,
it takes the role of the Standby PLC.
(1) The latest version of TSX H57 24M/44M Hot Standby processors incorporates the firmware
for the V2.83 PLC operating system and the Ethernet V2.82 coprocessor which is used to
configure multi-rack Hot Standby applications in Unity Pro V5.0. Up-to-date versions of these
10
firmware programs are available on our website www.schneider-electric.com.
4/52
platform 0
Hot Standby system

Unity Pro software
TSX H57 24M/44M Hot Standby processors

Double format Premium Hot Standby TSX H57 24M and
TSX H57 44M processor front panels comprise:
1 A display block with 6 LEDs:
1
b RUN LED (green):
v On steady: processor in Primary mode during operation (program execution)
1 2
v Flashing 2.5 s (on)/0.5 s (off): processor in Standby mode during operation
(execution of first program section)
v Flashing 0.5 s (on)/2.5 s (off): processor not in Standby mode
v Flashing 0.5 s (on)/0.5 s (off): PLC stopped
b ERR LED (red):
2
v On steady: processor or embedded equipment fault (PCMCIA memory card)
v Flashing 0.5 s (on)/0.5 s (off): application fault
3 b TER LED (yellow): activity on the TER/AUX terminal port
4 b I/O LED (red): On steady: fault from another PLC station module or configuration fault
b STS LED (yellow):
5
6
v Flashing 0.5 s (on)/0.5 s (off): standby mode between the Primary and Standby
processors correct
3
v On steady: standby mode inactive or being initialized
7 v Off: failure of processor self-tests
8 b ACT LED (yellow): activity on the CPU Sync link between the Primary and
Standby processors correct
This standby mode diagnostics is complemented by the 3 LEDs (RUN, ERR and
TSX H57 24M/44M

STS) of the TSX ETY 4103/5103 communication modules managing the shared I/O
on Ethernet Modbus/TCP.
4
2 A Memory Extract button: not operational on the Hot Standby processors
3 A RESET button triggering a cold start of the PLC when pressed
4 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked TER/AUX for connecting a
programming, adjustment or operator interface terminal
5 A USB connector marked TER for connecting a programming terminal (requires
the PC-compatible 3.3 m UNY XCA USB 033 connection cable, to be ordered
separately)
5
6 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory expansion card
7 A PCMCIA slot (no. 1) for a memory expansion card for storing additional data (1)
8 An RJ45 connector marked HSBY Link dedicated to Hot Standby communication
between the Primary and Standby processors
CPU Sync link

The CPU Sync link 8 marked HSBY Link on the front panel of Hot Standby
6
processors is a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Modbus/TCP Ethernet port dedicated to
exchanges between the Hot Standby System Primary and Standby PLCs.
This link allows the Primary active PLC (as seen by the system I/O) to exchange its
context (status of its data) with the Standby PLC each application cycle, so that if
there is a changeover on failure of the Primary PLC, the Standby PLC can take
control of the control system in 1.5 processor cycles. 7
The CPU Sync link is a copper link, maximum length 100 m.
d The use of active components (transceivers, switches, etc.) on the CPU Sync
link is strictly prohibited.
USB terminal port 8

The USB terminal port 5 with a useful data rate of 12 Mbps is compatible with Unity
Pro programming software and the OPS data server (OPC Factory Server).
TSX H57 24M/44M processors can be connected to a USB bus comprising several
peripherals, however:
b Only one processor must be connected to the USB bus
b No device on the USB bus (modem, printer) can be controlled by the PLC
(1) The PCMCIA communication cards TSX SCP 11p (Modbus, Uni-Telway, serial link) TSX CPP
9
110 (CANopen), TSX FPP 20 (Fipway) and TSX MBP 100 (Modbus Plus) cannot be placed in
slot no. 1 of the Hot Standby processors.
10
4/53
platform
Hot Standby system
Unity Pro software
Architectures
Typical architecture
1 In this type of architecture the I/O system of Premium PLCs equipped with the TSX
H57 24M/44M dedicated Hot Standby processor is defined by distribution of field
products or devices on the Ethernet Modbus/TCP network.
Functionally, the products or devices connected on the same Ethernet Modbus/TCP
network can be either of the following types:
b Client: Twido controller, Modicon PLC, Magelis HMI, W@de remote management
module, etc.
2 b Modbus/TCP server: Modicon OTB/Momentum distributed I/O, Modicon STB I/O
islands, Altivar variable speed drives, Lexium servo drives, Inductel/Ositrack
identification systems, etc.
The Ethernet I/O Scanning service allows client-server type exchanges between the
PLC and Ethernet devices communicating in Modbus/TCP protocol. This service can
be used to configure up to 64 stations with periodic read and/or write exchanges
3 based on the tables of variables (word type) for the target products or devices. The
I/O Scanning service is a function available as standard with TSX ETY 4103/5103
Redundant components Ethernet network modules.
1 Non-expandable rack with 6, 8 or 12 positions TSX RKY pp
(single-rack configuration) or expandable with 4, 6, 8 or 12
positions TSX RKY ppEX (multi-rack configuration) The topology of the Ethernet Modbus/TCP network providing the connection
2 Power supply module TSX PSY pppM between the PLC Ethernet Modbus/TCP modules and the distributed products/
3 Premium Hot Standby processor TSX H57 24M/44M devices can be bus or ring type with a copper cable or fibre optic medium.
4 4 Ethernet Modbus/TCP network module TSX ETY 4103/5103
(version u sv 4.0)
10 Vijeo Citect
Monitor Pro
4-M Monitored Ethernet Modbus/TCP network module SCADA
TSX ETY 4103/5103 (version u sv 4.0)
Shared components on the Ethernet Modbus/TCP ring 13

Ethernet Modbus/TCP ring
15 Modicon M340 automation platform with processor with (dedicated to SCADA)
integrated Ethernet port BMXP34 2020/2030 10 10
5 16 Modicon STB modular distributed I/O with network interface
module STB NIP 2212
17 Altivar 61/71 variable speed drive with communication card
VW3 A3 310 12
18 Optimum Modicon OTB distributed I/O, with interface 2 3 4-M 4 2 3 4-M 4
module OTB 1E0 DM9LP Primary Standby
Premium Premium
19 Magelis XBT GT graphic display terminal with embedded
6 Ethernet port XBT GT pp30/40
Other possible shared components:
1
- Modicon FTM IP 67 modular I/O
- Momentum distributed I/O
- TSX ETG 100/1000 gateway for connecting Modbus products 11 CPU Sync link
- W@de remote management modules (RTU) for the water
sector TSX HEW 315/320/330
- Inductel/Ositrack identification system XGK S1715503 and
7 XGK Z33ETH
- Lexium servo drives with communication card
AMO ETH 001V000
10 10
- Preventa XPS MF compact and modular safety PLCs

Ethernet Modbus/TCP ring
Ethernet cabling components: (I/O Scanning service) 13
10 ConneXium managed switch 2, 4 or 8 ports
10/100BASE-TX TCS ESM 0p3 10 10 10 10
11 CPU Sync link, copper crossover cable 490 NTC 000 ppp
8 12 Copper straight-through cable 490 NTW 000 ppp
13 Copper crossover cable 490 NTC 000 ppp (1)
12 12 Magelis
XBT GT
Modicon M340 Modicon STB Altivar Modicon
(1) For Ethernet ring lengths > 100 m, the copper link is 15 61 OTB
replaced by a fibre optic link, either multimode (3 km max.)
or single-mode (20 km max.) via ConneXium switches
9 TCS ESM 043F2CS0 and straight-through copper cable

490 NTW 000 ppp (fibre optic not supplied by Schneider
Electric).
16 17 18 19
Monitored Ethernet network modules
Note: Should other Primary and Standby PLC Ethernet modules When the Hot Standby system is configured with Unity Pro software, an Ethernet
be required to be monitored, in order to increase the redundant module no. 4-M for each Primary PLC and Standby PLC must always be defined
equipment covered (for example for the SCADA Ethernet with monitored status and have the Ethernet I/O Scanning service.
network), an application program must be written in each PLC. This status assigns the module with monitoring of both its correct operation and its
10 electrical connection to its Ethernet switch. A failure (of the monitored module or its
Ethernet connection) triggers the changeover from the Primary PLC to the Standby
PLC.
Presentation: Description: Functions: References:

page 4/52 page 4/53 pages 4/58 ... pages 4/60 ...
4/54
platform
Hot Standby system
Unity Pro software
Architectures (continued)
Architecture with redundant I/O on Bus X
In this type of architecture, the discrete and analog I/O on Bus X are redundant
components. The discrete and analog I/O modules controlling them are positioned in
1
each Primary and Standby single-rack or multi-rack configuration.
10 10 19
2
13 Ethernet Modbus/TCP 12
Primary 12 Standby 12 Magelis XBT GT

Premium Premium
2 3 4 6 6 2 6 5 5 2 3 46 6 2 6 5 5
1-C
3
1 1-C 1-B 1 1-B 1-C
11 CPU Sync link
23
Redundant components:
1 Non-expandable rack with 6, 8 or 12 positions TSX RKY pp 21 21 21 24
4
positions TSX RKY ppEX (multi-rack configuration)
1-B Bus X extension cable (multi-rack configuration)
1-C Line terminator (multi-rack configuration)
2 Power supply module TSX PSY pppM 22 22 22
3 Hot Standby processor TSX H57 24M/44M Modicon
4 Ethernet Modbus/TCP network module TSX ETY 4103/5103
(version u sv 4.0)
Telefast ABE 7
Analog sensors
or actuators
5
5 Analog I/O modules TSX AEY/ASY ppp
6 Discrete I/O modules, 16, 28, 32 or 64 channels (1 HE 10
connector for 16 channels) TSX DEY/DSY/DMY 16/28/32/64ppK
XVB Control station
Modicon Telefast ABE 7 and JM Concept cabling Sensors
components: TeSys
21 Redundancy sub-bases:
v 16 as 2 x 16 input channels ABE 7ACC 11
v 16 as 2 x 16 output channels ABE 7ACC 10
6
22 16-channel passive sub-bases ABE 7H16ppp, for adaptation
of inputs or outputs (16-channel) ABE 7S16/7R16/7P16ppp Management of redundant I/O
23 Cordsets with two HE10 connectors TSX CDP pp3 (0.5, 1, 2, Each Primary and Standby Premium PLC has a set of identical I/O modules on its
3, 5 or 10 m long) TSX RKY p rack.
24 Analog I/O multiplexer (supplied by JM Concept): Discrete sensors/actuators are connected to 16-channel Modicon Telefast ABE
v Analog inputs JK 3000 N2: 1 x 0-20 mA/0-10 V input in
2 x 0-20 mA/0-10 V inputs
7H16/S16/R16 passive connection or adaptor sub-bases.
Analog sensors/actuators are connected via the JM Concept converter. Visit the
7
v Analog outputs GK 3000 D1: 2 x 4-20 mA outputs in
1 x 4-20 mA output website www.jmconcept.com
Ethernet cabling components: For the redundant inputs, the sensor data is transmitted to the Primary and Standby
10 ConneXium switch with 4, 8 or 16 10/100BASE-TX ports PLCs simultaneously via the 2 identical input modules placed in the Premium racks.
499 NES pp100 (unmanaged) or TCS ESM pp3 (managed) Two 16-channel Modicon Telefast ABE 7 sub-bases, ABE 7ACC11 with redundant
12 Copper straight-through cable 490 NTW 000 ppp
inputs and ABE 7ACC10 with redundant outputs, can be used to create double
cabling very easily, using cordsets with two HE10 connectors.
8
13 Copper crossover cable 490 NTC 000 ppp (1) The output values are only generated by the Primary PLC application processing.
This PLC sends its commands to the corresponding output modules. On each scan,
Human Machine Interface:
the Standby PLC receives the Primary PLC output values via the CPU Sync link and
Ethernet port XBT GT pp30/40 applies them to its own outputs. This update ensures a smooth changeover from
Normal to Standby during the changeover time.
9
(1) For Ethernet ring lengths > 100 m, the copper link is Note: Output fallback values: in a Hot Standby system, the redundant output modules must be
replaced by a fibre optic link, either multimode (3 km max.) configured with fallback to state 0, and the shared component outputs (on Ethernet I/O Scanning
or single-mode (20 km max.) via ConneXium switches or on Modbus) configured with maintain state on fallback.
TCS ESM 043F2CS0 and straight-through copper cable
Note: Use of Preventa TSX PAY 262/282 safety modules: in a Hot Standby system, the modules
490 NTW 000 ppp (fibre optic not supplied by Schneider
are allowed in Premium racks provided that the wiring recommendations are complied with,
Electric).
10
please consult your Customer Care Centre.

4/55
platform
Hot Standby system
Unity Pro software
SCADA architecture on Modbus and shared I/O on Ethernet Modbus/TCP
1 As in the typical architecture on page 4/54, the Premium Hot Standby system I/O are
shared on an Ethernet Modbus/TCP network (with a bus topology as in the example
below). However, the SCADA interface is connected to the standby system via a
Modbus serial link.
The Ethernet Modbus/TCP network modules no. 4 - M are configured as monitored

so that they trigger the Hot Standby changeover in the event of a failure (of the
2 Ethernet module or the electrical connection and its switch) (see page 4/54).
Vijeo Citect
SCADA Monitor Pro
31 31
34 Modbus
3
Modbus master
33
Primary Premium Standby Premium
2 3 4-M 8 2 3 4-M 8
4 1
Redundant components: 9
1 Non-expandable rack with 6, 8 or 12 positions TSX RKY pp Slave
2 Power supply module TSX PSY pppM 11 CPU Sync link 9 Slave
3 Hot Standby processor TSX H57 24M/44M
5 4-M Monitored Ethernet Modbus/TCP network module

TSX ETY 4103/5103 (version u sv 4.0)
12 13 Ethernet Modbus/TCP
8 Serial link communication module TSX SCY 21601 on which

the integrated channel cannot be used in this type of 10 10
architecture 12 12
9 Isolated RS 485 PCMCIA card TSX SCP 114 used in
Modbus slave protocol 19
6 Shared components on the Ethernet Modbus/TCP network:
15 Modicon M340 automation platform with processor with
17
integrated Ethernet port BMXP34 2020/2030 16
16 Modicon STB modular distributed I/O with network interface 15
18 Magelis XBT GT
module STB NIP 2212
VW3 A3 310
7 18 Optimum Modicon OTB distributed I/O, with interface
module OTB 1E0 DM9LP
Modicon M340 Modicon STB Altivar 61 Modicon
OTB
19 Magelis XBT GT graphic display terminal with embedded SCADA supervision system
Ethernet port XBT GT pp30/40
In this type of architecture, redundancy of the SCADA station, based on the Vijeo
Other possible shared components: (see page 4/54)
Citect or Monitor Pro supervision software, is provided by a Modbus serial link on
Ethernet cabling components: which the SCADA station is master. The Primary and Standby Premium PLCs via
8 10 ConneXium unmanaged switch with 5 ports

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 499 NES 251 00
their TSX SCY 21601 communication module equipped with the TSX SCP 114 RS
485 PCMCIA card have the slave addresses n and n+1 respectively.
12 Copper straight-through cable 490 NTW 000 ppp A failure triggers the changeover so that the Standby PLC becomes the Primary PLC
13 Copper crossover cable 490 NTC 000 ppp and automatically switches the Modbus addresses, the address of the new Primary
PLC becoming n and that of the old Primary PLC becoming n+1.
Modbus cabling components:
9 31 Passive T-junction box, connection on screw terminals with

line terminator TSX SCA 50
33 Drop cable for PCMCIA card with flying leads at at one end
TSX SCP CM 4030 (3 m long)
34 RS 485 double shielded twisted pair trunk cable TSX CSA
100/200/500 (100, 200 or 500 m long)
10

4/56
platform
Hot Standby system
Unity Pro software
Architecture with shared products on Modbus and shared I/O on Ethernet
Modbus/TCP 1
In this type of architecture the Premium Hot Standby system products, peripherals
and devices are:
b Shared on a Modbus/TCP Ethernet network (with a bus topology as in the
example below)
b Shared on a Modbus link, thus allowing it to support the many varied peripherals
and devices (Schneider Electric or third-party) equipped with a slave Modbus interface
2
Like the previous architectures, it can take a SCADA supervision system on Ethernet
or Modbus.
2 3 4-M 7 3 4-M 7
Primary Standby
Premium Premium
1
3
11 CPU Sync link 35
Redundant components 34
31 31
1 Non-expandable rack with 6, 8 or 12 positions TSX RKY pp
(single-rack configuration) or expandable with 4, 6, 8 or 12 Modbus
12 13 Ethernet Modbus/TCP
2 Power supply module TSX PSY pppM 4
3 Hot Standby processor TSX H57 24M/44M
10 12 10 12
4 Ethernet Modbus/TCP network module TSX ETY 4103/5103
(version u sv 4.0)
7 Communication module TSX SCY 11601/21601 in which the
integrated channel is used as the Modbus master
Shared components on Modbus, for example

- TeSys U starter-controllers 15 17
19
5
- PowerLogic PM 500 MV/LV power meters 16
- Preventa XPS MC safety controllers 18
Shared components on the Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

Modicon M340
15 Modicon M340 automation platform with processor with
integrated Ethernet port BMX P34 2020/2030 Modicon STB Altivar 61 Modicon Magelis XBT GT
16 Modicon STB modular distributed I/O with network interface
module STB NIP2212 31 31
OTB
6
34 Modbus 34 Modbus
VW3 A3 310
32 32
18 Optimum Modicon OTB distributed I/O, with interface
module OTB 1E0 DM9LP
Ethernet port XBT GT pp30/40 7
Ethernet cabling components
10 ConneXium unmanaged switch with 5 ports
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 499 NES 251 00
12 Copper straight-through cable 490 NTW 000 ppp
13 Copper crossover cable 490 NTC 000 ppp TeSys U TeSys U Power Logic PM 500 Preventa
XPS MC
TeSys U 8
Modbus cabling components
31 Passive T-junction box TSX SCA 50, connection via screw
Redundant I/O on Modbus
terminal block with line terminator
32 T-junction box with line isolation TWD XCA ISO, trunk cable In this type of architecture, the peripherals and devices are shared via the Modbus
connected on screw terminals and the 2 taps on RJ45 link on which the Premium Primary and Standby PLCs are masters, with the other
connectors peripherals or devices connected on the Modbus link as slaves.
34 RS 485 double shielded twisted pair trunk cable TSX SCA
100/200/500 (100, 200 or 500 m long)
The Premium PLCs each have the 7 TSX SCY 11601 or TSX SCY 21601
communication module with their isolated RS 485 integrated link (25-way SUB-D
9
35 Drop cable for integrated channel TSX SCY CM 6030 (3 m connector).
long), 25-way SUB-D connector at one end and flying leads
at the other The cable connector 31 TSX SCA 50 placed on each Premium Primary and Standby
PLC includes the line terminator. In addition, since the TSX SCY 11601/21601
communication modules polarize the Modbus line, disconnection of a slave during
operation does not in any way disturb Modbus communication. 10

4/57
platform
Hot Standby system
Unity Pro software
Functions
Primary and Standby PLC functions
1 The Primary and Standby PLCs are physically and functionally identical, but their
roles differ according to whether they are in Primary or Standby mode.
Primary Premium PLC

b Executes the application program in full
b Updates the inputs and outputs, depending on the selected in-rack architecture on
2 bus X, on Modbus and/or on Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

b Communicates with the peripheral devices
b Sends its data to the Standby PLC and retrieves diagnostic data from the Standby
PLC via the dedicated CPU Sync link
b Generates its own diagnostic data as well as that of the Hot Standby architecture
Standby Premium PLC
b Acquires the state of the in-rack I/O on Bus X of the Standby PLC
3 b Acquires the image of the Primary PLC inputs (in-rack inputs on bus X, on Modbus
and/or on Ethernet Modbus/TCP network)
b Executes part of the application program (only 1st program section)
b Updates the image of its outputs depending on execution of the 1st program section)
b Retrieves diagnostic data from the Primary PLC
b Generates its own diagnostic data as well as that of the Hot Standby architecture
4 Primary/Standby status management

Failure of one of the following components:
v Main rack power supply
v PLC processor
v Monitored Ethernet Modbus/TCP network module TSX ETY 4103/5103
automatically triggers a Primary/Standby changeover. For all the other components,
5 the changeover from Primary to Standby can be customized by the application
program (user-initiated changeover)
Services provided by the TSX ETY 4103/5103 Ethernet Management of shared I/O on the Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
Modbus/TCP modules in a Hot Standby architecture
The Primary PLC manages the exchange of the states of the shared I/O on the
Standard Web services: Rack Viewer and Data Editor
Ethernet network (bus or ring type) after a simple configuration operation, with no
FactoryCast configurable Web services (TSX ETY 5103 only)
need for special programming thanks to the advanced I/O Scanning service.
6 User Web pages (8 MB with TSX ETY 5103)
Modbus TCP/IP messaging
Only the Primary PLC acquires the physical inputs on the network and controls the
physical outputs on this network.
HTTP, FTP, XIP, Telnet On each scan, the Standby PLC receives the images of the I/O on the Primary PLC
I/O Scanning Ethernet network via the dedicated CPU Sync link. This memory update allows a
NTP time synchronization (with TSX ETY 5103) smooth changeover from Primary to Standby during the changeover time (products
SMTP e-mail notification (via Unity Pro function blocks) or devices with maintain state on fallback).
Network manager, SNMP agent
7 Management of redundant I/O
For the redundant inputs, the sensor data is transmitted to the Primary and Standby
PLCs simultaneously via the input module placed in the racks of each PLC (see
page 4/55).
The output values are only generated by the Primary PLC application processing.
This PLC sends its commands to the corresponding output modules. On each scan,
8 the Standby PLC receives the Primary PLC output values via the dedicated CPU
Sync link and applies them to its own outputs.
This update allows a smooth changeover from Primary to Standby during the
changeover time (outputs with fallback to state 0).
10
Presentation: Description: Architectures: References:

page 4/52 page 4/53 pages 4/54... pages 4/60 ...
4/58
platform
Hot Standby system
Unity Pro software
Management of supervision transparency (SCADA)
Transparency of communication with level 2 (supervisor, third-party device, etc.)
when the Primary PLC is switched to the Standby PLC by another pair of Ethernet
1
Modbus/TCP TSX ETY 4103/5103 modules. Therefore, communication with a
redundant architecture is similar to that with a standard architecture. This
transparency is the result of the automatic IP and IP + 1 address assignment
mechanism.
This transparency also applies with Modbus when using the TSX SCP 114 PCMCIA
card (Modbus slave protocol in RS 485) inserted in the TSX SCY 21601 communication
module (automatic n and n + 1 address assignment mechanism).
2
Memory space
All the memory space reserved for the application program and the data is managed
by the Hot Standby system with Unity Pro software. With an embedded 192 KB or
440 KB RAM memory (depending on the model), the RAM memory for the
TSX H57 24M and TSX H57 44M processors, dedicated to Hot Standby
applications, can be increased for the application program to 768 KB or 2048 KB
3
(depending on the model) by the addition of a PCMCIA memory card.
Configuration
Inputs Inputs
The installation of the application program does not differ
fundamentally from installing a program for a single PLC.
It essentially uses the information requested by dedicated 4
Hot Standby 1 Hot Standby dialogue boxes, filled in during configuration in Unity Pro.
Cyclic transfer of the application context

At the start of each scan cycle, the content of the Primary
Application Data 2 Data Application PLC data memory is transferred to the Standby PLC via
program (coprocessor) (coprocessor) program
(1st section only)
the dedicated CPU Sync link, at the same time as the
contents of the I/O status tables are transferred to it. The
5
Hot Standby system is thus able to transfer, from the
Primary PLC to the Standby PLC, a data area (I/O image,
located internal data (1) and unlocated internal data) of:
CPU Sync link v 192 KB max. with the TSX H57 24M processor
v 440 KB max. with the TSX H57 44M processor
The principle of the exchanges, as well as exchange times

6
according to the volume of data, are described in the
diagram opposite with:
1 Hot Standby system: 10 ms per 100 KB
Outputs
2 Data transfer by the coprocessor: 30 ms per 100 KB.
Outputs
This data transfer runs in parallel with execution of the
Primary PLC Standby PLC

Primary PLC application program
7
8
(1) The first 100 %MW words in each located data area are not exchanged. They can therefore
be assigned to data for processing specific to each Primary or Standby PLC.
10
Presentation: Description: Architectures: References:

4/59
platform
Hot Standby system
Unity Pro software
References
Hot Standby processors with Unity Pro
1 Type
No.
I/O capacity Memory capacity No. of Ethernet Integrated ports
network
Reference Weight
kg
Memory Control
channel modules
TSX 57 2p 1024 discrete I/O 192 KB 10 2 - 1 RS 485 TSX H57 24M 0.560
3 80 analog I/O integrated - 1 USB 12 Mbps
channels 768 KB max. on - 1 Ethernet
0 application- PCMCIA card 100 Mbps port
2 TSX H57 24M/44M

specific channels
(1)
(dedicated to CPU
Sync link)
TSX 57 4p 2048 discrete I/O 440 KB 20 4 - 1 RS 485 TSX H57 44M 0.560
3 256 analog I/O integrated - 1 USB 12 Mbps
channels 2048 KB max. - 1 Ethernet
0 application- on PCMCIA 100 Mbps port
specific channels card (dedicated to CPU
(1) Sync link)
3
Modules for insertion in Primary and Standby rack (depending on architecture)
Designation Description Transparent Ready Services Reference Weight
TSX ETY 4103/5103 No. kg
Ethernet Modbus/ 10/100 Mbps data rate, Class B30 TSX ETY 4103 0.340
TCP modules 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Standard Web server,
4 version u sv 4.0
4
I/O Scanning, SMTP, SNMP
Class C30 TSX ETY 5103 0.340
Configurable Web server,
I/O Scanning, NTP, SMTP, SNMP
Serial link communication 7-8 One isolated integrated RS 485 channel, Modbus protocol, TSX SCY 21601 0.360
modules character mode and Uni-Telway
7-8 One serial link PCMCIA card slot
5 PCMCIA card
7 One isolated integrated RS 485 channel, Modbus protocol
RS 485, 1.219.2 Kbps, Modbus protocol, character mode and
TSX SCY 11601
TSX SCP 114
0.340
0.105
9 Uni-Telway
TSX SCY TSX SCY For TSX SCY 21601 communication module
21601 11601 I/O modules 6 Discrete See pages 3/9 to 3/10
5 Analog See page 3/16
Preventa safety, TSX PAY type See page 4/7
6
No. Refer to the architectures presented on pages 4/54 to 4/57.
(1) The Premium Hot Standby system does not accept application-specific channels (counter, motion control and weighing). Only
TSX SCP 114 communication application-specific channels (serial links) are allowed.
10
Presentation: Description: Architectures: Functions:

4/60
platform
Hot Standby system
Unity Pro software
Separate connection components (1)
Designation
No.
Use/composition
(2)
Length Reference
(2)
Weight
kg
1
490 NTp 000 pp
Crossover cables for Shielded twisted pairs conforming to 5m 490 NTC 000 05
11 CPU Sync link standard EIA/TIA 658 15 m 490 NTC 000 15
13 inter-switch link Equipped with 1 RJ45 connector at each end
40 m 490 NTC 000 40
80 m 490 NTC 000 80
Straight-through cables for Shielded twisted pairs conforming to 2m 490 NTW 000 02 2
link between TSX ETY p103 standard EIA/TIA 658 5m 490 NTW 000 05
Ethernet module and switch Equipped with 1 RJ45 connector at each end
12 12 m 490 NTW 000 12
40 m 490 NTW 000 40
80 m 490 NTW 000 80
ABE 7ACC10/11
redundancy sub-bases
For in-rack redundant
discrete I/O (3)
Input channels
Output
ABE 7ACC11
ABE 7ACC10
0.075
0.075
3
21 (connected on 3 HE 10 16 channels in channels
connectors) 2 x 16 channels
No. Refer to the architectures presented on pages 4/54 to 4/57.
4
(1) Other separate parts: ConneXium managed and unmanaged switches: see pages 5/52 ... ; Modicon Telefast ABE 7: see pages
8/8 and 8/9.
(2) For UL and CSA 22.1 approved crossover cables and straight-through cables with shielded twisted pairs, add U at the end of
the reference, for example 490 NTC/NTW 000 05U.
(3) For in-rack analog I/O, multiplexers 24 supplied by JM Concept, please consult the www.jmconcept.com website.
10
Presentation: Description: Architectures: Functions:

4/61
platform
Warm Standby system
PL7 Pro software
Presentation
The Premium Warm Standby redundancy offer, which is only compatible with
1 PL7 Pro software, ensures continuity of operation of a control system based on a
Premium platform in the event of failure of:
b The central processing and communication functions
b All or part of the I/O system
It is based on the principle of Normal/Backup redundancy with complete redundancy
of the main processing and communication functions, use of single shared I/O on the
Fipio bus and/or redundancy of in-rack I/O.
2 It covers all the requirements for availability when the PLC's mission is to monitor an
installation in continuous duty, indicate problems to a control station, and send the
supervision manager's control instructions to various locations on an extensive site.
It is suitable for processes which can tolerate a lack of control on the part of the PLC,
lasting 1 to 2 s (average time for changeover from the Normal to the Backup unit.
Areas of application:
3 b In the commercial sector:
v Building management system for a public site (tunnel, airport, signalling, etc.)
v Control and monitoring of a water treatment or distribution station
v Electrical management system
b In the industrial sector:
v Food and beverage processing
v Slow chemical processes
4 v Level or temperature monitoring, etc.
Operational safety and availability

The Warm Standby architecture ensures availability of the control system functions,
irrespective of the failure of a component in the system.
5
Operational safety in Safety: capacity of an entity to present no danger to people,
control systems: capacity C property and the environment
to provide a specified
service during the cycle Availability: Reliability: capacity of an entity
capacity of an entity to C to perform a service within a
be operational at any given time
C given moment or for a
given period of time
Maintainability: capacity of an
6
C entity to be maintained or
returned to operational state
within a given time
Maintenance logistics: capacity

C of an organization to provide the
necessary maintenance
resources
7
Safety
8 Safety PLCs
9 Standard PLCs Premium Warm Standby solution
10 Availability
Principle: Functions: References: Connections:

page 4/63 pages 4/64 ... page 4/66 page 4/67
4/62
Principle Modicon Premium automation
platform
Warm Standby system
PL7 Pro software
Principle
The Premium Warm Standby redundant architecture combines physical redundancy
of the PLC with Normal/Backup type operation.
Only the Normal PLC processes the application and generates the outputs. The
1
Backup PLC applies the outputs generated by the Normal PLC, performs
self-diagnostics and continuously diagnoses the Normal PLC.
If the Normal PLC fails, the Backup PLC takes control and becomes the Normal PLC
(the faulty PLC, previously the Normal PLC, then becomes the Backup PLC).
Optimum availability of the application is ensured by:

b Automatic or user-initiated Normal/Backup changeover
2
b A smooth changeover on the actuators
b Updating of the Backup PLC each cycle
b Signalling of the faulty component
b Online repair
b Transparent supervision (SCADA)
3
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
Modbus link
1 2
3 4 5
6 7
Essential redundant components

1 TSX PSY ppp0M power supply
Modicon STB
TSX Micro
6
2 TSX P57 353AM/453AM processor
3 TSX ETY 110WS Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication
module
Optional redundant components Momentum Premium

4 TSX ETY 210 Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication module
5 TSX SCY 21601 communication module with TSX SCP 114
Modbus protocol PCMCIA card
Fipio bus
7
6 TSX PSY ppp0M power supply
7 TSX DpY discrete I/O modules
The redundant components are:
Shared components on the Fipio bus b The main rack
b The main rack power supply
b The processor
b Possibly accompanied by: 8
b Discrete input modules
b Discrete output modules
b One or more extendable racks with their power supplies
b One or more Ethernet Modbus/TCP network or Modbus link communication modules
The components on the Fipio bus shared between the Normal and Backup PLCs are:
b Discrete or analog input modules (Modicon STB or Momentum) (1) 9
b Discrete or analog output modules (Modicon STB or Momentum) (1)
b One or more TSX Micro/Premium PLC agents (these can support the entire range
of discrete, analog or application-specific I/O)
(1) The old range of TBX distributed I/O is also supported.
10
4/63
platform
Warm Standby system
PL7 Pro software
Functions
Normal and Backup PLC functions
1 The Normal and Backup PLCs are physically and functionally identical, but their
roles differ according to whether they are in Normal or Backup state.
The Normal Premium PLC
b Executes the application
b Updates the outputs and inputs (in-rack and on the Fipio bus)
b Sends its database to the Backup PLC
2 b Retrieves diagnostic data from the Backup PLC
b Generates its own diagnostic data as well as that of the Premium Warm Standby
architecture
The Backup Premium PLC
b Executes part of the application
b Reads the state of the in-rack inputs
b Updates its in-rack and Fipio outputs according to the state of those of the Normal PLC
3 b Communicates with the peripheral devices
b Retrieves diagnostic data from the Normal PLC
b Generates its own diagnostic data as well as that of the Premium Warm Standby
architecture
Management of shared I/O on the Fipio bus
The Fipio bus manages the I/O exchanges on the Fipio devices. The Normal PLC is
4 an arbitrator for the active Fipio bus while the Backup PLC is an arbitrator for the
passive Fipio network.
Due to the characteristics of the Fipio bus, only the Normal PLC reads the physical
inputs on the Fipio bus and controls the physical outputs on the Fipio bus. The
Backup PLC does not access the Fipio bus.
During each cycle, the Backup PLC receives the values of the I/O on the Fipio bus
from the Normal PLC via the inter-PLC Ethway link (TSX ETY 110WS module) and
5 applies them to its own outputs. This updating of the memory enables a smooth
Normal/Backup changeover by maintaining the state of the I/O during the
changeover time.
Management of Normal/Backup states
Failure of one of the following components automatically triggers a Normal/Backup
changeover:
b Main rack power supply
6 b PLC processor
b TSX ETY 210 communication module
b Fipio bus connected to the integrated processor port
For all the other components, the changeover from Normal to Backup can be
customized (user-initiated changeover)
Management of optional redundant I/O
For the redundant inputs, the sensor data is transmitted to the Normal and Backup
7 PLCs simultaneously via the 2 input modules placed in each PLC. Two Modicon
Telefast ABE 7 16-channel sub-bases, ABE 7ACC10 with redundant inputs and
ABE 7ACC11 with redundant outputs, can be used to perform this double wiring
easily using preformed connection cables with HE 10 connectors (see page 4/67,
items 14, 15, 20 and 21).
The output values are only generated by the application processing of the Normal
PLC. This PLC sends its commands to the corresponding output modules.
8 During each cycle, the Backup PLC receives the Normal PLC output values via the
inter-PLC Ethway link (TSX ETY 110WS module) and applies them to its own
outputs. This updating enables a smooth Normal/Backup changeover by
maintaining the state of the outputs during the changeover time.
Management of supervision transparency (SCADA)
Transparent communication with level 2 (supervisor, third-party device, etc.) during
9 changeover of the PLC in Normal mode to the PLC in Backup mode is provided by
the TSX ETY 210 Ethernet Modbus/TCP modules, using the unique IP address.
Communication with a redundant architecture is therefore similar to that with a
standard architecture.
This transparency is identical with a Modbus link, using the TSX SCP 114 PCMCIA
card (Modbus protocol in RS 485) installed in the TSX SCY 21601 communication
module.
10
Presentation: Principle: References: Connections:

page 4/62 page 4/63 page 4/66 page 4/67
4/64
Functions (continued), Modicon Premium automation
software setup platform
Warm Standby system
PL7 Pro software
Functions
Ring topology for shared equipment on the Fipio bus
To improve the availability of shared equipment on the Fipio bus, it is possible to create 1
a redundant Fipio ring using fibre optics. The fibre optic ring can then be used to:
b Maintain normal operation in the event of a break at some point on the fibre optic
medium
b Increase the immunity of the Fipio bus in environments with high levels of
electromagnetic interference
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network 2
3
1
Optical fibre
4
1
5
Premium Modicon STB Premium
1 OZD FIP G3 fibre optic transmitter (see page 5/109)

6
Software setup
A Premium Warm Standby redundant architecture is set up using PL7 Pro software,
in exactly the same way as a standard, non-redundant process. It is, however,
necessary to apply the rule that the application programs of both the Normal and
Backup PLCs are completely identical.
7
10
Presentation: Principle: References: Connections:

4/65
platform
Warm Standby system
PL7 Pro software
References
Description Licence type Reference Weight
1 Ethernet Modbus/TCP Identical to those for the TSX ETY 210
kg
0.270
communication module for TSX ETY 110WS module
Warm Standby redundant (see page 5/47) (1).
architecture on Premium
Additional compatible elements

2 TSX ETY 210 The Warm Standby architecture shown on page 4/63 includes the essential redundant
components. Compatible standard modules can be added to this minimum
configuration according to the requirements of the process to be automated.
Redundant components (in multiples of 2) (2)

b Bus X remote system:
v TSX REY 200 Bus X remote module, for increasing the length of the Bus X to
3 2 x 350 m
b Communication:
v TSX ETY 210 Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication module, for communication
with level 3
v TSX SCP 114 PCMCIA Modbus communication card, for Modbus slave
communication with transparent addressing for third-party devices. This card must
ABE 7ACC10/11 be inserted in the slot in the TSX SCY 21601 communication module
4 b Discrete I/O:
v TSX DEY ppK discrete input modules with HE 10 connectors with ABE 7ACC11
Modicon Telefast redundant sub-bases
v TSX DSY ppK discrete output modules with HE 10 connectors with ABE 7ACC10
Modicon Telefast redundant sub-bases
v TSX DMY ppK discrete mixed I/O modules with HE 10 connectors with
ABE 7ACC11/10 Modicon Telefast redundant sub-bases
5
Shared components on the Fipio bus
b Modicon STB distributed I/O modules
v STB NFP 2212 Fipio bus network interface module
v STB DDI/DAI/DDO/DAO/DRp discrete I/O modules
v STB AVI/ACI/ART/AVO/ACO analog I/O modules
6 b TSX EEF/ESF/EMF IP 67 I/O modules

b Momentum I/O modules:
v 170 FTN 110 01 Fipio communication module
v 170 ADI/ADO/ADM discrete I/O base units
v 170 AAI/AAO/AMM analog I/O base units
b Fipio agent PLCs:
v Premium PLC, can take all I/O and application-specific modules
7 v TSX Micro PLC, can take all I/O and application-specific modules
b Other shared components:
v OZF FIP G3 fibre optic transmitter, can be used to create a Fipio bus fibre optic ring
v TSX FP ACC 6 Fipio electrical repeater, increases the length of the bus by the
creation of segments, each 1000 m maximum.
(1) This module also provides the following for the Warm Standby architecture:
8 - Transparent addressing during the changeover
- Diagnostics of the architecture (self-tests, state of the Ethernet link and the dual
TSX ETY 210 module)
- Maintenance with access to the Backup PLC
(2) The TSX AEY/ASY analog I/O modules and the TSX CTY/CCY/CAY/CSY/CFY/ISP Y
application-specific modules are non-redundant components. They can however be used as
shared components via the Fipio agent Premium PLCs.
10
Presentation: Principle: Functions: Connections:

page 4/62 page 4/63 pages 4/64 ... page 4/67
4/66
Connections Modicon Premium automation
platform
Warm Standby system
PL7 Pro software
Connections
Example of an architecture with redundant I/O and shared I/O on Fipio bus

1
12 3 45 6 12 3 45 6
16
2
17 17
1 18 1
19
3
7 8 7 8
9 10
20 20
Modicon
14
4
STB
15
12
13
21
Momentum
5
1 TSX RKY pEX: Premium extendable rack
2 TSX PSYppp0M: power supply module
3 TSX P57 353AM/453AM: Premium processor with integrated Fipio link
4
5
TSX ETY 110WS: Ethernet Modbus/TCP network module
TSX ETY 210: Ethway/Ethernet Modbus/TCP network module 6
6 TSX SCY 21601: communication module for type III PCMCIA card
7 TSX DSYppK: redundant discrete output modules
8 TSX DEYppK: redundant discrete input modules
9 STB NFP 2212: Fipio bus interface module with TSX FP ACC2/12 connector
(polycarbonate/zamak)
10 STB DpI/DpO/DRp/ApI/ApO: Advantys STB discrete or analog I/O modules
12 170 FNT 110 00: Fipio communication module for Momentum base unit with 7
TSX FP ACC2/12 connector (polycarbonate/zamak)
13 170 ADI/AAI/ADMppp: Momentum discrete or analog I/O base unit
14 ABE 7ACC11/10: Modicon Telefast ABE 7 redundant sub-bases for discrete I/O
15 ABE 7p16ppp: Modicon Telefast ABE 7 connection sub-bases
16 LA4 DT2U: time-delay relay designed to desynchronize the starting of the Normal
PLC and the Backup PLC during simultaneous power-up
17 TSX SCP 114: type III PCMCIA card for Modbus slave communication 8
18 490 NTC 000pp: preformed connection cable (crossed shielded twisted pair) with
RJ 45 connector, for interconnecting TSX ETY 110WS modules
19 TSX FP CAp00: Fipio bus trunk cable (shielded twisted pair)
20 TSX CDPp53: preformed connection cable with HE 10 connector (length 0.5, 1, 2,
3, or 5 m)
21 ABF H20H008: preformed connection cable with HE 10 connector (length 0.08 m)
9
10
Presentation: Principle: Functions: References:

page 4/62 page 4/63 pages 4/64 ... page 4/66
4/67
Contents 5 - Communication
Selection guide: Buses and networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/2

Selection guide: Web servers and gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/10
1 Ethernet Modbus/TCP and EtherNet/IP networks
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/14
Web architecture, HMI embedded in PLC
Standard Web services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 FactoryCast configurable Web services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 5/18
page 5/20
FactoryCast HMI Web services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/22
SOAP/XML Web services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/28
Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services
3 Ethernet universal services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/30
I/O Scanning service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/32
FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/33
Global Data service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/34
NTP time synchronization service (Unity Pro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/35
4 SMTP e-mail notification service (Unity Pro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SNMP network management service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 5/36
page 5/37
TCP Open optional service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/38
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/40
Processors and modules
Processors with integrated Ethernet port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/46
5 Ethernet Modbus/TCP network modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/47
EtherNet/IP and Modbus/TCP network module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/48
Selection guide: ConneXium Ethernet wiring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/50
ConneXium Ethernet wiring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/64
Selection guide: Wi-Fi access Points and Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/74
6 Selection guide: Wi-Fi antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/78

ConneXium wiring system for Wi-Fi network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/84
CANopen machine and installation bus

Wiring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
page 5/89
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/90
AS-Interface bus
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/93
8 AS-Interface cabling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/96
X-Way bus and network

Communication architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/98
Fipio bus manager function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/100
Fipio bus agent function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/104
9 Fipway network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/106
Fipio/Fipway fibre optic transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/108
Fipio/Fipway wiring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/110
10
5/0
Modbus Plus network and fieldbus
Modbus Plus network
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/114 1
Wiring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/115
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/116
Profibus DP V0 fieldbus
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/118
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Profibus DP V1 and Profibus PA fieldbuses
page 5/119 2
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/121
INTERBUS fieldbus
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
page 5/122
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/123
Serial links
Modbus serial link
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/125 4
Uni-Telway serial link
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/130
Asynchronous serial links
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 5/132
page 5/133
5
Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports . . . . . . page 5/134
10
5/1
platform
Ethernet network processors and modules
Transparent Ready
Applications Processors with integrated Ethernet Modbus/TCP port
2
Type Ethernet Modbus/TCP
Structure Physical interface 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45)

Access method CSMA-CD
3 Data rate 10/100 Mbps
Medium CAT 5E double twisted pair cable

Fibre optic via Ethernet ConneXium cabling system
Configuration Maximum number of devices 64 stations maximum per network

128 stations maximum per network with TSX P57 5634M/6634M processors
4 Maximum length
Number of networks/station
100 m (copper cable), 4000 m (multimode optical fibre), 32,500 m (single mode optical fibre)
1 integrated Ethernet port 3 (1) 4 (1)
Other integrated port Fipio bus Fipio bus
(bus manager) (bus manager)
Standard services Ethernet services Modbus/TCP and Uni-TE message handling
5 X-Way services
Ethway
X-Way inter-network routing, X-Way/Uni-Telway routing, module diagnostics

Transparent Ready class B30
Embedded Web server Standard services Rack Viewer PLC diagnostics

services Data Editor access to PLC data and variables
6 FactoryCast services
Factory Cast HMI services
Transparent Ready I/O Scanning Yes (64 stations, 128 stations with TSX P57 5634M/6634M)
communication services Global Data Yes
7 FDR server Yes (automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters)
NTP time synchronization

SMTP e-mail notification Yes (via Unity Pro function blocks)
SNMP network manager Yes
8 SOAP/XML Web
TCP Open

Bandwidth management Yes
Quality of Service (QoS)
Compatible processors
Module format Double format processor

9 Consumption See page 9/6
Standards and certifications See pages 9/8 to 9/18
Module type TSX P57 1634M TSX P57 2823M TSX P57 3623AM TSX P57 4823AM
TSX P57 2623M TSX P57 3634M TSX P57 4634M
TSX P57 2634M TSX P57 5634M
10 TSX P57 6634M
Pages 5/46
(1) Including the integrated Ethernet port.
5/2
Ethernet Modbus/TCP modules EtherNet/IP and Modbus/TCP
module
2
Ethernet Modbus/TCP EtherNet/IP and Modbus/TCP
10BASE5 (AUI), 10BASE-T 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX (RJ45)

CSMA-CD
10 Mbps 10/100 Mbps
3
Triaxial cable or CAT 5E CAT 5E double twisted pair cable
double twisted pair cable Fibre optic via Ethernet ConneXium cabling system
Fibre optic via Ethernet
ConneXium cabling system
64 stations maximum per network 128 stations maximum per
network
100 m (copper cable), 4000 m (multimode optical fibre), 32,500 m (single mode optical fibre)
1 to 4 depending on processor used
4
Modbus/TCP and Uni-TE message handling Modbus/TCP and EtherNet/IP

message handling
X-Way inter-network routing, X-Way/Uni-Telway routing, module diagnostics
Uni-TE message handling,

5
common words, applic. to
application
C10 B30 C30 D10
Rack Viewer PLC diagnostics

Data Editor access to PLC data and variables
Alarms Viewer
Graphic Data Editor
Alarms Viewer
Graphic Data Editor

6
Display of user Web pages Display of user Web pages (8 Mb available)
(1.4 Mb available)
FactoryCast HMI services (2)
Yes (between 64 stations) Yes (between 128 stations)

Yes
7

Yes (automatic assignment of IP address and network Yes (automatic assignment of
parameters) IP address and network
parameters)
Yes
Yes (via Unity Pro function blocks) Yes (active Web server)
SNMP agent
Option
Server
Option
Client/server

8
Yes
Yes
All types of Premium processors TSX P57 1p/P57 2p/P57 3p/P57 4p/P57 5p/P57 6p
Standard format module
See page 9/6

9
See pages 9/8 to 9/18
TSX ETY 110 WS TSX ETY 4103 TSX ETY 5103 TSX WMY 100 TSX ETC 101
10
5/47 5/49
(2) FactoryCast HMI services: HMI database, automatic e-mail notification of events, interpreted math and logic functions, connection to relational databases and
simulator tool for debugging.
5/3
platform 0
Network and bus modules
Applications Industrial LAN compliant with the Modbus Industrial LAN compliant with the
Plus standard Fip standard
3 Type Modbus Plus Fipway
Structure Physical interface Modbus Plus standard WorldFip standard

RS 485 Devices connected by daisy-chaining
or tap junctions
Access method Token ring Bus managed by bus arbitrator
4 Data rate 1 Mbps 1 Mbps
Medium Twisted pair Twisted shielded pair

Fibre optic Fibre optic via transmitters or repeaters
Configuration Number of devices 32 per segment

64 on all segments
5
Maximum length 450 m per segment 1000 m per electrical segment
1800 m with 3 repeaters 5000 m max. with repeaters
Number of links/station 1 max. 1 to 4 depending on processor model
6 Services Message handling Modbus Plus message handling: - Uni-TE

- Reading/writing variables - Shared COM/table
- Global database - Application to application
- Peer Cop service - Telegram
7 Processor type All types of Premium processor
Module type PCMCIA type III card on Premium processor PCMCIA type III card on Premium processor
(1) and on TSX SCY 21601 module
Consumption
8 Standards and certifications See pages 9/8 to 9/18
Module type TSX MBP 100 TSX FPP 20
Pages 5/116 5/107

9 (1) Except on TSX P57 4634M/5634M/6634M processors with integrated Ethernet port.
10
5/4
CANopen machine bus Actuator/sensor bus compliant with the Modbus serial link
AS-Interface standard
CANopenbus V4.02 AS-Interface Modbus 3

ISO 11898 AS-Interface V2 standard Non-isolated RS 232 Isolated RS 485
Devices connected by daisy-chaining or tap Isolated RS 485
junctions 20 mA CL
CSMA/CA, multimaster Master/slave Master/slave

20 Kbps...1 Mbps depending on distance 167 Kbps 19.2 Kbps max.
4
Double shielded twisted pair Two-wire AS-Interface cable Double shielded twisted pair
127 slaves 31 + 31 discrete, analog or safety devices 32 devices max. 32 devices max.
48 slave addresses 247 slave addresses
max. max.
5
From 20 m (1 Mbps) to 2500 m (20 Kbps) 100 m 15 m in RS 232 1300 m
200 m with repeaters 1000 m in RS 485
1300 m in 20 mA CL or
integrated link
1 max. 2 to 8 depending on processor model
CANopen: Transparency of exchanges with sensor/actuator Modbus master/slave RTU or ASCII 6

- Implicit PDO exchange devices 13 Modbus functions (read/write bits and words,
- Explicit SDO exchange or CAN function block diagnostics)
- Explicit PDU CAN exchange
All types of Premium processor

(except TSX P 57 153M)
All types of Premium processor
7
PCMCIA type III card on Premium processor Standard format module PCMCIA type III card Standard format
inserted on (2) module
See page 9/6

See pages 9/8 to 9/18 8
TSX CPP 110 TSX SAY 1000 TSX SCP 11p (3) TSX SCY 11601
1 Integrated link
TSX SCY 21601
5/88 5/93 5/125
(2) Premium processors and on TSX SCY 21601 communication module.
(3) Replace the p at the end of the reference with 1 for RS 232, 2 for 20mA CL or 4 for isolated RS 485.
9
10
5/5
platform 0
Bus modules
Applications Open industrial fieldbus compliant with the Uni-Telway serial link
Network type FIP standard
2 1
3 Type Fipio (agent) Fipio (bus manager) Uni-Telway
Structure Physical interface FIP standard Non-isolated RS 485 Isolated RS 485

Access method Bus managed by bus arbitrator Master/slave
Data rate 1 Mbps 19.2 Kbps max.
4 Medium Twisted pair

Fibre optic via transmitters or repeaters
Double shielded twisted pair
Configuration Number of devices 32 per segment 5 (excluding 28,

128 for all segments (limited to 64 with programming 96 slave addresses
TSX P57 1p processor) terminal) max.
Max. length 1000 m to 15,000 m (depending on the 10 m 1000 m
5 medium used) with repeaters
Number of links/station 1 max. 1 max. 64 max. depending

on processor and
application-specific
channels used
Services Message handling Uni-TE: Uni-Telway :

6 - Periodic data exchange (Agent function)
- Application to application
- Uni-TE message handling 240 bytes
- Client/server
- Transparent exchange of remote I/O - Application to application 240 bytes
- Transparency of all devices on X-Way
architecture via a master
Processor type All types of Premium TSX P57 p53M/54M All types of Premium processor
processor TSX P57 p823M
7 Module type PCMCIA type III card Integrated link on the Integrated Standard format
on Premium Premium processor Uni-Telway link module
processor
8
Standards and certifications See pages 9/8 to 9/18
Module type TSX FPP 10 2 Integrated link

1 TER and AUX 2 TSX
on processor terminal port SCY 21601
Pages 5/105 5/103 5/130
10
5/6
Uni-Telway serial link (continued) INTERBUS industrial fieldbus Profibus DP V0 high speed industrial field bus
Uni-Telway INTERBUS Profibus DP V0 3

RS 232, isolated RS 485 and 20 mA CL Isolated RS 485 RS 485
Master/slave Generation 4 master/slave Master
19.2 Kbps max. 500 Kbps 9.6 Kbps...12 Mbps depending on distance
Double shielded twisted pair Shielded twisted pair

Fibre optic, infrared, etc.
Shielded twisted pair
Fibre optic or infrared
4
2 in RS 232, 512 slaves max. with 254 bus terminal modules 126 slaves
28 in RS 485, max.
16 on 20 mA CL
15 m in RS 232, 400 m max. (remote bus) 1200 m (9.6 Kbps), 4800 m with 3 repeaters
1000 m in isolated RS 485,
1300 m in 20 mA CL
100 m (12 Mbps), 400 m with 3 repeaters
5
64 max. depending on processor 1 or 2 depending on type of Premium processor (with PL7 Pro/Junior)
and application-specific channels used 1 to 5 depending on type of Premium processor (with Unity Pro)
Uni-Telway : - Data process implicit exchange - Read/write access for DP slave I/O data
- Uni-TE message handling 240 bytes
- Client/server
-
-
Pre-processing
Logic addressing
-
-
Data transfer for slave diagnostics
Slave parameter setting and monitoring
6
- Application to application 240 bytes - Segmentation - Management of monitoring requests
- Transparency of all devices on X-Way - Inter-master dialogue not supported
architecture via a master
All types of Premium processor All types of Premium processor (except TSX P57 1p)
PCMCIA type III card on processor and on Standard format module Standard format module
7
TSX SCY 21601 communication module
See page 9/6
8
See pages 9/8 to 9/18
TSX SCP 11p TSX IBY 100 TSX PBY 100

(1)
5/130 5/123 5/119

(1) Replace the p at the end of the reference with 1 for RS 232, 2 for 20 mA CL or 4 for isolated RS 485.
9
10
5/7
platform 0
Profibus Remote Master module
Applications Profibus DP V1 high speed industrial fieldbus

Network type
3
Type Ethernet/Profibus DP V1 gateway and Profibus PA (via gateway)
Ethernet Modbus/TCP ports
Structure Physical interface 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

4 Access method CSMA-CD
Data rate 10/100 Mbps
Medium CAT 5E double shielded twisted pair (straight-through or crossover)
5 Configuration Number of devices 1 to 4 depending on processor
Maximum length 100 m (copper cable)

400 m (single mode optical fibre)
2500 m (multimode optical fibre)
Services Message handling - Modbus TCP message handling (reading/writing of data words)
6 -
-
No Web server
Modbus server scanned by the PLC
- FDR service
- SNMP agent network management service
Processor type All Unity Pro processors
7
Module type Standalone gateway
24 V c external power supply 18...30 V c
8 Module type TCS EGPA23F14F
Pages 5/121
10
5/8
Profibus DP V1 high speed industrial fieldbus
3
Ethernet/Profibus DP V1 gateway and Profibus PA (via gateway)
Profibus DP V1 and Profibus PA ports (via gateway)
Isolated RS 485
Master/slave 4
9.6 Kbps...12 Mbps
Shielded twisted pair
126 slaves 5
1200 m (9.6 Kit/s), 4800 m with 3 repeaters
100 m (12 Mbps), 400 m with 3 repeaters
- Cyclic and acyclic data exchange with slaves

-
-
Master/slave communication
Global Control service
6
- Acyclic communication (read/write) in Class 1 and 2
- Extended diagnostics support
- Auto-scanning service of slaves on the bus
All Unity Pro processors
7
Standalone gateway
18...30 V c
TCS EGPA23F14F
8
5/121
10
5/9
platform
Web servers
Applications Web Server modules for PLCs
1
Type FactoryCast
3 Target products Type TSX Micro PLCs Modicon M340 PLCs
Network/Remote Remote access Intranet or via external RAS/modem

access services
Remote programming, downloading via FTP, access to Web server via web browser
Gateway function
4
Serial protocols
Ethernet protocols Modbus/TCP, Uni-TE Modbus/TCP
TCP/IP protocols BootP/DHCP, DNS, SNMP agent, SMTP client, NTP client, FTP
Security Protection by IP address filtering and passwords

5 Web server Characteristics HTTP and FTP server, 8 MB memory available for user, hosting of user Web pages and
documents (Doc, Pdf, Excel)
Predefined services Configuration Via Web Designer software or predefined Web pages
Diagnostics System, rack and PLC I/O diagnostics via predefined Web pages
6 Monitoring Monitoring of devices and application via animation tables (read/write variables)
Display of PLC Unity program in a Web page
Alarm management Monitoring of PLC and application alarms via predefined Web pages
Customizable Graphic views Graphic monitoring via animated views (integrated graphic editor)
services Unity Pro operator screen
User Web pages Graphic monitoring via animated Web pages created by the user
7 Advanced and HMI

services
Calculation scripts
E-mail service Alarm notification by e-mail
Data logging
Database connection
Report service
8 Recipe service
Application development software Web Designer (supplied with each module)
9 Web Designer
References TSX ETZ 510 BMX NOE 0110
Pages or catalogues TSX Micro automation platform Modicon M340 platform
10
5/10
1
Web Server modules for PLCs
1
FactoryCast FactoryCast HMI
Modicon Premium PLCs Modicon Quantum PLCs Modicon Premium PLCs Modicon Quantum PLCs
3
Intranet or via external RAS/modem
Modbus/TCP, Uni-TE Modbus/TCP Modbus/TCP, Uni-TE Modbus/TCP
BootP/DHCP, DNS, SNMP agent, BootP/DHCP, DNS, SNMP agent, BootP/DHCP, DNS, SNMP agent, BootP/DHCP, DNS, SNMP agent,
SMTP client, NTP client (1), FTP SMTP client, NTP client, FTP SMTP client, NTP client (1), FTP SMTP client, NTP client, FTP
Protection by IP address filtering and passwords
HTTP and FTP server, 8 MB memory available for user, hosting of user Web pages and documents (Doc, Pdf, Excel)
5
Via Web Designer software or predefined Web pages

System, rack and PLC I/O diagnostics via predefined Web pages
Monitoring of devices and application via animation tables (read/write variables)
Display of PLC Unity program in a Web page 6
Monitoring of PLC and application alarms via predefined Web pages
Graphic monitoring via animated views (integrated graphic editor)

Display in the form of Web pages
Graphic monitoring via animated Web pages created by the user
Arithmetic and logical scripts 7

Alarm notification by e-mail
Data recorded in the module with time stamping
Direct recording in an SQL, Oracle or MySQL server
Dynamic HTML report management

Management of Recipe data (storage and review locally or on remote
database)
8
Web Designer (supplied with each module)
Web Designer 9
TSX ETY 5103 140 NOE 77111 TSX WMY100 140 NWM 10000
5/47 Modicon Quantum platform 5/47 Modicon Quantum platform

(1) Except with TSX P57 103M/153M processors which do not have the NTP service.
10
5/11
platform
Web servers and gateways
Applications Modicon M340 in-rack Web Gateway/Server Standalone Web Gateway/Server module
module for remote access for remote access
1 Type RTU module FactoryCast Gateway ETG 10p0
3 Target products Type Modicon M340 RTU PLCs

SCADA Telemetry supervisor
All equipment supporting Modbus
Network/Remote Remote access TCP/IP, LAN/WAN, XdSL or Serial networks (1) Intranet or via external Modem and integrated
access services RTC/PSTN, GPRS/3G, radio modems RAS function
Remote programming, downloading via FTP,
access to Web server via web browser
Gateway function Ethernet Modbus/TCP to Serial or external Ethernet to Modbus serial
4 Serial protocols
modem link
RTU serial protocols:
Modem to Modbus serial and Ethernet
Modbus master
IEC 60870-5-101 and DNP3 (subset level 3)
Ethernet protocols Ethernet RTU protocols: Modbus/TCP
IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP3 (subset level 3)
TCP/IP protocols BootP/DHCP, DNS, SNMP agent, SMTP client, BootP/DHCP, DNS, SNMP agent, SMTP
NTP client, FTP client, client NTP (2), FTP
5 Security Protection by IP address filtering and passwords
Web server Characteristics HTTP and FTP server for setting the RTU HTTP and FTP server, 8 MB memory
protocol parameters, diagnostics and monitoring available for user, hosting of user Web pages
and documents (Doc, Pdf, Excel)
Predefined services Configuration Via Web Designer software Via Web Designer software
or predefined Web pages
6 Diagnostics Rack Viewer PLC diagnostics Serial device diagnostics
via predefined Web pages
Monitoring Data editor access to PLC data and variables. Monitoring via animation tables
Display of Unity program in a Web page Display of Unity program in a Web page
Alarm management
Customizable Graphic views Graphic monitoring via animated views

services (integrated graphic editor)
7 Unity Pro operator screen
User Web pages

Graphic monitoring via animated Web pages
created by the user
Advanced and HMI Calculation scripts
services E-mail service Alarm notification by e-mail or SMS Alarm notification by e-mail
Data logging Archiving of application data
Data Logging with time and date stamping
8 Database connection
in the module's Flash memory card

Report service
Recipe service
Application development software Web Designer (supplied with each module)
9
Web Designer
References BMX NOR 0200H TSX ETG1000
10 Catalogue or website Modicon M340 platform www.schneider-electric.com

(1) The RTU module's serial port is not isolated. For an extended serial network (> 15 m), the network must be isolated, for example, using the TWD XCA ISO
RS 485 isolation box (see page 5/125). For more information, please refer to the Modicon M340 platform catalogue.
5/12
Standalone Web Gateway/Server modules for remote access
FactoryCast Gateway ETG 10p0 FactoryCast HMI Gateway ETG30pp

1
All equipment supporting

Uni-Telway
All Modicon PLCs and third-party equipment supporting Modbus 3
Intranet or Modem, External Modem and integrated RAS function Intranet or Modem Intranet or Modem
RTC modem and integrated RAS function GSM modem and integrated RAS function
Ethernet to Uni-Telway serial Ethernet to Uni-Telway serial, Modem to Modbus serial and Ethernet
Modem to Uni-Telway and Ethernet
Uni-Telway slave Modbus master
4
Modbus/TCP Modbus/TCP
Uni-TE (Premium, Micro)
BootP/DHCP, DNS, SNMP agent, DHCP, DNS, SNMP agent, SMTP client, NTP client (2), FTP
SMTP client, NTP client (2), FTP
Protection by IP address filtering and passwords
5
HTTP and FTP server, 8 MB memory HTTP and FTP server, 32 MB memory available for user Web pages, memory expansion using Compact Flash cards 1 Gb
available for user, hosting of user Web max., hosting of user Web pages and documents (Doc, Pdf, Excel)
pages and docs (Doc, Pdf, Excel)
Via Web Designer software or predefined Web pages
Serial device diagnostics via

predefined Web pages
Network diagnostics, serial and Ethernet device diagnostics via predefined Web pages 6
Monitoring of devices and application via animation tables (read/write variables)
Display of PLC Unity program in a Web page
Graphic monitoring via animated views (integrated graphic editor)
Graphic monitoring via animated Web pages created by the user

7
Arithmetic and logical scripts
Alarm notification by e-mail Alarm notification by e-mail / SMS
Data recorded in the module with date and time stamping (CSV files)
Direct recording in an SQL, Oracle or MySQL server

8
Dynamic HTML report management
Management of Recipedata (storage and review locally or on remote database)
Web Designer (supplied with each module)
9
Web Designer
TSX ETG1010 TSX ETG3000 TSX ETG3010 (PSTN modem) TSX ETG3021
(GSM 900/1800 MHz band)
TSX ETG3022 function
(GSM 850/1900 MHz band)
(2) Except with TSX P57 103M/153M processors which do not have the NTP service.
10
5/13
Architecture Modicon Premium automation
platform 0

Logical communication architecture
Logical communication architecture
1 Company
Intranet
Internet
Site 3
2
Site 2
Enterprise Site 1
MES ERP
Unix Windows Linux
3 Factory
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
HMI + SCADA
4 Industrial PC
Workshop
Quantum Quantum Quantum
5
Premium Premium
6
Dialogue terminal Modicon M340
PLC
Momentum M1E
7 Collaborative
Automation
Partner Program
Robot
Distributed I/O
8
Variable speed
Gateway drive
INPUT A INPUT A
OUTPUT B OUTPUT B
+ +

9
Modicon STB I/O
Workshop 1 Workshop 2
MES: Manufacturing Execution System (production management system)

ERP: Enterprise Resource Planning (integrated management software packages)
IHM/SCADA: Human/Machine Interface and Supervision Control And Data Acquisition
Gateway: Gateway to sensor/actuator bus, to installed base network, fieldbus, etc.
10
5/14
Architecture (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 0

Physical communication architecture
Physical communication architecture
Router Site 3
1
Site 2
Router Internet
WAN Provider
Provider
Specialized link
Frame Relay
Public telecommunications
network, ADSL
Site 1
2
ATM
Router Firewall RAS
Switches (VLAN)
or routers
3
Switch
(50 switches max.)
Switch
Switch
Redundant optical ring ERP
4
Switch
100BASE-FX
3100 m
max.
Full Duplex Half Duplex
Optical MES
fibres
Switch
5
100 m 100 m
max. max.
Collision domain 2 Hub
Quantum Quantum
Premium
100 m
max.
100BASE-TX Momentum
M1E 6
Hub Hub Transceiver
Collaborative
Automation
Partner Program
Third-party device
Gateway
210 m
Magelis iPC
Vijeo Designer
Hub
7
max. Robot
INPUT A INPUT A
100 m OUTPUT B OUTPUT B
TSX Micro
+ +

max.
Collision domain 1 Modicon STB
100 m
Altivar 71 8
AS-Interface bus
max.
Modicon M340
Collision domain 3 (1)
9
(1) As a general rule, defining several collision domains can increase the size of the architecture and improve performance (see pages 9/12 to 9/17).
10
5/15
platform
FactoryCast Web servers and gateways
FactoryCast Web server offer

Local data logging or in
databases Schneider Electric offers a wide range of Transparent Ready products, such as
1 controllers and PLCs, industrial PCs, HMI devices (2), variable speed drives,
distributed I/O modules, gateways, Web servers, switches, SCADA software,
Active Web server E-mail/SMS notification
Class D (1) inductive identification systems, etc.
These products provide different levels of Web services and communication services
HMI functions on Ethernet Modbus/TCP, according to users requirements.
2 Among these Transparent Ready products, FactoryCast defines a range of modules

and gateways with configurable Web server combining:
User-defined Web pages
b Real-time communication functions based on Ethernet Modbus/TCP
b Predefined Web pages for advanced installation diagnostics
b The capacity to host dynamic user-defined Web pages or any document (.doc,
Configurable Web server Graphic data
display
pdf, etc.) designed to assist maintenance
Class C (1)
3 Application diagnostics
Presentation of the Web server modules and gateways
In the Transparent Ready approach, Ethernet network modules or Web gateways
integrate Ethernet Modbus/TCP services (Modbus TCP/IP messaging, SNMP
network management functions, etc.). They also offer, depending on the product, the
Reading/writing of following Web functions:
variables b Standard Web services (predefined)
b FactoryCast configurable Web services
4 Standard Web server
Product diagnostics
b FactoryCast HMI active Web services
Class B (1)
There are two ranges of configurable Web server:
b FactoryCast Web modules for PLCs, which are embedded in the Modicon
Product configuration TSX Micro, Modicon M340, Modicon Premium and Modicon Quantum automation
platforms. These modules provide transparent access to system and application
diagnostic information in real time using Web technologies.
5 b FactoryCast Web Gateway modules, with all the network interfaces in one
standalone unit:
v A modem (depending on the version)
v An RAS/Router function
v A customizable Web server
v HMI functions (depending on the version)
FactoryCast Gateways are a cost-effective response to requirements for remote
6 access to customized remote diagnostics, maintenance, monitoring and control
services using a simple web browser as well as to requirements to integrate serial
installations (Modbus RTU or Uni-Telway) in an existing Ethernet Modbus/TCP
infrastructure.
Presentation of Web services

7 Standard Web services
Standard Web services are integrated in the following Schneider Electric Ethernet
products: automation platform processors and Ethernet modules, distributed I/O
modules, variable speed drives and Ethernet gateways (see page 5/17).
Using a simple web browser, the standard Web server provides the following ready
to use functions:
8 b Product configuration
b Remote diagnostics and maintenance of products
b Display and adjustment of products (reading/writing variables, status)
The embedded Web server is a real-time data server. All the data can be presented
in the form of standard web pages in HTML format and can therefore be accessed
using any web browser that supports the embedded Java code. The standard
9 functions provided by the Web server are supplied ready to use and therefore do not
require any programming of either the PLC or the client PC device supporting a web
browser.
(1) In order to simplify their selection and ensure their interoperability within a system, each
Transparent Ready product is identified by the class of services it provides. Letter A, B, C or
D (level of service for the Web server) followed by 10, 20 or 30 (level of service for Ethernet
10
communication).
(2) HMI = Human Machine Interface
5/16
product selection platform
FactoryCast Web servers and gateways
Presentation of Web services (continued)

FactoryCast configurable Web services
The configurable Web services are integrated in the following Schneider Electric 1
Ethernet products: FactoryCast PLC modules (Modicon TSX Micro, Modicon
Premium and Modicon Quantum) and FactoryCast Gateway modules.
In addition to the standard Web services, the configurable Web servers offer the
following functions:
b Graphic application diagnostics (customized graphic views created by the user).
b Graphic supervision via animated Web pages created by the user and stored in
the Web server module
b And, depending on the products:
2
b Management of PLC alarms (system and application) with partial or total
acknowledgement (ready to use Alarm Viewer function pages)
b Open data server interface. SOAP/XML protocol, WSDL interface (1)
FactoryCast Web servers can also be used to customize the supervision, diagnostics or
maintenance interface via Web pages defined by the user or any other document (doc,
pdf, etc.) hosted in the module.
3
FactoryCast HMI active Web services
The active Web services are integrated in the FactoryCast HMI modules of Modicon
Premium and Modicon Quantum PLCs.
In addition to the FactoryCast Web services, the FactoryCast HMI modules provide
HMI functions, which are executed in the module itself:
b Real-time HMI database management, independent of the PLC processor
b Arithmetic and logical calculations on HMI data 4
b Direct connectivity with relational databases (traceability)
b Data Logging: recording data in the module
b Display of Unity Pro graphic runtime screens in the form of Web pages
b Recipe management (read/write)
b Alarm and report notification by e-mail
b Active page server, dynamic generation of animated HTML pages
b Dynamic generation of HTML reports
b Open data server interface. SOAP/XML WSDL interface protocol (1)
5
FactoryCast HMI is defined as an active Web server used to execute HMI functions
without any effect on the PLC application program and therefore on its scan time.
Web server automation products

Product Reference Embedded Web server
6
Standard, class Bp0 Configurable, class Cp0 Active, class Dp0
Modicon Quantum Processors 140 CPU 651 50/60
platform 140 CPU 652 60
Modules 140 NOE 771 01
140 NOE 771 11 FactoryCast
Modicon Premium Processors

140 NWM 100 00
TSX P57 2p23 M
FactoryCast FactoryCast HMI
7
platform TSX P57 3623 AM
TSX P57 4823 AM
TSX P57 p634 M
Modules TSX ETY 4103
TSX ETC 101
TSX ETY 110WS
TSX ETY 5103
FactoryCast
FactoryCast
8
TSX WMY 100 FactoryCast FactoryCast HMI
Modicon M340 platform Modules BMX NOE 0100
BMX NOC 0401
BMX NOE 0110 FactoryCast
9
BMX NOR 0200H FactoryCast
Modicon TSX Micro Modules TSX ETZ 410
platform TSX ETZ 510 FactoryCast
Inductel identification station XGK S1715503
FactoryCast Web Gateway TSX ETG 10p0 FactoryCast
FactoryCast HMI Web Gateway TSX ETG 30pp FactoryCast FactoryCast HMI
(1) For standard protocol providing interoperability with computer management applications, see
10
page 5/28.
5/17
platform
Modicon PLC standard Web services
1 Remote Web
clients
Thin Client PC
Web client
2
Thin Client Web client Internet
Intranet
Magelis
Smart Firewall
4 Web
server Web Web
Modicon M340
Premium server server
Quantum
The predefined Rack Viewer PLC diagnostic function and the Data Editor read/write
function are supported by all Ethernet TCP/IP modules (1) in the following Modicon
5 automation platforms:
b Modicon M340 platform
b Modicon TSX Micro platform
b Modicon Premium platform
b Modicon Quantum platform
b Modicon Momentum platform
(See the selection of Web server products on page 5/17).
6 These functions can be accessed using a standard web browser connected to the
network. They are ready to use and secure (password-protected).
They can be used locally or remotely via:

b Intranet
b A modem and RAS server
b Internet
7
(1) For standard Web servers integrated in variable speed drives, please consult our website
www.schneider-electric.com.
10
5/18
platform
Modicon PLC standard Web services (continued)

Rack Viewer PLC diagnostics function
The Rack Viewer function can be used for PLC system and I/O diagnostics. It 1
displays the following in real time:
b LED status on the front panel of the PLC
b The PLC type and version
b The hardware configuration of the PLC including the status of the system bits and
words
b Detailed diagnostics of each I/O module channel or application-specific channel
in the configuration 2
Quantum hardware configuration

3
Data Editor read/write function for PLC data and variables
The Data Editor function can be used to create tables of animated variables for
real-time read/write access to lists of PLC data.
Several animation tables, containing specific application variables to be monitored or

modified, can be created by the user and saved in the standard Web server module.
4
In addition to the functions provided by standard Web servers, FactoryCast Web
servers offer the following:
b Variables to be displayed can be entered and displayed using their symbols
(S_Pump 234) or their addresses (%MW99)
b The write access option for variables, which can be enabled or disabled for each
Data Editor variables table

of the variables using the FactoryCast configuration software
b The read/write function, which can be used on tools such as a pocket PC or PDA 5
terminal
PDA terminal
8
10
5/19
platform
FactoryCast configurable Web server
1
Remote Web
client
2
Thin Client Web client Internet
Modem
+ Magelis
RAS server Smart Firewall
4 Web
server Web Web
Modicon M340
Premium server server
Quantum
In addition to standard Web services, FactoryCast modules (see selection table on

page 5/17) support the following functions:
5 b Alarm Viewer
b Creation and display of graphic views via an online graphics editor (Graphic Data
Editor, supplied)
b Hosting and display of Web pages created by the user
b SOAP/XML server interface
6
Alarm Viewer function
The alarm viewer is a ready to use, password-protected function. It is used to
process alarms (display, acknowledgement and deletion) managed at PLC level by
the system or using diagnostic function blocks known as DFBs (system-specific
diagnostic function blocks and application-specific diagnostic function blocks
7 created by the user).
These alarms are stored in the PLC diagnostics buffer (specific memory area used to
store all diagnostic events). This function is available with the Modicon Premium
platforms (with PL7 or Unity software) and the Modicon Quantum platform (with
Unity software).
8 The diagnostic viewer is a Web page comprising a list of messages, which displays
the following information for each alarm:
b Dates and times of the appearance/disappearance of the fault
b Alarm message
Alarm Viewer b Alarm status
b Type of associated diagnostic function block (DFB)
10
5/20
platform
FactoryCast configurable Web server (continued)

User Web page hosting and display function
FactoryCast Web modules have an 8 Mbyte memory (1) which is accessed in the 1
same way as a hard drive and can be used to host Web pages and all user-defined
documents in Word or Acrobat Reader (for example, maintenance manuals,
diagrams, etc.).
These Web pages can be created using any standard tool for creation and editing in
HTML format. These pages can be enhanced by inserting animated graphic objects
linked to PLC variables. These animated objects are created using the Graphic Data 2
Editor supplied with FactoryCast.
Web pages created in this way can be used, for example, to:
b Display and modify all PLC variables in real time
Hosting and display of user Web pages
b Create hyperlinks to other external Web servers (documentation, suppliers, etc.)
This function is particularly suitable for creating graphic interfaces used for the 3
following purposes:
b Real-time display and supervision
b Production monitoring
b Diagnostics and maintenance assistance
b Operator manuals
4
SOAP/XML server interface
FactoryCast modules incorporate a standard SOAP/XML data server that provides
direct interoperability between automation devices and computer management
applications (MES, ERP, SAP .Net application, etc.). See page 5/28.
5
Graphic Data Editor function
This function can be used to create graphic views animated by PLC variables. The
graphic editor is available online ready to use, and also offline using FactoryCast
configuration software.
6
These views are created from a library of predefined graphic objects by simple copy/
paste operations. The objects are configured to suit the user's requirements (colour,
PLC variables, name, etc.).
List of graphic objects available:

b Analog and digital indicators
b Horizontal and vertical bar charts 7
b Boxes for displaying messages and entering values
b Pushbutton boxes
b Trend recorders
Graphic Data Editor
b Vats, valves, motors, etc.
Customized graphic objects can be added to this list. They can be reused in user
Web pages that have been created using standard software for editing HTML pages.
8
The views created can be saved in the FactoryCast modules.
(1) Memory not affected by power outages or reinitialization of the PLC.
10
5/21
platform
FactoryCast HMI active Web servers
1 Relational database
Thin client
Magelis
Smart
E-mail
notification
2
Database Active Web
connection page refresh
Recipe FactoryCast HMI Interpreted

management real-time calculations
database
3 PLC data
Local data
logging
4 FactoryCast HMI
modules
FactoryCast HMI Web services are integrated in the Web server modules embedded
in the Modicon Premium and Modicon Quantum automation platforms.
5 These modules have the following Ethernet and Web services:

b Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication functions:
v TCP/IP messaging service with Modbus TCP/IP and Uni-TE TCP/IP protocols
v SNMP agent for standardized network management, which supports standard
MIB II and Transparent Ready private MIB
b FactoryCast configurable Web services:
v Rack Viewer PLC diagnostics functions (see page 5/19)
v Data Editor read/write functions for PLC variables (see page 5/19)
6 v Alarm Viewer alarm display functions (see page 5/20)
v Graphic Data Editor online graphical view editor functions (see page 5/20)
v Function for hosting and displaying user-defined Web pages (see page 5/21)
FactoryCast HMI modules also provide the following specialized HMI Web services:
b Real-time HMI database management, independent of the PLC processor
7 b Arithmetic and logical calculations on HMI data
b Direct connectivity with relational databases (traceability)
b Data Logging: recording data in the module
b Display of Unity Pro graphic runtime screens in the form of Web pages
b Recipe management (read/write)
b Alarm and report notification by e-mail
b Active page server, dynamic generation of animated HTML pages
b Dynamic generation of HTML reports
8 b Open data server interface. SOAP/XML WSDL interface protocol (1)
(1) In order to simplify their selection and ensure their interoperability within a system, each
Transparent Ready product is identified by the class of services it provides. Letter A, B, C or
D (level of service for the Web server) followed by 10, 20 or 30 (level of service for Ethernet
9 communication).
10
5/22
platform
Architectures
FactoryCast HMI Web servers can be integrated in various architectures:
b Installations that require a flexible distributed HMI solution
b Mixed architectures, supplementing conventional SCADA systems
1
b Architectures where a direct link is required between automation systems and
information management levels (IT link)
2
Relational database Thin client Flexible distributed HMI solution
The use of Web-based technologies means that FactoryCast HMI can replace
conventional HMI or SCADA solutions in applications where architectures require a
flexible multistation HMI, thus providing a temporary nomadic remote control
function.
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
3
These architectures consist of:
b Several PLCs networked on Ethernet, equipped with FactoryCast HMI Web server
Premium Quantum modules
b One or more PC terminals simply equipped with a web browser thus providing a
Web Thin Client interface (licence free)
Web
server server b If necessary, a relational database in which FactoryCast HMI can archive data
from the automation system 4
FactoryCast HMI modules read PLC data and execute HMI services (e-mail,
interpreted calculations, connection to relational databases, updating Web pages) at
source in the PLC, without affecting the PLC program or the scan time.
This solution provides:

5
Premium Modicon M340 b A reliable HMI application, which is executed at source in a robust PLC device
b An integrated multistation interface and remote access that is easy and cost-
Flexible distributed HMI solution
effective to set up (Thin Client terminal, for example Magelis Smart)
b An HMI application that is easy to maintain (the application is housed in a single
location on the server side)
b Preventive maintenance via e-mail
b Greater availability for archiving data in the PLC 6
10
5/23
platform
Transparent Ready, system approach
Nomad Architectures (continued)

HMI
Mixed architectures
1 MIS IT links
In this type of architecture FactoryCast HMI supplements conventional SCADA
systems, such as Vijeo Look or Monitor Pro, which meet the requirement for
SCADA centralizing information for global supervision from a central site.
Intranet
Combining a FactoryCast HMI solution and a conventional SCADA solution enables:

b Simplification of the SCADA application by locating some of the SCADA
2 processing functions at source, at PLC level
b Increased availability of the traceability function due to the direct connection
between FactoryCast HMI modules and relational databases
b Powerful ready to use remote diagnostics capability
Web Web b Nomad client stations to be connected to the Intranet or Internet via Thin Client
server server PC or PDA devices
Premium
3 Quantum
Mixed architecture
Direct links with information management levels

4 Nomad
HMI
In this type of architecture, FactoryCast HMI eliminates the need for intermediate
devices (software or hardware gateways), which are expensive to install and
MIS IT links maintain, by establishing direct links between the automation levels and the global
information management levels (MES, ERP, etc.).
Intranet
5 The PLC manages the following links which allow a collaborative automation
system to be set up, making it easier to share data in real time:
b Direct archiving of information from the automation system in relational databases
b Direct interaction with IT applications via the SOAP/XML client/server interface
This solution results in:
6
Web
server
Web b Simplified architectures
server
Premium b Lower installation, development and maintenance costs
Quantum
b Increased reliability of information (the data is collected at source)
b Increased interoperability with IT applications
Direct links with the information management levels b Greater availability of data archiving
10
5/24
platform
Specialized HMI services

Real-time database
With an internal architecture similar to that of an HMI/SCADA system, FactoryCast 1
HMI modules manage their own variables database in real time, independently of the
PLC program. It is this variables database that is used to execute various functions,
including internal processing, archiving, alarms, e-mail, etc.
Variables in this real-time database are updated using the PLC's data acquisition
service.
This service becomes operational once the following parameters have been set in
the FactoryCast HMI software: 2
b Direct import of PLC variables/symbol databases (no double entry)
b Definition of the acquisition frequency (period at which this variable is updated)
Real-time database
Note: A FactoryCast HMI application running in a Premium configured FactoryCast HMI module
can access all the PLC variables in the architecture transparently on the network (X-Way/Uni-TE
3
transparent protocols).
Characteristics
b Maximum number of I/O variables per application: 1000 variables from PLCs
b Maximum number of internal variables per application: 100
b Acquisition frequency: 500 ms minimum
4
Calculation functions
The FactoryCast HMI server can carry out various arithmetic or logical operations on
a combination of variables from the HMI database. These calculations include, for
example, scaling, formatting, logic processing for event triggering, etc.
This calculation function is operational from the local HMI database, independently
of the PLC processor, and is in the form of spreadsheets where the formulas are
5
defined in cells.
The spreadsheets are interpreted and processed by the server. The result of each
formula is associated with a new internal variable. The processing of each
spreadsheet is initiated by a trigger.
6
Calculation function
SMS E-mail E-mail transmission

The FactoryCast HMI module can, on a specific event, send e-mails completely
autonomously to a predefined list of e-mail addresses. This function is executed
independently of the PLC program.
7
The event that triggers the e-mail may be associated with the following:
b A PLC variable (I/O, internal variable)
Internet b An alarm, a threshold overshoot
b A machine or process state
b An operator action, etc. 8
When an e-mail is sent it passes via an SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
server. This server receives the e-mail and waits for the recipient to acknowledge it.
Web server Web server The e-mail service is compatible with all SMTP servers. A return address can be
defined should delivery to the destination address fail.
Characteristics
b Configuration of the SMTP server: compatible with all SMTP servers
9
Premium b Maximum number of e-mails: 100
Quantum b Contents of e-mail messages: free text with embedded dynamic variable values
E-mail transmission (from the PLC) and hyperlinks (unlimited)
10
5/25
platform
MySQL Specialized HMI services (continued)

Data ORACLE
Connection to relational databases
1
server Microsoft
SQL Server The FactoryCast HMI module can be connected directly and completely
autonomously to the following remote relational databases:
b SQL Server
b MySQL
b Oracle
Web server Web server
This connection enables all process or internal data to be archived directly in the
2 FactoryCast HMI module without any intermediate system (hardware or software).
The data can be archived (written) periodically and/or on a specific event. These
variables can be either from PLCs (I/O bits, internal bits, internal words and
Premium
registers) or local to the module.
Quantum
Connection to databases The FactoryCast HMI Roll Over function controls the size of tables by managing the
3 maximum number of records.
This circular data archiving function automatically deletes the oldest data and can be
accessed by simply setting parameters in the FactoryCast HMI software.
Characteristics
4 b Number of databases that can be connected: 3

b Number of tables that can be written per database: 10 maximum
b Number of columns per table: 50 maximum
b Type of database supported: Oracle, SQL Server and MySQL
b Automatic table creation: the FactoryCast HMI server creates a table in the
database if one does not already exist
5
E-mail Data Logging
FTP
@ FactoryCast HMI modules can log data in the internal flash memory periodically or
on an event.
6
This logging is done in a CSV file, which can be:
b Automatically exported via FTP
b Attached to an e-mail
This function is particularly useful for standalone installations, or stations that are not
connected to an Intranet, or for local traceability of data.
7 Internet
Web server Web server
8
Premium
Quantum
.csv data .csv data
files files
9 Data Logging
10
5/26
platform
Remote Specialized HMI services (continued)

management
Recipe management
The recipe management function enables a FactoryCast HMI application to take
recipe files into account automatically on process events or at the request of an
1
.xml recipe files operator, applying the recipe values to the PLC data memory.
This function provides very flexible data management in the execution of production
or process changes by sending new setpoints and new parameters.
Characteristics 2
Web server Local management b Recipes are described using XML format (SOAP/XML format)
b Recipes are stored in the module or remotely
b Recipes contain setpoint values in accordance with standard recipes, and these
values are transferred to the PLC memory
Premium .xml recipe
Quantum
files
3
Recipe management
Web-based HMI interface

The memory of the FactoryCast HMI Web server receives Web pages defined by the
user to provide a graphic HMI interface. The Active Web Server provides dynamic
4
refreshing of the Web pages generated by the server itself.
FactoryCast HMI supports two types of Web page:

b HTML pages animated in real time with Java graphic objects used to create the
user interface (FactoryCast HMI comes with a complete library of Java graphic
objects)
b Active Web pages dynamically generated in the Web server with integration of 5
PLC variables inside the HTML code (PLC tags) which can be used to generate
reports. These active pages consisting of HTML code are fully compatible with all
Thin Client terminals (pocket PC, PDA, or PC terminal)
Web based HMI interface
6
Dedicated gateway Embedded FactoryCast SOAP/XML client/server interface
solution SOAP Web Services
For greater interoperability, FactoryCast HMI implements the following SOAP/XML
Planning,
Reports, MES, Web service: server function capable of answering SOAP requests generated by
ERP, Excel any client application (MES, ERP, SAP, SCADA or third-party applications developed
etc. in .NET or Java).
See page 5/28. 7

Database
8
Direct
Gateway, real-time
SCADA, access
OPC
9
Web server
Premium Premium
PLC PLC + FactoryCast SOAP

10
Web services
SOAP/XML client/server interface
5/27
functions platform 0

SOAP/XML Web services
Presentation, functions
The standardization of Web services has come about as a result of joint
1 development between Microsoft and IBM, amongst others, validated at the W3C
(World Wide Web Consortium) as an open standard.
It now provides all the tools, specifications and environments needed for each
platform. Web services are based on standards such as:
b XML (eXtensible Markup Language): the universal standard for data exchange
b SOAP (Single Object Access Protocol) protocol carried via the HTTP (Hyper Text
Transfer Protocol) channel
2 b WSDL (Web Services Description Language) in XML format
SOAP is currently considered to be the reference protocol, including in industry. It

Development tool
has now been adopted by the main market players, including Microsoft (pNET, SQL
Server, OFFICE, etc.), IBM (Java, Web Sphere), Lotus, ORACLE, SUN, SAP, etc.
SOAP
server Embedded SOAP/XML Web services: ModbusXMLDa Web services
3 This new Transparent Ready service offers the hitherto unheard of possibility of
WSDL making an IT/e-business application interact directly with the control system levels
using the same standards.
Visual Studio pNET With the implementation of ModbusXMLDa (Modbus XML Data access) services in
FactoryCast Web servers, IT engineers can easily create their own application to
access the required information directly in the PLC and in real time.
Data exchanges are made in XML standard format in response to a request using
4 the SOAP protocol.
SOAP The implementation of Web services in control system equipment makes it easy to
request
achieve vertical integration of the control level and create even more collaborative
FactoryCast
module architectures which can be used to link production systems to enterprise
management systems. It simplifies access to information,
pNET Java reduces training, development and roll-out costs and increases productivity.
5 ModbusXMLDa server interface
FactoryCast HMI software ModbusXMLDa Web services in FactoryCast modules

ModbusXMLDa server interface
This implementation enables a SOAP client application (management level
computer application, MES, ERP, etc.) to communicate directly with a FactoryCast
Web server module embedded in the PLC.
6 Configuration
SOAP
client
Exchanges are initiated by the SOAP client application (the server responds to these
requests).
b Step 1: Creation of the client application with learning of the Web services. The
SOAP
development environment (for example, Visual Studio pNET) looks in the
server FactoryCast server for the list of available services and their WSDL standard
interfaces provided by the module.
b Step 2: Development of the client application. The developer integrates the Web
7 service functions using the code retrieved at step 1 of the learning process.
b Step 3: Execution of the client application. The client application communicates in
SOAP FactoryCast
request HMI module real time with the FactoryCast Web server module using the SOAP protocol.
ModbusXMLDa client interface

FactoryCast or
FactoryCast HMI This implementation allows a FactoryCast HMI module to execute a SOAP client
8 application in order to communicate with a remote SOAP server application (for

module
example another FactoryCast Web server module or a computer management
ModbusXMLDa client interface application, MES, ERP, etc.).
Exchanges are initiated by the FactoryCast HMI client module (the remote
application server responds to SOAP requests sent by the FactoryCast HMI
Requests ModbusXMLDa functions implemented in module).
implemented FactoryCast modules b Step 1: Configuration of the ModbusXMLDa client service. The user declares the
9 Access to data
via physical
addresses
ReadDeviceIdentification
ReadMultipleRegisters
PLC variables that are to be exchanged (in read or write mode), using the
FactoryCast HMI configuration software.
WriteMultipleRegisters b Step 2: Use of the application. The ModbusXMLDa client service executed in the
ReadCoils FactoryCast HMI module communicates directly with the remote server application
WriteMultipleCoils using SOAP requests in XML format.
ReadDiscreteInputs
Access to data Read, operation to read item list value Note: ModbusXMLDa functions are implemented in the FactoryCast modules:
10 via symbols Write, operation to write item list value - Server interface: Modicon M340 BMX NOE 0110, Modicon Premium TSX ETY 5103/WMY 100
and Modicon Quantum 140 NOE 771 11/NWM 100 00
Browse, operation to browse item list - Client interface: Modicon Premium TSX WMY 100 and Modicon Quantum 140 NWM 100 00
5/28
platform 0

Presentation
Transparent Ready products allow transparent communication on a single Ethernet
Modbus/TCP network. 1
Services Network Time Global FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) Web E-mail TCP Open Messaging I/O
manage- synchro- Data server Scanning
ment nization
Applica- SNMP NTP RTPS DHCP TFTP FTP HTTP SMTP Modbus
2
MIB Transparent Ready

tions
MIB 2 standard
Transport UDP TCP
Link IP
Physical Ethernet 802.3 and Ethernet II

3
In addition to universal Ethernet services (HTTP, BOOTP/DHCP, FTP, etc.),

the Transparent Ready device communication services designed for use in
automation applications include:
4
b Modbus/TCP messaging for class 10, 20 or 30 devices
b I/O Scanning service for class 30 devices
b FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) for class 10, 20 or 30 devices
b SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) network management for class 20
or 30 devices
b Global Data, for class 30 devices
b Bandwidth management for class 30 devices
5
b NTP (Network Time Protocol) time synchronization for class 30 devices
b E-mail alarm notification via SMTP server for class 30 devices
b TCP Open, optional, for class 30 devices
Note: The above services are listed for general information. Please refer to the characteristics
pages for each device for exhaustive details of which services are supported by each one.
6
The following pages present the various options available through all of these
services in order to facilitate the optimum choice of solutions when defining a system
integrating Transparent Ready devices.
10
5/29
platform 0

Functions
Ethernet universal services
1 HTTP HypTocol (RFC 1945)
HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) is used to transmit Web pages between a
server and a browser. HTTP has been used on the Web since 1990.
Web servers embedded in Transparent Ready automation products provide easy
access to products located anywhere in the world from a standard web browser such
as Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
2 BOOTP/DHCP (RFC1531)
BOOTP/DHCP is used to provide devices with IP parameters automatically. This
avoids having to manage each device address individually by transferring this
management to a dedicated IP address server.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used to assign configuration
parameters to devices automatically. DHCP is an extension of BOOTP. DHCP
3 consists of two components:
b One to provide the IP network address
b One to deliver the specific IP parameters to the device from a DHCP server
Schneider Electric devices can be:
- BOOTP clients allowing the IP address to be retrieved automatically from a server
- BOOTP servers allowing the device to distribute IP addresses to the network stations
Schneider Electric uses standard BOOTP/DHCP protocols for its FDR (Faulty Device
4 Replacement) service.
FTP File Transfer Protocol (RFCs 959, 2228 and 2640)

File Transfer Protocol (FTP) provides the basic elements for file sharing. Many
systems use FTP to exchange files between devices.
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol (firmware updates)

5 Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is a network transfer protocol used to connect to
a device and download code to it.
For example, it can be used to transfer a boot code to a workstation without a disk
drive or to connect and download updates of network device firmware.
Note: Transparent Ready products implement FTP and TFTP for transferring certain information
to or from devices, in particular for downloads of firmware or user-defined Web pages.
6 NTP Network Time Protocol (RFC 1305)

NTP (Network Time Protocol) is used to synchronize the time of a client or server
device from a time server. Depending on the network used, it provides the following
time precisions based on UTC:
b A few milliseconds on a local area network (LAN)
b A few tens of milliseconds on a wide area network (WAN)
7 SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (RFC 0821)

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is an e-mail transmission service. It is used to
send e-mail between a sender and a recipient via an SMTP e-mail server.
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol (RFCs 1155, 1156 and 1157)
The Internet community has developed the SNMP standard for managing the
8 various components of a network via a single system. The network management
system can exchange data with SNMP agent devices. This function allows the
manager to display the status of the network and devices, modify their configuration
and feed back alarms in the event of a fault.
Note: Transparent Ready devices are SNMP-compatible and can be integrated naturally in a
network managed via SNMP.
9 COM/DCOM Distributed Component Object Model

COM/DCOM (Distributed Component Object Model) or OLE (Object Linking and
Embedding) is the name of the technology consisting of Windows objects which
enables transparent communication between Windows applications.
Note: These technologies are used in the OFS (OLE for Process Control Factory Server) data
server software.
10
5/30
platform 0

Modbus/TCP function codes dec hex Modbus standard communication protocol
Bit
access
Read n input bits
Read n output bits
02
01
02
01
Modbus, the industry communication standard since 1979, has been combined with
Ethernet Modbus/TCP, the medium for the Internet revolution, to form Modbus/TCP,
1
Read exception status 07 07
a completely open Ethernet protocol. The development of a connection to Modbus/
Write 1 output bit 05 05
TCP does not require any proprietary component, or the purchase of a licence.
Write n output bits 15 0F This protocol can easily be combined with any product supporting a standard TCP/IP
Read 1 input word 04 04 communication stack. The specifications can be obtained free of charge from the
Read n input words 03 03 following website: www.modbus-ida.org.
Write 1 output word
Write n output words
06
16
06
10
2
Modbus/TCP, simple and open
Read device ID 43/14 2B/0E
The Modbus application layer is very simple and universally familiar with its 9 million
Examples of Modbus/TCP function codes for accessing data installed connections. Thousands of manufacturers have already implemented this
and diagnostics protocol. Many have already developed a Modbus/TCP connection and numerous
products are currently available.
The simplicity of Modbus/TCP enables any field device, such as an I/O module, to
communicate on Ethernet without the need for a powerful microprocessor or a lot of
3
internal memory.
Modbus/TCP, high-performance
Due to the simplicity of its protocol and the fast speed of 100 Mbps Ethernet, the
performance of Modbus/TCP is excellent. This allows this type of network to be used
in real-time applications such as I/O scanning. 4
Modbus/TCP, a standard
The application protocol is identical on Modbus serial link, Modbus Plus or

Modbus/TCP. This means that messages can be routed from one network to the
other without converting the protocol.
Since Modbus is implemented on top of the TCP/IP layer, users can also benefit from
IP routing enabling devices located anywhere in the world to communicate without 5
worrying about the distance between them.
Schneider Electric offers a complete range of gateways for interconnecting a
Modbus/TCP network to existing Modbus Plus or Modbus serial link networks.
The IANA organization (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority) has allocated the fixed
port TCP 502 (Well known port) to the Modbus protocol. Thus Modbus has become
an Internet standard. 6
A study by the ARC Advisory Group, a leading analyst in the automation and
software sectors, shows that Modbus/TCP is the world's leading Ethernet industrial
protocol in terms of units sold in 2004.
Modbus and Modbus/TCP are recognized by the IEC/EN 61158 international

standard as a fieldbus. They are also compliant with the Chinese National Standard 7
managed by ITEI.
Interfacing CANopen with Modbus/TCP

CiA DSP 309-2 provides standardized mapping of CANopen data for transport on
Ethernet Modbus/TCP networks. The specification reserves the Modbus 43/13
function code for this purpose. This function code is reserved exclusively for
CANopen.
8
Modbus TCP/IP characteristics
Maximum size of data:
b Read: 125 words or registers
b Write: 100 words or registers
9
10
5/31
platform 0

I/O Scanning service
1
Modicon Premium or
Modicon Quantum
Word table platform with I/O Scanner
Read Write function (Transparent
Ready class p30)
2
Ethernet
Modbus/TCP
3
Device with
Modbus/TCP
Device messaging in
input words/ server mode
output words
INPUT A INPUT A
OUTPUT B OUTPUT B
4
+ +

The I/O Scanning Service is used to manage the exchange of remote I/O states on
the Ethernet network after simple configuration, with no need for any special
programming.
I/O scanning is performed transparently by means of read/write requests according
to the Modbus client/server protocol on the TCP/IP profile.
5 This principle of scanning via a standard protocol enables communication with any
device supporting Modbus TCP messaging in server mode.
This service can be used to define:
b A %MW word zone reserved for reading inputs
b A %MW word zone reserved for writing outputs
b Refresh periods independent of the PLC scan
During operation, the module:
6 b Manages TCP/IP connections with each remote device
b Scans devices and copies the I/O to the configured %MW word zone
b Feeds back status words used to check that the service is working correctly from
the PLC application
b Applies pre-configured fallback values if a communication problem occurs
A range of hardware and software products is available enabling the I/O Scanning
7 protocol to be implemented on any type of device that can be connected to the
Ethernet network. Please consult the Modbus-IDA website: www.modbus-ida.org.
Characteristics
b Under Unity Pro software, each station can exchange a maximum of:
v 100 write words
v 125 read words
8 b Maximum size in the PLC managing the service:
v 2 Kwords %MW (1) in inputs and 2 Kwords %MW (1) in outputs with manager
PLC limited to 64 stations
v 4 Kwords %MW (1) in inputs and 4 Kwords %MW (1) in outputs with manager
PLC limited to 128 stations
I/O Scanning service diagnostics

9 I/O Scanning service diagnostics can be performed in one of five ways:
b Via the application program from a specific PLC data zone
b From the setup software debug screen
b From the PLC system diagnostic function displayed by means of a web browser
on a PC station
b Using the TSX EAZ 01P SFE10 ConneXview diagnostic software
b Using standard SNMP network management software
10
I/O Scanning service diagnostics
(1) or 4x registers with Concept or ProWORX.
5/32
platform 0

FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) service
The Faulty Device Replacement service uses standard address management
technologies (BOOTP, DHCP) and the TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) file
1
management service, with the aim of simplifying maintenance of Ethernet products.
It is used to replace a faulty device with a new device with the guarantee that it will be
detected, reconfigured and automatically restarted by the system.
The main steps in replacement are:

1 A device using the FDR service malfunctions
2
2 Another similar device is taken from the maintenance store, preconfigured with
the Device name for the faulty device, then reinstalled on the network. Depending
a on the device, addressing can be performed using rotary selector switches (as for
Modicon STB distributed I/O aor Modicon OTB for example) or can be given using
the keypad integrated in the device (as for Altivar variable speed drives for
example)
3 The FDR server detects the new device, allocates it an IP address and transfers
3
the configuration parameters to it
4 The substituted device checks that all these parameters are indeed compatible
with its own characteristics and switches to operational mode
NIM network module for Modicon STB I/O
The FDR server can be:
b A Modicon M340 PLC Ethernet module, BMX NOE 0100/0110, BMX NOC 0401 or
BMX NOR 0200H
4
b A Modicon Premium PLC Ethernet module, TSX ETY 4103/5103 or TSX ETC 101
b A Modicon Quantum PLC Ethernet module, 140 NOE 771 01/11 or
140 NOC 771 01
b A Modicon Premium processor with integrated Ethernet port, TSX P57 ppppM
b A Modicon Quantum processor with integrated Ethernet port, 140 CPU 651 50/60
5
10
5/33
platform 0

Global Data service
1
Distribution group 1
Data exchange 4 KB max.
IP multicast 239.255.255.251
2
Ethernet
Modbus/TCP
3
IP multicast 239.255.255.250
Data exchange 4 KB max.
Distribution group 2
4 The Global Data service performs data exchanges in real time between stations
belonging to the same distribution group. It is used to synchronize remote
applications, or to share a common database between a number of distributed
applications.
Exchanges are based on a standard producer/consumer protocol, guaranteeing
optimum performance with a minimum load on the network. This RTPS (Real Time
Publisher Subscriber) protocol is promoted by Modbus-IDA (Interface for Distributed
5 Automation), and has already been adopted as a standard by several
manufacturers.
Characteristics
A maximum of 64 stations can participate in Global Data within the same distribution
group.
6 Each station can:

b Publish one 1024-byte variable. The publication period can be configured from
1 to n processor master task (Mast) periods
b Subscribe to between 1 and 64 variables. The validity of each variable is
controlled by status bits (Health Status bits) linked to a refresh timeout configurable
between 50 ms and 1s. It is not possible to access a variable element. The total size
of subscribed variables amounts to 4 K contiguous bytes.
7 To further optimize the performance of the Ethernet network, Global Data can be
configured with the multicast filtering option which, combined with switches in the
ConneXium range (see pages 5/50 ...), distributes data only to Ethernet ports where
there is a station subscribed to the Global Data service. If these switches are not
used, Global Data is sent in multicast mode to all switch ports.
8 Global Data service diagnostics

The diagnostic screens use a colour code to show the Global Data status:
b Configured/not configured/faulty
b Published/subscribed
Global Data service diagnostics can be performed in one of five ways:

b Via the application program from a specific PLC data zone
9 b From the setup software debug screen
b From the PLC system diagnostic function displayed by means of a web browser
on a PC station
b Using the TSX EAZ 01P SFE10 ConneXview diagnostic software
b Using standard SNMP network management software
10 Global Data service diagnostics
5/34
platform 0

NTP time synchronization service
Presentation 1
Power Processor Ethernet NTP
supply module server
Internal
clock NTP request
(S)NTP
client Ethernet network
2
NTP response
Premium/Quantum
NTP service configuration
3
The time synchronization service is based on NTP (Network Time Protocol) which is
used to synchronize the time of a client or a server on Ethernet TCP/IP from a server
or another reference time source (radio, satellite, etc.).
Operation
b Modbus TCP communication modules: 4
b BMX NOE 0100/0110 (with version u 2.0 module) and BMX NOR 0200H for
Modicon M340 Unity version u 2.0 automation platform
b TSX ETY 5103 for Modicon Premium Unity u V2.0 automation platform
b 140 NOE 771 11 for Modicon Quantum Unity u V2.0 automation platform
b have an NTP client component
5
These modules can connect to an NTP server using a client request (unicast), in
order to update their local time. The module clock is updated periodically (1 to 120 s)
with an error y 10 ms for standard processors and y 5 ms for high-performance
processors.
If the NTP server cannot be reached, the Ethernet Modbus/TCP module switches to
a standby NTP server.
Ethernet module associated with its Unity processor Precision with respect to the reference clock
Ethernet modules Unity processors Clock synchronization (1) Event synchronization Time stamping (2) 6
BMX NOE 0100/0110 BMX P34 1p +/- 1 ms typical = =
BMX NOR 0200H +/- 10 ms max. Clock Clock
(Modicon M340 platform) BMX P34 2p +/- 1 ms typical synchronization synchronization
+/- 5 ms max. precision precision
TSX ETY 5103 TSX P57 1p 1 ms typical
+
7
(Modicon Premium platform) TSX P57 2p 10 ms max. +
TSX P57 3p
TSX P57 4p 1 ms typical Cycle time Scan time
TSX P57 5p 5 ms max. for fast task for I/O
TSX P57 6p
140 NOE 771 11 140 CPU 311 10 1 ms typical +
(Modicon Quantum platform) 140 CPU 434 12U 10 ms max.
140 CPU 651 50/60 1 ms typical Scan time
8
140 CPU 652 60 5 ms max. for I/O
140 CPU 671 60
140 CPU 672 61
The PLC processor clock is therefore itself updated with a precision of 5 ms for
standard processors and 1 ms for high-performance processors. A function block is
available for reading this clock. In each PLC application, events or variables can be
time-stamped.
The Ethernet module is configured via a Web page. The time zone can be
9
configured. A time synchronization service (NTP) diagnostic Web page is also
available.
Information on the time synchronization service (NTP) is also available in the

Transparent Ready private MIB, which can be accessed via the SNMP network
management service (see above). 10
(1) Time difference between the physical input and the central NTP server.
NTP service diagnostics (2) With use of an interrupt input module.
5/35
platform 0

SMTP e-mail notification service
1 Introduction
This simple e-mail notification service is programmable. It enables a PLC application
to report an event when particular conditions occur. The PLC creates an e-mail
automatically and dynamically, to alert a defined recipient connected to the network
locally or remotely. The e-mail can contain variables, alarms and/or events.
2
Note: This service is available with the latest-version Ethernet communication modules for
Modicon Premium and Modicon Quantum PLCs, and the latest-version processors with Ethernet
port integrated in these same PLCs, used with Unity Pro software.
A more comprehensive service, independent of the PLC application, is also available with the
FactoryCast HMI modules of Modicon Premium and Modicon Quantum PLCs (for modules with
active Web server, see page 5/25).
Use
3 A simple yet powerful mechanism is used: predefined message headers are linked
with the body of the e-mail, which is created dynamically using the latest information
from the PLC application.
The PLC application prepares the message when predetermined conditions occur.
Using a function block, one of 3 predefined headers is selected, and an e-mail
message with variable information and text (up to a maximum of 240 bytes) is
4 created and sent directly from the PLC.
Each of the three headers contains the following predefined items: e-mail recipient
list, sender's name and subject. This information is defined and updated by an
authorized administrator, using the configuration web pages.
Message creation and delivery

5 The PLC application selects the appropriate header. The system architect may
define the headers to indicate differing levels of importance. For example:
b Header 1 could be URGENT: problem reported by PLC 10
b Header 2 could be ALARM: substation 10
b Header 3 could be INFORMATION: message from water quality system
Each of these headers has its own list of recipients, so that the correct person can be
6 informed quickly for each level of importance. The application can also insert
relevant information in the body of the message, such as the device, process or
location concerned.
The completed e-mail is then sent to an SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) server
for distribution to the recipients (engineers, management, process owner, etc.).
Security
7 Optionally, each e-mail can be protected by an identifier and a password,
authenticated by the SMTP server. If, for additional security, the TCP port number of
the e-mail server has been changed from the default of 25, the port number can be
changed in the PLC e-mail configuration (via a secure Web page).
Configuration
8 An authorized administrator can easily configure this e-mail service via a Web page.
The items (recipient list, sender and subject) in each of the three headers can be
defined.
The e-mail server connection information, such as its IP address and security
management information, are also defined using Web pages.
Diagnostics
9 As for all other Ethernet services in Modicon Premium and Modicon Quantum PLCs,
the e-mail notification service has a diagnostics Web page displaying the service's
status in real time.
Remote monitoring
Diagnostic information is also available remotely from network controllers
conforming to the SNMP standard. The e-mail service information is included in the
10 publicly available Transparent Ready private MIB.
5/36
platform 0

SNMP network management service
From a network management station, SNMP (Simple Network Management 1
Protocol) is used to monitor and control all Ethernet architecture components and
thus ensure a rapid diagnosis in the event of a problem.
It is used to:
b Interrogate network components such as computer stations, routers, switches,
bridges or terminal devices in order to view their status
b Obtain statistics about the network to which the devices are connected
2
This network management software complies with the conventional client/server
model. However, to avoid confusion with other communication protocols that use this
terminology, we talk instead about:
b ConneXview network diagnostics software TSX EAZ 01P SFE10
b Network manager for the client application that operates on the computer station
b SNMP agent for the network device server application
Transparent Ready products can be managed by any SNMP network manager,

3
including HP Openview and IBM Netview.
The SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) standard protocol is used for
access to configuration and management objects that are contained in the device
MIBs (Management Information Base). These MIBs must comply with certain
standards to be accessed by any managers on the market, but, depending on the
complexity of the products, manufacturers can add certain objects to private
4
databases.
The Transparent Ready private MIB includes management objects specific to the
Schneider Electric offer. These objects simplify installation, setup and maintenance
of Transparent Ready devices in an open environment using standard network
management tools. 5
Transparent Ready devices support 2 levels of SNMP network management:
b The Standard MIB II interface: this interface accesses a first level of network
management. It enables the manager to identify the devices making up the
architecture and retrieve general information about the configuration and operation
of Ethernet Modbus/TCP interfaces.
b The Transparent Ready MIB interface: this interface improves the management of
Transparent Ready devices. This MIB has a set of data enabling the network
6
management system to supervise all the Transparent Ready services.
The Transparent Ready MIB can be downloaded from the FTP server of any
Transparent Ready Ethernet module in a PLC.
10
5/37
platform 0
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network, Transparent Ready

TCP Open optional service
1 Presentation
TSX ETY 110 WS/5103 Modicon Premium platform Ethernet modules support
several communication protocols based on the TCP/IP standard. These include the
Modbus protocol. This has public specifications and a simplicity which make it
suitable it for the requirements of communication with third party devices.
2 Ethernet Modbus/TCP profile
Modbus
messaging
Direct
Socket access
(TCP Open)
3 Modbus
TCP
4 IP
ISO 8802.2-ISO 8802.3
5 ISO 8802.3 Ethernet

10/100 Mbps
However, for certain applications, it may be necessary to use other protocols. This is
the case when, for example, users want to integrate Modicon Premium platforms in
existing architectures which use a particular, sometimes proprietary, communication
6 protocol.
To meet these needs for open access, 2 interface levels are included in the
Schneider Electric offer:
b A library of basic functions, which can be used in C language, for direct access to
the socket interface on TCP. The user can thus create his own communication
functions using SDK C development software and take advantage of the ease of use
7 which this software provides for their development and debugging. Once generated,
these function blocks are used in the application like any Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro
programming software standard function block.
b A library of basic function blocks known as EFs, which can be used directly in the
application programs with Unity Pro or PL7 language. These are the same as the
functions developed in C language seen earlier, but designed for use by non-
computer specialists. These EF function blocks cannot be modified.
8 Functions
Operating in TCP connection client/server mode, the basic functions on the Berkeley
socket interface enable:
b Management of 16 (out of a maximum of 32) connections on the Open profile
b Creation of sockets and their attachment to any TCP port
b Switching these sockets to listen for a connection request from a remote client
9 mode
b Openness of a connection
b Transmission and reception of data on these connections (240 bytes max.)
b Closing of this connection
10
5/38
platform 0
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network, Transparent Ready

TCP Open optional service (continued)
Description 1
The TCP Open offer consists of a CD-ROM containing the TCP/IP function libraries.
Open access on TCP is only possible via TSX ETY 110WS (1) and TSX ETY 5103
Ethernet modules. With open access on TCP, all the basic functions of these
modules can be used.
The TLX CD TCP 50M TCP/IP function library comprises:

b The SDK C software enhancement library which provides access to the module 2
TCP/IP socket functions
b User documentation in English (no printed version)
b EF elementary communication function blocks
(Socket/Bind/Listen/Accept/Shutdown/Close/Send/Receive/Select/Set_Socket
Option/Connect) for installation using PL7 Junior/Pro (version u V3.3) or Unity Pro
software
b Higher level EF function blocks, provided by way of example, which can perform 3
more advanced functions such as the complete sequence for initializing or closing a
connection, or sending or receiving data. The source files for all these EF blocks are
also provided
b An example of an application communicating with a TELNET application on a PC
If specific function blocks have to be created, the following must be installed on the
development station: 4
b The SDK C development software in C language, reference:
v UNY SPU ZU CD 20E with Unity Pro
v TLX L SDKC PL741M with PL7 Junior/Pro
b And the TLX CD TCP50M TCP Open function block library
Setup precautions
The development of functions in C language requires compliance with a few setup 5
precautions:
b To set up these services the user must have a good knowledge of the TCP/IP
profile.
b In addition, since the SDK C software enables access to all the internal resources
of the PLC, all the necessary precautions should be taken when developing EF
communication blocks to avoid endangering the application, in particular on the
operating modes, such as cold/warm restarts, response to a fault, etc., which are 6
generally fragile.
b The user should also take care to keep the requests from the different
communication profiles to a level compatible with the performance required by the
application.
b It is the responsibility of the client application program (C program, Unity Pro or
PL7 Junior/Pro) to manage the communication operating modes, which may be
specific to the application, for example the behaviour if a remote device fails or there 7
is a break in connection.
For these reasons, it is recommended that you consult your Customer Care Centre
to check the feasibility of the TCP protocol open access project.
(1) Open access on TCP requires TSX ETY 110 WS modules, version u PV 03 and SV 2.9.
In addition, it must be integrated in a configuration with a TSX P57 pp3/pp4 (or
8
TSX P57 pp2 version > V3.3) processor.
10
5/39
Performance Modicon Premium automation
platform
Performance
Selecting the communication architecture

When selecting an architecture, performance should be taken into account at the
1 earliest possible stage. To do this, the developer must:
b Know exactly what he needs:
v quantity and type of devices to be interconnected
v volume and type of exchanges
v expected response times
v environment
b Compare his needs with the characteristics of the offers available and be aware
2 that the actual performance level between any 2 points in an architecture depends
on the weakest link in the chain, which can be:
v dependent on the hardware
v but also dependent on the applications (size, architecture, operating system,
machine power rating, etc) which are often only vaguely defined at this stage of the
project.
b Work out from these which is the most suitable architecture.
3 The purpose of the next few pages is to provide the main information and
instructions needed to answer the second point. Given that the performance of an
Ethernet architecture is linked to many parameters, these pages do not provide all
the information needed to calculate the network performance. Their aim is to focus
on the following main aspects:
b Guidelines for evaluating the network load so as to design an Ethernet network
4 that meets the application requirements
b Application response time to be obtained according to the configuration used
(see pages 5/41 to 5/43)
b Processing capacities of Modicon M340, Modicon Premium and Modicon
Quantum platforms so as to be able to select the processor and define the number of
Ethernet connections required on the PLC according to the application (see pages
5/44 and 5/45)
5
Evaluating the network load
Introduction
When evaluating the load on an Ethernet network, all the communication services of
all the peripheral devices connected to the network need to be calculated.
Because of the outstanding performance of the Ethernet network, the load is often
6 less than the Ethernet network limits and does not significantly affect the application
response time. This is due to the high speed of the Ethernet network: the network
transaction time is less than 10% of the total application response time. In order to
ensure a low network load and avoid large theoretical calculations, it is highly
advisable to separate the collision domain so as to limit the network load, by using
only the switched network (tree, star or daisy-chain topology).
10
5/40
Performance (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform
Performance
Application response time

Event Report Modbus (or Uni-TE) messaging service response time
TT
Exchanges between the PLC processor and the Ethernet module are synchronous
with the PLC scan cycle time (CT), in the same way as the I/O exchanges. When an
1
CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1 Station 1
event occurs (such as an input being set to 1 for example), a message can be
transmitted only after this input has been taken into account (start of the next cycle)
NAT NAT and the PLC (Modicon M340, Modicon Premium or Modicon Quantum) program has
been executed, i.e. on average approximately 1.5 cycles after the event has occurred.
2
CT2 CT2 Station 2
The network access time (NAT) shown in the table below in ms is a total of the
module transit time and the delay before the message can be transmitted on the
Action network.
Modbus messaging service response time
Processing of Modicon M340 Modicon Premium Modicon Quantum

Modbus TCP/IP
message requests
BMX NOE 0100
BMX NOE 0110
BMX P34 2020
BMX P34 20302
TSX ETY 110WS TSX ETY 4103/5103
TSX WMY 100
140 NOE 771 00/10
140 NOE 771 01/11
140 CPU 651 50/60
140 CPU 652 60
3
BMX NOC 0401 TSX P57 10...60 140 NWM 100 00
BMX NOR 0200H TSX ETC 101 140 NOC 771 01
Network access time < 10 ms < 10 ms < 25 ms < 10 ms < 10 ms < 10 ms

(NAT)
The transaction time TT includes the delay between the transmission of a message
from a client station 1, its reception by the server station 2, processing of the request,
4
sending back the response and it being taken into account by the station 1 (updating
of an output for example).
As the above block diagram shows:
b The transaction time TT will be between:
2 x CT1 + 2 x NAT < TT < 4 x CT1 + CT2 + 2 x NAT
b The average duration TTav is equivalent to: 5
TTav = 3 x CT1 + 0.5 x CT2 + 2 x NAT
Global Data service response time

Synchro pulse
Transaction time
Synchro
feedback The transaction time TT includes the delay between publication of Global Data by
the station 1, its reception and processing by the remote station 2 and its
6
TT retransmission to the initial station 1:
CT CT CT Station 1 For an exchanged variable:
Publication b If CT < 5 ms,
NAT NAT transaction time: TT = 5 to 6 x CT
Subscription Publication b If CT u 10 ms,
CT CT Station 2 transaction time: TT = 3 x CT
7
Global Data service response time
10
5/41
platform
Performance
Application response time (continued)

I/O Scanning service response time
1 CT
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
Manager
The response time RT includes the time between taking account of information from
a remote input and updating the state of a remote output. It includes the processing
RT time in the PLC.
Hub
This response time RT consists of the following parameters:
Input Device 1
Input
2 Output Device 2
TMod In
TIOS In
TNet
I/O Scanning service response time N x Cycle T
TIOS Out
TNet
TMod Out
3 Response time (RT)

Output
v TMod In and TMod Out: Response time of the read/written device, excluding the
electrical transit time at the input/output (TMod depends on the device, usually
between 1 and 8 ms).
4 v TIOS In and TIOS Out: Time between 2 read/write operations on the same device
(0.3 ms x number of devices scanned), at least equivalent to the configured scan time
As TIOS is executed in parallel with the PLC scan cycle, it can be hidden from the
viewpoint of the response time (RT).
v Cycle T: PLC scan cycle time.
v TNet: Propagation time on the network (depends on the application, but usually
TNet = 0.05 ms at 10 Mbps and 0.005 ms at 100 Mbps)
5 The response time RT can be estimated using the following 3 formulae:

b RTmin, minimum response time with TIOS hidden and 1 PLC scan cycle:
RTmin = (TMod In + 0) x TIOS In + (Tnet + N) x cycle T + (0 x TIOS Out) + Tnet +
TMod Out
b RTtyp, typical response time with 0.5 TIOS hidden:
6 RTtyp = (TMod In + 0.5) x TIOS In + (Tnet + N) x cycle T + (0.5 x TIOS Out) + Tnet +
TMod Out
b RTmax, maximum response time with TIOS not hidden:

RTmax = TMod In + TIOS In + (Tnet + N) x T cycle + TIOS Out + Tnet + TMod Out
10
5/42
platform
Performance
Application response time (continued)

I/O Scanning service response time (continued)
TMod E and TMod S response times are shown below: 1
Type of distributed I/O Response time Min. Typical Max.
Momentum 170 ENT 110 02 TMod In 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms
TMod Out 5 ms 5 ms 5 ms
Momentum 170 ENT 110 01 TMod In 4 ms 6 ms 8 ms
TMod Out 4 ms 6 ms 8 ms
Modicon STB STB NIP 2212 TMod In
TMod Out
2 ms
2 ms
3 ms
3 ms
4 ms
4 ms
2
The TIOS E/TIOS S times measured between 2 scan cycles (Ethernet network with
switches) are shown below:
Time (ms)
25 3
20
15
10
5
0
1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60
Number of devices scanned 4
The number N of processor scan cycles is shown below:
Number N of processor cycles Min. Typical Max.

Modicon M340 platform with 2 2.5 3
BMX NOE 0100 and BMX NOE 0100WS modules
Modicon Premium platform with
5
TSX ETY 4103 and TSX ETY 5103 modules
Modicon Quantum platform with
140 NOE 771 01 and140 NOE 771 11 modules
Modicon M340 BMX P34 2020/20302 processors
Modicon Premium TSX P57 2634M/3634M,
TSX P57 2623M/2823M and TSX P57 3623M/4823M 6
processors
Modicon Premium TSX P57 4634M/5634M/6634M processors 1 1 2
Modicon Quantum 140 CPU 651 50/60 processors
10
5/43
platform
Performance
Processing capacities of Modicon platforms

Processing capacity
1 The table below can be used to compare, for each station, the total number of
messages received via the Modbus (or Uni-TE) messaging service, if used, (value
R1, R2 or Ri) with the capacity of the station processor.
Processing of Modbus requests per PLC scan cycle

Modicon M340, Modicon Premium platforms Messages received
2 Total messages received by the TSX P57 10

PLC from all the communication BMX P34 20 / TSX P57 20
4 messages/cycle
8 messages/cycle
modules (1)
TSX P57 30 12 messages/cycle
TSX P57 40 16 messages/cycle
TSX P57 50/60 (2) 16/20 messages/cycle
Modicon Integrated port limitations Communication module Ethernet
3 Quantum
platform All types of Additional
limitations
All types of Additional
modules
per PLC
communication read/write 4x communication read/write 4x
request registers request registers
140 CPU 113 (3) 1 message/ 4 messages/ 2 max.

cycle cycle
140 CPU 311 1 message/ 4 messages/ 2 max.
4 140 CPU 434
cycle
4 messages/
cycle
8 messages/ 6 max.
140 CPU 534 (3) cycle cycle
140 CPU 651 16 messages/ 16 messages/ 4 messages/ 8 messages/ 6 max.
cycle cycle cycle cycle
Messages/cycle: number of messages received per scan cycle from the PLC master task
(typical cycle of 50 to 100 ms)
5 Example:
Modicon Quantum 140 CPU 434 12p processor with 4 Ethernet 140 NOE 771 p1
modules:
- 20 messages/cycle for all types of communication request, and
- 32 messages/cycle for the read/write 4x registers
6 Ethernet transaction processing capacity

For each station, compare the total number of messages received [values Ri, Rj]
and the total number of messages transmitted [values Ei, Ej] (for station N, for
example) with the Ethernet transaction processing capacity shown below.
Use the following elements for the Ethernet connection per PLC, rather than the
number of transactions required by the application.
7 Ethernet transaction Modicon M340 BMX Modicon Premium TSX Modicon Quantum 140
processing capacity NOE 0100 P34 2020 ETY 110WS ETY 4103/5103 P57 50 NOE 771 00/10 CPU 651 50/60
NOE 0110 P34 20302 WMY 100 P57 60 NOE 771 01/11 CPU 652 60
NOC 0401 ETC 101 NWM 100 00
NOR 0200H P57 10...40 NOC 771 01
Modbus messaging 500 500 60 transactions/s 450 500 350 350
8 I/O Scanning service

transactions/s
2,000
transactions/s
Server mode (4) Service not
transactions/s
2,000
transactions/s
2,000
transactions/s
2,000
transactions/s
2,000
transactions/s available transactions/s (5) transactions/s transactions/s (5) transactions/s
Global Data 800 Service not Service not 800 800 800 800
subscription available available (6) (6)
9 (1) A temporary overload, due for example to an adjustment terminal or the temporary connection
of an Internet browser, lasting for a few PLC scans, is permissible.
(2) Only with Unity Pro software.
(3) Only with Concept/ProWORX software.
(4) BMX P34 20ppp processors with Modbus TCP messaging in server mode can be scanned by
a device that has the I/O Scanning service.
(5) TSX WMY 100 and 140 NWM 100 00 modules do not have the I/O Scanning service.
10 (6) TSX WMY 100, TSX ETC 101, 140 NWM 100 00 and 140 NOC 771 01 modules do not have
the Global Data service.
5/44
Performance (continued), Modicon Premium automation
selection platform
Performance
Processing capacities of Modicon platforms (continued)

Number of simultaneous TCP/IP connections
The number of simultaneous TCP/IP connections depends on the platform as well as
the type of connection to the Ethernet network:
1
b 10/100BASE-TX port in network modules
b 10/100BASE-TX port integrated in processors
Number of Modicon M340 Modicon Premium Modicon Quantum

simultaneous TCP/IP BMX NOE 0100 BMX P34 2020 TSX ETY 110WS TSX ETY 4103/5103 140 NOE 771 00/10 140 CPU 311 10
connections BMX NOE 0110
BMX NOC 0401
BMX P34 20302 TSX WMY 100
TSX ETC 101
140 NOE 771 01/11
140 NWM 100 00
140 CPU 434 12U
140 CPU 651 50/60
2
BMX NOR 0200H TSX P57 10...60 140 NOC 771 01 140 CPU 652 60
Client 16 16 32 16 (1) 16 (1) 16 (1)

Server 32 32 64 (1) 64 (1) 64 (1)
Bandwidth management for Ethernet Modbus/TCP modules 3

The bandwidth management service indicates the load level of the Ethernet network
module. This enables the user to monitor any drift and anticipate possible problems.
The Ethernet module load is indicated in one of three ways:
b Expected load in the Unity Pro/PL7 configuration screen
b Actual load in the Unity Pro/PL7 diagnostics/debug screen, as well as in the
diagnostics pages via the Web. This is displayed in the form of a bar chart animated
in real time.
4
b In the SNMP interface for access by the SNMP network manager
The bandwidth is shown as a percentage for each of the following services:

b Modbus (and Uni-TE) messaging
b I/O Scanning
b Global Data
b Others 5
Bandwidth management
7
Ethernet solutions with Modicon M340 platforms
Modicon platforms feature two types of connection to the Ethernet network:
b The 10/100BASE-TX port integrated in the processors, which also process the
application and ensure exchanges with the other modules supported by the rack and
other communication ports (CANopen bus, Modbus serial link, etc.).
b The 10/100BASE-TX port in dedicated Ethernet modules on which, unlike the
8
processor with integrated Ethernet port, all the resources are allocated to Ethernet
Modbus/TCP communication.
These fundamentally different hardware characteristics result in equally different

capacities in terms of services and performance:
b The integrated port is a low-cost way of satisfying applications that are not too
demanding in terms of communication (y 500 useful messages/s).
9
Ethernet port integrated in Dedicated Ethernet b Where there are a large number of exchanges, use of a dedicated Ethernet
the processor (for example or module (for example with network module becomes essential.
with Modicon M340 Modicon M340 module
processor BMX NOE 0100/0110)
BMX P34 2020/2030)
(1) With 64 TCP/IP connections maximum (cumulative total of client and server connections)
10
5/45
Processors with integrated Ethernet port
7 1 2 12 Description
The front panels of TSX P57 p634M (Unity Pro) and TSX P57 p623M/3623AM/p823AM
1 (PL7) double format processors with integrated Ethernet port comprise:
3 7 1 A display block with 5 LEDs relating to the processor.

5
4 2 A display block relating to the integrated Ethernet port.
6
8 3 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked TER for connecting a programming
2 9 or adjustment terminal.
4 A USB connector marked TER for connecting a programming or adjustment

TSX P57 1634M TSX P57 4634M terminal.
TSX P57 2634M/3634M TSX P57 5634M/6634M
TSX P57 2623AM/3623AM 5 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting an RS 485
TSX P57 2823M/4823M peripheral device.
3 6 A standard (RJ45) connector for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface.
7 A slot for a PCMCIA memory expansion card.
8 A slot for a PCMCIA communication or data storage memory expansion card.
9 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P57 2823M/4823M models only) for Fipio bus
manager link.
4
References
Description Discrete I/O Reference Weight
Analog I/O kg
5 App-sp. chann. Unity Pro PL7 Junior/Pro
Processors with 512/24/8 TSX P57 1634M
integrated
Ethernet link 1024/80/24 TSX P57 2634M TSX P57 2623M
Class B30 TSX P57 2823M (1)
1024/128/32 TSX P57 3634M TSX P57 3623AM
6 2048/256/64
2048/512/64
TSX P57 4634M
TSX P57 5634M
TSX P57 4823AM (1)

2048/512/64 TSX P57 6634M
(1) Also has an integrated Fipio bus manager link.
10
5/46
references Ethernet network modules
Presentation
TSX ETY 110 WS/4103/5103 and TSX WMY 100 Ethernet network modules are
single format modules which are inserted in a Modicon Premium PLC station rack
slot. A configuration can take from 1 to 4 network modules, depending on the type of
1
processor.
Ethernet network modules route X-Way and Uni-TE messages transparently from a
Modbus/TCP network to an X-Way network and vice versa.
Description 2
The front panel of TSX ETY 110 WS/4103/5103 and TSX WMY 100 modules
1 comprises:
2 1 A display block indicating the module status.
2 A standard connector for 100BASE-TX and/or /10BASE-T (RJ45) interface

3
depending on the model. 3
4
3 A standard connector for 10BASE5 interface (AUI).
4 Four thumbwheels for defining the station number and network number.
TSX ETY 110 WS TSX ETY p103
TSX WMY 100
References
4
Description Data rate Transparent Ready Reference Weight
class kg
Ethernet 10 Mbps C10 TSX ETY 110 WS 0.370
Modbus/TCP 10/100 Mbps B30 TSX ETY 4103 0.340
modules
C30 TSX ETY 5103 0.340
D10 TSX WMY 100 0.340 5
Web Designer FactoryCast server configuration Supplied with
software TSX ETY 110 WS / 5103 and
TSX WMY100
TCP Open TCP Open function block library TLX CD TCP50M

software SDKC, Unity applications UNY SPU ZFU CD20E
C language
development
PL7 applications TLX LSDKC PL741M 6
10
5/47
functions, platform
description EtherNet/IP and Modbus/TCP network module
Presentation
The TSX ETC 101 EtherNet/IP and Modbus/TCP network module is a single format
1 module, compatible with Unity Pro software, which is inserted in a Modicon Premium
rack slot.
Certification logo Mark
A configuration can take from 1 to 4 network modules, depending on the type of
processor.
EtherNet/IP protocol
2 EtherNet/IP is the Ethernet industrial network protocol based on CIP (Common

Industrial Protocol).
CIP and EtherNet/IP are protocols owned and managed by the ODVA, an
independent standards organization made up of members from the world's leading
automation companies.
Schneider Electric is a principal member of the ODVA organization.
Schneider Electric's presence in the organization and its technical committees
3 makes it easy for Modbus/TCP users to connect to the CIP network while retaining
their existing automation investment.
Users thus have the benefit of optimized interoperability between the installed bases
of the most widely used industrial Ethernet networks - EtherNet/IP and Modbus/TCP -
and between the automation products of a growing number of manufacturers.
This convergence enables users to reduce installation and maintenance times, costs
4 and risks.
Functions
The TSX ETC 101 module provides the following functions:
b EtherNet/IP and Modbus/TCP protocols operating simultaneously
b Priority of Ethernet packets using the QoS (Quality of Service) service
5 b Automatic module configuration recovery using the FDR (Faulty Device
Replacement) service
b Support for SCADA functions via the OPC protocol
b Embedded Web server for application monitoring and module diagnostics
b Sharing data between PLCs
b Network management using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
6
Description
The TSX ETC 101 module front panel comprises:
1
2
1 A display block, which indicates the module status and the transmission status on
3 the network
7 4 2 The unique MAC address of the module
3 Two additional LEDs:

v MOD STATUS LED: module operating status
v NET STATUS LED: network status
TSX ETC 101 4 A standard RJ45 connector for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface

8
10
5/48
platform
EtherNet/IP and Modbus/TCP network module
References
Description No. of Ethernet Data rate Reference Weight
modules per
configuration
kg
1
EtherNet/IP and 1 to 4 modules 10/100 Mbps TSX ETC 101 0.340
Modbus/TCP depending on
network module type of Unity
processor (see
page 1/10)
TSX ETC 101 2
10
5/49
Selection guide Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium hub and transceiver
Device type Hub
2 Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 4 x 10BASE-T ports

Shielded connectors RJ45
Medium Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
Total length of pair 100 m
Fibre optic ports Number and type
3 Connectors
Medium

Length of optical fibre 50/125 m
62.2/125 m
Optical fibre 50/125 m fibre
attenuation analysis 62.2/125 m fibre
4 Topology Number of hubs Cascaded 4 max.

In a ring
Redundancy P1 and P2 redundant power supplies
Power supply Voltage 24 V c (1832) safety extra low voltage (SELV)

5 Consumption 80 mA (130 max. at 24 V c)
Removable terminal block 5 terminals
Operating temperature 0+ 60C

Relative humidity 1095% non-condensing
6
Degree of protection IP 30
Dimensions WxHxD 40 x 125 x 80 mm

Mounting On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
Weight 0.530 kg
7 Conforming to standards cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 class 1 division 2,
e, GL, C-Tick
FM 3810, FM 3611 class 1 division 2
LED indicators Power supply, activity, link
Alarm relay Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (volt-free contact 1 A
8 max. at 24 V c)
Reference 499 NEH 104 10

Pages 5/68
10
5/50
Transceiver
1 x 100BASE-TX port
2
RJ45
Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
100 m
1 x 100BASE-FX port
SC
Multimode optical fibre
3
3000 m (1)
3000 m (1)
8 dB
11 dB
P1 and P2 redundant power supplies
24 V c (1832) safety extra low voltage (SELV)

160 mA (190 max. at 24 V c) 5
5 terminals
0+ 60C
1095% non-condensing
6
IP 20
47 x 135 x 111 mm
On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
0.230 kg
cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2, e, GL, C-Tick
7
P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link/port status
Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (volt-free contact 1 A max. at 24 V c)
8
499 NTR 101 00
5/68
(1) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fibre (typical value: 2000 m).
10
5/51
Selection guide (continued) Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium unmanaged switches
Device type Unmanaged switches, copper twisted pair
2
Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 5 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports 8 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports
Shielded connectors M12 (type D) RJ45
3 Total length of pair 100 m

Connectors
Medium
62.2/125 m
4 Optical fibre
attenuation analysis
50/125 m fibre
62.2/125 m fibre
Ethernet services Storage and re-routing of received data,
auto MDI/MDX, automatic negotiation of
10/100 Mbps and duplex mode (on all ports)
5
Topology Number of switches Cascaded Unlimited
Redundant in a ring
6 Power supply Voltage

Consumption
24 V c (1832) safety extra low voltage (SELV)
100 mA max. 125 mA (290 mA max.)
Removable terminal block 5 terminals, M12 (type A, male) 5 terminals
Operating temperature 0+ 60C

7 Degree of protection IP 67 IP 20
Dimensions WxHxD 60 x 126 x 31 mm 47 x 135 x 111 mm

Mounting On a flat surface On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
Weight 0.210 kg 0.230 kg
8 Conforming to standards cUL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142 cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142,
UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 class 1
division 2, e, GL, C-Tick
LED indicators Power supply, link status, data rate P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link/port
status
9 Alarm relay Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or

communication port fault (volt-free contact 1 A
max. at 24 V c)
Reference TCS ESU 051F0 499 NES 181 00

Pages 5/69
10
5/52
Unmanaged switches, copper Unmanaged switches, 4 and 5 ports, copper twisted pair and fibre optic
twisted pair (continued)
2
8 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports 3 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports 4 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports 5 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports
RJ45 RJ45
Shielded twisted pair, category Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
CAT 5E
100 m 100 m 3
1 x 100BASE-FX port
Duplex SC
5000 m (1)
4000 m (1)
8 dB 4
11 dB
Storage and re-routing of received Storage and re-routing of received data, auto MDI/MDX, automatic negotiation of 10/100 Mbps and duplex mode (on all
data, auto MDI/MDX, automatic ports)
negotiation of 10/100 Mbps and
duplex mode (on all ports), automatic
5
change of polarity
Unlimited Unlimited

24 V c (9.632) SELV
4.1 W max.
24 V c (9.632 V) safety extra low voltage (SELV)
2.2 W max. 3.9 W max. 2.2 W max.
6
3 terminals 3-terminal removable screw terminal block
0+ 60C 0+ 60C
95% max. non-condensing 95% max. non-condensing
IP 30 IP 30
7
35 x 138 x 121 mm 25 x 114 x 79 mm
0.246 kg 0.113 kg 0.120 kg 0.113 kg
UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No.142

IEC/EN 61131-2,
UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142
IEC/EN 61131-2, IEC 60825-1 class 1, CISPR 11A 8
IEC 60825-1 class 1, CISPR 11A
Power supply, copper port activity, Power supply, copper port activity, 10 or 100 Mbps data rate
10 or 100 Mbps data rate
Fibre port activity and status
TCS ESU 083FN0 TCS ESU 033FN0 TCS ESU 043F1N0 TCS ESU 053FN0
5/69 5/70
(1) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fibre (typical value: 2000 m). 10
5/53
Cabling system
Managed and unmanaged ConneXium switches
Device type Unmanaged switches, 5 ports, copper twisted pair and fibre optic
2
Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 4 x 10BASE-T/ 3 x 10BASE-T/ 4 x 10BASE-T/ 3 x 10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX ports 100BASE-TX ports 100BASE-TX ports 100BASE-TX ports
3 Fibre optic ports Number and type 1 x 100BASE-FX

port
2 x 100BASE-FX
ports
1 x 100BASE-FX
port
2 x 100BASE-FX
ports
Connectors SC
Medium Multimode optical fibre Single mode optical fibre
Length of optical fibre 50/125 m 5000 m (1)
62.2/125 m 4000 m (1)
9/125 m fibre 32,500 m (2)
4 Optical fibre
attenuation analysis
50/125 m fibre 8 dB
62.2/125 m fibre 11 dB
9/125 m fibre 16 dB
Ethernet services
5 Topology Number of switches Cascaded

Redundant in a ring
Unlimited

Power supply Voltage 24 V c (1832 V) safety extra low voltage (SELV)

Consumption 200 mA max. 240 mA max. 200 mA max. 240 mA max.
6 Removable terminal block 5 terminals
Operating temperature - 40...+ 70C


7 Mounting On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
Weight 0.330 kg 0.335 kg 0.330 kg 0.335 kg
Conforming to standards cUL 60950, cUL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 class 1 division 2,
e, GL, C-Tick
8 LED indicators P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link status, transmission activity
Alarm relay Activity, power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (volt-free contact
1 A max. at 24 V c)
Reference 499 NMS 251 01 499 NMS 251 02 499 NSS 251 01 499 NSS 251 02
9 Pages 5/70
(1) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fibre (typical
value: 2000 m).
value: 15,000 m).
10
5/54
Managed switches, 4 ports, copper twisted pair and fibre optic
2
3 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 2 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 3 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 2 x 10/100BASE-TX ports
RJ45
100 m
1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports 1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports
3
Duplex SC
Multimode optical fibre Single mode optical fibre
5000 m (1)
4000 m (1)
32,500 m (2)
8 dB 4
11 dB
16 dB
FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol, configuration via Web access,VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid
Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream control, secure port
Unlimited
50 max. 5
Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling
9.6...60 V c /1830 V a safety extra low voltage (SELV)

6.5 W 7.3 W 6.5 W 7.3 W
6 terminals
6
0+ 60C
IP 20
47 x 131 x 111 mm
7
0.400 kg
IEC 61131-2, UL 508, UL 1604 class 1 division 2, CSA 22.2 No. 142 (cUL), CSA 22.2 No. 213 class 1 division 2 (cUL), e, GL, C-Tick
Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, copper port status and copper port activity
8
Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault, communication port fault, redundancy fault (volt-free contact 1 A max. at 24 V c)
TCS ESM 043F1CU0 TCS ESM 043F2CU0 TCS ESM 043F1CS0 TCS ESM 043F2CS0
5/71
9
(2) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fibre (typical value: 15,000 m).
10
5/55
Cabling system
ConneXium managed switches
Device type Managed switches, 4 and 8 ports, copper twisted pair
2 Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 4 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports
Connectors
3 Medium
62.2/125 m
9/125 m fibre
Attenuation analysis 50/125 m fibre
62.2/125 m fibre
4 Ethernet services
9/125 m fibre
FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol,
configuration via Web access,VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol),
priority port, data stream control, secure port

Redundant in a ring 50 max.
5 Redundancy P1 and P2 redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling
Power supply Voltage 9.6...60 V c /1830 V a safety extra low voltage (SELV)
Consumption 5.3 W
6 Operating temperature
Relative humidity
0...+ 60C
Dimensions WxHxD 47 x 131 x 111 mm 74 x 131 x 111 mm

7 Weight 0.400 kg 0.410 kg
Conforming to standards IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, UL 1604 class 1 division 2, CSA 22.2 No. 214 (cUL),
CSA 22.2 No. 213 class 1 division 2 (cUL), e, GL, C-Tick
LED indicators Power supply status, alarm relay status, Power supply status, alarm relay status,
active redundancy, redundancy management, active redundancy, redundancy management,
8 copper port status and copper port activity fibre port status and fibre port activity
max. at 24 V c)
Reference TCS ESM 043F23F0 TCS ESM 083F23F0
9 Pages 5/71
10
5/56
Managed switches, 8 ports, copper twisted pair and fibre optic
7 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 6 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 7 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 6 x 10/100BASE-T ports 2

RJ45
100 m
1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports 1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports
Duplex SC
Multimode optical fibre Single mode optical fibre 3
5000 m (1)
4000 m (1)
32,500 m (2)
8 dB
11 dB
16 dB
4
Unlimited
50 max.
Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling 5

6.5 W 7.3 W 6.5 W 7.3 W
6 terminals
0+ 60C
6
IP 20
75 x 131 x 111 mm
0.410 kg 7
IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, UL 1604 class 1 division 2, CSA 22.2 No. 214 (cUL), CSA 22.2 No. 213 class 1 division 2 (cUL), e, GL, C-Tick
Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, fibre port status and fibre port activity
8
TCS ESM 083F1CU0 TCS ESM 083F2CU0 TCS ESM 083F1CS0 TCS ESM 083F2CS0
5/72
9
10
5/57
Cabling system
Basic ConneXium managed switches
Device type Basic managed switch, 8 ports, copper twisted pair
2 Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports

Connectors
3 Medium

62.2/125 m
9/125 m fibre
Attenuation analysis 50/125 m fibre
62.2/125 m fibre
4 Ethernet services
9/125 m fibre
FDR, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol, configuration
via Web access, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port

5 Redundancy P1 and P2 redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling
Power supply Voltage 9.6...32 V c safety extra low voltage (SELV)

Consumption 6W
Operating temperature 0...+ 60C

6 Relative humidity 95% max. non-condensing

7 Weight 0.400 kg
Conforming to standards IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, UL 1604 class 1 division 2, CSA 22.2 No. 214 (cUL),
CSA 22.2 No. 213 class 1 division 2 (cUL), e, GL, C-Tick
LED indicators Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management,
copper port status and copper port activity
8 Alarm relay Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (volt-free contact 1 A
max. at 24 V c)
Reference TCS ESB 083F23F0

Pages 5/72
10
5/58
Basic managed switches, 8 and 9 ports, copper twisted pair and fibre optic
6 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 6 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 2

RJ45
100 m
2 x 100BASE-FX ports 3 x 100BASE-FX ports
Duplex SC
5000 m (1)
3
4000 m (1)
8 dB+
11 dB
FDR, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol, configuration via Web access, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree
4
Protocol), priority port
Unlimited
50 max.
P1 and P2 redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling

5
9.6...32 V c safety extra low voltage (SELV)
8W 9W
6 terminals
0+ 60C
95% max. non-condensing 6
IP 20
74 x 131 x 111 mm
0.400 kg
7
IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, UL 1604 class 1 division 2, CSA 22.2 No. 214 (cUL), CSA 22.2 No. 213 class 1 division 2 (cUL), e, GL, C-Tick
Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, fibre port status and fibre port activity
Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (volt-free contact 1 A max. at 24 V c ) 8
TCS ESB 083F2CU0 TCS ESB 093F2CU0
5/72
9
10
5/59
Cabling system
Device type Managed switches, 8 extended ports, copper twisted pair and fibre optic
2 Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 6 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 6 x 10/100BASE-T ports
Fibre optic ports Number and type 2 x 100BASE-FX ports
Connectors Duplex SC
3 Medium Multimode optical fibre Single mode optical fibre
Length of optical fibre 50/125 m 5000 m (1)
62.2/125 m 4000 m (1)
9/125 m fibre 32,500 m (2)
Attenuation analysis 50/125 m fibre 8 dB
62.2/125 m fibre 11 dB
4 Ethernet services
9/125 m fibre 16 dB
FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol,
configuration via Web access,VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol),

5 Redundancy Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling,

rings supporting MRP, Fast HIPER Ring and RSTP
Power supply Voltage 18...60 V c

Consumption 10 W 12 W
Removable terminal block 2 terminal blocks, 2 terminals
6 Operating temperature 0...+ 60C

7 Mounting On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide

Weight 1 kg
Conforming to standards IEC/EN 61131-2, IEC 61850-3, UL 508, UL 1604 class 1 division 2, CSA 22.2 No. 214 (cUL),
CSA 22.2 No. 213 class 1 division 2 (cUL), e, GL, C-Tick, LR, BV
8
LED indicators Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, copper
port status and copper port activity
9 max. at 24 V c, 2-way)
Reference TCS ESM 083F23F1 TCS ESM 063F2CU1 TCS ESM 063F2CS1
Pages 5/72
value: 2000 m).
10 (2) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fibre (typical
value: 15,000 m).
5/60
Managed switches, 16 and 24 ports, copper twisted pair and fibre optic
16 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 14 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 14 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 22 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 2

RJ45
100 m
2 x 100BASE-FX ports
Duplex SC
Multimode optical fibre Single mode optical fibre Multimode optical fibre 3
5000 m (1) 5000 m (1)
4000 m (1) 4000 m (1)
32,500 m (2)
8 dB 8 dB
11 dB 11 dB
16 dB
4
Unlimited
50 max.

5
9.4 W 11.8 W 11.8 W 15.5 W
6 terminals
0+ 60C
6
1090% non-condensing 95% max. non-condensing 1090% non-condensing
IP 20
111 x 131 x 111 mm

On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 7
0.600 kg 0.650 kg
cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 IEC/EN 61131-2, cUL 60950, UL 508 and
class 1 division 2 UL 508, UL 1604 class 1 division 2, CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and
CSA 22.2 No. 214 (cUL), CSA 22.2 No. 213 class 1 division 2
CSA 22.2 No. 213 class 1 division 2
(cUL), e, GL, C-Tick
8
Power supply status, alarm relay Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, fibre port status and fibre port
status, active redundancy, activity
redundancy management, copper
port status and copper port activity
9
TCS ESM 163F23F0 TCS ESM 163F2CU0 TCS ESM 163F2CS0 TCS ESM 243F2CU0
5/73
10
5/61
Cabling system
Device type Managed switch, 8 ports and 2 Gigabit ports, copper twisted pair and fibre optic
2 Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports

Fibre optic Number and type 2 x 1000BASE-SX ports (1) 2 x 1000BASE-LH ports (2) 2 x 1000BASE-LX ports (3)
3
Gigabit ports Connectors LC
(with SFP fibre optic
module to be mounted Medium Multimode optical fibre Single mode optical fibre Single mode and multimode
on SFP connector) optical fibre
Length of optical fibre 50/125 m 550 m 550 m
62.2/125 m 275 m 550 m
9/125 m fibre 8 - 72,000 m 20,000 m
Attenuation analysis 50/125 m fibre 7.5 dB 11 dB
4 62.2/125 m fibre 7.5 dB 11 dB
9/125 m fibre 6 - 22 dB 11 dB
Ethernet services FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol,
configuration via Web access, VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol),

5 Redundant in a ring 50 max.
Redundancy Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling
Power supply Voltage 9.6...60 V c /1830 V a safety extra low voltage (SELV)
Consumption 8.9 W + 1 W per SFP fibre optic module
6 Removable terminal block 6 terminals
Operating temperature 0...+ 60C

7
Weight 0.410 kg
Conforming to standards cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 class 1 division 2,
e, GL
8 LED indicators Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management,
fibre port status and fibre port activity
max. at 24 V c)
Reference TCS ESM 103F23G0

9 Pages 5/73
(1) With TCS EAA F1LFU00 fibre optic module to be ordered separately (see page 5/67).
(2) With TCS EAA F1LFH00 fibre optic module to be ordered separately (see page 5/67).
(3) With TCS EAA F1LFS00 fibre optic module to be ordered separately (see page 5/67).
10
5/62
Managed switch, 8 ports and 2 Gigabit ports, copper twisted pair
8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports and

2 x 10/100/1000BASE-TX ports (Gigabit)
2
RJ45
100 m
LC
Unlimited
50 max. 5

8.3 W
6 terminals
6
0...+ 60C
IP 20
7
111 x 131 x 111 mm
0.410 kg
cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 class 1 division 2, e, GL
Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, fibre port status and fibre port activity 8
TCS ESM 103F2LG0

5/73
9
10
5/63
Wiring system Ethernet network 0
Infrastructure
Presentation
Schneider Electric offers copper and fibre optic cables for connecting IP 20 and IP 67
1 Ethernet devices.
Examples
2 Mixed IP 20 and IP 67 wiring (copper)
2, 4
1, 3
1, 3
4 8
2, 4 8
2, 4
1, 3
5 1, 3
6 1, 3 1, 3
Key:
1, 3 : Straight-through copper cables
2, 4 : Crossover copper cables
8 : Cables with IP 67 connector (see pages 5/66 and 5/67)
7
10
Selection guide:
Pages 5/50 ...
5/64
Wiring system (continued) Ethernet network 0
Infrastructure
Examples (continued)
Mixed copper and fibre optic wiring
1
Internet
MES Client
Server Firewall
2
1, 3
1, 3 1, 3
Copper link Router
3
5, 6, 7
Fibre optic link
Copper link
2, 4 2, 4
2, 4
4
Magelis XBT
1, 3 1, 3
2, 4 2, 4
1, 3 1, 3
1, 3
1, 3
5
2, 4 2, 4
Preventa safety PLC

Twido Modicon STB
2, 4 Altivar 71
1, 3
1, 3
1, 3
6
2, 4 2, 4 1, 3
Modicon STB
Modicon Quantum Magelis XBT 1, 3 1, 3 8
Altivar 71
7
1, 3
Modicon M340 Ositrack

Modicon Premium
FactoryCast
gateway
8
Modbus
Managed Hub or
switch unmanaged switch
Key:
1, 3: Straight-through copper cables
9
2, 4 : Crossover copper cables
5, 6, 7 : Fibre optic cables
8 : Cables with IP 67 connector (see pages 5/66 and 5/67)
10
Selection guide:
Pages 5/50 ...
5/65
References Ethernet network
Wiring system
ConneXium connection components
Shielded copper connection cables

ConneXium shielded connection cables are available in two versions to meet the various current standards and
1 approvals:
b EIA/TIA 568 shielded twisted pair cables for e market
These cables conform to:
v EIA/TIA-568 standard, category CAT 5E
v IEC 11801/EN 50173-1 standard, class D
Their fire resistance conforms to:
v NF C32-070 standard, class C2
2 v IEC 322/1 standards
v Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH)
b EIA/TIA 568 shielded twisted pair cables for UL market
These cables are:
v CEC type FT-1
v NEC type CM
A new range of ConneXium fully shielded preassembled cables has been specially designed for use in harsh
3 industrial environments. These cables combine a category 5E shielded cable and RJ45 connectors reinforced
with a metal profile.
EIA/TIA 568 shielded twisted pair cables for e market
Description With connectors No. Type Length Reference Weight
at both ends kg
Straight-through 2 x RJ45 connectors 1 Standard 2m 490 NTW 000 02
copper cables For connection to 5m 490 NTW 000 05
4 e compatible terminal equipment
(DTE)
12 m
40 m
490 NTW 000 12
490 NTW 000 40

80 m 490 NTW 000 80
Ruggedized 1 m TCS ECE 3M3M1S4
2m TCS ECE 3M3M2S4
3m TCS ECE 3M3M3S4
5 5m
10 m
TCS ECE 3M3M5S4
TCS ECE 3M3M10S4

TCS ECp 3M3MppS4 Crossover copper 2 x RJ45 connectors 2 Standard 5m 490 NTC 000 05
cables For connection between 15 m 490 NTC 000 15
e compatible hubs, switches and
40 m 490 NTC 000 40
transceivers
80 m 490 NTC 000 80
Shielded twisted pair cables for UL market
6 Description With connectors
at both ends
No. Type Length Reference Weight
kg
Straight-through 2 x RJ45 connectors 3 Standard 2m 490 NTW 000 02U
copper cables For connection to 5m 490 NTW 000 05U
UL compatible terminal equipment
12 m 490 NTW 000 12U
(DTE)
40 m 490 NTW 000 40U
80 m 490 NTW 000 80U
7 Ruggedized 1 m
2m
TCS ECU 3M3M1S4
TCS ECU 3M3M2S4

3m TCS ECU 3M3M3S4
5m TCS ECU 3M3M5S4
10 m TCS ECU 3M3M10S4
Crossover copper 2 x RJ45 connectors 4 Standard 5m 490 NTC 000 05U
cables For connection between 40 m 490 NTC 000 40U
8 UL compatible hubs, switches and
transceivers
80 m 490 NTC 000 80U
Do it Yourself copper cable and connectors

The ConneXium Do it Yourself offer consists of 2 references for connectors (M12 and RJ45) and 1 cable
reference (300 m coil), enabling Ethernet 10/100 Mbps networks to be cabled in the field.
The maximum length of cables created in this way is 80 m.
They are quick to assemble using a knife and simple wire cutters (no special tools are required).
9 Description Characteristics Length Reference Weight
kg
Ethernet copper cable Conforms to the standards 300 m CS ECN 300R2
2 shielded twisted pairs and approvals listed above
24 AWG
RJ45 connector Conforms to EIA/TIA-568-D TCS EK3 MDS
10 M12 connector Conforms to IEC 60176-2-101 TCS EK1 MDRS
5/66
References (continued) Ethernet network
Wiring system
ConneXium connection components
Glass fibre optic cables

Glass fibre optic cables are intended for connection:
b To terminal devices (DTE)
b Between hubs, transceivers and switches
1
490 NOC 000 05
Description With connectors No. Length Reference Weight
at both ends kg
Glass fibre optic cables 1 SC connector 5 5m 490 NOC 000 05
1 MT-RJ connector
1 ST (BFOC) connector 6 5m 490 NOT 000 05

2
1 MT-RJ connector
490 NOT 000 05
2 MT-RJ connectors 7 3m 490 NOR 000 03
5m 490 NOR 000 05
Separate parts for TCS ESM and TCS ESB switches 3

Description Optical fibre Type Reference Weight
490 NOR 000 05
kg
Fibre optic modules for Multimode 50/125 m or 62.5/125 m 1000BASE TCS EAA F1LFU00 0.040
Gigabit ports -SX
with LC connector (1) Single mode 9/125 m 1000BASE TCS EAA F1LFH00 0.040
-LH
Multimode 50/125 m or 62.5/125 m
Single mode 62.5/125 m
1000BASE
-LX
TCS EAA F1LFS00 0.040 4
Description Use Port Reference Weight
kg
Configuration backup key Connected on the front USB TCS EAM 0100
for TCS ESM switches of the switch, used to:
- Save and retrieve the switch configuration
- Update the internal software
5
Configuration backup key RJ45 (V24) TCS EAM 0200
for TCS ESB switches
Connection components for IP 67 switch 6

Description With connectors No. Length Reference Weight
at both ends kg
Straight-through copper 1 x IP 67 4-way M12 connector 8 1m TCS ECL 1M3M 1S2
cables and 1 x RJ45 connector 3m TCS ECL 1M3M 3S2
10 m TCS ECL 1M3M 10S2
25 m
40 m
TCS ECL 1M3M 25S2
TCS ECL 1M3M 40S2

7
2 x IP 67 4-way M12 1m TCS ECL 1M1M 1S2
connectors 3m TCS ECL 1M1M 3S2
Power supply cables 2 female M12
straight connectors
2m
5m
XZC P1164L2
XZC P1164L5

8
2 female M12 2.5 m XZC P1264L2
elbowed connectors 5m XZC P1264L5
2 female M12 XZC C12 FDM 50B
straight connectors
2 female M12 XZC C12 FCM 50B
elbowed connectors 9
M12/RJ45 adaptor IP 67 4-way female M12 connector TCS EAA F11F13F00
and female RJ45 connector
(1) Dimensions: W x H x D = 20 x 18 x 50 mm
10
Selection guide:
Pages 5/50 ...
5/67
Presentation, Ethernet network
references Wiring system
ConneXium hub and transceiver
ConneXium hub
Presentation
1 Hubs (concentrators) are used for transmitting signals between several media
(ports). Hubs are plug and play devices that do not need to be configured by the
user.
The use of hubs makes it possible to create the following topologies:

b Star topology
b Tree topology
2 Hub
DTE DTE
Hub
Hub Hub
DTE DTE DTE DTE
3 Star topology Tree topology
Reference
Description Interfaces Reference Weight
kg
ConneXium hub 4 x 10BASE-T ports (copper 499 NEH 104 10 0.530
4 cable), RJ45 shielded
connectors
499 NEH 104 10
5 ConneXium transceiver
Presentation
ConneXium transceivers are used to:
b Create fibre optic linear bus topologies, for devices with a twisted pair cable
Ethernet connection
6 b Interface devices with a twisted pair cable Ethernet connection with a fibre optic
cable
Transceivers are plug and play devices that do not need to be configured by the
user.
ConneXium transceivers provide fibre optic connections for transmission in areas
7 subject to interference (high levels of electromagnetic interference) and for long

distance communications.
DTE
8 DTE DTE
Linear topology on optical fibre
Reference
9 ConneXium transceiver b 1 x 10BASE-T port 499 NTR 101 00

kg
0.230
(copper cable), RJ45 shielded
connector
b 1 x 100BASE-FX port
(multimode optical fibre),
SC connector
10
499 NTR 101 00
Selection guide:
Pages 5/50 ...
5/68
Presentation, Ethernet network
references Wiring system
ConneXium unmanaged switches, twisted pair

Presentation
Switches are used to increase the limits of architectures based on hubs or 1
transceivers, by separating collision domains.
Higher layer communication is provided between the ports, and collisions at link
layer are not propagated (filtering).
They therefore improve performance by better allocation of the bandwidth due to
the reduction of collisions and network load.
Certain ConneXium switch models also enable redundant architectures to be
created on twisted pair copper ring or optical fibre. 2
Unmanaged switches are plug and play devices that do not need to be configured
by the user. Certain models can also be managed remotely via SNMP or HTTP
protocols for monitoring and diagnostic purposes.
3
DTE DTE DTE
DTE DTE DTE
DTE DTE DTE DTE

DTE DTE DTE DTE
Collision Collision
domain 1 domain 2 100 Mbps
fibre-optic ring
4
DTE
Collision DTE DTE

DTE DTE DTE DTE
domain 3
5
Reference
kg
ConneXium unmanaged 5 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX TCS ESU 051F0 0.210
switches ports (copper cable), shielded
M12 type D connectors, IP67 6
8 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 499 NES 181 00 0.230
ports (copper cable), RJ45
shielded connectors, IP20
TCS ESU 051F0 8 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX TCS ESU 083FN0 0.246
shielded connectors, IP30
Description With connectors Length Reference Weight 7

at both ends kg
IP67 power supply cables Female M12 0.230 kg XZC P1164L2
(for ConneXium switch straight connector
5m XZC P1164L5
TCS ESU 051F0)
Female M12 2m XZC P1264L2
elbowed connector 5 m XZC P1264L5
IP67 power supply Female M12 XZC C12 FDM 50B

8
connectors straight connector
499 NES 181 00
(for ConneXium switch
Female M12 XZC C12 FCM 50B
TCS ESU 051F0)
elbowed connector
10
Selection guide:
Pages 5/50 ...
5/69
Wiring system
ConneXium unmanaged switches, 3, 4 and 5 ports, twisted

pair and fibre optic
1 References
kg
ConneXium unmanaged 3 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESU 033FN0 0.113
switches (copper cable), RJ45 shielded
connectors
2 b 4 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
TCS ESU 043F1N0 0.120
shielded connectors
TCS ESU 053FN0
(multimode optical fibre), duplex
SC connector
5 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESU 053FN0 0.113

3 (copper cable), RJ45 shielded
connectors
ConneXium unmanaged switches, 5 ports, twisted pair and

fibre optic
4 Reference
kg
ConneXium unmanaged b 4 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 499 NMS 251 01 0.330
switches ports (copper cable), RJ45
shielded connectors
5 499 NMS 251 01
SC connector
b 3 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 499 NMS 251 02 0.335

shielded connectors
b 2 x 100BASE-FX ports
SC connector
6 b 4 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 499 NSS 251 01 0.330
shielded connectors
b 1 x 100BASE-FX port (single
mode optical fibre), duplex SC
connector
499 NSS 251 02
7 b 3 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
499 NSS 251 02 0.335
shielded connectors
b 2 x 100BASE-FX ports (single
connector
10
Selection guide:
Pages 5/50 ...
5/70
Wiring system
ConneXium managed switches, 4 ports, twisted pair and fibre

optic
References 1
kg
ConneXium managed b 3 x 10BASE-T/100BASE- TCS ESM 043F1CU0 0.400
switches TX ports (copper cable), RJ45
shielded connectors
SC connector 2
TCS ESM 043F1CU0
b 2 x 10BASE-T/100BASE- TCS ESM 043F2CU0 0.400
TX ports (copper cable), RJ45
shielded connectors
SC connector
3
b 3 x 10BASE-T/100BASE- TCS ESU 043F1CS0 0.400
shielded connectors
TCS ESM 043F2CS0 connector
b 2 x 10BASE-T/100BASE- TCS ESU 043F2CS0 0.400 4

shielded connectors
(single mode optical fibre),
duplex SC connector
5
ConneXium managed switches, 4 and 8 ports, twisted pair
References
kg
ConneXium managed
switches
4 x 10/100BASE-TX ports
connectors
TCS ESM 043F23F0 0.400
6
8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESM 083F23F0 0.410
TCS ESM 083F23F0 (copper cable), RJ45 shielded
connectors
10
Selection guide:
Pages 5/50 ...
5/71
Wiring system
ConneXium managed switches, 8 ports, twisted pair and fibre

optic
1 References
kg
ConneXium managed b 7 x 10/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESM 083F1CU0 0.410
connectors
2 TCS ESM 083F1CU0

duplex SC connector
b 6 x 10/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESM 083F2CU0 0.410
connectors
duplex SC connector
3 b 7 x 10/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESM 083F1CS0 0.410
connectors
connector
b 6 x 10/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESM 083F2CS0 0.410
4 TCS ESM 083F2CS0 (copper cable), RJ45 shielded
connectors
(single mode optical fibre),
duplex SC connector
Basic ConneXium managed switches, 8 and 9 ports, twisted

5 References
kg
Basic ConneXium 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESB 083F23F0 0.400
managed switches (copper cable), RJ45 shielded
connectors
b 6 x 10/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESB 083F2CU0 0.400
6 (copper cable), RJ45 shielded
connectors
TCS ESB 083F23F0 (multimode optical fibre),
duplex SC connector
b 6 x 10/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESB 093F2CU0 0.400

7
connectors
duplex SC connector
ConneXium managed switches, 8 extended ports, twisted

References
8 Description Interfaces Reference Weight
kg
ConneXium managed 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESM 083F23F1 (1) 1.000
connectors, IP30
b 6 x 10/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESM 063F2CU1 (1) 1.000
9 TCS ESM 063F2CS1

connectors, IP30
duplex SC connector
b 6 x 10/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESM 063F2CS1 (1) 1.000
connectors, IP30
10 (single mode optical fibre),

duplex SC connector
(1) Available in Conformal Coating version. For this version, add the letter C at the end of the
reference. For example, the TCS ESM 083F23F1 switch becomes TCS ESM 083F23F1C in
the Conformal Coating version. For further information on treatments for harsh
environments, see page 9/2 or consult our website www.schneider-electric.com.
5/72
Wiring system
ConneXium managed switches, 16 and 24 ports, twisted pair

and fibre optic
References 1
kg
ConneXium managed 16 x 10/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESM 163F23F0 0.600
connectors
b 14 x 10/100BASE-TX ports
connectors
TCS ESM 163F2CU0 0.600
2
TCS ESM 163F23F0
SC connector
b 14 x 10/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESM 163F2CS0 0.600
3
connectors
b 2 x 100BASE-FX ports (single
connector
b 22 x 10/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESM 243F2CU0 0.650

connectors
SC connector
4
TCS ESM 243F2CU0
ConneXium managed switches, 8 ports and 2 Gigabit ports,

twisted pair and fibre optic
References 5
kg
ConneXium managed b 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESM 103F23G0 0.410
connectors
b 2 x 1000BASE-SX ports
(multimode optical fibre) (1), or
b 2 x 1000BASE-LH ports 6
TCS ESM 103F23G0 (single mode optical fibre) (2), or
b 2 x 1000BASE-LX ports
(single mode and multimode
optical fibre) (3)
b 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports TCS ESM 103F2LG0 0.410

connectors
b 2 x 10/100/1000BASE-TX
7
(Gigabit) ports (copper cable),
RJ45 shielded connectors
TCS ESM 103F2LG0

(1) With TCS EAA F1LFU000 fibre optic module to be ordered separately (see page 5/67)
8
(2) With TCS EAA F1LFH000 fibre optic module to be ordered separately (see page 5/67)
(3) With TCS EAA F1LFS000 fibre optic module to be ordered separately (see page 5/67)
10
Selection guide:
Pages 5/50 ...
5/73
Selection guide Wi-Fi network
Wi-Fi Access Points and Clients
Device type Wi-Fi 802.11g Access Point FCC Wi-Fi 802.11g Access Point
Description Dual band industrial Wi-Fi LAN Access Point/ Dual band industrial Wi-Fi LAN Access Point/
Client with two independent radio modules Client with two independent radio modules
based on IEEE 802.11a/b/g/h/i based on IEEE 802.11a/b/g/h/i. With FCC
3 approval for USA and Canada.
Type Access point and Client
Wi-Fi standards IEEE 802.11a/b/g/h/i
Operating frequencies 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
4 Degree of protection IP 40
Regional approvals FCC
Mounting DIN rail
Number of radios 2
5 Nominal data rate 54 Mbps
Antenna connections 4 x RP-SMA
Ethernet connections 2 x 10/100BASE-TX
6 Wi-Fi connections 2 x WLAN interfaces, 8 SSIDs per interface (1)
Range Up to 20 km with external antenna (frequency range and data rate dependent on type of antenna)
Dimensions 80 x 100 x 135 mm
Operating temperature -30C to +50C
7 Storage temperature -40C to +70C
Humidity Max. 95% (non-condensing)
Power supplies 2 x 24 V c; 12 V c , redundant capable

2 x PoE per IEEE802.3af, redundant capable (2)
Consumption 12 V c: 625 mA; 24 V c: 417 mA
8 Agency Safety
PoE (48 V c): 167 mA (2)
EN 60950
certifications
Radio EN 300328, EN 301893, notified in all EU FCC identifier: U99BAT54RAIL, IC certification
countries number: 4019A-BAT54R
Environment EN 61131 for operation in automation environment.

EMC test documentation for E1 certification (cars and vehicles) available
9 References TCSG WA 242 (3) TCSG WA 242F (3)
Pages 5/84
(1) SSID: Service Set IDentifier
(2) PoE: Power over Ethernet
(3) All TCSG pp pppp products are supplied with 2 pen-type antennas
10
5/74
Wi-Fi 802.11g Access Point IP67 Wi-Fi 802.11g Client
Dual band industrial Wi-Fi LAN Access Point/Client with two independent radio Single band industrial Wi-Fi LAN Client with one radio module based on IEEE
modules based on IEEE 802.11a/b/g/h/i. For installation in harsh environment, 802.11a/b/g/h/i
IP 67 rated.
3
Access point and Client Client only
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/h/i
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
IP 67 IP 40 4

Wall/mast DIN rail
2 1
54 Mbps
5
4 x N-type 4 x RP-SMA
1 x 10/100BASE-TX
2 x WLAN interfaces, 8 SSIDs per interface (1) 1 x WLAN interface

6
Up to 20 km with external antenna (frequency range and data rate dependent on type of antenna)
261 x 189 x 55 mm 80 x 100 x 135 mm
-30C to +55C
-40C to +70C 7
Max. 95% (non-condensing)
2 x 24 V c; 12 V c , redundant capable 2 x 24 V c; 12 Vc , redundant capable

2 x PoE per IEEE802.3af, redundant capable (2) 1 x PoE per IEEE802.3af (2)
12 V c: 625 mA; 24 V c: 417 mA
PoE (48 V c): 167 mA (2)
EN 60950 8
EN 300328, EN 301893, notified in all EU countries
EN 61131 for operation in automation environment. EMC test documentation for E1 certification (cars and vehicles) available
TCSN WA 272 (3) TCSG WC 241 (3)

9
5/84
10
5/75
Selection guide (continued) Wi-Fi network
Device type Wi-Fi 802.11n Access Point FCC Wi-Fi 802.11n Access Point
2
Description Dual band industrial high performance Wi-Fi Dual band industrial high performance Wi-Fi
LAN Access Point/Client with one radio LAN Access Point/Client with one radio module
module based on IEEE 802.11n (draft 2.0). based on IEEE 802.11n (draft 2.0). With FCC
3 approval for USA and Canada.
Type Access point and Client
Wi-Fi standards IEEE 802.11a/b/g/h/n
Operating frequencies 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz

4 Degree of protection IP 40
Regional approvals FCC
Mounting DIN rail
5 Number of radios 1
Nominal data rate 300 Mbps
Antenna connections 3 x RP-SMA
Ethernet connections 2 x 10/100BASE-TX
6 Wi-Fi connections 1 x WLAN interface, 8 SSIDs per interface (1)
Range Up to 20 km with external antenna (frequency range and data rate dependent on type of antenna)
Dimensions 80 x 100 x 135 mm
Operating temperature -30C to +50C

7 Storage temperature -40C to +70C
Humidity Max. 95% (non-condensing)
Power supplies 2 x 24 V c; 12 V c , redundant capable

Consumption 2 V c 1: 625 mA; 24 V c: 417 mA
8 Agency Safety
PoE (48 V c): 167 mA (2)
EN 60950
certifications
Radio EN 300328, EN 301893, notified in all Certifications for FCC
EU countries
Environment EN 61131 for operation in automation environment
9
References TCSN WA 241 (3) TCSN WA 241 (3)
Pages 5/84
(1) SSID: Service Set IDentifier
(2) PoE: Power over Ethernet
(3) All TCSN pp pppp products are supplied with 3 pen-type antennas
10
5/76
IP67 Wi-Fi 802.11n Access Point FCC IP67 Wi-Fi 802.11n Access Point ATEX IP67 Wi-Fi 802.11n Access Point
2
Dual band industrial high performance Wi-Fi LAN Dual band industrial high performance Wi-Fi LAN Dual band industrial high performance Wi-Fi LAN
Access Point/Client with one radio module based on Access Point/Client with one radio module based on Access Point/Client with one radio module based on
IEEE 802.11n (draft 2.0). For installation in harsh IEEE 802.11n (draft 2.0). For installation in harsh IEEE 802.11n (draft 2.0). For installation in harsh
environment, IP 67 rated. environment, IP 67 rated. With FCC approval for
USA and Canada.
environment, IP 67 ATEX Zone II rated. With FCC
approval for USA and Canada. 3
Access point and Client
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/h/n
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
IP 67 IP 67 ATEX
4
FCC
Wall/mast
1
5
300 Mbps
3 x N-type
2 x 10/100BASE-TX
1 x WLAN interface, 8 SSIDs per interface (1) 6

Up to 20 km with external antenna (frequency range and data rate dependent on type of antenna)
261 x 189 x 55 mm
-30C to +55C
-40C to +70C
7
Max. 95% (non-condensing)
2 x 24 V c, redundant capable
24 V c: 417 mA
PoE (48 V c): 167 mA (2)
EN 60950
8
EN 300328, EN 301893, notified in all EU countries
EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131 EN 61131 for operation in automation environment EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131 ATEX Zone II
EN 50155 (draft)
E1 (draft)
9
TCSN WA 271 (3) TCSN WA 271F (3) TCSN WA 2A1 (3)
5/84
10
5/77
Selection guide Wi-Fi network
Wi-Fi antennas
Device type Dual band antennas
2
Description Dual band hemispherical antenna 5 GHz Very directional antenna
Frequency range 2300 - 2500 MHz 5150 - 5250 MHz

4900 - 5935 MHz 5250 - 5350 MHz
3
5350 - 5725 MHz
5725 - 5875 MHz
Antenna gain 6 dBi at 2.4 GHz 18 dBi

8 dBi at 5 GHz 19 dBi
18.5 dBi
18 dBi
VSWR (1) 1.8 1.5
4 Polarization Linear, vertical
Horizontal HPBW (2) 360 at 2.4 GHz 18
Vertical HPBW (2) 173 at 5 GHz 18
Max. power 75 W (cw) at 25C 6 W (cw)
5 Impedance 50
Connector N female N female
Operating temperature -40C to +80C -45C to +70C
Storage temperature -40C to +80C -45C to +70C
6 Radome colour RAL 7044 (Silk grey) 7035 (Light grey)
Radome material LEXAN EXL 9330 Plastic
Dimensions 86 x 43 mm 190 x 190 x 30.5 mm
7 Wind load 10 N at 160 km/h 104 N at 216 km/h
Degree of protection IP 65 IP 65/IP 67
Shipping package contents Cordset/cable 1 m cable with N male connectors at both ends
Adaptor cable Adaptor cable, R-SMA male connector to N female connector
8 Mounting kit Yes
Access point/client compatibility TCSG pp pppp
References TCS WAB DH TCS WAB 5V
9 Pages 5/84
(1) VSWR: Voltage Standing Wave Ratio

(2) HPBW: Half Power BeamWidth
10
5/78
Dual band antenna
2
Dual band omnidirectional 11n antenna
2400 - 2500 MHz

5150 - 5875 MHz
3
3.5 dBi
5.5 dBi
1.8
3 x linear, vertical 4
360
2W
50 5
3 x N male, 1 m cable directly attached to antenna
-40C to +80C
-40C to +80C
7035 (Light grey) 6

Plastic
0.3 kg
310 x 110 x 40 mm
7
IP 65
3 x 90 cm cordsets directly attached to antenna, with N male connector
3 x adaptor cables, R-SMA male connector to N female connector
Yes 8
TCSN pp pppp
TCS WAB DON
5/84 9
10
5/79
Wi-Fi antennas
Device type 5 GHz antennas
Description 5 GHz omnidirectional antenna 5 GHz dual slant antenna
3 Frequency range 5150 - 5875 MHz 5150 - 5925 MHz
Antenna gain 5 dBi 9 dBi
4 VSWR (1) 1.5 2
Polarization Linear, vertical 2 x linear, 45 slant
Horizontal HPBW (2) 360 70
Vertical HPBW (2) 25 60

5 Max. power 6W 10 W (cw) at 25C
Impedance 50
Connector N female 2 x N female
Operating temperature -45 C to +70 C -40C to +80C
6 Storage temperature -45 C to +70 C -40C to +80C
Radome colour Grey-white RAL 7044 (Silk grey)
Radome material Polypropylene ASA, LEXAN EXL 9330
7 Dimensions 16 x 160 mm 101 x 80 x 35 mm
Wind load 15 N at 160 km/h
Shipping package contents Cordset/cable 1 m cordset with N male connectors at 2 x 1 m cordsets with N male connectors at
both ends both ends
8 Adaptor cable Adaptor cable, R-SMA male connector to
N female connector
2 x adaptor cables, R-SMA male connector to
N female connector
Mounting kit Yes
Access point/client compatibility TCSG pp pppp TCSG pp pppp

TCSN pp pppp
9 References TCS WAB 5O TCS WAB 5S
Pages 5/84
(2) HPBW: Half Power BeamWidth
10
5/80
5 GHz antennas
5 GHz MiMo directional 11n antenna (3) 5 GHz Medium directional antenna 5 GHz Very directional 11n antenna
5150 - 5875 MHz 5150 - 5250 MHz

5250 - 5350 MHz
5150 - 5875 MHz 3
5350 - 5725 MHz
5725 - 5875 MHz
9 dBi 18 dBi 23 dBi

19 dBi
18.5 dBi
1.5
18 dBi
1.5 < 1.7 4
3 x linear vertical/horizontal/+45 Linear, vertical Dual linear, vertical and horizontal
65 18 9
65 18 9
2 W (cw) at 25C 6 W (cw) 6W 5

50
N female N female 2 x N female
-40C to +80C -45C to +70C
-40C to +80C -45C to +70C 6

RAL 7044 (Silk grey) 7035 (Light grey) Grey-white
LEXAN EXL 9330 Plastic
0.110 kg 0.107 kg 2.5 kg
101 x 80 x 35 mm 190 x 190 x 30.5 mm 371 x 371 x 40 mm 7

15 N at 160 km/h 264 N at 220 km/h
IP 65 IP 65/IP 67
3 x 1 m cordsets with N male connectors at both 1 m cordset with N male connectors at both ends 2 x 1 m cordsets with N male connectors at both
ends ends
N female connector
Adaptor cable, R-SMA male connector to N female
connector
N female connector
8
Yes
TCSN pp pppp TCSG pp pppp TCSG pp pppp

TCSN pp pppp
TCS WAB 5DN TCS WAB 5D TCS WAB 5VN 9

5/84
(3) MiMo: Multiple-Input Multiple-Output
10
5/81
Wi-Fi antennas
Device type 2.4 GHz antennas
2 Description 2.4 GHz omni directional 2.4 GHz directional 2.4 GHz dual slant
antenna antenna antenna
Frequency range 2400 - 2500 MHz 2300 - 2500 MHz 2400 - 2485 MHz
3 Antenna gain 6.0 dBi 14 dBi 8 dBi
VSWR (1) < 1.8 1.5
Polarization Linear, vertical Vertical Dual linear,

45 slant
Horizontal HPBW (2) 360 35 75
4 Vertical HPBW (2) 30 70
Max. power 25 W 75 W (CW) at 25 C 10 W (CW) at 25 C
Impedance 50
Connector N female 2 x N female
5 Operating temperature -40C to +80C
Storage temperature -40C to +80C
Radome colour Grey-white RAL 7044 (Silk grey)
Radome material Fibreglass LEXAN EXL 9330
6 Weight 0.340 kg 0.110 kg
Dimensions 22 mm x 250 mm 101 x 80 x 35 mm
Wind load 15 N at 160 km/h
Degree of protection IP 65 IP 23 IP 65
7 Shipping package contents Cordset/cable 1 m cordset with N male connectors at both ends 2 x 1 m cordsets with N male
connectors at both ends
Adaptor cable Adaptor cable, R-SMA male connector to N female connector 2 x adaptor cables, R-SMA
male to N female
Mounting kit Yes
Access point/client compatibility TCSG pp pppp TCSG pp pppp TCSG pp pppp

8 TCSN pp pppp
References TCS WAB 2O TCS WAB 2D TCS WAB 2S
Pages 5/84 5/85
9 (2) HPBW: Half Power BeamWidth
10
5/82
Cable antennas
2.4 GHz Leaky cable, 50 m 2.4 GHz Leaky cable, 100 m

2
2000 - 2900 MHz
0.15 dB at 2.4 GHz

3
2 x N male
-40C to +85C 5
-70C to +85C
12 kg 24 kg 6
50 m, 15 mm 100 m, 15 mm
IP 65
50 m cable with N male connectors at both ends 100 m cable with N male connectors at both ends 7
1 x 50 Ohm terminator, 50 fastening clips (mounting on flat surface)
TCSG pp pppp
8
TCS WAB C5 TCS WAB C10
5/85
10
5/83
References Wi-Fi network
References
1 Description Number
of radios
Data rate Degree of
protection
Country
approvals
Reference Weight
Mbps kg
Wi-Fi 802.11g 2 54 IP 40 TCSG WA 242
Access Point
TCSG WA 242
FCC Wi-Fi 802.11g 2 54 IP 40 US and Canada TCSG WA 242F
2 Access Point
IP 67 Wi-Fi 802.11g 2 54 IP 40 TCSG WA 272

Access Point
Wi-Fi 802.11g Client 1 54 IP 40 TCSG WC 241
3 TCSN WA 241
Wi-Fi 802.11n
Access Point
1 300 IP 40 TCSN WA 241
FCC Wi-Fi 802.11n 1 300 IP 40 US and Canada TCSN WA 241F

Access Point
IP 67 Wi-Fi 802.11n 1 300 IP 67 TCSN WA 271

Access Point
4 FCC IP 67 Wi-Fi 802.11n 1 300 IP 67 US and Canada TCSN WA 271F
Access Point
TCSN WA 271
IP 67 ATEX Wi-Fi 802.11n 1 300 IP 67 ATEX TCSN WA 2A1
Access Point
5
Wi-Fi antennas
Description Frequency Gain Degree Reference Weight
range of protection
MHz dBi kg
Dual band hemispherical 2300 - 2500 6 IP 65 TCS WAB DH 0.300
6
antenna 4900 - 5935 8
TCS WAB DH
5 GHz Very directional 5150 - 5250 18 IP 67/IP 65 TCS WAB 5V 0.107
antenna 5250 - 5350 19
5350 - 5725 18.5
5725 - 5875 18
Dual band omnidirectional 2400 - 2500 3.5 IP 65 TCS WAB DON 0.300
7 11n antenna 5150 - 5875 5.5
5 GHz omnidirectional 5150 - 5875 5 IP 65 TCS WAB 5O 0.300

TCS WAB 5DN antenna
5 GHz dual slant antenna 5150 - 5925 9 IP 65 TCS WAB 5S 0.110
5 GHz MiMo 11n 5150 - 5875 9 IP 65 TCS WAB 5DN 0.110

8 directional antenna
5 GHz Medium directional 5150 - 5250 18 IP 67/IP 65 TCS WAB 5D 0.107

antenna 5250 - 5350 19
TCS WAB 5D
5350 - 5725 18.5
5725 - 5875 18
9
5 GHz Very 11n directional 5150 - 5875 23 IP 67/IP 65 TCS WAB 5VN 2.500
antenna
2.4 GHz omnidirectional 2400 - 2500 6 IP 65 TCS WAB 2O 0.340

antenna
TCS WAB 2O
10
Wi-Fi Access Points and Clients selection guide: Wi-Fi antenna selection guide:
Pages 5/74 ... Pages 5/78 ...
5/84
References (continued) Wi-Fi network
Wi-Fi antennas,
cables and accessories
Wi-Fi antennas (continued)

Description Frequency range Gain Degree Reference Weight
2.4 GHz directional

MHz
2300 - 2500 14 dBi
of protection
IP 23 TCS WAB 2D
kg
0.110
1
antenna
2.4 GHz dual slant antenna 2400 - 2485 8 dBi IP 65 TCS WAB 2S 0.110
TCS WAB 2D 2.4 GHz Leaky cable, 50 m 2000 - 2900 0.15 dB IP 65 TCS WAB C5 12.000
2
at 2.4 GHz
2.4 GHz Leaky cable, 100 m 2000 - 2900 0.15 dB IP 65 TCS WAB C10 24.000
TCS WAB C5 at 2.4 GHz
Cables
Description Type Length Reference Weight
3
m kg
Adaptor cable 1 RP-SMA male connector 0.520 TCS WAAC 0.340
1 N female connector
TCS WAAC Adaptor cable 1 N female connector 2.000 TCS WABAC2 0.340
N-plug to N-jack, 2 m 1 N male connector
Adaptor cable 1 N female connector 15.000 TCS WABAC15 0.340

4
N-plug to N-jack, 15 m 1 N male connector
5
TCS WABAC2
Accessories
Description Degree Type Cable length Reference Weight
of protection m kg
Overvoltage protector for N female, TCS WABP 0.080
antennas N male
Overvoltage protector for IP 68 N female, TCS WABP68 0.080

TCS WABP LAN/PoE
Memory card modules IP 40

N male
Mini-DIN 0.315 TCS WAMC67 0.035

6
(1) connector
IP 67 M12 0.500 TCS WAMCD 0.025
connector
Adaptor kit for pole TCS WABMK
mounting
TCS WAMCD
7
(1) Auto-configuration adaptors which are used to save 2 different versions of the configuration and operating program data for
the Wi-Fi access point to which it is connected. They enable managed Wi-Fi access points to be easily commissioned and
quickly replaced.
TCS WABMK
10
Wi-Fi Access Points and Clients selection guide: Wi-Fi antenna selection guide:
Pages 5/74 ... Pages 5/78 ...
5/85
platform 0
Presentation
Originally used in the automotive industry, CAN is increasingly used in industry.
1 There are several fieldbuses based on CAN base layers and components. The
CANopen bus conforms to the ISO 11898 international standard, promoted by the
CAN in Automation association, a grouping of users and manufacturers, and
guarantees a high degree of openness and interoperability due to its communication
profiles and its standardized equipment.
2 Modicon M340 Lexium 32
Modicon STB
Premium
3 1 to 63 CANopen bus
slaves
TeSys T Osicoder
Altivar 71 Altivar 312
4 TeSys U
The CANopen bus is a multi-master bus providing reliable, deterministic access to

real-time data in control system devices. The CSMA/CA protocol is based on
broadcast exchanges, sent cyclically or on an event, ensuring optimum use of the
bandwidth. A message handling channel can also be used to set the parameters of
5 slave devices.
The bus uses a double shielded twisted pair on which a maximum of 127 devices
can be connected by daisy chaining.
The data rate, which varies between 1 Mbps and 20 Kbps, depends on the length of
the bus (between 20 m and 2500 m).
Each end of the bus must be fitted with a line terminator.
6 The CANopen bus is a set of profiles on CAN systems, possessing the following
characteristics:
b Open bus system
b Data exchanges in real time without overloading the protocol
b Modular design allowing modification of size
b Interconnection and interchangeability of devices
7 b Standardized configuration of networks

b Access to all device parameters
b Synchronization and circulation of data from cyclic and/or event-controlled
processes (short system response time)
b Interoperability between numerous international manufacturers
10
Description: Software setup: Wiring system: References:

page 5/87 page 5/88 page 5/89 pages 5/90 ...
5/86
Connectable devices, Modicon Premium automation
Connectable devices
The Modicon TSX Micro or Modicon Premium platforms, via the TSX CPP 110
PCMCIA card, perform the role of master on the CANopen bus. 1
The following Schneider Electric products can be connected to the CANopen bus,
depending on the model (1):
b OsiSense XCC 58 mm multi-turn absolute encoders
Altivar ATV 312 b TeSys U starter-controllers with LUL C08 communication module
b TeSys T motor management system, with LTM controller
2
TeSys Quickfit
b TeSys D motor starters, using the TeSys Quickfit installation system with
APP 1CCO0/O2 communication module
b Modicon OTB IP 20 distributed I/O, with Twido I/O expansion modules and OTB
interface module
b Modicon STB IP 20 modular distributed I/O, with STB NIM interface module
b Preventa XPS configurable safety controllers
b 0.1815 kW Altivar 312/32 variable speed drives for asynchronous motors
b 0.75...630 kW Altivar 61/71 variable speed drives for asynchronous motors
b Lexium 32 servo drives for BMH and BSH servo motors
3
b ILA/ILE/ILS Lexium integrated drives
b SD328 stepper drives
Lexium 32
Example of devices that can be connected on CANopen

4
Description
1
The Modicon TSX Micro/Premium automation platforms have a slot for a PCMCIA
communication card on their processors which can take the CANopen machine bus 5
card.
2
The TSX CPP 110 CANopen machine bus assembly comprises:
1 A type III PCMCIA card with locking screw
2 A tap junction for connection to the CANopen bus cable via a 9-way male SUB-D
connector. This tap junction is mounted on a DIN rail
3 3 A 0.5 m cable, integral to the PCMCIA card and the tap junction 6
TSX CPP 110
(1) For compatible device models and their setup, please refer to our website
10
Presentation: Software setup: Wiring system: References:

5/87
Software setup, Modicon Premium automation
Software setup
The CANopen bus is configured using SyCon (1) software, reference
1 SYC SPU LFp CD2AM (to be ordered separately). This software is used to:
b Describe all the devices connected on the bus
b Generate a .CO file containing all the information relating to the connected
devices. This extension file is imported into the PLC application via the PL7 Micro/
Junior/Pro or Unity Pro programming software (2).
If the configuration file is too large for the capacity of the host PLC processor (see
2 characteristics below), it is possible to load the CANopen master configuration
directly onto the TSX CPP 110 card via a type III PCMCIA port on the PC on which
the SyCon software is installed.
With the PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro or Unity Pro software (2) the CANopen bus card can
be configured so that the exchanges between the PLC processor and the
TSX CPP 110 card are executed at the same rate as the master task or the fast task.
3 Example of SyCon device configuration screen The process data exchanged with the slaves can be accessed using %MW standard
words, the number of which depends on the type of processor and the task in which
the module has been declared. PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro or Unity Pro (2) standard
function blocks are used to set the parameters of the devices.
Note: In addition to supporting the CANopen protocol which uses V2.0A standard CAN
identifiers on 11 bits, the card enables direct access to the CAN link layer via V2.0B CAN
4 identifiers on 29 bits, used by the majority of CAN devices. In certain applications this enables
simultaneous control of CANopen devices and specific CAN products.
References
CANopen machine bus assembly
Description Services No. of modules Use Reference Weight
5 CANopen - Cyclic
per PLC/PC
1 on Micro Supplied TSX CPP 110
kg
0.230
master V4.02 exchanges TSX 37 21/22 with tap
PCMCIA card (PDO) 1 on Premium junction and
(type III) - CMS TSX P57 cable length
message (3) 0.5 m
handling (SDO)
- Management
6
of bus operating
modes
TSX CPP 110
SyCon configuration software
SyCon software is the configurator for Schneider Electric machine buses and
fieldbuses. It supports the following buses:
b CANopen for Modicon TSX Micro and Modicon Premium platforms
7 b Profibus DP for Modicon Premium and Modicon Quantum platforms
b INTERBUS for Modicon Quantum platform
It includes the device description files for Schneider Electric I/O modules.

kg
SyCon V2.10 configuration Single (1 station) SYC SPU LFU CD2AM
8 software licences Group (3 stations)
Team (10 stations)
SYC SPU LFG CD2AM
SYC SPU LFT CD2AM

Site (> 10 stations) SYC SPU LFF CD2AM
SyCon V2.10 configuration Single (1 station) SYC SPU LRU CD2AM
software update
9
(1) The SyCon configuration software can also be used to describe the I/O configuration of the
Profibus DP bus for the Modicon Premium and Modicon Quantum platforms and the I/O
configuration of the INTERBUS bus for the Modicon Quantum platform.
(2) PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro: compatible with the Modicon TSX Micro and Modicon Premium
platforms
Unity Pro: compatible with the Modicon M340, Modicon Premium and Modicon Quantum
platforms.
(3) Not permitted on TSX P57 154M Premium processor.
10
Presentation: Description: Wiring system: References:

5/88
Wiring system Modicon Premium automation
platform 0
CANopen bus wiring system
Modicon M340 with BMX P34

20102/20302 processor
Magelis
XBT Gp Modicon STB
1
4 PC or monitoring
tool
2
2
5 9 1
10
6a
6b 6a 5
2
5
3
ILA/ILE/ILS ILA/ILE/ILS
TeSys T
Altivar 312 Altivar 71 Preventa Modicon
safety OTB
Lexium 32
controller TeSys U
4
Note: For numbers and references 1, 2, , 11, see pages 5/90 and 5/91.
Various types of cable are available, making it possible to create any type of
application, including for harsh environments (for the definition of standard and
harsh environments, see page 5/90).
Several connectors are available to meet any requirement: straight or 90 elbowed
connectors, or elbowed connectors with the option of connecting a PC or diagnostic
5
pocket PC.
Power can be supplied to devices by means of cables, cordsets and tap junctions:
one AWG24 pair for the CAN signals (CAN_L and CAN_H) and one AWG22 pair for
the power supply and the earth (CAN_V+ and CAN_SHLD).
In addition to the IP 20 wiring offer, there is also an IP 67 wiring offer.

6
10
Presentation: Description: Wiring system: References:

5/89
platform 0

Wiring system
Standard tap junctions and connectors

Designation Description No. Length Reference Weight
1 IP 20 CANopen tap 4 SUB-D ports. Screw terminals for connecting
(1)
1 TSX CAN TDM4
kg
0.196
junction the trunk cables
Line end adaptor
IP 20 connectors Elbowed (90) 2 TSX CAN KCDF 90T 0.046
TSX CAN TDM4 CANopen 9-way Straight (2) TSX CAN KCDF 180T 0.049
female SUB-D.
Elbowed (90) with 9-way SUB-D for connecting 4 TSX CAN KCDF 90TP 0.051
Line end adaptor
2
a PC or diagnostic tool
switch
IP 67 M12 connectors Male FTX CN 12M5 0.050
Female FTX CN 12F5 0.050
IP 20 CANopen tap 2 RJ45 ports 9 VW3 CAN TAP2
junction for Altivar and
Lexium 05
VW3 CAN TAP2
3 IP 20 standard cables and preassembled cordsets
Designation Description No. Length Unit Weight
(1) reference kg
CANopen cables Standard, e marking: low smoke. Zero halogen. 5 50 m TSX CAN CA50 4.930
(AWG 24) Flame-retardant (IEC 60332-1) 100 m TSX CAN CA100 8.800
300 m TSX CAN CA300 24.560
Standard, UL certification, e marking: 5 50 m TSX CAN CB50 3.580
4 flame-retardant (IEC 60332-2) 100 m
300 m
TSX CAN CB100
TSX CAN CB300
7.840
21.870
TSX CAN KCDF 90T For harsh environments (3) or mobile 5 50 m TSX CAN CD50 3.510
installations, e marking: low smoke. 100 m TSX CAN CD100 7.770
Zero halogen. Flame-retardant (IEC 60332-1).
300 m TSX CAN CD300 21.700
Oil resistant
CANopen Standard, e marking: low smoke. Zero halogen. 6a 0.3 m TSX CAN CADD03 0.091
5 preassembled
cordsets
One 9-way female
Flame-retardant (IEC 60332-1) 1m
3m
TSX CAN CADD1
TSX CAN CADD3
0.143
0.295
TSX CAN KCDF 180T SUB-D connector at 5m TSX CAN CADD5 0.440
each end Standard, UL certification, e marking: 6a 0.3 m TSX CAN CBDD03 0.086
(AWG 24) flame-retardant (IEC 60332-2) 1m TSX CAN CBDD1 0.131
3m TSX CAN CBDD3 0.268
5m TSX CAN CBDD5 0.400
6 CANopen
preassembled
One 9-way SUB-D connector
1 RJ45 connector
6b 0.5 m
1m
TCS CCN 4F3M05T
TCS CCN 4F3M1T

cordsets (AWG 24)
VW3 M38 05 R010 (4)
3m TCS CCN 4F3M3T
Two 9-way SUB-D connectors, one male and 0.5 m TLA CD CBA 005
TSX CAN KCDF 90TP one female 1.5 m TLA CD CBA 015
3m TLA CD CBA 030
7 5m TLA CD CBA 050
IP 67 standard preassembled cordsets

Designation Description No. Length Unit Weight
(1) reference kg
CANopen Preassembled cordsets with two 5-way A-coded 0.3 m TCS CCN 2M2F03 0.090
preassembled elbowed M12 connectors (one male connector 1m TCS CCN 2M2F1 0.127
8 cordsets and one female connector)
2m
5m
TCS CCN 2M2F2
TCS CCN 2M2F5
0.179
0.337
10 m TCS CCN 2M2F10 0.600
15 m TCS CCN 2M2F15 0.863
(2) The VW3 CAN KCDF 180T connector can also be used for connection to a Controller Inside programmable card.
(3) Standard environment:
9 - Without any particular environmental stresses
- Operating temperature between + 5C and + 60C
- Fixed installation
Harsh environment:
- Resistance to hydrocarbons, industrial oils, detergents, solder splashes
- Humidity up to 100%
- Saline atmosphere
- Significant temperature variations
10 - Operating temperature between - 10C and + 70C

- Mobile installation
(4) Cordset with line termination.
Presentation: Description: Software setup: Wiring system:

5/90
platform 0

Wiring system
IP 20 connection accessories
Designation Description No. Length Reference Weight
CANopen connector 9-way female SUB-D. Line end adaptor switch.

(1)
VW3 CAN KCDF 180T
kg

1
for Altivar 71 drive (2) 180 cable outlet
VW3 CAN A71 Adaptor for CANopen SUB-D to RJ45 adaptor VW3 CAN A71
Altivar 61/71 drive
Preformed CANopen 1 RJ45 connector at each end

cordsets for Altivar
10 0.3 m
1m
VW3 CAN CARR03
VW3 CAN CARR1

2
and Lexium 05 drives
CANopen bus Hardware interface for link conforming to the AM0 2CA 001V000 0.110
adaptor for Lexium 15 CANopen standard + 1 connector for connection
servo drive of PC terminal
Y connector CANopen/Modbus TCS CTN011M11F
3
Designation Description No. Sold in lots Reference Weight
(1) of kg
IP 20 line terminator RJ45 connector 2 TCS CAR013M120
AM0 2CA 001V000
For screw terminal connector 2 TCS CAR01NM120
4
IP 67 connection accessories
Designation Composition Reference Weight
kg
Connectors Straight, M12, 5 screw terminals Male XZ CC12MDM50B 0.020
Female XZ CC12FDM50B 0.020
XZ CC12pDM50B Elbowed, M12, 5 screw terminals Male
Female
XZ CC12MCM50B
XZ CC12FCM50B
0.020
0.020
5
(2) For ATV 71HpppM3, ATV 71HD11M3X, HD15M3X, ATV 71H075N4... HD18N4 drives, this connector can be replaced by the
TSX CAN KCDF 180T connector.
6
XZ CC12pCM50B
10
Presentation: Description: Software setup: Wiring system:

5/91
Presentation, Modicon Premium Automation
description 4
Platform 4 4
Master module for AS-Interface cabling system
Presentation
The TSX SAY 1000 master module for AS-Interface cabling system make the
1 Modicon Premium PLC the master of the AS-Interface system.
Sensors via
Modicon interface
Modicon Premium
+ TSX SAY 1000
XVB illuminated
2 indicator bank
AS-Interface
Safety T
3
interface
XAL control station

Motor starter Phaseo
AS-Interface
power supply
The AS-Interface cabling system consists of a master station (Modicon Premium PLC)
and slave stations. The master supporting the AS-Interface profile interrogates the
4 devices connected on the AS-Interface line one by one and stores the information
(sensor/actuator status, device operating status) in the PLC memory. Communication
on the AS-Interface line is managed totally transparently in relation to the PLC
application program.
The TSX SAY 1000 Modicon Premium master module supports the AS-Interface M2E
profile (AS-Interface V2) which manages:
5 b Discrete slave devices (up to 62 devices organized in 2 banks (A/B) with 31
addresses each)
b Analog devices (up to 31 devices in bank A)
b Safety interfaces (up to 31 devices in bank A)
The maximum number of TSX SAY 1000 modules per PLC station is 1, 2, 4 or 8,
depending on the type of processor installed (see page 5/93).
6 An AS-Interface power supply is essential for powering the various devices on the
line. It should preferably should be placed near stations that consume a great deal of
power (see page 8/37).
Description
7 The TSX SAY 1000 AS-Interface line master module is a standard format module. It
can be installed in any position in the Modicon Premium PLC rack, just like any I/O
module or application-specific module.
1 It has the following on the front panel:
2 1 A display block with 4 LEDs indicating the module operating modes:
v RUN (green): module operating
8 3
4
v ERR (red): module faulty
v A/B (green): display of the group of 32 slaves
v I/O (red): I/O fault on AS-Interface line
5 2 A display block with 32 LEDs for diagnostics of the AS-Interface line and each
slave connected on the line depending on the selection made with the A/B
pushbutton (1)
3 Two LEDs specific to the module: see diagnostics on page 5/93
9 TSX SAY 1000
4 Two pushbuttons: see diagnostics on page 5/93
5 A 3-way male SUB-D connector for connection to the cable
(1) Depending on the selection made with the A/B pushbutton, either the first 31 slaves (standard
addressing) or the last 31 slaves (extended addressing with AS-Interface V2) are displayed.
10
Software setup: Cabling system: References:

page 5/94 page 5/96 pages 5/93 and 5/97
5/92
Description (continued), Modicon Premium Automation
references, Platform 4 4
connections 4 Master module for AS-Interface cabling system
Description (continued)
TSX SAY 1000 module (AS-Interface V2)
The two LEDs 3 on the module front panel, together with the two pushbuttons 4, are
used for module diagnostics:
1
LEDs marked Pushbuttons marked
PWR: FAULT: AS-Interface line fault A/B: selection of MODE: Module
AS-Interface slave group on Offline/Online
power supply display block 2
present
2
The display block on the front panel of the TSX SAY 1000 master module enables
simplified local diagnostics to be performed by displaying the slave devices present
on the AS-Interface line. Detailed diagnostics for each of the slave devices is carried
out via the ASI TERV2 adjustment terminal.
3
References
Description Number per Profile Max. number of Reference Weight
PLC I/O kg
(1)
AS-Interface 2 with 57 1p AS-Interface 62 discrete devices TSX SAY 1000 0.340
4
master 4 with 57 2p M2E 31 analog devices
module for 8 with 57 3p (3)
Modicon 8 with 57 4p 31 safety devices
Premium 8 with 57 5p
PLCs (2) 8 with 57 6p
TSX SAY 1000 Connection accessories (4)

kg
5
AS-Interface For AS-Interface line 20 m XZ CB 10201 1.400
line flat 50 m XZ CB 10501 3.500
cables
100 m XZ CB 11001 7.000
(yellow)
XZ CB1pp01
(1) These maximum values are not cumulative. 6

(2) The 3-way SUB-D connector for connecting the AS-Interface cable is supplied with the
master module.
(3) The TSX SAY 1000 module supports analog devices with 1 to 4 input or output channels.
(4) For other connection accessories, see page 5/97.
10
Software setup: Cabling system: References:

5/93
Software setup Modicon Premium automation
platform 4
Software setup
The AS-Interface cabling system is configured using Unity Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior/
1 Pro software. The services offered are based on the principle of simplicity:
b Management of profile tables, parameters and data by the master (transparent for
the user)
b Topological I/O addressing: any AS-Interface slave declared on the line is
assigned a topological address on the line, in a way that is transparent for the user
b Each AS-Interface sensor/actuator is seen by the Modicon TSX Micro/Premium
PLC in the same way as any in-rack I/O
2
AS-Interface cabling system configuration
All the devices on the AS-Interface line are configured implicitly, guided by the
following sequence of screens:
b Declaration of the AS-Interface line master module
3 v The TSX SAZ 10 module is always inserted and declared in position no. 4 on the
Modicon TSX Micro TSX 37 10/21/22 automation platform
v The TSX SAY 1000 module can be inserted in any position on the Modicon
Premium automation platform (except for the positions reserved for the processors
and power supplies)
Declaration of the TSX SAZ 10 TSX Micro master module
4 b Configuration of AS-Interface slave modules

From the declaration screen, it is possible to configure all the slave devices
corresponding to all the I/O of the interfaces present on the AS-Interface line. This
configuration consists of the following for each device, to be defined as appropriate:
v Schneider Electric AS-Interface device
The user selects the reference of the AS-Interface device from the various discrete,
5 analog or safety interfaces in the catalogue. This selection automatically determines
the AS-Interface profile and parameters associated with each interface.
v Third party AS-Interface device
Using Unity Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software, the user can manage a private
list of sensors/actuators of various brands. This list, specifying the AS-Interface
profile and parameters, is created and added to according to the user's requirements.
6
Configuration of AS-Interface slave devices in the TSX SAY
1000 Premium module Programming
After configuration, the I/O connected to the AS-Interface line are processed by the
application program in the same way as any other of the PLC's in-rack I/O, using
either their addresses (eg: %I\4.0\16.2, input 2 on slave 16 on the AS-Interface line),
7 or their associated symbols (eg: Start_conveyor).
The use of DFB user function blocks, specific to AS-Interface line diagnostics and
integrated in the Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software, enables a fault on a line,
device, or if it is present ASI SAFEMONp safety monitor, to be diagnosed.
10
Presentation: Cabling system: References:

5/94
Diagnostics Modicon Premium automation
platform 4
Diagnostics
Diagnostics carried out using the centralized display block on the Modicon TSX Micro
1
platform or the display block on the TSX SAY 1000 Modicon Premium platform module
can be supplemented by using a PC with the Unity Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro
1
software.
2
The terminal connected to the Modicon TSX Micro/Premium PLC is used for diagnosing
the operation of the following:
b TSX SAZ 10 and TSX SAY 1000 AS-Interface master modules
b The AS-Interface line
b Slave devices on the line
2
For the TSX SAY 1000 V2 AS-Interface master module, the diagnostics also takes
the changes to the M2E standard into account.
This diagnostics is carried out from a single screen divided into four parts providing
information on:
1 The status of the TSX SAZ 10 or TSX SAY 1000 module (RUN, ERR, I/O)
3
3 4 2 The status of the AS-Interface channel connected to the module
TSX SAY 1000 module diagnostics using PL7 software
3 The faulty interface (or slave)
4 Details relating to the selected interface (profile, parameters, forcing, etc.)
If there is a fault on the AS-Interface module or channel, a second screen can be

accessed which clearly indicates the nature of the fault, which may be internal or
external.
4
10
Presentation: Cabling system: References:

5/95
Cabling system Modicon Premium automation
platform 4
AS-Interface cabling system
AS-Interface flat cables are available in two versions, yellow and black, according to the type of
application: standard and TPE (resistant to splashing oil and to environments with petrol vapours).
1 Various junction boxes are available to meet all connection requirements. They all have IP 67 protection.
AS-Interface infrastructure
Modicon Premium
+ TSX SAY 1000
2
Twido
+ TWD NOI 10M3
TeSys U
Phaseo ASI LUF C5E Modicon IP67 I/O
3
ASI ABL M3024 ASI 67FMP22E (1)
2 2 7
4
Modicon IP67 I/O
ASI 67FFP44D (2)
1 1 6 6 5 1 3
+ ASI 67FFB03
(connection base)
Modicon IP20 I/O
5 ASI 20MT41E
Setup
AS-Interface cable lengths
100 m. This can be extended to:
b 200 m using a repeater or a line extension:
6 M A 4 A
S S S S
7 100 m 100 m
b 300 m with 2 repeaters

b 500 m by placing the master in the centre of the network:
A 4 A 4 M A 4 A 4 A
8
S S S S S S S S S S S S
100 m 100 m 50 m 50 m 100 m 100 m
9 M = Master module
A = Power supply
S = Interface or component
Note: 300 m corresponds to the maximum distance between the master and the furthermost slave.
For all other information on AS-Interface setup, please consult our website www.schneider-electric.com.
10 (1) ASI 67FMP22E Modicon IP67 AS-Interface V2.1 I/O module, with M12 remote connection, 2 inputs/2 outputs.
(2) ASI 67FFP44D Modicon IP67 AS-Interface V2.1 I/O module, with direct connection (IDC), 4 inputs/4 outputs. For
further information on the Modicon IP67 AS-Interface distributed I/O modules, please consult the catalogue pages
on our website www.schneider-electric.com.
5/96
platform
AS-Interface cabling system
Flat cables and line accessories

The special profile of these 2-core flat cables eliminates the risk of polarity reversal when connecting. Connections to
the cable are made by IDC (Insulation Displacement Connectors) connection accessories.
The material used for the cable sheath causes the holes made by the IDCs to reseal themselves as soon as the IDCs 1
are removed, thus maintaining the IP 67 protection of AS-Interface cabling accessories.
The ambient temperatures which AS-Interface flat cables can withstand are as follows, depending on the cable type:
XZ CB1pp0p b Standard cable: 25+ 85C for operation, - 40+ 85C for storage
b TPE cable (oil and vapour resistant): - 30+ 105C for operation with cable flexing, - 40+ 105C for non-flexing
operation or storage
Description Sheath colour No. Length Type of

cable
Reference Weight
kg
2
TCS AAR011M Flat cables Yellow 1 20 m Standard XZ CB10201 1.400
2 x 1.5 mm2 (for AS-Interface) TPE XZ CB10201H 1.400
Ue 48 V
50 m Standard XZ CB10501 3.500
TPE XZ CB10501H 3.500
Black 2 20 m
TPE
Standard
XZ CB11001H
XZ CB10202
7.000
1.400
3
(for separate 24 V c power supply) TPE XZ CB10202H 1.400
TPE XZ CB10502H 3.500
TPE XZ CB11002H 7.000
ASI RPT01 4
Description Use No. Length Order in Unit reference Weight
522173
multiples of kg
Line extension Extends the length of a segment 3 TCS AAR011M 0.047
from 100 to 200 m
Repeater Extends an AS-Interface line by 4 ASI RPT01 0.190
ASI 67FACC2 100 m
Heat shrinkable
cable end
To maintain IP67 degree of
protection at the end of the
10 ASI 67FACC2 0.002 5
AS-Interface cable
Accessories for connection to AS-Interface flat cables

Degree of protection: IP67, connection to flat cables by means of IDCs. Ue 40 V, Ie 2 A.
Ambient temperature: - 25C+ 70C for operation, - 40+ 85C for storage 6
Tap-offs for connection of AS-Interface components
Description Connection to AS-Interface No. Cable Fixing Reference Weight
component length kg
Tap-offs for By 5-way female straight M12 1m Screw TCS ATN011F1 0.090
connection to a flat remote connector
TCS ATN011Fp cable for Cable 2 x 0.34 mm2
AS-Interface (yellow) By stripped wires for terminal block
2m
2m
Screw
Screw
TCS ATN011F2
TCS ATN01N2
0.130
0.215
7
Cable 2 x 0.34 mm2
Tap-offs for By 5-way female straight M12 5 1m Screw TCS ATV011F1 0.140
connection to two remote connector 2m Screw TCS ATV011F2 0.180
flat cables: Cable 4 x 0.34 mm2
- 1 for AS-Interface By stripped wires for terminal block 6 2m Screw TCS ATV01N2 0.265
(yellow)
- 1 for separate
power supply (black)
Cable 4 x 0.34 mm2
8
T connectors
TCS ATV011Fp Description Connection to the AS-Interface No. Cable Fixing Reference Weight
component length kg
T connectors for
connection to a flat
cable for
By 5-way female M12 connector 7 Screw TCS ATN011F 0.026
9
AS-Interface (yellow)
Tap-off Screw TCS ATN02V 0.019
(or extension)
for flat cables:
2 flat cables (yellow)
TCS ATN011F TCS ATN02V
10
Presentation: Software setup: Cabling system:

5/97
X-Way and the OSI model Modicon Premium automation
platform 0
X-Way communication
X-Way and the OSI model

The communication architecture of Modicon TSX Micro/Premium PLCs, like that of
1 TSX 17 or TSX series 7 model 40 PLCs, is compliant with the OSI model.
Telegram
7 Application Common words/shared table Uni-TE
Application-to-application communication Modbus (1)
2 6 Presentation
Uni-TE
Session
5
Transport
3
TCP
4
Network X-Way addressing IP

3
Link Uni-Telway WorldFip ISO 8802-3 ISO 8802-3

2 Ethernet Ethernet
4 1
Physical RS 485
19.2 kbps
WorldFip
1 Mbps
ISO 8802-3
10 Mbps
ISO 8802-3
10/100 Mbps
Uni-Telway Fipway/Fipio Ethway Ethernet TCP
b The physical layer enables the physical transmission of data signals between
2 systems via a medium.
5 In order for a network to operate correctly and to ensure full security of personnel in
compliance with IEC/EN 61131-2, l, it is necessary to follow the instructions provided
in the manual Grounding and Electromagnetic Compatibility of PLC Systems
included on DVD reference UNY USE 909CDM.
b The application layer concerns application programs with their data exchange
and cooperation conventions. This layer provides the following services:
6 v Uni-TE industrial message handling, available on TSX Micro/Premium and TSX 17/
TSX series 7 PLCs
v Distributed COM database available on TSX Micro/Premium and TSX 17/TSX
series 7 PLCs, or Shared Table service available on TSX Micro/Premium PLCs
v Periodical data exchange on Fipio bus (see page 5/104)
v Application-to-application communication
v Telegram
7 Size of requests Ethway, Ethernet Fipway Fipio Uni-Telway

Modbus/TCP(1)
Uni-TE service 256 bytes (2) 128 bytes 128 bytes 240 bytes (3)
COM service 256 word 128 word
database (4) database
Application-to- 256 bytes 128 bytes 128 bytes 240 bytes (3)
application
8 Telegram 16 bytes
(1) Ethway not available on TSX Micro PLC.

(2) 1 kbyte with requests executed as a background task.

(3) 128 bytes on TSX Micro/Premium/TSX model 40 terminal port, 32 bytes on TSX 17-20 and
TSX 47-20/25.
(4) COM service not available with Ethernet TCP/IP.
9 Uni-TE services
The Uni-TE protocol is the industrial message handling system supported by X-Way
communication architecture. It operates on a question/answer or request/report
principle. A device which supports the Uni-TE protocol can be a:
b Client: This device initiates communication. It asks a question (reads), transmits
data (writes) or sends an instruction (Run, Stop, etc.).
b Server: This device executes the service requested by the client and sends a
10 report after execution.
5/98
X-Way and the OSI model Modicon Premium automation
(continued) platform 0
X-Way communication
X-Way and the OSI model (continued)

Uni-TE services (continued)
The services provided depend on the type of device (PLC, programming terminal,
supervision station, etc.). Depending on its function, each device can be Client and/
1
or Server. A Client PLC can access other devices in the architecture via its
application program: it can read/write objects on another PLC or numerical
controller, select programs on a numerical controller, etc.
Network transparency
When connected to any station in the network or directly connected to the Fipway/
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network, a programming terminal can communicate with any
2
other station in the network (as if the terminal were physically connected to the PLC
with which it is communicating).
Network transparency also applies between stations connected to different
segments of the same multinetwork architecture.
COM service and Shared Table service (mutually exclusive services)

The COM service is made up of a set of dedicated words called common words.
3
Each Fipway/Ethway network station may or may not be able to access this
database (in read only or read/write mode).
All PLC stations exchanging common words (32 stations on Fipway, 64 stations on
Ethway) are allocated, in a dedicated database (128 words for Fipway, 256 words for
Ethway), a write zone (set at 4 words for Fipway, and variable from 4 to 64 words for
Ethway ) per TSX Micro/Premium station.
COM words are updated automatically during each scan of the general sequential
4
program (master task) without the intervention of the application program.
The Shared Table service can be used to exchange a table of internal words
divided into as many zones as there are Modicon TSX Micro/Premium PLCs
comprising the Fipway network. The exchange principle is based on broadcasting,
by each PLC, of a word memory zone (broadcast zone) to the other PLCs on the
network. 5
Each network station is allocated an exchange table comprising 128 internal words
for the 32 PLCs that share the service, with a broadcast zone assigned to each PLC,
variable from 1 to 32 internal words.
Application-to-application communication
The user application program sends word tables between 2 devices, which may be
Modicon TSX Micro/Premium PLCs. 6
This service is particularly suitable for:
b Sending alarm messages from a PLC to a supervision station.
b Exchanging data tables between two PLCs controlled by the application programs
of the sender and recipient.
b Sending broadcast messages to all stations and devices.
Telegram
The telegram service available on Fipway is a special case of application-to-application
7
messages. It enables short messages to be sent and received on a priority basis
(maximum 16 characters).
A telegram from a Modicon TSX Micro/Premium PLC is sent immediately without
waiting for the end of the cycle. The telegram is received by the Modicon TSX
Micro/Premium PLC in:
b The event-triggered task (processed as soon as the message arrives in the
network card).
8
b The fast task or master task (when scanning the reception function).
A PLC can only process one telegram at a time.
Use in a multinetwork
The X-Way communication architecture is designed to cover multinetwork
applications capable of dealing with problems of:
b Concentration: The architecture is particularly suitable for feedback of supervision
9
data to a higher level.
b Redundancy: Each PLC monitors the correct operation of both networks to which
it is connected. If one of the networks should fail, all traffic can be transferred to the
network that is functioning.
b Inter-network communication: These architectures comprise several network
segments which are interconnected by bridge PLC stations. Transparent
communication is then offered between the entire architecture.
10
5/99
connectable devices platform
Fipio bus manager function
Presentation
1 Modicon Premium
(Bus manager)
Magelis
Modicon STB
2
XBT G
Momentum
Fipio bus
Third-party
3
products
Modicon
Altivar 71
TSX Micro (Agent)
The Fipio fieldbus is a standard means of communication between different control

system components. It enables 127 devices to be connected at the connection point
integrated in the processor.
4 This fieldbus conforms to the WorldFip standard based on producer/consumer

mechanisms. It is designed for remote location of l/O up to 15 km away and enables
third-party devices developed as par of the Collaborative Automation programme to
be installed.
The bus arbitrator (manager) can be a Modicon Premium
TSX P57 15p/25p/2823/35p/45p/4823/554M PLC.
5 For Fipio bus wiring system and connection accessories, see pages 5/110 to
5/113.
Connectable devices
The following Schneider Electric devices can be connected to the Fipio bus:
6 b Modicon Micro/Premium Agent function PLCs, via PCMCIA TSX FPP 10 card
b Magelis XBT GT/GK/GTW graphic terminals via TSX CUSBFIP Fipio adaptor
b Magelis industrial iPC, via TSX CUSBFIP USB/Fipio adaptor
b Modicon STB IP20 distributed I/O, with STB NFP 2212 network interface module
b Momentum distributed discrete, analog or application-specific l/O (with
170 FNT 110 01 communication module)
b IP 67 remote discrete l/O, TSX EpF
7 b ATV 61/71 variable speed drives, via VW3 A58301/311 card
b PC terminal via TSX CUSBFIP USB/Fipio adaptor
b TBX legacy range IP 20 distributed I/O, or discrete or analog l/O with TBX LEP 030
communication module
b Partner products from the Collaborative Automation Partner programme
10
Description: Maximum configuration: References:

page 5/101 page 5/102 page 5/103
5/100
software setup platform
Description
TSX P57 p53/54M, TSX P57 p823 M processors incorporating a Fipio bus link have
the following on the front panel:
1 A 9-way SUB-D connector for connection to the bus via the TSX FP ACC2/12
1
connector.
TSX P57 153M/154M

2
TSX P57 454/554M

4
1 Software setup 5
Configuration
Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software offer configuration screens which enable the
2 declaration and immediate and intuitive configuration of the remote devices
connected on the Fipio bus:
1 Each circle represents one connection point.
2 Clicking on a circle accesses the catalogue of devices which can be connected.
3 Once confirmed, the Fipio bus configuration will appear. 6
3
Processors equipped with the integrated Fipio link can manage up to 128 connection
points on the bus (addresses 0 to 127).
See page 5/102 for the table detailing limitations according to processor and type of
device.
7
Fipio bus configuration
1
Diagnostics
The diagnostic functions of the Fipio bus, integrated in the Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro
software, very quickly identify a fault on: 8
b The bus medium
b Remote devices
2
1 A graphic representation of the architecture displays the defective devices in red.

2 More detailed diagnostics can be accessed by double-clicking.
3
3 In addition, specific screens can display an overview of all the faults appearing on
the bus or on any device. On request, these faults can be recorded for later 9
analysis.
10
Fipio bus diagnostics
Presentation: Maximum configuration: References:
page 5/100 page 5/102 page 5/103
5/101
Maximum configuration Modicon Premium automation
platform
Maximum configuration
The Fipio bus enables a maximum of 128 devices to be connected. This limit can, in
1 certain cases, be restricted depending on the type of bus manager processor and on
the devices which are connected on the bus. The maximum number of devices
which can be connected depends on:
b The maximum size of memory space available for Fipio data which is:
v 94320 bytes for Modicon Premium TSX P57 15p/25p/2823/35p processors
v 214528 bytes for Modicon Premium TSX P57 45p/4823/554M processors
b The total number of bytes consumed by each device (see table below)
2 Product family References Base size Extension size Maximum number of connection points
(bytes) (bytes) TSX 57 1p TSX 57 2p/3p TSX 57 4p/5p
Maximum number of Fipio devices (1) 63 127 127

ATV 71/61 with VW3 A3 311 card 1280 62 62 62
Lexium 15 with AM0 FIP 001V000 card 1424 62 62 62
3 Magelis iPC, PC with USB/FIP adaptor (addr. 63)

Inductel, read/write stations XGK S130421, XGP S1304202

1808
1
52
1
52
1
62
with VW3 A58301 card
Modicon STB STB NFP 2212 832, 896 or 1280 62 113, 105 or 73 126
(2)
Momentum 170 ADI ppp/ADO ppp, 832 62 98 98
170 ADM 350 10/11,
170 ARM 370 10/390 10/30,
4 170 ADM 690 51,

170 ARN 120 90,
170 ARM 370 30/390 10
170 AAI 030 00/520 40, 1808 52 52 98
170 AAO 120 00/921 00,
170 AEC 920 00,
170 AMM 090 00
170 AAI 140 00 2304 40 40 92
5 TBX (3)
(legacy range)
TBX AES 200/ASS 400 (4) 1332
272 (2/4 channel
62
59
70
59
126
126
extension)
TBX AMS 620 1584 59 59 126
272
(2-channel extens.) 50 50 100 (4)
(4-channel extens.) 50 50 84 (4)
6 528
(8-channel extens.)
44 44 63 (4)
TBX CEP 1622/CSP 1622/1625 1152 31 31 31

TBX DES 1152 62 81 126
16pp/DMS16pp/DSS16pp 144 (extension) 62 64 (5) 64 (5)
TBX DSS 1235 1152 144 (extension) 62 72 85 (5)
TBX DSS 1025 1152 144 (extension) 62 72 102 (5)
7 TBX EEP/ESP 08C22/1622 (IP 65)

TBX SAP 10
1152
1808
62
52
64
52
126
117
IP 67 I/O TSX EEF 08D2/EEF 16D2 832 62 98 98
TSX ESF 08T22/EMF 16DT2 1808 52 52 98
Micro/Premium Agent with TSX FPP 10 card 1424 62 62 62
FipConnect profile FRD C2 832 62 113 126
FRD C2P 1744 54 54 122
8 FSD C8
FSD C8P
896
1808
62
52
105
52
126
117
FSD M8 1040 62 90 126
FSD M8P 1952 48 48 109
FED C32 1280 62 73 126
FED C32P 2304 40 40 92
FED M32 1424 62 66 126
9 FED M32P 2448 38 38 87
Not applicable
(1) Address 63 is reserved for the programming and diagnostic terminal.

(2) Depending on the island's number of I/O modules (132).
(3) Discrete and analog base units must not be mixed on the same Fipio connection point.
(4) The number of analog channels for TBX AES/ASS/AMS base units is limited to 1008.
10 (5) The number of discrete channels for TBX DES/DMS/DSS base units is limited to 2048.

page 5/100 page 5/101 page 5/103
5/102
Application services, Modicon Premium automation
references platform
Application services
Depending on the bus manager, the application services supported by Premium
PLCs are:
b Remote I/O
1
Remote l/O modules are addressed by the PL7 application program as in-rack l/O,
with which they can of course coexist. This service enables the exchange of l/O
status variables and output command variables. These exchanges are carried out in
a cyclical and deterministic manner and without intervention from the application
program.
The manager also manages remote devices (configuration) in an aperiodic manner,
without intervention from the application program.
2
b Uni-TE service
X-Way industrial message handling service suitable for operator dialogue, diagnostics
and control functions (requests of 128 bytes maximum).
b Application-to-application service
This service consists of sending tables between 2 devices under the control of their
respective application programs (requests of 128 bytes maximum).
b Terminal transparency
3
Terminals connected on a higher level X-Way network or on the manager PLC
terminal port communicate with the devices on the bus. This is also the case when
the terminal is connected at the priority address 63.
References 4
Processors with integrated Fipio link
Type and max. no. of racks Software compatibility Reference Weight
kg
TSX P57 15pM Unity Pro See page 1/10
4 racks PL7 Junior/Pro See page 1/19
TSX P57 25pM
TSX P57 2823M
Unity Pro
PL7 Junior/Pro
See page 1/10
See page 1/19

5
16 racks
TSX P57 35pM Unity Pro See page 1/10
16 racks PL7 Junior/Pro See page 1/19
TSX P57 153M TSX P57 2823/4823AM TSX P57 45pM Unity Pro See page 1/10
TSX P57 4823M PL7 Junior/Pro See page 1/19
16 racks
TSX P57 554M Unity Pro See page 1/10

6
16 racks
Accessories and connecting cables (1)

7
Description Use Material Reference Weight
kg
TSX P57 454M/554M Female Processors Black polycarbonate (IP 20) TSX FP ACC12 0.040
connectors with integrated Zamac TSX FP ACC2 0.080
9-way SUB-D Fipio link
8
(1) For other accessories and Fipio bus connecting cables, see pages 5/110 to 5/113.
TSX FP ACC12
10
Presentation: Description: Maximum configuration:

page 5/100 page 5/101 page 5/102
5/103
functions, platform
description Fipio bus Agent function
Presentation
1
Modicon Premium
(Bus manager)
Lexium 15 Lexium 15
Magelis iPC
2
Modicon STB
Magelis XBT Gp
Fipio bus
3
Modicon
TSX Micro (Agent) Momentum
Altivar 71/61 Modicon Premium (Agent)
Modicon TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22) or Modicon Premium PLCs, fitted with a PCMCIA
4 TSX FPP 10 card on their integrated communication channel, are agents on the
Fipio bus. (With Fipio bus manager, see page 5/103).
The Fipio bus enables I/O to be remotely located close to the devices to be controlled
(TeSys U, Modicon STB, Momentum, Lexium, Altivar, etc). The Agent function enables
offline processing, by locating a Modicon TSX Micro/Premium PLC close to the
machine.
5 In addition to the standard Fipio services (see pages 5/98 and 5/99), Modicon TSX
Micro (TSX 37 21/22) and Modicon Premium PLCs allow exchanges of input and
output variables with the bus manager PLC. These exchanges are performed
cyclically, automatically and without the involvement of the application program at
the same rate as the task for which the agent PLC has been configured.
For Fipio bus wiring system and connection accessories, see pages 5/110 to
6 5/113.
Application services
The application services supported by Modicon TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22) and
Modicon Premium Agent function PLCs are:
b Uni-TE service, X-Way industrial message handling service suitable for operator
7 dialogue, diagnostics and control functions (requests of up to 128 bytes).
b Application-to-application communication service, which consists of the
transmission of tables between 2 devices controlled by their respective application
programs (messages of up to 128 bytes).
b Periodic data exchange service for exchanging a 64 word table between the bus
manager PLC and the TSX Micro or Premium Agent PLC. For software setup, see
page 5/105.
8 Description
Modicon TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22)/Premium PLCs have a slot in the processor for a
type III PCMCIA communication card. This can be fitted with a TSX FPP 10 Fipio bus
connection card. The card comprises:
1 A sealable protective cover
3 2 A removable cover with fixing screws giving access to the 20 way miniature
9 connector
3 Two indicator lamps:
- ERR lamp: card fault, link fault
- COM lamp: transmission or reception of data
Connector to be ordered separately:

4 TSX FP CG010/030, 1 or 3m cable for connecting the TSX FP ACC 3/4 tap junction
10 1 2 4
(on 9-way SUB-D connector)
Software setup: References:

page 5/105 page 5/105
5/104
Software setup, Modicon Premium automation
references platform
Fipio bus Agent function
Software setup
Each TSX Micro/Premium PLC Fipio Agent uses 64 %MWi consecutive internal words
to exchange periodic data. The first 32 words are reserved for sending data to the
manager, and the remaining 32 are reserved for receiving data from the manager.
1
Unity Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro application-specific screens allow the configuration
of the Fipio Agent PCMCIA card. This consists of indicating:
b the connection point number (1 to 127)
b the address at the beginning of the 64 %MW word table reserved for sending data
to and receiving data from the manager 2
References
Fipio bus connection component
Description Composition Use Reference Weight
kg 3
Fipio Agent 1 type III PCMCIA On TSX Micro TSX FPP10 0.110
function card version V1.8 and Premium
processors
TSX FPP10
Fipio bus connection cables (1)
4
from to kg
Cables for TSX FPP 10 TSX FP ACC3/4 1m TSX FP CG010 0.210
PCMCIA card card cable connector 3m TSX FP CG030 0.310
(miniature (9-way SUB-D
connector) connector)
5
TSX FP CG010/030 (1) For other Fipio bus accessories and connection cables, see pages 5/110 and 5/111
10
page 5/104 page 5/104
5/105
performance platform
Fipway network
Presentation
1
Ethernet TCP/IP Modicon
Premium
Fipway
2 Modicon
Premium
TSX srie 7
TSX 17 20
Bus X Modicon TSX Micro
Extension
bus X
3
The Fipway network is an open industrial local area network for communication
between the various Modicon TSX Micro, Modicon Premium and TSX Series 7 PLCs
using the X-Way services. It conforms to the FIP standard with access via a bus
4 arbitrator.
Modicon TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22)/Premium PLCs can be connected to a Fipway
network using a Fipway PCMCIA card which is inserted in each processor or into the
TSX SCY 21601 (Modicon Premium) communication module. Supported X-Way
services (see pages 5/98 and 5/99) are:
b Uni-TE services
b Distributed database (COM) or Shared Table
5 b Telegram (service only available when the PCMCIA card is inserted in the
processor)
b Application-to-application communication
For Fipway network wiring system and connection accessories, see pages 5/110
and 5/113.
6 Performance
The operating principle of a Fipway network gives guaranteed, constant network
cycle times, whatever the traffic and number of stations (2 to 64). This enables the
Fipway network to be updated (addition or removal of stations) without affecting the
performance.
Maximum transmission time

7 b Telegram (TLG): priority application messages are transmitted in less than 10 ms
(one telegram per station).
b Common words (COM): the database of common words is updated every 40 ms.
b Shared Table: the entire exchange table is updated every 40 ms.
b Uni-TE message handling: Uni-TE or standard application-to-application
messages are normally transmitted in less than 80 ms (40 ms for stations with
addresses below 32). Where there is a large amount of traffic, some messages may
8 wait for several cycles before being transmitted. The network characteristics enable
a maximum of 210 messages of 128 bytes per second to be transmitted.
The performance can be improved by inhibiting the Telegram service on the entire
Event Report network.
With such network characteristics, the response time at application level depends
CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1 almost exclusively on the processing capacity of the devices which are connected.
9 For example, the remote loading of a 50 K word program takes less than two minutes
on a network with normal load
NCT NCT
CT1 = Cycle time of device 1
NCT = Cycle time of Fipway network
CT2 CT2 CT2 = Cycle time of device 2
Action The response time must be evaluated by the designer of each application in relation
10 to the devices connected.

The processing time of a device can vary from one to two cycle times as a function of
asynchronous operation.
5/106
references platform
Fipway network
Description
Modicon TSX Micro/Premium PLCs have a slot in the processor for a PCMCIA
communication card (1) which can be fitted with a TSX FPP20 Fipio bus connection
card. This card can also be inserted into the TSX SCY 21601 communication module
1
slot on Modicon Premium PLCs.
Description, same as that of the TSX FFP10 Fipio bus card, see page 5/104.
References
Description Number
per PLC
Use on Reference Weight
kg
2
Fipway card 1 with TSX Micro and Premium TSX FPP20 0.110
(1) TSX 37 20 processor
TSX 57 10/20 TSX SCY 21601 module
3 with TSX 57 30
TSX FPP20 4 with TSX 57
40/50/60
Communication See page 5/129 For Premium PLC TSX SCY 21601 0.360 3
module - 1 isolated 2-wire RS 485
2-channels integrated channel
(Half-duplex)
- 1 slot for type lll PCMCIA
card
Set of X-Way Includes all X-Way drivers on one CD-ROM See page 6/43
drivers for PC
compatible 4
TSX SCY 21601 Fipway network connection cables (2)
From To kg
Corsets for Card TSX FP ACC3/4 1 m TSX FP CG 010 0.210
PCMCIA card TSX FPP20 box (9-way SUB-D 3 m
5
TSX FP CG 030 0.310
(miniature connector)
connector)
(1) TSX P57 4634M/5634M/6634M Unity processors with integrated Ethernet port do not
TSX FP CG010/030 support the TSX FPP20 Fipway card in their PCMCIA slot.
(2) For other accessories and connecting cables, see pages 5/112 and 5/113.
10
5/107
platform m
Fipio/Fipway optic transceiver
Presentation
OZD FIP G3 optic transceivers are particularly suitable for use in applications which are subject to harsh electrical
1 environments or which are spread over large areas:
b Public buildings
b Large-scale industrial sites
b Water treatment and distribution
b Transport and highway tunnel infrastructures, etc.
The OZD FIP G3 optic transceiver enables conversion of a FIP electric interface into 2 FIP optic interfaces and
2 vice versa. As a result, it allows the use of redundant ring topologies, which improve installation availability even
when a line is broken at a point in the medium.
In these situations, the length of the bus or of the Fipio/Fipway ring can reach:
b 20 km with a maximum of 32 transceivers on Fipio
b 20 km with a maximum of 20 transceivers on Fipway
see characteristics page 5/109.
3 These characteristics can be increased by using mixed topologies, such as 2 serial optic rings or 2 serial optic
buses; please consult your Customer Care Centre.
Wiring system
Modicon Premium Magelis XBT Gp
4
+ TSX CUSBFIP
3
4 6 4 6
2 2
5 1 1
6 6 Optic ring
1 1 1
6 6 6 6
2 4 2 4
2
6 6 5 6
3 5
7
Third-party product Modicon STB
Modicon Premium / TSX Micro
+ TSX FPP10 (Fipio)
+ TSX FPP OZD200 (Fipway)
Magelis iPC + TSX CUSBFIP
8 1 OZD FIF G3: Fipio/Fipway optic transceiver

2 TSX FP CAp00: 150 shielded twisted pair trunk cable ( 8 mm) for use in standard environments and inside
buildings (1).
3 TSX FP CG0p0: tap-off connection cable for TSX FPP10/OZD200 PCMCIA card for TSX Micro/Premium PLCs.
4 TSX FP ACC3/4: T-junction box. This box also has two 9-way female SUB-D connectors for connecting any
device which connects to the bus via a PCMCIA card.
9 5 TSX FP ACC2/12: 9-way female SUB-D connector for Fipway/Fipio connection using daisy chaining or tap link
connection.
6 TSX FP ACC7: line terminator to be placed at each segment end.
TSX LES 65: terminal block for TSX Series 7 PLC, which performs address coding.
(1) Trunk cable TSX FP CRp00 for use in harsh environments and outside buildings, see page 5/113.
10
References :
page 5/109
5/108
references platform
Fipio/Fipway optic transceiver
Operating modes and performance
b Fipio bus on fibre optic link
After configuration in Fipio mode, the processor scans the various application devices according to the software
1
configuration:
v Image variables of the input values and of the output command values of a configured device are scanned as
quickly as possible on the bus, whilst respecting the existing relationships between periods of different tasks which
use these devices.
v The appearance or disappearance of a configured device is detected on the bus within a maximum time of
200 ms.
v Exchanges occur at the rate defined by the programmer, from 10 to 20 Uni-TE messages per second.
2
v The network cycle time is double that of the electrical bus when OZD FIP G3 transceivers are used.
b Fipway bus on fibre optic link

The operating principle is identical to that on an electrical network, in that the number of stations is limited to 32
and the transmission time is as follows:
v For the Common words and Shared Table services, the entire database is updated every 40 ms
maximum.
3
v For Uni-TE message handling, the network characteristics allow transmission of a maximum of
230 messages of 128 bytes per second.
References
Description Max. number of Fipio bus connectable Fipway network Reference Weight
4
transceivers devices kg
Fipio/Fipway optic 32 with Fipio - TSX Micro/Premium (with TSX Micro, OZD FIP G3 0.500
transceiver (1) 20 with Fipway TSX FPP10 PCMCIA card) Premium
- Modicon STB distributed I/O (with PCMCIA
- Momentum distributed I/O TSX FPP OZD200
- Magelis XBT Gp terminals card)
- Magelis iPC industrial PCs
- Altivar 71/61 variable speed
5
drives
- Lexium 15 servo drives, etc.
OZD FIP G3 TSX Micro/Premium connection components (2)

kg
Fipway card TSX Micro TSX 37 21/22 PLC
Premium processor
1 type III
PCMCIA card
TSX FPP OZD200 0.110 6
Fipio card TSX Micro TSX 37 21/22 PLC 1 type III TSX FPP10 0.110
agent function Premium processor PCMCIA card
TSX FPP10
7
(1) For elctrical/fibre optic repeater TSX FP ACC8M, see page 5/112.
(2) For accessories and connecting cables, see pages 5/112 and 5/113.
10
Presentation :
page 5/108
5/109
platform
Fipio bus and Fipway network
Fipio bus/Fipway network wiring system

TSX 17 20
1 Premium (bus manager,

integrated link)
Momentum I/O
Premium (bus manager,
integrated link)
Momentum I/O
Premium Agent Modicon STB I/O Modicon STB I/O
TSX Micro Agent Lexium 15, Altivar 71/61 TBX SAP 10 Lexium 15, Altivar 71/61 Magelis XBT Gp
TBX IP 20 Magelis iPC
Third-party products Third-party products (legacy range) Third-party products PC
USB
2 4 9 10 9
16
Daisy chaining
3 4
7 8 Daisy chaining 6 7, 8 6
c 24 V 1
3 14 1, 2 1, 2
14
13 13 1, 2 3
1, 2
c 24 V 14
Optical fibre
14 12
4
14
11 c 24 V 1, 2
9
4 TSX Series 7 model 40

with PCMCIA card
TSX Series 7 model 40
via integrated link
Premium/TSX Micro IP 67 I/O (1)
via PCMCIA card
(legacy range) (legacy range)
Connection to Fipway network and Fipio bus Connection to Fipway network Connection to Fipio bus
5 (1) For TSX EEF/ESF/EMF IP 67 dust and damp proof I/O modules on Fipio bus and connections, please consult our website www.schneider-electric.com.
Connectable devices
Devices on Fipio bus Boxes Connectors
TSX FP TSX FP TSX FP TSX EF TSX FP TSX FP TBX TBX
ACC4 8 ACC14 6 ACC3 7 ACC99 ACC2 9 ACC12 9 BLP01 10 BAS10
6 Premium bus manager

Premium Fipio Agent (PCMCIA)
D
D
D
D
C/D C/D
TSX Micro Fipio Agent (PCMCIA) D D

Lexium 15 servo drives D D C/D C/D
Altivar 71/61 variable speed drives D D C/D
USB/FIP adaptor 16 D D
Modicon STB/Momentum D D C/D C/D
7 IP 20 TBX I/O (legacy range)

IP 67 I/O
D D
C/D
C/D
Devices on Fipway network Boxes Connectors

TSX FP TSX FP TSX FP TSX EF TSX FP TSX FP TBX TBX
ACC4 8 ACC14 6 ACC3 7 ACC99 ACC2 9 ACC12 9 BLP01 BAS10
Premium (PCMCIA) D D
TSX Micro (PCMCIA) D D
8 TSX model 40 (integrated link)

TSX model 40 (PCMCIA)
D
D
D
D
C/D
USB/FIP adaptor 16 D D
LUF P1 Modbus gateway D D C/D C/D
Recommended connection C: connection by daisy chaining

Connection possible D: connection by tap link
9
10
Fipio presentation: Fipway presentation: References:

page 5/100 page 5/106 pages 5/112 ...
5/110
Connections (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform
Fipio bus/Fipway network wiring system (continued)

Cables
1 TSX FP CAp00: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 150 ( 8 mm) for normal
environments and inside buildings.
1
2 TSX FP CRp00: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 150 ( 9.5 mm) for harsh
environments or use outside buildings.
TSX FP CPp00: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 150 ( 9.5 mm) and 1 x 1.5 mm2
pair for remote power supply for harsh environments or use outside buildings.
3 TSX FP CCp00: tap link cable, double shielded twisted pair 150 ( 8 mm) for
normal environments and inside buildings.
4 TSX FP CG0p0: tap link cordset for TSX FPP10/20/OZD200 PCMCIA card for
2
Modicon Micro/Premium/TSX Series 7 PLCs, and TSX C USBFIP USB/FIP
adaptor. Connection to the bus is via the 9-way SUB-D connector on the
TSX FP ACC3/ACC4 box.
Connection boxes
6 TSX FP ACC14: IP 20 polycarbonate junction box: provides tap link from the trunk 3
cable to connect 1 device via TSX FP CCp00 tap link cable or several devices in a
daisy chain.
7 TSX FP ACC3: IP 20 box for connecting 2 TSX FPP10/20/OZD200 PCMCIA
cards or a TSX C USBFIP USB/FIP adaptor on a 9-way SUB-D connector.
8 TSX FP ACC4: IP 65 junction box. It also has a 9-way female SUB-D connector
for connecting a TSX FPP10/20/OZD200 PCMCIA card or a TSX C USBFIP
USB/FIP adaptor (in this case, the degree of protection of the box becomes IP 20). 4
TSX EF ACC99: IP 65 junction box for IP 67 I/O modules, please consult our website
Connectors
9 TSX FP ACC2 and TSX FP ACC12: 9-way female SUB-D connector for Fipway/
Fipio connection (TSX FP ACC2 connector specifically for TSX 17 20 micro-PLC).
5
Used for daisy chain or tap link connection (90 high or low output, 45 high or low
output).
10 TBX BLP01: connector for IP 20 TBX I/O modules (legacy range).
11 TSX LES65: terminal block for TSX/PMX model 40 PLCs (legacy range). Used for
address coding.
12 TSX FP ACC6: electrical repeater: used to increase the number of stations (64 max.)
and the length of the network by creating additional segments of up to 1000 m (a 6
maximum of 4 repeaters in cascade, giving a network length of 5000 m).
TSX EF Cppp: dust and damp proof connectors for IP 67 I/O modules, please
consult our website www.schneider-electric.com.
Other components
13 TSX FP ACC8M: fibre optic/electrical repeater, used to interconnect electrical
7
segments via a fibre optic link (particularly suitable for crossing areas with a high
level of interference) or to connect a fibre optic device.
14 TSX FP ACC7: line terminator, to be installed at both ends of a segment.
16 TSX C USBFIP: USB/Fipio-Fipway adaptor, for connecting any device with a USB
port (Magelis XBT Gp, PC, Magelis iPC industrial PC). Max. rate 12 messages/s.
TSX EF ACC7: M23 IP67 line terminator, to be installed at one or both ends of a
8
segment, as required.
TSX FP ACC9: network wiring test tool. This is used for testing the continuity of
segments, the connections of the various devices and the installation of line
terminators.
10
Fipio presentation: Fipway presentation: References:

page 5/100 page 5/106 pages 5/112 ...
5/111
platform
References
Fipio bus/Fipway network connection accessories (1)
1 Description Use No. Reference Weight
kg
Insulated bus connection Trunk cable tap link (for connecting the 24 V c 6 TSX FP ACC14 0.120
boxes power supply of IP 67 TBX modules)
(polycarbonate, IP 20)
Trunk cable tap link, supports 7 TSX FP ACC3 0.090

TSX FP ACC14 2 x 9-way female SUB-D connectors
2 (for TSX FP CG010/030 PCMCIA card cable)
Connects the 24 V c power supply of dust and
damp proof TBX modules
Dust and damp proof bus Trunk cable tap link, supports 8 TSX FP ACC4 0.660
connection boxes 1 x 9-way female SUB-D connector
(zamac, IP 65) (for TSX FP CG010/030 cable)
3 TSX FP ACC3
Trunk cable tap link via 2 M23 connectors
Distribution of remote 24 Vc power supply via 7/8
connector
TSX EF ACC99 0.715
Connection of compatible PC via 9-way female

SUB-D connector
Female connector for Black IP 20 polycarbonate connector 9 TSX FP ACC12 0.040

devices with 9-way male Connection by daisy-chaining or tap link
SUB-D connector Zamac connector, for TSX 17 20 PLC (legacy range) 9 TSX FP ACC2 0.080
4 Connection by daisy-chaining or tap link
TSX FP ACC4
Line terminators 2 impedance adaptors 14 TSX FP ACC7 0.020
Sold in lots of 2
5 Electrical repeater
(IP 65)
Increases the length of the network or bus by allowing 12
the connection of 2 segments of up to 1000 m each
TSX FP ACC6 0.520
Electrical/fibre optic For connecting (via patch panel) an electrical 13 TSX FP ACC8M 0.620
TSX EF ACC99 repeater segment (1000 m max.) and a fibre optic segment
(IP 65) (3000 m max.)
FIP wiring test tool For testing each cable segment of a network TSX FP ACC9 0.050
6
TSX FP ACC12
Fipio/Fipway communication cards and adaptor
PCMCIA cards Type III cards for Premium/TSX Micro PLCs See pages 5/107 and 5/105
7 USB/Fipio-Fipway adaptor For connecting any device with a USB port to

Fipio/Fipway Includes the USB cable (length 2 m)
15 TSX C USBFIP 0.140
Requires the TSX FP CG010/030 cable 4 for

connection (Fipio/Fipway end) to the TSX FP
ACC3/4 box. Max. rate 12 messages/s.
TSX C USBFIP
8
(1) The characteristics and performance of the Fipio bus or Fipway network are dependent on the above TSX FP accessories
being used.
10
Fipio presentation: Fipway presentation: Connections:

page 5/100 page 5/106 pages 5/110 ...
5/112
platform
Fipio bus/Fipway network connecting cables (1)
Description Type Condition of use No. Length Reference Weight
kg
1
Trunk cables 8 mm, 1 shielded In normal environment (2) 1 100 m TSX FP CA100 5.680
twisted pair 150 Inside building 200 m TSX FP CA200 10.920
500 m TSX FP CA500 30.000
9.5 mm, 1 shielded

twisted pair 150
In harsh environment (3) 2
Outside building In
100 m
200 m
TSX FP CR100
TSX FP CR200
7.680
14.920
2
mobile installations (4)
500 m TSX FP CR500 40.000
9.5 mm, 1 shielded In harsh environment (3) 100 m TSX FP CP100 7.680
twisted pair 150 and Outside building In
3
500 m TSX FP CP500 30.000
1 x 1.5 mm2 pair for mobile installations (4)
24 V c remote supply
Tap link cables 8 mm, 2 shielded In normal environment (2) 3 100 m TSX FP CC100 5.680
twisted pairs 150 Inside building 200 m TSX FP CC200 10.920
500 m TSX FP CC500 30.000
Cordsets for With 1 miniature In normal environment (2) 4 1m TSX FP CG010 0.210
4
PCMCIA TSX FPP pp cards connector and 1 x 9-way Inside building 3m TSX FP CG030 0.310
USB/FIP adaptor SUB-D connector
(1) The characteristics and performance of the Fipio bus or Fipway network are dependent on the above TSX FP accessories
being used.
(2) Normal environment:
- Without any particular environmental restrictions
- Operating temperature between + 5C and + 60C
5
- Fixed installations
(3) Harsh environment:
- Resistance to hydrocarbons, industrial oils, detergents, solder splashes
- Humidity up to 100%
- Saline atmosphere
- Extreme temperature variations
6
- Operating temperature between - 10C and + 70C
- Mobile installations
(4) Mobile installations: cables as per VDE 472 part 603/H:
- For use on cable drag chain with minimum bend radius of 75 mm
- For use on gantry crane, subject to compliance with conditions for use such as acceleration, speed, length. Consult your
Customer Care Centre
- Not authorized for use on robots or multi-axis applications
10
Fipio presentation: Fipway presentation: Connections:

page 5/100 page 5/106 pages 5/110 ...
5/113
Modbus Plus network
Presentation
1 Modicon
3 Premium
Ethernet TCP/IP
Lexium 15
1 Modicon Quantum
2
Modicon
Premium 2 Modicon STB
Modicon
Momentum
3 5
Modbus Plus
Modbus Plus
gateway
Third-party device
3 Modicon Premium TSX Micro
Modbus Plus
Gateway
Altivar 71
2
1
Modbus
Modicon Quantum
4 4
Modbus
device
The Modbus Plus network is a high-performance industrial local network suitable for
the requirements of Client/Server type extended architectures, combining high speed
(1 Mbps), simple low-cost transmission media and numerous message handling
5 services.
The main data exchange functions between all devices connected to the network
are:
b The message exchange function using the Modbus protocol.
b The global database function (periodic Shared Table service, controlled by the
application: a station with the token can transmit 32 words to up to 63 other stations
6 connected to the network).
1 The Modicon Premium (or Modicon TSX Micro) client communicates with the
Modicon Quantum server on the Modbus Plus network via the EF block
(communication function).
2 The Modicon Quantum client communicates with the Modicon Premium server on
the Modbus Plus network via MSTR function blocks.
7 3 A Modicon Premium (or Modicon TSX Micro) client connected to the Ethernet
Modbus/TCP or Fipway network can communicate in read/write with a Modbus
Plus station (the Modicon Premium PLC therefore acts as a gateway).
4 A Modicon Premium (or Modicon TSX Micro) client connected to the Modbus Plus
network can access a remote station via the Modbus Plus/Modbus gateway.
5 A Modicon Premium client connected to the Modbus Plus network exchanges
data with Modicon Momentum distributed I/O using the Peer cop function.
8 Description
Modicon TSX Micro/Premium PLCs are connected to the Modbus Plus network via
the TSX MBP 100 type III PCMCIA card. This card is installed in the reserved slot on
the processors:
1 A card slot on the processors
2 A protective cover
9 3 A removable cover with fixing screws (access to the 20-way miniature connector)
4 Two LED indicators:
- ERR indicator: card or link fault
1
- COM LED: activity on the line
4 To be ordered separately: TSX MBP CE 0pp drop cable

10 Location of the Modbus Plus PCMCIA
card on the Modicon TSX Micro PLC
processor
2 3
5/114
platform
Modbus Plus network
Wiring system
11 5 3 5 6 5
1
4
8 9
7 7 7
12
2
10
3
1 2
1
4
1 TSX MBP 100: Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, for type III slot on Modicon TSX Micro or Modicon Premium
platform processor.
2 170 PNT 110 20: communication module for Modicon Momentum I/O base unit.
3 490 NAA 271 0p: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair with shielding drain wire (flying leads at ends). In 30, 150,
300, 450 or 1500 m lengths.
4 170 MCI 020 pp: drop cable with an RJ45 connector at each end (BASE-T interface). In 0.25, 0.75, 3 or 10 m
lengths. 5
5 990 NAD 230 00: IP 20 tee-shaped tap, for tap link from the trunk cable to connect 1 device (connection of
conductors requires the 043 509 383 wiring tool). Integrates the line terminator
6 Tap, for tap link from the trunk cable to connect 1 device (connection on screw terminals). It also has an R45
connector for connecting a programming and maintenance terminal:
- 990 NAD 230 20/21: IP 20 plastic tap
- 990 NAD 230 10: IP 65 zamac tap
7 170 XTS 020 00 : IP 20 tee, provides a tap link from the Modbus Plus cable (cable with RJ45 connectors at 6
each end). It has a 9-way male SUB-D connector for connecting the device.
8 TSX MBP CE 030/060: drop cable for Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, with a 20-way miniature connector on the
PCMCIA end and flying leads on the 990 NAD 230 00/010 tap end. In 3 or 6 m lengths.
9 990 NAD 211 10/30: drop cable with a 9-way male SUB-D connector on the device end and flying leads on the
990 NAD 230 00/010 tap end. In 2, 4 or 6 m lengths.
10 TSX MBP CE 002: drop cable for Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, with a 20-way miniature connector on the
PCMCIA end and a 9-way female SUB-D connector on the network end. Can be used as an extension for the 7
990 NAD 211 10/30 cable. In 0.2 m lengths.
11 AS MBKT 185: set of 2 line terminators (impedance matching) to be placed at each end of the segment.
AS MBKT 185 terminators are placed directly at the end of the cable (with no tap or tee).
990 NAD 230 11: set of 2 line terminators (impedance matching) for 990 NAD 230 10 IP 65 tap, to be placed at
each end of the segment.
12 170 XTS 021 00: set of 2 line terminators (impedance matching) for 170 XTS 020 00 tee, to be placed at each
end of the segment. 8
Note: For wiring system:
- Modicon Quantum platform, please refer to our catalogue.
- Lexium drive for brushless motors, please refer to the Lexium motion control catalogue.
- Altivar drive for asynchronous motors, please refer to the Variable speed drives catalogue.
10
page 5/114 pages 5/116 ...
5/115
platform
Modbus Plus network
References
Description Number per Use No. Composition Reference Weight
1 PLC
Modbus Plus 1 with TSX Micro Type III slot on: 1 1 type III TSX MBP 100
kg
0.110
PCMCIA card 37 21/22 1 with - TSX 37 21/22 PLC PCMCIA card
Premium - TSX 57 1p/2p/3p/4p/5p/6p
TSX MBP 100 Premium processor
Description Connection No. Reference Weight

2 Distributed I/O on Modbus Modicon STB network interface module STB NMP 2212
kg
0.145
Plus network Momentum communication module 2 170 PNT 110 20 0.110
STB NMP 2212
3
Connection accessories (1)
Description Use No. Mounting Reference Weight
(1) kg
171 PNT 110 20
Modbus Plus IP 20 tee, requires the 043 509 383 wiring tool. Integrates the 5 990 NAD 230 00 0.230
4
taps line terminator
IP 20 tap for tap link connection 6 DIN rail 990 NAD 230 20
Connection on screw terminals, Plate 990 NAD 230 21
supports 1 RJ45 connector on front panel
IP 65 tap for tap link connection, supports 1 RJ45 connector on 6 Plate 990 NAD 230 10 0.650
front panel
IP 20 tee with 2 RJ45 connectors for Modbus Plus cable and 7 170 XTS 020 00 0.260
1 x 9-way SUB-D connector for tap link devices
5 Line
terminators
For 990 NAD 230 20/21 tap (IP 20) 11 990 NAD 230 22
For 990 NAD 230 10 tap (IP 65) 11 990 NAD 230 11
Sold in lots of 2
For 170 XTS 020 00 tee (IP 20) 12 170 XTS 021 00
Used directly at the end of the trunk cable (with no tee or tap) 11 AS MBKT 185
Mounting kit DIN rail mounting for 990 NAD 230 10 IP 65 tap 990 NAD 230 12
6 Protectors Replacement protectors for RJ45 connector for access to the 990 NAD 230 23
Sold in lots of 4 terminal port on the 990 NAD 230 10 tap
Wiring tool Mounting trunk and tap cables in 990 NAD 230 00 tap 043 509 383
7 (1) For other Modbus Plus network accessories and connecting cables, consult your Customer Care Centre.
10
Presentation: Connections:
page 5/114 page 5/115
5/116
platform
Modbus Plus network
Connection cables (1)
Description Use
From To
No. Length Reference Weight
kg
1
Modbus Plus Tap 990 NAD 230 00/10/20/21 tap 3 30 m 490 NAA 271 01
trunk cables 150 m 490 NAA 271 02
300 m 490 NAA 271 03
450 m 490 NAA 271 04
1500 m 490 NAA 271 06
Drop cables 170 XTS 020 00 IP 20 170 XTS 020 00 IP 20 tee 4 0.25 m 170 MCI 020 10
2
IP 20 tee 1m 170 MCI 020 36
10 m 170 MCI 020 80
TSX MBP 100 Drop cable with 9-way male SUB-D connector 10 0.2 m TSX MBP CE 002
PCMCIA card
(miniature
connector)
990 NAD 230 00/10 tap 8 3m
6m
TSX MBP CE 030
TSX MBP CE 060
0.340
0.530
3
Momentum 990 NAD 230 00/10 tap 9 2.4 m 990 NAD 211 10 0.530
communication 6m 990 NAD 211 30 0.530
module or
Modicon STB
network interface
TSX MBP CE 030/060
module
4
(1) For other Modbus Plus network accessories and connecting cables, consult your Customer Care Centre.
10
Presentation: Connections:
page 5/114 page 5/115
5/117
connectable devices Profibus DP V0 bus
Presentation
1 PC with Unity Pro/PL7

and SyCon software
2 X-Way
Modicon
Premium
3 Profibus DP V0
Repeater
Third-party (3 max.)
products
With Unity Pro/PL7 Modicon STB
4 and SyCon software

Lexium 15 Altivar 71/61
Profibus DP is a fieldbus which meets industrial communication requirements.

Profibus DP is a linear bus with a master/slave centralized access procedure. Only
master stations, also known as active stations, have the right to access the bus.
Slave, or passive, stations can only respond to prompts. The physical link is a single
shielded twisted pair, but fibre optic interfaces are available for creating tree, star or
ring structures. In relation to the ISO model, only layers 1 and 2 are implemented,
5 with access from the user interface being made directly onto the link layer via simple
mapping of variables.
Configuration
Version V0 of the Profibus DP bus is configured using SyCon software, to be ordered
separately.
6 This software is used to generate a file containing all the information relating to the
connected devices. This extension file is imported into the PLC application via the
Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro programming software.
Description
Modicon Premium PLCs are connected to the Profibus DP V0 bus via the TSX PBY 100
7 2
module. This module can be installed in any slot in a Premium PLC rack. It comprises:
1 Host module for the PCMCIA card
2 Profibus DP V0 PCMCIA card with its integral connecting cable, length 0.6 m
3 490 NAE 911 00 T-junction box for tap link to the main bus
Connectable devices
8 The Modicon Premium automation platform, via the TSX PBY 100 module, acts as
the master on the Profibus DP V0 bus. The following Schneider Electric devices can
be connected to this bus:
1 3 b TeSys model U starter-controllers (via Modbus gateway)
b Modicon STB and Momentum distributed I/O
b Altivar 312/61/71 variable speed drives for asynchronous motors
b Lexium 05/15 servo drives for brushless motors
9 b Altistart ATS 48 soft starters
b Etc.
And any third-party device compatible with Profibus DP standard profiles.
10
References:
page 5/119
5/118
platform 0
Profibus DP V0 bus
References
Description Profile Services Reference Weight
+ + Profibus DP V0 Master Class 1 and Class 2 V0 TSX PBY 100

kg
0.870
1
bus module for 12 Mbps master functions (see
Premium PLCs characteristics) Profibus
(1) FMS message handling
not supported
SyCon Generates a See page 5/89
+ configuration configuration file to be
software imported into the
application 2
TSX PBY 100
kg
SyCon V2.10 configuration Single (1 station) SYC SPU LFU CD29A
software licences Group (3 stations) SYC SPU LFG CD29A
Team (10 stations)
Site (> 10 stations)
SYC SPU LFT CD29A
SYC SPU LFF CD29A

3
SyCon V2.10 configuration Single (1 station) SYC SPU LRU CD29A
software update
Profibus DP bus connection components

4
kg
Distributed I/O Modicon STB network STB NDP 2112 0.140
on Profibus DP bus interface module
Momentum 170 DTN 110 00 0.070
Connectors for distributed I/O
Line terminator
Intermediate connection
490 NAD 911 03
490 NAD 911 04

5
Intermediate connection 490 NAD 911 05
and terminal port
490 NAD 911 03 Description Length Reference Weight

kg
Profibus DP connecting cables 100 m TSX PBS CA 100
400 m TSX PBS CA 400 6
Replacement parts
Description Reference Weight
Main bus tap 490 NAE 911 00

kg
7
PCMCIA card 467 NHP 811 00
(1) For maximum number of fieldbuses (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) per processor, see pages 1/10
and 1/19.
10
Presentation:
page 5/118
5/119
platform
Profibus DP V1 and Profibus PA buses
Profibus DP fieldbus
Profibus DP is one of the most widely used fieldbuses in industry.
1 Based on a master/slave protocol, only master stations, sometimes called active
stations, have the right to access the bus, with slave, or passive, stations being
limited to responding to interrogations.
Version V0 of Profibus only allows cyclic exchanges with I/O, whereas version V1
offers an acyclic message handling channel which can be used for device adjustment
or diagnostics during operation.
2 The physical link is a single shielded twisted pair, but numerous interfaces are
available for creating all sorts of topologies - tree, star or ring - including those using
optical fibre or a non-physical link.
Gateways can be used to communicate transparently with Profibus PA, one of the
most commonly used standards in process applications for connecting
3 instrumentation.
Profibus PA can be used to supply devices across the network and also to install
sensors in potentially explosive zones (ATEX).
4
PRM Com DTM
Unity V5.0
PRM master DTM
Ethernet
DP Class 1
5 PRM Profibus DP
Profibus PA
6 Profibus Remote Master (PRM) module

Presentation
The Profibus Remote Master (PRM) module is connected to the Ethernet Modbus
TCP/IP network via its integrated 2-port switch, as close as possible to the process
and the instrumentation.
The PRM module can be used to connect Modicon Quantum, Modicon Premium and
7 Modicon M340 PLCs to Profibus DP V1 via the I/O scanner function.
Irrespective of the type of PLC, only one product reference is required and setup is
identical, thus reducing training and maintenance costs.
Two versions are available, standard and tropicalized, so as to adapt to any type of
environment.
The PRM module is open to Asset Management tools.

8 A dedicated communication DTM is supplied with the product, thus allowing any
compatible FDT standard tool to remotely adjust devices on Profibus using Ethernet
(see page 6/5).
Configuration
From a single Unity tool, the user can create the Profibus configuration, the PLC
application and configure or calibrate devices.
9 The latter are integrated in the Unity catalogue via their DTMs if they exist, or their
gsd files.
The I/O scanner configuration is created implicitly in Unity Pro using the Profibus
configuration. The parameters assigned by default guarantee optimized performance,
as well as the consistency of I/O data in the PLC application, irrespective of the PLC
platform.
10 Similarly, the I/O variables defined and presymbolized in the DTMs can be used
directly in the application. Finally, the screens integrated in Unity Pro, together with
the diagnostic functions integrated in the device DTMs simplify application
maintenance.
5/120
references platform
Profibus DP V1 and Profibus PA buses
Profibus Remote Master (PRM) module (continued)

Connectable devices
The following Schneider Electric devices can be connected to this bus: 1
b TeSys U and TeSys T starter-controllers
b Momentum and Modicon STB distributed I/O
b Altivar 312/61/71 variable speed drives for asynchronous motors
b Lexium 05/15 servo drives for brushless motors
b Altistart ATS 48 soft start-soft stop units
b Any third-party device compatible with Profibus DP and PA standard profiles
Limitations
2
Once saved, the Unity project incorporates all the Profibus parameters as well as
those of the slaves connected to the bus. Modicon Quantum, Modicon Premium and
Modicon M340 PLCs are capable of embedding all this data so that an empty Unity
terminal without any applications is able, after a simple transfer from the PLC, to
locate the whole application, including the slave parameters. This function is called
ETS (Empty Terminal Service). 3
In certain cases, it may be that the memory size required to save the device parameters
exceeds the PLC memory capacity (signalled by a memory full message during the
build). This is particularly likely on devices which have DTM (the most common
instrumentation on PA). Typically, each device of this type takes up around 20 KB of
the PLC memory.
4
It is therefore essential to create a memory map according to the type of configuration
used and possibly adapt it accordingly, either by increasing the amount of memory
dedicated to the application (by reducing the zone allocated to data), or by increasing
the overall memory via cartridges available in the catalogue.
If the ETS function is not required, Unity Pro can also be configured in such a way as
to reduce the size of the embedded data by disabling comments and animation
tables, or by disabling the upload function so that the application does not include
5
data relating to DTMs. In this case, the upload from an empty terminal function is no
longer available.
References
The Profibus Remote Master module is supplied with a CD-ROM, which includes:
b PRM master DTMs and generic Profibus DTMs (for configuration in Unity Pro V5.0 6
or later)
b The PRM communication DTM for third-party (non-Schneider Electric) FDT
Profibus Remote Master modules

Description Type Reference Weight
kg
Profibus Remote Master
modules
Standard TCS EGPA23F14F 0.620 7
Ruggedized (1) TCS EGPA23F14FK 0.620
Profibus DP bus connection components

kg
Distributed I/O on
Profibus DP bus
Modicon STB
network interface module
STB NDP 2112 0.140 8
Momentum communication 170 DTN 110 00 0.070
module
Connectors for remote I/O Line terminators 490 NAD 911 03

9
TCS EGPA23F14F In-line connector 490 NAD 911 04
In-line connector 490 NAD 911 05

and terminal port
Description Length Reference Weight

kg
Profibus DP 100 m TSX PBS CA 100
connection cables
400 m TSX PBS CA 400
10
490 NAD 911 03 (1) Conformal coating and extended operating temperatures between -25 and +70C.
See ruggedized module characteristics on page 9/5.
5/121
connectable devices INTERBUS bus
Presentation
The INTERBUS bus is a serial link fieldbus for sensors and actuators which meets the
1 requirements of industrial environments.
Quantum
2
Premium
IP 65 I/O(1)
BK bus
terminal module
c 24V
3 Altivar 71/61
IP 65 I/O (1)
1 BK bus 2
terminal module
c 24V
4
Modicon STB
The topology of the INTERBUS bus is designed as a ring system with master/slave
5 central access procedure.
It is subdivided into three parts:
b The remote bus 1 (bus devices use RS 485 point-to-point connection).
b The installation remote bus 2 (remote bus tap link via a bus terminal module).
Its technology is particularly suitable for IP 65 dust and damp proof systems.
b The local bus with TTL technology is particularly suitable for buses in a control
cabinet.
6 Each bus subscriber comprises a transmitter and a receiver.
The INTERBUS system is like a data ring and has the structure of a shift register
distributed on the bus. With its registers each module constitutes a component of this
shift register ring. The INTERBUS master circulates the data in series on this ring.
Description
7 Modicon Premium PLCs are connected to the INTERBUS bus via the TSX IBY 100
INTERBUS bus module.
The front panel of the TSX IBY 100 modules comprises:
1 1 A display block with six LEDs (on the card for TSX IBX 100).
2 A 9-way female RS 232 SUB-D connector: CMD Tool (configuration software)
support.
3 A 9-way female RS 485 SUB-D connector: INTERBUS link (this connector integrates
8 2 an additional power supply for the fibre optic link).
3
Connectable devices
The TSX IBY 100 module acts as the master on the INTERBUS bus. Other Schneider
Electric devices (slaves) which can be connected on the bus are:
b Altivar 71/61 variable speed drives for asynchronous motors
9 b Modicon Telefast IP 20 I/O interfaces
b Modicon STB IP 20 distributed I/O
b Modicon Momentum IP 20 I/O
b 170 EDp 346 00 IP 65 dust and damp proof discrete I/O
b Inductel inductive identification system (XGP/XGK-S read/write stations)
b AS-Interface/INTERBUS gateway
b Any third-party device conforming to the INTERBUS standard profiles
10 (1) 170 EDp 346 00 IP 65 dust and damp proof discrete I/O on INTERBUS
For more information on these I/O, please consult our website www.schneider-electric.com.
5/122
Software configuration, Modicon Premium automation
INTERBUS bus
Software configuration
The INTERBUS bus can be configured in 3 modes:
b Auto mode: this mode does not require the use of any special configuration software
(the I/O images are copied to %IW and %QW implicitly). It facilitates the wiring test.
1
b PL7 V IBY mode: this mode is used to define and download the configuration to
the module (explicit assignment of %IW, %QW). The CMD Tool software (1) is
required to generate the configuration text file.
b CMD V IBY mode: reserved for configurations > 8 K words, and requires the use
of the CMD Tool software.
PMS message handling (which can be used on PCP devices) is managed via
2
standard OFs (Read-var, Write-var, etc.).
The catalogue file for integrating Schneider Electric devices in the CMD Tool
software is available on our website:
b Address: www.schneider-electric.com
b File to download: Schneider device catalog for CMD 3
References
INTERBUS bus communication modules
Description No. of Communic. Services Reference Weight
modules per profile kg
INTERBUS
processor
See pages Master/slave - Cyclic TSX IBY 100 0.320
4
module for 1/10 and 1/19 0.5 Mbps variable
Premium PLC Generation 4 exchanges
- PMS
messaging
- Management
of bus
operating
modes 5
Conversion software
TSX IBY 100 kg
Symbol For converting CMD symbols to PL7 symbols TLX LIBS CNVF
conversion
software 6
INTERBUS bus connection components
kg
IP 20 Modicon STB network interface STB NIB 2212 0.155
distributed I/O module
Momentum communication module 170 INT 110 00 0.070 7
Remote bus 100 m TSX IBS CA 100 7.340
cables 400 m TSX IBS CA 400 24.020
Installation Preformed cables for linking 2 0.110 m 170 MCI 007 00 0.060
STB NIB 2212 remote bus communication modules 1m 170 MCI 100 00 0.320
cables
Connecting Connecting TSX IBp module to PC 6 m 990 NAA 263 20 8
cables (with CMD Tool software) 15 m 990 NAA 263 50
Connectors 9-way SUB-D for remote bus 170 XTS 009 00 0.045
Sold in lots of 2 cables
170 INT 110 00
(1) Contact your Phnix Contact vendor.
9
10
page 5/122 page 5/122
5/123
Modbus serial link
Presentation
1 Altivar 71
Magelis XBT Gp
Modicon M340
2
Modbus
Twido Preventa Modicon

Modicon Premium XPS MC OTB
3 Modicon TSX Micro
The Modbus serial link is used for master/slave architectures (it is necessary,
however, to check that the Modbus services used by the application have been
implemented on all devices concerned).
The bus consists of a master station and slave stations. Only the master station can
initiate the exchange (direct communication between slave stations is not possible).
4 Two exchange mechanisms are possible:
b Question/response, where requests from the master are addressed to a given
slave. The master then waits for the response from the slave which has been polled.
b Broadcasting, where the master broadcasts a message to all slave stations on the
bus. The latter execute the instruction without transmitting a response.
Description
5 Modicon TSX Micro/Premium PLCs provide various ways of connecting to the
Modbus serial link.
Integrated link to the TSX Micro and to the TSX SCY p1601 Premium module
1
1 Via integrated port on the Modicon TSX Micro processor. The TER port (8-way
mini DIN) has the Modbus RTU master/slave protocol (1).
6 2 Via integrated port on the TSX SCY 11601/21601 module for Modicon Premium
PLCs. This module has an isolated Half-duplex RS 485 serial link channel (25-way
Modicon SUB-D connector) with multiprotocol, including Modbus (with the TSX SCY 11601
TSX Micro module, only the Modbus protocol is supported).
3
6
7 4
5
TSX SCP 11p multiprotocol PCMCIA cards

3 A slot on Modicon TSX Micro/Premium processors and the TSX SCY 21601
module(2) takes multiprotocol TSX SCP11p cards, including Modbus, featuring:
8 2
4 A protective cover
5 A removable cover with fixing screws (to access a 20-way miniature connector)
- ERR lamp: card or link fault
- COM lamp: data transmission or reception
3
Modicon TSX TSX To be ordered separately: TSX SCP/SCY cordset.
9 Premium SCY 21601 SCY 11601
(1) Modbus RTU slave Protocol with TSX 37 05/08.

6 (2) This slot can also take PCMCIA card TSX FPP 20 for Fipway networks.
4
5
10
References:
pages 5/125 ...
5/124
platform
Modbus serial link
References
Modbus connection components
Description Protocol Physical layer Reference Weight
kg
1
TSX Micro PLC Modbus (RTU) Non-isolated RS 485 Please consult our website
integrated link Uni-Telway www.schneider-electric.com
(TER port) character mode
Modicon TSX Micro

2
Communication Modbus - 1 RS 485 isolated integrated channel TSX SCY 21601 0.360
module Character mode (channel 0), (197 slaves)
for Premium Uni-Telway - 1 PCMCIA card slot (channel 1) (1)
Modbus 1 RS 485 isolated integrated channel TSX SCY 11601 0.340
(channel 0), 1.2...19.2 Kbps (1247
slaves)
3
PCMCIA Modbus RS 485 (RS 422 compatible) TSX SCP 114 0.105
TSX SCY 21601 TSX SCY 11601
cards for Premium Character mode 1.219.2 Kbps
processor, Uni-Telway RS 232 (9 signals) 0.619.2 Kbps TSX SCP 111 0.105
TSX 37 21/22 PLC or
TSX SCY 21601
20 mA CL 1.219.2 Kbps TSX SCP 112 0.105 4
module
TSX SCP 11p (1) PCMCIA slot designed to take a TSX SCP 111/112/114 or TSX FPP 20 Fipway card .
10
Description:
page 5/124
5/125
platform
Modbus serial link
Modbus serial link connection accessories
1 Description Use Reference Weight
kg
Passive junction box Tap link and bus extension, line terminator TSX SCA 50 0.520
TSX SCA 50
2 2-channel passive
subscriber socket
Tap link for 2 devices (2-wire)
Equipped with 2 x 15-way female SUB-D connectors
TSX SCA 62 0.570
RS 485 isolation box RS 485 line isolation and line terminator (RC 120 , 1 nF) (1) TWD XCA ISO 0.100
2 tap links on RJ45 connector
24 V c supply (screw terminal block)
Mounting on 35 mm 5 rail
3
TER terminal port Bus tap link cable (2 or 4-wire) TSX P ACC 01 0.690
TSX SCA 62 connection box Isolation of Modbus signals
Line terminator
Supplied with cable (length 1 m) equipped with a mini-DIN
connector (TER port)
4
Active adaptor box Connection of an RS 232 device as RS 485 TSX SCA 72 0.520
RS 232/RS 485 Isolation of signals and line termination
5 TWD XCA ISO

Line terminators 2/4-wire cabling TSX SCA 10 0.030
Sold in lots of 2 Can be connected to the front panel of the TSX SCA 64
subscriber socket
6 Universal Bluetooth Provides Bluetooth connectivity for products such as

interface (UBI) the Modicon M340/Premium platforms and Altivar/Lexium
TCS WAAC 13FB 0.320
servo drives, via their serial port (RS 485).

Designed for permanent installation and can be safely fitted
on the inside or outside of electrical enclosures.
TCS WAAC 13FB b Protocols supported: Modbus and Uni-Telway
7
The kit comprises:

b A Universal Bluetooth interface (UBI)
b An RJ45/mini-DIN cable (length 1 m)
b An RJ45/RJ45 cable (length 1 m)
b A fixing clamp for installation inside the electrical enclosure
b A CD with configuration software and user manual
8
(1) Line isolation recommended for distances > 10 m.
10
Description:
page 5/124
5/126
platform
Modbus serial link
Modbus serial link connecting cable
Description Use
From To
kg
1
RS 485 double Modbus serial link 100 m TSX CSA 100 5.680
shielded twisted pair 200 m TSX CSA 200 10.920
trunk cables
500 m TSX CSA 500 30.000
Cables for isolated TSX SCP 114 card TSX SCA 50 T-junction 3m TSX SCP CM 4030 0.160 2
RS 422/485 tap link box, 2 wires (1)
TSX SCA 62 subscriber 3 m TSX SCP CM 4530 0.180
socket, 2/4 wires
Modbus standard device, 3 m TSX SCP CX 4030 0.160
4 wires (1)
(point-to-point)
3
Premium TSX SCA 50 T-junction 3m TSX SCY CM 6030 0.160
TSX SCY 11601, box, 2 wires (1)
TSX SCY 21601 TSX SCA 62 subscriber 3m TSX SCY CM 6530 0.160
module integrated socket, 2 wires
channel (ch. 0)
Modbus RS 485
cordsets
Twido and TSX Micro
terminal port
TWD XCA ISO isolation
box (RJ45 connector)
0.3 m TWD XCA RJ003 0.040 4
1m TWD XCA RJ010 0.090
(Mini-DIN connector)
3m TWD XCA RJ030 0.160
RS 232 tap link TSX SCP 111 card Communication device 3m TSX SCP CC 1030 0.190
cordsets (Modem, converter, etc)
(DCE) (2) 5
Terminal device with 3m TSX SCP CD 1030 0.190
point-to-point (DTE) (2) 10 m TSX SCP CD 1100 0.620
Corset for tap link TSX SCP 112 card Modbus multidrop (1) 3m TSX SCP CX 2030 0.160
20 mA CL
6
Other connecting See page 5/134
cables
(1) End of cordset with free wires.

(2) End of cordset equipped with a male 25-pin SUB-D connector.
7
10
Description:
page 5/124
5/127
Modicon Presentation
Premium
The Uni-Telway bus is a standard means of communication between control system
1 components (PLCs, MMI terminals, supervisors, variable speed drives, numerical
controllers, weighing equipment, etc.).
It is suitable for architectures designed to manage control and monitoring devices via
a PLC, or architectures used for MMI (supervision, etc.).
Magelis XBT Gp
The Uni-Telway bus requires a master station which manages the allocation of bus
access rights to the various connected stations (known as slave stations).
2 Uni-Telway
Performance
The Uni-Telway bus cycle time depends on:
b The number of devices polled (datalink addresses)
b The data rate
ModiconTSX Micro b The turnaround time of each device
b The number, length and type of messages
3
Altivar 71/61
BCT
BCT = Bus Cycle Time, is the interval between two polls from the same device.
(ms)
400
The curves opposite give the Uni-Telway cycle time as a function of the number of
1 slaves operating at 9.6 Kbps or 19.2 Kbps, with a typical device turnaround time of
300 5 ms (without messages).
2 The following table shows the time to be added (in ms) to obtain the true BCT value
4 200
as a function of the traffic (N = Number of usable characters):
Exchanges Time (ms)

100 at 9.6 kbps at 19.2 kbps
Master to slave 24 + 1.2 N (1) 17 + 0.6 N (1)
Slave to master 19 + 1.2 N (1) 12 + 0.6 N (1)

5
1 4 8 12 16 20 24 27
1 = 9.6 Kbps Slave to slave 44 + 2.3 N (1) 29 + 1.15 N (1)
2 = 19.2 Kbps
Event Report In a distributed control system architecture the application-to-application response

time depends not only on the communication system, but also on:
Device 1 CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1
b The processing times of the message source and destination devices.
b The degree of asynchronism between the bus and processor cycle times.
6 Uni-Telway bus BCT BCT
The response time must be evaluated by the designer of each application according
to the devices which are connected.
The processing time of a device may vary from one to two cycle times depending on
Device 2 CT2 CT2 the degree of asynchronous operation.
Action
7 BCT = Uni-Telway bus cycle time

CT1 = Device 1 bus cycle time
Description
Modicon TSX Micro/Premium PLCs
CT2 = Device 2 bus cycle time
Modicon TSX Micro/Premium PLCs provide various ways of connecting to the
Uni-Telway bus:
1 By Modicon TSX Micro/Premium processor integrated port
The AUX port (2) (8-way mini-DIN) has one non-isolated RS 485 serial link
8 channel (maximum distance 10 m).

2 By TSX SCY 21601 integrated port for Modicon Premium PLC
1 This module has one Half-duplex isolated RS 485 serial link channel, which is
multiprotocol, including Uni-Telway.
3 Via a multiprotocol PCMCIA card
A slot on TSX 37 21/22/Premium processors and on the TSX SCY 21601 (3)
module accepts the following multiprotocol cards:
9 Modicon TSX Micro

- PCMCIA TSX SCP 114 card: isolated RS 485/RS 422 link. This type of card
corresponds to the Uni-Telway standard.
- PCMCIA TSX SCP 111 card: non isolated RS 232 link. This type of card can be
used for direct point-to-point links or links via Modem.
- PCMCIA TSX SCP 112 card: 20 mA current loop link. This type of card is used
for a multidrop link (2 to 16 devices) and requires a 24 V c external power supply.
1 2
(1) N = Number of usable characters corresponding to the messages to be exchanged.
10 (2) TER port for TSX 37-05/08/10 PLCS, TER or AUX port for Premium PLCs.
(3) This slot can also take the TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA card for Fipway networks.
Modicon Premium TSX SCY 21601
5/128
platform 0
Uni-Telway bus wiring system
12
4 2
TSX 17 20
1 2 2 5
11
2 2
TER AUX
Device 3 Line terminator

10 8
3 Modicon
TSX Micro
(TER terminal 3
port)
Magelis XBT Gp
9 Modicon
7 Premium TSX
+ TSX SCP 114 model 40
Altivar 71
13 4
Modicon Premium + TSX SCY 21601 6
1 TSX CSA ppp: bus cable, double shielded twisted pair. The shielding must be
connected to the earth of each device.
2 TSX SCA 50: passive T-junction box, matches the impedance when it is installed
at the end of the line.
3 TSX SCA 62: passive 2-channel Uni-Telway subscriber socket, is used for coding
5
the address of two connected devices, and matching the impedance when it is
installed at the end of the line.
4 TSX SCA 60/61: passive terminal block, used for intermediate devices that have
a 15-way female SUB D connector:
- TSX SCA 60 used for intermediate devices
- TSX SCA 61 used for end devices
5 TSX P ACC 01: connection box, used for connecting a Modicon TSX Micro/ 6
Premium PLC to the Uni-Telway bus via the PLC terminal port. The connecting
cable (length 1 m) is integrated in the connection box. It isolates the signals (for
distances > 10 m) and is used to match the end of line impedance. It is also used
to set the operation of the terminal port (Uni-Telway Master/Slave or character
mode).
6 TSX LES 64/74: junction boxes for extensions to the Uni-Telway bus, used to
connect TSX model 40 PLC processors that have an integral Uni-Telway port as 7
standard. They are used for coding the address of the connected device.
7 TSX SCP 114: PCMCIA card for connecting TSX Micro (1) / Premium PLCs to the
Uni-Telway bus.
8 TSX SCP CU4030: Uni-Telway connecting cable between the TSX SCP 114
PCMCIA card (on TSX P57 p0M processor or TSX SCY 21601 module) and the
TSX SCA 50 junction box
9 TSX SCY CU 6530: Uni-Telway connecting cable between the TSX SCY 21601 8
module integrated channel and the TSX SCA 62 subscriber socket.
10 VW3 A8 306: connecting cordset (length 3 m) between the Magelis XBT G/GT
Advanced Panel terminal and the TSX SCA 62 subscriber socket.
11 TSX PCX 1031: universal connecting cable between a PC compatible (COM port,
9-way SUB D connector) and the TER or AUX port for TSX Micro/Premium PLCs
or the TSX P ACC 01 connection box (8-way mini-DIN connector).
TSX CUSB 485 + TSX CRJDB 25: USB to RS 485 converter and Uni-Telway 9
cordset between a PC compatible (USB port) and the TSX SCA 62 subscriber
socket.
12 TSX CSC 015: connecting cordset between the TSX 17 micro-PLC (via a
TSX 17 ACC 5 adaptor or a TSX SCG 1161 module) and the TSX SCA 62
subscriber socket.
13 VW3 A8 306 2: Uni-Telway and Modbus connecting cordset for Altivar 61/71
variable speed drive (with VW3 A3 303 option card). 10
(1) With TSX 37 21/22 PLCs
5/129
platform 0
References
Components for connection to the Uni-Telway bus
1 Description Protocol Physical layer PLC Item
no.
Reference Weight
kg
Integrated link on Uni-Telway RS 485 non-isolated TSX Micro Please consult our website
processor Character mode www.schneider-electric.com
Premium See pages 1/10 and 1/19
2 Communication module Uni-Telway

Modbus/Jbus
1 isolated 2-wire RS 485
integrated channel
Premium TSX SCY 21601 0.360
TSX Micro Character mode (channel 0), 1 PCMCIA

card slot (channel 1) (1)
PCMCIA type III cards for Uni-Telway RS 232 (9 signals) 7 TSX SCP 111 0.105
Premium processor Modbus 0.319.2 Kbps
TSX 37 21/22 PLC or Character mode RS 485 (RS 422 compatible) 7 TSX SCP 114 0.105
3 TSX SCY 21601 module 1.219.2 Kbps
20 mA CL 1.219.2 Kbps 7 TSX SCP 112 0.105
Set of X-Way drivers for Includes all the X-Way drivers, for 1 CD-ROM TSX CD DRV 20M
PC compatible composition, see page 6/41
4
Premium TSX SCY 21601
5 TSX SCP 11 p
Uni-Telway bus connecting accessories

Description Use Item Reference Weight
no. kg
Terminal port connection Isolation of Uni-Telway signals for bus length > 10 m, line 5 TSX P ACC 01 0.690
box terminator, bus cable tap links. Supplied with cable (1 m
length) equipped with a mini-DIN connector (TER or AUX
6 TSX P ACC 01
ports)
Passive T-junction box Tap link and extension of bus cable, line terminator 2 TSX SCA 50 0.520
Passive subscriber socket 2-channel tap link (15-way female SUB-D connector) and 3 TSX SCA 62 0.570
2-channel extension of bus cable, address coding and line terminator
Active adaptor box Connection of an RS 232 device (which can use the TSX SCA 72 0.520
7
TSX SCA 50
RS 232/RS 485 Uni-Telway protocol), adaptation and isolation of signals,
line terminator (no address coding)
interface (UBI) Modicon M340/Premium platforms and Altivar/Lexium
TSX SCA 62 Designed for permanent installation and can be safely
8 fitted on the inside or outside of electrical enclosures.
b Protocols supported: Modbus and Uni-Telway
The kit comprises:

TSX SCA 72 b A Universal Bluetooth interface (UBI)
9
b A fixing clamp for installation inside the electrical
enclosure
TCS WAAC 13FB
(1) Type III PCMCIA slot for for one TSX SCP 111/112/114 or TSX FPP 20 card.
10
Presentation: Description: Connections:

page 5/128 page 5/128 page 5/129
5/130
platform 0
Uni-Telway bus connecting cables (1)
Description Use
From To
Length Item
no.
Reference Weight
kg
1
RS 485 double shielded Uni-Telway bus 100 m 1 TSX CSA 100 5.680
TSX PCX 1031 twisted pair cables 200 m 1 TSX CSA 200 10.920
500 m 1 TSX CSA 500 30.000
Cordsets for isolated TSX SCP 114 card TSX SCA 50 3m 8 TSX SCP CU 4030 0.160
RS 485 tap link T-junction box
TSX SCA 62 3m TSX SCP CU 4530 0.180
2
subscriber socket
TSX SCY 21601 TSX SCA 50 3m TSX SCY CU 6030 0.180
module integrated T-junction box
channel (ch. 0) TSX SCA 62 3m 9 TSX SCY CU 6530 0.200
subscriber socket
PC terminal (USB TSX SCA 62 0.4 m 11 TSX CUSB 485 0.144
TSX CUSB 1031
port) subscriber socket
2.5 m 11
(2)
TSX CRJDB 25 0.160
3
(2)
Universal terminal port/ TSX Micro/ Premium RS 232 port for 9-way 2.5 m 11 TSX PCX 1031 0.170
peripheral device cordsets or TSX P ACC 01 box SUB D type PC
(TER or AUX) compatible
USB port (USB/ 0.4 m TSX CUSB 485 0.144
RS 485 converter)
USB port (Mini-DIN/ 2.5 m
(3)
TSX CRJMD 25 0.150 4
RJ45 cordset) (3)
(1) For other connection cables, see pages 5/132.

(2) With TSX CUSB 485 converter, use the TSX CRJDB 25 cordset (equipped with 1 x 25-way SUB-D and 1 x RJ45).
(3) With TSX CUSB 485 converter, use the TSX CRJMD 25 cordset (equipped with 1 x mini-DIN and 1 x RJ45). 5
10
Presentation: Description: Connections:

page 5/128 page 5/128 page 5/129
5/131
Presentation
Modicon TSX Micro/Premium PLCs provide, via their processor or TSX SCY 21601
1 communication module, several possible ways for exchanging data in character
mode with devices equipped with an asynchronous serial link interface:
b RS 485 integrated port
b Type III PCMCIA card with RS 232, RS 485 (RS 422 compatible) or 20 mA current
loop support
Protocols supported are character mode (ASCII), Uni-Telway and Modbus. Other
protocols are also available, or can be developed on request, on an RS 485 or
2 RS 232 link, which enables Modicon TSX Micro/Premium PLCs to communicate on
third party architectures The list of modules available can be obtained from your
Customer Support Centre, or by visiting the web site
www.collaborative automation.com.
3 Description
Integrated links
1 Via integrated port on the Modicon TSX Micro/Premium processor
The AUX port (1) (8-way mini-DIN 8 connector) has an integrated, non isolated RS
2
1 485 serial link channel (maximum distance 10 m).
4 2 Via integrated port on the TSX SCY 21601 module

This module for Premium PLCs has one integrated, isolated RS 485 serial link
3 channel (25-way SUB-D connector).
3
Half duplex multiprotocol, including character mode.
Modicon Premium TSX SCP 11p multiprotocol PCMCIA cards

3 A slot on the Modicon TSX Micro/Premium processor and on the TSX SCY
5 5 21601 module takes a PCMCIA card comprising:
4 A removable cover with fixing screws for access to the 20-way miniature
1 connector.
- ERR lamp: card or link fault
3 4 - COM lamp: data transmission or reception
TSX SCY 21601
6 To be ordered separately: cordset TSX SCP Cp pppp.
Modicon TSX Micro (1) TER port for Modicon Micro TSX 37 05/08/10.
10
5/132
platform
References
Components for asynchronous serial links (character mode)
Description Protocol Physical layer Modicon
PLC
Reference Weight
kg
1
Integrated link on Uni-Telway Non-isolated RS 485 TSX Micro Please consult our website
processor Character mode www.schneider-electric.com
Premium See pages 1/10 and 1/19
Communication module Uni-Telway - 1 isolated RS 485 Premium TSX SCY 21601 0.360
Modicon TSX Micro
Modbus/Jbus
Character mode
integrated channel (channel
0), 1 PCMCIA card slot
(channel 1) (1)
2
PCMCIA cards for TSX 37 Uni-Telway RS 232 (9 signals) 0.319.2 Kbps TSX SCP 111 0.105
21/22 PLCs, Premium Character mode RS 485 (RS 422 compatible) TSX SCP 114 0.105
processor Modbus 1.219.2 Kbps
TSX SCY 21601 module
20 mA CL 1.219.2 Kbps TSX SCP 112 0.105
3
Asynchronous serial link connection accessories
Modicon TSX SCY 21601 Description Use Reference Weight
Premium kg
Terminal port connection
box
Isolation of RS 485 signals, line terminator
Supplied with cordset (length 1 m) fitted with a
TSX P ACC 01 0.690
4
mini-DIN connector (TER or AUX port).
Asynchronous serial link connection cordsets

TSX SCP 11p Description Use Length Reference Weight
Cordsets for isolated RS

From
TSX SCP 114 card
To
RS 485/RS 422 device (2) 3m TSX SCP CX 4030
kg
0.160 5
485 connection
TSX SCY 21601 RS 485/RS 422 device (3) 3m TSX SCY CU 6030 0.180
module integrated via TSX SCA 50 box
channel (ch. 0)
Universal cordsets for TSX Micro/Premium RS 232 port of a terminal 2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 0.170
6
TSX P ACC 01 terminal port/peripheral port or TSX P ACC device (DTE) (4)
device 01 box USB port 0.4 m TSX CUSB 485 0.144
(TER or AUX) (USB/RS 485 converter) (5)
(mini-DIN/RJ45 cordset) (5)
Cordsets for RS 232 TSX SCP 111 card Communication device: 3m TSX SCP CC 1030 0.190
TSX PCX 1031 connection Modem, converter,
(DCE) (3)
7
Point-to-point terminal 3m TSX SCP CD 1030 0.190
device (DTE)(3) 10 m TSX SCP CD 1100 0.620
Cordset for 20 mA CL TSX SCP 112 card Current loop device (2) 3m TSX SCP CX 2030 0.160
connection
(1) Type III PCMCIA card slot for for one TSX SCP 111/112/114 or TSX FPP 20 card.
(2) Flying leads on device side.
8
TSX CUSB 485
(3) End of cable fitted with a male 25-way SUB-D connector.
(4) End of cable fitted with a female 9-way SUB-D connector. For this application, a TSX CTC 10 adaptor must be ordered
separately (male 9-way SUB-D/male 25-way SUB-D adaptor).
(5) The TSX CUSB 485 converter requires use of a TSX CRJMD 25 mini-DIN/RJ45 cordset.
10
5/133
platform 0
Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards and

TER/AUX ports
References
Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports
1 Modicon TSX Micro/
Premium PLCs
Device to be
connected
Physical link Protocol Length Reference Weight
kg
TSX SCP 111 DTE terminal 2 RS 232 D Character mode 3m TSX SCP CD 1030 0.190
PCMCIA card 10 m TSX SCP CD 1100 0.620
2 DCE terminal RS 232 D

(Modem, etc.) 2
Character mode
Uni-Telway
3m TSX SCP CC 1030 0.190
TSX SCP 114 TSX SCA 50 RS 485 Character mode 3m TSX SCP CU 4030 0.160
PCMCIA card T-junction box 3 (2-wire, Uni-Telway
isolated)
3 RS 422/485
(2-wire,
Character mode
Modbus
3m TSX SCP CM 4030 0.160
isolated)
TSX SCA 62 RS 485 (2-wire, Uni-Telway 3m TSX SCP CU 4530 0.160
2-channel isolated)
subscriber
socket 4
4 TSX SCA 64 RS 422/485 Modbus 3m TSX SCP CM 4530 0.180

2-channel (2/4-wire)
subscriber
socket 4
5 DTE terminal 3 RS 422/485

(4-wire)
Modbus 3m TSX SCP CX 4030 0.160
TSX SCP 112 Active or 20 mA current Character mode 3m TSX SCP CX 2030 0.160
6 PCMCIA card passive
terminal 3
loop Uni-Telway
Modbus
7 TER/AUX ports TSX P ACC 01 RS 485

junction box
Uni-Telway 1m Included with TSX P ACC 01
TSX P ACC 01 RS 485 Uni-Telway 2m T FTX CB1 020 0.100

junction box 5 5m T FTX CB1 050 0.190
8
DTE terminal RS 232 Character mode 2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 (1) 0.170
(master PC, 6
printer) USB Character mode 0.4 m TSX CUSB 485 (2) 0.144
2.5 m TSX CRJMD 25 (2) 0.150
9
1 25-way male miniature connector
2 25-way male SUB-D connector
3 Flying leads
5 8-way female mini-DIN connector
6 9-way female SUB-D connector
10 (1) See separate parts (page 5/135).

(2) The TSX CUSB 485 converter requires the use of the TSX CRJMD 25 cable (equipped with 1 mini-DIN connector and
1 RJ45 connector).
5/134
platform 0
Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards and

TER/AUX ports
Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports (continued)
Modicon TSX Micro/
Premium PLCs
Device to be
connected
Physical link Protocol Length Reference Weight
kg
1
TER/AUX ports (continued) DTE terminal RS 232 RS Uni-Telway 2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 0.170
1 (slave PC) 2 485
USB Uni-Telway 0.4 m TSX CUSB 485 (1) 0.144
2.5 m TSX CRJMD 25 (1) 0.150
2
DTE terminal RS 232 Character mode 2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 (2) 0.170
(printer, slave Uni-Telway
PC without
RTS) 2
RS 232 Character mode 0.4 m TSX CUSB 485 (1) 0.144
Uni-Telway 2.5 m TSX CRJMD 25 (1) 0.150
DCE terminal RS 232 Character mode 3m TSX PCX 1130 (3) 0.140
3
(M/Sl. modem Uni-Telway
USA/Europe) 3
Magelis RS 485 Uni-Telway 2.5 m XBT Z968 0.180

XBT GTp
terminal 3
+ XBT ZG909 (4) 4
5m XBT Z9681 0.340
+ XBT ZG909 (4)
TSX SCY 21601 TSX SCA 50 RS 485 Uni-Telway 3m TSX SCY CU 6030 0.180
integrated port 4
T-junction
box
(2-wire,
5 isolated) 5
Modbus 3m TSX SCY CM 6030 0.180
TSX SCA 62 RS 485 (2-wire, Uni-Telway 3m TSX SCY CU 6530 0.200

2-channel isolated)
subscriber
6
socket 6
RS 485 RS 485 (2-wire, Character mode 3m TSX SCY CM 6030 0.180

terminal 5 isolated)
7
Separate parts
Designation Description Reference Weight
kg
SUB-D adaptors 9-way male SUB-D/25-way female SUB-D
9-way male SUB-D/25-way male SUB-D
TSX CTC 07
TSX CTC 10
0.060
0.060 8
1 8-way female mini-DIN connector
2 9-way female SUB-D connector
4
5
25-way male SUB-D connector
Flying leads
9
(1) The TSX CUSB 485 converter requires the use of the TSX CRJMD 25 cable (equipped with 1 mini-DIN connector and 1
RJ45 connector).
(2) To be ordered separately: TSX CTC 07 and TSX CTC 10 adaptors, see separate parts above.
(3) Point-to-point, supplied with 1 TSX CTC 09 9-way female/25-way male SUB-D adaptor.
(4) For connection to Magelis XBT GK/GW terminals, please refer to the Human-Machine Interfaces catalogue.
10
5/135
Contents 6 - Software
Unity Pro software

1 Unity Pro Small/Medium/Large/Extra Large software
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/4
FDT/DTM function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/5
The five IEC languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/5
Data editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/6
2 DFB user function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/7
Function block libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/8
Debugging tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/9
PLC simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/10
Documentation editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/10
Diagnostics integrated in Modicon PLC platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/11
3 Modifying the program with the PLC in RUN mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/12
Cross-references function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/12
Import/export function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/12
Application converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/13
Operating system update utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/13
4 Programmable process control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/14
Communication drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/16
Unity Developers Edition, advanced open access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/16
Upgrade kits for Concept, PL7 Pro and ProWORX software . . . . . . . page 6/17
Composition and Windows OS compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/17
Unity Pro update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/17
5 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/18
Unity EFB Toolkit software
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/23
Unity Dif application comparison software
6 Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/24
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/25
Unity Loader software
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/27
Specific libraries
7 Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/28
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/29
UAG - Unity Application Generator software
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/31
8 Process control
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/34
PL7 software
PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software
Presentation, functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/40
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/42
PL7 SDKC procedure creation software
Presentation, references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/44
10 PL7 DIF application comparison software
Presentation, references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/44
Process control
6/0
Vijeo Citect supervisory software (SCADA)
Presentation, licences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/46
Architectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/48 1
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/50
Vijeo Historian reporting software

Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/59 2
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/60
OPC data server software

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 6/65
page 6/66
3
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/67
10
6/1
Selection guide Software
Unity Pro software
Unity Pro programming software for Modicon M340 M, Premium P, Quantum Q, Safety S platforms and Modicon distributed I/O D
IEC 61131-3 Instruction List (IL) M-D M-P-D

languages Ladder (LD) M-D M-P-D
2 Structured Text (ST)

Function Block Diagram (FBD)
M-D
M-D
M-P-D
M-P-D
Sequential Function Chart (SFC)/Grafcet M-D M-P-D
LL984 Ladder Logic language

Programming Multitask programming (Master, fast and M-D M-P-D
services event-triggered)
Multitask programming (Master, fast,
3 auxiliary and event-triggered)
Functional view and function modules M-D M-P-D
Block editor and DFB instances M-D M-P-D
DDT compound data editor M-D M-P-D
Data structure instances and tables M-D M-P-D
EF libraries and EFBs M-D M-P-D
User-definable control loops P (TSX P57 2p) - D
Programmable control loops (with process M-D M-P-D
4 control FB library)
Safety function block libraries
Motion function block libraries (MFB) M-D M-P-D
Hot Standby PLC redundancy system P (TSX P57 24M) - D
System diagnostics M-D M-P-D
Application diagnostics M-D M-P-D
Diagnostics with location of error source M-D M-P-D
5 Bus and network configuration to slave

devices (Modicon distributed I/O, etc.)
M-D M-P-D
Debugging PLC simulator M-D M-P-D

and display Hypertext link animations in graphic M-D M-P-D
services languages
Step-by-step execution, breakpoint M-D M-P-D
Watchpoint M-D M-P-D
Operator screens M-D M-P-D
6 Diagnostics viewer
Other services Creation of hyperlinks
M-D
M-D
M-P-D
M-P-D
XML import/export M-D M-P-D
Application converters (Concept, PL7) M-P-D
Update utilities for PLC and Advantys M-D M-P-D
operating systems
Communication drivers for Modicon M-D M-P-D
7
platforms
Unity Pro servers - Openness
Online modification of configuration
Application imports (Modsoft, Concept,
ProWORX) written in LL984 language
UDE support Dynamic exchange with third-party tools, OFS
OFS exchanges Static exchange via XML/XVM export files M-D M-P-D
Compatible Modicon M340 processors M All models All models
8 Modicon
platforms
Premium processors P TSX P57 104M/1634M/154M
TSX P57 204M/2634M/254M
TSX H57 24M
Quantum processors Q
Safety processors S
9 Compatible Modicon distributed I/O D STB, OTB, TM7, ETB, Momentum STB, OTB, TM7, ETB, Momentum
Software name Unity Pro Small Unity Pro Medium

Unity Pro software type UNY SPU SFp CD60 UNY SPU MFp CD60
Page/website 6/18 6/19
10
6/2
Unity Pro programming software for Modicon M340 M, Premium P, Quantum Q, Safety S platforms and Modicon distributed I/O D
M-P-Q-D M-P-Q-D M-P-Q-D

M-P-Q-D M-P-Q-D M-P-Q-S-D
M-P-Q-D
M-P-Q-D
M-P-Q-D
M-P-Q-D
M-P-Q-D
M-P-Q-S-D 2
Q Q
P (TSX P57 5p) - Q (140 CPU 651/671) - D P (TSX P57 5p) - Q (140 CPU 651/671) - D
M-P-Q-D M-P-Q-D M-P-Q-S-D 3

P (TSX P57 2p/3p/4p) - D P (TSX P57 2p/3p/4p/5p) - D P (TSX P57 2p/3p/4p/5p) - D
S-D
4
M-P-Q-D M-P-D M-P-D
P (TSX H57 24/44M) - D P (TSX H57 24/44M) - Q (140 CPU 67 160) - D P (TSX H57 24/44M) - Q (140 CPU 67 160) - S - D
5

M-P-Q-D
M-P-Q-D
M-P-Q-D
M-P-Q-D
M-P-Q-S-D
M-P-Q-S-D
6
M-P-Q-D M-P-Q-S-D 7
Q Q
Q Q
M-P-Q-D M-P-Q-S-D
All models All models All models
TSX P57 104M/1634M/154M
TSX P57 204M/2634M/254M
TSX P57 4634/454M
TSX H57 24/44M
TSX P57 104M/1634M/154M
TSX P57 204M/2634M/254M
TSX P57 4634M/454M
TSX P57 5634M/554M
TSX P57 104M/1634M/154M
TSX P57 204M/2634M/254M
TSX P57 4634M/454M
TSX P57 5634M/554M
8
TSX P57 304M/3634M/354M TSX P57 304M/3634M/354M TSX P57 6634M TSX P57 304M/3634M/354M TSX P57 6634M
TSX H57 24M/44M TSX H57 24M/44M
140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 651 50/60 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 651 50/60
140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 652 60 140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 652 60
140 CPU 534 14U 140 CPU 534 14U 140 CPU 671 60 140 CPU 534 14U 140 CPU 671 60
140 CPU 672 61
140 CPU 651 60S
STB, OTB, TM7, ETB, Momentum STB, OTB, TM7, ETB, Momentum
140 CPU 671 60S
STB, OTB, TM7, ETB, Momentum
9
Unity Pro Large Unity Pro Extra Large Unity Pro XL Safety
UNY SPU LFp CD60 UNY SPU EFp CD60 UNY SPU XFp CD41
6/19 6/20 www.schneider-electric.com
10
6/3
Presentation, Software
functions Unity Pro software
Small/Medium/Large/Extra Large
Presentation
Unity Pro is the common programming, debugging and operating software for the
1 Modicon M340, Premium and Quantum PLC ranges.
Unity Pro is multitasking software offering the following features:

b All in one software
Unity Pro b Five IEC 61131-3 programming languages
b Integrated, customizable DFB library
b PLC simulator on PC for program validation prior to installation
2 b Built-in tests and diagnostics
b Wide range of online services
3 FDT/DTM function
Unity Pro facilitates integration of fieldbus architectures into engineering control
systems using FDT/DTM technology:
b FDT (Field Device Tool) is the container which supports the device DTMs.
b DTM (Device Type Manager) is the configuration tool for devices with integrated
graphic interfaces. It contains all the properties specific to each device.
4 In addition to the FDT/DTM standard, Unity Pro uses specific information from the
Master DTM created for the Profibus Remote Master (PRM) module and the
Modbus/TCP and EtherNet/IP network module BMX NOC 0401.
Use of the Master DTM allows Unity Pro to perform the following actions:
b Manage the PLC I/O scan
b Create the application variables based on the description of the process objects
5 DTM editor (Modicon STB island)
available from the connected DTM devices
b Manage synchronization with the PLC configuration
b Create a generic DTM from the description files (GSD or EDS)
The DTM configuration is stored in the PLC memory so that the application can be
downloaded in its entirety. It is also saved in the PLC project file (STU) and the
archive file (STA).
6 A third-party DTM can be installed in the DTM hardware catalogue.
The DTM hardware catalogue can be used to sort or filter the DTMs according to
various criteria such as Device, Vendor, Groups or Protocols.
DTM hardware catalogue
The DTM Browser in Unity Pro:
7 b Displays the fieldbus topologies in a tree structure

b Allows the user to configure the DTM devices:
v Add and delete DTMs
v Connect and disconnect DTMs to/from their physical devices
v Display and print the properties of a DTM
v Transfer DTM configuration data to and from the physical device
v Functions specific to the DTM, via the Device menu
DTM browser and DTM context menu
10
Selection guide:
page 6/2
6/4
Functions (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
FDT/DTM function (continued)

The fieldbus lookup function scans the physical devices in a fieldbus network and
adds the selected devices to the DTM Browser. 1
Fieldbus lookup screen

3
The five IEC languages
The five graphical or textual languages available in Unity Pro are used for
programming Modicon M340, Premium and Quantum automation platforms.
The three graphical languages are:

b Ladder (LD) language
4
b Function Block Diagram (FBD)
b Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or Grafcet
The two textual languages are:

b Structured Text (ST)
b Instruction List (IL)
5
For these five languages, you can use the standard set of instructions compliant with
IEC standard 61131-3 to create applications which can be transferred from one
platform to another. Unity Pro software also provides extensions to this standard set
FBD language editor of instructions. As they are specific to Modicon M340, Premium and Quantum PLCs,
these extensions support the development of more complex applications in order to
maximize the potential of the specific features of each of these platforms.
6
10
Selection guide:
page 6/2
6/5
Unity Pro software
Data editor
The data editor, which can be accessed from the structural view of the project,
1 provides a single tool for performing the following editing tasks:
b Declaration of data including variables and function blocks (declaration of their
type, instances and attributes)
b Use and archiving of function block data types in different libraries
b Hierarchical view of data structures
b Searching, sorting and filtering of data
b Creation of a hyperlink to access a description from any variable comment
2 The data is displayed under four tabs:
Data editor
b Variables tab for the creation and management of the following data instances:
Bits, words, double words, inputs/outputs, tables and structures
b DDT Types tab for the creation of derived data types (tables and structures)
b Function Blocks tab for the declaration of EFBs and DFBs
b DFB Types tab for the creation of DFB user function block data types
3 Each data element has several attributes, of which:
b The variable name and type are mandatory
b The comment, physical address in the memory and initial values are optional
The data editor columns can be configured (number of columns, order). All the
attributes associated with a variable can be displayed in a properties window.
4 This editor can be accessed at any time during programming by selecting variables
for data modification or creation.
Data properties
10
Selection guide:
page 6/2
6/6
Unity Pro software
DFB user function blocks

With Unity Pro software, users can create their own function blocks for specific
application requirements on Modicon M340, Premium and Quantum platforms. 1
Once created and saved in the library, these user function blocks can be reused as
easily as EFBs (Elementary Function Blocks).
The user function blocks can be used to structure an application. They are used
when a program sequence is repeated several times in the application or for freezing
a standard programming routine. They can be read-only or read/write. They can be
exported to all other Unity Pro applications.
2
Design
Using a DFB in one or more applications:
b Simplifies program design and entry
b Improves program readability and understanding
b Facilitates program debugging (all variables handled by the DFB are identified in
the data editor)
b Enables the use of private variables specific to the DFBs, which are independent
3
of the application
A DFB is set up in several stages:

b The DFB is designed by assigning a name, a set of parameters (inputs, outputs,
public and private internal variables) and a comment to it via the data editor.
b The code is created in one or more sections of the program, with the following
languages selected according to requirements: Structured Text, Instruction List,
4
Creating the code Ladder or Function Block Diagram (ST, IL, LD or FBD).
b The DFB may be stored in a library with an associated version number.
b A DFB instance is created in the data editor or when the function is called in the
program editor.
b This instance is used in the program in the same way as an EFB (the instance can
be created from within the program). 5
Use within the program 6
10
Selection guide:
page 6/2
6/7
Unity Pro software
Function block libraries

The function and function block libraries manager contains all the elements provided
1 with Unity Pro software. Functions and function blocks are organized into libraries,
which themselves consist of families. Depending on the type of PLC selected and the
processor model, users will have a subset of these libraries available to write their
applications. However, the Base Lib library contains a set of functions and function
blocks, the majority of which compatibility is independent of the platforms. In particular,
it contains the blocks compliant with IEC 61131-3.
The Base Lib library is structured into families:
2 b Timers and counters
b Process control on integers
b Table management
b Comparison
b Date and time management
b Logic processing
b Mathematical processing
3 Standard function block libraries
b Statistical processing
b Character string processing
b Type-to-type data conversion
The Base Lib library, which covers standard automation functions, is supplemented
by other, more application-specific libraries and platform-specific functions:
b Communication library, providing an easy means of integrating communication
4 programs from PLCs with those used by HMIs from the PLC application program.
Like other function blocks, these EFBs can be used in all languages to exchange
data among PLCs or to deliver data to be displayed on an HMI.
b Process control library. The CONT_CTL library can be used to set up process-
specific control loops. It offers controller, derivative and integral control functions
plus additional algorithms, such as EFBs for calculating mean values, selecting a
maximum value, detecting edges or assigning a hysteresis to process values, etc.
5 b Diagnostics library, which can be used to monitor actuators and contains EFBs
for active diagnostics, reactive diagnostics, interlocking diagnostics, permanent
process condition diagnostics, dynamic diagnostics, monitoring of signal groups, etc.
b I/O management library, providing services to handle information exchanged
with hardware modules (formatting data, scaling, etc.)
b Motion Function Blocks library, containing a set of predefined functions and
structures to manage motion controlled by drives and servo drives connected on
6 CANopen
b Motion library for motion control and fast counting
b System library, which provides EFBs for the execution of system functions,
including: Evaluation of scan time, availability of several different system clocks,
SFC section monitoring, display of system state, management of files on the
memory cartridge of the Modicon M340 processor, etc.
b Finally, a library named obsolete, containing all function blocks used by legacy
7 programming software needed to perform application conversions.
Management of user standards

Users may create libraries and families in order to store their own DFBs and DDTs.
This enhancement allows users to take advantage of programming standards
adapted to their needs, along with version management. This means that it is
possible to:
8 b Check the version of the elements used in an application program against those
stored in the library
b Perform an upgrade, if necessary
User libraries
10
Selection guide:
page 6/2
6/8
Unity Pro software
Debugging tools
Unity Pro software offers a complete set of tools for debugging Modicon M340,
Premium or Quantum applications. A tool palette provides direct access to the main
functions:
1
b Dynamic program animation
b Setting of watchpoints or breakpoints (not authorized in event-triggered tasks)
b Step-by-step program execution. A function in this mode enables section-by-section
execution. Instruction-by-instruction execution can be launched from the previous
breakpoint. Three execution commands are therefore possible when the element to
be processed is a subroutine (SR) or DFB user block instance:
v Step Into: This command is used to move to the first element of the SR or DFB.
2
Dynamic animation/adjustment v Step Over: This command is used to execute the entire SR or DFB.
v Step Out: This command is used to move to the next instruction after the SR or
DFB element.
b Independent execution of the master (MAST), fast (FAST), auxiliary (AUX) and
event-triggered (EVTi) tasks
Animation of program elements

3
Dynamic animation is managed section-by-section. A button on the toolbar is used to
activate or deactivate animation for each section.
When the PLC is in RUN, this mode can be used to view, simultaneously:
b The animation of a program section, regardless of the language used
Watchpoint
b The variables window containing the application objects created automatically
from the section viewed 4
Animation table
Tables containing the variables of the application to be monitored or modified can be
created by data entry or initialised automatically from the selected program section.
The tables can be stored in the application and retrieved from there at a later date.
5
Debugging DFB user function blocks
The parameters and public variables of these blocks are displayed and animated in
real time using animation tables, with the possibility of modifying and forcing the
required objects.
Breakpoint/step-by-step In exactly the same way as with other program elements, the watchpoint, breakpoint,
step-by-step execution and program code diagnostics functions can be used to
6
analyze the behavior of DFBs. Setting a breakpoint in a DFB user function block
instance stops the execution of the task containing this block.
Debugging in Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language

The various debugging tools are also available in SFC language. However, unlike 7
other sections (IL, ST, LD or FBD) an SFC section executed step-by-step does not
stop execution of the task but instead freezes the SFC chart. Several breakpoints
can be declared simultaneously within a single SFC section.
10
Selection guide:
page 6/2
6/9
Unity Pro software
PLC simulator
Unity Pros integrated simulator can be used to test the application program for
1 Modicon M340, Premium or Quantum PLCs from the PC terminal without having to
connect to the PLC processor. The functions provided by the debugging tools are
available for debugging the master, fast and auxiliary tasks.
Simulator control panel As the simulator does not manage the PLC I/O, animation tables can be used to
simulate the state of inputs by forcing them to 0 or 1.
The simulator can be connected to third-party applications via an OPC server with
OFS (OPC Factory Server) software.
2
3
Documentation editor
The documentation editor is based on the Documentation Browser, which shows the
file structure in tree form.
It allows all or part of the application file to be printed on any graphics printer accessible
4 under Windows and using True Type technology, in A4 or US letter print format.
The documentation editor supports the creation of user-specific files using the
following headings:
b Title page
b Contents
b General information
b Footer
5 b Configuration
b EF, EFB and DFB type function blocks
b User variables
Accessing the documentation editor b Communication
b Project structure
b Program
b Animation tables and cross-references
6 b Runtime screens
10
Selection guide:
page 6/2
6/10
Unity Pro software
Integrated diagnostics
Diagnostics integrated in Modicon M340, Premium and Quantum automation platforms

Presentation
System diagnostics Diagnostics viewers

1
Vijeo Citect
Thin client Magelis iPC Higher-level
M.E.S.
Processor for
system bits
In-rack I/O
modules
Remote I/O
modules on
2
and words Fipio or Ethernet TCP/IP
CANopen
Cell level
Application diagnostics
Vijeo Designer
3
Magelis XBT
Quantum,
Premium,
Modicon M340
Machine level
4
Unity Pro
PC
The diagnostics offer for Modicon M340, Premium and Quantum platforms is based
on the following three components: 5
b System diagnostics
b DFB and EFB diagnostic function blocks (for system and application diagnostics)
b Error message display system, called viewers, supplied as a standard component
of Magelis XBT terminals, Vijeo Citect supervisory software and Unity Pro setup
software
System diagnostics
The system diagnostics for the Modicon M340, Premium and Quantum platforms
6
support the monitoring of system bits/words, I/O modules and activity times (minimum/
maximum) of SFC steps. By simply choosing the relevant option during application
configuration, any event will generate time-stamped messages logged in the diagnostic
buffer of the PLC.
These events are displayed automatically in a diagnostics viewer (1) without requiring
any additional programming. 7
With Unity Pro integrated diagnostics, this function can be used to perform first level
diagnostics of the elements in the configuration, up to and including each I/O module
channel.
Configuration level
9
Module level
Viewer window (example with Unity Pro software) Channel level 10

(1) Diagnostics viewers are tools for displaying and acknowledging diagnostic error messages.
They are supplied as a standard component of Unity Pro and Vijeo Designer software, with
Magelis terminals and with the PLC Web server that can be accessed via a thin client Magelis
iPC.
6/11
Unity Pro software
Modifying the program with the PLC in RUN mode

With Unity Pro, changes can be made to the program when the PLC connected to
1 the programming terminal is in RUN mode. These modifications are performed with
the following operations:
b The application contained in the PLC is transferred to the PC terminal running
Unity Pro, if necessary.
b Program changes are prepared. These program modifications can be of any type
and in any language (IL, ST, LD, FBD and SFC), for example, addition or deletion of
SFC steps or actions. The code of a DFB user function block can also be modified
2 (however, modification of its interface is not permitted).
b These program changes are updated in the PLC (in RUN mode).
This function makes it possible to add or modify program code and data in different
parts of the application in one single modification session (thus resulting in a unified,
consistent modification with respect to the controlled process). This increased
flexibility comes at a cost in terms of the amount of program memory required.
3
Cross-references function
Unity Pro's cross-references function, which is available in standalone mode (offline)
and when connected to the PLC in Run (online), allows users to view all the
elements of a PLC application when searching for any type of variable. This view
indicates where the declared variable is used, as well as how it is used (for writing,
4 reading, etc.).
This function also provides access to the Search/Replace function for variable names.
The variable search can be initialized from any editor (language, data, runtime
screen, animation table, etc.).
Cross-references table
5
Import/export function
The import/export function available in Unity Pro supports the following operations
from the structural and functional project views:
b Via the import function, reuse in the current project of all or part of a project
created previously
6 b Via the export function, copying of all or part of the current project to a file for
subsequent reuse
The files generated during export are generally in XML format (1). However, in
Data export shortcut menu addition to XML, variables can be exported and imported in the following formats:
b .xvm format compatible with OFS data server software
b Source format, in an .scy file compatible with PL7 development software
7 b Text format with separator (TAB) in a .txt file for compatibility with any other system
During an import, a wizard can be used to reassign data to new instances of:
b DFB function blocks
b DDT data structures
b Simple data
In addition, when a functional module is imported, the data associated with
8 animation tables and runtime screens is also reassigned.
The XML import function also supports the transfer of a Modicon M340, Premium or
Quantum PLC configuration prepared in the SIS Pro costing and configuration tool
Data import wizard
for use in the creation of a project in Unity Pro.
This import function spares the user from having to redefine the PLC configuration
when the PLC has already been configured with the SIS Pro tool.
9 (1) XML language is an open, text-based language that provides structural and semantic
information.
10
Selection guide:
page 6/2
6/12
Unity Pro software
Application converters
Unity Pros integrated conversion tools can be used to convert PLC applications
created with Concept and PL7 programming software to Unity Pro applications. 1
Concept/Unity Pro converter (Quantum PLC)
This conversion is performed with a Concept application V2.5 or later (it can also be
performed in V2.11 or later, but only after an update to V2.5). In order to perform the
conversion, the application must be exported to an ASCII file in Concept.
The export file is converted to a Unity Pro source file automatically. This source
file is then analyzed by Unity Pro. At the end of the procedure, a conversion report is 2
generated and an output window displays any conversion errors and provides direct
access to the part of the program to be modified.
The Concept application converter converts the application to Unity Pro, but does
not guarantee that it will operate correctly in real-time. It is therefore essential to test
or debug all converted applications.
PL7/Unity Pro converter (Premium PLC and Atrium slot PLC)

3
This conversion is performed with a PL7 application V4 or later (Premium PLC or
Atrium slot PLC). In order to perform the conversion, the source file (complete
application or user function block) must be exported in PL7.
The conversion procedure is similar to that of the Concept conversion described
above.
Note: Applications created with Concept, Modsoft and ProWORX can be converted to LL984.
Please consult our Customer Care Centre.
4
Operating system update utilities
The OS-Loader software is designed for updating operating systems on Premium
and Quantum platforms. It is supplied with Unity Pro software.
It is used to upgrade Unity processors and modules as well as to upgrade PL7 or 5
Concept processors and modules to make them compatible with Unity Pro.
OS-Loader software supports:

b Premium processors
b Quantum processors
b Ethernet communication modules
b EtherNet/IP communication modules
6
The operating system updates are performed as follows:
b Uni-Telway RS 485 terminal link for Premium processors
b Modbus or Modbus Plus terminal link for Quantum processors
b Ethernet TCP/IP network for integrated Ethernet port on Premium processors and
Premium and Quantum Ethernet modules
Note: For Modicon M340, this service is provided by Unity Loader (see page 6/26).
7
Online modification of the Quantum configuration

This function, also called Change Configuration On The Fly (CCOTF), is used to modify
the Quantum configuration online (application in RUN mode):
b Addition or removal of discrete or analog I/O modules
8
b Modification of configuration parameters of discrete or analog I/O modules
(already present or newly installed)
The CCOTF function is supported by standalone processors for all three types of I/O
architecture (local, RIO, DIO) using version 5 of Unity Pro, and for Hot Standby
processors using version 4.1 of Unity Pro.
9
The CCOTF function must first be validated in the Unity Pro configuration screen. A
confirmation screen appears when the configuration has been modified online.
10
Configuration screen
6/13
Unity Pro software
Programmable process control
Process control in machines

Unity Pro contains CONT_CTL, a library of 36 function blocks used to create control
1 loops for machine control.
All requirements for closed loop control functions in machines are adequately met by
Modicon M340, Premium and Quantum platforms thanks to the wealth of functions in
the library and the flexibility with which function blocks can be linked together
through programming. This solution therefore eliminates the need for external
controllers and simplifies the overall control architecture of the machine, as well as
2 its design, roll-out and operation.
The EFs or EFBs can be used in all Unity Pro languages (LD, ST, IL and FBD). FBD
is particularly suitable for accessing control processing operations in Unity Pro
through its wizard for entering and viewing parameters and function block variables.
CONT_CTL, programmable process control integrated in
3 CONT_CTL library functions

Unity Pro
The library consists of five function families:

b Input data conditioning
b Controllers
b Mathematical functions
b Process value processing
b Output value processing
4 Input data conditioning
DTIME Pure time delay
INTEGRATOR Integrator with limiting
LAG_FILTER First order time lag
LDLG Lead/lag function with smoothing
LEAD Lead function with smoothing
5 MFLOW Mass flow calculation based on the measurement of differential
pressure or flow speed with pressure and temperature compensation
QDTIME Dead time term
SCALING Scaling
TOTALIZER Integrator (typically of flow) until a limit (typically a volume) is
reached, with automatic reset
VEL_LIM Velocity limiter, with manipulated variable limiting
6 AUTOTUNE PIDFF
Controllers
TT18_PV PV PV_O PV OUTD
TT18_SP SP SP_O SP PI_B Basic PI controller: PI algorithm with a mixed structure
TC18_OUT RCPY PARA_C TC18_PARA FF
TC18_START START TC18_OUT RCPY (series/parallel)
TC18_PREV PREV MAN_AUTO MA_O
TC_PARA PARA
1
PARA INFO
PIDFF Complete PID controller: PID algorithm with a parallel or mixed
TR_I TRI TR_I STATUT structure (series/parallel)
TR_S TRS TR_S
INFO TC2_OUT OUT OUT TC2_OUT AUTOTUNE Automatic tuner setting for the PIDFF (complete PID) controller or
7 the PI_B (simple PI) controller

STATUS
MS v Identification using Ziegler Nichols type method

TC2_OUT IN v Modelling based on first order process
FORC
MA_FORC v Building of control parameters with criterion for prioritizing
MAN_AUTO OUTD either the reaction time to disturbance (dynamic) or the stability of
PARA
TR_I
MA_O
STATUT
the process
TC18_OUT
TR_S
OUT OUT TC18_OUT
IMC Model-based controller. The model is a first order model with
delay. This corrector is useful:
8
Example: PID controller with MS manual control v When there are serious delays compared with the main time
constant of the process; this scenario cannot be satisfactorily
resolved by standard PID process control
v For regulating a non-linear process
IMC can handle any stable and aperiodic process of any order.
SAMPLETM Control of controller startup and sampling
STEP2 Simple two-position controller
STEP3 Three-position controller for temperature regulation
9 Mathematical functions
COMP_DB Comparison of two values, with dead zone and hysteresis
K_SQRT Square root, with weighting and threshold, useful for linearization
of flow measurements
MULDIV_W Weighted multiplication/division of 3 numerical values
SUM_W Weighted summing of 3 numerical values
10
Selection guide:
page 6/2
6/14
Unity Pro software
Programmable process control
Process control in machines (continued)

CONT_CTL library functions (continued)
Process value processing 1
AVGMV Moving average with fixed number of samples (50 max.)
AVGMV_K Moving average with constant correction factor, 10,000 samples
max.
DEAD_ZONE Dead zone
LOOKUP_TABLE1 Linearization of characteristic curves using first-order interpolation
SAH
HYST_XXX
Detection of a rising edge
Detection of high threshold with hysteresis (1)
2
INDLIM_XXX Detection of high and low thresholds with hysteresis (1)
Output value processing

MS Manual control of an output
Programming in Unity Pro in offline mode MS_DB Manual control of an output with dead zone
PWM1
SERVO
Control via pulse width modulation
Control for servo motors
3
SPLRG Control of two Split Range actuators
Setpoint management
RAMP Ramp generator, with separate ascending and descending ramps
RATIO Ratio controller
SP_SEL Selection of setpoint value: local (operator) or remote (processing)
4
Setting up process control function blocks
Based on the sequencing of function blocks, the FBD language integrated in Unity Pro
is a programming language particularly suitable for building control loops.
Designers can use FBD to easily associate blocks from the CONT_CTL library with
their own DFBs written in Unity Pros ST, IL or LD language, or in C language. 5
Debugging, operation
All Unity Pros standard debugging services (see page 6/9) are available. In
particular, the Modicon M340 processor simulator can be used to check correct
execution of processing offline.
6
Compatibility:
The CONT_CTL control function block library is available in all versions of Unity Pro.
It is compatible with all processors in the Modicon M340, Premium and Quantum
ranges.
7
Optional specialized libraries
The CONT_CTL control function block library can be supplemented with optional
Programming in online mode specialized libraries, to meet specific needs such as predictive control, fuzzy logic
controller, HVAC and mass flow calculation (see page 6/28).
Resources
8
The technical documentation provides many examples of how to set up programmable
process control function blocks in FBD, LD, IL and ST languages.
The techniques for adjusting process control loops are described in the document
Process control, Unity V3.0 available online at www.schneider-electric.com.
9
(1) XXX according to the type of variable: DINT, INT, UINT, UDINT, REAL.
10
Selection guide:
page 6/2
6/15
Unity Pro software
Communication drivers
The most commonly used communication drivers for Modicon M340, Premium and
1 Quantum platforms are installed at the same time as the Unity Pro software.
Unity Pro also includes the following drivers, which can be installed as required (1):
Protocol - Hardware Windows XP Windows Vista Business

Professional 32-bit edition
Windows 7
2 32-bit and 64-bit editions
Ethway - Ethernet
Fip - FPC10 ISA card
Fip - FPC20 PCMCIA card
Fip adaptor - CUSBFIP
ISAway - PCX57 ISA card
3 Modbus Serial - COM port

PCIway - Atrium TPCI57 PCI card
Uni-Telway - COM port
Uni-Telway - SCP114 PCMCIA card
USB for high end PLC
XIP - XWay on TCP/IP
4 Driver available Driver not available
Unity Developers Edition, advanced open access

Advanced open access, intended for experienced IT engineers, supports the
5 development of interfaces between Unity and expert tools, as well as specific
user-defined functions.
This type of development requires experience in the following IT areas:
b C++ or Visual Basic languages
b Client/server architectures
b XML and COM/DCOM technologies
b Database synchronization
6 As a supplement to the Unity Pro Extra Large software (2), the UDE (Unity Developers
Edition) development kit UNY UDE VFU CD21E enables the development of
customized solutions. In addition to the development kit, the Unity servers and
accompanying documentation are also provided.
Unity Developer's Edition is compatible with:

7 b Unity Pro Extra Large
b All Modicon M340 processors
b All Modicon Premium Unity processors
b All Modicon Quantum Unity processors
(1) Also available separately under reference TLX CD DRV 20M.

(2) Only the Unity Pro Extra Large version enables dynamic database management for data to
8 be exchanged with the OFS data server or a third-party tool.
10
Selection guide:
page 6/2
6/16
Unity Pro software
Upgrade kits for Concept, PL7 Pro and ProWORX software

The Concept, PL7 Pro and ProWORX upgrade kits allow users who already have
one of these programs from the installed base and who have a current subscription
to obtain Unity Pro version V4.1 software at a reduced price.
1
These upgrades are only available for licences of the same type (e.g. from Concept
XL group licence to Unity Pro Extra Large group licence).
2
Composition and Windows OS compatibility
Unity Pro multilingual software packages are compatible with Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows Vista (32-bit) and Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit) operating systems.
They include:
b Documentation in electronic format in six languages (English, French, German,
Italian, Spanish and Chinese)
b Converters for converting applications created with Concept and PL7 Pro 3
programming software
b PLC simulator
Cables for connecting the processor to the programming PC must be ordered
separately.
4
Unity Pro update
Customers are notified automatically when a new Unity Pro update becomes available.
They can then access the software updates manager directly, download the update
and install it locally on their workstation.
Note: The latest firmware versions are available for download from our website
10
Selection guide:
page 6/2
6/17
References Software
Unity Pro software
References
Unity Pro Small, Medium, Large and Extra Large software packages
1 These software packages are for programming and setting up Unity automation
platforms. The software is available in five versions:
b Unity Pro Small (see page 6/18)
Unity Pro b Unity Pro Medium (see page 6/19)
b Unity Pro Large (see page 6/19)
b Unity Pro Extra Large (see page 6/20)
2 Upgrade kits for Concept, PL7 Pro and ProWORX software

These upgrade kits allow users who already have these software programs from the
installed base and who have a current subscription to obtain Unity Pro version
V6.0 software at a reduced price. These upgrades are only available for licences of
the same type (e.g. from Concept XL group licence to Unity Pro Extra Large group
licence).
3 See page 6/20.
Composition and Windows OS compatibility

Unity Pro multilingual software packages are compatible with Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows Vista Business Edition (32-bit) and Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit) operating
systems.
4 The packages comprise:

b A Unity Pro V5.0 DVD in six languages (English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
and Chinese)
b A Unity Loader V2.2 CD
b An Ethernet/IP Configuration V1.1 CD (not included with Unity Pro Small)
b An Advantys V5.5 configuration software CD
b A DVD containing the documentation in electronic format in six languages
5 (English, French, German, Italian, Spanish and Chinese)
b A one-year services subscription
Unity Pro Small version 6.0 software

For Modicon M340: All models
6 For distributed I/O: Modicon ETB, TM7, OTB, STB, Momentum
Unity Pro Small version 6.0 software packages (1)

kg
Unity Pro Small Single (1 station) UNY SPU SFU CD 60
software packages Group (3 stations) UNY SPU SFG CD 60
7 Team (10 stations) UNY SPU SFT CD 60
Software upgrades from: Single (1 station) UNY SPU SZU CD 60
- Concept S Group (3 stations) UNY SPU SZG CD 60
- PL7 Micro
- ProWORX NxT/32 Lite Team (10 stations) UNY SPU SZT CD 60
Licence type extensions for Unity Pro Small version 6.0
8 From To Reference Weight

kg
Single (1 station) Group (3 stations) UNY SPU SZUG CD 60
Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) UNY SPU SZGT CD 60
(1) For compatibility of Unity software/automation platforms and distributed I/O, refer to the
9
selection guide on page 6/2.
10
Selection guide:
page 6/2
6/18
References (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Unity Pro Medium version 6.0 software

For Modicon Premium: TSX 57 1p...2p
For distributed I/O: Modicon ETB, TM7, OTB, STB, Momentum 1
Unity Pro Medium version 6.0 software packages (1)
Unity Pro Description Licence type Reference Weight
kg
Unity Pro Medium Single (1 station) UNY SPU MFU CD 60
software packages Group (3 stations)
Team (10 stations)
UNY SPU MFG CD 60
UNY SPU MFT CD 60

2
Software upgrades from: Single (1 station) UNY SPU MZU CD 60
- Concept S, M Group (3 stations) UNY SPU MZG CD 60
- PL7 Micro, Junior
- ProWORX NxT/32 Lite Team (10 stations) UNY SPU MZT CD 60
Licence type extensions for Unity Pro Medium version 6.0

From To Reference Weight
kg
3
Single (1 station) Group (3 stations) UNY SPU MZUG CD 60
Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) UNY SPU MZGT CD 60
Upgrade to Unity Pro Medium from Unity Pro Small
4
Type of upgrade Reference Weight
The number of stations is unchanged kg
Small to Medium Single (1 station) UNY SPU MZSU CD 60
Small to Medium Group (3 stations) UNY SPU MZSG CD 60
Small to Medium Team (10 stations) UNY SPU MZST CD 60
Unity Pro Large version 6.0 software

For Modicon M340: All models 5
For Modicon Premium: TSX 57 1p4p
For Modicon Quantum: 140 CPU 311 10/434 12U
For distributed I/O: Modicon ETB, TM7, OTB, STB, Momentum
Unity Pro Large version 6.0 software packages (1)

Unity Pro Large Single (1 station) UNY SPU LFU CD 60

kg

6
software packages Group (3 stations) UNY SPU LFG CD 60
Team (10 stations) UNY SPU LFT CD 60
Site (y 100 users) UNY SPU LFF CD 60
Software upgrades from: Single (1 station) UNY SPU LZU CD 60
- Concept S, M
- PL7 Micro, Junior, Pro
- ProWORX NxT/32 Lite
Group (3 stations)
Team (10 stations)
UNY SPU LZG CD 60
UNY SPU LZT CD 60

7
Site (y 100 users) UNY SPU LZF CD 60
Licence type extensions for Unity Pro Large version 6.0

kg
Single (1 station)
Group (3 stations)
Group (3 stations)
Team (10 stations)
UNY SPU LZUG CD 60
UNY SPU LZGT CD 60

8
Upgrade to Unity Pro Large from Unity Pro Medium
Medium to Large Single (1 station) UNY SPU LZMU CD 60
Medium to Large Group (3 stations)
Medium to Large Team (10 stations)
UNY SPU LZMG CD 60
UNY SPU LZMT CD 60

9
(1) For compatibility of Unity software/automation platforms and distributed I/O, refer to the
selection guide on page 6/2.
10
Selection guide:
page 6/2
6/19
Unity Pro software
Unity Pro Extra Large version 6.0 software

1 For Modicon Premium: TSX 57 1p...6p
For Modicon Quantum: 140 CPU 311 10/434 12U/651 50/651 60/652 60/671 60/672 61
For distributed I/O: Modicon ETB, TM7, OTB, STB, Momentum
Unity Pro Unity Pro Extra Large version 6.0 software packages (1)
kg
2 Unity Pro Extra Large

software packages
Single (1 station)
Group (3 stations)
UNY SPU EFU CD 60
UNY SPU EFG CD 60

Team (10 stations) UNY SPU EFT CD 60
Site (y 100 users) UNY SPU EFF CD 60
Software upgrades from: Single (1 station) UNY SPU EZU CD 60
- Concept S, M, XL Group (3 stations) UNY SPU EZG CD 60
- PL7 Micro, Junior, Pro
Team (10 stations) UNY SPU EZT CD 60
3 - ProWORX NxT Lite, Full
- ProWORX 32 Lite, Full Site (y 100 users) UNY SPU EZF CD 60
Licence type extensions for Unity Pro Extra Large
kg
Single (1 station) Group (3 stations) UNY SPU EZUG CD 60
Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) UNY SPU EZGT CD 60
4 Upgrade to Unity Pro Extra Large from Unity Pro Large

Large to Extra Large Single (1 station) UNY SPU EZLU CD 60
Large to Extra Large Group (3 stations) UNY SPU EZLG CD 60
5
Large to Extra Large Team (10 stations) UNY SPU EZLT CD 60
Unity Pro software

kg
6 Unity Developers Edition

UDE Unity Developers Edition Single (1 station) UNY UDE VFU CD21E
For automating repetitive tasks or generating source code
automatically from third-party applications.
Available for Unity Pro Small, Medium, Large, Extra Large and
XL Safety.
7 Documentation for Unity Pro version 6.0

kg
Hardware and software manuals (on DVD) Multilingual: English, French, UNY USE 909 CD M
- Platform setup for: Modicon M340, Premium, Quantum, German, Italian, Spanish,
Momentum Chinese
- Electromagnetic compatibility of networks and fieldbuses
- Software setup for: Unity Pro, Function block library.
8
(1) For compatibility of Unity software/automation platforms and distributed I/O, refer to the selection guide on page 6/2.
10
Selection guide:
page 6/2
6/20
Unity Pro software
Accessories for connecting to the PC programming terminal

From processor port To PC port
kg
1
PC terminal connection USB mini B port USB port 1.8 m BMX XCA USB H018 0.065
cables BMX P34 1000/20p0/20p02
(PC to PLC) 4.5 m BMX XCA USB H045 0.110
BMX XCA USB H0pp
Mini-DIN port RS 232D 2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 0.170
Premium TSX 57 1p/2p/3p/4p (9-way SUB-D
connector)
2
USB port 0.4 m TSX CUSB 485 0.144
(USB/RS 485 (1)
converter)
(mini-DIN/ (1)
RJ45
TSX PCX 1031 Modbus port

cordset)
RS 232D 3.7 m 990 NAA 263 20 0.300
3
15-way SUB-D Quantum (9-way SUB-D 15 m 990 NAA 263 50 0.180
140 CPU 311 10 connector)
140 CPU 434 12A
140 CPU 534 14A
USB port USB port 3.3 m UNY XCA USB 033
Premium TSX 57 5p/6p
Quantum 140 CPU 6p1 4
Modbus port, RJ45 connector RJ 45 1m 110 XCA 282 01
Quantum 140 CPU 6p1 connector 3m 110 XCA 282 02
6m 110 XCA 282 03
TSX CUSB485 PC terminal connection HE13 connector Modicon STB RS 232D (2) 2m STB XCA 4002 0.210
cables I/O network interface module (9-way SUB-D
(PC SUB-D to Modicon STB (NIM)
I/O)
connector) 5
USB/SUB-D adaptor HE13 connector Modicon STB USB port (3) SR2 CBL 06 0.185
(PC USB to Modicon STB I/O network interface module
I/O) (NIM) with STB XCA 4002
cable (3)
Description Use Reference Weight 6

kg
interface (UBI) Modicon M340/Premium platforms and Altivar/Lexium servo
drives, via their serial port (RS 485).
Designed for permanent installation and can be safely fitted on
the inside or outside of electrical enclosures.
7
TCS WAAC 13FB b Powered via the products RS 485 serial port
The kit comprises:

b A fixing clamp for installation inside the electrical enclosure 8
(1) The TSX CUSB 485 converter requires use of the TSX CRJMD 25 mini-DIN/RJ45 cordset.
(2) For connection on a USB port, the SR2 CBL 06 cable must also be used (3).
(3) Adaptor equipped with a USB connector (PC side) and a 9-way SUB-D connector (STB XCA 4002 cable side); requires the
STB XCA 4002 cable (9-way SUB-D/HE 13) for connection to the HE13 connector on the Modicon STB NIM.
9
10
Selection guide:
page 6/2
6/21
setup Unity Pro software
Presentation
Unity EFB Toolkit is the software for developing EFs and EFBs in C programming
1 language. As an option with Unity Pro, it can be used to extend all the standard Unity
Pro function blocks in order to increase functionality. This software comes with
Microsoft Visual Studio, which can be used to debug the function blocks developed
in the Unity Pro PLC simulator. Unity EFB Toolkit also includes a service for creating
Unity EFB Toolkit and managing families of function blocks and integrating them in Unity Pro.
Setup
2 Unity EFB Toolkit manages the whole process of developing Unity Pro function blocks:
b User-friendly graphical user interface with automatic file organization
b Powerful tools for testing and debugging
b Management of compatibilities and software versions of created functions
b Generation of files for subsequent installation of functions on other Unity Pro
stations
3 Managing function block families

The software can be used to create function block families. The function blocks
developed, also known as EFs/EFBs, are stored in families. This makes it possible to
create an organized library of functions written in C language. Once created, these
function block families are installed on the Unity Pro stations for the purpose of
extending the standard Unity Pro libraries. Integration in Unity Pro can be executed
4 from Unity EFB Toolkit or via the tool for updating Unity Pro libraries, which allows
these families to be distributed without the use of any other software.
Developing function blocks

The EFB Toolkit software allows the user to create a function block as follows:
b Declaration of the function block interface in the same way as for the DFBs in
Unity Pro
5 EFB Toolkit: Managing function block families

b Definition of all data types needed (elementary, structures, tables)
b Support of public and private variables
b Generation of all files and the block C coding frame (the user only adds
functionality to this frame)
b Granting of access to numerous internal PLC services, such as the real-time
clock, PLC variables and data, system words and math functions, including
high-precision numerical processing in double format
6 b Structure of the function block family (compilation/link for all Unity Pro automation
platforms)
b Provision of a debugging environment: The function blocks created can easily be
debugged in Microsoft Visual Studio by downloading a Unity Pro application containing
the function developed in the Unity Pro PLC simulator. All the debugging functions in
Microsoft Visual Studio, especially breakpoints, step-by-step operations, display of the
code/data and manipulation of the data, can be accessed without restriction.
7 b Support for managing Unity Pro versions, important during the function block
maintenance phase
Note: A specific GNU compiler is used to generate the code for a Modicon M340 platform. It is
supplied with the Unity EFB Toolkit.
Compatibility
EFB Toolkit: Editor
Unity EFB Toolkit is compatible with Unity Pro Small, Medium, Large and Extra Large.
8 EFs and EFBs can be developed for Premium, Modicon M340 and Quantum
platforms.
10
6/22
References Software
Unity Pro software
References
Unity Pro companion software, Unity EFB Toolkit, can be used to create Unity Pro
function blocks in C programming language. The developed function blocks can
then be integrated in standard Unity Pro function block libraries.
1
Unity EFB Toolkit and its documentation are supplied in electronic format on
CD-ROM in English.
Description Type Language Reference Weight
Unity EFB Toolkit Single licence English (software UNY SPU ZFU CD 31E
kg

2
software (1 station) and electronic
documentation)
10
6/23
setup Unity Pro software
Presentation
Unity Dif is an optional program for Unity Pro. It can handle all Unity Pro automation
1 platforms. It compares two Unity Pro applications and returns an exhaustive list of all
the differences. Unity Dif improves productivity during the main life stages of a
control system, mainly during development and debugging of applications and
Unity Dif comparison commissioning, operation and maintenance of the installation.
Software setup
2 Unity Dif can be launched in several ways:

b From Unity Pro
b From the Windows Start menu
b From a command line interface without a graphical user interface
Unity Dif identifies all the differences between two Unity Pro applications at different
levels:
b Hardware configuration
3 b Network configuration (Modbus/TCP, CANopen and RIO (Quantum only))
b All the variables and instances of function blocks
b Structure and content of the application, regardless of which language is used
b DFB and DDT code
b Project options
b
The result of the comparison can be displayed in the user interface, printed or saved
4 in .txt file format.
Comparison
The end of the comparison operation is signalled by the appearance of the
application browser with its two tabs:
5 1 Identification tab for accessing the

characteristics of the two applications being
compared. The differences are summarized.
2 Browser tab for accessing the application tree

1 2 structure.
6
Comparison after selection of elements to be analyzed
7 Displaying results
The tree structure can be accessed after comparison, via the Browser tab. It shows
any differences using four symbols, where the information associated with
application 1 appears in blue and that associated with application 2 appears in red:
This branch, appearing at this level in the tree structure, contains at
least one difference.
8 1
2
This block contains at least one difference.
This section is only present in application 1.
This section is only present in application 2.
In the example opposite, a difference is detected on the rung:
9 1 The line displayed in blue belongs to application 1 [Prj1].

2 The line displayed in red belongs to application 2 [Prj2].
Displaying results The source code extracts of both applications can be used to locate the differences
precisely.
10
6/24
References Software
Unity Pro software
References
This Unity Dif software extension is used to compare two Unity applications
generated by Unity Pro software version V2.1 or later. 1
Description Target extension Type Reference Weight
PLC target kg
Unity Dif comparison All Unity Pro Modicon Single UNY SDU ZFU CD22
software extension for Unity M340, Premium,
Pro applications
CD-ROM containing software
Quantum versions
licence
(1 station) 2
and electronic documentation Site UNY SDU ZFF CD22
(English-French) licence
(100
stations)
10
6/25
Presentation Software
Unity Pro software
Presentation
Unity Loader is companion software to Unity Pro and is used to perform maintenance
1 operations on automation applications. Its easy setup and the small size of its
executable make it an essential tool for updating Unity Pro projects without needing
to use Unity Pro. It can also be used for updating the embedded software on
Unity Loader Modicon M340 modules. It performs the following main functions:
b Transferring automation project components, such as the program and data, from
the PC to the PLC or the PLC to the PC
b Transferring files and user Web pages stored in the memory card of Modicon
2 M340 PLCs
b Transferring the firmware from the PC to Modicon M340 modules only
Software graphic interface

The interface is easy to use and has four tabs for access to different operations:
b The Project tab manages the transfer of projects (program and data) between
3 the PC and the PLC CPU. The software transfers the program (application file
format: .stu; archive file format: .sta) and data (located and unlocated) of a Unity Pro
project in both directions. The program and data files created by Unity Loader are
compatible with Unity Pro. When it is connected to the PLC, Unity Loader displays
the information associated with the data read in the PLC. This information is
displayed on the PC for the selected files. The user decides which project elements
will be transferred by a single command after validation of the desired transfers.
4 v Modicon M340 PLCs and BMX RMS pp8MFP memory card only: The files and
user Web pages can be transferred from the memory card to the PC and vice versa.
v BMX NOE 0110 with flash memory card only: Web pages stored in the flash
memory can be transferred from the module to the PC and vice versa.
Unity Loader: Project tab
b The Firmware tab can be used to update the firmware in the Modicon M340
modules. The screen displays the detailed content of the firmware versions existing
in the module and on the PC. Firmware updating works in the same way as project
5 transfers.
b The Options tabs is used to configure the working environment, especially the
location of files on the PC and the selection of one of the six languages supported
(English, French, German, Italian, Spanish and Chinese) for the user interface and
online help.
b The About tab displays information about the software.
6 Note: Regardless of which tab is selected, the connection status with the PLC is always displayed,
together with commands for connection/disconnection and changing the PLC operating mode.
Modicon M340 PLC and BMX RMS pp8MFP memory card only
The Unity Loader software can download the project files and the firmware (PLC or
7 Unity Loader: Firmware tab

module) onto a flash memory card (BMX RMS pp8MFP only) plugged into the
processor of the PLC.
This firmware download can then be used to update a remote Modicon M340 PLC.
Automation of Unity Loader commands

Projects can be downloaded/uploaded between a PLC and a supervisory station
8 equipped with Unity Loader software by means of a command file included in the
supervisory application.
10
6/26
Presentation (continued), Software
references Unity Pro software
Communication between the PC and the PLC

Unity Loader supports the following PC-PLC communications:
b Quantum Unity Pro PLCs: Modbus communication, transfer of project
components only
1
b Premium Unity Pro PLCs: Unitelway communication, transfer of project
Unity Loader components only
b Modicon M340 PLCs and modules: Communication via Ethernet and USB ports,
transfer of project components and firmware. See table below.
Reference
BMX P34 2000
Type of module
CPU with Modbus
Ethernet port USB port 2
BMX P34 2010/20103 CPU with CANopen
BMX P34 2020 CPU with integrated
BMX P34 2030/20302 Ethernet port
BMX NOE 0100/0110 Ethernet Modbus/TCP
BMX AMI/ART/AMO/AMM Analogue I/O
BMX EHC 0200/0800 Counter 3
BMX MSP 0200 Motion control
Supported Supported if CPU has integrated Ethernet port
For Ethernet networks, Unity Loader contains a network scanner which can be used
to scan a range of network addresses. Once a recognized Modicon M340 PLC has
been selected, data transfer operations can be performed. 4
References
Unity Loader is supplied with Unity Pro Small, Medium, Large and Extra Large.
It is also downloadable free of charge from our website www.schneider-electric.com,
download section.
Compatibility 5
Unity Loader is independent of Unity Pro and compatible with all Modicon M340 PLCs,
Unity Pro Quantum PLCs via Modbus and Unity Pro Premium PLCs via Unitelway. The
program files and PLC data files are compatible between Unity Pro and Unity Loader.

kg
6
Unity Loader software Single licence Software downloadable free of
(1 station) charge from our website
10
6/27
Unity Pro software
Specific libraries
Presentation
The CONT_CTL process control function block library supplied with Unity Pro
1 software can be supplemented with optional specialized libraries so as to meet
specific needs such as:
b Predictive control
Unity specific Libraries b Fuzzy logic controller
b HVAC
b Mass flow calculation
2 Fuzzy Control Library

This library is used in particular in the water treatment field, for example for controlling
chlorine levels in fresh water pools or controlling water levels in high-level reservoirs.
3 Flow Calculation Library

This library is used in the Oil & Gas field, for measuring the gas flow in compliance
with the American Gas Association (AGA) standard. This version of the library
includes the AGA3, AGA7 and AGA8 function blocks.
TeSys Library
4 This library was developed by the PCP department and provides function blocks for
TeSys T and TeSys U starter-controllers for M340 and Premium platforms.
It includes function blocks and a help function for Unity Pro.
Predictive Control Library
5 This library is used for predictive control of process applications.

Originally developed for reactors, predictive control can be used in other industrial
sectors.
Schneider Electrics Companion Unity & Libraries team works in partnership with the
French company Sherpa Engineering, who specialize in predictive control consultancy
services.
6 Heating Ventilation & Air Conditioning Library

This library is used in the HVAC field and deals with repetitive temperature control
and humidity problems using ventilation equipment.
10
6/28
References Software
Unity Pro software
Specific libraries
Specific libraries depending on the software used

Specific libraries depending on the software used (see below) can be ordered
separately. 1
Control libraries
Unity specific Libraries Description Target Type Reference Weight
software kg
Predictive Control Library Unity Pro/ Single UNY LPC ZAU CD10
Fuzzy Library
Concept
Unity Pro
licence
(1 station)
UNY LFZ ZAU WB12
2
TeSys Library UNY LTS ZAU WB10
Heating Ventilation & Air UNY LHV ZAU WB10
Conditioning Library
Flow Calculation Library UNY LAG ZAU WB20
3
System libraries
Description Target Type Reference Weight
software kg
Enhanced Process Library (1) UAG Single UAG SBT CFU CD10
licence
Devices and Process Library (1) (1 station) UAG SBT DFU WB13
4
(1) Compatible with Unity Pro V5.0 max. For Unity Pro u V6.0, please consult our Customer Care
Centre.
10
6/29
Unity software
Unity Application Generator
Advanced design tool for automation solutions (1)

Deliver your automation projects faster and re-use your know how!
1 Unity Application Generator (UAG) is an advanced design and generation software
tool that integrates multiple PLCs and HMI/SCADA systems to provide an
automation solution similar to a distributed control system. Using an approach based
upon reusable objects (application libraries) and automatic application generation,
UAG ensures consistent design and implementation of user-defined standards and
UAG specifications. Featuring change tracking and automatic documentation functions,
UAG supports standards such as ISA-88 and GAMP.
2 Business advantage
UAG provides significant business advantages in terms of cost reduction, quality and
performance improvement.
b Cost
v Savings in system implementation cost
3 Engineering project
Basic design
System Detailed Procurement &
Reduced schedule
v
v
Improved time-to-market for the end user by allowing the project
Quicker return on investment
design design Commissioning
b Quality
Basic design Detailed design Procurement & Commissioning
v Improved software quality,
Conventional Project v Improved maintainability
v Reduced risk and improved project schedules
Business advantage
b Performance
4 v
v
Standardized design and systematic improvement
Capture and re-use of your best practices
v Integrated automation system design in your plant engineering workflow
Working efficiently
UAG provides the key features for an advanced automation solution to increase
efficiency and share and re-use your know-how.
5 Structured project design - bridge from the process engineer to the control/
Unity Pro
Process design automation designer (from the PID to the automation system).
(PID, Excel, Vijeo Citect It is possible to capture and re-use the customers best practices within application
XML, CAD, )
XML specific libraries which reduces the dependency on experts, allows standardization
UAG and increases software robustness.
Single database entry avoids duplicate effort and resulting errors.
6 Working efficiently
Automatic application generation, including the automatic configuration of
networks in multi device systems increases efficiency, improves software quality
and shortens setup times while simultaneously reducing project risk. Integrated
change tracking and automatic documentation generation reduces engineering
effort and enables system validation.
Advanced automation platform

7 UAG integrates best in class products from Schneider Electric and leading partners
into an advanced automation platform based on standards, including: ISA-88, GAMP
and IEC 61131-3.
Single data point entry and management integrates the process control, monitoring
and supervision and ensures data consistency and integrated communication
between all devices.
8 Applications (1)
b Methodology: UAG allows you to capture and re-use your know-how. Through
Standards
automatic generation, the project information is propagated to all applications
consistently, easily and quickly.
b Creating user libraries: libraries are based on re-usable control devices Smart
Control Devices (SCoDs).
9 b High level objects (template types) consisting of multiple SCoDs: template
types allow you to pre-define complex objects, e.g. a PID or a sequence, which
consist of multiple SCoDs. A common graphic symbol can also be defined. This
makes instantiation more efficient as the number of individual steps can be reduced
by using the type definition.
b Structuring your project: a structured project design provides a bridge from the
process engineer to the control automation designer (from the PID to the automation
10 system) based on the ISA-88 standard. The PID drawing is mapped to the physical
model in UAG.
(1) For more technical information, please consult our website www.schneider-electric.com.
6/30
references Unity software
Unity Application Generator
Applications (continued) (1)

b Multi-station automation configuration: the entire process control, monitoring
and supervision topology of the distributed automation system is managed within
UAG.
1
b Generating the application: the automation solution is generated based on the
structured design and your standards contained within the pre-qualified UAG library,
ensuring consistent information for the PLCs and the HMI/SCADA. The use of
resources (addresses, name space, etc.) is optimized to avoid conflicts and errors.
UAG can generate complete projects, as well as incremental changes when
modifications occur.
b Validation: UAG simplifies validation when required by regulation or to comply
2
with GAMP (Good Automation Manufacturing Practice). UAG uses ISA 88 standard
terminology for batch control and supports the GAMP methodology for creating an
automation system.
b Process Application Library for Vijeo Citect: the Process Application Library
for Vijeo Citect is shipped together with the UAG CD and can be installed from there.
Multi-station automation configuration A separate order is not necessary; simply complete the registration details during
installation.
3
b Device and Process Library: the Device and Process Library is shipped
together with the UAG CD and can be installed from there. A separate order is not
necessary; simply complete the registration details during installation.
Segment/Application-specific libraries
A number of more specialized libraries have been developed to provide a more 4
complete starting point for certain projects, such as:
Graphic object Logic object
b Water & Wastewater
b Mining, Minerals, Metals
ScoD b etc.
Instantiation
Supported platforms and environment
b Supported platforms
5
v PLC software: Unity Pro u V4.1
v PLC hardware: M340, Premium and Quantum
Generation v M340 I/O, Premium I/O, Quantum I/O and Modicon I/O
v Modbus TCP and Modbus Plus
v Fieldbus support
v Advantys STB configuration and debugging software u V4.7
b HMI/SCADA 6
HMI PLC Documentation v Vijeo Citect u V6.1
v Wonderware Archestra V3.0
v OPC data server software (OFS)
Generating the application
v Other HMI/SCADA via the UAG Plug-In interface
b Export of information for other devices/applications
v XML export file
v CSV export file 7
b Environment: Compatible with Microsoft Windows 7 Professional (2),
Windows Vista Business and Windows XP Professional operating systems
References (1)
Description License type Reference Weight
UAG software suites (3) Single (1 station) UAG SEW LFU CD33
kg

8
Comprising:
b UAG (Unity Application Site (> 10 stations) UAG SEW LFF CD33
Generator) software in
UAG English, French, German,
b Documentation (electronic
format)
(1) For more technical information, please consult our website www.schneider-electric.com.
9
(2) Please contact our Customer Care Centre.
(3) The PLC/SCADA programming tools and/or communication driver must be ordered
separately.
10
6/31
Unity Pro software
Process control
The two Unity Pro process control offers

User-definable control loops
1 The user-definable control loop offer is integrated as standard in Premium
TSX 57 2p/3p/4p/5p/6p platforms with Unity Pro Medium, Large, Extra Large and XL
Safety software.
This offer is identical to that offered with PL7 Junior/Pro, except for the runtime
screens.
See pages 6/33 to 6/37.

2
Programmable control loops

The process control offer for Premium TSX 57 4p/5p/6p platforms with Unity Pro
3 Medium, Large, Extra Large and XL Safety has been enhanced with the new
programmable offer.
This offer is based around the EF and EFB library specific to process control. More
than 30 blocks are available, classified in 6 families:
b EFBs for data preparation (for example, DTIME, INTEGRATOR, SCALING, etc.)
b Controller EFBs (for example, AUTOTUNE, PIDFF, SAMPLETM, etc.)
4 b Mathematical EFs (for example, COMP_DB, MULTIV_M, SUM_W, etc.)
b Process value processing EFs/EFBs (for example, LOOKUP_TABLR1, HYST_ppp,
AVGMV, etc.)
b Output value processing EFBs (for example, PWM1, SERVO, etc.)
b Reference value processing EFBs (RAMP, RATIO, SP8SEL)
These blocks manage operating modes such as tracking, manual/automatic

5 mode and process control algorithms on cyclic values (intervals between two
consecutive sampling operations).
See pages 6/14 and 6/15.
10
Functions:
pages 6/34
6/32
Presentation (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
User-definable process control

The process control offer integrated as standard in Premium platforms can be used
to set up and debug machine control-oriented control loops in Unity Pro Medium,
Large, Extra Large and XL Safety.
1
4
2
2
1
3
3
5
User-definable process control functions
Premium TSX P57 2p4M/2634M/3p4M/3634M/454M/4634M/554M/5634M/6634M
processors make it possible, depending on the model, to manage between 10 to 30
process control channels (of 3 loops each).
These channels can be configured to execute algorithms for industrial processes:
b Cascaded loop
b Process loop
6
b Autoselective loop
b Setpoint programmer
b Controller with three simple loops
Inputs/Outputs
Premium TSX P57 2p4M/2634M/3p4M/3634M/454M/4634M/554M/5634M/6634M 7
processors manage an entire station consisting of racks connected on Bus X.
The I/O interfaces required for process control processing operations are analog or
discrete channels in:
b In-rack I/O modules
b Modicon OTB, STB or Momentum distributed I/O modules
Control loops 8
Software setup of the control loops is user-definable (Plug and Play technology)
during configuration of the Premium processor.
The user enters information in the predefined loop diagrams which also integrate
management of operating modes and the link with the I/O.
10
Functions:
pages 6/34
6/33
functions Unity Pro software
Premium TSX P57 2p4M/2634M/3p4M/3634M/454M/4634M/554M/5634M/6634M
1 processors offer the possibility of configuring 10, 15, 20 or 30 control channels for
continuous or semi-continuous processes.
The process control functions offered by these processors are particularly suitable for:
b Sequential processes requiring auxiliary process control functions such as
packaging machines, surface treatment machines, presses, etc.
b Simple processes such as metal treatment furnaces, ceramic ovens, refrigeration
units
2 b Servocontrol systems or mechanical process control where the sampling time is
critical, such as torque control, speed control, etc.
Premium processors include the following characteristics:
b Each configurable process control channel can be used to manage 1 to 3 loops
depending on the type of loop selected
b Process control processes can be inserted in the overall architecture of a site,
thanks to the integration of the PLC in different communication networks
3 b Process control-related calculations are performed in floating point arithmetic
expressed in physical units
Description and characteristics: TSX P57 pp4/pp34M processors (see pages 1/6
to 1/11).
Functions
4 User-definable control loops
Premium processors can be used to set up 10 to 30 process control channels, each
adopting one of the following 5 control profiles:
b Process-type loop: Loop with a single controller
b Controller with 3 simple loops: Controller used to increase the capacity of the
number of loops
b Autoselective loop, also called secondary loop: Consisting of 2 loops in parallel
5 with an algorithm for selecting the output

b Cascaded loop: Consists of 2 dependent loops (the master loop output is the slave
loop setpoint)
b Setpoint programmer: Consisting of a maximum of 6 composite profiles, with a
total of 48 segments
As the channels are independent, configuration of 10 channels can be used for
example to obtain:
6 b 30 simple loops
b 5 setpoint programmers, each associated with 5 control loops
b 2 setpoint programmers and 8 process loops
The various loops are characterized by:
b Their different algorithms
b 5 processing branches (process value, setpoint, Feed Forward, controller and
output processing)
7 b Calculation functions (gain, filtering, square root, etc.) defined using parameters
Types of control loop
Predefined algorithms can be defined by the user and are represented as shown
below:
Process loop Simple loop
8
Autoselective loop Cascaded loop
10
6/34
Unity Pro software
Processing branches
Parameter-setting (selection of the functions to be used) of the control loop profiles
can be used to adapt the algorithm to the process to be controlled. 1
Process value processing
Process values can be processed either in the standard way or externally.
b Standard processing: The user can access the following functions: Filtering,
setting process value limits, function generator with scaling, management of alarms
on threshold overshoot, totalizer and simulation of the measured value.
b External processing: This means there can be a process value PV at the controller 2
input which has been processed outside the control loop. This is a handy solution if
calculation of the process value requires special or customized functions.
Setpoint processing
Depending on the type of loop selected, it is possible to opt for one of the following
4 types of setpoint: Ratio setpoint, selection setpoint, simple setpoint (remote with
scaling) or setpoint programmer.
3
In the case of the controller with 3 simple loops or the secondary loop (in an
autoselective loop), only the simple setpoint and the setpoint programmer can be
used.
Feed Forward processing

Feed Forward processing can be used to compensate for a measurable disturbance
as soon as it appears. This open loop processing anticipates the effect of the
4
disturbance. It features the Leading function (lead/lag phase).
Controller and command processing

The controller can be chosen from the following 6 types: Self-tuning PID, controller in
discrete mode with 2 or 3 states, hot/cool controller (PID or self-tuning model) or Split
Range controller (PID or self-tuning model). 5
Output processing
There are 3 types of output which can be processed: Analog output, servomotor
output or PWM output. Whatever the type of output, the command calculated by the
controller crosses a gradient limiter and a limiter whose upper and lower limits are
used to define the output variation range.
6
Setpoint programmer
The setpoint programmer offers a maximum of 6 profiles consisting of a total of
48 segments. It is thus possible to create various programmer/segment configurations,
e.g. one programmer with 48 segments, 6 programmers with 8 segments or one
7
programmer with 24 segments plus one programmer with 16 segments and one
programmer with 8 segments, etc.
Each segment is configured as either a ramp or dwell step. It is characterized by:

b The setpoint to be reached
b The duration of the segment or slope of the segment (if it is a ramp) 8
A profile can be executed once, a certain number of times or looped continuously. In
addition, the concept of a guaranteed dwell step means the time is only counted
down if the measurement is definitely within the specified range.
10
Presentation:
pages 6/32
6/35
Unity Pro software
Configuring process control channels

Special screens, accessible using Unity Pro software, can be used to configure
1 control loops.
Configuring process control channels:

The Loops interface in Premium processors simplifies configuration by offering
simple selections from menus:
2 b The type of loop from 5 options

b The choice of functions used in the 5 processing branches
b The parameters linked to each of the functions
b The assignment of PLC variables to the different loop branches (memory words,
input words or output words depending on the processing branch)
b Automatic presymbolization of the variables used in loops
3 When configuring process, simple, autoselective and cascaded loops, default

parameter settings are offered. The various functions integrated in the algorithms
Configuring process control channels (square root, function generator, etc.) and the initial value of each parameter are
predefined.
Example: Configuring a process loop

Once the type of loop has been chosen, its parameters can be set by selecting or
4 deselecting the options in the processing branches. No programming is therefore
necessary, the loop diagrams are enhanced or simplified as and when the parameters
are validated.
Opposite, selecting the PID controller enables display of the various valid parameters
for this type of controller (KP, TI, TD, etc.).
In the case of the setpoint programmer, the different profiles (6 maximum) are
5 configured via a table defining each segment.
After selecting the type of segment (ramp or dwell step), its configuration consists of
defining the setpoint to be reached (with the ramp) and the duration (for the ramp or
Configuring a process loop dwell step).
As selections are made, the bottom of the screen displays the profile with the setpoint
6 limit values.
This screen can also be used to define the cycles for this profile: Execution once, a
certain number of times or looped continuously (32,767 times maximum).
7 Executing process control channels

The sampling period for the loops is predefined at 300 ms. This defines the controller
processing period in automatic mode. It is possible to modify this period in the loop
configuration screen.
All the I/O and the parameters of the various configured process control channels
8 can be accessed by the user at program level or via the various Unity Pro software
tools (especially language editors and animation tables).
9
Defining profile cycles
10
Presentation:
pages 6/32
6/36
Unity Pro software
Debugging functions
Adjusting and debugging control loops is simple and user-friendly via, for example,
the application-specific loop configuration screen which, in online mode, provides
access to the following functions:
1
b Display and animation of the loop algorithm diagram
b Display of process alarms and channel faults
b Simulation of the input interface values: For example when these are not connected
(measurement, Feed Forward)
b Addition, deletion or replacement of calculation functions in online mode
b Modification of the adjustment parameters for each of the functions
2
b Modification of the controller operating modes and manual control mode
With the controllers integrated in the control loops, it is possible to use the autotuning
function which calculates a set of adjustment parameters (Kp, Ti, Td or Ks, T1, T-delay)
on request.
Once the loop has been debugged, it is possible to save the current values resulting
3
from the tests in the initial loop parameters values. This means that on restarting the
loop, it will start off with the correct values.
Debugging a loop
The debug screen can be used to:
b Display the values of the variables linked to the loop in real time 4
b Know which parameters have been selected (and even modify them)
b Display alarms
The menus can be used for manual control of the loop, autotuning, parameter backup,
etc.
6
Debugging a loop
Debugging the setpoint programmer

The setpoint programmer channels have their own debug screen which can be used
to display: 7
b The number of the active segment and the iteration
b The execution time for the active segment
b The overall execution time
Debugging the setpoint programmer 9
10
Presentation :
pages 6/32
6/37
Selection guide Software 5
PL7 software
PL7 programming software for Modicon TSX Micro M and Premium P platforms
3
Languages Instruction List (IL) M P-M
Ladder (LD) M P-M
Structured Text (ST) M P-M
Grafcet (SFC) M P-M
Grafcet with macro-steps (SFC) P
Programming Multitask programming (Master, fast and M P-M

services event-triggered)
4 Functional view and function modules
DFB editor
P
P
Use of DFB instances P
EF libraries M P-M
Configurable control loops M P-M
User-definable control loops P (TSX P57 2p/3p/4p)
5
Warm Standby PLC redundancy system P (TSX P57 253/353/453M)
System diagnostics M P-M
Application diagnostics P-M
Debugging Step-by-step execution, breakpoint M P-M

and display Operator screens P-M
services
Diagnostics viewers P-M
6 Other services PL7-2 application converters M P-M

PL7-3 and Orphee application converters P-M
Utilities for updating PLC operating systems M P-M
Communication drivers for Windows 2000, M P-M
XP, Vista and 7 (all 32-bit)
7 Compatible
Modicon
platforms
Premium processors P TSX P57 1p
TSX P57 2p
TSX P57 3p
TSX P57 1p
TSX P57 2p
TSX P57 3p
TSX P57 4p TSX P57 4p
TSX Micro PLCs M TSX 37 05/08/10/21/22 TSX 37 05/08/10/21/22 TSX 37 05/08/10/21/22
Software name PL7 Micro PL7 Junior PL7 Pro
8
PL7 software type TLX CDp PL7M p45M TLX CDp PL7J p45M TLX CDp PL7P p45P
Pages 6/42
10
6/38
5
EF development software in C language Comparison of PL7 applications
3
Enhancement of EF libraries: Automatic comparison of 2 TSX Micro or Premium applications with
v Creation of families identification of all differences.
v Development of functions in C language
v Access to mathematical calculation functions in floating point format Requires PL7 Pro software
v Debugging functions (step- by- step, breakpoint)
v Use of functions created in all languages
Supplied with Microsoft Visual C++
Compatible with:
v PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro
v All TSX Micro/Premium processors
Compatible with:
v PL7 Pro
v All TSX Micro/Premium processors
7
SDKC PL7 DIF
8
TLX SDKC PL7 41M TLX CD PL7 DIF 42
6/44
10
6/39
Presentation, Software 5
functions PL7 software

PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro
Presentation
PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software is designed for Windows 2000, XP, Vista and 7 (all
1 32-bit) operating systems (1) and, therefore, benefits from all the facilities associated
with these operating systems.
The main functions of PL7 software are:

b User-friendliness and productive using contextual menus, context-sensitive help,
info balloons, etc.
b Multi-instance, enabling several applications to be worked on simultaneously
2 b Management of access rights, for limiting and controlling the use of the various
PL7 software functions
b Application server. The PL7 Pro software can be launched in OLE Automation
Terminal PC Terminal PC server mode from a third-party client application. In this case, certain functions of the
Client Server
PL7 software can be executed following commands sent by an OLE client application
The main functions compared to the previous version V4.4 are:

3
Automation
Automation
Client PL7 b Development of the equipment catalogue

Applications b Enhancement of the application data export files (FEF), for better compatibility
OLE
OLE
with the Unity Pro software suite integration
Fipway
4
TSX Micro
Premium
Operation in application server mode
5 Functions
Four IEC languages
The four graphical or textual languages available in PL7 are used for programming
Modicon Premium and TSX Micro automation platforms.
The two graphical languages are:

b Ladder (LD)
6 b Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or Grafcet
The two textual languages are:

b Structured Text (ST)
b Instruction List (IL)
For these 4 languages, you can use the standard set of instructions compliant with
7 IEC standard 61131-3 to create applications, which can be transferred from one
platform to another. PL7 software also provides extensions to this standard set of
instructions. As they are specific to Modicon Premium and TSX Micro PLCs, these
extensions support the development of more complex applications in order to
Grafcet SFC language graphic editor maximize the potential of the specific features of each of these platforms.
User DFB function blocks (only with Premium)

8 The user can create their own function blocks for specific application requirements,
with Premium PLCs, using PL7 Pro software. Once the function blocks have been
created in a library, they can be used with PL7 Junior/Pro software.
These user function blocks can be used to structure an application. They are used
when a program sequence is repeated several times in the application or for freezing
a standard programming routine. They can be exported to all other PL7 applications.
9 Using a DFB function block in one or more applications:

b Simplifies program design and entry
b Increases program legibility
b Facilitates program debugging (all variables handled by the DFB function block
are identified on its interface)
b Enables the use of internal variables specific to the DFBs, which are independent
of the application
10 DFB type editor (1) Compatibility with Windows 95, 98, Millenium and NT4.0 is no longer assured. For
information, Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0 cannot manage USB ports.
6/40
Functions (continued) Software 5
PL7 software
Debugging tools
PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software offers a complete set of tools for debugging
applications. A tool palette provides direct access to the main functions:
1
b Setting breakpoints
b Step-by-step program execution
b Independent execution of the master (MAST), fast (FAST) and event-triggered
(EVTi) tasks
Other functions available are:
b Animation of program elements when the PLC is in RUN
b Creation of animation tables containing the parameters or variables to be
2
monitored or modified
b Debugging of DFB function blocks via the animation tables
b Debugging of Grafcets in online mode
b Debugging of application-specific functions
Animation table b Access to general diagnostics of the modules or of each channel (1)
Diagnostics integrated in Modicon Premium platforms

3
The diagnostics offer for the Premium platform is based on three components:
b System diagnostics
b Diagnostic function blocks (DFBs), for system and application diagnostics
b Error message display system, called viewers, supplied as a standard component
of Advanced Panel Magelis XBT Gp, Magelis iPC Panel PC/BOX PC with Vijeo
Designer/Monitor Pro software and PL7 Pro programming software. 4
Cross-referencing of variables
For every variable, this function can be used to:
b Search for program modules where this variable is used
b Obtain the list of statements, rungs or expressions
b Display and check activation conditions
5
Application converters
PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software includes application converters which enable the
reusing of all or part of previous applications written in:
b PL7 2, applications for TSX 17, TSX 27 or TSX 47 10/20/25 PLCs
b PL7 3 (2), applications for TSX/PMX 47TSX/PMX 107 PLCs
b ORPHEE (2), applications for April Series 1000 PLCs 6
Cross-referencing of variables
X-Way communication drivers
Uni-Telway COM port and USB port (PC side) communication drivers are available
on the PL7 software CD-ROM.
Depending on the users needs, other drivers may be necessary. In this case, please
consult our website www.schneider-electric.com and download the drivers available.
7
(1) Using u PL7 software V4.0 extends the system diagnostics of the Premium platform. The
system bits and words can be monitored as well as automatic displaying of associated
time-stamped messages, without any additional programming. This monitoring is of the
system elements (processor, memory, tasks, etc.), In rack I/O and remote I/O on Fipio bus.
(2) Function or feature requiring PL7 Junior/Pro software.
8
10
References:
pages 6/42 ...
6/41
References Software 5
PL7 software
References
PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro are multi-language (English, French, German, Italian and Spanish) software packages
1 designed for PC compatibles (1) with Windows 2000, XP, Vista or 7 (all 32-bit) operating system.
b For a station, the package comprises:
v 1 CD-ROM containing the multilingual PL7 software, PL7 demonstration applications and the Uni-Telway
terminal link driver
v 2 CD-ROMs containing multilingual technical documentation
v 1 CD-ROM containing Service Pack 5
b For 3-station packages, the quantities above are tripled.
2 Note: The operating systems of Modicon TSX Micro/Premium platforms are available on our website www.schneider-electric.com.
Cables for connection to the PC are to be ordered separately and depend on the desired number of users and
the type of link (RS 232 or USB port). See separate parts (page 6/43).
3 PL7 Micro software packages

PL7 Micro software enables programming in Instruction List, Ladder Diagram, Structured Text and Grafcet
languages.
It also enables the setting up of application-specific functions, maintenance and diagnostics of the developed
applications. It includes the PL7 2 application converter.
Description For PLCs Licence type Reference Weight
kg
4 PL7 Micro
software packages
TSX Micro Single (1 station) TLX CD PL7M P45
Group (3 stations) TLX CD3 PL7M P45
PL7 Micro and SyCon V2.10 TSX Micro Single (1 station) TLX CD PL7M PC45
software packages
Software update for earlier TSX Micro Single (1 station) TLX RCD PL7M P45M
version PL7 Micro software Group (3 stations) TLX RCD3 PL7M P45M
5 Software update for earlier TSX Micro

version PL7 Micro software
Single (1 station) TLX RCD PL7M PC45M
Supplied with SyCon V2.10
PL7 Junior software packages

PL7 Junior software enables programming in Instruction List, Ladder Diagram, Structured Text and Grafcet
languages.
6 It also enables the setting up of application-specific functions, maintenance and diagnostics of the developed
applications. It includes PL7 2, PL7 3 and ORPHEE application converters.
kg
PL7 Junior software TSX Micro, Premium Single (1 station) TLX CD PL7J P45
packages Group (3 stations) TLX CD3 PL7J P45
Software update for earlier TSX Micro, Premium Single (1 station) TLX RCD PL7J P45M
7 version PL7 Junior
software
Group (3 stations) TLX RCD3 PL7J P45M
Software upgrade TSX Micro, Premium Single (1 station) TLX UCD PL7J P45M
packages from earlier
version PL7 Micro
PL7 Pro software packages

8 PL7 Pro software has identical functions to that of PL7 Junior software. In addition, it allows the user to create
their own DFB function blocks and graphic runtime screens.
kg
PL7 Pro software TSX Micro, Premium Single (1 station) TLX CD PL7P P45
packages Group (3 stations) TLX CD3 PL7P P45
9 Software update for earlier TSX Micro, Premium

version PL7 Pro software
Single (1 station)
Group (3 stations)
TLX RCD PL7P P45M
TLX RCD3 PL7P P45M

Software upgrade TSX Micro, Premium Single (1 station) TLX UCD PL7P P45M
packages from earlier
version PL7 Junior
(1) The configuration of the PC must correspond to the reference and version of the Windows operating system installed.
10 Note: The PC must have a CD-ROM drive.
Presentation:
page 6/40
6/42
References (continued) Software 5
PL7 software
PL7 Micro/Pro software licences
kg
1
PL7 Micro Open Team TSX Micro Team (10 stations) TLX OT PL7M P45M
software licence (1)
PL7 Pro Open Team TSX Micro, Premium Team (10 stations) TLX OT PL7P P45M
PL7 Pro Open Site TSX Micro, Premium Site (>10 stations) TLX OS PL7P P45M
2
Separate parts
Description Description Reference Weight
kg
X-Way drivers package CD-ROM including X-Way drivers (see page 6/41) TLX CD DRV20M
for compatible PC Includes multilingual user documentation 3
TSX PCX 1031
Processor port To PC port kg
Compatible PC Mini-DIN port RS 232D 2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 0.170
connection cables TSX Micro/Premium (SUB-D 15-way
connector)
USB port (USB/ 0.4 m
RS 485
TSX CUSB 485 0.144 4
(2)
converter)
(mini-DIN/RJ45 (2)
TSX CUSB 485 cable)
Universal Bluetooth Provides Bluetooth connectivity for products such as TCS WAAC 13FB
kg
0.320
5
Interface (UBI) the Modicon M340/Premium platforms and Altivar/Lexium
Used for setting up and maintenance of products.
Designed for permanent installation and can be safely fitted
on the inside or outside of electrical enclosures.
b Max. range in direct line of sight: 20 m 6
The kit comprises:
TCS WAAC 13FB b An RJ45/RJ45 cable (length 1 m)
b A fixing clamp for installation inside the electrical enclosure
7
(1) Team user workstations located on the same site.
(2) The TSX CUSB 485 converter requires the use of the TSX CRJMD 25 cordset (equipped with 2 connectors, 1 x mini-DIN
and 1 x RJ45).
10
Presentation:
page 6/40
6/43
references PL7 software
SDKC procedure creation software
PL7 DIF application comparison software
PL7 SDKC procedure creation software

Presentation
1 C language function development software, also called SDKC, is a PL7 Micro/Junior/
Pro software option. It enables new functions to be developed (internal code written
in C language) and extends and completes the standard set of functions offered by
PL7 software.
SDKC software also integrates a creation and management service for families of
functions, so they can be integrated in the PL7 library.
2 Finally, it can be used to generate the function which ensures the protection of PL7
applications by reading a signature in the PCMCIA card inserted in the PLC.
This software extension can be used to extend the standard functions offered by PL7
Micro/Junior/Pro software u version V4.
Optional PL7 SDKC software The Microsoft Visual C++ software pack registration card is included with this
3 software.
References
Description Target PLC Reference Weight
extension kg
PL7 SDKC PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro TLX L SDKC PL7 41M 0.230
software TSX Micro/Premium
extension
4
PL7 DIF application comparison software

Presentation
5 PL7 DIF application comparison software for TSX Micro/Premium platforms is an
optional program which complements the PL7 Pro programming software.
It is used to compare two PL7 applications generated by PL7 Pro version u V4 and
1
automatically provide an exhaustive list of all the differences between them.
2
The PL7 DIF software increases productivity in the main life phases of a control
system based on TSX Micro/Premium platforms:
6 b Application development and debugging
b Starting up installations and processes
Optional PL7 DIF software
Detection of difference example: b Operation and maintenance of installations and processes
1: Line [7] of application 1 displayed in blue
2: Line [7] of application 2 displayed in red PL7 DIF software is an efficient tool for handling PL7 applications for:
b Automation design offices
b Operation and maintenance managers
7 b Installers and systems integrators
This software extension can be used to compare two PL7 applications generated by
PL7 Pro and designed for Modicon TSX Micro/Premium platforms.
It comprises a CD-ROM with the PL7 DIF software and its documentation (English
and French). A software subscription is available for this extension (please consult
our Customer Care Centre).
8 Reference
Description Target PLC Licence type Reference Weight
extension kg
PL7 DIF PL7 Pro 1 station TLX L CD PL7 DIF 42
software TSX Micro/Premium
extension
10
6/44
PL7 software
Process control
Process control
Presentation
The process control offer integrated as standard in Premium platforms can be used 1
to set up and debug machine control-oriented control loops in PL7 Junior/Pro.
User-definable process control functions

TSX P57 2p3M/2p23M/3p3AM/3623AM/453AM/4823AM processors make it
possible, depending on the model, to manage between 10 and 20 process control
channels (of 3 loops each).
These channels can be configured to execute algorithms for industrial processes:
2
b Cascaded, process, autoselective loops
b Setpoint programmer
Configuring process control channels b Controller with three simple loops
I/O
TSX P57 2p3M/2p23M/3p3AM/3623AM/453AM/4823AM processors manage an 3
entire PLC station comprising racks connected via Bus X.
The I/O interfaces required for process control processing operations are analog or
discrete channels in:
b In-rack I/O modules
b TBX, Modicon STB or Momentum distributed I/O modules
Control loops 4
Software setup of the control loops is user-definable (Plug and Play technology)
during configuration of the Premium processor.
The user enters information in the predefined loop diagrams which also integrate
management of operating modes and the link with the I/O.
Operator dialogue and control

Magelis operator dialogue terminals have preconfigured screens dedicated to
5
process control which simplify loop operation and control.
These screens show the controller front panels as well as trending views and
monitoring views.
10
6/45
Supervisory control and data acquisition
software (SCADA)
Vijeo Citect
Presentation
1
Vijeo Citect
3
Vijeo CitectTM is the operating and monitoring component of Schneider Electrics
PlantStruxureTM.
With its powerful display capabilities and its operational features, it delivers
4 actionable insight faster, enabling operators to respond quickly to process

disturbances, thereby increasing their efficiency. With its easy-to-use configuration
tools and powerful features you can quickly develop and implement solutions for any
size application.
Vijeo Citect offers the functions of a modern supervisor. Its distributed client-server
architecture is applicable to a multitude of applications in the following markets:
b Oil & Gas
5 b Mining, Minerals, Metals
b Water & Wastewater
b Power
b Food and beverage
Its flexibility also makes it suitable for numerous other application areas, such as
infrastructures.
6 Redundancy
Vijeo Citect offers total redundancy for all the components of the system. The
redundancy functions are fully integrated in the system, providing exceptional
performance and intuitive configuration.
Server licence
7 Vijeo Citect is available:
b In a Client-Server architecture, for configurations ranging from 75 points to an
unlimited number of points
b In a stand-alone version called Vijeo Citect Lite, for configurations of 100 to
1200 points (see page 6/50).
Vijeo Citect includes the installation (without registration) of the OFS software,
8 Schneider Electric's integrated OPC server. This server can only be used with
Vijeo Citect software.
The OFS software provides access to the structured variables and assists to provide
system consistency. This is one of the major benefits of Schneider Electric
integration.
Server licences VJC NS 1011 pp are purchased according to the number of points to
9 be processed, not according to the number of I/O (1).

A point expansion offer is also available to increase the number of:
b Client points: VJC NS 1020 pp-pp
b Server points: VJC NS 1011 pp-pp
as required (2).
10 (1) Vijeo Citect counts all the variables exchanged with external devices, such as PLCs.
(2) If the server or client is upgraded, the keys must be reprogrammed.
pages 6/48 ... pages 6/50 ...
6/46
Presentation (continued) Software
software (SCADA)
Vijeo Citect
Client licences
Four types of Client licence are available:
b Control Client, VJC NS 1020 pp: used by operators accessing the Vijeo Citect 1
server via a local connection
b View Only Client, VJC NS 1030 pp: for users needing to view the Vijeo Citect
application via a local connection, but not needing to control the system
b Web Control Client, VJC NS 1022 pp: similar to the Control Client, but via a
Web browser
b Web View Only Client, VJC NS 1032 pp: similar to the View Only Client, but via
a Web browser. 2
Static, floating and redundant client licences
A Client licence can be static, floating or redundant depending on requirements:
b Static Client licence: For operators needing access to the system at all times,
irrespective of the number of connections already established by other clients. 3
A static Client licence provides permanent access to the system, as it physically
resides in the key plugged into the client PC.
b Floating Client licence: Users who occasionally need to use a Client for operator
tasks can purchase Floating licences. Connections will be allowed until the number
of valid licences is reached. Floating Client licences are stored on the key plugged
into the server.
b Redundant Client licence: Redundant Client licences VJC NS 10pp 88 are 4
intended solely for the standby server in a redundant configuration. They are used to
ensure that the Client licences purchased are available.
Development workshop
The development workshop VJC 1099 pp comprises hardware components such as
the DVD, hardware keys, installation guide and storage boxes.
5
The rules for use are as follows:
b Each server requires a hardware USB key in order to operate
b The server key is also used to store the floating client licences
b The key controls the number of points that can be used
b The key is programmed to operate up to a predetermined version
6
10
pages 6/48 ... pages 6/50 ...
6/47
Architectures Software
software (SCADA)
Vijeo Citect
Architectures
Single station stand-alone SCADA system, 5000 points
1 Development workshop
b 1 x VJC 1099 22, hardware delivery of the DVD with USB key
Server licence
b 1 x VJC NS 1011 14, Server licence for 5000 points, including Control Client
licence
Single-station architecture
Client licence
2 b Not required (included in the server licence)
Remote Server system with remote access via the Web

3 Server licence
b 1 x VJCNS 1011 15, Server licence for 15000 points, including Control Client
licence
Client licence
b 1 x VJCNS 1032 99, Web View Only Client licence
4 Single-server architecture with Web View Only Client access
Networked Server system with remote Web Clients
5 E.g. Networked Server system, 500 points, with 2 remote Clients via the Web,
one Web Control Client and one Web View Only Client
Server licence
b 1 x VJC NS 1011 12, Server licence for 500 points, including Control Client licence
Client licences
6 b 1 x VJC NS 1022 12, Web Control Client licence for 500 points
b 1 x VJC NS 1032 99, Web View Only Client licence
Single-server architecture with
7 1 Web Control Client and 1 Web View Only Client
Networked server system with floating and static access

E.g. Networked server system, 5000 points, with 5 Client PCs and 3 Client licences,
8 2 of which are floating and 1 static
b 1 x VJC 1099 21, additional USB key for static Client
Server licence
b 1 x VJC NS 1011 14, Server licence for 5000 points, including Control Client
licence (local Control Client type on the server PC)
9 Stati
c lice
nse
Client licences
licens
es b 3 x VJC NS 1020 14, Control Client licences for 5000 points
Floating
Single-server architecture with

2 floating Control Client licences and 1 static licence
10
pages 6/46 ... pages 6/50 ...
6/48
Architectures (continued) Software
software (SCADA)
Vijeo Citect
Redundant Server with Server Control Clients and Web View Only Clients
E.g. Redundant server, 1500 Points, with 2 Control Client licences on the servers and
2 Web View Only Client licences
1
b 1 x VJC 1099 22, hardware delivery of the DVD with USB key (Primary Server key)
b 1 x VJC 1099 21, additional USB key (Standby Server key)
(rule: 1 key per Server)
Server licences
b 2 x VJC NS 1011 13, Server licences for 1500 points, including Control Client
2
licences:
v The first Server acts as the Primary Server
v The second server acts as the Standby Server
v One licence is placed on each key (Primary and Standby)
Client licences
b 2 x VJC NS 1032 99, Web View Only Client licences
v Both licences are placed on the Primary Server key
3
Redundant architecture with Redundant Client licence
2 Control Clients on servers and 2 Web View Only Clients b 2 x VJC NS 1032 88, redundant Web View Only Client licences
v Floating redundant licences for Web View Only Client licences
v Both licences are placed on the Standby Server key
ep orts I/O S
erver
s
Redundant Alarm, Trend, Reports Servers (1500 points) and redundant I/O
4
d&R
, Tren s Servers (1500 points) with 2 Control Clients and 2 Web View Only Clients
Alarm Server
b 1 x VJC 1099 22, hardware delivery of the DVD with USB key (Primary Server key)
b 3 x VJC 1099 21, additional USB keys (one per Server) (Standby Server key)
Server licence
b 4 x VJC NS 1011 13, Server licences for 1500 points, including Control Client
5
licence:
v Two pairs of redundant Servers: one I/O Server redundant pair, one ATR Server
redundant pair
v The first Server in each pair acts as the Primary Server
v The second Server acts as the Standby Server
Client licence
6
b 2 x VJCNS 1032 99, Web View Only Client licences
v Both licences are placed on the ATR Primary Server key
Redundant Client licence
g
floa
tin b 2 x VJCNS 1032 88, redundant Web View Only Client licences
ant
und ences v Redundant floating licences for Web View Only Client licences
7
R e d
lic
Redundant architecture, separate ATR and I/O Servers,
with 2 Server Control Clients and 2 Web View Only Clients
Redundant Servers (1500 points) with 2 Logical Server Clusters and 2 Web
View Only Clients
b 1 x VJC 1099 22, hardware delivery of the DVD with USB key (Primary Server key) 8
b 1 x VJC 1099 21, additional USB key (one per Server) (Standby Server key)
arm B
Allar
A Cluste
rB
dby
Server licence
Stan er
A
Alarm
Cluste
rA
T nd
A
Trend
B
Serv b 2 x VJC NS 1011 13, Server licences for 1500 points, including Control Client
dby rt B
Stan er
licence:
Repo
port A
Serv I/O B
rB I/O A
arm B
Allar
A Clusteary v One pair of redundant Servers, two clusters on each server
9
Prim er
A
Alarm
v The first server contains Cluster A (ATR & I/O Server) and Cluster B (ATR & I/O
B
rA Trend
S e rv
Clusteary
A
T nd
rt B
Prim er Repo
Serv
port A
I/O A
I/O B Server) Primary Servers
v The second server contains Cluster A and Cluster B Standby Servers
Client licence
b 2 x VJCNS 1032 99, Web View Only Client licences
v Both licences are placed on the ATR Primary Server key
t floa
ting
Redundant Client licence 10
ndan s
Redu licence b 2 x VJCNS 1032 88, Redundant Web View Only Client licences
Redundant architecture, 2 clusters with 2 Web View Only v Redundant floating licences for Web View Only Client licences
Clients v Both licences are placed on the ATR Standby Server key
6/49
References Software
software (SCADA)
Vijeo Citect
Development workshop - Vijeo Citect Box and keys

The VJC 1099 p2 Vijeo Citect Box comprises:
1 b 1 DVD with the Vijeo Citect software
b A Schneider Electric drivers pack
b An installation guide
b A hardware key for USB port
Additional keys are also supplied in the Vijeo Citect Box.
2 Development workshop - Vijeo Citect Box

VJC 1099 p2 Description Type of key Reference Weight
included kg
Vijeo Citect Box USB VJC 1099 22 0.410
with USB key
3 Additional Vijeo Citect keys

Designation Target licence Reference Weight
kg
Additional Vijeo Citect USB key Redundant Server and VJC 1099 21 0.200
Supplied in Vijeo Citect Box static (non-floating) licences
Vijeo Citect 10 Pack USB keys Blank keys and not licenced VJC 1099 20 1.500
Supplied in Vijeo Citect Box (1)
4
Vijeo Citect Software
Designation Target licence Reference Weight
kg
Vijeo Citect Software DVD - Not licenced VJC 1099 18 2.200
50 Pack
5
Vijeo Citect Lite, stand-alone
The Vijeo Citect Lite stand-alone licence is available for 100 to 1200 points.
The Vijeo Citect Lite licence is a simple solution for stand-alone applications.
6 Lite licenses cannot connect to any third party software or client stations. Further it
cannot be made redundant.
Vijeo Citect
Vijeo Citect Lite licence
Designation Number of points Reference Weight
kg
7 Vijeo Citect Lite
Stand-alone: no connectivity
100
150
VJC NS 3011 56
VJC NS 3011 11

Key to be ordered separately
300 VJC NS 3011 27
600 VJC NS 3011 59
1200 VJC NS 3011 50
(1) The 10 Pack Vijeo Citect keys VCJ 1099 20 is not programmed.
8
10
pages 6/46 ... pages 6/48 ...
6/50
software (SCADA)
Vijeo Citect
Vijeo Citect Lite, stand-alone (continued)

Vijeo Citect Lite Point Expansion
The references below are used for increasing the number of Vijeo Citect Lite points
available or to upgrade Lite Server to Full Server.
1
The licence point count expansion is achieved in steps. For example, if a licence is
Vijeo Citect upgraded from 100 points to 600 points, 3 part numbers will be ordered to upgrade
from 100 points to 150 points, 150 points to 300 points and 300 points to 600 points.

kg
2
Vijeo Citect Lite 100 to 150 VJC NS L56-L11
Point Expansion 150 to 300 VJC NS L11-L27
(number of points)
300 to 600 VJC NS L27-L59
500 or 600 to 1200 VJC NS L59-L50
Vijeo Citect Lite
Point Expansion
(Lite server to Full server)
Lite 150 to Full 150
Lite 300 to Full 500
VJC NS L11-F11
VJC NS L27-F12

3
Lite 600 to Full 1500 VJC NS L59-F13
Lite 1200 to Full 1500 VJC NS L50-F13
4
Vijeo Citect Server
The Vijeo Citect Server full system licences are segmented according to the number
of points.
Redundant system
b For a redundant system simply order 2 Vijeo Citect Server licences 5
b No other option is required for the Servers
b The programmed USB key must be ordered separately
Vijeo Citect Server licence

kg 6
Vijeo Citect Server 75 VJC NS 1011 10
Full version 150 VJC NS 1011 11
Key to be ordered separately
500 VJC NS 1011 12
1500 VJC NS 1011 13
5000 VJC NS 1011 14
15000
Unlimited
VJC NS 1011 15
VJC NS 1011 99

7
Vijeo Citect Server Point Expansion

The references below are used for increasing the number of points on the Server.
upgraded from 75 points to 1500 points, 3 part numbers will be ordered to upgrade
8

kg
Vijeo Citect Server
Point Expansion
75 to 150
150 to 500
VJC NS 1011 10-11
VJC NS 1011 11-12

9
500 to 1500 VJC NS 1011 12-13
1500 to 5000 VJC NS 1011 13-14
5000 to 15000 VJC NS 1011 14-15
15000 to unlimited VJC NS 1011 15-99
10
pages 6/46 ... pages 6/48 ...
6/51
software (SCADA)
Vijeo Citect
Vijeo Citect Control Client

Vijeo Citect Control Client licences are intended for operators. They are segmented
1 according to the number of points to be displayed. There are two types:
b Floating licence, residing on the Server key
b Static licence, requiring a separate key on the client PC.
Redundant system
b The number of floating Clients ordered is added to the Primary Server key
2 b For the Standby Server, the same number of redundant Control Client licences,
VJC NS 1030 88, must be ordered
Vijeo Citect Control Client licence

kg
Vijeo Citect 75 VJC NS 1020 10
3 Control Client licence 150
500
VJC NS 1020 11
VJC NS 1020 12

1500 VJC NS 1020 13
5000 VJC NS 1020 14
15000 VJC NS 1020 15
Unlimited VJC NS 1020 99
4 Vijeo Citect redundant

Control Client licence
Floating licence
only
VJC NS 1020 88
5 Vijeo Citect View Only Client

Vijeo Citect View Only Client licences are available for users who need to view the
application, without controlling it. Licenses for these clients are segmented
according to the number of points displayed. There are two types:
b Floating licence, residing on the Server key
b Static licence, the hardware key being plugged into the Client station.
6 Redundant system
b For the standby server, the same number of redundant View Only Client licences,
Vijeo Citect View Only Client licence

7 Designation Number of points Reference Weight
kg
Vijeo Citect Unlimited VJC NS 1030 99
View Only Client licence
Vijeo Citect redundant Floating licence VJC NS 1030 88
View Only Client licence only
10
pages 6/46 ... pages 6/48 ...
6/52
software (SCADA)
Vijeo Citect
Vijeo Citect Web Control Client

Vijeo Citect Web Control Client licences are intended for users who need full control
of the application but prefer the flexibility of access via a Web connection. These
client licences are segmented according to the number of points displayed and must
1
be floating type (residing on the key plugged into the server).
Vijeo Citect
Redundant system
b For the Standby Server, the same number of redundant Web Control Client
licences, VJC NS 1030 88, must be ordered 2
Vijeo Citect Web Control Client licence
kg
Vijeo Citect 75 VJC NS 1022 10
Web Control Client licence 150
500
VJC NS 1022 11
VJC NS 1022 12

3
1500 VJC NS 1022 13
5000 VJC NS 1022 14
15000 VJC NS 1022 15
Unlimited VJC NS 1022 99
4
Web Control Client licence only
Vijeo Citect Web View Only Client 5

Vijeo Citect Web View Only Client licences are intended for users who need to view
the application via a Web connection, without controlling the system. These Client
licences are segmented according to the number of points displayed and must be
floating type (the licences reside on the key plugged into the Server).
Redundant system
b The number of floating Clients ordered is added to the Primary Server key 6
b For the Standby Server, the same number of redundant View Only Client licences,
Vijeo Citect Web View Only Client licence

Vijeo Citect Unlimited VJC NS 1032 99

kg

7
Web View Only Client licence
Web Only Client View licence only
10
pages 6/46 ... pages 6/48 ...
6/53
software (SCADA)
Vijeo Citect
Control Client Point Expansion

The references below are used for increasing the number of points on:
1 b The Server holding the hardware key, for floating licences
b The Client holding the hardware key, for static licences
upgraded from 75 points to 1500 points, 3 part numbers will be ordered to upgrade
2 Vijeo Citect Control Client Point Expansion

kg
Vijeo Citect 75 to 150 VJC NS 1020 10-11
Control Client 150 to 500 VJC NS 1020 11-12
Point Expansion
500 to 1500 VJC NS 1020 12-13
3 1500 to 5000
5000 to 15000
VJC NS 1020 13-14
VJC NS 1020 14-15

View Only Client Point Expansion

The reference below is used for increasing the number of points on:
4 b The Server holding the hardware key, for floating licences

b The Client holding the hardware key, for static licences
Vijeo Citect View Only Client Point Expansion

kg
Vijeo Citect Unlimited VJC NS 1030 99-99
5 View Only Client

Point Expansion
Web Control Client Point Expansion

The references below are used for increasing the number of points on the Server
holding the hardware key.
6 Vijeo Citect Web Control Client Point Expansion
Description Number of points Reference Weight
kg
Vijeo Citect 75 to 150 VJC NS 1022 10-11
Web Control Client 150 to 500 VJC NS 1022 11-12
Point Expansion
500 to 1500 VJC NS 1022 12-13
7 1500 to 5000
5000 to 15000
VJC NS 1022 13-14
VJC NS 1022 14-15

Web View Only Client Point Expansion

The reference below is used for increasing the number of points on the Server holding
8 the hardware key.
Vijeo Citect Web View Only Client Point Expansion

kg
Vijeo Citect Unlimited VJC NS 1032 99-99
Web View Only Client
9
Point Expansion
Connections, miscellaneous
The references below are used to expand the connection licences.
Designation Reference Weight
kg
10 OPC Server licence

CtAPI licence
VJC 1041 88
VJC 1042 88

6/54
software (SCADA)
Vijeo Citect
Vijeo Citect - Specific drivers

The Vijeo Citect offer includes a large number of drivers as standard.
However, for copyright reasons, some drivers have a specific reference and must be
ordered separately.
1
The purchase of a specific driver includes access to the appropriate technical
support for the driver for one year.
Vijeo Citect
Designation Protocol Reference Weight
kg
Vijeo Citect
specific driver
IEC 60870-5-104 VJC NS 3051 41 2
PSDirect ETH VJC NS 3051 40
PSDirect MPI VJC NS 3051 42
Note: Before ordering a Vijeo Citect specific driver, please contact our Customer Care Centre.
3
Reprogramming for a Vijeo Citect licence transfer
Each time a licence has to be transferred from an existing key to another key,
transfer fees are applicable and the reference VJC 1094 01 must be ordered (licence
transfer token).
Examples of cases in which these fees are applicable: 4
b Transfer of a Client licence from a static key to a floating licence on a Server
b Transfer of an existing floating licence to a new static key
These fees are also applicable when transferring licence(s) to a replacement key.
If a new key is required, you must order a new hardware key VJC 1099 pp.

kg
5
Reprogramming for Vijeo Citect VJC 1094 01
licence transfer
Driver Development Kit 6

The driver development kit includes:
b The latest release of Vijeo Citect, example source code, utilities and other Vijeo
Citect files required in developing a Citect driver.
b A hardware key that will allow runtime up to 8 hours and is a 42,000 pt. single
user licence.
b Access to Citect Drivers Developers area on Citect DriverWeb at scadasupport.
citect.com/driverweb.
7
kg
Driver Development Kit VJC 1092 06
10
pages 6/46 ... pages 6/48 ...
6/55
software (SCADA)
Vijeo Citect
Conversion of third-party applications

Conversion tools help to convert legacy applications (such as Monitor Pro) or other
1 third-party applications to Vijeo Citect. These programs convert the tag database and
graphic information to make them compatible with Vijeo Citect :
b Page Import tool is targeted at customers who wish to perform the entire
engineering portion of the legacy system migration themselves. The systems
integrators are required to perform the engineering themselves.
b Basic Sytem Conversion tool is targeted at customers who want the new system
to simply replace the legacy system without major changes. It includes an initial
2 generic engineering component to produce a fully compiled Vijeo Citect project that
is ready for Factory Acceptance Tests.
More details of the coverage provided by these conversion tools can be found in our
internet site www.schneider-electric.com.
3 Designation Legacy System

supported
Reference Weight
kg
Basic System Conversion Tier 1 (1) VJC 1090 81
(minimum 10 pages)
Tier 2 (2) VJC 1090 82
Tier 3 (3) VJC 1090 83
Page Import All Tiers VJC 1090 88
4 (minimum 10 pages)
Loan of Vijeo Citect keys (4)

Designation Content Reference Weight
5 Loan of single - 1 Server licence, VJC 1095 11

kg

Vijeo Citect key unlimited number of points,
VJC NS 1011 99
- 1 Scheduler, VJC 9032 88
Loan of multiple - 1 Server licence, VJC 1095 12

Vijeo Citect keys unlimited number of points,
6 VJC NS 1011 99
- 5 Floating Control Client licences,
VJC NS1020 99
- 5 Floating View Only Client
licences, VJC NS1030 99
- 2 Floating Web Control Client
licences, VJC NS1022 99
- 2 Floating Web View Only Client
licences, VJCNS1032 99
7 - 1 Scheduler, VJC 9032 88
(1) Tier 1 = FactoryLink 5 to 6.x, MonitorPro 2, Fix32, Genesis32, Cimplicity, Moore APACS,
Wonderware 5.x to 9.x.
(2) Tier 2 = iFIX 3.5, Delta V (Fix32 & iFIX 3.5), RSView32 6.4, FactoryLink 7.5, MonitorPro 7.2 &
7.6, VijeoLook 2.6, WinCC 6.0, Wizcon.
8 (3) Tier 3 = iFIX 4.5, DeltaV (iFIX 4.5), Telvent OASyS DNA / 6.x, Telvent OASyS 5.x, Telvent
Vector (RTView & Ovision), Honeywell TDC3000, Vigile.
(4) Available for customers requiring temporary access to a key. The hardware key must be
returned at the end of the loan period. Provides eight days' continuous use. Also requires an
additional Vijeo Citect Box USB key, VJC 1099 pp, to obtain the hardware key. The quantity
corresponds to the number of months of the loan.
10
pages 6/46 ... pages 6/48 ...
6/56
software (SCADA)
Vijeo Citect
Vijeo Citect training

Schneider Electric offers a suite of Educational Services designed for end users,
engineers, systems integrators and educational establishments. Our courses and
programs provide you with hands-on experience, leaving you feeling confident enough
1
to design and configure your own system using Vijeo Citect. Courses include
instructor-led, online, self-paced and onsite offerings.
Vijeo Citect
These courses have been developed to assist customers in achieving maximum
productivity from using Vijeo Citect.
2
Training Manuals
kg
Vijeo Citect Configuration VJC 1093 10-02-00
Training Manual - EN
Vijeo Citect CICODE
VJC 1093 20-02-00
3
Vijeo Citect Architecture and Redundancy VJC 1093 30-02-00
Vijeo Citect Upgrade VJC 1093 50-02-00
Vijeo Citect Customization VJC 1093 70-02-00
Vijeo Citect
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Manual - EN
VJC 1093 90-02-00 4
Self-Paced Training Kits
kg
Vijeo Citect Configuration SPTK - EN
Vijeo Citect CICODE SPTK - EN
VJC 1093 10-01-00
VJC 1093 20-01-00

5
Vijeo Citect Customization SPTK - EN VJC 1093 70-01-00
E-Learning
Vijeo Citect SCADA Overview VJC 3093 31-00-00

kg

6
Exams
kg
7
Vijeo Citect Configuration Exam VJC 3093 50-00-00
Vijeo Citect CICODE Fundamentals Exam VJC 3093 51-00-00
Vijeo Citect Architecture and Redundancy Exam VJC 3093 52-00-00
Vijeo Citect Customization and Design Exam VJC 3093 53-00-00
Vijeo Citect Upgrade Exam VJC 3093 54-00-00
Vijeo Citect Examination Re-sit VJC 3093 55-00-00
Vijeo Citect Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Exam VJC 3093 56-00-00
8
Academic Agreements
The references below are intended for educational institutions for training students in
Vijeo Citect.
Vijeo Citect Academic Agreement VJC 3093 17

kg

9
- 12 months (10 keys) (1)
Vijeo Citect Academic Agreement VJC 3093 22
- 12 months renewal (10 keys) (1)
(1) Academic Agreements must be included with each order for the ogistics team in Sydney
10
to process the order. Any incomplete orders (with no Academic Agreement) will be rejected.
This is only for tertiary education institutions. Licenses are valid for 12 months, each
agreement must be renewed every year.
pages 6/46 ... pages 6/48 ...
6/57
Presentation
Vijeo HistorianTM is the information management component of Schneider Electric's
1 PlantStruxureTM.
It comprises of the historian and portal functions of the solution, enabling you to store
data accurately for long-term reporting while connecting your production and
business systems through its active data transfers and simple, easy-to-use reporting
functions.
Vijeo Historian Vijeo Historian helps your plant and your IT personnel optimize their operational
2 efficiency by providing a powerful enterprise-wide reporting tool that collects, stores
and delivers meaningful reporting data from multiple disparate systems.
Comprising of historian and portal functionalities, Vijeo Historian enables you to

store data accurately for long-term reporting whilst also giving you the option of
displaying and accessing the information via the Vijeo Historian portal, Microsoft (TM)
Excel, Microsoft Reporting Services or Microsoft Report Builder 3.0.
3
Visualization
SCADA
Historian System
OPC Microsoft SQL Server/Oracle
6 Vijeo Historian
Server
7
Microsoft Microsoft
SQLServer 2008 R2 SQLServer 2005
Report Builder 3.0 Report Builder
Microsoft MES/Ampla Process Microsoft Historian Vijeo Historian Vijeo Historian
8 SQL Server
2008 R2
Analyst SQL Server
2005
Reports
Deployment
Excel Client Web Client
Report Builder 3.0 Reporting Manager

Services
10
References:
pages 6/60 ...
6/58
functions Vijeo Historian reporting software
Vijeo Historian architecture

Vijeo Historian Server
1
Data Sources SQL Server 2008 R2
Historian
configuration
database Project backup
Vijeo Citect
2
Task/event engine
Historian
Historian Exported data
database
database
OPC HDA
server
Historian data service
OPC server
Microsoft
3
Published data Reporting
services
Reports
Production Business Historic
SCADA
system
data data data
4
Report deployment
management
MS SQL Historian
Historian Report templates
Web
Server portal Server
(IIS)
5
Oracle
Production data
Company database Historic data
Configuration data
Report data
Excel Client
Business data
6
Web Process
Analyst Client
Functions
Applications
b Business managers can access meaningful, concise production system information from the plant floor in a familiar format they use for their
financial or other business reports, to help them make strategic decisions to optimize operational performance.
b Plant managers can drill down into information or problem areas to improve production efficiency or reduce spurious alarms.
7
b Corporate and plant personnel can quickly and easily create and access meaningful reports in a familiar format and create a single view of
operation.
Data sources supported

Vijeo Historian supports the following data sources:
b Vijeo Citect SCADA servers: CitectSCADA 7 or later
b OPC Clients: OPC DA V2, OPC DA V3
8
b Oracle V8 or later
b Microsoft SQL Server 2005 or later
Vijeo Historian Web Client and Excel Client

Vijeo Historian also provides two client tools to make it easier to view and manage the information issued by the Historian Server:
b Using the Web Client you can display plant information from your control systems and the historian via the Intranet/Internet simply by using
a browser such as Internet Explorer.
9
b The Excel Client can also access linked information from the SCADA system or the historian directly in Microsoft Excel. The Excel Client
user can select from the same plant hierarchy as the Web Client and request the values of any item within the tree structure.
Security
Once logged on, users can only access the published folders, data and Favourites for which they have permission.
Passwords are encrypted and user privileges are validated for data requests. 10
Licence keys
The licences are programmed on a USB or parallel key, which is plugged into the PC running the Vijeo Historian software.
6/59
References Software 3
3
Development Workshop
The Vijeo Historian Box includes:
1 b Vijeo Historian DVDs including OPC/HDA Server and Reports Deployment Manager
b A booklet
b Hardware key.
Vijeo Historian The software can be downloaded from our website www.schneider-electric.com.
The Vijeo Historian Box is needed for delivery of the hardware key.
Additional keys will be shipped in the Vijeo Historian Box.
The key can be programmed for Vijeo Historian, Vijeo Citect or both.
2 We recommend using a separate key for Vijeo Citect and Vijeo Historian.
Description Type of key included Reference Weight

kg
Vijeo Historian Box with USB key USB VJH 2099 22
Vijeo Historian Box with parallel key Parallel VJH 2099 12
3 Vijeo Historian 10 Pack with USB key USB VJH 2099 20 (1)
Additional USB key USB VJH 2099 21 (2)
Additional parallel key Parallel VJH 2099 11 (2)
Loan license
4 Description Content Reference Weight
kg
Vijeo Historian b 1 x VJH NS 2110 15 VJH 2095 03
Loan licence Vijeo Historian 15000 points and Data transfer licence
b 5 x VJH NS 2122 00
Portal Only Client Access Licence (CAL)
b 5 x VJH NS 2120 00
5 Historian Only Client Access Licence (CAL)

b 5 x VJH NS 2043 20
Microsoft SQL Database Connector (1 per database system)
Vijeo Historian and Data Transfers

The Vijeo Historian and Data transfer licences are based on the amount of data being stored. The number of
6 points is the maximum number of tags being logged and stored in the system. The number of alarms stored is
unlimited, i.e. 150 tags stored - VJH NS 2110 11.

kg
Vijeo Historian and Data transfer licences 150 VJH NS 2110 11

500 VJH NS 2110 12
7 1500
5000
VJH NS 2110 13
VJH NS 2110 14

15000 VJH NS 2110 15
50000 VJH NS 2110 16
Vijeo Historian and Data Transfer upgrade

8 The references below are used for increasing the number of points on the Vijeo Historian and data transfer licences.

kg
Vijeo Historian and Data transfer upgrade licences 150 to 500 VJH NS 2110 11-12
500 to 1500 VJH NS 2110 12-13
9 1500 to 5000
5000 to 15000
VJH NS 2110 13-14
VJH NS 2110 14-15

15000 to 50000 VJH NS 2110 15-16
50000 to 100000 VJH NS 2110 16-45
100000 to unlimited VJH NS 2110 45-99
10
(1) Contains 10 individual Vijeo Historian Boxes (10 x VJH 2099 22).
(2) Additional keys must include a Vijeo Historian Box (VJH 2099 22 or VJH 2099 12).
Presentation:
page 6/58
6/60
References (continued) 3
Software 3
Client Acces Licenses (CALs)

Data from the Historian can be viewed in several ways:
b Portal CALs: Portal CALs are required to use the Web and Excel Clients provided with the Historian.
These CALs can be ordered either per user/device or per server (CPU).
1
b Historian CALs: Historian CALS are NOT required if a site purchases Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2
independently. If a site uses the MS SQL Server 2008 R2 shipped with Vijeo Historian, then Historian CALs are
Vijeo Historian required under the following circumstances:
v Using any of the standard reports with Historian Reports Deployment Manager
v Accessing the Historian using Microsoft Reporting Services
v Using the Web or Excel Clients
v Accessing the Historian via Stored Procedures or SQL queries
2
v Any direct or indirect (via other applications) to access Historian data
Client Access License per user/device

3
kg
Historian and Portal - Client Access License (CAL) VJH NS 2124 00

Portal Only - Client Access License (CAL) VJH NS 2122 00
Historian Only - Client Access License (CAL) VJH NS 2120 00
Client Access License per CPU

Historian and Portal Server CAL per server CPU
Portal Only Server CAL per server CPU

VJH NS 2125 00
VJH NS 2123 00

4
Historian Server CAL per server CPU VJH NS 2121 00
Control system connectors

Data can be collected from:
b Vijeo Citect: Unlimited connections included
5
b OPC DA: Reference VJH NS 2043 23 ordered per connection.
Historian database can be connected to other databases for up/downloading.
b SQL Connector: One MS SQL Server connector included. Additional SQL connectors VJH NS 2043 20
ordered separately.
b Oracle connector VJH NS 2043 21
Connectivity can be made to Ampla or any MES system using OPC/HDA Client. Vijeo Historian has an OPC/
HDA server included free.
6
kg
Microsoft SQL Database connector (1 per database system) VJH NS 2043 20
Oracle Database connector (1 per database system) VJH NS 2043 21
OPC DA connector V2 and V3 (1 per database system) VJH NS 2043 23 7
License transfer reprogramming

Every time a licence is transferred from an existing key to another key, the licence transfer fee is charged.
Examples of when this fee is applied include:
b Transfer of a licence from one key to another 8
b Removal of a licence from an existing key (when not transferring to another key)
b Re-issue of licence for a replacement key.
Removal or downgrade (licence type or point count) of licences on a key will require a key swap where a new
key is issued and the existing key must be returned. Removal or downgrade of a licence does not provide any
refund or credit.
When moving a licence to an existing key that already contains a licence (or licences), the licence being
moved must be the same point count as the existing licence.
Note: When placing an order, please indicate the key numbers and details in the special instructions.
9
Note: This provides only a new authorization code. If a new key is required then you also need to purchase a
new hardware key (VJC 1099 pp).

kg
License transfer fee VJC 1094 01 10
Presentation:
page 6/58
6/61
Presentation 3
Software 3

OPC Factory Server
Presentation
Based on the OLE for Process Control (OPC) standard, Schneider Electric's OPC
1 Factory Server (OFS) software allows client software applications, such as
supervisors/SCADA and customized interfaces, to access the data of Schneider
Electric automation system and electrical distribution devices connected to networks
OPC Factory Server or fieldbuses in real time.
It also allows communication with third-party devices supporting Modbus and
Modbus/TCP protocols.
2 At the heart of the Transparent Ready offer, OFS enables simpler, more open and
transparent communication between your software applications and your devices.
These are just some of the advantages that ensure a complete interoperability
solution that is central to your process.
In version V3.3, the OFS data server integrates the most recent specifications of the
OPC Foundation:
3 b OPC-DA (OPC Data Access)
b .NET API interface
b OPC XML-DA V1.0 (OPC XML Data Access)
The OFS V3.3 offer is available in two levels:

b OFS Small: Data server for 1000 items (1), that does not support the OPC XML-DA
protocol
4 b OFS Large: Complete data server
Devices and protocols supported

OFS software is a multi-device data server: It allows simultaneous use of several
communication protocols, and it provides client applications with a set of services for
accessing control system items that may be local or remote, via physical address or
via symbol.
5 Devices supported:
b Modicon Quantum, Premium, M340, Micro, Compact and Momentum PLCs
b Schneider Electric TSX Series 7 and April Series 1000 PLCs
b Modbus serial devices connected via Schneider Electric gateways:
TSX ETG 10pp, EGX ppp ranges, etc.
b Uni-Telway serial devices connected via Schneider Electric gateways
6 (TSX ETG 1010)
Networks and protocols supported:

b Modbus: Modbus serial, Modbus Plus, Modbus/TCP
b X-Way/Uni-TE: Uni-Telway, Fipway, ISAway, PCIway
Openness
7 The development of specialized interfaces is simpler with OFS V3.3 software, which
is aimed at two types of user in particular:
b End users who want either to interface their supervision or Human Machine
Interface applications with Schneider Electric equipment, or to develop applications
on a PC (supervisory control screens, Excel tables, etc.) requiring access to control
system data.
8 b Suppliers of control system or industrial data processing software
(supervision, Human Machine Interfaces, etc.) seeking to develop, within their
standard products, an OPC Client interface capable of accessing data in Schneider
Electric equipment via the OFS server.
(1) Item: A variable, structure, table, etc. in the Unity Pro application.
9
10
Setup: Functions: References:

6/62
Presentation (continued) 0
Software 3

OPC Factory Server
Supported architectures
The OFS server allows four access modes:
b A purely local mode
b Remote access from an OPC-DA client
1
b Remote access from an OPC .NET client
b Remote access from an OPC XML-DA client
Local access
The client application program and the OFS server are on the same PC. 2
OFS station
Local client
OPC Factory Server: Home page application Symbol data
program (Unity Pro,
Concept
or PL7) 3
Modbus network X-Way network
4
Momentum Premium TSX Micro
Quantum
5
Remote access from an OPC-DA client
The client application program and the OFS data server are on remote stations.
Communication between the client station and the OFS server is conducted through
the DCOM layer (Microsoft) via the OPC-DA protocol.
6
DCOM
OFS station
Remote client Local client

application application Symbol data
7
program program (Unity Pro,
Concept
or PL7)
Modbus network X-Way network
8
Momentum Premium TSX Micro
Quantum
10

6/63
Presentation (continued) 0
Software 3

OPC Factory Server
Supported architectures (continued)

Remote access from an OPC .NET client
1 The .NET client application and the OFS data server are on remote stations.
Communication between the client station and the OFS server is conducted through
the DCOM layer (Microsoft) via the OPC-DA protocol.
Intranet
2 DCOM Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
.NET client Server

OFS station
The .NET Microsoft compatibility of the OFS server has been developed to allow an
OPC .NET client to access OFS server items on an Intranet network via the OPC .NET
API interface.
4 This interface ensures interoperability between existing OPC applications and
applications developed in the standard .NET environment.
Remote access from an OPC XML-DA client via HTTP

The client application program and the OFS server are on remote stations, using the
5 SOAP protocol to communicate via the Internet in conformity with the OPC XML-DA
V1.01 specification of the OPC Foundation.
The OFS data server is based on an HTTP server installed on the same station.
Symbol data
(Unity Pro,
Concept or PL7) Internet
6 Site server
and OFS
station
IIS Firewall
Industrial network
7 Remote client
application
program
Industrial PLCs
8 The OPC XML-DA V1.0 specifications are designed to overcome the limitations of
COM/DCOM by providing:
b An OPC interface for Windows and non-Windows client applications
b Beyond the Intranet perimeter, remote access via the Internet through firewalls
The OPC XML-DA specification is based on Web Services standards such as SOAP,
9 XML and WSDL (1). A SOAP client can access data on the OFS server via Intranet or
Internet using the SOAP protocol in conformity with the OPC XML-DA V1.01
specification of the OPC Foundation.
(1) SOAP: Simple Object Access Protocol

XML: Extensible Markup Language
WSDL: Web Services Description Language.
10

6/64
Setup 3
Software 3

OPC Factory Server
Setup
Ethernet Modbus/TCP 1
1
OFS server
(V3.0) 4
Database Unity Pro
project
station
2
Symbols.xvm (Unity Pro)
Symbols.prj (Concept)
2 OPC client Symbols.scy (PL7)
3 Quantum
3
3 Premium
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
3 Momentum 3 TSX Micro 4

The OFS server 1 is at the centre of the data exchanges. It ensures that variables
exchanged between the OPC client 2 and the PLC 3 are consistent, in one of three
ways using a symbol (or variables) database:
b The variables database is either the Unity Pro project 4 or the Concept project.
5
In both these cases, Unity Pro or Concept needs to be installed on the OFS server
station.
b Or the variables database is an export file (SCY for PL7, XVM for Unity Pro). PL7
and Unity Pro are not required in either of these cases.
b Or the variables database is the PLC itself. In this case neither Unity Pro nor an 6
export file is needed. This does not apply to Momentum and TSX Micro PLCs.
If an inconsistency is detected (following online modification of the PLC program for
example), OFS resynchronizes itself automatically as a background task, without
breaking communication between the PLC and the OPC client.
For this function the following minimum versions are required:
v OFS V3.35
v Unity Pro V6.0 7
v Modicon Premium V2.9, M340 V2.3 and Quantum V3.0 PLCs
10
Presentation: Functions: References:

pages 6/62 page 6/66 page 6/67
6/65
Functions 3
Software 3

OPC Factory Server
Functions
Development of client applications
1 OFS software has 4 types of interface:
b OLE Automation interface (OPC-DA)

Particularly suitable for end users, this enables the development of OPC client
applications in Visual Basic, in Visual Basic for Excel, and in C++.
b OLE Custom interface (OPC-DA)

2 Used primarily by suppliers of automated control system or industrial IT products,
this interface enables the development of applications in C++ in order to access the
OFS software OPC server. It is aimed at software development experts in particular,
so that they can integrate the client application into their standard products. This is
the interface with the highest performance, in terms of access time, to data stored in
the OPC server. It requires extensive knowledge of C++ programming to set up.
3 b OPC .NET API wrapper interface

The .NET Microsoft compatibility of the OFS data server gives an OPC .NET client
standard access to items on the OFS server via an Intranet network, thus ensuring
greater interoperability with standard .NET environments.
Note: In this case, communication between the OPC .NET client and the OFS server is conducted
through the DCOM layer (or COM layer in a local configuration) via the OPC-DA protocol.
4 b OPC XML-DA interface (1)

The OPC XML-DA V1.0 specifications are designed to overcome the limitations of
the OPC-DA specification and COM/DCOM by providing:
v An interface for Windows and non-Windows client applications
v Remote access via the Internet through firewalls (beyond the Intranet perimeter)
5 The OPC XML-DA specification is based on Web Services standards such as SOAP,
XML, WSDL. A SOAP client can access data on the OFS server via Intranet or Internet
using the SOAP protocol in conformity with the OPC XML-DA V1.01 specification of
the OPC Foundation.
(1) Only available with the Large version of OPC Factory Server V3.3.
10
Presentation: Setup: References:

6/66
References 3
Software 3

OPC Factory Server
References
OFS V3.3 software for PC compatible stations (minimum configuration: Pentium
566 MHz processor, 128 MB RAM) running Windows 2000 Professional (1),
Windows XP Professional, Windows 7 (32-bit) (3) or Windows server 2008 (3).
1
OPC Factory Server The OFS V3.3 offer comprises:
b OPC server software
b OPC server simulator (for debugging the application when no PLCs are present)
b OFS server configuration software
b An example of OPC client for setting up applications
b The setup documentation on CD-ROM
2
Supplied on CD-ROM, the software operates independently on a PC. It interfaces
with the variables export files generated by PL7, ProWORX, Concept and Unity Pro
software.
It also provides a direct dynamic link to the Unity Pro and Concept applications (2).
OFS V3.3 software is available in two versions:

b Small version TLX CD SpOFS 33
3
v Maximum of 1000 items
v All protocols supported with the exception of OPC XML-DA
v Single station and 10-station site licences
b Large version TLX CD LpOFS 33
v Full version
v Single station, 10-station and 200-station site licences
4
OPC Factory Server V3.3 Small
kg
OPC Factory Server Single station TLX CD SUOFS 33
V3.3 Small software 10-station TLX CD STOFS 33
5
OPC Factory Server V3.3 Large
kg
OPC Factory Server Single station TLX CD LUOFS 33
V3.3 Large software
Full version
10-station
200-station
TLX CD LTOFS 33
TLX CD LFOFS 33

6
(1) Must be updated with Service Pack 1 or higher.

(2) Requires Concept > version 2.0 software to be installed on the same station.
(3) OFS is compatible with both these operating systems from version V3.34 or later.
7
10
Presentation: Setup: Functions:

6/67
1
10
7/0
Contents 7 - Human/Machine Interfaces
Selection guide: Magelis Small Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/2

Selection guide: Magelis Optimum Advanced Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/4
Selection guide: Magelis Advanced Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/6 1
Selection guide: HMI software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/10
10
7/1
Selection guide Operator dialogue terminals
Magelis Small Panels
Applications Display of graphic pages
1 Type of terminal Small Panels with touch screen
3 Display Type Monochrome STN LCD Colour QVGA TFT LCD

(200 x 80 pixels), (320 x 240 pixels)
backlit
- Green, orange and red, or
- White, pink and red
4 Capacity 3.4" (monochrome) 3.5" (colour) 5.7" (colour)
Data entry Via touch screen
5 Memory Application 16 MB Flash

capacity Expansion
Functions Maximum number of pages Limited by internal FLASH EPROM memory capacity
6 Variables per page

Representation of variables
Unlimited
Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, curves, buttons, LEDs
Recipes 32 groups of 64 recipes
Curves Yes, with log
Alarm logs Yes
Real-time clock Access to the PLC real-time clock
Alarm relay
7 Buzzer Yes
Communication Asynchronous serial link RS 232C/RS 485 (1) RS 232C/RS 485

RS 232C using Zelio protocol (2)
Downloadable protocols Uni-TE, Modbus and for PLC brands: Allen-Bradley, Omron, Mitsubishi, Siemens
8 Printer link USB for serial or parallel printer

USB ports 1 host type A and 1 device type mini-B
Networks 1 Ethernet TCP/IP port 1 Ethernet TCP/IP port (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) (3)
Development software Vijeo Designer (on Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7)
Operating system Magelis
9
References HMI STO 5pp HMI STU 655 HMI STU 855
Page Please consult the Human/Machine Interfaces catalogue

(1) Only HMI STO 511/512.
(2) Only HMI STO 501.
10 (3) Only HMI STO 531/532.
7/2
Display of text messages and/or semi-graphic Display of text messages and/or semi-graphic pages
pages Control and configuration of data
Small Panels with keypad Small Panels with keypad Small Panels with touch screen and keypad 1
Green backlit monochrome LCD, Green, orange or red backlit monochrome LCD, Green, orange or red backlit monochrome matrix 3
height 5.5 mm height 4.3417.36 mm LCD (198 x 80 pixels),
or height 416 mm
Green, orange or red backlit monochrome LCD,
height 4.3417.36 mm
2 lines of 20 characters or
1 to 4 lines of 5 to 20 characters
1 to 4 lines of 5 to 20 characters (monochrome) 2 to 10 lines of 5 to 33 characters (monochrome)
4
(monochrome)
Via keypad with Via keypad with Via keypad with Via touch screen and
8 keys (4 customizable) b 12 function keys or numeric entry b 4 function keys keypad with
(depending on context) b 8 service keys b 10 function keys
b 8 service keys b 2 service keys
512 KB Flash 512 KB Flash EPROM

5
128/200 application pages 128/200 application pages 200 application pages

256 alarm pages 256 alarm pages 256 alarm pages
4050
Alphanumeric
4050, bargraph, buttons, LEDs 50
Alphanumeric, bargraph, buttons, LEDs 6
Yes
Yes (5) Yes
Access to the PLC real-time clock Access to the PLC real-time clock
Yes (4) 7
RS 232C/RS 485
Uni-TE, Modbus and for PLC brands: Allen-Bradley, Omron, Mitsubishi, Siemens
RS 232C serial link (5) 8
Vijeo Designer Lite (on Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows Vista)
Magelis
9
XBT N pppp XBT R ppp XBT RT ppp
Please consult the Human/Machine Interfaces catalogue

(4) Only XBT RT511.
(5) Depending on model.
10
7/3
MagelisTM GTO Optimum Advanced Panels
Applications Display of text messages, graphic objects and synoptic views

Control and configuration of data
1 Type of terminal Optimum Advanced Panels, touch screen
Degree of protection (according to IEC 60529) IP 65 (IP 67 with addition of a cover)
4 Display Type Colour TFT LCD,

backlit
Colour TFT LCD,
backlit
320 x 240 pixels (QVGA) 800 x 480 pixels (WVGA)
Capacity 3.5 5.7 7.0 Wide
Data entry Via touch screen Via touch screen Via touch screen
Static function keys 6 function keys 8 function keys
5 Dynamic function keys

Service keys
(static or dynamic)

(static or dynamic)

Alphanumeric keys
Memory capacity Applications 64/96 MB Flash EPROM (1) 96 MB Flash EPROM

Expansion By 4 GB SD card (except HMI GTO2300)
6 Functions Maximum number of pages Limited by internal Flash

EPROM memory capacity
Limited by capacity of internal Flash EPROM memory
or of SD card
Variables per page Unlimited (8000 variables max.)

Representation of variables Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, tank, tank level indicator, curves, polygon, button, LED
Recipes 32 groups of 64 recipes comprising 1024 ingredients max.
7 Alarm logs
Real-time clock
Yes
Built-in
Discrete I/O
Multimedia I/O
Communication Downloadable protocols Uni-TE (2), Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP (1) and for PLC brands: Mitsubishi, Omron,
Allen-Bradley and Siemens
8 Asynchronous serial link RS 232C (COM1) and RS 485 (COM2) except HMI GTO1310: RS 232C/485 (COM1)
USB ports 1 type A host connector + 1 mini-B connector
Buses and networks Ethernet TCP/IP (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) (3), Modbus Plus and Fipway via USB gateway
Printer link RS 232C (COM1) serial link (4) and USB port for parallel printer
Development software Vijeo Designer (on Windows XP and Windows 7)
9 Operating system Magelis (333 MHz RISC CPU)
Type of terminal HMI GTO1300 HMI GTO2300 HMI GTO3510

HMI GTO1310 HMI GTO2310
Page Please consult the Optimum Advanced Panels, MagelisTM GTO catalogue
10 (2) Uni-TE version V2 for Twido controller and TSX Micro/Premium platform.
(3) Except HMI GTO1300 and GTO2300 (Modbus Plus and Fipway via USB gateway only).
(4) Except HMI GTO1310 (USB port for parallel printer only).
7/4
Display of text messages, graphic objects and synoptic views
Optimum Advanced Panels, touch screen Optimum Advanced Panels, touch screen, Stainless Steel version
1
IP 65 (IP 67 with addition of a cover) IP 66K (Front panel with stainless steel frame) for food & beverage
environment
Colour TFT LCD,

backlit
Colour TFT LCD,
backlit
Colour TFT LCD,
backlit
Colour TFT LCD,
backlit
Colour TFT LCD,
backlit
Colour TFT LCD,
backlit 4
640 x 480 pixels (VGA) 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) 800 x 600 pixels (SVGA) 320 x 240 pixels (QVGA) 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) 800 x 600 pixels (SVGA)
7.5 10.4 12.1 5.7 10.4 12.1
Via touch screen
96 MB Flash EPROM
By 4 GB SD card
Limited by capacity of internal Flash EPROM memory or of SD card

6
Unlimited (8000 variables max.)
Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, tank, tank level indicator, curves, polygon, button, LED
32 groups of 64 recipes comprising 1024 ingredients max.
Yes, with log
Yes
Built-in
7
Uni-TE (2), Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP (1) and for PLC brands: Mitsubishi, Omron, Allen-Bradley and Siemens
RS 232C (COM1) and RS 485 (COM2) 8

1 type A host connector + 1 mini-B connector
Ethernet TCP/IP (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX), Modbus Plus and Fipway via USB gateway
RS 232C (COM1) serial link and USB port for parallel printer
Vijeo Designer (on Windows XP and Windows 7)

Magelis (333 MHz RISC CPU)
9
HMI GTO4310 HMI GTO5310 HMI GTO6310 HMI GTO2315 HMI GTO5315 HMI GTO6315
Please consult the Optimum Advanced Panels, MagelisTM GTO catalogue
10
7/5
Magelis GT, GK, GH and GTW Advanced
Panels

1 Type of terminal Touch screen Advanced Panels
Display Type Backlit monochrome (amber or Backlit monochrome or colour Backlit colour STN LCD or
3 red mode) STN LCD STN LCD or backlit colour

(320 x 240 pixels) or TFT LCD TFT LCD (320 x 240 pixels) or
colour TFT LCD
(640 x 480 pixels)
(640 x 480 pixels) (3)
Capacity 3.8" (monochrome or colour) 5.7" (monochrome or colour) 7.5" (colour)
Data entry Via touch screen

Static function keys
Dynamic function keys
4 Service keys
Alphanumeric keys
Memory capacity Applications 32 MB Flash EPROM 16 MB Flash EPROM (3) 32 MB Flash EPROM
Expansion By means of 128, 256, 512 MB, 1, 2 or 4 GB CF card (except
XBT GT2110)
5 Functions Maximum number of pages Limited by internal Flash

EPROM memory capacity
Limited by capacity of internal Flash EPROM memory or CF
card memory
Variables per page Unlimited (8000 variables max.)
Representation of variables Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, tank, tank level indicator, curves, polygon, button,
LED
6 Alarm logs
Real-time clock
Yes
Built-in
Discrete I/O 1 input (reset) and 3 outputs
(alarm, buzzer, run)
Multimedia I/O (3) 1 audio input (microphone),
1 composite video input
(digital or analogue video
camera), 1 audio output
7 (loudspeaker) (1)
Communication Downloadable protocols Uni-TE (2), Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP (1) and for PLC brands: Mitsubishi, Omron, Allen-Bradley
and Siemens
Asynchronous serial link RS 232C/485 (COM1) RS 232C/RS 422/485 (COM1) and RS 485 (COM2)
USB ports 1 1 (3) 1
Bus and networks Modbus Plus and Fipway with USB gateway, PROFIBUS DP
8
and Device Net with optional card
Ethernet TCP/IP (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) (1)
Printer link USB port for parallel printer RS 232C (COM1) serial link, USB port for parallel printer
Operating system Magelis Magelis Magelis
(200 MHz RISC CPU) (133 MHz RISC CPU) (3) (266 MHz RIS CPU)
9 Type of terminal XBT GT11/13 XBT GT21/22/23/24/29 XBT GT42/43

Page Please consult the Human/Machine Interfaces catalogue
(2) Uni-TE version V2 for Twido controller and TSX Micro/Premium platform.
(3) For XBTGT 2430, 32 MB Flash EPROM, 1 sound output, 2 USB ports, 266 MHz RISC CPU.
(4) For XBT GT 5430.
10
7/6
Touch screen Advanced Panels 1
Backlit colour STN LCD or colour TFT LCD Backlit colour TFT LCD (800 x 600 pixels) Backlit colour TFT LCD (1024 x 768 pixels)
(640 x 480 pixels or 800 x 600 pixels) (4)
3
10.4" (colour) 12.1" (colour) 15" (colour)
Via touch screen
32 MB Flash EPROM
By means of 128, 256, 512 MB, 1, 2 or 4 GB CF card
Limited by capacity of internal Flash EPROM memory or CF card memory

5

Yes, with log
Yes
Built-in 6
1 input (reset) and 3 outputs (alarm, buzzer, run)
1 audio input (microphone), 1 composite video input (digital or analogue video camera), 1 audio output (loudspeaker) (1)
7
Uni-TE (2), Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP (1) and for PLC brands: Mitsubishi, Omron, Allen-Bradley and Siemens
RS 232C/RS 422/485 (COM1) and RS 485 (COM2)

2
Modbus Plus with USB gateway
Ethernet TCP/IP (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) 8

RS 232C (COM1) serial link, USB port for parallel printer
Vijeo Designer (on Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7)

Magelis
(266 MHz RIS CPU)
XBT GT52/53/54 XBT GT63 XBT GT73 9

10
7/7
Selection guide (continued) Operator dialogue terminals
Magelis GT, GK, GH and GTW Advanced
Panels

1 Type of terminal Advanced Panels with keypad
Display Type Colour TFT LCD Colour TFT LCD

3 Capacity
(320 x 240 pixels) or monochrome STN
5.7" (monochrome or colour)
(640 x 480 pixels)
10.4" (colour)
Data entry Via keypad and/or touch screen (configurable) and/or by industrial pointer
Static function keys 10 12

Dynamic function keys 14 18
4 Service keys
Alphanumeric keys
8
12
Memory capacity Application 16 MB Flash EPROM 32 MB Flash EPROM
Expansion By means of 128, 256, 512 MB, 1, 2 or 4 GB CF card
5 Functions Maximum number of pages

Variables per page
Representation of variables Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, tank, tank level indicator, curves, polygon, button,
LED
Alarm logs Yes
6 Real-time clock Built-in
Discrete I/O 1 input - 3 outputs
Multimedia I/O
Communication Downloadable protocols Uni-TE (2), Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP (1) and for PLC brands: Mitsubishi, Omron,
Allen-Bradley and Siemens
7 Asynchronous serial link RS 232C/RS 422/485 (COM1)

RS 485 (COM2)
USB ports 1 2
Bus and networks Modbus Plus, Fipway with USB gateway, PROFIBUS DP and Device Net with optional card
Ethernet TCP/IP (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
8 Printer link RS 232C (COM1) serial link, USB port for parallel printer
Operating system Magelis
(CPU 266 MHz RISC)
Type of terminal XBT GK 21/23 XBT GK 53

9 Page Please consult the Human/Machine Interfaces catalogue
10
7/8
Portable Advanced Panels Open touch screen Advanced Panels 1
Colour TFT LCD Colour TFT LCD Colour TFT LCD Colour TFT LCD
(640 x 480 pixels)
5.7" (colour)
(800 x 600 pixels)
8.4" (colour)
(800 x 600 pixels)
12" (colour)
(1024 x 768 pixels)
15" (colour)
3
Via touch screen Via touch screen
11

4
32 MB Flash EPROM 1 GB CF system card included with 2 GB CF system card included with terminal,
terminal, expandable to 4 GB expandable to 4 GB
By means of 128, 256, 512 MB, 1, 2 or 4 GB CF card

5

Yes, with log
Yes
Built-in 6
1 audio output
Uni-TE (2), Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP Uni-TE (2), Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP (1) and for PLC brands: Mitsubishi, Omron, Allen-Bradley and Siemens
and for PLC brands: Mitsubishi,
Omron, Rockwell
Automation and Siemens
RS 232C/RS 422-485 (COM1) RS 232C (COM1) RS 232C (COM1) RS 232C (COM1) 7
RS 232C (COM2) RS 232C (COM2)
1 4 4 + 1 on front
Modbus Plus with USB gateway
1 Ethernet port (10BASE-T/100BASE- 1 TCP/IP Ethernet port (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) and 1 Ethernet port (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1 GB)
TX)
RS 232C (COM1 or COM2) serial link, USB port for parallel printer
8
Vijeo Designer (on Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7)
Magelis Windows XP Embedded
(266 MHz RISC CPU)
XBT GH 2460 XBT GTW 450 XBT GTW 652 HMI GTW 7353
Please consult the Human/Machine Interfaces catalogue 9
10
7/9
Selection guide HMI software
Applications Traditional architecture, HMI executed on PC platform or dedicated terminal
1
Configuration software for operator dialogue applications
TM
Compatible products Type Magelis XBT N/R/RT Small Panels (1)
3
Maximum number of targets 1
Operating system on terminals Proprietary Magelis
Functions Reading/writing of PLC variables Yes
4
Display of variables Yes
Data processing
Sharing of variables between HMI

applications
Saving of variables to external
database
5 Internationalization
Development of graphic Native library of graphic objects Yes

applications
Curves and alarms Yes (2)
Scripts
Communication between HMI application and PLCs Via I/O drivers: Schneider Electric or third party protocols (Mitsubishi, Omron, Rockwell
6 Automation, Siemens) (3)
Uploading of applications Yes
Simulation of HMI applications Yes
Recipe management
7 Report and barcode printing
Screen capture
Access security Linked to user profiles
8 Interface languages Screens, online help and documentation in electronic format available in 6 languages:
English, French, German, Italian, Simplified Chinese and Spanish
OS compatibility Windows XP Professional, Windows Vista Business (32-bit), Windows 2000 Professional
Software type Vijeo Designer Lite

TM
9 Page Please consult the Human/Machine Interfaces catalogue

(1) All Magelis XBT and Magelis GTO terminals behave transparently on restoration of power.
(2) Depending on compatible product.
(3) See protocols supported on page, please consult the Human/Machine Interfaces catalogue.
10
7/10
Traditional architecture, HMI executed on PC platform or dedicated terminal
1
Configuration software for operator dialogue applications
TM
Magelis STO/STU Small Panels
TM TM
Magelis XBT GT/GK/GH/GTW and Magelis GTO Advanced Panels (1)
TM
Magelis industrial PCs
3
32
Proprietary for Magelis STO/STU, Magelis XBT GT/GK/GH and Magelis GTO
Windows XP embedded for Magelis GTW
Yes, up to 8000 internal and external variables
4
Yes
Yes, using expression editor or Java programming
Up to 300 variables between 8 terminals, without router PLC

Proprietary protocol above TCP/IP
Yes, with the Intelligent Data Service extension
Up to 15 languages supported by 34 western alphabets, 4 Asian alphabets and 2 middle eastern alphabets embedded in the application
5
Yes
Yes, with log
Java
Via I/O drivers: Schneider Electric or third party protocols (Mitsubishi, Omron, Rockwell Automation, Siemens) (3)
6
Yes
Yes
Yes, up to 32 groups, 1024 ingredients for 256 recipes per group, proprietary or CSV format, complete multilingual support for labels and ingredients
On the fly alarms, log data. Up to 9999 active alarms, record or logs 7
Main barcode types supported: UPC-A, UPC-E, JAN/EAN8, JAN/EAN13, ITF, CODE39, CODE93, CODE128, CODABAR (NW-7)
Yes, for Magelis XBT GT (XBT GT 1105 and higher), Magelis GTO and Magelis industrial PCs. JPEG format
Linked to user profiles
Screens, online help and documentation in electronic format available in 7 languages: English, French, German, Italian, Brazilian Portuguese, Simplified Chinese
and Spanish
8
Windows XP Professional, Windows 7 Business (32-bit and 64-bit)
Vijeo Designer TM

9
10
7/11
1
10
8/0
Contents 8 - Connection interfaces and
regulated switch mode power
supplies
Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system

Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/8 1
Passive connection sub-bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/12
Adaptor sub-bases with fixed relays and
removable terminal blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/14
Input/output adaptor sub-bases for or with plug-in relays . . . . . . . page 8/15
Output adaptor sub-bases for plug-in relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-in relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 8/16
page 8/17
2
Connection sub-bases for analog channels and
application-specific channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/18
Accessories for connection sub-bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/20
Power supplies and transformers Phaseo 3

Selection guide: regulated switch mode power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/22
Selection guide: regulated switch mode power supplies,
rectified and filtered power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/24
Regulated switch mode power supplies ABL 8MEM, ABL 7RM
Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
page 8/26
Selection of protection on the power supply primaries . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/27
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/27
Regulated switch mode power supplies ABL 8MEM, ABL 7RP
Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/28
Selection of protection on the power supply primaries . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/29
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/29 5
Regulated switch mode power supplies ABL 4
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/31
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendices
page 8/33
6
Function modules: ABL 8 solutions to power outages . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/34
Substitution of ABL 8RP/WP by ABL 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/35
Regulated switch mode power supplies ASI ABL
Power supplies for AS-Interface cabling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/36
Selection of protection on the power supply primaries . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/37 7
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/37
10
8/1
Selection guide Connection interfaces
Discrete input and/or output sub-bases
Applications Discrete inputs or outputs

Optimum Economy Optimum Miniature Universal
3
Compatibility TSX Micro, TSX Micro, Modicon Premium, Modicon Quantum, Modicon M340
Modicon Premium,
Modicon M340
Sub-base type Passive connection sub-bases

4
Equipped with relays
Control voltage 24 V c
5 Output voltage 24 V c
Output current per channel 0.5 A
Modularity 16 8 -12 -16
6
No. of terminals per channel 1 1 to 3 1 2
Type of connection terminals Signal Signal, common Signal Signal, common (configurable as 24 V c or 0 V)
(configurable as
24 V c or 0 V)
7 Connectors 20-way HE10 connector
Terminal Removable No No
block
Terminal type Screw
8 Additional or optional*
function
Low-cost version fitted
with cable
Miniature sub-bases Compact size * Input type 2 *
(1)
Isolator *
Type of device ABE 7HppEp00 ABE 7H16Cpp ABE 7HppR1p ABE 7HppR2p ABE 7HppS21
ABE 7HppR50
9 Page 8/12 8/13
(1) For Modicon TSX Micro and Modicon Premium PLCs.
10
8/2
Discrete inputs or outputs Outputs for solid state and/or electromechanical relays
Optimum Miniature Optimum and Universal
3
TSX Micro, Modicon Premium, Modicon Quantum, Modicon M340
Passive connection sub-bases Plug-in electromechanical or solid state relays

4
No Yes
24 V c
24 V c 24V c (solid state)

5... 24 V c, 230 V a (electromechanical) 5
0.5 A 0.5 A 5 A (E.M.), 2 A (solid state) 5 A (th)
16 16
8 passive inputs
8 relay outputs 6
1 2 1
Signal, Signal, common, 1 N/O contact and common, 4 output channels

2 common connections between the 2 common connections between the 2 input connection points
inputs and the outputs inputs and the outputs
20-way HE10 connectors

7
No
Screw
Miniature sub-base
Synergy with Tego Power and Micro PLC
Miniature sub-base - Common per group of 4 channels
Synergy with Tego Power and Micro PLC
8
ABE 7H16CM11 ABE 7H16CM21 ABE 7P16M111 ABE 7R16M111
8/12 8/16 8/15 9
10
8/3
Selection guide (continued) Connection interfaces
Discrete input and output sub-bases
Applications Discrete outputs
1 Optimum Universal Optimum Universal
2
Compatibility TSX Micro, Modicon Premium, Modicon Quantum, Modicon M340
Relay sub-base Electromechanical, fixed Electromechanical or solid state

3
Equipped with relays Yes Yes No No
4 Output voltage 5 V... 30 V c 5 V... 150 V c 24 V c (solid state) 5 V... 150 V c

230 V a 230 V a 5 V... 24 V c, 230 V a (E.M.) 230 V a
Output current per channel 2 A (th) 3 A (th) 5 A (th) 2 A (solid state) 0.5 to 10 A
6 A (electromechanical) (dependent on
relay)
5 Modularity 8 8 - 16 16 8 or 16
No. of terminals per channel 2 1 2 1 2 to 3
Type of connection terminals 1 N/O contact and 1 N/O contact 1 N/O contact and 1 N/O contact Signal, Polarities
6 common
Volt-free
common
Connectors 20-way HE 10 connector
7 Terminal
block
Removable Yes Yes Yes No No
Terminal type Screw or spring Screw
Additional or optional* Miniature sub-base Volt-free or common per group of Miniature sub-bases Isolator and fuse
function Latching relay 8 channels Common per group of 4 channels
8 Type of device ABE 7R08S216p ABE 7RppS1pp ABE 7RppS2pp ABE 7R16T111 ABE 7P16T111 ABE 7P16T2ppp
ABE 7P08T3ppp
Page 8/14 8/15 8/16
(1) For TSX Micro and Modicon Premium PLCs.
10
8/4
Discrete outputs Discrete inputs or outputs
Universal Universal
1
2
TSX Micro, Modicon Premium, Modicon Quantum, Modicon M340
Electromechanical, plug-in Solid state, fixed Solid state, fixed Solid state,
plug-in 3
Yes Yes Yes No
24 V c From 24 V c From 5 V TTL

to 230 V a to 230 V a
5 V... 150 V c 24 V c 4
230 V a
5 A (th) 8 A (th) 0.5 to 2 A 125 mA 0.5 A 125 mA 12 mA
16 5
2 to 3 2 to 6 2 3 2
1 C/O contact or 1 N/O 1 C/O contact or Signal and 0 V 24 V c and 0 V Signal can be Signal Signal and
contact and common 2 C/O contacts
and common
signal isolated,
Protected
common 6
common
20-way HE 10 connector
No Yes No No Yes No
7
Screw Screw or spring Screw Screw or spring
Volt-free or common per group of: Fault signal Isolator and fuse 3-wire proximity Isolator and fuse
8 channels 4 channels (indicator) sensor (indicator)
ABE 7R16T2pp ABE 7R16T3pp ABE 7SppS2Bp ABE 7H16F43 ABE 7H16R3p ABE 7H16S43 ABE 7S16E2ppE ABE 7P16F31p 8
8/15 8/14 8/13 8/14 8/15
10
8/5
Selection guide (continued) Connection interfaces
Analog and application-specific sub-bases
Applications Analog signals and special functions
3 Compatibility TSX Micro: Modicon Premium: Modicon Premium: Modicon Premium: Modicon M340:
v TSX 37 22 v TSX CTYpA v TSX ASY810 v TSX ASY410 v BMX ART 0414
v TSX CTZpA v TSX CAYp1 v TSX AEY1600 v TSX AEY420 v BMX ART 0814
TSX ApY800 Modicon M340: Modicon Premium:
Modicon M340: v BMX AMO0410 v TSX AEY1614
v BMX AMI 0800 Modicon Quantum
v BMX AMI 0810 v 140 AVO 020 00
4 v BMX AMO 0802

Modicon Quantum:
v 140 AVI 030 00
v 140 ACO 020 00
v 140 ACI 030 00

v 140 ACI 040 00
v 140 ACO 130 00
Type of signal Counter inputs and Counter inputs Analog inputs Analog outputs Analog inputs
5 analog I/O Axis control

Position control
Current/Voltage
Pt 100
Current
Voltage
Functions Passive connection, point-to-point with shield continuity Connection of cold junction
compensation or provision,
distribution of isolated
power supplies
6 Modularity 1 counter channel or

8 analog inputs + 2 analog outputs
8 channels 4 channels 4 channels
Output voltage 24 V c
7 Output current per channel 25 mA
No. of terminals per channel 2 2 or 4 2 or 4 2 or 4
Connector type 15-way SUB-D + 9-way SUB-D 25-way SUB-D 25-way SUB-D
8
Terminal Removable No No No
block Terminal type Screw Screw Screw
Type of device ABE 7CPA01 ABE 7CPA02 ABE 7CPA21 ABE 7CPA412
ABE 7CPA410
9 Page 8/18
10
8/6
Analog signals and special functions
Modicon Premium: Modicon Premium: Modicon Premium: Modicon Premium: Modicon Premium:
3
v TSX AEY800 v TSX AEY810 v TSX CAYp1, v TSX AEY1614 v TSX PAY2p2
v TSX AEY1600 Modicon M340: v TSX CTYpA
Modicon Quantum: v BMX AMI 0800
v 140 AVI 030 00 v BMX AMI 0810
v 140 ACI 030 00 v BMX AMO 0802
v 140 ACI 040 00 Modicon Quantum:
v 140 AVI 030 00
v 140 ACI 030 00
v 140 ACI 040 00
4
Analog inputs Isolated analog inputs Counter inputs Inputs for thermocouples I/O
Current
Voltage
Pt 100
5
Distribution of sensor power Distribution of isolated sensor Acquisition of value from an Connection of Safety module (BG)
supplies by limiter (25 mA) power supplies by converter absolute encoder 16 thermocouples with cold
junction compensation
8 channels 8 channels 1 channel 16 channels 12 Emergency stops 6

24 V c
24 V c
25 mA
7
2 or 4 2 or 4 1
25-way SUB-D 25-way SUB-D 15-way SUB-D 25-way SUB-D 50-way SUB-D
8
No No No No No
Screw Screw or spring Screw Screw Screw
ABE 7CPA03 ABE 7CPA31p ABE 7CPA11 ABE 7CPA12 ABE 7CPA13
8/18
9
10
8/7
Presentation Connection interfaces
Cordsets for Modicon Premium platform
7 1a Discrete I/O modules with HE 10 connectors.

1b Analog I/O modules with 25-way SUB-D connectors.
1c Application-specific modules with screw terminals.
2a A single type of cable with 20-way HE 10 connectors, for 8, 12 or 16-channel modularity. The HE 10 connectors can be moulded,
TSX CDPppp (AWG 22) or insulation piercing, ABF H20Hppp (AWG 28).
These cordsets are available in 0.5, 1, 2, 3 and 5 m lengths. AWG 28 (0.08 mm2) allows input and output sub-bases rated 100 mA to be
connected directly, as well as sub-bases with relays.
8 Adaptor ABE 7ACC02 allows connection of sub-bases with 8-channel modularity.
2b All analog signals are connected with a pre-wired cable TSX CAP030/100 with 25-way SUB-D connectors, guaranteeing shielding continuity.
2c Cable TSX CPPp02
3a 8-channel Modicon Telefast ABE 7 sub-bases.
3b Sub-bases dedicated to counter and analog channels:
- ABE 7CPA02 for connecting current, voltage or PT100 inputs on a screw terminal block
- ABE 7CPA03 with 4-20 mA sensor loop power supply and with 25 mA/channel limiter
9 - ABE 7CPA21 for connecting output modules with 4 analog channels on a screw terminal block
- ABE 7CPA31 with the 4-20 mA sensor loop isolated power supply for 8 input channels isolated from one another
- ABE 7CPA11 for connecting an absolute encoder with parallel outputs
- ABE 7CPA12 for connecting 16 thermocouple probes
3c Sub-base ABE 7CPA13 dedicated to the safety channels.
4a 12 or 16-channel Modicon Telefast ABE 7 sub-bases.
5a Splitter sub-bases for connecting discrete I/O in parallel from a Modicon Telefast ABE 7 sub-base on 2 different PLCs:
10 - ABE 7ACC10 for output redundancy
- ABE 7ACC11 for input redundancy
6a Sub-base ABE 7CPA01 dedicated to connecting axis control and counter inputs on a terminal block.
(1) Connection of the 24 V c power supply is only possible using Telefast sub-bases. The 0 V c connections must be equipotential.
8/8
Compatibility Connection interfaces
Modicon Premium discrete I/O modules and
ABE 7 sub-bases
Combinations of discrete I/O on the Modicon Premium platform with ABE 7 sub-bases
(item numbers: see Presentation on page 8/8) Discrete I/O modules for Modicon Premium
Reference for 24 V c discrete I/O modules (item 1a)
Inputs Outputs I/O
1
4 x 16 I 2 x 16 I 1 x 16 I 4 x 16 O 1 x 16 I 1 x 12 O
2 x 16 I 2 x 16 O
TSX DEY 64 TSX DEY 32 TSX DEY 16 TSX DSY 64 TSX DMY 28 FK
D2K DK FK T2K TSX DMY 28 RFK
TSX DEY 32 TSX DSY 32
Required cordsets
D2K T2K
2
Preassembled TSX CDPpp3 (item 2a), see page 8/19 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
cordsets
(at both ends) ABF H20Hpp0 (item 2a), see page 8/19 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Passive connection sub-bases

Universal ABE 7H08Rpp (1) (1) (1) (1)
8 channels
(item 3a)
ABE 7H08S21 (1) (1) (1) (1) 3
Universal ABE 7H12Rpp
12 channels ABE 7H12S21
(item 4a)
Universal ABE 7H16Rpp ABE 7H16
16 channels R20
(item 4a)
4
ABE 7H16Cpp ABE 7H16
R20
ABE 7H20Eppp (2) ABE 7H16
R20
ABE 7H16S21
ABE 7H16R23
ABE 7H16F43
ABE 7H16S43
Input adaptor sub-bases with solid state relays 5
Universal ABE 7S16E2pp
16 channels Fixed solid state relays, removable terminal
(item 4a) blocks
ABE 7P16F3pp
Plug-in solid state relays
Output adaptor sub-bases with fixed relays, removable terminal blocks
Optimum & ABE 7S08S2pp (1) 6
Universal Solid state relays
8 channels ABE 7R08Sppp (1)
(item 3a) Electromechanical relays
Optimum & ABE 7S16Sppp
16 channels
7
ABE 7R16Sppp
Output adaptor sub-bases with plug-in relays
Universal ABE 7P08T330p (1)
8 channels Solid state relays
(item 3a)
Optimum & ABE 7R16Tppp
Universal Electromechanical relays
16 channels
(item 4a)
ABE 7P16Tppp
Solid state and/or electromechanical relays
8
Compatible
Not compatible
(1) Via splitter sub-base ABE 7ACC02 used to separate 16 channels into 2 x 8 channels.
(2) Low-cost sub-base ABE 7H20Eppp including connection cable.
10
References:
pages 8/12
8/9
Combinations (continued) Connection interfaces
Modicon Premium analog I/O modules and
ABE 7 sub-bases
Combinations of analog I/O on the Modicon Premium platform with ABE 7 sub-bases
(item numbers: see Presentation on page 8/8) Analog I/O modules for Modicon Premium
1 Reference for analog I/O modules (item 1b)
Inputs Outputs Thermo-
couple inputs
2x8I 8I 8I 4I 4O 8O 2x8I
TSX AEY TSX AEY TSX AEY TSX AEY TSX ASY TSX ASY TSX AEY
1600 800 810 420 410 800 1614
Required cordsets
2 Preassembled TSX CAPpp0 (item 2b) Yes Yes Yes Yes (2) Yes Yes
cordsets
(at both ends)
8 channels ABE 7H08S21
(item 3a)
3 Universal
12 channels
ABE 7H12Rpp
ABE 7H12S21
(item 4a)
16 channels ABE 7H16Cpp
(item 4a)
ABE 7H20Eppp (1)
ABE 7H16S21
4 ABE 7H16R23
ABE 7H16F43
ABE 7H16S43
Input adaptor sub-bases with solid state relays
16 channels Fixed solid state relays, removable terminal
5
(item 4a) blocks
ABE 7P16F3pp
Optimum & ABE 7S08S2pp
8 channels ABE 7R08Sppp
(item 3a)
6
Electromechanical relays
Universal ABE 7P08T330p
7 (item 3a)
16 channels ABE 7P16Tppp
(item 4a) Solid state and/or electromechanical relays
Sub-bases for analog channels
ABE 7CPA01 (item 6a)
8 ABE 7CPA11 (item 3b)
ABE 7CPA02 (item 3b)
ABE 7CPA21 (item 3b) (2)
9 ABE 7CPA13 (item 3c)
Compatible
Not
compatible
(2) Cabled connector ABF Y25S200 equipped with terminal block TSX BLY 01.
10
(3) Only the first 4 channels are balanced.
References:
pages 8/12
8/10
Combinations (continued) Connection interfaces
Modicon Premium application-specific I/O modules and
ABE 7 sub-bases
Combinations of application-specific I/O on the Modicon Premium platform with ABE 7 sub-bases
(item numbers: see Presentation on page 8/8) Application-specific I/O modules for Modicon Premium
Reference for application-specific I/O modules (item 1c)
Axis control Counter High-speed counter Safety
1
Speed Auxiliary Auxiliary Counter Auxiliary Counter
reference inputs inputs inputs
TSX CAYp1, TSX CFYpA TSX CTYpA TSX CTY2C TSX PAY 262
Required cordsets
Preassembled TSX CAP030 (item 2b) Yes No No Yes No Yes No
cordsets
(at both ends)
TSX CDPpp3 (item 2a) No Yes Yes No Yes No No 2
TSX CPPp02 (item 2c) No No No No No No Yes
Universal ABE 7H08Rpp ABE 7H08
8 channels R10 (1)
(item 3a) ABE 7H08S21
Universal
12 channels
ABE 7H12Rpp
ABE 7H12S21 3
(item 4a)
Universal ABE 7H16Rpp ABE 7H16 ABE 7H16 ABE 7H16
16 channels R20 R20 (2) R20 (2)
(item 4a) ABE 7H16Cpp ABE 7H16 ABE 7H16
R20 R20 (2)
ABE 7H20Eppp (3) ABE 7H16 ABE 7H16
ABE 7H16S21
R20 R20 (2)
4
ABE 7H16R23
ABE 7H16F43
ABE 7H16S43
Input adaptor sub-bases with solid state relays
16 channels
(item 5)
Fixed solid state relays, removable terminal
blocks
5
ABE 7P16F3pp
Optimum & ABE 7S08S2pp
8 channels
(item 3a)
ABE 7R08Sppp
Electromechanical relays 6
ABE 7P08T330p
7
Universal
(item 3a)
16 channels ABE 7P16Tppp
(item 4a) Solid state and/or electromechanical relays
Sub-bases for counter channels
ABE 7CPA01 (item 6a)
8
ABE 7CPA13 (item 3c)
9
Compatible
Not
compatible
(1) 1-channel connection.
(2) 2-channel connection.
(4) Compatibility with module TSX CAYp1 only.
10
References:
pages 8/12
8/11
References Connection interfaces
Passive connection sub-bases for discrete signals

Optimum "Economy" sub-bases
1 Function No. of No. of terminals For PLCs
channels per on row
Length of
PLC
Type of
connection
Reference Weight
channel number connection

cable kg
Input or output 16 1 2 Modicon TSX Micro 1 m Screw ABE 7H20E100 0.330
Modicon Premium
2 2m Screw ABE 7H20E200 0.410
3m Screw ABE 7H20E300 0.480
Modicon M340 (1) Screw ABE 7H34E000 0.150
3 1m Screw ABE 7H34E100 0.330
ABE 7H20Eppp
4
Siemens S7 1.5 m Screw ABE 7H32E150 0.360
5 ABE 7H16C21
Optimum "Miniature" sub-bases
Function No. of No. of terminals LED per channel Polarity Type of Reference Weight
channels per on row distribution connection
channel number kg
Input or output 16 1 1 No No Screw ABE 7H16C10 0.160
6 Yes No Screw ABE 7H16C11 0.160
2 2 Yes 0 or 24 V Screw ABE 7H16C21 0.205
ABE 7H16CM21 3 3 Yes 0 or 24 V Screw ABE 7H16C31 0.260
7 Input and output

(2)
16 1 1 Yes No Screw ABE 7H16CM11 0.160
2 2 Yes 0 or 24 V Screw ABE 7H16CM21 0.200
(1) Sub-base supplied without cordset.
8
(2) 8 I + 8 Q: these products have 2 common connections which enable inputs and outputs to be connected to the same
sub-base at the same time.
10
8/12
References (continued) Connection interfaces
Passive connection sub-bases for discrete signals (continued)

Universal sub-bases
Function No. of No. of terminals LED per Polarity
channels per
Isolator (I) Type of
on row channel distribution Fuse (F) connection
Reference Weight 1
channel number per channel
kg
Input or output 8 1 1 No No Screw ABE 7H08R10 0.187
Yes No Screw ABE 7H08R11 0.187
2 2 Yes 0 or 24 V Screw ABE 7H08R21 0.218

2
I Screw ABE 7H08S21 0.245
12 1 1 No No Screw ABE 7H12R10 0.274
Yes No Screw ABE 7H12R11 0.274 3

ABE 7HppR1p 2 No No Screw ABE 7H12R50 0.196
2 2 No 0 or 24 V Screw ABE 7H12R20 0.300
Yes 0 or 24 V Screw ABE 7H12R21 0.300

4
16 1 1 No No Screw ABE 7H16R10 0.274
Yes No Screw ABE 7H16R11 0.274
2 No No Screw ABE 7H16R50 0.196 5


6
Input type 2 (1) 16 2 2 Yes 0 or 24 V Screw ABE 7H16R23 0.320
Input 16 2 1 Yes 24 V I, F (2) Screw ABE 7H16S43 0.640

7
Output 16 2 1 Yes 0V I, F (2) Screw ABE 7H16F43 0.640
(1) For TSX Micro, Modicon Premium.

(2) With LED to indicate blown fuse.
10
8/13
Adaptor sub-bases with fixed relays and removable
terminal blocks
Adaptor sub-bases with fixed solid state relays, removable terminal blocks
Universal input sub-bases with solid state relays
1 Number of
channels
No. of
terminals
Isolation of PLC/
Operative part
Voltage Type of
connection
Reference Weight
per channel kg
16 2 Yes c 24 V Screw ABE 7S16E2B1 0.370
Spring ABE 7S16E2B1E 0.370
2
c 48 V Screw ABE 7S16E2E1 0.370
a 48 V Screw ABE 7S16E2E0 0.386

ABE 7H16E2pp
a 110 V Screw ABE 7S16E2F0 0.397
a 230 V Screw ABE 7S16E2M0 0.407
3
Spring ABE 7S16E2M0E 0.407
Universal output sub-bases with solid state relays

Number of Isolation of Output Output Fault detection Type of Reference Weight
channels PLC/ voltage current signal (1) connection
Operative
part kg
16 No 24 V c 0.5 A Yes (2) Screw ABE 7S16S2B0 0.405
4 Spring ABE 7S16S2B0E 0.405
No Screw ABE 7S16S1B2 0.400
Spring ABE 7S16S1B2E 0.400
Optimum and Universal output sub-bases with electromechanical relays

5 Number of
channels
Number of contacts Output
current
Polarity
distribution/
Type of
connection
Reference Weight
operative part kg
8 1 N/O 2A Contact common Screw ABE 7R08S111 0.252
per group of 4
channels
Latching 2A Volt-free Screw ABE 7R08S216 0.448
6 ABE 7R08S216 1 N/O 5A Volt-free Screw ABE 7R08S210 0.448
16 1 N/O 2A Contact common Screw ABE 7R16S111 0.405

per group of 8
channels
Spring ABE 7R16S111E 0.405
7 1 N/O 5A Volt-free Screw ABE 7R16S210 0.405
Spring ABE 7R16S210E 0.405
Common per Screw ABE 7R16S212 0.400

group of
8 channels on
both poles
8 (1) A fault on a sub-base output Qn will set PLC output Qn to safety mode, which will be detected by the PLC.
(2) Can only be used with modules with protected outputs.
10
8/14
Input/output adaptor sub-bases for or with plug-in relays
Adaptor sub-bases with plug-in relays

Universal input sub-bases for solid state relays, supplied without relays
Number of
channels
No. of
terminals
For relay type Isolation of
PLC/
Input
connection
Type of
connection
Reference Weight 1
per channel Operative
part kg
16 2 ABS 7E Yes Volt-free Screw ABE 7P16F310 0.850
ABR 7
ABS 7S33E
Polarity Screw ABE 7P16F312 0.850
distribution
Optimum and Universal output sub-bases, supplied with electromechanical relays (1)
2
Number of Relay width Relay type Number and Polarity distribution/operative Reference Weight
channels supplied type of part
contacts kg
16 5 mm ABR 7S11 1 N/O Contact common per group of 4 ABE 7R16T111 0.600
channels
Contact common per group of 4 ABE 7R16M111 0.600 3

output channels (2)
+ 2 common input terminals
10 mm ABR 7S21 1 N/O Volt-free ABE 7R16T210 0.735
ABE 7R16M111
Common on both poles (3) ABE 7R16T212 0.730

4
ABR 7S23 1 C/O Volt-free ABE 7R16T230 0.775
Contact common (3) ABE 7R16T231 0.730
ABE 7R16T210
12 mm ABR 7S33 1 C/O Volt-free ABE 7R16T330 1.300
5
Common on both poles (4) ABE 7R16T332 1.200
ABR 7S37 2 C/O Volt-free ABE 7R16T370 1.300 6

(1) The sub-bases are supplied as standard with electromechanical relays, all or part of which can be replaced by solid state
relays of the same width (it is possible to combine these different technologies on a single sub-base).
(2) Two connection methods are available, enabling inputs and outputs to be connected to the same sub-base
at the same time.
(3) Per group of 8 channels.
(4) Per group of 4 channels. 7
10
8/15
Output adaptor sub-bases for plug-in relays
Output adaptor sub-bases for plug-in relays

Optimum and Universal output sub-bases for solid state relays and/or electromechanical relays (1)
1 No. of Relay
channels width
For relay type Isolator
per
Fuse per Polarity distribution/
channel operative part
Type of
connection
Reference Weight
channel
mm kg
16 5 mm ABR 7S11 No No Contact common per Screw ABE 7P16T111 0.550
ABS 7SC1B group of 4 channels
2 10 mm ABR 7S2p
ABS 7SA2p
No No Volt-free Screw ABE 7P16T210
(2)
0.615
ABS 7SC2p
ABE 7ACC20
ABE 7P16T230 0.655
(2)
Yes Volt-free Screw ABE 7P16T214 0.675
3 ABE 7P16T2pp
No Common on both poles Screw ABE 7P16T212 0.615
(3)
Yes Common on both poles Screw ABE 7P16T215 0.670

(3)
4 8 12 mm ABR 7S33 No No Volt-free Screw ABE 7P08T330 0.450

ABS 7A3p
ABS 7SC3pp
ABE 7ACC21
16 12 mm ABR 7S33 No No Volt-free Screw ABE 7P16T330 0.900
ABS 7A3p
ABS 7SC3pp
5 ABE 7ACC21
Common on both poles
(4)
Screw ABE 7P16T332 0.900
ABR 7S33 No Yes Volt-free Screw ABE 7P16T334 0.900

ABS 7A3M
ABS 7SC3E
ABE 7ACC21
Yes Yes Common on both poles Screw ABE 7P16T318 1.000
6 (4)
(1) Not equipped with relays.

(2) With relay ABR 7S21 for sub-base ABE 7P16T210, with relay ABR 7S23 for sub-base ABE 7P16T230p.
10
8/16
Plug-in relays

Relay width Functions Input circuit Output circuit Unit reference Weight
Current Nominal
voltage
Current Nominal
voltage Order in multiples 1
of 4 kg
5 mm Output c 24 V 2A 24 V c ABS 7SC1B 0.010
571152
10 mm Output c 24 V 0.5 A 548 V c ABS 7SC2E 0.016

ABS 7SC1B
24240 V a ABS 7SA2M 0.016

2
12 mm Input c 5 V TTL 24 V c ABS 7EC3AL 0.014
24 V Type 2 24 V c ABS 7EC3B2 0.014

3
48 V Type 2 24 V c ABS 7EC3E2 0.014
50 Hz a 48 V 24 V c ABS 7EA3E5 0.014
60 Hz a 110130 V 24 V c ABS 7EA3F5 0.014

4
50 Hz a 230240 V 24 V c ABS 7EA3M5 0.014
Output c 24 V 2A 24 V c ABS 7SC3BA 0.016

Self-protected
1.5 A 548 V c ABS 7SC3E 0.016

5
1.5 A 24240 V a ABS 7SA3MA 0.016
Plug-in electromechanical relays

Relay width Control
voltage
Output current Number of
(1) contacts
Order in
multiples
Unit reference Weight
kg
6
5 mm 24 V c 5 A (Ith) 1 N/O 4 ABR 7S11 0.005
816476
10 mm 24 V c 5 A (Ith) 1 N/O 4 ABR 7S21 0.008
ABR 7S2p
1 C/O 4 ABR 7S23 0.008 7
12 mm 2Vc 10 A (Ith) 1 C/O 4 ABR 7S33 0.017
816474
8 A (Ith) 2 C/O 4 ABR 7S37 0.017
48 V c 8 A (Ith) 1 C/O 4 ABR 7S33E 0.017 8

ABR 7S3p
Accessory
kg
Extractor for 5 mm miniature relay ABE 7ACC12 0.010
10
8/17
References Connection interfaces
Connection sub-bases for analog channels and
application-specific channels
Connection sub-bases for counter and analog channels

Functions For PLCs Compatible Type of Type of Reference Weight
1 modules connection on connection
Telefast end kg
Analog and counter TSX Micro Analog and 15-way SUB-D Screw ABE 7CPA01 0.300
ABE 7CPA01 integrated
counter
TSX 37 22
TSX CTZpA
2
Counter, axis control, Modicon TSX CTYpA 15-way SUB-D Screw ABE 7CPA01 0.300
position control Premium TSX CAYp1
Connection of absolute Modicon TSX CTYpA 15-way SUB-D Screw ABE 7CPA11 0.330
encoder with parallel Premium TSX CAYp1
output
Distribution of Modicon M340 BMX ART 0414 25-way SUB-D Screw ABE 7CPA412 0.180
3 4 thermocouples
Distribution of Modicon
BMX ART 0814
TSX AEY1614 25-way SUB-D Screw ABE 7CPA12 0.300

ABE 7CPA11 16 thermocouples Premium
Passive distribution Modicon TSX ASY810 25-way SUB-D Screw ABE 7CPA02 0.290
of 8 analog EIS channels Premium TSX AEY1600
on screw terminals, TSX ApY800
4
with shield continuity Modicon M340 BMX AMI 0800
BMX AMI 0810
BMX AMO 0802
Modicon 140 AVI 030 00
Quantum 140 ACI 030 00
140 ACI 040 00
140 ACO 130 00
5 ABE 7CPA 21/410/412 Provision and Modicon M340 BMX AMI 0410 25-way SUB-D Screw ABE 7CPA410 0.180
distribution of protected
isolated power supplies
for 4 analog input
channels
Distribution of 4 analog Modicon TSX ASY410 25-way SUB-D Screw ABE 7CPA21 0.210
output channels Premium TSX AEY420
Modicon M340 BMX AMO 0410
6 Modicon
Quantum
140 AVO 020 00
140 ACO 020 00
Distribution and Modicon TSX AEY800 25-way SUB-D Screw ABE 7CPA03 0.330
supply of 8 analog Premium TSX AEY1600
input channels
with limitation of each Modicon 140 AVI 030 00
current loop Quantum 140 ACI 030 00
7 140 ACI 040 00
Distribution and supply Modicon TSX AEY810 25-way SUB-D Screw ABE 7CPA31 0.410
of 8 analog input Premium
channels isolated from Modicon M340 BMX AMI 0800
one another with 25 mA/ BMX AMI 0810
channel limitation BMX AMO 0802 Spring ABE 7CPA31E 0.410
8
Modicon 140 AVI 030 00
Quantum 140 ACI 030 00
140 ACI 040 00
Safety Modicon TSX PAY2p2 25-way SUB-D Screw ABE 7CPA13 0.290
Premium
10
8/18
Cabled connectors for Modicon Quantum I/O modules
Cabled connectors for Modicon Quantum I/O modules

816500
Type of I/O Type of Gauge Cross- Length No. of Reference Weight

signal modules connector
AWG
section
mm m
channels
kg
1
Inputs and Please consult 2 x 20-way 22 0.324 1.5 2 x 16 ABF M32H150 0.650
relay outputs our website HE 10
www.schneider-electric.com 3 2 x 16 ABF M32H300 1.150
0.5 A outputs Please consult

our website
2 x 20-way
HE 10
22 0.324 1.5 2 x 16 ABF M32H151 0.650
2
www.schneider-electric.com + external 3 2 x 16 ABF M32H301 1.150
power supply
Inputs or 140 DDI 364 00 2 x 20-way 22 0.324 0.5 6 x 16 TSX CDP 053 0.085
outputs 140 DDO 364 00 HE 10
(96 channels) 1 6 x 16 TSX CDP 103 0.150
ABF M32Hpp1 2 6 x 16 TSX CDP 203 0.280 3

3 6 x 16 TSX CDP 303 0.410
5 6 x 16 TSX CDP 503 0.670
Analog inputs 140 AVI 030 00 1 x 25-way 24 0.22 2 8 ABF M08S201 0.600
4
570464
140 ACI 030 00 SUB-D

140 ACI 040 00 2 x 25-way 24 0.22 2 16 ABF M16S201 0.620
SUB-D
Analog outputs 140 AVO 020 00 1 x 25-way 24 0.22 2 4 ABF M04S200 0.450
SUB-D
140 ACO 020 00 1 x 25-way
SUB-D
24 0.22 2 4 ABF M04S201 0.450
5
140 ACO 130 00 1 x 25-way 24 0.22 2 8 ABF M04S202 0.450
TSX CDP p03 SUB-D
10
8/19
Accessories for connection sub-bases
816483
Accessories
Description No. of channels Characteristics Order in multiples Unit Weight
1 Kit for fixing on solid plate
of
10
reference
ABE 7ACC01
kg
0.008
ABE 7ACC02
Splitter sub-base 16 as 1 ABE 7ACC02 0.075
2 x 8 channels
Redundant output 16 as 1 ABE 7ACC10 0.075

2 sub-base 2 x 16 channels
816480
Redundant input 16 as 1 ABE 7ACC11 0.075

sub-base 2 x 16 channels
Plug-in continuity blocks Width 10 mm 4 ABE 7ACC20 0.007
3 Width 12 mm 4 ABE 7ACC21 0.010
Enclosure feedthrough 16 19-way 1 ABE 7ACC82 0.150

with CNOMO M23
connector (1 x 20-way HE
10 connector, PLC end)
Impedance adaptor for Used with 1 ABE 7ACC85 0.012

4 ABE 7ACC80 + ABE 7ACC81 compatibility
Type 2
ABE 7ACC82 and
ABE 7ACC83
IP 65 cable gland For 3 cables 5 ABE 7ACC84 0.300

816481
Additional snap-on 8 10 screw terminals 5 ABE 7BV10 0.030

terminal blocks
5 (shunted terminals)
16 20 screw terminals 5 ABE 7BV20 0.060
ABE 7BV20
I/O simulator sub-base 16 For display, 1 ABE 7TES160 0.350
forcing, inhibition,
continuity
Self-adhesive marker For 6 characters 50 AR1 SB3 0.001

6 tag holder
580700
2 01
8
9
Quick-blow fuses 0.125 A 10 ABE 7FU012 0.010
5 x 20, 250 V, UL
0
2 01 10
1
11
2
3
12
13
0.5 A 10 ABE 7FU050 0.010
4
14
5
6 15
7 1A 10 ABE 7FU100 0.010
7 2A 10 ABE 7FU200 0.010

ABE 7TES160
4A 10 ABE 7FU400 0.010
6.3 A 10 ABE 7FU630 0.010
10
8/20
Accessories for connection sub-bases
Commoning link accessories

816479
Description For common Colour Distance Reference Weight
Commoning links Coil White

between cable ends
12 cm ABF C08R12W
kg
0.020
1
Modularity 8 x 1 mm2
AR1 SB3 2 cm ABF C08R02W 0.010
a Red 12 cm ABF C08R12R 0.020
2 cm ABF C08R02R 0.010 2

816484
c Blue 12 cm ABF C08R12B 0.020
2 cm ABF C08R02B 0.010
3
ABE C08Rppp
10
8/21
Selection guide Power supplies and transformers
Phaseo
Regulated switch mode power supplies
Power supplies Regulated switch mode power supplies

ABL 8MEM, ABL 7RM: 7 to 60 W - Rail mounting
1 ABL 8REM, ABL 7RP: 60 to 144 W - Rail mounting
Nominal input voltage a 100...240 V

c 120...250 V
Connection to United States Single-phase (N-L1) connection
3 worldwide line
supplies
- 120 V (phase-to-neutral)
- 240 V (phase-to-phase)
or
2-phase (L1-L2) connection
Europe Single-phase (N-L1) connection

United States
4
Undervoltage control Yes

Protection against overloads and short-circuits Yes, voltage detection.
Automatic reset on elimination of the fault
Diagnostics relay
5
Compatibility with function modules
Power reserve (Boost) 1.25 to 1.4 In for 1 minute, depending on model (for ABL 8MEM) No
Output voltage c5V c 12 V c 24 V c 48 V
Output current 0.3 A ABL 8MEM24003
6 0.6 A ABL 8MEM24006
1.2 A ABL 8MEM24012
2A ABL 8MEM12020
2.5 A ABL 7RM24025 ABL 7RP4803
7 3A ABL 8REM24030
3.5 A
4A ABL 8MEM05040
5A ABL 7RP1205 ABL 8REM24050
8 6A
10 A
20 A
30 A
9 40 A
Pages 8/26 8/26 and 8/28 8/28
10
8/22
ABL4: 85 to 960 W - Compact - Rail mounting Function modules ABL 8DCC: converters c/c
a 100230 V a 120 V or a 230 V a 400500 V c 24 V
Single-phase (N-L1) Single-phase (N-L1)

connection connection
or
3
Single-phase (N-L1) 3-phase (L1-L2-L3)
connection connection
3-phase (L1-L2-L3)
4
connection
No No No
Yes, current limitation Yes, current limitation
Automatic reset on elimination of the fault
Yes Yes Yes Yes, depending on model
5
Yes with buffer module, battery and battery check modules, redundancy module and discriminating downstream protection module
Depending on model: 1.5 to 1.7 In for 5 to 30 seconds No
c 24 V c5V c 7...12 V
6
ABL 8DCC12020 (1)
7
ABL 4RSM24035
ABL 4RSM24050
ABL 8DCC05060 (1) 8

ABL 4RSM24100
ABL 4RSM24200 ABL 4WSR24200
ABL 4WSR24300
ABL 4WSR24400 9
8/30 (2)
(1) Converter module c/c, must be used with a Phaseo power supply.
(2) Certain offers cannot be marketed in certain countries, please consult your Customer Care Centre.
10
8/23
Selection guide Power supplies and transformers
Phaseo
Rectified power supplies
Power supplies Regulated switch mode

ABL 1REM/1RPM: 60 to 240 W - Mounting on panel
2
Input voltage 100...240 V a
120...370 V c
Connection to United States
3 world-wide line supplies - 120 V (in phase-to-neutral)

- 240 V (in phase-to-phase)
Single-phase (N-L1) or 2-phase (L1-L2) connection
Europe
- 230 V (in phase-to-neutral) Single-phase (N-L1)
United States
- 277 V (in phase-to-neutral) Single-phase (N-L1)
4 IEC/EN 61000-3-2 conformity Yes for ABL 1RP, not applicable for ABL1REM24025/12050
Protection against undervoltage
Protection against overloads and short-circuits Yes, voltage detection. Automatic restart on elimination on the fault
Diagnostic relay
Compatibility with function modules
5 Power reserve (Boost)

Output voltage
No
12 V c 24 V c
Output current 0.5 A
1A
2A
6 2.5 A ABL 1REM24025
3A
4A
7 4.2 A ABL 1RpM24042
4.8 A
5A ABL 1REM12050
6A
8 6.2 A ABL 1RpM24062
8.3 A ABL 1RPM12083
10 A ABL 1RpM24100
15 A
9 20 A
30 A
40 A
60 A
10 Pages Please consult our website www.schneider-electric.com
8/24
Rectified and filtered Regulated switch mode
ABL 8FEQ/8TEQ: 12 to 1440 W - Mounting on panel or rail - For severe ASI ABL: Power supplies for AS-Interface cabling system
application
1
2
/
230 V a and 400 V a 400 V a 100...240 V a
Single-phase (N-L1) connection

3
Single-phase (N-L1) or 3-phase (L1-L2-L3) connection Single-phase (N-L1) connection
Yes No Yes
4
No Yes
Yes depending on model, by fuse Yes, by external protection Yes
No
No
No
24 V c
No
30 V c 24 V c
5
ABL 8FEQ24005
ABL 8FEQ24010
ABL 8FEQ24020
ASI ABLB3002
6
ASI ABLD3002 (1)
ASI ABLM3024 (2)
ASI ABLM3024 (2)
ABL 8FEQ24040
7
ASI ABLB3004
ASI ABLD3004 (1)
ABL 8FEQ24060
ABL 8FEQ24100 ABL 8TEQ24100
ABL 8FEQ24150
ABL 8FEQ24200 ABL 8TEQ24200

9
ABL 8TEQ24300
ABL 8TEQ24400
ABL 8TEQ24600
Please consult our website www.schneider-electric.com 8/36

10
(1) With earth fault detection.
(2) One output 30 V c and one output 24 V c 5 %.
8/25
Presentation, Phaseo power supplies and
description transformers
ABL 8MEM, ABL 7RM
7 to 60 W - Rail mounting
Regulated switch mode power supplies ABL 8MEM, ABL 7RM
1 The ABL 8MEM, ABL 7RM power supply offer is designed to provide the DC voltage
necessary for the control circuits of automation system equipment consuming 7 to
60 W in 5, 12 and 24 V c.
Comprising six products, this range meets the needs encountered in industrial,
a c
commercial and residential applications. These compact electronic switch mode
power supplies provide a quality of output current that is suitable for the loads
supplied and compatible with the Zelio Logic range and the smallest Modicon
M340, Premium and Quantum configurations.
2 Clear guidelines are given on selecting the upstream protection devices which are
often used with them, and thus a comprehensive solution is provided that can be
used in total safety.
ABL 8MEM/7RM power supplies can be connected in phase-to-neutral (N-L1) or in
phase-to-phase (1) (L1-L2). They deliver a voltage that is precise to 3%, whatever
ABL 8MEMppppp Zelio Logic the load and whatever the type of line supply, within a range of 85 to 264 V a.
Conforming to IEC standards and UL, CSA and TUV certified, they are suitable for
3 universal use. The inclusion of overload and short-circuit protection makes
downstream protection unnecessary if discrimination is not required.
Due to their low power, ABL 8MEM/7RM power supplies consume very little
harmonic current and thus are not subject to the requirements of standard IEC/EN
61000-3-2 concerning harmonic pollution.
All ABL 8MEM/7RM power supplies have protection devices to ensure optimum
performance of the automation system with an automatic reset mode on elimination
4 of the fault.
All products are equipped with an output voltage adjustment potentiometer to
compensate for any line voltage drops in installations with long cable runs.
These power supplies also have a cable run inside the case so that the outputs can
be connected at the top or bottom of the product as required.
These power supplies are designed for direct mounting on 35 mm 5 rails, or on
a mounting plate using their retractable fixing lugs.
5 There are six references available in the Phaseo ABL 8MEM/7RM range:
b ABL8MEM24003 7W 0.3 A 24 V c
b ABL8MEM24006 15 W 0.6 A 24 V c
b ABL8MEM24012 30 W 1.2 A 24 V c
b ABL7RM24025 60 W 2.5 A 24 V c
6 b ABL8MEM05040
b ABL8MEM12020
20 W
25 W
4A
2A
5Vc
12 V c
(1) 240 V a nominal.
Description
ABL 8MEMpppp ABL7RM24025
7 7 1 7 1 2
3 3
4 4
8
6
9 1 2.5 mm2 screw terminal for connection of the incoming AC voltage

2 Output voltage adjustment potentiometer
3 2.5 mm2 screw terminal for connection of the output voltage
4 LED indicating presence of the DC output voltage
5 Duct for throughwiring of the output voltage conductors at the bottom (except for
model ABL 7RM24025)
10 6 Clip-on marker tag (except for model ABL 7RM24025)

7 Retractable fixing lugs for panel mounting
8/26
Combinations, Phaseo power supplies and
references transformers
ABL 8MEM, ABL 7RM
Selection of protection on the power supply primaries

Type of line supply 100 to 240 V a single-phase
Type of protection Thermal-magnetic circuit breaker
GB2 (IEC) (1) C60N (IEC)
gG fuse 1
C60N (UL/CSA)
ABL 8MEM05040 GB2 pp07 (2) 24581 2A
ABL 8MEM12020 24517
ABL 8MEM24003
ABL 8MEM24006
ABL 8MEM24012 2
ABL 7RM24025 GB2 pp08 (2) 24582 3A
24518
(1) UL pending
(2) Complete the reference by replacing pp with:
CB: for single-pole circuit-breaker with magnetic trip threshold 12 to 16 In
CD: for single-pole + neutral circuit-breaker with magnetic trip threshold 12 to 16 In
DB: for 2-pole circuit-breaker with magnetic trip threshold 12 to 16 In
CS: for single-pole circuit-breaker with magnetic trip threshold 5 to 7 In 3
References
Input voltage Secondary Reset Conformity Reference Weight
Output Nominal Nominal to standard
voltage power current IEC/EN
61000-3-2 (1) kg 4
Single-phase (N-L1) or 2-phase (L1-L2) connection
100240 V 5Vc 20 W 4A Automatic Not applicable ABL 8MEM05040 0.195
-15%, + 10%
50/60 Hz
12 V c 25 W 2A Automatic Not applicable ABL 8MEM12020 0.195
ABL 8MEM05040/12020/24012
5
24 V c 7W 0.3 A Automatic Not applicable ABL 8MEM24003 0.100
15 W 0.6 A Automatic Not applicable ABL 8MEM24006 0.100
30 W 1.2 A Automatic Not applicable ABL 8MEM24012 0.195 6

ABL 8MEM24003/24006
60 W 2.5 A Automatic Not applicable ABL 7RM24025 0.255
Description Use Order in Unit reference Weight
Clip-on marker Replacement parts for ABL 8MEM power supplies 100
multiples of
LAD 90
kg
0.030
7
tags
ABL 7RM24025
(1) Due to their power < 75 W, ABL 8MEM/7RM power supplies are not subject to the requirements of standard
IEC/EN 61000-3-2.
10
8/27
Presentation, Phaseo power supplies and
description transformers
ABL 8REM, ABL 7RP
Switch mode power supplies: range ABL 8REM/7RP

The ABL 8REM/7RP power supply offer is designed to provide the DC voltage
1 necessary for the control circuits of automation system equipment consuming 60 to
144 W in 12, 24 and 48 V c. Comprising four products, this range meets the needs
encountered in industrial, commercial, and residential applications. With phase-to-
neutral (N-L1) or phase-to-phase (1) (L1-L2) connection, these slim electronic switch
mode power supplies provide a quality of output current that is suitable for the loads
a
supplied and compatible with both the Twido range and the smallest Modicon M340,
Premium and Quantum configurations, making them ideal partners.
2 Their simplified characteristics in comparison with the ABL 8RP/8WP offer also
make them the low-cost solution for applications less affected by problems with the
line supply, such as harmonic pollution and outages. Clear guidelines are given on
selecting the upstream protection devices which are often used with them, and thus
a comprehensive solution is provided that can be used in total safety.
The ABL 8REM/7RP range of Phaseo power supplies delivers a voltage that is
3 c precise to 3%, whatever the load and whatever the type of line supply, within a range
of 85 to 264 V a. Conforming to IEC standards and UL, CSA and TUV certified, they
ABL 8REM24030 Twido
are suitable for universal use. The inclusion of overload and short-circuit protection
makes downstream protection unnecessary if discrimination is not required.
ABL 8REM power supplies do not have an anti-harmonic filter and do not satisfy
the requirements of standard IEC/EN 61000-3-2 concerning harmonic pollution.
4 ABL 7RP power supplies, however, are equipped with a PFC (Power Factor
Correction) filter, thus ensuring compliance with standard IEC/EN 61000-3-2.
All ABL 8REM/7RP Phaseo power supplies have protection devices to ensure
optimum performance of the automation system with an automatic reset mode on
elimination of the fault.
In the event of an overload or short-circuit, the integrated protection interrupts the
5 current supply before the output voltage drops below 19 V c. The protection device
resets itself automatically on elimination of the fault, which avoids having to take any
action or change a fuse.
All products are equipped with an output voltage adjustment potentiometer to

compensate for any line voltage drops in installations with long cable runs.
These power supplies are designed for direct mounting on 35 and 75 5 rails.
6 There are four references available in the ABL 8REM/7RP Phaseo range:
b ABL 8REM24030 72 W 3A 24 V c
b ABL 8REM24050 120 W 5A 24 V c
b ABL 7RP1205 60 W 5A 12 V c
b ABL 7RP4803 144 W 3A 48 V c
7 Description
1
1 2.5 mm2 enclosed screw terminals for connection of the input voltage
(single-phase N-L1, phase-to-phase L1-L2 (1))
2 Protective glass flap
3 Input voltage status LED (orange)
4 Output DC voltage status LED (green)
8 2
3
5 Locking catch for the glass flap (sealable)
6 Clip-on marker tag
4 7 Output voltage adjustment potentiometer
5 8 2.5 mm2 enclosed screw terminal block for connection of the DC output voltage
6
(1) 240 V a nominal.
7
9
8
10
8/28
Combinations, Phaseo power supplies and
references transformers
ABL 8REM, ABL 7RP

Type of line supply 100 V a 240 V a
Type of protection Thermal-magnetic circuit
breaker
gG fuse Thermal-magnetic circuit
breaker
gG fuse 1
GB2 (IEC) (1) C60N (IEC) GB2 (IEC) (1) C60N (IEC)
C60N (UL) C60N (UL)
ABL 7RP1205 GB2 pp06 (2) 24580 2A GB2 pp06 (2) 24580 1A
24516 24516
ABL 8REM24030 GB2 pp07 (2) 24581

24517
2A GB2 pp06 (2) 24580
24516
1A
2
ABL 8REM24050 GB2 pp07 (2) 24581 2A GB2 pp06 (2) 24580 1A
24517 24516
ABL 7RP4803 GB2 pp07 (2) 24581 2A GB2 pp06 (2) 24580 1A
24517 24516
3
(1) UL pending
(2) Complete the reference by replacing pp with:
CB: for single-pole circuit-breaker with magnetic trip threshold 12 to 16 In
CD: for single-pole + neutral circuit-breaker with magnetic trip threshold 12 to 16 In
DB: for 2-pole circuit-breaker with magnetic trip threshold 12 to 16 In
CS: for single-pole circuit-breaker with magnetic trip threshold 5 to 7 In
4
ABL 8REM/7RP range of Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies
Input voltage Secondary Reset Conformity Reference Weight
Output Nominal Nominal to standard kg
voltage power current IEC/EN 61000-3-2
Single-phase (N-L1) or phase-to-phase (L1-L2) connection

100...240 V a 12 V c 60 W 5A Automatic Yes ABL 7RP1205 1.000
5
- 15%, + 10% or manual
50/60 Hz
24 V c 72 W 3A Automatic No ABL 8REM24030 0.520
ABL 7RP1205/4803
6
120 W 5A Automatic No ABL 8REM24050 1.000
48 V c 144 W 2.5 A Automatic Yes ABL 7RP4803 1.000
7
or manual
ABL 8REM24030 ABL 8REM24050
10
8/29
Presentation Power supplies and transformers
Phaseo
ABL4
85 to 960 W - Compact - Rail mounting
Presentation
The range
1 The Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies ABL4 offer is designed to
provide the DC voltage necessary for the control circuits of automation system
equipment consuming 85 W to 960 W on c 24 V.
Comprising 7 products, this range of power supplies meets the needs encountered
in industrial applications.
Using electronic switch mode technology, these power supplies provide a quality of
output current that is suitable for the loads supplied and compatible with the following
2 ranges:
b Twido programmable controllers,
b Modicon logic controllers M238 and M258,
b Modicon motion controllers LMC 058,
b automation platforms M340, Premium and Quantum.
Due to their high overload withstand, the power supplies ABL4 are the power supply
3 solution for stepper motors, servo motors and integrated drives.
When used with function modules ABL8B/RED/D/P, they ensure continuity of
service in the event of power outages or application malfunctions. In addition, the
ABL 4RSM24200 model can be used in a redundant power supply without an
additional redundancy module due to its integrated diode.
Their high effectiveness enables us to offer power supplies that are among the
4 smallest on the market, thus considerably reducing the space required in
enclosures.
Compatibility with distribution systems
Power supplies ABL4 must be connected in phase-to-neutral, phase-to-phase (1) for
the ABL 4R, and in 3-phase for the ABL 4W.
5 They deliver a voltage that is precise to within 1% whatever the load and whatever
the type of line supply, within the following ranges:
v a 90264 V for the ABL 4RSM24035 and ABL 4RSM24050,
v a 90132 V and a 185264 V for the ABL 4RSM24100 and ABL 4RSM24200,
v a 340550 V for the ABL 4W.
Standards and certifications
Conforming to IEC standards and UL certified, the power supplies ABL4 are suitable
6 for universal use: they can be used to supply Protection Extra Low Voltage (PELV) or
Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) circuits in compliance with standard IEC/EN
60364-4-41 due to their double insulation between the input circuit (connected to the
line supply) and the output circuit and their internal device limiting the output voltage
to less than 60 V in the event of an internal fault.
7 Diagnostics
The operation of the power supply ABL4 can be checked using 2 LEDs located on
the front face.
A normally open contact (NO) relay also enables checking of the output voltage
compliance (contact closed if the output voltage exceeds 90% of the nominal
voltage).
Protection
8 Power supplies ABL4 have the following continuous protection (2):
v protection against overvoltages on the output circuit,
v thermal protection,
v protection against overcurrents and short-circuits on the output circuit.
Mounting
Power supplies ABL4 are mounted on Omega (5 35 mm) rail.
9 (1) Only on certain American line supplies.
(2) With automatic restarting.
10
8/30
Characteristics Power supplies and transformers
Phaseo
ABL4
Characteristics
Derating
The ambient temperature is a determining factor which limits the power that an electronic power supply can deliver
continuously. If the temperature around the electronic components is too high, their life will be significantly
1
reduced.
The nominal ambient temperature for power supplies ABL4 is, depending on the reference, 45, 50 or 60C. Above
this temperature, derating is necessary up to a maximum temperature of 60C.
P/Pn %
120
The adjacent graph shows the

power as a percentage of the
100
2
nominal power that the power 80
supply can deliver 75
70
continuously, in relation to the 60
ambient temperature. 50
40
20
3
0
-20 0 20 30 45 50 55 60
Temperature C
ABL4 RSM24035/RSM24050/WSR24400
ABL4 WSR24200
ABL4 WSR24300
ABL4 RSM24100
In all cases, there must be adequate convection around the products to assist cooling.
There must be sufficient clearance around power supplies ABL4: refer to instruction sheet supplied with each 4
power supply and, also, downloadable from www.schneider-electric.com
Temporary overcurrents
Power supplies ABL4 have an energy reserve allowing them to supply the application, according to the
references, from 150% to 170% of the nominal current for 5 seconds and up to 30 seconds, whilst guaranteeing
an output voltage higher then 90% of the nominal voltage.
Power supply Maximum temporary overcurrent Maximum time of temporary overcurrent 5
ABL 4RSM24035 170% of nominal current 30 seconds
ABL 4WSR24p00
The time interval between each overcurrent cannot be less than 10 seconds.
When the overcurrent value exceeds the reserve energy value or when the overcurrents are too closely spaced or
6
when the overcurrent is prolonged (depending on the reference), more than 5 seconds and up to 30 seconds, the
power supply switches to protection mode.
Behaviour in event of overcurrents and short-circuits
In the event of overcurrent or short-circuit, the power supply ABL4 switches to protection mode and periodically
attempts a reset (Hiccup mode) until the fault disappears. Once the output circuit load conditions return to
normal, the power supply automatically resets. 7
Power supply Periodic reset frequency type
ABL 4RSM24035 Variable: depends on the overcurrent value and the ambient temperature.
ABL 4RSM24050 In the event of a short-circuit (output voltage close to 0 V), the current is established for 50 ms
ABL 4RSM24100 approximately every 1.8 seconds.
ABL 4RSM24200 Fixed: the current is established for 5 seconds every 15 seconds either in the event of an
ABL 4WSR24p00 overcurrent or a short-circuit.
8
Connecting in parallel
In order to increase the current available, the outputs of two power supplies with identical references can be
connected in parallel.
To obtain equitable sharing of the current between the two power supplies, the following precautions must be
taken into account:
v Use two power supplies bearing the same date code and same reference.
v Adjust the output voltages so as to obtain the same voltage value, to within plus or minus 20 mV, 10 minutes 9
after power-up with a load consumption of less than 20% connected on each power supply output.
v Connect one of the + terminals and one of the - terminals of each power supply to a terminal using wires of
the same length and diameter.
v Use wires with the largest cross-section as possible.
The maximum usable current is 1.8 times the nominal current of the power supply.
Redundancy of the power supply ABL 4RSM24200 can be achieved without adding a specific module, due to the 10
specific diode that is integrated in these products.
For other power supply references, redundancy module ABL 8RED24400 must be used.
Additional technical information on www.schneider-electric.com
8/31
Characteristics (continued), Power supplies and transformers
description Phaseo
ABL4
Characteristics (continued)
1 Power supply Type of protection
Miniature circuit- Fuses Class CC fuses with
breakers C60N rejection system
(Icn > 1.5 kA)
Zone in which equipment used
Rest of the world USA & Canada
2 ABL 4RSM24035
ABL 4RSM24050
4 A curve C
4 A curve C
4 A time-lag
4 A time-lag
6A
6A
ABL 4RSM24100 6 A curve C 6.3 A time-lag 6A
ABL 4RSM24200 16 A curve C 15 A time-lag 10 A
10 A curve D
ABL 4WSR24200 3 x 10 A curve C 3 x 3.15 A time-lag 3 x 10 A
ABL 4WSR24300 3 x 10 A curve C 3 x 5 A time-lag 3 x 10 A
3 ABL 4WSR24400 3 x 10 A curve C 3 x 6.3 A time-lag 3 x 10 A
Description
2 The regulated switch mode power supplies ABL 4RSM24035 and ABL 4RSM24050
3 comprise:
4 1 Spring clip for Omega (5 35 mm) rail.
4 1 5
2 Output voltage status LED (green).
3 Output circuit overcurrent LED (red).
4 Output voltage adjustment potentiometer.
5 Removable screw terminal block for connection of the DC output voltage and
6 diagnostics contact.
6 Removable screw terminal block for connection of the AC input voltage on
single-phase (1).
2 The regulated switch mode power supplies ABL 4RSM24100 comprise:

6 1 Spring clip for Omega (5 35 mm) rail.
2 Removable screw terminal block for connection of the AC input voltage (on
3 single-phase) (1)) and for connection of 120/230 V selection link.
1 3 Output voltage status LED (green).
4
4 Output circuit overcurrent LED (red).
5 5 Output voltage adjustment potentiometer.
6 Removable screw terminal block for connection of the DC output voltage and
7 6
diagnostics contact.
8 The regulated switch mode power supplies ABL 4RSM24200, ABL 4WSR24200,
ABL 4WSR24300 and ABL 4WSR24400 comprise:
1 Spring clip for Omega (5 35 mm) rail.
2 2 Enclosed screw terminals for connection of the DC output voltage and diagnostics
contact.
3 3 Output voltage adjustment potentiometer.
1 4 4 Output voltage status LED (green).
9 5
5 Output circuit overcurrent and alarm LED (red).
6 Enclosed screw terminals for connection of the AC input voltage:
- single-phase connection for ABL 4RSM24200 (1),
- 3-phase connection for ABL 4Wpppp.
6 (1) Connection between 2 phases only on certain American line supplies.
10
8/32
References Power supplies and transformers
Phaseo
ABL4
Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies ABL4, 85 to 960 W

Input voltage Secondary Reset Reference Weight
Output
voltage
Nominal
power
Nominal
current kg 1
Single-phase (N-L1) connection (1)
a 100230 V c 2327.4 V 85 W 3.5 A Automatic ABL 4RSM24035 0.500
- 10%, + 15%
120 W 5A Automatic ABL 4RSM24050 0.500
2
ABL 4RSM24050
a 120 V c 2327.4 V 240 W 10 A Automatic ABL 4RSM24100 0.800
- 25%, + 10%
and
c 2427.8 V 480 W 20 A Automatic ABL 4RSM24200 1.300
a 230 V
(2)
- 20%, + 15%
3-phase (L1-L2-L3) connection
a 400500 V c 2427.8 V 480 W 20 A Automatic ABL 4WSR24200 1.300
- 15%, + 10%
720 W 30 A Automatic ABL 4WSR24300 1.300
3
960 W 40 A Automatic ABL 4WSR24400 1.300
Function modules for continuity of service (3)

ABL 4RSM24100
4
Function Use Description Reference Weight
kg
Continuity after Holding time 100 ms Buffer module ABL 8BUF24400 1.200
a power outage at 40 A and 2 s at 1 A
(5) Holding time 9 min at 40 A...2 hrs at 1 A Battery check module, ABL 8BBU24200 0.500
(depending on use with a battery check output current 20 A
module-battery unit and load) (4) Battery check module, ABL 8BBU24400 0.700
output current 40 A
Battery module, 3.2 Ah (6)
Battery module, 7 Ah (6)
ABL 8BPK24A03
ABL 8BPK24A07
3.500
6.500
5
Battery module, 12 Ah (6) ABL 8BPK24A12 12.000
Continuity after Paralleling and redundancy of the power supply Redundancy module ABL 8RED24400 0.700
a malfunction to ensure uninterrupted operation of the
ABL 4WSR24200 application excluding AC line failures and
application overcurrents
Discriminating
downstream
Electronic protection (1...10 A overcurrent or
short-circuit) of 4 output terminals from an ABL4
Protection module with 2-pole
breaking (7) (8)
ABL 8PRP24100 0.270
6
protection power supply
Converters c / c (3)
Primary (9) Secondary Reference Weight
Input voltage Power supply module output current Output Nominal
7
voltage current kg
c 24 V 2.2 A c 5...6.5 V 6A ABL 8DCC05060 0.300
- 9%,+ 24% 1.7 A c 7...15 V 2A ABL 8DCC12020 0.300
ABL 8BUF24400
Separate and replacement parts

Description Use Composition Unit reference Weight
kg
Fuse
assemblies
Discriminating Protection module
ABL 8PRP24100
4 x 5 A, 4 x 7.5 A and 4 x 10 A ABL 8FUS01
8
Battery ABL 8BKP24App 4 x 20 A and 6 x 30 A ABL 8FUS02
Clip-on marker All products except ABL 8PRP24100 Sold in lots of 100 LAD 90 0.030
labels Discriminating Protection module Sold in lots of 22 ASI20 MACC5
ABL 8PRP24100
Rail mounting Battery module ABL 8BPK2403 ABL 1A02
ABL 8BBU24200 kit
EEPROM Backup and duplication of ABL8 BBU24p00 SR2 MEM02 0.010
9
memory battery check module parameters
(1) 2-phase connection possible on certain American line supplies.

(2) Power supply reference ABL 4RSM24200 has an integrated redundancy diode.
(3) For use with power supply ABL4.
(4) Compatibility table for battery check module-battery unit with holding time depending on the load.
More technical information on www.schneider-electric.com
(5) Appendices, see page 8/34. 10
(6) Supplied with 20 or 30 A fuse depending on the model.
(7) Supplied with four 15 A fuses.
(8) Local reset via pushbutton or automatic reset on elimination of the fault.
(9) Voltage from power supply ABL4.
ABL 8RED24400
8/33
Appendices Power supplies and transformers
Phaseo
Function modules: solutions to power outages
Selection grid
Continuity of service: Voltage holding in the event of a power outage (continued)

For applications that are sensitive to unintended stopping, the ABL 8 range of
1 Function modules offers a solution comprising:
b Electronic switch mode power supply and Buffer module for holding times t2 up to
two seconds
b Electronic switch mode power supply, Battery control module and Battery module
for holding times t2 of between two seconds and a few hours
These solutions are used to supply voltage after loss of the line supply, thus enabling
2 saving of current values or fallback of some actuators supplied with 24 V c.
The table below indicates the possible holding times according to the equipment
combinations and the current required.
Input voltage
3
t
Output voltage
4 t2 t
Holding current Holding time t2

Seconds Minutes Hours
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 1 2 3 5
5
1A 1 1 1 1 1 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+5 2+5
2A 1 1 1 1 1 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+5 2+6 2+6
3A 1 1 1 1 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+6 2+6 2+6
+6
4A 1 1 1 1 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+6 2+6 2+6
+6 +6
6 5A 1 1 1 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6
+6 +6
6A 1 1 1 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6
+6 +6
7A 1 1 1 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6
+6
8A 1 1 1 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6
+6 +6
7 10 A 1 1 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6
+6 +6 +6
15 A 1 1 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+4 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6
+6 +6 +6
20 A 1 1 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+5 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6 2+6
+6 +6 +6
25 A 1 3+5 3+5 3+5 3+5 3+5 3+5 3+5 3+5 3+5 3+5 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6
8 30 A 1 3+5 3+5 3+5

+6 +6 +6 +6
3+5 3+5 3+5 3+5 3+5 3+5 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6
+6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6
35 A 1 3+5 3+5 3+5 3+5 3+5 3+5 3+5 3+5 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6
+6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6
40 A 1 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6 3+6
+6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6 +6
9 Function modules
40 A Buffer module
Reference
ABL 8BUF24400
Code
1
20 A Battery control module ABL 8BBU24200 2
40 A Battery control module ABL 8BBU24400 3
3.2 Ah Battery module ABL 8BPK24A03 4
7 Ah Battery module ABL 8BPK24A07 5
12 Ah Battery module ABL 8BPK24A12 6
10
Note: Several Buffer modules (up to a maximum of three) can be connected in parallel to
increase the immunity time. The times given in the table above (boxes marked 1) should be
multiplied by the number of modules used (2 or 3).
8/34
Appendices Power supplies and transformers
Phaseo
Substitution of ABL8RP/WP by ABL4
Substitution of Phaseo ABL8RP/WP power supplies by

Phaseo ABL4 power supplies
For the majority of applications, power supplies ABL4 easily replace power supply 1
models ABL8RP/WP due to:
v the reduced size of the ABL4 (up to - 56% in volume),
v tested compatibility with the function modules ABL8B/RED/8D/8P,
v the presence of a diagnostics contact on all models,
v a higher withstand to temporary overcurrents than the equivalent ABL8 RP/WP
power supplies.
2
However, for some applications the following points must be checked before
substituting ABL8RP/WP power supplies by ABL4 power supplies:
Equivalent ABL8 and ABL4 power Points to be checked Installation differences
supplies related to the application
ABL 8RPS24030 ABL 4RSM24035 b Input voltage limits: b Input and output
v ABL4: 90..264 V terminals reversed
v ABL8: 85..550 V
ABL 8RPS24050 ABL 4RSM24050 b Resetting of protection:
3
v ABL4: automatic
v ABL8: selectable,
automatic or manual
b ABL4 does not conform
to IEC 61000-3-2 (1)
ABL 8RPS24100 ABL 4RSM24100 b Input voltage limits:

v ABL4: 90..264 V
b 120/230 V voltage
selection 4
v ABL8: 85..550 V v ABL4: by link
b Resetting of protection: v ABL8: by terminal
v ABL4: automatic
v ABL8: selectable,
automatic or manual
b ABL4 does not conform
to IEC 61000-3-2 (1)
5
ABL 8RPM24200 ABL 4RSM24200 b Resetting of protection: b Input and output
v ABL4: automatic terminals reversed
v ABL8: selectable, b 120/230 V voltage
ABL 8WPS24200 ABL 4WSR24200 automatic or manual selection
b ABL4 does not conform v ABL4: by link
to IEC 61000-3-2 (1) v ABL8: by terminal
ABL 8WPS24400 ABL 4WSR24400 b Input and output
terminals reversed 6
(1) Standard IEC/EN 61000-3-2 defines the harmonic limits of the input current that can be
produced by equipment such as regulated switch mode power supplies ABL4 or ABL8. This
standard is only applicable to electrical or electronic devices that are intended for connection
to low voltage public distribution systems. This is rarely the case in industrial applications. 7
10
8/35
Presentation Power supplies and transformers
Phaseo
ASI ABL
Power supplies for AS-Interface cabling system

Consistent with the standard Phaseo line, the range of ASI ABL power supplies is
1 designed to deliver a c voltage, as required by AS-Interface cabling systems. Three
versions are available to meet all needs encountered in industrial applications, in
enclosures, cells or floor-standing enclosures. These single-phase, electronic,
switch mode power supplies guarantee the quality of the output current, in
accordance with the electrical characteristics and conforming to standard EN 50295.
2
ASI ABLB300p
Operating on a 100 to 240 V a supply, this power supply delivers a voltage of
30 V c. Available in 2.4 and 4.8 A ratings, the outgoing terminal block allows the
cable to be connected separately to the
AS-Interface interface modules and to the AS-Interface master. Input and output
LEDs allow fast and continuous diagnostics.
3
4 ASI ABLB3002
ASI ABLD300p
Operating on a 100 to 240 V a supply, this power supply delivers a voltage of
30 V c. Available in 2.4 and 4.8 A ratings, it allows diagnosis and management of
5 earth faults on AS-Interface interface modules. In the event of an earth fault, the
Phaseo power supply stops dialogue on the AS-Interface cabling system and puts
the installation in a fallback condition. Restarting is only possible after deliberate
acknowledgement of the fault. Two inputs/outputs enable dialogue with a processing
unit. The outgoing terminal block is used to connect the AS-Interface cable
separately to the interface modules and master modules. Input, output and earth fault
LEDs allow fast and continuous diagnostics.
6
ASI ABLD3004
7 ASI ABLM3024
Operating on a 100 to 240 V a supply, this product provides two separate power
supplies, which are totally independent in the way they operate.
Two output voltages - 30 V/2.4 A (AS-Interface line supply) and 24 V/3 A - are
available, so making it possible to supply the control equipment without an additional
power supply. Input and output LEDs allow fast and continuous diagnostics.
8
9
ASI ABLM3024
10
8/36
Selection, Power supplies and transformers
references Phaseo
ASI ABL

Type of a 115 V single-phase a 230 V single-phase
mains supply
Power supply Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker Gg Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker Gg
1
(1) fuse (2-pole) fuse
ASI ABLB3002 GB2 pB07 MG24517 (2) 2A GB2 DB06 MG24516 (2) 2A
ASI ABLB3004 GB2 pB08 MG24518 (2) 4A GB2 DB07 MG17453 (2) 2A
ASI ABLD3002 GB2 pB07 MG24517 (2) 2A GB2 DB06 MG24516 (2) 2A 2
ASI ABLD3004 GB2 pB08 MG24518 (2) 4A GB2 DB07 MG17453 (2) 2A
ASI ABLM3024 GB2 pB07 MG24517 (2) 2A GB2 DB06 MG17453 (2) 2A
(1) Single-phase protection, replace p by C; 2-pole protection, replace p by D. 3

(2) UL certified circuit breaker.
References
Input voltage Secondary Auto-protect Earth fault Reference Weight
Output
voltage
Nominal
power
Nominal
current
reset detection
kg
4
Single phase (N-L1) or 2-phase (L1-L2)
a 100240 V c 30 V 72 W 2,4 A Auto No ASI ABLB3002 0.800

- 15 %, + 10 %
50/60 Hz
144 W 4,8 A Auto No ASI ABLB3004 1.300 5
72 W 2,4 A Auto Yes ASI ABLD3002 0.800
6
144 W 4,8 A Auto Yes ASI ABLD3004 1.300
c 30 V 72 W 2,4 A Auto No ASI ABLM3024 1.300

c 24 V 72 W 3A
ASI ABLp3002
10
8/37
1
10
9/0
Contents 9 - Appendices and services
Treatment for harsh environments,

Conformal Coating modules
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/2 1
Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/3
Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/3
PCMCIA SRAM memory extension cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/3
Power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/4
Discrete I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 9/4
page 9/4
2
Counter modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/5
Motion control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/5
Weighing modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/5
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/5
3
Power consumption table
Selecting TSX PSY power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/6
Standards and certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/8 4
Environmental tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/9
Ethernet network, infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/12
Automation product certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/18
A dedicated services offer for your installed base

Operation services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/20
5
Modernisation services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/21
Customization services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/21
Index
Product reference index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/22 6
10
9/1
platform 0

Presentation
Protective treatment of Modicon Premium PLCs
1 Modicon Premium/Atrium PLCs comply with TC treatment requirements (Treatment
for all Climates).
For installations in industrial production workshops or environments corresponding
to TH (Treatment for hot and Humid environments), PLCs must be housed in
enclosures providing at least IP 54 protection as specified by standard IEC/EN 60529
or an equivalent level of protection according to NEMA 250.
2 These PLCs themselves have an IP 20 protection index (1). They can therefore be
installed without an enclosure in reserved access areas that do not exceed pollution
level 2 (control room with no dust-producing machinery or activity). Pollution level 2
does not take account of more severe environments, such as those where the air is
polluted with dust, fumes, corrosive or radioactive particles, vapours or salts, moulds,
insects, etc.
3
Treatment for more severe environments
If the Modicon Premium automation platform needs to be used in a harsh environment,
the Conformal Coating offer provides processor and power supply modules, I/O
modules on Bus X and racks with a protective coating applied to their electronic cards.
This treatment improves the cards' insulation qualities and their resistance to:
4 b Condensation
b Dusty atmospheres (conducting foreign particles)
b Chemical corrosion, in particular when used in sulphurous atmospheres (oil refinery,
purification plant, etc.) or atmospheres containing halogens (chlorine, etc.)
This protection, combined with appropriate installation and maintenance, enables

Modicon Premium products to be used in harsh chemical environments such as
5 types 3C2 and 3C3 described in standard IEC/EN 60721-3-3.
The functional and electrical characteristics of the coated modules are identical to
those of the non-coated versions. Please consult the characteristics pages in this
catalogue (chapter 1chapter 5).
To order modules and racks with Conformal Coating protection, please refer to the
6 references pages 9/39/5 (for coated products add the letter C at the end of the
standard reference.
(1) Any slot in TSX RKY pp racks that is not occupied by a module must be fitted with a
TSX RKA 02 screw-on protective cover (sold in lots of 5).
10
References:
pages 9/3
9/2
platform 0

Racks
Description Capacity Reference Weight
Non-extendable racks 6 positions TSX RKY 6C

kg
1.470
1
8 positions TSX RKY 8C 1.760
12 positions TSX RKY 12C 2.310
Extendable racks 4 positions TSX RKY 4EXC 1.160
Requires 1 x TSX TLY EX line 6 positions TSX RKY 6EXC 1.500
terminator on the 2 end racks
2
TSX RKY 6C 8 positions TSX RKY 8EXC 1.780
Sold in lots of 2
12 positions TSX RKY 12EXC 2.340
For connection accessories, see page 2/5.
Premium TSX 57 Unity processors

I/O capacity Capacity Integrated Reference Weight
Memory Network port kg
TSX 57 1p 96 KB integrated 1 (1) TSX P57 104MC 0.380
512 discrete I/O,
24 analog I/O and 8 application-specific channels
224 KB on PCMCIA 0
1
Ethernet
Fipio
TSX P57 1634MC
(1) TSX P57 154MC

0.420
3
TSX 57 2p 160 KB integrated 1 TSX P57 204MC 0.520
1024 discrete I/O, 768 KB on PCMCIA Ethernet TSX P57 2634MC
192 KB integrated 2 Dedicated TSX H57 24MC 0.560
768 KB on PCMCIA Hot Standby
TSX P57 1634MC 1 Fipio TSX P57 254MC
TSX 57 3p
1024 discrete I/O,
192 KB integrated
1792 KB on PCMCIA
3 TSX P57 304MC 0.520 4
2 Ethernet TSX P57 3634MC
208 KB integrated 3 Fipio TSX P57 354MC 0.560
1792 KB on PCMCIA
TSX 57 4p 440 KB integrated 3 Ethernet TSX P57 4634MC 0.610
2040 discrete I/O, 2048 KB on PCMCIA
256 analog I/O and 64 application-specific channels 4 Dedicated TSX H57 44MC 0.610
4
Hot Standby
Fipio TSX P57 454MC 0.560
5
TSX 57 5p 1 MB integrated 3 Ethernet TSX P57 5634MC 0.610
2040 discrete I/O, 7168 KB on PCMCIA 4 Fipio TSX P57 554MC 0.560
TSX 57 6p 2 MB integrated 3 Ethernet TSX P57 6634MC 0.610
TSX P57 2040 discrete I/O, 7168 KB on PCMCIA
6
25pMC/35pMC/453AMC
For connecting cables, see page 1/11.
Premium TSX 57 PL7 processors

TSX 57 1p 32 Kwords integrated, 1 (1) TSX P57 103MC 0.380
512 discrete I/O, 644 Kwords on 0 Fipio (1) TSX P57 153MC 0.420
24 analog I/O and 8 application-specific channels PCMCIA
TSX 57 2p 48 Kwords integrated, 1 TSX P57 203MC 0.520
1024 discrete I/O,
160 Kwords on
PCMCIA
Ethernet TSX P57 2623MC 7
64 Kwords integrated, 1 Fipio TSX P57 253MC 0.560
160 Kwords on Ethernet and TSX P57 2823MC
PCMCIA Fipio
TSX 57 3p 64/80 Kwords 3 TSX P57 303AMC 0.520
1024 discrete I/O, integrated (2) 384 2 Ethernet TSX P57
8
TSX P57 4634MC 128 analog I/O and 32 application-specific channels Kwords on PCMCIA 3623AMC
5634MC/6634MC
80/96 Kwords 3 (1) TSX P57
integrated (2) 384 353LAMC
Kwords on PCMCIA Fipio TSX P57 353AMC 0.560
TSX 57 4p 96/176 Kwords 4 Fipio TSX P57 453AMC 0.560
2040 discrete I/O, integrated (2) 992 4 Ethernet and TSX P57
256 analog I/O and 64 application-specific channels Kwords on PCMCIA Fipio 4823AMC
PCMCIA SRAM memory extension cards 9

Description Memory size Reference Weight
Application Additional data kg
Configurable application/additional 192 KB1024 KB 832 KB0 KB TSX MRP C001MC 0.076
data memory extensions 192 KB3072 KB 2880 KB0 KB TSX MRP C003MC 0.076
(slot 0 in processors)
192 KB7168 KB 6976 KB0 KB TSX MRP C007MC 0.076
For replacement parts, see page 1/21.
10
TSX MRP C00pMC (1) Single format module. The other processors are double format.
(2) The second value corresponds to the integrated memory capacity when the processor is equipped with a PCMCIA memory card.
Presentation:
page 9/2
9/3
platform 0


Supply voltage Available power Reference Weight
1 24 V c non-isolated
5Vc
15 W
24 VR c
15 W
24 VC c

Total
30 W (1) TSX PSY 1610MC
kg
0.540
35 W 19 W 50 W TSX PSY 3610MC 0.780
2448 V c isolated 35 W 19 W 50 W TSX PSY 5520MC 0.980
110240 V a 25 W 15 W 12 W 26 W (1) TSX PSY 2600MC 0.510
110120 V a and 200240 V a 35 W 19 W 19 W 50 W TSX PSY 5500MC 0.620
2
75 W 38 W SELV 77 W TSX PSY 8500MC 0.740
TSX PSY double format For accessories and fan modules, see page 2/4 and 2/5.
(1) Single format module. The other power supply modules are double format.

3 Type Voltage, logic Connection by Description Reference Weight
kg
c inputs 24 V, positive logic Screw terminal block 8 isolated inputs, type 2 TSX DEY 08D2C 0.300
16 isolated inputs, type 2 TSX DEY 16D2C 0.300
48 V, positive logic Screw terminal block 16 isolated inputs, type 2 TSX DEY 16D3C 0.300
24 V, positive logic HE 10 connector 16 isolated fast inputs, type 1 TSX DEY 16FKC 0.300
2 x HE 10 connectors 32 isolated inputs, type 1 TSX DEY 32D2KC 0.300
4 4 x HE 10 connectors
24 V, negative logic Screw terminal block
64 isolated inputs, type 1
16 isolated inputs, type 2
TSX DEY 64D2KC
TSX DEY 16A2C
0.370
0.310
48 V, positive logic 2 x HE 10 connectors 32 isolated inputs, type 2 TSX DEY 32D3KC 0.310
TSX DEY/DSY/AEY/ASY 50/60 Hz 24 V Screw terminal block 16 isolated inputs, type 2 TSX DEY 16A2C 0.310
with screw terminal block a inputs 48 V Screw terminal block 16 isolated inputs, type 2 TSX DEY 16A3C 0.320
100...120 V Screw terminal block 16 isolated inputs, type 2 TSX DEY 16A4C 0.320
200...240 V Screw terminal block 16 isolated inputs, type 2 TSX DEY 16A5C 0.360
5 Solid state c
outputs
24 V/0.5 A, pos. logic Screw terminal block
24 V/2 A, pos. logic Screw terminal block
8 protected outputs
8 protected outputs
TSX DSY 08T2C
TSX DSY 08T22C
0.320
0.410
24 V/0.5 A, pos. logic Screw terminal block 16 protected outputs TSX DSY 16T2C 0.340
48 V/1 A, pos. logic Screw terminal block 8 protected outputs TSX DSY 08T31C 0.320
48 V/0.25 A, pos. logic Screw terminal block 16 protected outputs TSX DSY 16T3C 0.340
6 TSX DEY/DMY 32/24 channels

24 V/0.1 A, pos. logic 2 x HE 10 connectors
4 x HE 10 connectors
32 protected outputs
64 protected outputs
TSX DSY 32T2KC
TSX DSY 64T2KC
0.300
0.360
with HE 10 connectors c or a relay 24 V c/3 A, Screw terminal block 8 non-protected outputs TSX DSY 08R5C 0.330
outputs 24 to 240 V a/3 A Screw terminal block 16 non-protected outputs TSX DSY 16R5C 0.380
24 to 48 V c/5 A, Screw terminal block 8 protected outputs TSX DSY 08R5AC 0.420
24 to 240 V a/5 A
c relay outputs 24...120 V 5 A Screw terminal block 8 protected outputs TSX DSY 08R4DC 0.370
7 a triac outputs 4...120 V 1 A Screw terminal block
16 non-protected outputs TSX DSY 16S4C 0.380
c I/O I: 24 V pos. logic 2 x HE 10 connectors
16 isolated fast inputs, type 1 TSX DMY 28FKC 0.320
O: 24 V/0.5 A 12 protected outputs
16 isolated fast inputs, type 1 TSX DMY 28RFKC 0.355
12 reflex or time-delayed
protected outputs
For screw terminal block, connection accessories and separate parts, see page 3/11.
8 TSX DEY/DSY 64 channels
with HE 10 connectors
Analog I/O modules
Type Description Connection by Reference Weight
kg
Analog inputs 4 x 16-bit high level voltage/current channels 25-way SUB-D connector TSX AEY 420C 0.330
4 x 16-bit isolated low level voltage/current Screw terminal block TSX AEY 414C 0.320
9 temperature probe/thermocouple channels
8 x 12-bit high level voltage/current channels 25-way SUB-D connector TSX AEY 800C 0.310
16 x 12-bit high level voltage/current channels 25-way SUB-D connector TSX AEY 1600C 0.340
8 x 16-bit isolated high level voltage/current 25-way SUB-D connector TSX AEY 810C 0.330
channels
16 x 16-bit thermocouple channels 25-way SUB-D connector TSX AEY 1614C 0.350
TSX AEY/ASY with 25-way Analog outputs 4 x 11-bit + sign voltage/current channels Screw terminal block TSX ASY 410C 0.350
10
SUB-D connector
8 x 13-bit + sign voltage/current channels 25-way SUB-D connector TSX ASY 800C
For screw terminal block, connection accessories and separate parts, see page 3/17.
Presentation:
page 9/2
9/4
platform 0

Counter modules
Type of input Function No. of Reference Weight
24 V c 2/3-wire sensors 40 kHz counting

channels
2 TSX CTY 2AC
kg
0.320
1
5 V c RS 232 and 10...30 V c Totem Pole 4 TSX CTY 4AC 0.430
incremental encoders SSI serial or parallel
40 kHz counting and 2 TSX CTY 2CC 0.340
absolute encoders (1)
measurement
Electronic cam 1 TSX CCY 1128C 0.480
TSX CTY 2AC/2CC

For accessories and connecting cables, see pages 4/19, 4/23 and 4/25.
(1) With TSX CTY 2CC and TSX CCY 1128C modules. 2
Type of input Function No. of Reference Weight
channels kg
Translator with RS422 I/O, 5 V c TTL inputs Modules for stepper motors 1 TSX CFY 11C 0.440
and 5 V c open collector outputs 2 TSX CFY 21C 0.480 3
5 V c RS 232 and 10...30 V c Totem Pole Modules for servo motors 2 TSX CAY 21C 0.480
incremental encoders RS 485 or parallel 500 kHz counting (with incremental 4 (2) TSX CAY 41C 0.610
absolute encoders encoder), 200 kHz counting (with 2 TSX CAY 22C 0.480
serial absolute encoder) (1)
4 (2) TSX CAY 42C 0.610
3 (2) TSX CAY 33C 0.610
TSX CAY 41C/42C For accessories and connecting cables, see page 4/33.
(1) With servo control functions on independent infinite axis, follower axes and flying shear for TSX CAY p2C modules.
4
(2) Double format module. The other motion control modules are single format.
Weighing module
Description Function Reference Weight
kg
5
ISP Plus 1 weigher/module, 18 load cells TSX ISP Y101C 0.420
weighing module
For remote indicator and accessories, see page 4/51.
TSX ISP Y101C 6

Communication
Description Function Reference Weight
kg
Ethernet Modbus/TCP 10 Mbps, Transparent Ready class C10 TSX ETY 110WSC 0.370
network modules 10/100 Mbps, Transparent Ready class B30 TSX ETY 4103C 0.370
7
10/100 Mbps, Transparent Ready class C30 TSX ETY 5103C 0.370
10/100 Mbps, Transparent Ready class D10 TSX WMY 100C 0.370
PCMCIA cards CANopen Master V4.02 TSX CPP 110C 0.230
Modbus Plus 1 Mbps network, 64 stations max. TSX MBP 100C 0.110
Serial links Modbus, Uni-Telway, RS 232 TSX SCP 111C 0.105
Character mode RS 485 TSX SCP 114C 0.105
20 mA CL TSX SCP 112C 0.105
TSX ETY p103C/WMY 100C Communication modules 1 Modbus RS 485 integrated channel
1 RS 485 integrated channel, 1 PCMCIA slot
TSX SCY 11601C
TSX SCY 21601C
0.370
0.360 8
Fieldbus modules AS-Interface M2E master profile, V2 TSX SAY 1000C 0.340
INTERBUS 0.5 Mbps master/slave, generation 4 TSX IBY 100C 0.280
ConneXium managed Ethernet 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports (copper cable) TCS ESM 083F23F1C 1.000
switches Modbus/TCP
6 x 10/100BASE-TX ports (copper cable) TCS ESM 063F2CU1C 1.000
8 extended ports network
2 x 100BASE-FX ports (multimode optical fibre)
9
TSX MBP/SCP 1ppC
6 x 10/100BASE-TX ports (copper cable) TCS ESM 063F2CS1C 1.000
2 x 100BASE-FX ports (multimode optical fibre)
Profibus Remote Master Modbus TCP/Profibus DP V1 gateway and TCS EGPA23F14FK
(PRM) module Profibus PA (via gateway)
For connecting cables and accessories, see pages 5/66 and 5/67 (Ethernet), 5/90 and 5/91 (CANopen), 5/116 and 5/117
(Modbus Plus), 5/126 and 5/127 (Modbus), 5/130 and 5/131 (Uni-Telway), 5/133 (serial link), 5/96...5/97 (AS-Interface), 5/119
(Profibus DP) and 5/122 and 5/123 (INTERBUS).
10
TCS EGPA23F14FK
9/5
Document for selecting Modicon Premium automation
TSX PSY power supply platform 9
modules Power consumption table

(template to be photocopied)
The power required to supply each TSX RKY rack depends on the type and number of modules installed in the rack. It is therefore necessary to
draw up a power consumption table rack by rack in order to determine the TSX PSY power supply module most suitable for each rack.
1 The table below can be used to draw up the power consumption table for the three different voltages to be supplied (5 V c, 24 V c and 24 VR c).
Procedure:
b Check and select a power supply module corresponding to the powers available for the three voltages.
b Check that the sum of the absorbed powers on these three voltages does not exceed the overall power of the power supply module.
b Values to be entered according to the type of Premium PLC configuration
Reference Format Number Consumption in mA (1)
Rack no. S: single 5 V c voltage 24 VR c voltage 24 V c voltage
2 D: double Module Total Module Total Module Total
Unity processors TSX P57 104M S 850

with memory TSX P57 1634M D 1650
expansion card TSX P57 154M S 930
TSX P57 204M D 850
TSX P57 2634M D 1650
TSX P57 254M D 930
3 TSX H57 24M
TSX P57 304M
D
D
1880
1100
TSX P57 3634M D 1900
TSX P57 354M D 1180
TSX P57 454M D 1680
TSX P57 4634M D 1880
TSX H57 44M 1880
TSX P57 554M D 1680
4 TSX P57 5634M
TSX P57 6634M
D
D
1680
1880
PL7 processors TSX P57 103M S 440

with memory TSX P57 153M S 8530
expansion card TSX P57 203M D 750
TSX P57 2623M D 1110
TSX P57 253M D 820
5 TSX P57 2823M
TSX P57 303AM
D
D
1180
1000
TSX P57 3623AM D 1360
TSX P57 353AM D 1060
TSX P57 353LAM S 1650
TSX P57 453AM D 1080
TSX P57 4823AM D 1440
6 Discrete I/O TSX DEY 08D2

TSX DEY 16A2
S
S
55
80
80
TSX DEY 16A3 S 80

TSX DEY 16A4 S 80
TSX DEY 16A5 S 80
TSX DEY 16D2 S 80 135
TSX DEY 16D3 S 80 135
TSX DEY 16FK S 250 75
7 TSX DEY 32D2K
TSX DEY 32D3K
S
S
135
140
160
275
TSX DEY 64D2K S 155 315
TSX DSY 08R4D S 55 80
TSX DSY 08R5 S 55 70
TSX DSY 08R5A S 55 80
TSX DSY 08S5 S 125
TSX DSY 08T2 S 55
8 TSY DSY 08T22
TSX DSY 08T31
S
S
55
55
TSX DSY 16R5 S 80 135
TSX DSY 16S4 S 220
TSX DSY 16S5 S 220
TSX DSY 16T2 S 80
TSX DSY 16T3 S 80
TSX DSY 32T2K S 140
9 TSX DSY 64T2K
TSX DMY 28FK
S
S
155
300 75
TSX DMY 28RFK S 300 75
Bus X remote TSX REY 200 S 500
Total to be carried over to next page Current (mA)

10
9/6
Document for selecting Modicon Premium automation
TSX PSY power supply platform 9
modules Power consumption table

(template to be photocopied)
Reference Format Number Consumption in mA (1)

Rack no. S: single 5 V c voltage 24 VR c voltage 24 V c voltage
D: double Module Total Module Total Module Total
Total carried over from previous page Current (mA)

1
Analog I/O TSX AEY 414 S 660
TSX AEY 420 S 500
TSX AEY 800 S 270
2
TSX AEY 810 S 475
TSX AEY 1600 S 270
TSX AEY 1614 S 300
TSX ASY 410 S 900
TSX ASY 800 (2) S 200 300
Safety TSX PAY 262 S 150 200
3
Counting, TSX CTY 2A S 280 30
motion control,
TSX CTY 4A S 330 36
weighing
TSX CTY 2C S 850 15
TSX CCY 1128 S 660 15
TSX CAY 21 S 1100 15
TSX CAY 41 D 1500 30
TSX CAY 22 S 1100 15
TSX CAY 42 D 1500 30
TSX CAY 33
TSX CFY 11
D
S
1500
510
30
50 4
TSX CFY 21 S 650 100
TSX CSY 84/85/164 D 1800
TSX ISP Y101 S 150 145
Communication TSX ETY 110 WS (3) S 800

TSX ETY 110 WS (4) S 1200
TSX ETY 4103
TSX ETY 5103
S
S
360
530 5
TSX WMY 100 S 360
TSX ETC 101 S 400
TSX IBY 100 S 500
TSX PBY 100 S 400
TSX SAY 1000 S 450
TSX SCY 11601 S 350
TSX SCY 21601
TSX SCP 111
S

350
140 6
TSX SCP 112 120
TSX SCP 114 150
TSX FPP 10 330
TSX FPP 20 330
TSX MBP 100 220
TSX CPP 110 60
TSX P ACC 01 150
7
Terminal T FTX 117 ADJ 02 310
Total of
Power consumption Total current (mA) 3 powers
x5V x 24 VR x 24 V
Power (mW) + + =
8
Available power in mW Overall
9
Selection of power TSX PSY 1610M S 24 V c non-isolated 15,000 15,000 30,000
supply modules TSX PSY 2600M S 100240 V a 25,000 15,000 12,000 26,000
TSX PSY 3610M D 24 V c non-isolated 35,000 19,000 50,000
TSX PSY 5520M D 2448 V c isolated 35,000 19,000 50,000
TSX PSY 5500M D 100120 V a 35,000 19,000 19,000 50,000
200240 V a
TSX PSY 8500M D 100120 V a 75,000 38,000 77,000 (5)
200240 V a
(1) Typical value given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.

(2) If a 24 VR c external power supply is used, the 300 mA consumption on the internal 24 VR should not be taken into account when selecting the rack power supply. 10
(3) Without remote power supply (RJ45).
(4) With remote power supply (AUI).
(5) 77,000 mW at 60C, 85,000 mW at 55C or 100,000 mW at 55C when using TSX FAN ppP fan modules.
9/7
Standards and certifications Modicon Premium automation
platform 0
Standards, certifications and environmental

conditions
Standards and certifications

Modicon Premium PLCs have been developed to comply with the main national and
1 international standards relating to electronic equipment for industrial automation
systems.
b Requirements specific to PLCs: functional characteristics, immunity, resistance,
safety, etc.: IEC/EN 61131-2, CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 508
b Merchant navy requirements from the main international bodies: ABS, BV, DNV,
GL, LR, RINA, RMRS, etc.
b Compliance with European Directives:
2 v Low Voltage Directive No. 2006/95/EC
v Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive No. 2004/108/EC
b Electrical characteristics and self-extinguishing capacity of insulating materials:
UL 746C, UL 94
b Hazardous areas: CSA 22.2 No. 213, Class I, Division 2, groups A, B, C and D
Characteristics
3 Operating conditions and requirements relating to the environment
Temperature Operation C 0...+ 60 (IEC/EN 61131-2, + 5...+ 55) (1)
0...+ 70 with TSX FAN modules (1)
Storage C -25...+ 70 (according to IEC/EN 61131-2)
Relative humidity Operation % 1095 non-condensing
Storage % 595 non-condensing (according to IEC/EN 61131-2)
4
Altitude m 02000
Supply voltage TSX PSY p610 TSX PSY 5520 TSX PSY 2600 TSX PSY p500
Nominal voltage V 24 c 48 c 100...240 a 100...120 a
200...240 a
Voltage limits 19..30 c 19..60 c 90...264 a 140/190...264 a
Nominal frequency Hz 50/60 50/60
Frequency range Hz 47/63 47/63
5 Protective treatment of Modicon Premium PLCs

Modicon Premium/Atrium PLCs comply with TC treatment requirements
(Treatment for all Climates).
For installations in industrial production workshops or environments corresponding
to TH (Treatment for Hot and humid environments), PLCs must be housed in
enclosures providing at least IP 54 protection as specified by standard IEC/EN 60529,
6 or an equivalent level of protection according to NEMA 250.
Modicon Premium/Atrium PLCs themselves offer IP 20 degree of protection (2).

They can therefore be installed without an enclosure in reserved access areas that
do not exceed pollution level 2 (control room with no dust-producing machinery or
activity). Pollution level 2 does not take account of more severe environments, such
as those where the air is polluted with dust, fumes, corrosive or radioactive particles,
7 vapours or salts, moulds, insects, etc.
Treatment for corrosive environments: Some processors, power supplies,

modules on Bus X and racks can be supplied with protective coating in order to
withstand corrosive environments (see page 9/2).
8 (1) TSX P57 0244/104/154M and TSX P57 454/4634/554/5634/6634M processors: 0+ 57C
(or 0+ 67C with TSX FANppP fan modules) when certain I/O modules are mounted in the
slot next to the above-mentioned processors.
(2) If a slot is not occupied by a module, it must be fitted with a protective cover TSX RKA 02.
10
9/8
Environmental tests Modicon Premium automation
platform 0

conditions
Environmental tests
Description of test Standards Levels
Immunity to Low Frequency (LF) interference (e) (1)
Voltage and frequency variation IEC/EN 61131-2 0.85 Un/0.95 Fn for 30 min; 1.15 Un/1.05 Fn for 30 min;
1
0.8 Un/0.9 Fn for 5 s; 1.2 Un/1.1 Fn for 5 s
DC voltage variation IEC/EN 61131-1 0.85 Un...1.2 Un for 30 min with 5% ripple (peak values)
Third harmonic IEC/EN 61131-2 10% Un; 0/5 min...180/5 min
Short interruptions IEC/EN 61131-2 10 ms with a power supply; 1 ms with c power supply
Voltage dips and pick-ups IEC/EN 61131-2 Un-0-Un; Un for 60 s; 3 separate cycles of 10 s
2
Un-0-Un; Un for 5 s; 3 separate cycles of 1 to 5 s
Un-0.9 Udl; Un for 60 s; 3 separate cycles of 1 to 5 s
Un: nominal voltage

Fn: nominal frequency
Udl: undervoltage detection level 3
Immunity to High Frequency (HF) interference (e) (1)
Damped oscillatory wave IEC/EN 61000-4-12 a/c power supply: 1kV in serial mode
4
Discrete I/O u 24 V: 1 kV in serial mode
Electrical fast transients/Bursts IEC/EN 61000-4-4 a/c power supply: 2 kV in wired mode/common mode
Discrete I/O > 48 V: 2 kV in common mode; other ports: 1 kV in common mode
Hybrid surge IEC/EN 61000-4-5 a/c power supply: 2 kV in wired mode/1 kV in serial mode
a discrete I/O: 2 kV in wired mode/1 kV in serial mode; c discrete I/O: 2 kV in wired mode/
0.5 kV in serial mode; shielded cable: 1 kV in common mode
Electrostatic discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-2 6 kV contact, 8 kV air
Radiated electromagnetic field IEC/EN 61000-4-3 10 V/m; 80 MHz...2 GHz

Sinusoidal amplitude modulation 80%/1 kHz 5
Conducted disturbances, induced IEC/EN 61000-4-6 10 V/0.15 MHz...80 MHz
by radio-frequency fields Sinusoidal amplitude modulation 80%/1 kHz
Electromagnetic emissions (e) (1) (2)

Interference voltage IEC/EN 61000-6-4 Class A
150 kHz...500 kHz quasi-peak 79 dB(V); average 66 dB(V)
500 kHz...30 MHz quasi-peak 73 dB(V); average 60 dB(V) 6
IACS E10 General power supply distribution area
Quasi-peak limit values in dB (V):
b 10 kHz150 kHz: 96 to 50 dB (V)
b 150 kHz350 kHz: 60 to 50 dB (V)
b 350 kHz 30 MHz: 50 dB (V)
Field interference (3) IEC/EN 61000-6-4 Class A, measurement at 10 m
30 MHz...230 MHz quasi-peak 40 dB (V); 230 MHz...1 GHz quasi-peak 47 dB (V) 7
IACS E10 (4) General power supply distribution area
Quasi-peak limit values in dB (V), measurements at 3 m:
b 150 kHz30 MHz: 80 to 50 dB (V)
b 30 MHz100 MHz: 60 to 54 dB (V)
b 100 MHz...156 MHz: 54 dB (V)
b 156 MHz...165 MHz: 24 dB (V)
b 165 kHz 2 GHz: 54 dB (V) 8
(e): Tests required by the e European Directives and based on standard IEC/EN 61131-2.
(1) Devices must be installed and wired in accordance with the instructions in the Grounding and
9
Electromagnetic Compatibility of PLC Systems manual, available in pdf format on the
CD-ROM supplied with Unity Pro or PL7 software packages or included on DVD reference
UNY USE 909 CD M (see page 6/20).
(2) These tests are carried out with no enclosure, with the devices fixed on a metal grid and
wired in accordance with the recommendations in the Grounding and Electromagnetic
Compatibility of PLC Systems manual.
(3) In cases where the limits of electromagnetic emissions between 30 MHz and 1 GHz need
to be monitored, it is recommended that TSX RKY 6EX/8EX racks be used instead of
TSX RKY 6/8 racks.
(4) The devices must be installed in a metal enclosure.
10
9/9

conditions
Environmental tests (continued)

1 Immunity to climatic variations
Dry heat IEC/EN 60068-2-2 Bd 60C for 16 hours (D.O); 40C for 16 hours (D.C)
Cold IEC/EN 60068-2-1 Ad 0C for 16 hours
Damp heat, steady state IEC/EN 60068-2-3 Ca 60C with 93% relative humidity/96 hours (D.O);
40C with 93...95% relative humidity/96 hours (D.C)
2
Damp heat, cyclic IEC/EN 60068-2-3 Db [55C (D.O)/40C (D.O)] - 25C with 93...95% relative humidity; 2 cycles: 12 hours/12 hours
Change of temperature, cyclic IEC/EN 60068-2-14 Nb 0...60C/5 cycles: 6 hours/6 hours (D.O) (1)
0...40C/5 cycles: 6 hours/6 hours (D.C)
Temperature rise IEC/EN 61131-2/UL 508 Ambient temperature: 60C
CSA 22-2 No. 142
Resistance to climatic variations
3 Dry heat, non-operating

Cold, non-operating
IEC/EN 60068-2-2 Bb
IEC/EN 60068-2-1 Ab
70C for 96 hours
- 25C for 96 hours
Damp heat, non-operating IEC/EN 60068-2-30 dB 25...60C with 93...95% relative humidity; 2 cycles: 12 hours/12 hours
Thermal shock, non-operating IEC/EN 60068-2-14 Na - 25...70C; 2 cycles: 3 hours/3 hours
D.O: Device Open (device to be incorporated in an enclosure)
4 D.C: Device Closed (device which can be installed without an enclosure) (see (1) on page 9/8)
(1) TSX P57 0244/104/154M and TSX P57 454/4634/554/5634/6634M processors: 0+ 57C
(or 0+ 67C with TSX FAN ppP fan modules) when certain I/O modules are mounted in the
slot next to the above-mentioned processors.
10
9/10

conditions
Environmental tests (continued)

Immunity to mechanical stress
Sinusoidal vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Fc 3 Hz...13 Hz/1 mm amplitude; 13 Hz...100 Hz/0.7 g; endurance: 90 min/axis for each resonance
1
(amplification coefficient < 10)
IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Fc 5...9 Hz/3.5 mm amplitude; 9...150 Hz/2g; endurance: 10 cycles of 1 octave/min
Shocks IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Ea 15 g - 11 ms; 3 shocks/direction/axis
Resistance to mechanical stress

Free fall IEC/EN 60068-2-32 Ed 10 cm/2 falls 2
Controlled position free fall IEC/EN 60068-2-31 Ec 30 or 10 cm/2 falls
Random free fall, equipment IEC/EN 60068-2-32 method 1 1 m/5 falls

packaged
Safety of equipment and personnel (1)

Dielectric strength and insulation UL 508 24/48 V c power supply: 1500 V rms; 100/220 V a power supply: 2000 V rms
3
resistance (e) CSA 22-2 No. 142 Discrete I/O y 48 V: 500 V rms; Discrete I/O > 48 V: 2000 V rms; > 10 M
IEC/EN 60950
Electrical continuity (e) UL 508 < 0.1 /30 A/2 min
CSA 22-2 No. 142
Leakage current (e) CSA 22-2 No. 142 < 3.5 mA fixed device
Protection provided by
IEC/EN 60950
CSA 22-2 No. 142 IP 20 4
enclosures (e) IEC/EN 60950
Resistance to impacts CSA 22-2 No. 142 500 g sphere: fall from 1.3 m
IEC/EN 60950
(e): Tests required by the e European Directives and based on standard IEC/EN 61131-2.
5
(1) Devices must be installed and wired in accordance with the instructions in the Grounding and
Electromagnetic Compatibility of PLC Systems manual.
10
9/11
Presentation Technical information
Ethernet network
Infrastructure
Presentation
The ConneXium Industrial Ethernet Offer is comprised of a complete family of
1 products and tools required to build the infrastructure of an Industrial Ethernet
network. In the following pages, information for the proper design of a network and
the selections of its components is offered.
Office Ethernet versus Industrial Ethernet

There are three main areas of differentiation between Ethernet applications in an
2 office environment and Ethernet applications in an Industrial environment, they are:

b Environment
b Layout (not physical layer specification)
b Performance
Contrary to the office environment and even though ISO/IEC is working on it, there
are not yet clearly defined specifications for Ethernet devices targeted to Industrial
3 applications. The specifications of what it is called Industrial Ethernet are defined by

different agencies or entities based upon its nature and based upon what the
automation market has traditionally used.
The environmental specifications of Industrial Ethernet devices are today defined by

the traditional agencies that define the environmental specifications for standard
industrial devices (UL, CSA, e, ...).
4 The IEEE 802.3 defines the physical layer specifications of the Ethernet network
(types of connectors, distance between devices, number of devices, ...) while
the 11801 (similarly to the TIAEIA 568B, and CENELEC EN 50173) provide
installers the layout guidelines.
The performance specifications are actually being worked on by ISO/IEC.
5 Ethernet 802.3 principles

The Ethernet 802.3 Link Layer is based on a collision detection mechanism
(CSMA CD): every node whose information has collided on the network realizes the
collision and re-sends the information.
The process of re-sending information causes delays in its propagation and could
6 affect the application.
A collision domain is a group of Ethernet end devices interconnected by hubs or

repeaters (devices that receive information and send it out to all their other ports, no
matter where the destination device is connected): it means that all devices will be
affected by collisions.
7 With the availability of full duplex switches (devices that receive information and send
it out just through the port to which the destination device is connected) the collision
domains have disappeared.
Therefore, for industrial automation applications it is strongly recommended to use

in every case full duplex switches to interconnect devices. In this way the collision
domains will be eliminated completely.
10
9/12
Topologies Technical information
Ethernet network
Infrastructure
Different network topologies

Star topology
DTE DTE
In a star topology, all devices are connected though an intermediate device. 1
Ethernet Star
In an Ethernet star the intermediate device may be a hub or a switch. Star is the
DTE DTE commonly used topology in corporate networks and as of today is adopted in almost
every automation application. As mentioned previously, for industrial Ethernet
applications the use of full duplex switches as central device rather than hubs is
strongly recommended. 2
Deploying Star topologies with ConneXium
With any of the hubs and switches offered by the ConneXium offer, star topologies
can be implemented.
DTE
Bus topology
The bus is one of the most adopted topologies in traditional industrial automation
3
networks. A single trunk cable connects all the devices on the network usually via
passive or active T-connectors, or directly chained (daisy chain). Devices usually
can be installed anywhere along the bus.
DTE DTE
Ethernet Bus
An Ethernet bus can be deployed by interconnecting hubs and/or switches in line
and considering every one of them as the connection for a drop device. A limited
4
number of hubs and an unlimited number of switches can be interconnected to
achieve this purpose.
Deploying Bus topologies with ConneXium

With any of the hubs and switches offered by the ConneXium offer bus topologies
can be implemented.
Specially suitable for this purpose are the switches with 1 or 2 fiber optic ports:
5
b The 2 fiber optic ports switches could be for connection of inline devices.
b The single fiber optic port switches could be used for the connection of end line
devices.
Daisy chain topology

Daisy chain -along bus- is the other most adopted topology in traditional industrial
automation networks. Cable segments interconnect multiple devices, being the
6
devices part of the network cable.
DTE DTE DTE
Ethernet daisy chain
Daisy chain is not today a very common Ethernet topology, but it will soon become
one of the most popular ones when enough quantity of devices is made available.
In Ethernet daisy chain the devices have:
b 2 Ethernet ports and
7
b 1 embedded switch.
Schneider Electric is releasing to the Industrial market Industrial Ethernet devices to
be connected in daisy chain architectures.
Deploying daisy chain topologies

To deploy daisy chain topologies, no hubs or switches are required. All devices have 8
an embedded switch.
Dual port Ethernet at the device level is an absolute integral component for
daisy chain topologies.
One port of the device connects to one port of the neighboring device on either side
of the device. These neighboring connections make up the daisy chain.
Ethernet switches can be employed in a daisy chain topology when multiple scan 9
chains are in use by the controlling device. It is expected that the Ethernet switch will
be located near the controlling device with the different scan chains emanating from
the switch.
10
9/13
Topologies (continued) Technical information
Ethernet network
Infrastructure
Different network topologies (continued)

Daisy chain topology (continued)
1 Limitations of daisy chain:
Limitations of daisy chain to insure the operational integrity of the network and meet
performance metrics, are:
b Dual port Ethernet devices only support 10 Mbit/s and/or 100 Mbit/s operational
speeds and must use one or the other.
b The network will operate only as fast as the slowest device that is connected to the
network
2 b In order to improve network traffic latency the numbers of devices in a single scan
chain, has been limited to 32 devices. Limiting a single scan chain to 32 devices the
time for a round trip of a packet through the daisy Chain is expected less than 5
milliseconds.
The maximum packet latency of a packet passing through any device in a scan chain
is no more than 10 s.
3
Ring topology
DTE DTE In a ring topology, all devices or network infrastructure components are connected in
4 a loop. Through this type of topology, a type of network redundancy is achieved.
Ethernet Ring
Ethernet rings are usually the backbones of applications in which high availability is
required. If ring topology is required then switches that support this feature should be
ordered.
5 DTE DTE DTE DTE

Deploying Ring topologies using ConneXium.
The ConneXium line offers hubs and switches that allow the deployment of single
and coupled self-healing rings. There is additional information about this topic
page 9/17.
10
9/14
Characteristics Technical information
Ethernet network
Infrastructure
Distance limitations and number of devices per segment

Based upon the 802.3, the distance limits and the numbers of devices in cascade are the following:
Type Maximum segment
length (1)
Maximum segment
length (offered by
Maximum number of Maximum number of
hubs in cascade switches in cascade
1
ConneXium devices)
10BASE-T 100 m 100 m 4 Unlimited
100BASE-TX 100 m 100 m 2 Unlimited
1000BASE-T 100 m 100 m Unlimited
10BASE-FL
100BASE-FX
2000 m
412 m/2000 m
3100 m (2)
4000 m with multimode
11 (fiber ring)
Unlimited 2
fiber, 32.500 m with
monomode fiber (3)
1000BASE-SX 275 m Unlimited
(1) Based on 802.3, full duplex/half duplex.
(2) Depends on the optical fiber budget and fiber attenuation.
(3) Depends on the optical fiber budget and fiber attenuation, typical specification is 2 km for
multimode and 15 km for monomode. 3
Physical Media
The Ethernet 802.3 defines the Physical Layer. A summary of the most common ones are shown below:
Type Data rate Cable type Connector type
Defined by 802.3 Recommended by Defined Recommended by
10BASE-T 10 Mbit/s CAT 3 - UTP

Schneider Electric
CAT 5E - STP
by 802.3
RJ45
Schneider Electric
RJ45 4
100BASE-TX 100 Mbit/s CAT 5 - UTP CAT 5E - STP RJ45 RJ45
1000BASE-T 1 Gbit/s CAT 5 - UTP CAT 5E - STP RJ45 RJ45
10BASE-FL 10 Mbit/s Two multimode fiber optic Two multimode fiber optic ST ST
cables typically cables typically
62.5/125 m fiber, 62.5/125 m fiber,
850 nm light wavelength 850 nm light wavelength
100BASE-FX 100 Mbit/s Two multimode optical
fibers typically
Two multimode optical
fibers typically
ST SC 5
62.5/125 m multimode 62.5/125 m multimode
fiber, fiber,
1300 nm light wavelength 1300 nm light wavelength
Two monomode optical SC
fibers typically 9/125 m
multimode fiber,
1300 nm light wavelength
6
1000BASE-SX 1 Gbit/s Two 62.5/125 or 50/125 Two 62.5/125 m or SC LC
multimode optical fibers, 50/125 m multimode
770 to 860 nm light optical fibers ,
wavelength 1300 nm light wavelength
1000BASE-LX 1 Gbit/s Two 9/125 m monomode LC
optical fibers,
1300 nm light wavelength
7
Nota : The above are the specifications defined by IEEE 802.3. However some of the cables are
no longer being developed. For instance, for 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX, a CAT-5E cable is
used.
10
9/15
Management Technical information
Ethernet network
Infrastructure
Management
The Ethernet devices in general (end devices and the cabling devices) devices may
1 be divided in two categories: unmanaged and managed devices:
b The unmanaged devices are those which there is no possibility to configure or
control any of the parameters of the device.
b The managed devices are those which there is possibility to configure or control
the parameters of the device (manage them) and to access to its internal information.
The ConneXium product line offers both types of devices.

2 There is also a third category of devices not specifically defined but is important to
understand the difference. These devices only allow access to its information but
cannot be controlled and/or configured. Usually these devices are considered in the
category of managed devices.
3 Managed devices
The managed devices offer the following features:
b Traffic optimization and filtering, goal is to increase the bandwidth, or the traffic
capacity in a network (some of the features in this area are message and port priority,
flow control, multicast filtering, broadcast limiting, IGMP snooping, Vlan, etc.).
b VLAN, a virtual LAN (VLAN) consists of a group of network participants in one or
4 more network segments who can communicate with each other as if they belonged
to the same LAN.
VLANs are based on logical (instead of physical) links. The biggest advantage of
VLANs is their possibility of forming user groups based on the participant function
and not on their physical location or medium.
Since broad/multicast data packets are transmitted exclusively within a virtual LAN,
the remaining data network is unaffected. VLAN can also serve as a security
5 mechanism to block unwanted Unicast messages.

b Security, feature that helps the user protect the switch from unauthorized access
that could result in changes in its configuration and impact the traffic going through
the switch (some of the features in this area are port security, read/write community
name, etc.).
User can also set up the switch so that it blocks messages coming from unauthorized
devices source addresses connected to the switch.
b Time Synchronization, feature that allows all the devices in the network to be
6 synchronized on time.
b Network Redundancy, to develop high availability applications.
b
10
9/16
Redundancy Technical information
Ethernet network
Infrastructure
Redundancy
To develop high availability applications, redundancy in the networking
infrastructure is the answer. By implementing a single ring architecture, or a coupled
ring one, can protect themselves against losses of network segments.
1
Single Ring
The first level of redundancy is achieved by implementing a single ring. The
DTE DTE
ConneXium switches allow the set up of backbone ring configurations.
The ring is constructed using the HIPER-Ring ports. If a section of the line fails, a ring 2
structure of up to 50 switches transforms back to a line-type configuration within
0.5 seconds.
DTE DTE DTE DTE

3
Dual Ring
DTE DTE
The second level of redundancy is achieved by implementing a dual ring. The control
intelligence built into the ConneXium switches allows the redundant coupling of
4
HIPER-Rings and network segments.
5
DTE DTE DTE DTE
6
Mesh topology using the rapid Spanning Tree protocol
DTE DTE A third level of redundancy can be achieved by implementing a mesh topology.
In simple terms,Spaning Tree is a protocol that ensures a single path for the signal,
when multiple paths exist. If the active path is broken, the Spanning Tree protocol
enables one of the alternatives paths.
DTE DTE The ConneXium switches offer the possibility.

7
DTE DTE
10
9/17
Automation product certifications
EC regulations
Some countries require certain electrical components to undergo certification by law. This certification takes the form of a certificate of
conformity to the relevant standards and is issued by the official body in question. Where applicable, certified devices must be labelled
1 accordingly. Use of electrical equipment on board merchant vessels generally implies that it has gained prior approval (i.e. certification) by
certain shipping classification societies.
Abbreviation Certification body Country

CSA Canadian Standards Association Canada
C-Tick Australian Communication Authority Australia, New Zealand
GOST Scientific research institute for GOST standards Russia
2 UL Underwriters Laboratories USA
Abbreviation Classification authority Country

IACS International Association of Classification Societies International
ABS American Bureau of Shipping USA
BV Bureau Veritas France
DNV Det Norske Veritas Norway
3 GL Germanischer Lloyd Germany
LR Lloyds Register United Kingdom
RINA Registro Italiano Navale Italy
RMRS Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Russia
RRR Russian River Register Russia
CCS China Classification Society China
4
The tables below provide an overview of the situation as at 1st June 2010 in terms of which certifications (listed next to their respective bodies)
have been granted or are pending for our automation products.
Up-to-date information on which certifications have been obtained by products bearing the Schneider Electric brand can be viewed on our website:
5 Product certifications
Certifications
C-Tick
Certified Hazardous
locations (1) BG SIMTARS AS-Interface
Certification pending Class I, div 2
UL CSA ACA GOST INERIS TV Rheinland
6
USA Canada Australia Russia USA, Canada Europe Germany Australia Europe
Modicon OTB
Modicon STB FM Cat. 3 G (2) (5)
ConneXium (2)
Magelis PC/GTW (3) (2) UL (3) Cat. 3 D (2)(5)
(8)
7 Magelis XBT GT (2) (2) CSA/UL

(2)
Cat. 3 G-D/ 3D
(2)(5)
Magelis XBT GK (3) CSA/UL
Magelis XBT N/R/RT CSA/UL Cat. 3 G-D (5)
Magelis HMI STO/STU (2)(3) (2) UL (2)(3) (2)
Modicon M340 CSA IEC Ex ia I (2)
(6)
8 Modicon Momentum
Modicon Premium (2) CSA (2) (2) (2)
Modicon Quantum (2) FM (2)
Modicon Quantum Safety (2) CSA SIL 2, SIL 3 (7)
Preventa XPSMF SIL 3 (7)
Modicon TSX Micro (2) (2)
9 Phaseo
Twido
(3)
(4) (4) CSA/UL (4) (2)
(1) Hazardous locations: According to UL 1604, ANSI/ISA 12.12.01, CSA 22.2 No. 213 and FM 3611, certified products are only approved for use in hazardous
locations categorized as Class I, division 2, groups A, B, C and D, or in non-classified locations.
(2) Depends on product; please visit our website: www.schneider-electric.com.
(3) North American certification cULus (Canada and USA).
(4) Except for AS-Interface module TWD NOI 10M3, e only.
(5) For zones not covered by this specification, Schneider Electric offers a solution as part of the CAPP (Collaborative Automation Partner Program). Consult your
10 Customer Care Centre.

(6) Certified by Test Safe.
(7) According to IEC 61508. Certified by TV Rheinland for integration into a safety function of up to SIL 2 or SIL 3.
(8) Certified by FTZ.
9/18
Automation product certifications
EC regulations
Merchant navy certifications

Shipping classification societies
1
Korean
Register of
Certified Shipping
Certification pending
ABS BV DNV GL KRS LR RINA RMRS RRR PRS CCS
USA France Norway Germany Korea Great Britain Italy Russia Russia Poland China
Modicon OTB 2
Modicon STB (1) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
ConneXium
Magelis PC/GTW (2) Bridge (2)
Magelis XBT GT (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
Magelis XBT GK
Magelis XBT N/R
3
Magelis XBT RT
Magelis HMI STO/STU (2)
Modicon M340 (2) (2)
Modicon Momentum
Modicon Premium
Modicon Quantum
4
Modicon TSX Micro
Phaseo
Twido
(1) Also covers US Navy requirements ABS-NRV part 4.
5
(2) Depends on product; please consult our website: www.schneider-electric.com.
EC regulations
European Directives
The open nature of the European markets assumes harmonization of the regulations set by the member states of the European Union.
European Directives are texts whose aim is to remove restrictions on free circulation of goods and which must be applied within all European
Union states.
Member states are obliged to incorporate each Directive into their national legislation and to simultaneously withdraw any regulations that
contradict it.
6
Directives - and particularly those of a technical nature with which we are concerned - merely set out the objectives to be fulfilled (referred to as
essential requirements). Manufacturers must take all necessary measures to ensure that their products conform to the requirements of each
Directive applicable to their equipment.
As a general rule, manufacturers certify compliance with the essential requirements of the Directive(s) that apply to their products by applying a
e mark. The e mark is affixed to our products where applicable.
Significance of the e mark 7
The e mark on a product indicates the manufacturers certification that the product conforms to the relevant European Directives; this is a
prerequisite for placing a product which is subject to the requirements of one or more Directives on the market and allowing its free circulation
within European Union countries. The e mark is intended for use by those responsible for regulating national markets.
Where electrical equipment is concerned, conformity to standards indicates that the product is fit for use. Only a warranty from a well-known
manufacturer can provide assurance of a high level of quality.
As far as our products are concerned, one or more Directives are likely to apply in each case; in particular:
b The Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC) 8
b The Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2004/108/EC)
b The ATEX e Directive (94/9/EC)
Hazardous substances
These products are compatible with:
b The WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC)
b The RoHS Directive (2002/95/EC)
b The China RoHS Directive (Standard SJ/T 11363-2006)
9
b The REACH regulations Directive (EC 1907/2006)
Note: Documentation on sustainable development is available on our website www.schneider-electric.com (product environmental profiles and instructions for use,
ROHS and REACH directives).
End of life (WEEE)

End-of-life products containing electronic cards must be dealt with by specific treatment processes.
When products containing backup batteries are unusable or at end of life they must be collected and treated separately. Batteries do not
10
contain a percentage by weight of heavy metals above the threshold specified by European Directive 2006/66/EC.
9/19
Presentation A dedicated services offer for your
installed base
Operation services
You can rely on the competency and efficiency of our experts for effective
ce maintenance, upgrading and modernisation of your facilities.
an
1 t
Ma ont
en cts
in ra
in
g Our services offer is structured around two phases of your installation life cycle:
c ain
Tr b Operation:
n
io
v Spare parts and repairs

at
y
nc
r
pe
ta e v Maintenance contracts
O
s ul rtis
rts n pe v Training
pa s Co ex
a re pair n d b Modernisation:
a
Spd re
2 an
v Consultancy and expertise
n
v Project management
tio
t
ec t
sa
oj men
ni
r
er
P ge
od
a Customization services are also available to accommodate your specific

M
an requirements.
m
3 Operation services
Spare parts and repairs Everything you need to get your equipment back to work as quickly as possible
We are able to respond very quickly to all requests for spare parts, exchanges and
repairs to your installed automation equipment (automation platforms, Human
Machine Interfaces, drives, distributed I/O):
b Supply of tested, certified and compatible spare parts
b Assurance that repaired parts will be of the same quality as new products
4 b Availability of our teams to respond to your requests 24/7
b Standard replacements or fast exchange service for certain parts with the option
to receive the replacement product the next business day
Maintenance contracts Improving and guaranteeing the long-term reliability and performance of your
installations
5 We provide a contract solution to fulfil your logistical, technical, human and financial
requirements. This solution is based around the following services:
b Hotline with priority access to our group of experts
b Software via the Internet with access to the latest upgrades of the most recent
software
b Spare parts stock - a Schneider Electric owned stock of spare parts on your site
or in one of our warehouses
6 b On-site assistance with guaranteed servicing time (1)

b Extended warranty offering up to 5 years manufacturer warranty on all installed
equipment ranges on your site (1)
b Maintenance & Modernisation Consultancy providing analysis of existing
systems and proposal of a detailed improvement plan (1)
b Modernisation - a complete process to update your legacy systems based upon
your specific requirements (1)
7 (1) Also available as a stand alone offer. Please consult our Customer Care Centre.
Training Dedicated training plans to allow you to acquire the necessary competencies to
optimize productivity of your installed base
We are committed to providing your teams with the necessary competencies to
operate more effectively, make the operations more secure and optimize the
8 efficiency of your installed equipment:
b Identification of your needs by systematic analysis of the competency and
functions of your teams
b Proposal of a set of training modules covering your entire installed automation
equipment base
b Preparation of customized modules to suit your needs (content, schedule, etc.).
10
Note: To check availability of services required, please contact our Customer Care Centre.
9/20
Presentation (continued) A dedicated services offer for your
installed base
Modernisation services
Customization services
Modernisation services
Consultancy and expertise Proven expertise, tools and methods to give you a clear vision of the improvement
opportunities and guide you toward a successful modernisation project
Our experts will analyze your existing systems, propose an action plan and deploy
1
With our M2C (Maintenance & Modernisation
Consultancy) offer, we help you check the state of your the appropriate solutions.
installed base by:
b Defining the scope and depth of the analysis in b Process consultancy
collaboration with you Based on audit implementation dedicated to your application, our consultants will
b Collecting the technical data without shutting down help you assess opportunities, define various solutions, estimate budgets and draw
production
b Analyzing and identifying avenues for improvement up a deployment plan. 2
b Producing a recommendation plan
b Installed base consultancy
Customer benefits: For preventive maintenance operations or in case of failures or malfunctions, our
b Reduction in the impact of failures tools and methods can be used for diagnosis and control of critical automation
b Limited number of failures
b Improved performance functions, such as communication networks, high-power drives and process control
automation.
The M2C (Maintenance & Modernisation Consultancy) offer A detailed report with comments is submitted as part of our service. 3
Project management Professional tools, methods and a proven experience in project management to
reduce risks and improve performance.
Our services are provided by experienced project managers who have a precise
knowledge of the evolution of our equipment and use efficient tools and methods
4
with proven effectiveness to:
b Limit production down time by using our conversion and software/hardware
migration solutions
b Improve performance of existing tools by:
v Analyzing the performance levels to be achieved and designing, validating and
implementing the new architecture
v Updating your application following modernisation of your equipment
b Provide long-term support by ensuring:
v The design and deployment of a standardized solution for projects spanning 5
several production sites
v A contractual approach that provides a change from the usual investment
process, combining maintenance of existing facilities and scheduled modernisation
v Training of maintenance teams on the operation of the new system
Wide range of migration offers

Solution Change the Keep the I/O Change the Migrate your Manage your Execute your 6
CPU racks & I/O racks & application project project
wiring keep the
wiring
Platform (1) TSX47 to TSX107
April series 1000
Modicon p84, compact
April SMC
7
Merlin Gerin PB
AEG
Symax
Service available
(1) Our migration service offer also includes SCADA, Human Machine Interfaces, drives,
8
communication networks and distributed I/O.
Customization services
We are able to meet your specific requirements and provide you with adapted
products:
b Protective coating for Human Machine Interfaces, automation platforms and
distributed I/O modules for use in harsh environments
9
b Customized cable lengths to match your specific needs
b Customized front panels for Human Machine Interfaces
10
Note: To check availability of services required, please contact our Customer Care Centre.
9/21
Index Product reference index
043 509 383 5/116 ABE 7R08Sppp 8/14 O TCS ESU 051F0 5/69 TSX CAN CBDDp 5/90
110 XCA 282 0p 6/21 ABE 7R16M111 8/15 OZD FIP G3 5/109 TCS ESU 053FN0 5/70 TSX CAN CDp00 5/90
1 170 DTN 110 00

170 INT 110 00
5/119
5/123
ABE 7R16S111E
ABE 7R16Sppp
8/14
8/14 S
TCS ESU 083FN0
TCS WAAC
5/69
5/85
TSX CAN CD50
TSX CAN KCDF 180T
5/90
5/90
170 MCI ppp pp 5/117 ABE 7R16S210E 8/14 SF3 CPY0pp 4/51 TCS WAAC 13FB 1/11 TSX CAN KCDF 90T 5/90
5/123 ABE 7R16Tppp 8/15 SF3 PY320pp 4/51 TCS WAB pp 5/84 TSX CAN KCDF 90TP 5/90
170 PNT 110 20 5/116 ABE 7S16E2pp 8/14 SM1 PY52 4/51 5/85 TSX CAN TDM4 5/90
170 XTS 0pp 00 5/116 ABE 7S16E2B1E 8/14 SR2 CBL 06 6/21 TCS WAB ppp 5/84 TSX CANCA100 4/13
2 5/123 ABE 7S16E2M0E 8/14 SR2 MEM02 8/33 5/85 TSX CANCA300 4/13
467 NHP 811 00 5/119 ABE 7S16Sppp 8/14 SSVXPSMCWINUP 4/12 TCS WABAC15 5/85 TSX CANCA50 4/13
490 NAA 271 pp 5/117 STB NDP 2112 5/119 TCS WABAC2 5/85 TSX CANCADD03
ABE 7S16SpppE 8/14 4/13
490 NAD 911 pp 5/119 STB NIB 2212 5/123 TCS WABMK 5/85
ABE 7TES160 3/11 TSX CANCADDp 4/13
490 NOC 000 05 5/67 STB NMP 2212 5/116 TCS WABP 5/85
8/20 TSX CAP ppp 3/17
490 NOR 000 pp 5/67 STB XCA 4002 6/21 TCS WABP68 5/85
ABF C08Rppp 8/21 4/18
490 NOT 000 05 5/67 SYC SPU LFp CD2pp 5/88 TCS WAMC67 5/85
3 ABF M04Sppp 8/19 TSX CAP S9 4/38
490 NTC 000 pp 4/61 5/119 TCS WAMCD 5/85
ABF M16S201 8/19 TSX CAY pp 4/38
490 NTC 000 ppU 5/66 TCSG WA 242 5/84 9/7
ABF M32Hppp 8/19
490 NTW 000 pp 4/61 T TCSG WA 242F 5/84
ABF Y25Sppp 3/17 TSX CAY ppC 9/5
4/13 T FTX 117 ADJ 02 9/7 TCSG WA 272 5/84
ABL 1A02 8/33 TSX CBRY 2500 2/13
490 NTW 000 ppU 4/13 T FTX CB1 0pp 5/134 TCSG WAB DH 5/84
ABL 4RSM24ppp 8/33 TSX CBRY 2500F 2/13
5/66 TCS AAR011M 5/97 TCSG WC 241 5/84
ABL 4WSR24ppp TSX CBRY K5 2/13
4
8/33
499 NEH 104 10 5/68 TCS ATN01pp 5/97 TCSN WA 2pp 5/84
ABL 7RM24025 8/27 TSX CBY pppp 2/10
499 NES 181 00 5/69 TCS ATN011Fp 5/97 TCSN WA 2ppp 5/84
ABL 7RP1205 8/29 TSX CBY 1000KT 2/10
499 NMS 251 pp 5/70 TCS ATN02V 5/97 TLA CD CBA 0pp 5/90
ABL 7RP4803 8/29 TSX CBY pppKT 2/10
499 NSS 251 pp 5/70 TCS ATV011Fp 5/97 TLX CD DRV20M 6/43
ABL 8BBU24ppp 8/33 TSX CBY ACC 10 2/11
990 MCO 000 pp 4/45 TCS ATV01N2 5/97 TLX CD LTOFS 33 6/67
ABL 8BPK24ppp 8/33 TSX CBY K9 2/11
990 MCO 001 25 4/45 TCS CAR01pM120 5/91 TLX CD LUOFS 33 6/67
ABL 8BUF24400 8/33 TSX CCP S15 4/19
5 990 NAA 263 pp 5/123

6/21
ABL 8DCC0pppp 8/33
TCS CCN 2M2Fpp
TCS CCN 2M2Fp
5/90
5/90
TLX CD PL7p P45
TLX CD PL7M PC45
6/42
6/42 TSX CCP S15 ppp
4/27
4/19
ABL 8FUS0p 8/33
990 NAD 211 pp 5/117 TCS CCN 4F3M05T 5/90 TLX CD SUOFS 33 6/67 TSX CCY 1128 4/26
ABL 8MEMppppp 8/27
990 NAD 230 pp 5/116 TCS CCN 4F3MpT 5/90 TLX CD TCP50M 5/47 TSX CCY 1128C 9/5
ABL 8PRP24100 8/33
TCS CTN011M11F 5/91 TLX CD3 PL7p P45 6/42 TSX CD DRV 20M 5/130
ABL 8RED24400 8/33
A TCS EAA F11F13F00 5/67 TLX L CD PL7 DIF 42 6/44 TSX CDP ppp 3/11
ABE 7ACCpp ABL 8REM240pp 8/29
6
4/61 TCS EAA F1LFppp 5/67 TLX L SDKC PL7 41M 5/47 TSX CDP 100p 3/11
8/17 ABL 8RPS24100 4/13
TCS EAM 0ppp 5/67 6/44 TSX CFY pp 4/32
8/20 ABR 7Spp 8/17
TCS ECE 3M3M10S4 5/66 TLX LIBS CNVF 5/123 TSX CFY ppp 9/5
ABE 7BVpp 4/18 ABR 7S33E 8/17
TCS ECE 3M3MpS4 5/66 TLX OS PL7P P45M 6/43 TSX CPP ppp 4/7
4/32 ABS 7EA3pp 8/17
TCS ECL 1M1M ppS2 5/67 TLX OT PL7p P45M 6/43 5/88
8/20 ABS 7EC3pp 8/17
TCS ECL 1M1M pS2 5/67 TLX RCD PL7p P45M 6/42 TSX CPP 110C 9/5
ABE 7CPApp 3/17 ABS 7SA2M 8/17
TCS ECL 1M3M ppS2 5/67 TLX RCDp PL7p P45M 6/42 TSX CRJMD 25
7
5/134
4/7 ABS 7SA3MA 8/17
TCS ECL 1M3M pS2 5/67 TLX UCD PL7p P45M 6/42 5/135
4/18 ABS 7SCpp 8/17
TCS ECU 3M3MppS4 5/66 TSC CANTDM4 4/13 6/43
4/22 ABS 7SC3BA 8/17
TCS ECU 3M3MpS4 5/66 TSX AAK2 3/17 TSX CSA ppp 5/127
4/38 AM0 2CA 001V000 5/91
TCS EGPA23F14F 5/121 TSX ACC VA625 2/11 TSX CSY 164 4/45
8/18 AR1 SB3 8/20
TCS EGPA23F14FK 5/121 TSX AEY 16pp 3/16 9/7
ABE 7CPA31E 8/18 AS MBKT 185 5/116
TCS EK1 MDRS 5/66 TSX AEY 16ppp 9/4 TSX CSY pp 4/45
ABE 7CPA4pp
8
8/18 ASI 67FACC2 5/97 9/7
ABE 7FUppp 8/20 TCS EK3 MDS 5/66 TSX AEY ppp 3/16
ASI ABLB300p 8/37 TSX CTC pp 5/135
ABE 7H08Rpp 8/13 TCS ESB 083F2CU0 5/72 TSX AEY pppC 9/4
ASI ABLD300p 8/37 TSX CTY pp 4/18
ABE 7H12Rpp 8/13 TCS ESB 093F2CU0 5/72 TSX ASY ppp 3/16
ASI ABLM3024 8/37 4/22
ABE 7H12S21 8/13 TCS ESM 043Fppp0 5/71 9/7
ASI RPT01 5/97 TSX CTY ppp 9/5
ABE 7H16Cpp 8/12 TCS ESM 063F2pp1 5/72 TSX ASY pppC 9/4
ASI20 MACC5 8/33 TSX CUSB 485 4/13
ABE 7H16CMpp 8/12 TCS ESM 063F2pp1C 9/5 TSX BAT M0p 1/13
9
5/134
ABE 7H16F43 8/13 TCS ESM 083F1Cpp 5/72 1/21
B 5/135
ABE 7H16Rpp 4/18 TCS ESM 083F23Fp 5/71 TSX BLY 01 3/11
BMX XCA USB H018 6/21 6/43
4/32 5/72 TSX C USBFIP 5/112
TSX CXP p13 4/39
8/13 TCS ESM 083F23F1C 9/5 TSX CAN CAppp 5/90
C TSX DEY pppp 3/9
ABE 7H16Spp 8/13 CS ECN 300R2 TCS ESM 083F2Cpp 5/72 TSX CAN CA50 5/90
5/66 TSX DEY ppppC 9/4
ABE 7H20Eppp 8/12 TCS ESM 103F2pG0 5/73 TSX CAN CADD03 5/90
TSX DEY ppppK 3/9
10 ABE 7H32Eppp
ABE 7H34Eppp
8/12
8/12
F
FTX CN 12pp 5/90
TCS ESM 163F2pp0
TCS ESM 243F2CU0
5/73
5/73
TSX CAN CADDppp
TSX CAN CADDp
5/90
5/90
TSX DEY ppppKC
TSX DMY 28FK
9/4
3/10
ABE 7P08T330 8/16 TCS ESU 033FN0 5/70 TSX CAN CBp00 5/90 TSX DMY 28ppp 3/10
ABE 7P16F31p 8/15 L TCS ESU 043FpCS0 5/71 TSX CAN CB50 5/90 9/4
ABE 7P16Tppp 8/16 LAD 90 8/27 TCS ESU 043F1N0 5/70 TSX CAN CBDD03 5/90 9/6
9/22
Index Product reference index
TSX DMY 28RFKC 9/4 TSX P57 pppMC 9/3 TSX SCY pp601 4/60 VJH NS 2043 pp 6/61
TSX DSY 08ppp 3/10 TSX P57 1634M 1/10 5/133 VJH NS 2110 pp 6/60
TSX DSY 08pppC

9/4
9/4 TSX P57 1634MC
9/6
9/3
TSX SCY pp601C
TSX SCY CM pp30
9/5
5/127
VJH NS 212p 00
VW3 A8 306 R30
6/61
4/13
1
TSX DSY 08pp 3/10 TSX P57 26ppM 1/10 TSX SCY CU pp30 5/131 VW3 CAN A71 5/91
9/6 1/19 TSX TAP MAS 4/38 VW3 CAN CARR03 5/91
TSX DSY 16pp 3/10 9/6 TSX TAP S15 pp 4/18 VW3 CAN CARR1 5/91
9/16 TSX P57 26ppMC 9/3 TSX TLY EX 2/11 VW3 CAN KCDF 180T 5/91
TSX DSY 16ppC TSX P57 28ppM
2
9/4 9/6 TSX TVSY 100 2/11 VW3 CAN TAP2 5/90
TSX DSY ppT2K 3/10 TSX P57 28ppMC 9/3 TSX WMY 100 5/47
VW3 M38 05 R010 5/90
TSX DSY ppT2KC 9/4 TSX P57 pppAM 9/6 TSX WMY 100C 9/5
VW3 M8 223 R30 4/33
TSX EF ACC99 5/112 1/19 TSX XBT N410 4/51
TSX ETC 101 5/49 TSX P57 pppAMC 9/3 TSX PAY 262 4/7 X
TSX ETY 110 WS 5/47 TSX P57 ppppAM 1/19 TSX SCP Cp pp30 5/133 XBT Z968 5/135
5/46 TSY DSY 08T22 9/6 XBT Z9681
3
9/7 5/135
TSX ETY 110WSC 9/6 TWD XCA ISO 5/126
9/5 XBT ZG909 5/135
TSX P57 ppppAMC 9/3 TWD XCA RJ0pp 5/127
TSX ETY 210 4/66 XPS MC16Z 4/12
TSX P57 ppp4M 1/10
TSX ETY p103 4/60 XPS MC16ZC 4/12
TSX P57 ppp4MC 9/3 U
TSX ETY p103C 9/5 XPS MC16ZP 4/12
TSX P57 pp4M 1/10 UAG SBT CFU CD10 6/29
TSX FAN ppp 2/5 XPS MC32Z 4/12
TSX P57 pp4MC 9/3 UAG SBT DFU WB13 6/29
TSX FP ACCpp 5/103 XPS MC32ZC 4/12
TSX FP ACCp
5/112
5/103
TSX PAY 262
TSX PBS CA ppp
9/7
4/13
UAG SEW LFp CD33
UNY Lpp ZAU WBpp
6/31
6/29
XPS MC32ZP
XPS MCCPC
4/12
4/13
4
5/119 UNY LPC ZAU CD10 6/29
5/112 XPS MCSCY 4/13
5/121 UNY SDU ZFF CD22 6/25
TSX FP Cpppp 5/105 XPS MCTC16 4/12
TSX PBY 100 5/119 UNY SDU ZFU CD22 6/25
5/107 XPS MCTC32 4/12
5/113 TSX PCX 1031 1/11 UNY SPU Epp CD 60 6/20
XPS MCTS16 4/12
4/13
5
TSX FPP pp 9/7 UNY SPU EZpp CD 60 6/20
XPS MCTS32 4/12
5/131 UNY SPU Mpp CD 60 6/19
5/105 XPS MCWIN 4/12
5/135
5/107 UNY SPU MZpp CD 60 6/19
5/134 XZ CB1pppp 5/93
TSX FPP OZD200 5/109 6/43 UNY SPU Spp CD 60 6/18 5/97
TSX H57 ppM 1/10 6/21 UNY SPU SZpp CD 60 6/18 XZ CB1ppppH 5/97
TSX H57 ppMC 9/3 TSX PCX 1130 5/135 UNY SPU ZFU CD ppE 5/47 XZC C12 ppM 50B 5/91
TSX IBS CA p00 5/123 TSX PLP 01 2/4 6/23
XZC P1164L2
6
5/67
TSX IBY 100 5/123 TSX PLP 101 2/4 UNY UDE VFU CD21E 6/20
XZC P1164L5 5/67
TSX IBY 100C 9/5 TSX PSY ppppM 2/4 UNY USE 909 CD M 6/20
XZC P1264L2 5/67
TSX ISP Y1pp 4/51 9/7 UNY XCA USB 033 1/11
XZC P1264L5 5/67
TSX ISP Y101C 9/5 TSX PSY ppppMC 9/4 6/21
TSX MBP 100 5/116 TSX REY 200 2/13
9/7 TSX RKA 02 2/11 V
TSX MBP 100C
TSX MBP CE 0pp
9/5
5/117
TSX RKY 12
TSX RKY 12C
2/7
9/3
VJC 1041 88
VJC 1042 88
6/54
6/54 7
TSX MCP Cpppp 1/13 VJC 1090 pp 6/56
TSX RKY 12EX 2/10
1/20 VJC 1092 06 6/55
TSX RKY 12EXC 9/3
1/21 VJC 1093 6/57
TSX RKY pEX 2/10
TSX MFP 0128P2 1/20 VJC 10pp pp 6/50
TSX RKY pEXC 9/3
1/21 6/55
TSX MFP pppP 1/20
1/21
TSX RKY p
TSX RKY pC
2/7
9/3
6/56
6/61
8
TSX MFP ppppp 1/13 TSX SAY 1000 5/93 VJC 3093 pp 6/57
1/20 TSX SAY 1000C 9/5 VJC NS 1011 pp 6/51
1/21 TSX SCA pp 5/126 VJC NS 1020 pp 6/52
TSX MRP ppppp 1/20 5/130 6/54
9
TSX MRP pppP 1/20 TSX SCP 11p 4/60 VJC NS 1022 pp 6/53
1/21 5/125 6/54
TSX MRP C00pMC 9/3 5/133 VJC NS 1030 pp 6/52
TSX MRP DS 2048P 1/21 TSX SCP 11pC 9/5 6/54
TSX P ACC 01 5/126 TSX SCP CC 1030 5/127 VJC NS 1032 pp 6/53
5/133 TSX SCP CD pppp 5/127 6/54
TSX P CAPL 1/13 TSX SCP CM pppp 5/127 VJC NS 3011 pp 6/50
TSX P CAPUP
TSX P ACC 01
1/13
5/130
TSX SCP CU pppp
TSX SCP CX pppp
5/131
5/127
VJC NS 3051 pp
VJC NS Lpp-Fpp
6/55
6/51
10
TSX P57 pppM 1/10 5/133 VJC NS Lpp-Lpp 6/51
1/19 5/134 VJH 2095 03 6/60
9/6 TSX SCP 112 5/125 VJH 2099 pp 6/60
9/23
Schneider Electric Industries SAS www.schneider-electric.com
Head Office The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical
35, rue Joseph Monier characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein. This documentation is not
F-92500 Rueil-Malmaison intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these
France products for specific user applications. It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the
MKTED212031EN
appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the
relevant specific application or use thereof. Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or
subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein.
Design: Schneider Electric

Photos: Schneider Electric
Printed by:
ART. 960698 May 2012

Modicon Premium automation platform
2012

Premium Catalogue en - Ed 2012-05 (Web)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Premium Catalogue en - Ed 2012-05 (Web)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Premium Catalogue en - Ed 2012-05 (Web)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Modicon Premium

* type the model

Example : Zelio Time

Discover this product

Example : Zelio Time

Example : Zelio Time

You can get this information in one single pdf file.

1 - Modicon Premium processors

2 - Power supplies and racks 1

4 - Application-specific modules and solutions

9 - Appendices and services

Premium processors - Unity

Premium platforms for Unity Pro software offer TSX 57 1p processors

CANopen machine bus 1 PCMCIA module (3)

6 Network connections Max. no. of networks

7 Hot Standby availability

With PCMCIA extension 224 Kb program

8 USB programming port

4 in rack modules 8 in rack modules 8 in rack modules 5

1 in-rack module 3 in rack modules 4 in rack modules 5 in rack modules

The processors offered have different memory capacities, processing speeds,

5 Depending on the model, Premium processors include:

6 Each processor has two PCMCIA card slots:

7 into this slot.

Treatment for harsh environments

Description: Memory structure: References: PCMCIA references:

8 Processors without integrated Ethernet Modbus/TCP port

2 A RESET button causing a cold start of the PLC when pressed.

TSX P57 204M/304M TSX P57 254M/354M

8 An air recirculating heatsink (on TSX P57 1p4M models)

Presentation: Memory structure: References: PCMCIA references:

Processors with integrated Ethernet Modbus/TCP port

1 A display block with 5 LEDs:

2 A display block relating to the integrated Ethernet port featuring 5 LEDs:

3 A RESET button causing a cold start of the PLC when pressed.

Presentation: Memory structure: References: PCMCIA references:

TSX P57 454M/554M/p634M and TSX H57 p4M high-

Presentation: Memory structure: References: PCMCIA references:

5 Additional data storage 4

Unlocated data 1 Symbols areas

Additional data storage

Presentation: Description: References: PCMCIA references:

Memory structure (continued)

Program modification in online mode 4

(1) As from TSX P57 20 processors.

Presentation: Description: References: PCMCIA references:

TSX 57 1p 4 racks (2)

2 TSX P57 154M

1 Ethernet network Fipio TSX P57 154M 0.592

TSX 57 2p 16 racks (2)

192 Kb 10 2 Ethernet networks Ethernet TSX H57 24M 1.021

TSX 57 3p 16 racks (2)

1 CANopen bus (3)

TSX 57 5p 16 racks (2)

8 2040 discrete I/O

channels 5 fieldbuses (3)

9 TSX 57 6p 16 racks (2)

Presentation: Description: Memory structure: PCMCIA references:

PCMCIA memory extension cards